TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: TITLE

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: TITLE

TENDER FOR ROAD AND STORM WATER DRAIN WORKS

SHEET i OF i

FILE NAME: TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-REV-R0

Proprietary rights of the information contained herein belong to Tata Consulting Engineers Limited (TCE). This information is intended to be used for the mentioned purpose/project only. In case of misuse of information

and any claim arising thereof, cost and consequence will be on the party misusing the information.

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

FILE NAME: F-329-Rev-R6.docx

ISSUE R0

SPECIFICATION NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005

FOR

(TENDER FOR ROAD AND STORM WATER DRAIN WORKS)

OWNER : ASSAM PETROCHEMICALS LIMITED

PROJECT : 500TPD METHANOL AND 200TPD FORMALIN PLANT

LOCATION : NAMRUP, ASSAM

CONSULTANT : TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED

VOLUME I

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECT:CONTENTS


SHEET i OF ii

.

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

CONTENTS

SECTION SPECIFICATION NO. ISSUE

NO. TITLE

VOLUME I

A TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-01 R0 Scope of Enquiry

B TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-02 R0 Project Information - General

E TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03 R0 Instruction to Bidders

E TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04 R0 General Conditions of Contract

E TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05 R0 Special Conditions of Contract

E TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-06 R0 Information about Bidders

E TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-07 R0 Proforma Documents/ Sample Forms

E TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-08 R0 Certificate as per company act

E TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-09 R0 Integrity Pac

E TCE.M4-917 R2 Safety Conditions for undertaking Site Work

E TCE.M4-918 R1 Contractor’s Health and Safety Programme

F TCE.M4-991 R7 Schedule of Deviations from Technical Specifications

F TCE.M4-992 R1

Schedule of Deviations from General Conditions

F TCE.M4-994 R4

Schedule of Equipment and Erection Machinery

F TCE.M4-995 R4 Schedule of Rates for Labour

F TCE.M4-998 R5 Bidder’s Experience

F TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-10

R0 Schedule of Pre-Filled Agreed terms and Conditions

F TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-11

R0 Schedule of Present & Concurrent Commitment

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECT:CONTENTS


SHEET ii OF ii

.

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

SECTION DRAWING NO. ISSUE NO.

TITLE

VOLUME II

D TCE.M4-418-01 R5 Earthwork in Grading, Excavation & Backfilling

D TCE.M4-418-03 R2 Dewatering

D TCE.M4-403-01 R9 Reinforced Concrete and Allied Works

D TCE.M4-419-01 R3 General Building Works

D D6-M4-422-02 R1 Specifications for concrete roads

D TCE.M4-422-01 R4 Specification For Plant Roads

D TCE.M4-435-09 R0 Reinforced Cement Concrete Pipes

VOLUME III

G TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-12 R0 Bid Drawings & Documents

G ANNEXTURE I Geotechnical Investigation Report

G ANNEXTURE II Survey drawing

SPEC. NO. TCE. 6842A -CV-3000-3005



SHEET 1 OF 1

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

SECTION A

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: A

SCOPE OF ENQUIRY SHEET 1 OF 14

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

1 SCOPE OF WORK OVERALL

1.0 The scope of this enquiry covers design, supply of material and construction

of all civil works required for execution of Road and storm water drains works

for the 500 TPD Methanol and 200 TPD Formalin plant at Namrup, Assam.

1.1 The Contractor’s scope of work shall cover designing, detailing and

construction of roads and storm water drains including supply of material

including loading/unloading and storage, preparing detailed design drawings

based on concept note of road and drain works and obtaining approval of

ENGINEER/OWNER on the same before starting the Construction activity at

site, preparing all construction drawings, including construction of roads,

drains and pavements, ground improvement if necessary as per geotechnical

test results, excavation and backfilling/ filling, disposal of excess material

outside the plot at locations approved by Engineer-in-charge or local

authority, any permissions/certification/permits required for obtaining any type

of approval from local authorities shall be arranged by bidder on his own cost,

dewatering, providing sub-base, sub-grade, rubble soling, providing all

designed layers for bituminous plant roads, reinforced concrete and allied

works, brickwork for puling pits, catch pits, RCC trenches,

dismantling/demolishing of existing structures etc. all as per the technical

specification & bid purpose drawings attached in Volume III of this tender,

furnishing of all materials, storage of materials, equipments, labour, transport,

tools, tackles, including taxes and royalties, Construction Management &

Supervision and all other services necessary for the complete execution of

works, including inspection and testing, quality checks and safe execution of

works, including required geotechnical investigations, surveying and setting

out necessary for the road and drain works and clean up of working areas

after completion of the Works, without disturbing the existing foundations and

underground services, including demolishing of old existing underground

structures, if any, etc. as directed by OWNER/ENGINEER. The scope shall

also cover providing and maintaining temporary access roads/supporting

structure for movement of the equipment/ vehicles and temporary drainage, if

required.

1.2 Contractor shall design, supply and construct the plant roads for the extents

and widths as indicated in the bid purpose drawings, considering the design

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

requirements mentioned in concept note and specifications attached in the

tender. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements specified in the

latest versions of MORTH specifications and IRC codes and relevant clauses

of national building codes.

1.3 The bid purpose road and drain layout drawing attached with this tender is to

show the extents of the road works which shall be executed under phase-1 &

phase-2. Contractor shall design the road cross section based on the CBR

values tested at various locations along the length of road, soil conditions and

design requirements in line with the relevant codes and standards to cater the

traffic loading conditions as mentioned in concept note attached with this

tender. Contractor shall design the drain cross section based on the quantity

of discharge to cater the area surrounded by drain, invert level/depth of drain,

surcharge load in that area, soil and ground water conditions, vehicle

movement envisaged etc. as mentioned in the concept note attached with this

tender. Contractor shall quote considering all site constraints, tender

requirements and anticipating all possible conditions at site.

1.4 Contractor shall execute the road works in phases as mentioned below:

I. Phase-1 work shall be executed after issue of LOA and shall be

completed within two months. (For details of phase-1 work scope refer

clause no. 2)

II. Phase-2 work shall be commenced one to one and half year after

receipt of LOA or after mechanical completion of methanol plant which

is under construction at proposed site, whichever is earlier. Contractor

shall obtain the schedule from the OWNER/Engineer for the

mechanical completion of the proposed plant and shall plan the

phase-2 activities accordingly. (For details of phase-2 work scope

refer clause no. 3).

Completion period of phase-2 work shall be three months after

commencement of phase-2 work as mentioned above.

1.5 The CONTRACTOR shall design all plant roads to ensure that there is no

settlement or cracking of the roads, If in case the road surface is observed

with cracks or pot holes, the same shall be rectified replacing the area making

it good for use, CONTRACTOR shall provide the remedial and corrective

measures to avoid the same in future at his own cost.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

1.6 Contractor shall keep record of all the material quality checks, all site tests

conducted before, during and after construction and submit the same to

ENGINEER or OWNER. Demolishing and reconstruction of any work required

as a result of any missing road crossings or underground work, poor quality of

workmanship, defects in material or construction or structural/functional

failure to achieve required quality standards of the work shall be considered in

Contractor’s scope. The contractor shall make good, rectify or replace the

element/ road/drain/shoulder etc but not limited to above items, without

prejudice or any claim on Owner/ Consultant.

1.7 Contractor shall provide all detailed drawings, Specifications and Procedures

required to perform all civil works related to road and drains along with the bill

of quantities.

1.8 It is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to ensure the adherence to the

technical specifications and adherence to the schedule, so as to avoid any

delay in the activities of other contractor working at the same site.

1.9 Within 10 days of receipt of Letter of Intent (LOI) the Contractor shall submit a

detailed methodology for carrying out all works as per the scope of the tender.

These submittals shall be consistent with the general information submitted

by the Contractor with his Tender, and agreed to by the Engineer-in-Charge

and the Contractor. The priority for execution of the road and drain works

shall be finalised and decided during the kick-off meeting.

1.10 Engineering data, design calculations and drawings shall be submitted by the

contractor during the progress of the work, such drawings shall be in AutoCad

2014 format only. All the supporting documents, design calculations for road

and storm water drain along with the drawings shall be provided by

CONTRACTOR for review to the ENGINEER / Owner. The CONTRACTOR

shall proceed with the construction activity at the site only after getting

approval on drawings and design documents from the ENGINEER/OWNER.

1.11 Any approval from ENGINEER or OWNER will not relieve the contractor of

his contractual obligations and his responsibilities for correctness of structural

design, dimensions, materials of construction, weight, quantities, design

details, installation of underground road crossings as per correct levels and

locations, performance requirements and conformity of the supplies with the

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

Indian Statutory Laws as may be applicable, nor does it limit the purchaser’s

rights under the contract.

1.12 The Contractor shall work out lumpsum cost based on the scope document in

conjunction with the corresponding sections in the technical Specifications

and bid drawings for extent of work, General Directions & Conditions of

Contract, Special Conditions of Contract and all the other sections of this

tender document, etc. The Contractor shall study all the documents &

drawings and acquaint himself with the requirements of tender documents

and work to be executed.

1.13 It will be imperative on BIDDERS to acquaint themselves with the work to be

carried out, of all prevailing local conditions/ site conditions, site surrounding

conditions and sequence in which work is to be carried out within quoted

Price and within the “Time schedule”. Bidder shall anticipate all factors which

may affect the execution of WORK covered under the BID DOCUMENT. In

their own interest, the BIDDERS are requested to familiarize themselves with

the latest Indian Income Tax Act, Indian Companies Act, Indian Customs Act

and other related Acts and laws and regulations of India with their latest

amendments and any statutory requirements as applicable. OWNER shall not

entertain any request for clarifications from the BIDDERS regarding such

local conditions. It shall be understood and agreed that such factors have

properly been investigated and considered while submitting the BID. No claim

for financial or any other adjustment to CONTRACT price and time schedule

of completion because of lack of clarity of such factors shall be entertained.

13.1 Prior approval from OWNER shall be taken before site visit or conducting any

field test before bidding. Any clarification for understanding the scope shall

be sought before submitting the bid.

1.14 All statutory clearances and drawings which pertains for execution of the

project shall be obtained by the EPC CONTRACTOR at their cost in the name

of the OWNER with due approval from the OWNER.

1.15 The Contractor shall provide three sets of hard copies along with one

electronic copy of all the good for construction drawings/documents. Along-

with, the Contractor shall provide native electronic copy of all drawings/

documents.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

1.16 The Contractor shall be responsible submitting the documents well in time

and obtaining approval from Engineer. Delay on account of approval shall not

be entertained and neither it shall be considered for time extension nor for

non-compliance to project schedule.

1.17 It is mandatory for Contractor to follow the document management system

WRENCH (DMS), implemented in the project. The documents/ drawings shall

only be accepted through WRENCH. All the vendor documents/ drawings and

other documents from contractor shall be routed in WRENCH to ensure the

better control and coordination.

1.18 The Contractor scope shall include preparation and submission of all as built

drawings, after completion of project. The Contractor shall provide three hard

copies and one electronic copy of all latest as built drawings and documents

along with all latest native files.

2 SCOPE OF WORK UNDER PHASE-1:

2.1 Phase-1 scope of work shall include design, supply, setting out and

construction of roads as described in clause 1 of this scope as mentioned in

bid purpose plot plan attached with this tender document.

2.2 Phase-1scope of work shall include design the storm water drain network

system to collect the storm water from the proposed plot area and direct the

flow towards existing outfall point through peripheral drains as indicated in bid

purpose drawings or through separate network to connect to outfall points as

marked in the drawing. The storm water drain network/route shown in the bid

purpose drawing is suggestive and the same can be updated during detail

engineering for further optimisation of storm water drain depths.

2.3 Phase-1 scope of work shall include design of storm water drains, box/pipe

culverts, trenches with covers etc. designed as per the concept note attached

with this tender document, preparation of approval purpose drawings, obtaining

approval from the ENGINEER and issuing the good for construction drawings

etc. complete for the drains which shall be executed in phase-2 scope.

2.4 It shall be CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to prepare drain network based on

available space on site without affecting the existing foundations and

underground facilities. For this CONTRACTOR shall visit the site, wherever

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

necessary survey shall be conducted for locating existing drain network and

invert levels, outfall location etc. to prepare the proposed drain network

2.5 The CONTRACTOR shall design the storm water drain network ensuring that

no flooding will occur during monsoon periods. If the network fails and the plant

gets flooded, CONTRACTOR shall provide the remedial and corrective

measures to rectify the same to avoid such condition in future at his own cost.

2.6 Contractor shall design and plan the storm water drain network to avoid

interferences with the existing UG facilities, foundation activity/work.

2.7 Contractor scope shall cover connecting internal drains with peripheral or any

other existing drains, after studying the site layout and capacity of the existing

drain and then deciding the suitable method to transfer the internal/ plant drain

discharge in to the external/ existing peripheral drains by maintaining the invert

levels as of existing/peripheral drains to avoid back flow or flooding of plant

area. Contractor scope shall also provide box or pipe culverts to connect

internal or plant drains to peripheral and to ensure proper drainage of the area

as tentatively shown in bid purpose layout. Contractor’s scope shall include

studying the site layout and capacity of the existing drain and then deciding the

suitable method to transfer the internal/ plant drain discharge in to the external/

existing peripheral drains if the gravity flow is not possible due to restrictions in

the existing levels. (Preferably contractor shall provide gravity network)

2.8 Contractor’s scope shall also study and provide pumping station and related

infrastructure for pumping out storm water drain water to outfall point if required

as per the site conditions. Contractor’s scope shall include the cost effective

solution for operation and maintenance of the drains.

2.9 Contractor shall prepare scheme for storm water drain philosophy based on the

concept note and bid purpose drawing. Contractor shall obtain approval from

ENGINEER before start of detail engineering and subsequently construction

activity. Contractor’s scope shall also include surveying if required to get the

existing data from site and to establish smooth connecting in overall drain

network.

2.10 Design and Construction of the roads up to WBM for the roads demarcated to

have movement of ODC trailer and 300Mt /100Mt crane movement shall be in

Contractor’s scope of works under phase-1. Contractor shall obtain approval

on axle load data for 300Mt and 100Mt crane prior to the start of the detail

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

engineering and shall consider multiple axel wheel loading for the road design

for crane movement area demarcated in plot plan. If as per plot plan the road is

utilised by crane and ODC both in that case the governing wheel load shall be

considered for the design of road.

2.11 Contractor shall design phase-1 roads, of width and size as mentioned in the

bid purpose drawings and as per the concept note to cater all expected loading

without damage and undulations in the road. The road subsequent layers upto

and including the layer of water bound macadam including making it finished to

facilitate smooth vehicle movement, scope will also cover the repair and

modification of the road during construction work if damaged due to heavy

vehicle movement to which it is to be designed.

2.12 Contractor’s scope shall include providing temporary drains to facilitate

drainage of water from the area to avoid damage to proposed roads.

2.13 Contractor shall provide necessary filter layers to take care of ground water

table and to avoid possible damage to the bottom layers of the roads.

2.14 Contractor’s scope for peripheral road, Main approach road and internal roads

which are existing roads and already constructed upto WBM as demarcated in

the bid purpose drawing, shall include conducting the CBR test at various

locations of the existing peripheral road as per specifications and removing soft

pockets and damaged areas of the existing WBM road, refurbishment of road

including checking strengthening requirement of existing sub-base for

proposed vehicular traffic movement as indicated in the concept note/bid

purpose drawings.

2.15 The Contractor scope shall include supplying hume pipes, excavation,

backfilling, preparing bedding for receiving the hume pipes, laying in correct

slope, level, coordinates & alignment, keeping projection beyond road and

drain extents as mentioned in the drawing, or wherever required constructing

RCC box culverts/RCC trenches with precast covers designed for vehicular

movement, for all underground road crossing for facilities such as

Electrical/I&C cable crossings, Sanitary drain pipe crossing, Oily

water/effluent/process drain pipe crossings, fire water piping, natural gas pipe

line storm water drain road crossings pipe/rcc box culverts etc. all as per the

approved final IFC drawings. Coordinating with other contractors for interface

shall be in Contractor’s scope. Contractor shall also provide pulling pits, sumps

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

for electrical and I&C cable crossings etc., laid to correct levels and sizes

during phase-1 work. Contractor shall obtain the approval on the drawing

showing roads marked with the hume pipe details, numbers of pipes, locations,

levels, sizes etc. requirement of the hume pipes is mentioned in underground

facility drawings, fire water layout drawings, ERC/IRC detail drawings attached

with this tender document, before completing the road construction activity

during phase-1 work.

2.16 Contractor shall obtain the latest revisions of the underground facility drawings

(which are listed in the bid purpose drawings) from OWNER/ENGINEER and

shall ensure that the underground road crossings are installed as per the latest

revisions of the drawings.

2.17 Contractor’s scope shall also cover designing and providing concrete

road/pavement upto bottom of DLC (Dry lean concrete) layer of rigid pavement,

including excavation, dewatering, ground improvement or ground stabilisation

as per geotechnical requirements and soil design parameters, constructing all

required base layers like sub-grade, granular sub-base of designed thickness

etc all complete in loading gantry area, weight bridge area and tanker waiting

and tanker queuing area as demarcated in bid purpose plot plan. Any existing

effluent drain stream or proposed storm water drain coming in this area shall

be designed and routed through RCC drains and covered with concrete

precast slabs or RCC box culvert both designed to withstand the vehicular

movement load without damage as per the concept note attached with this

tender document. The trenches, pits, drains provided in the tanker movement

area shall be flush with the FRL/Finished paving level in that area and no

projections shall be provided above ground. Contractor shall provide the gentle

slope in the pavement in loading area to facilitate proper drainage of this area

and to avoid the water logging, The contractor shall design, construct and

provide suitable scheme for loading area so that the underground facilities in

the area can be maintained without causing any interruption in future

operations of this area. Preferably trenches with precast covers designed for

vehicular loads shall be provided to lay fire water pipes, electrical/ I&C cables,

etc.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

3 SCOPE OF WORK UNDER PHASE-2:

3.1 Contractor’s scope for Phase-2 work includes preparation of phase-1 roads for

receiving finishing top layers of WBM roads, providing finishing top layers of

the of flexible pavement above WBM as per specifications attached in this

tender document.

3.2 Contractor’s scope shall also include interconnection with all existing roads to

provide smooth connection between the existing road and proposed road.

3.3 The CONTRACTOR shall provide and fix cautionary / warning sign board &

Mandatory / Regulatory sign board as per MORTH (IV R)) technical

specification and IRC 67.

3.4 The CONTRACTOR shall provide and apply 2.5mm thick hot applied

thermoplastic road marking (white colour) in continuous or broken stripes in

curves / straight stretch, junctions, using computerised vehicle mounted

marking system as per MORTH Specifications.

3.5 Contractor’s scope shall cover designing and providing concrete

road/pavement, DLC, HDPE sheeting, including expansion and construction

joints, sealant, fillers, providing dowel bars, tie bars etc all complete in loading

gantry area, weight bridge area and tanker waiting and tanker queuing area as

demarcated in bid purpose plot plan. The empty islands in loading area shall

be covered with 75mm gravel filling as shown in the plot plan. The scope shall

also cover completing any residual engineering related to the concrete

pavement area in phase-2 scope of work.

3.6 Contractor’s scope for phase-2 shall include supply and construction of road

shoulder, including necessary bottom layers, providing paver blocks etc. all

complete as per concept note and specifications attached in this tender

document.

3.7 The Contractor scope for Phase-2 shall include supply and construct the storm

water drain network including providing road crossings as per as per approved

IFC drawings from phase-1 scope.

3.8 Contractor’s scope shall include supply and construction of any work which is

required to be executed as a part of residual engineering related to road, storm

water drains and underground road crossing works and which was not

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

executed during phase-1 work but is necessary to complete the work for

operation of plant.

3.9 The Contractor shall design, construct, rain water collecting catch pits, sumps

and shall connect the same in the required slopes to nearest storm water drain

to match with the nearest storm water drain invert levels to ensure that there is

no back flow and there will not be any clashes with other underground facilities.

3.10 The Contractor shall include supplying hume pipes, excavation & backfilling

and preparing bedding for receiving the hume pipes, laying in correct slope,

level, coordinates & alignment, keeping projection beyond road and drain

extents as mentioned in the drawings, design, supply and construct/ erect pipe

culvert/box culverts wherever required for all underground facilities which shall

be part of residual engineering of phase-1 works and which shall be executed

after commissioning of methanol plant. The same shall be executed before

completing the final plant road construction activity during phase-2 work.

Contractor shall consider that additional hume pipes which are required to be

installed in phase-2 as a part of residual engineering shall be less than 15% of

the total length of hume pipes provided in phase-1 works. Installation of hume

pipes which are missed by contractor during execution of phase-1 work due to

lack of coordination in phase-1 shall be installed by contractor at no extra cost

to OWNER.

3.11 Contractor shall work in close coordination with the other contractor for all

interface activities and underground civil works and obtain required data from

these contractors. No claim shall be acceptable resulted due to lack of

coordination with the other contractors.

3.12 Contractor’s scope shall include demolition, reconstruction of interconnected

part of the peripheral drain and internal drain wherever required without

affecting the stability and design of the existing peripheral drain.

3.13 Contractor shall ensure during construction of the storm water drains at site that

the existing facilities are not disturbed or damaged. Failing to ensure the same

Contractor shall make good, rectify or replace the element/ structure, without

prejudice or any claim on Owner/ Consultant.

3.14 Contractor shall ensure that other underground facilities which are located

below drain are constructed before construction of the drain or suitable size of

humepipes to correct levels and locations shall be provided to facilitate routing

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

of such facilities after construction of the drains. Contractor shall also ensure

that the street lighting pole foundations are constructed before construction of

the road/ shoulder/drains, contractor to coordinate the same with other

contractors. Rework caused due to ignoring such information shall not be

considered for extra claims. Contractor shall closely coordinate with the other

contractor for the underground facilities which are in other contractor’s scope of

work.

3.15 Contractor’s scope shall include establishing the invert levels of the outfall

points available at site and also working out the options to connect the internal

drains to two different out fall point to limit the depth of drains.

3.16 Any change with respect to site conditions or modifications required to be done

in design and drawings to avoid clashes at site or required to be done as per

site conditions and which are not shown in plot plan shall also be considered

by contractor and no extra claim pertaining to the same shall be accepted at

later date.

3.17 Contractor shall note that the execution of road and drain shall be done

simultaneously for same stretch of the road. Excavation required for drain in

the previously constructed WBM road which is wider than the final plant road

width shall be accounted by contractor in his scope.

3.18 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the works for road

and storm water drain. However, the work executed shall conform in all

respects to high standards of engineering design and workmanship and be

capable of performing in continuous commercial operation in a manner

acceptable to the Engineer/ Owner who will interpret the meaning of drawings

and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work or materials

which in his judgement are not in full accordance therewith.

3.19 Brick work for pits, sumps, trenches if any shall be as per specifications

mentioned in general building works. The same shall be designed for stability

and all design pressures and loads envisaged. For pits deeper than 2m depth,

the RCC pits shall be considered. All such pits shall be covered with precast

concrete cover of required thickness to suit the spanning. The sizes of the

pulling pits shall be decided based on number of hume pipes connected to

pulling pit and invert level of pipe with respect to site conditions, the pit top

shall be kept minimum 150mm above Finished ground level.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

4 SUB-SOIL DATA AND RELATED REQUIREMENTS

4.1 The Bidders are advised to study the Geotechnical Investigation Report, which

is available in the office of the Owner/ Engineer, prior to bidding, the soft copy

of the report is also attached in this tender document.

4.2 Bidders shall particularly note the depths of ground water level mentioned in

geotechnical report accordingly the filter layer is to be provided as per IRC

requirements. The subsoil information contained in the Geotechnical

Investigation Report is given to the Bidder in good faith and no claim from the

Contractor shall be entertained for any inaccuracy or discrepancy in the same.

4.3 In this case, Contractor can carry out the geotechnical investigation for

additional information or to verify the existing geotechnical data with no extra

cost. Further Contractor shall share the geotechnical investigation report

carried out by Contractor with the ENGINEER/OWNER. If any deviation in

design parameters is obtained from the geotechnical investigation carried out

by Contractor, the same shall be used for design work only after prior approval

from ENGINEER/OWNER.

4.4 Bidders shall get acquainted with the site conditions and soil constraints and

study the geotechnical report thoroughly. No extra claims shall be accepted for

ignoring the site conditions and for not considering the same in the design.

4.5 Removing soft pockets if any and filling the pockets with course grained

material having minimum CBR of 8% shall be in CONTRACTOR’s scope of

works, no extra claims for the same shall be made. The Material used in sub

grade shall satisfy the design CBR.

4.6 The existing soil shall be excavated up to the desired depth below existing

ground level as per the road cross section requirements and thicknesses of

various layers below road, the top surface of excavated area shall be sprinkled

with water and the same shall be compacted up to 95 % of its maximum dray

density (MDD). The CBR value of this sub grade shall be checked by

performing the field CBR test.

4.7 The Contractor shall backfill the excavated area with selected soil as per

MoRTH Specifications/ relevant IRC standards, having CBR value more than

8%. The CBR test shall be conducted at excavated area prior to start of fill of

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

selected soil in excavated area and test results shall be submitted for review.

The selected soil shall be filled in layer and each layer not exceeding 150 mm

thick and each layer shall be compacted to 95% of its maximum dry density.

The field CBR shall be performed on the top of this layer to confirm the CBR

value.

4.8 The effective CBR based on the CBR value of sub base and CBR value of

selected soil shall considered for design of plant roads. The effective CBR shall

be estimated as per the guidelines as mentioned in relevant IRC codes and in

line with the MORTH technical specifications.

4.9 The plant road design shall be reviewed based on the actual CBR values

received from the field tests (CBR shall be above 8%). The extra sub-

base/sub-grade thickness needed on account of lower CBR value or any

ground improvement required for the same shall be carried out by the

Contractor at his own cost.

4.10 CONTRACTOR’s scope shall include ground improvement or stabilisation of

sub grade/ lower sub base with treated soil, providing geo-synthetics, geo grids

etc. wherever necessary as per MORTH specifications.

4.11 Capillary cut off in line with the IRC and MORTH technical specifications shall

be provided due to high water table as per the method approved by

ENGINEER/OWNER.

4.12 Sub grade shall be compacted and finished to the design strength consistent

with other physical requirements. The actual laboratory CBR values of

constructed sub grade shall be determined on undisturbed samples cut out

from the compacted sub grade in CBR mould fitted with cutting shoe or on

remoulded samples, compacted to the field density at the field moisture

content.

4.13 CONTRACTOR shall conduct the desired test at various stages and at various

locations for road works as per IRC and MORTH technical specifications.

Laboratory or site testing, including material testing inspection and keeping the

records of the test reports shall be in CONTRACTOR’s scope of works. The

rate shall include the same.

4.14 Definition for completion for plant road work includes, conducting field tests

required to obtain the road design parameters from site, designing of road

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-01



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

cross section for the loads as per concept note, preparation of road layout and

road cross section drawings showing various road layers and thicknesses of

each layers and extents of layers, and obtaining approval on the drawings,

issuing good for construction drawings, excavation, compaction of sub-grade,

providing sub-base of design thicknesses in layers to achieve 95% standard

proctor density, conducting field test to check the CBR, providing further layers

as per design requirements as per IRC and MORTH specifications, providing

WBM, bitumen layers, finishing layers and coats etc. all complete, including

laying of hume pipes as per specifications, providing road shoulders including

drain pipes, grill, kerb stones, painting of kerb stone, road marking finishing of

all miscellaneous activities related to road works.

4.15 Definition for completion for drain work includes, preparing drain network,

obtaining approval from Engineer, designing of the plant drain network based

on concept note attached with this tender, designing of drain cross section for

various depths based on invert levels and for the surcharge pressure as

mentioned in concept note, preparation of drain network layout and road cross

section drawings checking clashing of network with various underground

facilities as per attached bid purpose drawings/latest drawings obtained from

OWNER/ENGINEER, obtaining approval on the drawing and designing, issuing

good for construction drawings, excavation, compaction of soil, pcc, rubble

soling, construction of RCC drains, providing connection of hume pipes from

road/catch pits etc. with the nearest drain, providing precast concrete covers in

operating areas or where the drains are located in tanker movement areas,

including supplying and providing corner angles for precast covers, providing

mortar screed for finishing of drains etc. complete.

SPEC. NO. TCE. 6842A -CV-3000-3005



SHEET 1 OF 1

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

SECTION B

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A -CV-3000-3005-03

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: B

PROJECT INFORMATION-GENERAL SHEET 1 OF 1

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

1. Owner / Purchaser Assam Petrochemicals Limited, Namrup, Guwahati

2. Consultant / Engineer Tata Consulting Engineers Ltd., Mumbai

3. Project Title 500 TPD Methanol and 200 TPD Formalin Plant

4. Location Namrup, Guwahati, Assam

5. Nearest Railway Station Namrup 8 Kms.

6. Altitude above mean sea level

124 m above MSL

7. Ambient Air Temperatures

a) Maximum 38 Deg.C

b) Minimum 5 Deg. C

c) Reference temperature for

design of electrical equipment/device

40 Deg. C

d) Design Wet Bulb 28 Deg. C

8. Relative Humidity

a) Maximum during monsoon 95% at 37°C

b) Minimum 70% at 20°C

9. Rainfall

a) Annual average 2551.8mm/year

b) Maximum for one day 120.2mm

10. Wind Velocity

a) Basic wind speed 50m/s as per IS:875(Part-3) 2015

b) Prevailing wind direction As per Wind Rose Diagram

c) Design wind pressure As per IS: 875 (Part-3) 2015

11. Seismic Data

a) Seismic factors As per Zone V as defined in IS: 1893 (Part 1) 2016

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: E


SHEET 1 OF 1

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

SECTION E

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03


INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS SHEET 1 OF 34 OF 4


ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Assam Petro-Chemicals Limited, a public Sector Undertaking under the State

Govt. of Assam, India was set up in the year 1976 with facilities for production of

30 TPD of Methanol and 50 TPD Formaldehyde based on Natural Gas (NG).

After establishing itself as a successful Company in the Petrochemical Sector, the

Company expanded the business by setting up a new Methanol plant of capacity

100TPD based on I.C.I. Technology in the year 1986 and a new Formaldehyde

plant of capacity 100 TPD with technology from DERIVADOS, Spain which has

then been revamped to 125 TPD in the year 2012. The Company has ever since

been running with excellent operational and financial performances achieving

capacity utilization from the plant at the level of 95 to 100% on yearly basis and

consistently earning profit. The Company now intends to further expand the

business by setting up a new 500 TPD Methanol Plant & 200 TPD Formalin

Project along with captive power Unit and then to go for setting up plants for

downstream value added products like D.M.E, V.A.M, Polyvinyl Acetate, Polyvinyl

Alcohol etc. to establish itself as a major Petrochemicals Complex in the region.

APL proposes construction of infrastructure facilities like Storm Water Drain and

related works for the proposed plant.

1.2 Approach to site:

The APL factory is situated at Namrup in the district of Dibrugarh, Assam, India.

Namrup is connected with Dibrugarh by national Highway NH-37 and is at a

distance of around 70 KM from Dibrugarh and around 65 KM from Dibrugarh Air

Port. The nearest railway Station is Namrup Station and is at a distance of 9 KM.

The Station has siding facilities suitable for handling Project equipments. The

Railway Track is Broad Gauge.

1.3 Assam Petrochemicals has appointed Tata Consulting Engineers Limited (TCE)

for providing the PMC Services for implementation of above project. TCE on

behalf of CLIENT invites sealed bids under two bid system for the entire work

covered in the bidding document. All bids are to be completed and returned in

accordance with ENQUIRY requirements within the duration as mentioned below.

2 IMPORTANT POINTS TO BE NOTED

Sl No.

Description Remarks

a. Bidding Document along with Addendum/ Time Extension etc. (if any)

Assam Government procurement portal website https://assamtenders.gov.in/nicgep/app

https://assamtenders.gov.in/nicgep/app

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

available on Websites(for viewing & downloading)

OR APL‟s website www.assampetrochemicals.co.in

b. Bid Download and Submission made available for the Bidder on the above website for the period

11-11-2019 to 26-11-2019

c. Last Date and time for submission of Online Bids (DUE DATE)

Up to 15:00 Hrs. (IST) on 27-11-2019, only at Government of Assam Public Procurement Portal https://assamtenders.gov.in/nicgep/app

d. Pre-Bid meeting Date and Time

Up to 14:00 Hrs. (IST) on 18-11-2019

e. Pre-Bid Meeting Place

Assam Petrochemicals Limited

P.O. Parbatpur, Namrup

Dist. Dibrugarh, Pin – 786623, Assam (India)

f.

Online opening of Unpriced Bid. Up to 15:00 Hrs. (IST) on 28-11-2019

g. Mode of Submission

Offer along with requisite documents must be uploaded on e-tender website https://assamtenders.gov.in/nicgep/app using legally valid Class-II & above Digital Signature before deadline given and also submit copies of techno commercial documents (Including EMD in original) duly sealed, signed and bounded in one set by post/ courier/ in person within 7 (seven) days from bid due date (all other documents excluding PRICE BID).

h.

Address for Submission of 1 (one) set of Original authenticated Un-price Bid (Hard Copy) and EMD

General Manager (Projects) Assam Petrochemicals Limited P.O. Parbatpur, Namrup Dist. Dibrugarh, Pin – 786623, Assam (India), Tel - +91 374 2500217/331/518

i.

Online opening of Priced Bids of Techno Commercially acceptable Bidders.

Date & time to be intimated later on to the qualified & acceptable Bidders.

http://www.assampetrochemicals.co.in/


SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

j.

Contact Person with details for any clarifications

Mr. A.C. Barman, GM (Projects)/ Mr. S. K.Bora, DGM (Projects)/ Mr. N. B Borah, Sr.Manager (Materials-Projects) Assam Petrochemicals Limited P.O. Parbatpur, Namrup Dist. Dibrugarh, Pin – 786623, Assam (India) Email: [email protected]/

[email protected]/ [email protected]

k. Bid Validity

180 days from the DUE DATE or EXTENDED DUE DATE which ever is later.

l. Tender Fee Not applicable

m. Earnest Money Deposit

Rs. 24,00,000.00 (Twenty four lakhs only)

Refer Clause 2.1 for details on EMD

2.1 Earnest Money Deposit (EMD): INR 24,00,000/- (Rupees Twenty Four lakhs Only) in the form of Demand Draft (DD) (from Nationalised Bank) in favor of “Assam Petrochemicals Limited” at the State Bank of India, Namrup Branch, Namrup, Pin- 786623 or non-revocable Bank Guarantee (BG) from Nationalised Bank as per the APL format (annexure-I). EMD shall not bear any interest.

2.1.1 EMD validity (For BG Only): EMD shall initially be valid for 6 months from the due date for bid submission. Bidder shall extend EMD Validity on its expiry as per requirement of APL till the order is not placed on Vendor / Contractor (Successful Bidder); failing to provide Extension in EMD Validty shall lead to rejection of bid.

2.1.2 Exceptions: The following categories of tenderers are exempted from EMD; Necessary Provisions shall be made in Tender Documents:

Public sector Enterprises

Vendors registered with National Small Scale Industries Corporation (NSIC)

For this purpose, in the event of the tendering company being a Public Sector Enterprise, a declaration to that effect and in the case of vendors registered with NSIC, a copy of the registration certificate should be obtained.

2.1.3 Refund of EMD: After acceptance of order by Vendor / Contractor (successful bidder), APL shall return the EMD to all unsuccessful bidders. EMD shall be returned to the Vendor / Contractor (successful bidder) after its submission of the security deposit of required amount and in stipulated time.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

2.2 Price Bid Opening: Will be intimated later to the techno-commercially acceptable bidders.

2.3 The offers submitted by bidders shall be either neatly spiral bounded or hard bounded. Offers submitted in loose/stapled papers will not be accepted.

2.4 BID FEE: NIL

2.5 Price Bid Opening: Will be intimated later to the techno-commercially acceptable bidders.

2.6 The offers submitted by bidders shall be either neatly spiral bounded or hard bounded. Offers submitted in loose/stapled papers will not be accepted.

3 BIDDER’S QUALIFICATION CRITERIA

3.1 COMMERCIAL & FINANCIAL

3.1.1 Average Annual Financial Turnover during the last 3 years, ending 31st March, of the previous financial year, should be at least INR 3.45 Crores.

3.1.2 The bidder shall have earned a net positive profit for the last three consecutive years

3.1.3 The financial net worth of the bidder as per latest audited annual report shall be positive.

3.2 TECHNICAL

3.2.1 Bidders shall have experience in last five years of having successfully carried out and completed similar work during calculated from the month previous to the one in which applications are invited, which experience should be any one of the following:

Definition of “similar work” is as below:

Bidder should have experience of the design engineering and construction of flexible/rigid road works along with the design and construction of storm water drain works for highways, infrastructure projects, industrial plant projects of having for more than 2.75 km length.

(a) Three similar completed works, each costing not less than INR 4.6 Crores.

Or

(b) Two similar Completed Works, each costing not less than INR 5.75 Crores.

or

(c) One similar completed work, each costing not less than INR 9.2 Crores.

Bidder to submit documentary evidence in the form of work order/purchase order and completion certificate to substantiate technical criteria.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

3.2.2 Bidders submitting their bids should not be under liquidation court receivership or similar proceedings. An undertaking duly sealed and signed from Proprietor / Partner / CEO/ Director of the company is required to be submitted. The bidder should not have been black listed or kept under holiday list in any Public Sector Undertakings in India.

3.2.3 There shall not be any case or charge under investigation / enquiry / trial against the bidder, nor convicted in a court of Law nor suspended / black listed by any organization on any grounds. An undertaking duly sealed and signed from Proprietor / Partner / CEO/ Director of the company is required to be submitted.

3.2.4 Further, in case of a consortium, if any of the member(s) of consortium has been banned by any Government or quasi Government agencies or PSU on due date of submission of bid this fact must be clearly stated and it may not necessarily be a cause for disqualifying him. However, if this declaration is not given, the bid will be rejected as non- responsive.

Similarly, if a bidder is qualified based on engaging a sub-contractor/ sub-vendor/ who meets stipulated qualification criteria, in case such a sub-contractor has been banned by any Government or quasi Government agencies or PSU on due date of submission of bid this fact must be clearly stated and it may not necessarily be a cause for disqualifying him. However, if this declaration is not given, the bid will be rejected as non- responsive.

3.2.5 A firm (which is not a PSU or an associate or a joint venture of a PSU) which has been engaged to provide goods or works for this project and any of its affiliates will be disqualified from providing consultancy services for this project. Conversely, a firm (which is not a PSU or an associate or a joint venture of a PSU), hired to provide consultancy services for the preparation or implementation of this project, and any of its affiliates, will be disqualified from subsequently providing goods or works or services related to the initial assignment for this project.

Consultants or any of their affiliates who are not PSUs or an associate or a joint venture of a PSU will not be hired for any assignment, which by its nature, may be in conflict with another assignment of the consultants.

If a contractor submits his bid, qualifies and does not get the contract because of his being not the lowest, he will be prohibited from working as a subcontractor for the contractor who is executing the contract.

3.3 Documents to be submitted by bidder for technical criteria

The Bidder to furnish following documentary proof as minimum:

i) Copy of relevant pages of Work Order(s) / Contract Agreement(s) / contract document(s) mentioning the value and the scope of work for the Similar works submitted for qualification.

ii) Final Acceptance/Completion Certificate(s) by Owner / Owner‟s Consultant indicating executed value & Completion date date for the Similar Work(s) submitted for qualification.

iii) For Consortium, Bidder shall submit agreement / Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) along with the bid, clearly defining the detailed scope and responsibility of each member including the leader for faithful execution of

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

the contract. This MOU shall be converted to a definite Agreement later, before signing of the Contract and this agreement must remain in force at least till the pendency of the Contract.

iv) A job executed by a bidder for its own plant / projects can‟t be considered as experience for the purpose of meeting requirement of BQC. However, jobs executed for Subsidiary/ Fellow subsidiary/ Holding company will be considered as experience for the purpose of meeting BQC subject to submission of tax paid invoice(s) duly certified by Statutory Auditor of the bidder towards payments of statutory tax in support of the job executed for Subsidiary/Fellow subsidiary/ Holding company.

v) In case the job is completed by a bidder as a sub-contractor then following documents shall be submitted in support of meeting the “Bidder Qualification Criteria” including Clause 3.2.1:

a. Copy of Work order along with schedule of rates issued by main contractor.

b. Copies of completion certificate from End User/Owner/PMC and also from the Main Contractor. The Completion certificate shall have details like work order no./ date, brief scope of work, ordered & executed value of the job, completion data etc.

However, in case Bidder is not able to furnish the completion certificates from the End User/Owner/PMC in his name, then he shall furnish a copy of the approval by End User/ Owner/ PMC for engaging the bidder as a sub-Contractor.

3.3.1 Documents to be submitted by bidder for Financial and Commercial Criteria.

3.3.2 Financial Criteria, Bidder shall submit complete audited financial statement along with audit reports, profit & loss accounts statement and all schedules of the preceding 3 (Three) financial years.

3.3.3 In case audited balance sheets and profit and loss account for the immediate preceding financial year is not available for Bid closing date, the Bidder has an option to submit the audited balance sheets and profit & loss account of the three previous years immediately prior to the last financial year.

3.3.4 Bidder shall submit complete set of audited annual financial statements.

(a) In case, the financial year closing date is within 9 months of bid due date and audited annual report of immediate preceding financial year is not available, bidder has the option to submit the financial details of the three previous years immediately prior to the last financial year. Otherwise, it is compulsory to submit the financial details of the immediate three preceding financial years.

(b) Example, in case, audited annual report of immediate preceding financial year (year ending 31st March) is not available and where bid closing date is up to 31st December, the financial details of the three previous years immediately prior to the last financial year may be submitted. However, in case the bid closing date is after 31st December, it is compulsory to

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

submit the financial details of the immediate three preceding financial years only.

(c) In case a bidder (a Parent Company) is having wholly owned subsidiaries but only a single consolidated annual report is prepared and audited which includes the financial details of their wholly owned subsidiaries, consolidated audited annual report shall be considered for establishing the financial criteria subject to statutory auditor of the bidder certifying that separate annual report of bidder (without the financial data of subsidiaries) is not prepared and audited.

(d) Further, in case a bidder is a subsidiary company and separate annual report of the bidder is not prepared & audited, but only a consolidated annual report of the Parent Company is available, consolidated audited annual report shall be considered for establishing the financial criteria subject to statutory auditor of the parent company certifying that separate annual report of bidder is not prepared and audited.

(e) In case, due to internal / local regulation, bidder is unable to submit audited balance sheet, the following shall apply:

In such case CEO / CFO's certificate in original from the company or from the parent company (in case bidder is a subsidiary) stating the turnover of the bidding entity along with a declaration that the bidding company is not in a position to submit its financial statement as per the local / internal regulation (clearly specifying the applicable regulation) with an endorsement by Chartered Accountant / Statutory Auditor / Certified Public Accountant (not being an employee or a Director or not having any interest in the bidder(s) company / firm) shall be accepted.

Wherever Chartered Accountant / Statutory Auditor / Certified Public Accountant (not being an employee or a Director or not having any interest in the bidder(s) company / firm) is not in a position to endorse such CEO / CFO's certificate due to local regulations, CEO / CFO's certificate in original without endorsement may be accepted provided a reference of the local regulation restricting this endorsement is given in the CEO / CFO certificate.

(f) Similarly in case where the bidder cites the reasons of Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) for its inability to submit necessary documents in support of meeting the experience criteria, a certificate, in original, certifying all the required information, issued by CEO / CFO of the company along with a declaration that the bidding company is not in a position to submit the required documents owing to the NDA with an endorsement by Chartered Accountant/ Statutory Auditor / Certified Public Accountant (not being an employee or a Director or not having any interest in the bidder(s) company / firm) may be accepted.

Wherever Chartered Accountant / Statutory Auditor / Certified Public Accountant (not being an employee or a Director or not having any interest in the bidder(s) company / firm) is not in a position to endorse such CEO / CFO's certificate due to local regulations, CEO / CFO's certificate in original without endorsement may be accepted provided a

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

reference to the local regulation restricting this endorsement is given in the CEO / CFO certificate.

(g) Authentication of documents: All documents submitted by bidders in support of meeting the BQC shall be authenticated in below manner:

(i) Duly certified by Statutory Auditor of the bidder or a practicing Chartered Accountant (not being an employee or a Director and not having any interest in the bidder's Company or Parent Company/Subsidiary) where audited accounts are not mandatory as per law.

OR

(ii) Documents duly notarized by any notary public / Apostille in the bidder's country or certified true copies duly signed, dated and stamped by an official authorized for this purpose in Indian Embassy / High Commission in Bidder's country.

OR

(iii) Self-certified documents in original from any one out of CEO or CFO or Company Secretary or any Functional Director in Board of Members of the bidder (Limited company only) along with Self-Certification as per enclosed Annexure-II. This option shall not be applicable to Proprietorship/ Partnership firms.

Requirement of above certification shall not be applicable to published audited annual financial statements in English, if audited annual financial statements in English are uploaded by the bidder and its original booklets are submitted.

(iv) In case a foreign bidder submits any of the Bidder's Qualification support documents in any language other than English, then it will be the responsibility of such foreign bidder to also provide the English translation copy duly authenticated by any one of the following:

Local chamber of commerce,

Indian embassy in bidder's country,

Bidder's country‟s embassy in India,

Any translator in India recognized/authorized by Bidder's country‟s Embassy.

3.3.5 Any additional documents, if deemed necessary to establish the qualifying requirements may be submitted by the Bidder.

3.3.6 Submission of authentic documents is the prime responsibility of the Bidder. However, Owner /TCE reserves the right of getting the document cross verified, at their discretion from the document issuing authority. However, Bidder shall provide all necessary assistance in this regard.

Owner / PMC reserve the right to complete the evaluation based on the details furnished in the Bid. Owner / PMC may ask bidder to furnish any supporting document (within a fixed time frame) which is required in addition

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

to the documents uploaded by bidders in support of meeting bid qualification criteria.

3.3.7 In case bidder fails to submit documents in accordance to the provisions of BQC to meet the Qualification Criteria within the stipulated time, including time as granted in Clause 3.3.6, the Bid may be rendered to be summarily rejected.

3.3.8 Therefore, the Bidder shall in their own interest furnish complete documentary evidence in the first instance itself along with their bids, in support of their fulfilling the Qualification Criteria as given.

3.3.9 Conversion factor for Order Value:

Order value(s) in currencies other than INR shall be converted to equivalent INR at the exchange rate of SBI bill selling rate as on the date of award of such proposed qualifying work(s) submitted by Bidder‟s for qualification.

3.3.10 Conversion factor for Annual turnover:

Annual Turnover is in currency other than INR shall be converted into equivalent INR as on last date of Bidder's financial year, shall be considered based on SBI bill selling rate.

4 BIDDERS WHO CAN BID

4.1 Parties who are affiliates of one another can decide which affiliate will make a bid.

Only one affiliate may submit a bid. Two or more affiliates are not permitted to

make separate bids dierectly or indirectly. If 2 or more affiliates submit a bid, then

any one or all of them are liable for disqualification. However up to 3 affiliates may

make a joint bid as a consortium, and in which case the conditions applicable to

the consortium, and in which case the conditions applicable to a consortium shall

apply to them.

4.2 “Affiliate” of a party shall mean any company or legal entity which:

a) Controls either directly or indirectly a party, or

b) Which is controlled directly or indirectly by a party, or

c) Is directly or indirectly controlled by a company, legal entity or partnership which directly or indirectly controls a party. “Control” means actual control or ownership of at least a 50% voting or other controlling interest that gives the power to direct, or cause the direction of, the management and material business decisions of the controlled entity.

4.3 Bid may be submitted by:

a) A single person / entity (called sole bidder)

b) A newly formed incorporated joint venture (JV) which has not completed 3 financial years from the date of commencement of business.

c) A consortium (including an unincorporated JV) having a maximum of 3 (three) members;

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

d) An Indian arm of a foreign company.

4.4 Fulfilment of pre-qualification Criteria and certain additional conditions in respect

of each of above 4 types of bidders stated below, respectively:

a) The sole Bidder (including an incorporated JV which has completed 3 financial years after date of commencement of business) shall fulfil each pre-qualification criterion.

b) In case the bidder is a newly formed and incorporated joint venture and which has not completed three financial years from the date of commencement of business, then either the said JV shall fulfil each eligibility criteria or any one constituent member / promoter of such a JV shall fulfil each eligibility criteria. If the bid is received with the proposal that one constituent member / promoter fulfils each eligibility criteria, then this member / promoter shll be clearly identified and he/it shall assume all obligations under the contract and provide such comfort letter / guarantees as may be required by owner. The guarantees shall cover inter alia the commitment of the member / promoter to complete the entire work in all respects and in a timely fashion, being bound by all the obligations under the contract, an undertaking to provide all necessary technical and financial support to the JV to ensure completion of the contract when awarded, and undertaking not to withdraw from the JV till completion of the work, etc.

c) In case the bidder(s) is / are a consortium (including an unincorporated JV), then the following conditions shall apply:

i. Each member in a consortium may only be a legal entity and not an individual person;

ii. The bid shall specifically identify and describe each member of the consortium;

iii. The consortium member descriptions shall indicate what type of legal entity the member is and its jurisdiction of incorporation (or of establishment as a legal entity other than as a corporation) and provide evidence by a copy of the articles of incorporation (or equivalent documents);

iv. One participant member of the consortium shall be identified as the “prime member” and contracting entity for the consortium; this prime meber shall be solely responsible for all aspects of the bid / proposal including the execution of all tasks and performance of all consortium obligations;

v. The prime member shall fulfil each eligibility criteria;

vi. A commitment shall be given from each of the consortium members in the form of a letter signed by a duly authorized officer clearly identifying the role of the member in the bid and the member‟s commitment to perform all relevant tasks and obligations in support of the prime / lead member of the consortium and a commitment not to withdraw from the consortium till completion of all ENQUIRY obligations;

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

vii. No change shall be permitted in the number, nature or share holding pattern of the consortium members after pre-qualifiacation, without the prior written permission of the owner.

viii. No change in project plans, timetables or priceing will be permitted as a consequence of any withdrawal or failure to perform by a consortium member;

ix. No consortium member shall hold less than 25% stake in a consortium;

x. Entities which are affiliates of one another are allowed to bid either as a sole bidder or as a consortium only;

xi. Any person or entity can bid either singly or as a member or only one consortium.

d) In case the bidder is an Indian arm (subsidiary, authorized agent, branch office or affiliate) of a foreign bidder, the nthe foreign bidder shall have to fulfil each eligibility criteria. If such foreign company desires that the contract be entered into with the Indian arm, then a proper back to back continuing (parent company) guarantee shall be provided by the foreign company clearly stating than in case of any failure of any supply or performance of equipment, machinery, material or plant or completion of the work in all respects and as per the warranties / guarantees that may have been given, then the foreign company shall assume all obligations under the contract. Towards this purpose, it shall provide such comfort letter / guarantees as may be required by owner. The guarantees shall cover inter alia the commitment of the foreign company to complete the entire work in all respects and in a timely fashion, being bound by all obligations under the contract, an undertaking to provide all necessary technical and financial support to the Indian arm or to render the same themselves so as to ensure completion of the contract when awarded, an undertaking not to withdraw from the contract till completion of the works, etc.

5 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

5.1 The bidder is expected to examine the bidding documents, including all

instructions, forms, General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of

Contract, Technical Specifications, Drawings and other ENQUIRY documents

and to fully familiarize itself with the requirements of the bidding documents.

Failure to furnish all the information required by the Bidding Documents or the

submission of a bid not substantially responsive to the Bidding Documents in

every respect may result in the rejection of the Bid.

5.2 Immediately on receipt of Bidding Document, Bidder shall acknowledge the

receipt and confirm his intention to bid for the ENQUIRY work / scope of supply

as per the Acknowledgement format given in Bidding Document.

6 DUE DATE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

6.1 As indicated in item clause no. 2 above, the Original bid with required copies

must be received by the designated authority on or before the bid due date &

time.

6.2 APL / TCE may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of bids

by amending the bidding documents, in which case all rights and obligations of

the APL / TCE and bidders previously subject to the deadline, will thereafter be

subject to the deadline as extended.

6.3 Any request for due date extension shall be received to APL / TCE 48 hrs in

advance to bid due date in writing clearly indicating the reason for extension. APL

/ TCE will determine to its subjective satisfaction whether the bidder extension

request based on the reason mentioned by the bidder to be accepted or not and

such determination shall not be open to question.

7 MODIFICATION & WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

7.1 The bidder may modify or withdraw his submitted bid, provided that written notice

of withdrawal or modification along with modified bid is received by APL / TCE

prior to the deadline prescribed for submission of bids.

7.2 The bidder's modification or withdrawal notice shall be prepared, sealed, marked

and dispatched in accordance with the provisions for submission of bids.

8 LATE BIDS

8.1 Any bid received by TCE after the deadline for submission of the bids (including

any extensions hereof) will be declared "Late" and rejected and returned

unopened to the bidder.

9 BID VALIDITY

9.1 Bids shall remain valid for a period as indicated in Sr. no. 2 above.

9.2 Notwithstanding the above, TCE may solicit the bidder's consent to an extension

of the period of bid validity. The request and the responses thereto shall be made

in writing (by fax/ email).

9.3 A bidder accepting the request for extension shall not be permitted to modify his

bid because of the extension, unless specifically invited to do so.

10 BID EVALUATION CRITERIA

10.1 The Techno-commercial bid (un-priced bid) shall be evaluated based on the quality & quantum of documents submitted by bidder in his offer as outlined in the Section A – Checklist. Bidder shall be read ENQUIRY Document carefully while quoting as deviations (if any) from this ENQUIRY shall lead to rejection / loading as per provisions in various sections of this ENQUIRY Document.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

10.2 Price bid evaluation: Contract shall be awarded to sole bidder on Overall Lowest Basis for entire scope of ENQUIRY on the basis of effective total cost including all taxes and duties minus Input Tax Credit/ Set off benefit available to Owner. Techno-commerical loading (if any) shall be applicable.

10.3 TCE/Owner reserves the right to assess Bidder's capability to execute the work by taking into account various aspects such as Overall Schedule for Completion of work, details of tools, tackles & equipment available, Manpower estimation for job, deployment chart with bio-data/ experience / qualification of all supervisory staff, proposed site organization chart, Qualtiy assurance Plan & Safety assurance plan with detailed bio-data / experience of quality assurance supervisor & safety supervisor, Concurrent Commitments, Past performance etc. and accordingly decide whether respective price bids shall be opened and considered for further evaluation. Past Performance shall be based on in-house data of TCE/CLIENT.

10.4 Negotiations will be held only if the lowest rate received is not reasonable and the decision of the company regarding reasonableness of rates quoted will be final and binding on the bidders. Work will be awarded to lowest bidder without post tender negotiations if the rates are reasonable. If rates are not reasonable, negotiations with Lowest Bidder only may be undertaken to arrive at a reasonable rate.

10.5 COMMERCIAL LOADING OF OFFERS

10.5.1 Differential Payment Terms

(a) Any differential terms of payment. in terms of credit period, offered by a Bidder as against the terms specified in this document shall be loaded @ 14% simple interest per annum for the applicable period.

10.5.2 Liabilities including LD:

(a) Any differential amount & period of Liquidated Damages Offered by bidder as against the terms specified in this document shall be loaded as

i. For Differential Amount: EVALUATED PRICE = TOTAL QUOTED PRICE + MAXIMUMUM LD AMOUNT AS PER ITB – MAXIMUM LD AMOUNT QUOTED BY THE BIDDER

ii. LD not acceptable to Bidder: Bid shall be rejected.

iii. All other liabilities shall be as per ITB & Corrigendum‟s. Any Deviations to these clauses will not be acceptable and the bid may be liable for rejection.

10.6 TECHNICAL LOADING OF OFFERS

Technical loading is not applicable.

11 BID REJECTION CRITERIA

11.1 Prior to detailed bid evaluation, TCE / CLIENT will determine the substantial

responsiveness of each bid with respect to the bidding documents. A

substantially responsive bid is one which conforms to the terms, conditions

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

and specification of the Bidding Documents without material deviation. A

material deviation is one which affects in any substantial way the scope,

quality or performance of the works, or which limits in any substantial way,

inconsistent with the bidding documents, the TCE‟s /CLIENT's rights or the

bidder's obligations as envisaged in the bidding documents, and the

rectification of which deviation or reservation would affect unfairly the

competitive position of other bidders presenting substantially responsive bids.

Further examination of only such bids as are determined to be substantially

responsive shall be taken up, unless otherwise determined by CLIENT/TCE.

11.2 The bidders shall adhere to the following provisions of the Bidding Document

without taking any deviations, failing which the Bid shall be considered to be

non-responsive and may be rejected.

(a) Non-responsive bid as mentioned in clause no. 11.1 above.

(b) Non Meeting Pre-Qualification criteria

(c) Defect liability period.

(d) Bids with Price variation clause (PVC)

(e) Non-Submission of EMD, if applicable

(f) Non-Submission of Integrity Pact, if applicable along with the un-priced offer / on or before the bid due date & time as instructed in this Enquiry

(g) Non-submission of Pre-filled agreed terms and conditions along with the un-priced offer / on or before bid due date & time.

(h) Submission of prices with erasures or corrections or using white fluids.

(i) Submission of Prices / rates in SOQ / SOR in un-priced bid.

(j) Bids submitted in loose / stapled papers

(k) Rejection note as mentioned under various clauses of this ENQUIRY document

(l) Deviation in Payment terms except credit period.

(m) Non acceptance to submission of PBG.

(n) Complete scope of Supplies / Work as per the provisions of the Bidding documents.

(o) Completion time beyond the stipulated completion time in the bidding document.

12 CLARIFICATIONS ON BID

12.1 Clarifications that the Bidder needs to have on the ENQUIRY specification

can be sought from APL/TCE in writing within one week from the date of

issue of this enquiry.

12.2 Bidders requesting clarifications beyond one week from the date of issue of

this enquiry willnot be entertained. Non-receipt of clarifications from APL /

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

TCE for queries raised beyond one week will not be considered for extension

of time to submit the bid.

12.3 All such correspondence shall be routed to the following address in an

envelope "Clarifications for Enquiry No. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005":

To,

The General Manager (Project),

Project Department,

Assam Petrochemicals Limited,

Namrup, P.O. Parbatpur, Dist- Dibrugarh, Pin -786623,

Assam, India.

Contact Person: Mr. Atul Barman

Tel. No.: 0374-2500331

Fax. No.: 0374-2500231

Email: [email protected] Copy shall be marked to:

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED Unit no. NB 1502 & SB 1501,15th Floor, Empire Tower,

Opposite Reliable Tech Park Cloud City Campus, Airoli,

Navi Mumbai, India, 400 708

Contact person: Mr. Sandip De Email: [email protected]

12.4 Written queries only shall be replied.

13 OPENING OF TECHNICAL & UN-PRICED COMMERCIAL BIDS

13.1 Technical and unpriced commercial bids shall be opened at registered office

of APL, Namrup office on the due date as mentioned in clause no. 2 in

presence of the bidder's representatives. Only the name of the bidders who

have responded to the enquiry will be read before the bidder's

representatives(s) duly authorized to attend such opening by a person

competent and having the Power of Attorney to bind the Bidder. The Bidder's

representative(s) who choose to attend should carry along with them duly

filled, signed and stamped “Proforma of letter of authority for attending

Technical Bid Opening” and submit it to TCE before opening of the Un-priced

bid. Bidders who are present during Un-priced bid opening shall sign un-

priced bid opening statement evidencing their attendance. If bidder is placed

on holiday / blacklisted after issue of enquiry but before unpriced bid opening,

their un priced bid will not be opened.

mailto:[email protected]


SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

14 OPENING OF PRICE BIDS

14.1 Techno-Commercially acceptable bidders will be shortlisted by CLIENT/TCE

for opening of price part of their bids. Date, time and venue for opening of

price bids will be informed to the shortlisted bidders subsequently. Only the

final bid cost will be read before the bidder's representative(s) duly authorized

to attend such opening by a person competent and having the Power of

Attorney to bind the Bidder. The Bidder's representative(s) who choose to

attend should carry along with them duly filled, signed and stamped

“Proforma of letter of authority for attending Priced Bid Opening” and submit it

to TCE before opening of the priced bid. Bidders who are present during

priced bid opening shall sign priced bid opening statement evidencing their

attendance. If the bidder is placed on holiday / blacklisted after opening of un-

priced bid but before opening of priced bid, their price bid will not be opened.

15 COMPLETE SCOPE OF WORK

15.1 The complete scope of supplies has been defined in the bidding documents.

Only those bidders who take complete responsibility and who bid for the

individual itemwise total scope of work as contained in the bidding document

shall be considered for further evaluation.

15.2 Waiver of deviations and conditions (if any), should be submitted by the

Bidders before the opening of the Priced Bid failing which the Priced Bid of

concerned Bidder shall not be opened.

16 AMENDMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

16.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids as well as up to priced

bid opening, APL / TCE may, for any reason whether at its own initiative or in

response to a clarification or modification requested by any prospective

Bidder(s), modify the Bidding documents.

16.2 The modifications/amendment will be notified in writing or by fax to all

prospective bidders who have been issued the Bidding documents and shall

be part of the Bidding documents and shall be binding on all bidders. The

Bidders will be required to acknowledge receipt of any such amendment to

the Bidding documents. Bidders shall confirm the inclusion of Addendum /

Corrigendum in their bid and shall follow the instructions issued along with

addendum / corrigendum.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

16.3 Bidders shall examine the Bidding documents thoroughly and inform TCE of

any apparent conflict, discrepancy or error, so that TCE may issue

appropriate clarification(s) or amendment(s), if required.

17 SITE LOCATION / SITE VISIT

17.1 The bidder may at its own discretion can examine the site of works and its

surroundings and obtain for itself on its own responsibility all information that

may be necessary for preparing the bid and entering into the Contract.

Claims of any kind due to variation or ignorance of site conditions and

environmental conditions will not be eligible in any circumstances.

18 BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND DEVIATIONS

18.1 It is expected that bidders will submit bids strictly based on the terms and

conditions and specifications contained in the bidding documents and will not

stipulate any deviations. However, become unavoidable, deviations should

be separately and specifically stipulated only in the "Deviation Sheet".

Deviations mentioned anywhere else in the offer other than the "Deviation

Sheet" shall not be acceptable and shall not be considered for bid evaluation.

APL / TCE reserves the right to reject as non-responsive any bid containing

major deviation(s).

19 LANGUAGE OF BIDS

19.1 The Bid prepared by the bidder, all documents attached to and/or relating to

the bid and all correspondence exchanged by the Bidder and CLIENT/TCE,

shall be written in English language only.

19.2 Any printed literature furnished by the bidder may be written in any other

language provided that this literature is accompanied by an authenticated

English translation, in which case, for purpose of interpreting the Bid, the

English translation shall govern.

20 PRICE BID

Please refer the Attachment - XI of SCC for Lumpsum price for the LSTK works. Also refer Preamble to Price Breakup Format and Price Breakup Format for LSTK works in ATTACHMENT-X to SCC.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

20.1 Lumpsum price includes designing, detailing and construction of roads and storm water drains including supply of material including loading/unloading and storage, preparing detailed design drawings based on concept note of road and drain works and obtaining approval of ENGINEER/OWNER on the same before starting the Construction activity at site, preparing all construction drawings, including construction of roads, drains and pavements, excavation and backfilling/ filling, disposal of excess material outside the plot at locations approved by Engineer-in-charge or local authority, dewatering, providing sub-base, sub-grade, rubble soling, providing all designed layers for bituminous plant roads, reinforced concrete and allied works, brickwork for puling pits, catch pits, RCC trenches, dismantling/demolishing of existing structures etc. all as per the technical specification & bid purpose drawings attached in Volume III of this tender, furnishing of all materials, equipments, labour, transport, tools, tackles, including taxes and royalties, and all other services necessary for the complete execution of works, including inspection and testing, quality checks and safe execution of works, including required geotechnical investigations, surveying and setting out necessary for the road and drain works and clean up of working areas after completion of the Works, without disturbing the existing foundations and underground services, including demolishing of old existing structures, if any, etc. as directed by OWNER/ENGINEER. The scope shall also cover providing and maintaining temporary access roads/supporting structure for movement of the equipment/ vehicles and temporary drainage, if required with Final and “As Built” documentation to OWNER on single point responsibility basis (Lump Sum Turn Key – LSTK Basis), based on Tender Documents as per scope of work, terms and conditions of the contract.

20.2 The Lumpsum price shall be deemed to be inclusive of all taxes and duties, municipal taxes, statutory levies as specified in special condition of contract except “Goods and Services Tax” (hereinafter called GST) (i.e. CGST and SGST applicable in case of intra state supply). The GST as legally leviable & payable by the Contractor under the provisions of applicable GST law(s) / act(s) shall be reimbursed by OWNER according to Contractor‟s paid GST bill / invoice submitted to OWNER.

20.3 Prices, taxes, duties including GST on any transaction between CONTRACTOR and their sub-supplier / sub-contractor shall be included in the Total Lumpsum (LS) Price quoted by the CONTRACTOR.

20.4 Unless stated otherwise in the Bidding Document, the Contract shall be for the total works as described in Bidding Document, based on the LSTK Price Breakup format (provided in bidding document) submitted by the bidder and accepted by PMC/OWNER.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

20.5 Bidder shall quote in price bid, considering the lumpsum cost for all the items listed in LSTK Price Breakup format, after careful analysis of cost involved for the performance of the complete item considering all parts of the Bidding Document. In case any activity is not specifically covered in description of item under LSTK Price Breakup Format but is required to complete the work as per Scope of Work, Scope of Supply, Specifications, Standards, Drawings, General terms & Conditions of Contract, Special Condition of Contract or any other part of Bidding Document, the rate / price quoted shall be deemed to be inclusive of cost incurred for such activity.

20.6 Percentages / Rates / prices quoted by the bidder, shall remain firm, fixed and valid till the completion of the Works and will not be subject to variation on any account except as otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents.

20.7 All duties, taxes, and other levies payable shall be as per Special Conditions of Contract. The bidder shall quote the lumpsum price gross of Indian Income Tax and the lumpsum price(s) shall be deemed to include Indian Income Tax

21 PERCENTAGE IN PRICE BID BREAKUP FORMAT

21.1 Items Sr. 1a and 1b of LSTK price breakup format shall be subject to the limits as specified in Preamble to LSTK Price Bid Breakup Format.

21.2 In case the percentage price(s) quoted exceeds the limits specified in ATTACHMENT-IX to SCC, the excess amounts shall be raised and paid in the Final Bill provided the total Lumpsum Price quoted in price bid does not increase on account of such payment.

21.3 It shall be the duty of the CONTRACTOR to duly observe and perform all laws, rules, regulations, orders and formalities applicable to GST, Customs Duty and Custom related Duties etc. on the import, manufacture, sale and/or supply of any material to the OWNER and performance of the Works Contract Services under the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the OWNER indemnified from and against any and all claims, demands, prosecutions, actions, proceedings, penalties, damages, demurrages and/or other levies whatsoever made or levied by any Court, Tribunal or the Customs or other Authorities with respect to any alleged breach, evasion or infraction of such duties, taxes, charges or levies or any breach or infraction of any applicable laws, rules, regulations, orders or formalities concerning the same and from the consequence thereof.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

21.4 It is recognized by the OWNER that the Price of Materials may be loaded to cover various factors other than the cost of materials, such as procurement costs and profits as applicable including prices, taxes, duties and including GST on any transaction between Bidder and their sub-supplier/subcontractor in the Total Lumpsum price quoted by the Bidder.

21.5 The Liability of payment excess Custom Duty on account of any change shall be to Contractor‟s account.

21.6 Account Payment for indigenous materials to the extent indicated in the Bill of Materials shall be made on the basis of Contractor‟s invoice(s) which shall, without prejudice to the CONTRACTOR‟s full obligations to the OWNER in respect of such materials, preferably be drawn on the OWNER to whom the materials shall be consigned by the Contractor. Payment of the Supplier‟s invoices shall be made directly by the CONTRATOR, who will be exclusively liable to pay their Supplier(s).

21.7 While submitting Bill of materials, Contractor shall submit back up documents to Owner.

22 FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID

22.1 The original and all copies of the bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink

and shall be signed by the bidder or a person or persons duly authorized to

sign on behalf of the bidder. Such authorization shall be indicated by written

power of attorney accompanying the bid. All pages of the bid, except for un-

amended printed literature, shall be initialed by the person signing the bid.

The name and position held by each person signing must be typed or printed

below the signature.

22.2 The Un-priced bid shall contain no interlineations, erasures or overwriting

except as necessary to correct errors made by the bidder, in which case,

such corrections shall be signed in full by the person or persons signing the

bid. However, the Priced bid shall not contain interlineations, erasures or

overwriting.

22.3 In case if the bidder is a Company governed by the Companies Act 2013,

(erstwhile Companies Act 1956) a Board Resolution shall be accompanied

for the the person signing the bid and also for the person attending the bid

Over / Opening and above the requirement as stated.

22.4 In case if the bidder is a partnership firm / JV firm, Power of attorney having

the signature of all the partners / members shall be accompanied for the

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

person signing the bid and also for the person attending the bid over /

Opening.

23 ALL PAGES TO BE INITIALLED

23.1 All signatures in bids shall be dated and shall bear a seal of the bidder. In

addition, all pages of the bids before submission of the bid shall be initialed at

lower right hand corner by the Bidder or by a person holding a Power of

Attorney authorizing him to sign on behalf of the bidder. The un-priced

technical bid shall include all pages of ENQUIRY enquiry (commercial part

and technical part) duly signed and stamped by the bidder.

23.2 The Bidder shall sign and affix its seal on all pages of the Priced bid on lower

right hand corner by a person holding a power of attorney.

24 CORRECTIONS AND ERASURES

24.1 Bidders are required to fill in the ENQUIRY documents with due care so as

to avoid any cuttings/corrections/alterations in the entries made in the

ENQUIRY papers.

24.2 Un-priced Bid: In case any corrections are required, the original writings shall

be neatly cut/ penned through and re-written nearby. No overwriting or

erasure of original writings by use of 'white fluid' or the like is permitted. In

case any erasure using 'white correcting fluid' is found, the ENQUIRY may be

liable to be rejected. All cuttings/ corrections/ alterations shall be signed in full

by the BIDDER with date. Numerical figures shall be written both in figures as

well in words.

24.3 Priced bid shall not contain interlineations, erasures or overwriting.

25 CLARIFICATIONS ON BIDS

25.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation and comparison of bids, APL /TCE

may, at its discretion, ask the bidder for a clarification of his bid. All

responses to a request for clarification shall be in writing, and no change in

the price or substance of the bid shall be permitted unless specifically sought

by APL/TCE. Bidders not responding to clarification / Queries raised by APL /

TCE on bids within the stipulated time will not be considered further for

evaluation and bids will be rejected.

26 TECHNO-COMMERCIAL EXAMINATION OF BIDS

26.1 APL/TCE will examine or cause to be examined the bids to determine

whether they are complete, whether the documents have been properly

signed, and whether the bids are generally in order.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

26.2 APL /TCE will determine to its subjective satisfaction whether the bidder has

submitted a responsive bid and is qualified to satisfactorily perform the work,

and such determination shall not be open to question.

26.3 The determination will also take into account the bidder's financial and

technical capabilities, as well as such other qualifications as APL/TCE deem

necessary and appropriate.

26.4 Bidder(s) techno-commercially accepted will only be communicated for price

bid opening.

26.5 Bidder(s) who qualify for the award of contract as per criteria of this BID will

only be communicated for the award of contract & subsequent LOI / PO will

be issued to them.

27 REBATE

27.1 No suo-moto reduction in price(s) by bidders is permissible after opening of

the bid. If any Bidder unilaterally reduces the price(s) quoted by him in his bid

after opening of bids, such reduction shall not be considered for comparison

of prices but shall be binding on the Bidder if he happens to be selected for

award of work.

28 CONTACTING CLIENT

28.1 A bidder shall not contact CLIENT on any matter relating to his bid from the

time of bid opening to the time, that the Contract is awarded, unless

requested to do in writing. Any effort by a bidder to influence CLIENT in

CLIENT's decisions in respect of bid evaluation or contract award will result in

the rejection of that bidder's bid.

29 CLIENT'S RIGHT TO ACCEPT/REJECT BIDS

29.1 APL/TCE reserves the right to accept or reject any bid and to annul the

bidding process and reject all bids at any time prior to award of Contract

without thereby incurring any liability to the affected bidder(s) or any

obligation to inform the affected bidder(s) of the ground of APL's/TCE's

action.

29.2 APL/TCE shall not be obliged to award the Order / Contract to the lowest

evaluated bidder if APL/TCE apprehends that it will not be in the interest of

APL/TCE to award the Order / Contract at the lowest evaluated price or to the

lowest evaluated bidder.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

30 PREPARATION OF BIDS - TWO BID SYSTEM

30.1 The bidder is required to prepare bid in a format as outlined in Checklist for

Submission of Bid” in order to achieve the objective of maintaining a uniform

proposal structure from all bidders.

31 CONFIDENTIALITY OF DOCUMENTS

31.1 Bidders shall treat the bidding documents and contents therein as strictly

confidential. If at any time, during the bid preparation period, Bidder decides

to decline to bid; all documents must be immediately returned to CLIENT.

32 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

32.1 Bidder(s) will be required to submit in their one bigger sealed cover marked

as "Offer against Enquiry No. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005 for “Road & Storm

Water Drain works” containing the following documents in three separate

sealed envelopes before the due date & time in APL Registered Office at the

address

To, The General Manager (Project),

Project Department,


Mahapurush Srimanta Sankardev Path


Assam, India.


Tel. No.: 0374-2500331

Fax. No.: 0374-2500231

Email: [email protected]

32.2 Cover Envelope containing documents as per clause no. 32 and Checklist for

Submission of Bid”:

a) Part 1: EMD + Integrity Pact b) Part 2: Un-Priced Bid containing following documents:

i. Three sets (one original + two photo copy) of Un-priced Bid Commercial Bid

ii. Three sets (one original + two photo copy) of Un-priced Technical Bid iii. Two Sets (one original + one photo copy) of ENQUIRY document duly

stamped and signed on each page. c) Part 3: Price Bid containing Schedule of Rates & Quantities with duly filled

prices in Original.


SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

32.3 Each envelope shall be super scribed with the names of documents it

contains.

32.4 The bidders shall ensure submission of prices without any erasures. Bidders

shall also specify total bid price, wherever applicable, in figures as well as in

words.

32.5 Bidder shall indicate Taxes and duties in Prefilled ATC (if applicable) / SOP

only. If Bidder indicates taxes & duties elsewhere, it will not be considered for

evaluation.

32.6 Bids Received by way of Fax or Telex or email or in open condition shall not

be considered.

32.7 Bidder shall strictly follow above mentioned bid submission procedure, failing

to which may lead to rejection of bids.

33 OTHER DOCUMENTS & REQUIREMENTS

The Bid, as submitted will consist of the following:

33.1 Complete Set of ENQUIRY documents duly filled in, signed and stamped by

the bidder as prescribed in different clauses of ENQUIRY documents.

33.2 Power of Attorney or a true copy thereof, duly attested by Gazetted Officer in

case a representative that has signed the ENQUIRY is a person not

competent / authorized and bind the bidder.

33.3 Bidder shall strictly follow instructions in this section for submitting the

envelopes with clearly written information on outside of the envelope, failing

which APL / TCE will assume no responsibility for the misplacement or

premature opening of the envelopes.

34 COMPLETION PERIOD

34.1 Please refer Scope of work document in Section – A for Completion period.

35 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE

35.1 The following order of precedence shall be followed in case of any conflict

between various parts of the ENQUIRY specifications:

i. Corrigendums, if any ii. Instructions to Bidders iii. Technical Specification, drawings & datasheets iv. Special Conditions of Contract v. General Conditions of Contract

The Bidder shall bring to the notice of TCE/CLIENT any such variations / conflicts between various parts of the ENQUIRY and obtain approval before proceding with such information for engineering/design.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

36 E-TENDERING REQUIREMENTS & GUIDELINES

36.1 The subject tender is an e-tender and owner has hoisted the complete tender

documents on website https://assamtenders.gov.in/nicgep/app and has ensured its availability for downloading the full set comprising of the above. The bidder is expected to download the complete tender documents including all addendum/corrigendum only from the above mentioned website i.e. https://assamtenders.gov.in/nicgep/app, as per the index of the tender, fully read and understood the same and submit their acceptance to all tender terms and conditions except deviations, if any. Bidder may note that Schedule of rates attached with the tender documents are to be filled in the BOQ (Financial Price Bid Part – II).

36.2 The tenderer is expected to examine the tendering documents, including all

instructions, specifications/drawings (if any) including all addendum/corrigendum in the tendering document. Failure to furnish all the information required by the tendering documents or submission of tender not substantially responsive to the tendering document in every respect shall result in the rejection of the tender.

36.3 The bidding documents are and shall remain the exclusive property of APL

without any right of the Bidder to use them for any purpose except bidding and for use by successful Bidder with reference to the work.

36.4 Any person/ bidder downloading the tender document from Owner‟s web site or

purchasing shall do so in strict confidence and shall not part with possession thereof or copy or disclose the provision thereof or any of them or disclose or take copies or tracings of any drawings, plans or routes forming part thereof, it being understood that the information therein are confidential and that the tender documents have been downloaded by the eligible bidder solely for the purpose of bidding.

36.5 Bidders are requested to read the document (Special Instruction to Bidders for

Participating in e-tender) SITB available on the moving scroll of the website https://assamtenders.gov.in/nicgep/app and a copy of the same is also provided along with tender document. Moreover bidders are requested to follow the instructions under “Bid Submission process” under “Bidders Manual Kit” section available in the homepage at the website.

36.6 The bidder shall submit their offer through e-tendering site as mentioned above,

following the steps in the e-tendering portal. Physical hard copies of uprice bid along with the EMD is to be send to the under noted address within 7(seven) days from unpriced bid due date and time.

General Manager (Projects), Assam Petrochemicals Limited P.O. Pabtpur, Namrup – 786623 Dist. Dibrugarh, Assam (India)


SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

36.7 The Owner shall not be responsible for delayed submission of offers or non-submission of offers due to any reason whatsoever. The responsibility of ensuring online & on-time submission of their offers lies entirely with the bidders. The bidders are requested to submit the bid online much before date and time of submission, failing which APL shall not be responsible for any such technical problem.

36.8 In order to bid for APL e-tenders, all the agencies are required to REGISTER in

Assam Tender Portal & obtain a legally valid Class-II & above Digital Signature Certificate (DSC) for their user who is authorized to submit bids on-line from the licensed Certifying Authority (CA). Bidders already possessing the digital signature issued from authorized CAs can use the same in this tender. Further, the bidder should ensure that the email address given in the Registration Form is valid & active as all the communications will be made through this e-mail.

36.9 On no account will any person to whom bidding documents are furnished, part

with possession thereof or copy or disclose the provisions thereof or any of them or disclose or take copies of tracings or of any drawing, plan or route forming part thereof, it being understood that the information therein is confidential, and that the bidding documents are therefore being furnished only to bidders in strictest confidence.

36.10 The details as called for in the bidding documents shall be filled and completed by

the Bidders in all respect and shall be submitted with requisite information and Appendixes/ Annexures.

36.11 If the space in any Performa of bidding document is insufficient, additional pages

shall be separately added. These shall be page numbered and shall also carry the bidding document number and shall be signed by the Bidder and entered in the Index for Bid.

36.12 Bidder shall clearly indicate their legal constitution and the person signing the bid

shall state his capacity as also the source of his ability to bind the Bidder. The Power of Attorney or Authorization or other document constituting adequate proof of the ability of the signatory to bind the Bidder, shall be annexed to the bid. APL may reject outright any bid unsupported by adequate proof of the signatory‟s authority.

36.13 The successful bid submission can be ascertained once acknowledgement is

given by the system through bid submission number after completing all the process & steps. Users may also note that the incomplete bids will not be saved by the system and are not available for processing and evaluation.

36.14 Agencies are advised to digitally sign the documents that are uploaded and

encrypt the file data before submitting to the e-tendering portal of Assam Government e- procurement portal by following the given procedure on-line mentioned in the e-portal site. The bid shall be digitally signed by someone legally authorized to enter into commitment on behalf of the Bidder. Bidder shall upload among other documents, Power of Attorney in favour of the person who is authorized to enter into commitments on behalf of the Bidder.

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

36.15 APL will not be bound by any Power of Attorney granted by the Bidder or changes

in the constitution of the firm made subsequent to submission of the bid or after the award of the contract. APL may, however, recognize such Power of Attorney and changes after obtaining proper legal advice, the cost of which will be borne by the Bidder.

36.16 The cancellation of any document such as Power of Attorney, Partnership Deed,

etc. should be communicated by the Bidder to APL in writing well in time, failing which APL shall have no responsibility or liability for any action taken by APL on the strength of the said documents.

36.17 Should the Bidder have a relative or relatives in APL or one or more of its share

holders are employed in a superior capacity in APL, the relevant authority inviting bids shall be informed of the facts at the time of submission of the bid, failing which the bid may be disqualified or if such fact subsequently comes to light, APL reserves the right to take any other action as it deems fit in accordance with any applicable law, Rules, Regulations of the like in force.

36.18 Bidders/Agencies shall ensure submission of complete information/

documentations in the first instance itself. APL reserves the right to complete the evaluation based on the details furnished by the agencies without seeking any subsequent additional information. Bids not in compliance with Bidding Document or with incomplete information documents are liable for rejection.

36.19 Canvassing in any form by the Bidder or by any other agency on their behalf may

lead to disqualification of their Bid. 36.20 Unsolicited clarifications to the offer and / or change in the prices during the

validity period would render the bid liable for rejection. 36.21 The bidding document that is downloaded shall be submitted on-line as per the

procedure stipulated in the website along with the digital signature. The bidding document shall not be transferred to any other agency. The digital signature shall be considered as your confirmation that you have read and accepted all the conditions laid down in the Tender Documents. Physical hard copies of Techno – Conmmercial Documents must also be submitted through Post/ Courier/ or in person within 7(seven) days from Bid due date & time (All documents excluding PRICE BID).

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ANNEXURE – I

PROFORMA FOR EMD

In consideration of Assam Petrochemicals Limited, having its Registered Office at Orion

Place, 4th floor, G.S. Road, Guwahati-5, Assam, India (hereinafter called „the Owner‟

which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context includes its successors

and assigns) having agreed to exempt M/s …………………………. (Hereinafter called

„the said Tenderer(s)‟ which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context

includes his successors and assigns) from the demand under the terms and conditions of

tender no. ………. for …………………… hereinafter called „the said Tender‟ of such

earnest money deposit for the due fulfillment by the said Tenderer(s) of the terms and

conditions contained in the said tender…………….. for ……………on production of bank

guarantee for an amount of INR 24,00,000/- (Rupees Twenty Four lakhs Only)

We ……………….. Bank hereinafter referred to as „the bank‟ do hereby undertake to pay

to the owner and amount not exceeding INR 24,00,000/- (Rupees Twenty Four lakhs

Only) against any loss or damage caused to or suffered or would be caused to or

suffered by the said owner by reason of any breach by the said Tenderer(s) of any of the

terms and conditions contained in the said tender (the decision of the owner as to any

such breach having been committed and loss suffered shall be binding on us).

1.We……………… Bank do hereby undertake to pay the amounts due and payable

under this guarantee without any demur merely on a demand from the owner stating that

the amount claimed is due by way of loss or damage caused to or would cause to or

suffered by the owner by reason of any breach by the said Tenderer(s) of any of the

terms and conditions contained in the said tender or by reason of the said Tenderer‟s

failure to keep the tender open. Any such demand made on the Bank shall be conclusive

as regards the amount due and payable by the Bank under this Guarantee. However, our

liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount not exceeding

INR 24,00,000/- (Rupees Twenty Four lakhs Only)

2.We……………. Bank further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall remain in

full force and effect during the period that would be taken for the finalization of the said

tender and that it shall continue to be enforceable till the said tender is finally decided

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

and order placed on the successful tenderer(s) and/or till all the dues of the owner

under/or by virtue of the said tender have been fully paid and its claims satisfied or

discharged or till a duly authorised officer, of the owner certifies that the terms and

conditions of the said tender have been fully and properly carried out by the said

Tenderer(s) and accordingly discharges the guarantee. Above provisions are applicable

subject to validity mentioned in para 4 (b).

3.We __________________Bank undertake not to revoke this guarantee during the

currency except with the previous consent of the Owner in writing. Upon expiration of this

Guarantee, this document is to be returned to the Bank for cancellation.

4. NOTWITHSTANDING anything contained hereinabove,

a. Our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount of INR 24,00,000/-

(Rupees Twenty Four lakhs Only)

b. This guarantee shall be valid upto ___________________________.

c. The Bank shall be released and discharged from all liability under this guarantee

unless a written claim or demand is received by the Bank on or before

______________________________.

The Bank hereby declares that it has the power to issue this guarantee and the

undersigned has fully power to do so.

dated……………. day of…………………….. 20……….

Corporate seal for bank

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ANNEXURE-II

SELF CERTIFICATION

I, ________________________S/O, D/O of _________________ working as CEO/ CFO/ Company Secretary (indicate as applicable) of the Company ____________________having its registered office _____________ at certify that all the details including documents pertaining to Bidder Qualification Criteria signed by undersigned vide our offer reference ____________against your Enquiry document ___________________________are true, authentic, genuine and exact copy of its original. It is certified that none of the documents are false/forged or fabricated. All the documents submitted have been made having full knowledge of; i) The provisions of the Indian laws in respect of offences including, but not

limited to those pertaining to criminal breach of trust, cheating and fraud

and

ii) Provisions of bidding conditions which entitle the Owner/PMC to initiate

action in the event of such declaration turning out to be a

misrepresentation or false representation.

I further certify that further documents, if any, required to be submitted by our company, shall be submitted under my knowledge and those documents shall also be true, authentic, genuine, exact copy of its original and shall not be false/forged or fabricated.

DECLARATION

I, ___________________________S/O, D/O of _______________working as CEO/ CFO/ Company Secretary (indicate as applicable) of the Company ________________having its registered office at __________________with reference to our bid_____________________ against your Enquiry document ___________________________, declare that in case, at a later date, any of the document submitted in our bid referred above is found to be false/forged or fabricated, I shall be held responsible for the same and Owner/PMC has every right to take action against me and my company, as deemed fit as per provisions of the BQ Documents including Owner/PMC right to put our company on Holiday / Black list for future business with Owner/PMC. Specimen Signature of authorized representative

Signature Name & Designation (CEO or CFO or Company Secretary)

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

CUT-OUT SLIPS TO BE USED BY VENDORS FOR PASTING ON COVER / ENVELOPES CONTAINING BIDS

COVER ENVELOPE CONTAINING

1. Sealed envelope no. 1: Containing Bid Fee + EMD + Integrity Pact duly signed.

2. Sealed envelope no. 2: Containing Three sets of “Unpriced Commercial Bid”, “Un-priced Technical Bid” and Documents related to Bid Qualification Criteria. 3. Sealed envelope no. 3: Containing Original Priced bid

Client : ASSAM PETROCHEMICAL LIMITED

PMC : M/s. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED.

Project : 500 TPD METHANOL AND 200 TPD FORMALIN PLANT

ENQUIRY No. : ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Item : ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bid due date & time : ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

From: _______________________________ _______________________________

_______________________________

_______________________________

To, The General Manager (Project),

Project Department, Assam Petrochemicals Limited, Namrup, P.O. Parbatpur, Dist- Dibrugarh, Pin -786623, Assam, India.

(To be pasted on the sealed cover containing envelope no. 1, 2 & 3)

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

DO NOT OPEN – THIS IS A QUOTATION

(ENVELOPE NO. 1: CONTAINS BID FEE + EMD + INTEGRITY PACT) Client : ASSAM PETROCHEMICAL LIMITED



ENQUIRY No. : -------------------------------------------------------------------

Item : -------------------------------------------------------------------

Bid due date & time : -------------------------------------------------------------------

From: ______________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

(To be pasted on the envelope no. 1 containing EMD+IP)

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


(ENVELOP NO. 2: CONTAINS UNPRICED COMMERCIAL BID, UNPRICED TECHNICAL BID AND DOCUMENT RELATED TO BID QUALIFICATION

CRITERIA) Client : ASSAM PETROCHEMICAL LIMITED



ENQUIRY No. : -------------------------------------------------------------------

Item : -------------------------------------------------------------------

Bid due date & time : -------------------------------------------------------------------

From: ______________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

(To be pasted on the envelope no. 2 containing Unpriced Commercial Bid + Unpriced Technical)

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-03




ISSUE R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


(ENVELOP NO. 3: CONTAINS PRICE BID)

Client : ASSAM PETROCHEMICAL LIMITED



ENQUIRY No. : -------------------------------------------------------------------

Item : -------------------------------------------------------------------

Bid due date & time : -------------------------------------------------------------------

From: ______________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________

(To be pasted on the envelope no. 3 containing Format for Submitting Prices with

duly filled prices)

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04


GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT SHEET: 1 OF 150

ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GENERAL CONDITION OF CONTRACTS

FOR

ASSAM PETROCHEMICAL LIMITED

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Preface

The General Conditions of Contract (GCC) shall be read in conjunction with

respective provisions specified in Special Conditions of Contract, Specifications,

Drawing and any other Part of the Contract. In case of irreconcilable conflicts, the

provisions under Clause 2.1.1 herein of General Conditions of Contract shall prevail.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Table of Contents

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION ………………………………………5

2. CONTRACT………………………………………………………………………16

3. COMMUNICATION…………………………………………………………… 17

4. STAMP DUTY……………………………………………………………………19

5. CONFIDENTIALITY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION………………19

6. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS…………………………………..20

7. BACKGROUND INFORMATION………………………………………………21

8. GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF OWNER……………………………………….21

9. GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTOR………………………………24

10. DESIGN, PLANS AND MANUALS…………………………………………….57

11. TRANSFER OF TITLE AND RISK……………………………………………...62

12. CONTRACTOR’S PERSONNEL………………………………………………...65

13. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND PRICE REDUCTION DUE TO DELAY

IN COMPLETION………………………………………………………………...70

14. EXTENSION OF TIME…………………………………………………………...70

15. MECHANICAL COMPLETION AND PRE- COMMISSIONING………………73

16. TESTS ON COMPLETION…………………………………………………….....75

17. COMPLETION……………………………………………………………………78

18. DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD…………………………………………………. 81

19. FINAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE………………………………………… 82

20. COMPENSATION………………………………………………………………. 82

21. CONTRACT PRICE……………………………………………………………... 83

22. TAXES AND DUTIES…………………………………………………………… 84

23. TERMS OF PAYMENT………………………………………………………….. 87

24. VARIATION………………………………………………………………………96

25. CHANGE IN LAW……………………………………………………………….98

26. SUSPENSION…………………………………………………………………….99

27. FORCE MAJEURE……………………………………………………………… 101

28. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY…………………………………………………. 102

29. REPRESENTATION AND WARANTIES………………………………………104

30. INDEMNITY…………………………………………………………………….. 105

31. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY………………………………………………….. 106

32. TERMINATION…………………………………………………………………..107

33. INSURANCE…………………………………………………………………….. 112

34. GOVERNING LAW AND JURSIDICTION……………………………………. 113

35. CLAIM AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION…………………………………………113

36. MISCELLANEOUS……………………………………………………………….116

APPENDIX 1…………………………………………………………………………...123

FORM OF CONTRACT PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE………………….123

APPENDIX 2…………………………………………………………………………..128

FORM OF MOBILIZATION ADVANCE GUARANTEE……………………………128

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 3…………………………………………………………………………133

SAFETY CODE………………………………………………………………………133

APPENDIX 4………………………………………………………………………….143

INDEMNITY BOND………………………………………………………………….143

APPENDIX 5…………………………………………………………………………..146

PART A……………………………………………………………………………146

FORMAT -I………………………………………………………………………..146

IMTIMATION REGARDING SYSTEM COMPLETION………………………..146

PART B…………………………………………………………………………….147

FORMAT – II………………………………………………………………………147

CHECKLIST……………………………………………………………………….147

APPENDIX 6…………………………………………………………………………..148

FORMAT – III………………………………………………………………………….148

READY FOR PRE -COMMISSIONING CERTIFICATE…………………………….148

APPENDIX 7………………………………………………………………………..…149

FORMAT -IV………………………………………………………………………..…149

READY FOR COMMISSIONING CERTIFICATE…………………………………..149

APPENDIX 8…………………………………………………………………………..150

FORMAT -V…………………………………………………………………………..150

COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING CERTIFICATE……………………………150

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

1. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

1.1 Definitions

In the Contract, capitalised words and expression defined by way of inclusion in

“parenthesis”, shall have the meaning so ascribed thereto. Further, in the Contract,

unless repugnant to the context thereof, the following words and expressions used in these General Conditions of Contract and elsewhere in the Contract, shall have the

meanings assigned to them hereunder:

(1) “Affected Party” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause 27.2.

(2) “Agreed Variations” shall mean the statement of agreed variations annexed to the

detailed Letter of Acceptance and any document signed by Owner and the Contractor

as an amendment of contract.

(3) “Applicable Laws” means all laws in force and effect, including Tax laws but excluding

direct Tax laws (which includes income tax, corporate tax, profession tax and wealth

tax), as of the Base Date and which may be promulgated or brought into force and effect

hereinafter including any revisions, amendments or re-enactments including without

limitation regulations, rules and notifications made thereunder and judgments, decrees,

injunctions, writs, orders and notifications issued by any court or Authority, as may be in

force and effect during the subsistence of the Contract and applicable to either Party,

their obligations or this Contract from time to time.

(4) “Appendix” means formats/enclosures attached to the General Conditions of

Contract.

(5) “Approval” and its grammatical variations shall mean approved or confirmed in writing

by Engineer-in-Charge on behalf of the Owner.

(6) “Arbitration Act” means the (Indian) Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996.

(7) “Authority” means the Government of India, any state government or any local

authority or any department, instrumentality or agency thereof or any corporation (to

the extent acting in a legislative, judicial or administrative capacity and not as a

contracting party with Owner or the Contractor) or commission under the direct or

indirect control of such central, state or local government or any political sub-division

thereof or any court, tribunal or judicial body within India.

(8) "Base Date" means the date 7 (seven) days prior to the last date for submission of the

Bid/revised Bid, if any.

(9) “Background Information” means all and any materials, data, documents, drawings,

plans, surveys, reports or other information relating in any way to the Site or the

Facility, whether or not made available by Engineer-in-Charge/ Owner and/or its

agents to the Contractor.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(10) "Bid" means the Contractor’s signed offer for the Works and all other documents

submitted along with the Bid.

(11) “Bidding Documents” mean the Notice Inviting Bids/ Letter Inviting Bids, the

instruction to bidders (including annexures), form of bid (including appendices), the

Contract Agreement, the General Conditions of Contract, the Special Conditions of

Contract, the Specifications and all other reports, surveys, drawings and documents

including amendments, if any, provided to the Contractor by TCE / Owner .

(12) “Billing Schedule” means the schedule submitted by the Contractor in accordance

with Clause 23.3.1, in terms of which Owner shall be required to make progressive

payments to the Contractor.

(13) “Bill of Quantities” means the bill of quantities as per the provisions of the Contract.

(14) “Business Day” means a day other than a Sunday or a public holiday on which banks

are open for business in Guwahati, Assam and any other place mentioned in the

Contract.

(15) “Change in Law” means the occurrence of any of the following after the Base Date:

(a) The enactment of any new law in India;

(b) The repeal, modification or re-enactment of any existing Indian law;

(c) The commencement of any Indian law which has not entered into effect until

the date of signing of the Contract;

(d) Change in the interpretation or application of any Indian law by Government

Authority via issuance of circulars/ clarifications or by a court which has

become final conclusive and binding;

(e) Increase/ Decrease in the rate of Taxes in force after the Base Date;

(f) Change in the basis of computation of Taxes in force after the Base Date, in such a manner that it has a material effect (positive or negative) on the

Contract.

Notwithstanding anything mentioned above, Change in Law will not include any

change in direct tax laws (which includes income tax, corporate tax, profession tax

and wealth tax) for which the Contractor is the responsible party

(16) “Clause” means a clause of this Contract.

(17) “Code-1 Approval” means final approval of drawings/documents incorporating all

comments of Engineer-in-Charge.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(18) “Code-2 Approval” means tentative approval of the drawings/documents by

Engineer-in-Charge with comments to be incorporated by Contractor, with the intent

that subject to incorporation of and/or rectification in accordance with such

comments, construction/manufacture can proceed based on commented

drawings/documents pending their re-submission and grant of Code-1 Approval.

(19) “Code-3 Approval” means that on review of the drawings/documents by Engineer-

in-Chargethe same have not been found in accordance with the applicable codes,

standards, design basis and contractual stipulations and must therefore be re-

submitted for review and approval after appropriate correction and/or re-preparation.

(20) “Commissioning” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 16.1.

(21) “Completion" shall mean the successful provision of all materials and inputs and the

successful completion and conclusion of all activities and tests (including the Tests on

Completion) required to complete the Works in accordance with the Contract, but

shall not include the obligation to rectify defects during the Defect Liability Period.

(22) “Completion Certificate” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 17.3.

(23) “Confidential Information” means the Contract and everything contained therein, all

documentation, data, particulars of the Works and technical or commercial

information made by (or on behalf of) Owner or obtained directly or indirectly from

Owner by the Contractor or which is generated or obtained by the Contractor or any

Subcontractor in relation to the Works or any information or data that the Contractor

receives or has access to as a result of the Contract, other than information:

(a) which is generally available in the public domain other than by any

unauthorised actions or fault of the Contractor; or

(b) that is in the possession of the Contractor with a right to disclose.

(24) “Contract” means the agreement between Owner and the Contractor for execution of

the Works and includes the Contract Agreement, the General Conditions of Contract,

the Special Conditions of Contract, the other Bidding Documents, the Specifications,

the Price Schedule, and such further documents which are listed in the Contract

Agreement and/or these General Conditions of Contract and includes any amendment

thereto made in accordance with the provisions hereof.

(25) “Contractor” means the entity/ person which has entered into the Contract

Agreement with the Owner, as identified in the Contract Agreement.

(26) “Contract Agreement” means the agreement entered into between Owner and the

Contractor along with the Price Schedule and other annexures and includes any

amendments thereto made in accordance with the provisions thereof.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(27) “Contract Performance Bank Guarantee” means a duly executed, irrevocable,

unconditional on demand bank guarantee that is to be procured and maintained by the

Contractor in accordance with Clause 9.4.2, to secure the due and proper performance

of the Contract.

(28) “Contract Validity Period” means the period commencing from the Effective Date

up to the end of the Defect Liability Period / Extended Defect Liability Period (as the

case maybe).

(29) “Contract Price” means the total price payable to the Contractor for performing the

Works based on the rates and breakdown of prices provided by the Contractor in the

Price Schedule, subject to such additions thereto and deductions therefrom as may be

made under the Contract and as adjusted by the actual quantities, if applicable, of the

items mentioned in the Price Schedule utilized in the execution of the Works.

(30) “Contract Spares” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 9.23.

(31) “Contractor's Documents” means the documents to be prepared by the Contractor

under the Contract including, without limitation, such technical documents specified

in the Specifications and such data, designs, information, calculations, specifications,

schedules, plans, test plans, programs, the Drawings and Designs, the Billing

Schedule, Test-Reports, As-Built-Drawings and all other information and documents

including eye readable or computer readable data relating to the execution of the

Works or otherwise for the performance of the Contract.

(32) “Contractor's Equipment” means Contractor’s machinery, apparatus, equipment,

material, vehicles, plant and all other things of whatsoever nature required for the

execution and Completion of the Works and remedying of any defects, but does not

include Plant, Goods and Materials and any other thing intended to form or forming a

part of the Permanent Works.

(33) “Contractor's Event of Default” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause

32.2.

(34) “Contractor's Insurance” has the meaning assigned to it in Clause 33.2.

(35) “Contractor's Personnel” means the Contractor's Representative and all personnel

whom the Contractor utilizes on Site, who may include the staff, labour and other

employees of the Contractor and of each Subcontractor, and any other personnel

assisting the Contractor in the execution of the Works.

(36) “Contractor's Representative” means the person nominated by the Contractor to act

on its behalf for the purposes of the Contract and notified as such in writing to

Engineer-in-Charge with copy to Owner.

(37) “Cost” means all expenditure reasonably and properly incurred by the Contractor,

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

whether on or off the Site and includes overhead, profit and similar charges.

(38) “Defect” means any defect, imperfection or other fault in the Facility or any part

thereof arising from or in connection with the execution of the Works or any defect,

imperfection or other shortcoming in the Contractor's Documents, or a breach of the

Contract or the neglect or failure of the Contractor to comply with any of its

obligations, express or implied, under the Contract and the term ‘Defective’ shall be

construed accordingly.

(39) “Defect Liability Period” means the period specified in Clause 18.1 for notifying

defects in the Works, calculated from the date of Completion as specified in the

Completion Certificate for the Works or part of the Works.

(40) “Dispute” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 35.2.

(41) “Design Data” means all specifications, sketches, plans, graphs, details, dimensions,

models and calculations provided as a part of the Bidding Documents and verified by

the Contractor.

(42) “Drawings and Designs” means the drawings and designs provided by Engineer-in-

Charge or prepared by the Contractor on the basis of the Design Data and submitted

to and Approved by the Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with Clause 9.13 & 10.5,

in accordance with which the Contractor shall proceed with the execution of the

Works.

(43) “Effective Date” means date of issuance of Fax of Acceptance/Letter of Award of

Work.

(44) “Engineer–in-Charge” or “TCE” means Tata Consulting Engineers Limited, a

company incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956 with its registered office at

Matulya Centre ‘A’,1st Floor, 249, Senapati Bapat Marg, Lower Parel (West),

Mumbai- 400013 and its Corporate Office at Unit no. NB 1502 & SB 1501 15th Floor

Empire Tower, Cloud City Campus, Thane- Belapur Road, Airoli, Navi Mumbai

400708 acting in its capacity as the Project Management Consultant (PMC) of the

Owner (which expression shall be deemed to include the successors, and assigns of

TCE).

(45) “Extended Defect Liability Period” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause

18.7.

(46) “Facility” means the facility to be construed under and in accordance with this

Contract and as described in greater detail in the Specifications.

(47) “Final Completion” shall mean the successful completion and discharge of all

obligations of the Contractor under the Contract, including the obligation to rectify

Defects, if any, during the Defect Liability Period and the Extended Defect Liability

Period, if any.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(48) “Final Completion Certificate” means the certificate issued by Owner to the

Contractor under Clause 19.

(49) “Final Bill” has the meaning assigned to it in Clause 23.5.

(50) “Force Majeure” has the meaning assigned to it in Clause 27.2.

(51) “Format-I” has the meaning assigned to it in Clause 15.4.

(52) “Format-II” has the meaning assigned to it in Clause 15.5.

(53) “Format-III” has the meaning assigned to it in Clause 15.5.

(54) “Format-IV” has the meaning assigned to it in Clause 15.10. 115.10.3.

(55) “Format-V” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 16.1.3.

(56) “Free Issue Materials” means any material, items, equipment, machinery, apparatus,

accessories, auxiliaries, spare parts, tools and tackles and articles and things provided

by Owner to the Contractor for incorporation in the Permanent Work and which shall

be bailed to the Contractor upon their delivery at Site in accordance with Clause

9.29.1.

(57) “General Conditions of Contract” or “GCC” means these General Conditions of

Contract.

(58) “Goods and Materials” means things of all kinds (other than Plant) intended to form

or forming a part of the Permanent Work, including materials (if any) to be supplied

by the Contractor under the Contract.

(59) “Good Industry Practice” means the exercise of that degree of skill, diligence,

prudence and foresight in compliance by the Contractor with the undertakings and

obligations under the Contract, which would be expected from a skilled and

experienced professional person engaged in works that are of the type, nature and

scope similar to the Works.

(60) “Guaranteed Performance Levels” means the guaranteed levels of performance set

out in the Contract that are needed to be met by the Plant, Goods and Materials, the

Works and the Facility on conduct of the Tests on Completion.

(61) “Intellectual Property” means copyright, registered and unregistered trademarks and

service marks, registered and unregistered designs, circuit layouts, all rights conferred

under statute, common law or equity in relation to inventions (including patents),

proprietary information and all other rights resulting from intellectual activity in the

industrial, scientific, literary or artistic fields.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(62) “INR” or “Rupees” means the legal currency of the Republic of India.

(63) “Key Date” means a date identified for the completion of a Stage set out in the Works

Completion Schedule, relating to execution of the Works, unless revised in

accordance with the terms of the Contract.

(64) “Key Personnel” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 12.2.

(65) “Letter of Award” or “LOA” / “Fax of Acceptance” or “FOA” means the Letter of

Award / Fax of Acceptance issued by Owner to the Contractor, awarding the Works

to the Contractor.

(66) “Mechanical Completion” shall have the meaning assigned to it under Clause 15.1.

(67) “Mobilisation” means the organisation of sufficient and adequate resources,

including labour, materials and equipment (including Contractor's Equipment and

Goods and Materials) by the Contractor for execution of the Works.

(68) “Mobilization Advance” means the amount specified in the Payment Schedule that is

paid by way of advance by Owner to the Contractor pursuant to Clause 23.1.

(69) “Mobilization Advance Guarantee" means a duly executed, irrevocable, and

unconditional on demand bank guarantee that is to be procured and maintained by the

Contractor as security for the Mobilization Advance received by the Contractor.

(70) “Monthly Progress Reports” means the monthly progress reports submitted by the

Contractor in accordance with the scope of Works / Contract.

(71) “Operation and Maintenance Manuals” means the operation and maintenance

manual submitted by the Contractor in accordance with Clause 10.7.

(72) “Owner” shall mean Assam Petro-chemicals Limited, with its registered office at 4th

Floor, Orion Place, Bhangagarh, G.S. Road, Guwahati - 781005.

(73) “Owner's Insurance” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 33.1.

(74) “Owner's Personnel” means all staff and employees of Owner.

(75) “Payment Milestones” means the milestones listed in the Payment Schedule.

(76) “Payment Schedule” means the document containing the terms of payment of the

Contract Price to the Contractor as annexed to the Contract Agreement.

(77) “Performance Compensation” means the compensation to be paid by the Contractor

to Owner as compensation for failure of the Facility and the Works to meet the

Guaranteed Performance Levels under Clause 20.1.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(78) “Performance Tests” means the tests described in the Specifications which are to be

carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract in order to demonstrate

compliance with the Guaranteed Performance Levels.

(79) “Performance Guarantee Test Run” or “PGTR” means the continuous operation of

the Facility for a period, in accordance with the Contract, on full load during the Trial

Operations.

(80) “Permanent Works” means the permanent works to be executed by the Contractor

(including all permanent structures and all work intended to form a continuing

function after Completion of the Works) in accordance with the Contract.

(81) “Person” or “person” means an individual, partnership, limited partnership,

corporation, trust, joint stock company, unincorporated association, joint venture or

Authority.

(82) “Plant” means any and all permanent plant, equipment, machinery, apparatus, articles

and things of all kinds to be provided for incorporation or intended to be incorporated

(whether later incorporated in the Facility or otherwise, including Contract Spares) in

the Facility whether or not supplied from outside India or from within India, but does

not include consumables, Contractor's Equipment and Goods and Materials.

(83) “Pre-Commissioning” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 15.10.

(84) “Price Schedule” or “Schedule of Rates” shall mean the price schedule annexed to

the Contract Agreement.

(85) “Project” means the development, design, procurement, engineering and

construction, erection, commissioning, testing, operation and maintenance of the

Facility as applicable.

(86) “Punch List” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 15.6.

(87) “Punch-list Items” means items of works of a minor or snagging nature which do not

affect the operations of the Facility which remain incomplete on the date of issuance

of Format-III.

(88) “Quality Assurance Plan/Project Quality Plan” means the Approved quality

assurance plan and manual developed by Contractor in accordance with Clause 9.19.

(89) “Related Dispute” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 35.2.6.

(90) “Review Period” means the period of 14 (fourteen) days unless specified elsewhere

in the Contract, within which the Engineer-in-Charge shall endeavor to complete the

review of the Contractor’s Documents, as calculated from the date of submission of

the relevant Contractor’s Document.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(91) “Running Bill” means the fully supported invoice delivered to Owner Engineer-in-

Charge by the Contractor at the times set out in the Payment Schedule, containing all

the requisite information and complying with all the requirements set out at Clause

23.3.2.

(92) “Safety Code” means the safety code set out at Appendix 3 (Safety Code).

(93) “Secured Advance” means the amount specified in the Payment Schedule that is paid

by Owner to the Contractor pursuant to Clause 23.2.

(94) “Site” means the land, location, right of way and/or places provided by Owner where

the Works are to be executed and to which Plant and Goods and Materials are to be

delivered and any other place as may be specifically designated in the Contract as

forming part of the Site or designated as such by the Engineer-in-Charge.

(95) “Special Conditions of Contract” or “SCC” means the special conditions of contract

setting out specific deviations from the General Conditions of Contract and other

relevant provisions and data, which are to be read in conjunction with the General

Conditions of Contract.

(96) “Specifications” means all general and technical specifications and directions

attached to and forming a part of the Bidding Documents which describe the purpose,

scope, design and technical criteria of the Works including, the method and manner of

performing the Works, the quality and quantity of the Works to be performed and the

materials to be supplied under the Contract and includes all modifications or

amendments made thereto.

(97) “Stage” means the level of progress of the Works identified as such in Works

Completion Schedule.

(98) “Subcontract” means any contract awarded by the Contractor to a Subcontractor.

(99) “Subcontractor” means any person named in the Contract as a subcontractor or an

original manufacturer, supplier of any Goods and Materials, Plant, labour or services

for the Works or any person to whom a part of the Works has been subcontracted by

the Contractor with the prior Approval of Engineer- in- Charge, as the case may be,

and the permitted legal successors in title to such person, but not any assignee of such

person.

(100) “Submissions Schedule” has the meaning assigned to it in Clause 9.13.1

(101) “Suspension Order” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 26.1.

(102) “Taxes” means all taxes, duties, imposts, levies and charges pursuant to any law

(whether currently in force or coming into force on or after the date of base date as

defined above), including income tax, capital gains tax, Value Added Tax (“VAT”),

Central Sales Tax (“CST”), works contract tax (WCT), customs duty, service tax,

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

excise duty, fees, cess, octroi, entry tax, fringe benefit tax and any interest, surcharge,

penalty or fine in connection therewith.

(103) “Temporary Works” means all temporary and ancillary works including enabling

works and maintenance works connected with the Works and required for the

execution and completion of the Permanent Works.

(104) “Tests on Completion” mean the tests which are specified in the Contract and

designated as such and includes any other tests that have to be carried out before the

Works, or any part thereof is taken over by Owner.

(105) “Time for Completion” or “Time Schedule” means the period specified in the

Contract Agreement or the Special Conditions of Contract for Completion of the

Works, reckoned from the Effective Date.

(106) “Time for Mobilisation” means the period specified in Clause 9.3.2 for completion

of Mobilisation, to be reckoned from the Effective Date.

(107) “Trial Operation” means the integrated operation of the Facility in automatic control

system for a continuous period specified in the Contract or the Specifications.

(108) “Variation” means any alteration and/or modification to the Specifications, which is

instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge or as suggested by the Contractor and Approved

as a variation by the Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with Clause 24.

(109) “Variation Order” shall have the meaning assigned to it in Clause 24.1.

(110) “Week” means a period of any consecutive seven days.

(111) “Working Day” means a day other than a Sunday or a public holiday on which

Owner is open for business.

(112) “Works” means:

(a) all work and services required in connection with the turnkey design,

engineering, procurement, permitting, fabrication, manufacture, construction,

construction management, coordination of Subcontractors work, inspection,

expediting, transportation, shipment, delivery, import, erection, installation,

pre-commissioning, commissioning, start-up, testing and completion of the

Facility, completion of all Performance Tests, in accordance with this

Contract;

(b) the provision of all Plant, Goods and Materials, Contract Spares, machinery,

tools, labor, utilities, chemicals, lubricants consumables, transportation,

administration, oversight, incidentals and other services and items related to

the foregoing in accordance with this Contract;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(c) the correction of defects in the Facility; and

(d) the performance of all other obligations and services that are described in, or

necessarily implied by, this Contract.

(113) “Works Completion Schedule” means the schedule for the performance of the

Works and fulfilment of the Parties' obligations as annexed to the Contract

Agreement/Special Conditions of Contract, as may be revised in accordance with the

terms of the Contract.

(114) “Works Programme” means the program showing the sequence, method and

schedule of the design, procurement, construction, erection, installation, testing,

commissioning of the Works (and related activities in the form and content prescribed

by the Specifications, or any amended or varied version thereof, as submitted by the

Contractor and for which the Engineer-in-Charge has issued a notice of no objection.

1.1 Interpretation

In the Contract, except where the context requires otherwise:

(a) References to any statute or statutory provision or order or regulation made

thereunder shall include that statute, provision, order or regulation as

amended, modified, re-enacted or replaced from time to time whether before

or after the date hereof.

(b) References to persons shall include corporate bodies, unincorporated

associations, partnerships and any organisation or entity having legal

capacity.

(c) Headings of General Conditions of Contract or of the Specification or of any

other Bidding Document are solely for the purpose of giving general

guidance for convenience in reading and segregating the general subject

matter of various clauses and are not a summary of contents thereof and shall

not form part of the operative provisions of the Contract and shall not govern

the meaning or importation of the clauses thereunder.

(d) References to Clauses or Schedules are, unless the context otherwise requires,

references to recitals, clauses of, or, schedules to these General Conditions of

Contract.

(e) Unless the context otherwise requires, reference to one gender includes a

reference to the other, words importing the singular include the plural and

vice versa.

(f) References to the words “include” or “including” shall be construed as being

suffixed by the term “without limitation”.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(g) Reference to an agreement, deed, instrument or other document include the

same as amended, novated, supplemented, varied or replaced from time to

time.

(h) Words indicating the singular also include the plural and words indicating the

plural also include the singular.

(i) Provisions of the Contract including the word “agree”, “agreed” or

“agreement” require the agreement to be recorded in writing.

(j) The expression “writing” or “written” shall include communications by telex,

e-mail, telegram, facsimile (fax) and letter.

(k) If any provision in Clause 0 is a substantive provision conferring a right or

imposing an obligation on any Party, effect shall be given to it as if it were a

substantive provision in the body of the Contract.

(l) The Schedules shall form an integral part of the Contract and shall be in full

force and effect as though they were expressly set out in the body of the

Contract.

(m) Where the day on or by which any thing is to be done is not a Business Day

or a Working Day, as the case may be, that thing must be done on or by the

immediately occurring next Business Day or Working Day, as the case may

be.

(n) The rule of construction, if any, that a contract should be interpreted against

the party responsible for the drafting and the preparation thereof, shall not

apply to the Contract.

(o) No verbal agreement, assurance, representation or understanding given by

any employee or officer of Owner or Engineer-in-Charge or so understood by

the Contractor, whether given or understood before or after the execution of

the Contract, shall bind Owner or alter the Contract documents unless

specifically given in writing and signed by Owner or Engineer-in-Charge and

the Contractor’s authorised representative as an agreed variation and

amendment of the relative term(s) in the Contract.

(p) Subject to Clause 2 below, all documents forming part of the Contract are to

be read together as a whole and are to be taken as mutually explanatory.

2 CONTRACT

2.1.1 The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one

another. If there is an ambiguity or discrepancy in the documents, the Engineer-in-

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Charge shall issue necessary clarifications or instructions to the Contractor, and the

order of precedence of the documents shall be as follows:

(a) Contract Agreement

(b) Detailed Letter of Acceptance along with its enclosures

(c) Letter of Award / Fax of Acceptance

(d) Job Specifications

(e) Technical Specifications

(f) Drawings

(g) Special Conditions of Contract

(h) Instruction to Bidders

(i) General Conditions of Contract

(j) Standards specifications/Indian Standards/International Standards

(k) Other Documents

Without prejudice to the foregoing priority of the documents forming the Contract, any

ambiguity, discrepancy or inconsistency in the applicability of certain clauses/ provisions in the Contract having regard to the scope of work and overall nature and extent of the

Contractor’s obligations in respect thereof, the Contractor may approach the Engineer-in-

Charge for a clarification. Where the Engineer-in-Charge provides any clarification (and/ or any instructions in furtherance thereof) the same shall be binding on the Contractor, and the

Contractor shall be obliged to comply with any such clarification without any revision of the

Contract Price or extension of the Time for Completion.

Provided that in the absence of any clarification (and/or instructions) by the Engineer-in-

Charge on the said ambiguity, discrepancy or inconsistency and/ or the Contractor not having

made a request for such clarification, the condition and/ or interpretation that prescribes a more stringent obligation on the Contractor shall prevail.

3 COMMUNICATION

3.1 No verbal agreement, assurance, representation or understanding given by any

employee or officer of Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge or so understood by the

Contractor, whether given or understood before or after the execution of the Contract

shall bind Owner or alter the Contract unless specifically given in writing.

3.2 Any consent, approval, authorization, certificate, report, information, notice or request

from or by any Party or the Engineer-in-Charge shall be effective and valid only when

made in writing under the hand of a duly authorized representative of such Party or

the Engineer-in-Charge, as the case may be, and delivered by hand against receipt,

sent by the recognized courier, registered mail or transmitted by facsimile

transmission, e-mail to the address for the recipient's communication as stated in

Clause 3.3 below. In case any notice is delivered by registered mail and/or courier, it

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

shall be deemed to be duly served within forty eight (48) hours after posting and a

notice or demand sent by facsimile, e-mail shall be deemed to have been served at the

time of its transmission and in proving service of the same, it will be sufficient to

prove, in the case of a letter, that such letter was sent by registered airmail, addressed

and placed in the post and in the case of a facsimile transmission, e-mail that such

facsimile/ e-mail was duly transmitted to a current facsimile number/ e-mail of the

addressee at the address referred above.

3.3 Any contractual notice, instruction, decision, order, report, certificate or other

communication that is to be exchanged between the Parties shall be served by sending

the same by e-mail or facsimile transmission, with a confirmation copy by courier or

registered post to the following addresses:

If to Owner:

Address:

To,

The General Manager (Project),

Project Department,



Assam, India.


Tel. No.: 0374-2500331

Fax. No.: 0374-2500231


If to the Contractor: (to be filled later)

Address: [■]

Attention: [■]

e-mail: [■]

Fax: [■]

If to TCE:

Address:

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED

Unit no. NB 1502 & SB 1501,15th Floor, Empire Tower,

Opposite Reliable Tech Park Cloud City Campus, Airoli,

Navi Mumbai, India, 400 708

Contact person: Mr. Sandip De

Tel. No.: 022-61148945


It is clarified that a copy of any notice or notice, instruction, decision, order, report,

certificate or other communication under this Agreement by the Contractor to Owner,



DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

shall also be forwarded by the Contractor to TCE, at the time such communication is

made.

3.4 Any change in the address for communication shall be duly notified by Owner and/or

the Contractor to the other Party in accordance with the provisions of this Clause 3.

4 STAMP DUTY

Stamp duties, registration fees (if any) and any related charges payable under the

Applicable Laws in relation to the Contract shall be borne by the Contractor.

5 CONFIDENTIALITY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

5.1 Both Parties shall treat the details of the Contract as private and confidential, except

to the extent necessary to carry out obligations under it or to comply with Applicable

Laws. The Contractor shall not publish, permit to be published, or disclose any

particulars of the Works in any trade or technical paper or elsewhere without prior

consent of Owner.

5.2 The Contractor shall treat the Confidential Information as private and confidential,

save in so far as may be necessary for the fulfilment of its obligations under the

Contract, and shall not use, copy, publish, disclose or otherwise deal with, nor cause nor permit its Subcontractors or any persons for whom it is contractually or otherwise

responsible for, to use, copy, publish, disclose or otherwise deal with the Confidential

Information, without prior consent in writing of Owner. If any dispute arises as to the

necessity of any publication or disclosure for the purpose of the Contract the same shall be referred to the decision of Owner, whose award shall be final.

Without limiting the generality of the foregoing paragraph:

(a) the Contractor shall take all practicable steps to ensure that no

photographs, drawings or other image of the Site or of the Works or any part thereof or any property of Owner or any physical or virtual

model thereof, are taken or made, except as may be expressly directed

or Approved beforehand in writing by Owner;

(b) the Contractor shall not in regard to anything concerning the Works

publish any information, drawing or photograph and shall not give

interviews to or comment to the press or to any person associated with the news media or take part in radio or television schedules

except with the express prior written consent of Owner and subject to

such conditions as it may prescribe;

(c) the Contractor shall not use any part of the Site for the purpose of any

advertisement, except by way of notice boards approved (as to

location, number and content) by Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge; and

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(d) the Contractor shall use its reasonable endeavours to procure that its

servants and agents comply with this sub-Clause.

5.3 The Contractor shall procure that each and every Subcontractor shall contain

confidentiality undertakings on the part of the Subcontractor in substantially similar

terms to those entered into by the Contractor, and shall use all reasonable endeavours to enforce them.

5.4 In the event that the Contractor is lawfully required or requested by order of any

competent Authority to disclose any Confidential Information, then the Contractor shall, to the extent permitted by the Applicable Laws, prior to disclosure immediately

notify Owner and Engineer-in-Charge so that an appropriate protection order and/or

any other action can be taken if possible, prior to any disclosure. In the event that such protective order is not, or cannot, be obtained, then the Contractor may disclose to the

competent Authority that portion of the Confidential Information which it is legally

required to disclose and shall use all reasonable endeavours to obtain assurances that confidential treatment will be accorded to any Confidential Information so disclosed.

5.5 The Contractor agrees that, upon request at any time by Owner, the Contractor shall

promptly, but in any event within 5 (five) days of receipt of written notification from Owner:

(a) return all Confidential Information that is in tangible form (including,

without limitation, Confidential Information contained in software or on computer disc) furnished to the Contractor, together with all

copies or extracts thereof; and

(b) destroy all analysis, compilations, studies or other documents which have been prepared upon or reflect in any way the Confidential

Information.

5.6 The provisions of this Clause 5 shall survive the expiration or termination of the

Contract.

6 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS

6.1 The Contractor shall, in performing the Contract, comply with all Applicable Laws.

6.2 Without prejudice to the foregoing, the Contractor shall be responsible for bearing all

registration and statutory inspection fees payable under any Applicable Laws in

respect of the Works executed or completed pursuant to the Contract. If the

Contractor defaults in complying with the Applicable Laws, the Contractor shall, at

its own risk and Cost, bear any and all additional fees, fines, penalties or charges.

However, Owner shall make reasonable efforts to assist the Contractor in rectifying

any such default under Applicable Laws in India upon the Contractor's specific

request, including any specific request to issue letters to the relevant Authorities on

behalf of the Contractor.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

6.3 The Contractor shall not be absolved from any of its obligations under Applicable

Laws or the Contract or claim any additional amount from Owner or seek any

extension of the Time for Completion due to its ignorance of any Applicable Law.

This Clause 6.3 shall not however restrict the right of the Contractor to claim increase

in cost due to Change in Law in accordance with the provisions of Clause 25.

7 BACKGROUND INFORMATION

7.1 Should there be any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the Contract or

contradiction in the various documents that comprise the Contract or should there be

any discernible error or omission in any document comprising the Contract, the

Contractor shall, prior to commencing the Work likely to be affected by such

ambiguity, error or omission, apply in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge for resolving

the ambiguity or rectifying the error, as the case may be. If the Contractor fails to

apply to the Engineer-in-Charge prior to commencing the relevant Work, the

Contractor shall perform such Work at its own risk and if the Work are at variance

with the requirements of the Contract, then such Work shall be deemed to Defective

Work and the provisions of Clause 9.16 shall apply.

7.2 The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge on any application under Clause 7.1 shall be

in writing and shall be final and binding on the Contractor and shall form part of the

Contract.

7.3 The Parties agree that any ambiguity, discrepancy, inconsistency, divergence,

impracticality or omission as aforesaid shall not vitiate the Contract.

7.4 As soon as possible following a request from the Engineer-in-Charge to do so, the

Contractor shall provide such reasonable information as the Engineer-in-Charge may

request to assist it in resolving the ambiguity or rectifying the error, including if so

requested, the Contractor's proposals for overcoming the ambiguity, discrepancy,

inconsistency, divergence, impracticality or omission (as the case may be) but the

Engineer-in-Charge shall not be obliged to adopt or instruct the same.

7.5 The Contractor is required to make all necessary inquiries and fully acquaint himself

with all Background Information, and the Contractor acknowledges that any failure to

acquaint itself with the Background Information shall not relieve its responsibility for

properly estimating the difficulty or cost of successfully performing its obligations

under the Contract and Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge shall have no responsibility to

the Contractor (whether in contract, tort, for breach of statutory duty or howsoever

other arising) for or in relation to such Background Information whether as to its

accuracy, adequacy, sufficiency or completeness.

8 GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF OWNER

8.1 Access to and Possession of the Site

8.1.1 Owner shall provide access the Site to the Contractor for the execution of the Works.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract, in the event of delay in transfer

of the Site by Owner to the Contractor, for reasons not attributable to the Contractor,

the Contractor shall only be entitled to a reasonable extension of the Time for

Completion pursuant to Clause 14. The Contractor shall take all necessary

precautions to ensure that no damage is caused to any building or establishment

within the Site. The Contractor shall be liable for any loss suffered by Engineer-in-

Charge/ Owner/ third party on account of damage to the Site or any building or

establishment within the Site. The Contractor shall ensure that day to day activities of

Engineer-in-Charge/ Owner are not hampered because of Works executed by the

Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure that until the issuance of the Completion

Certificate (Owner shall start operations from Commercial Operation Date (COD)

upon completion of the Trial Operations), in accordance with Clause 17 by Owner,

Owner's Personnel, their representatives and assignees shall have the right to visit the

Site at any time and inspect or audit the Contractor's books and records relating to the

execution and completion of the Works.

8.1.2 Without prejudice to Clause 8.1.1 above, the Contractor agrees that the Site will be

handed over to the Contractor in stages with a view that the Contractor shall plan the

Works in a manner so as to achieve Completion in a sequential manner, without

affecting the Time for Completion and without starting all the Works at the same

time. To this end, within 28 (twenty eight) Working Days from the Effective Date,

the Contractor shall finalize, in agreement with the Engineer-in-Charge, sequential

requirement of the Site, taking into account the other works concurrently being

undertaken by Owner at or about the Site or on the performance of which depends the

Contractor’s performance of the Works.

8.2 Permits, Licenses or Approvals

Without prejudice to the obligations of the Contractor, contained in the Contract, if

requested by the Contractor, Owner shall use its reasonable endeavours to assist the

Contractor in obtaining in a timely and expeditious manner all permits, approvals and/or licenses necessary for the execution of the Contract from all local, state or

national government authorities or public service undertakings, in India that such

authorities or undertakings require the Contractor or Subcontractors or the personnel

of the Contractor or Subcontractors, may require, as the case may be, pursuant to Applicable Law in India.

8.3 Owner's Personnel

Without prejudice to the obligations of the Contractor under the Contract, Owner/

Engineer-in-Charge shall be responsible for ensuring that Owner's/ Engineer-in-

Charge’s Personnel:

(a) co-operate with the Contractor's and the Contractor’s Personnel; and

(b) take actions similar to those which the Contractor is required to take under

Clause 9.16, on the Site, in respect of any other works undertaken by Owner

at the Site.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

8.4 Authority of TCE as the PMC

8.4.1 The Owner has appointed TCE to undertake the role of the Project Management

Consultant (PMC) with respect to the Facility and the Work, and to act on behalf of

Owner in connection with the Contract as Engineer-in-Charge.

8.4.2 Engineer-Charge may exercise the authority attributable to it as specified in the

Contract. Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, Engineer-in-Charge

shall have the authority to undertake, on behalf of the Owner, all examinations, inspection, checks, tests and/ or like actions, and provide, on behalf of the Owner, any

approval, certificate, consent, instruction, notice, proposal, request and/ or like

actions, in each case, in the same manner, and to the extent, as available to the Owner

under the Contract.

Provided that:

(a) Engineer-in-Charge shall have no authority to amend the Contract; and

(b) Engineer-in-Charge shall have no authority to relieve either Party of any

duties, obligations or responsibilities under the Contract, unless expressly

authorised.

8.4.3 Engineer-in-Charge (and its officers, advisors, representatives, agents, personnel and

employees), shall, in performing its duties or exercising authority under the Contract,

shall be entitled to the benefit of all indemnifications, and like protections, available

to the Owner under, or pursuant to the Contract.

8.4.4 Except as otherwise stated in these Conditions:

(a) whenever carrying out duties or exercising authority, specified in or implied

by the Contract, Engineer-in-Charge shall be deemed to act for the Owner;

and

(b) any approval, check, certificate, consent, examination, inspection, instruction,

notice, proposal, request, test, or similar act by Engineer-in-Charge

(including absence of disapproval) shall not relieve the Contractor from any

responsibility he has under the Contract, including responsibility for errors,

omissions, discrepancies and non-compliances.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

8.4.5 Delegation by Engineer-in-Charge: Engineer-in-Charge may from time to time assign

duties and delegate authority to its representatives, and may also revoke such assignment or delegation. These representatives may include an engineer, and/or

independent inspectors appointed to inspect and/or test items of Goods and Materials,

Plant, other Works and/ or any Contractor’s Equipment. Any approval, check, certificate, consent, examination, inspection, instruction, notice, proposal, request,

test, or similar act by representative, in accordance with the delegation, shall have the

same effect as though the act had been an act of Engineer-in-Charge.

9 GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTOR

9.1 General Obligations

9.1.1 The Contractor shall execute the Works, as described in greater details in the

Specifications, in accordance with the Contract, the Specifications, the Safety Code

and Applicable Laws. The Works shall be fit for the purposes for which they are

intended, as defined in the Contract. The Works shall include any work which is

necessary to satisfy the Specifications, or as implied by the Contract, or arises from

any obligation of the Contractor, and all works not mentioned in the Contract but

which are necessary for stability, completion or the safe, reliable and efficient

operation of the Facility.

9.1.2 The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that at any time after acceptance of the Bid,

Owner shall have the right to add, amend or delete any item of the Works in the

overall interest of the Project. Further, Owner shall have the right to split the scope of

Works under this Contract between two or more contractors without assigning any

reasons thereof.

9.1.3 The Contractor shall execute the Works in accordance with the Works Completion

Schedule and shall complete each Stage within the relevant Key Date and the entire

Works within the Time for Completion and for this purpose the Contractor shall

provide such necessary resources, Goods and Materials, Plant and Contractor's

Personnel having the requisite experience for the purposes stated in the Contract.

9.1.4 The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that it shall perform all of its obligations

and responsibilities under the Contract at its own risk, Cost and expense. Owner shall

have no obligation or responsibility whatsoever with respect to the Completion of the

Works or the fulfillment of other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract,

except as expressly provided in the Contract.

9.1.5 The Contractor shall provide all superintendence, Goods and Materials and

Contractor's Equipment and all other things, whether of a temporary or permanent

nature, required for the execution of the Works.

9.1.6 Wherever applicable, the Contractor shall submit within 56(fifty six) days from the

Effective Date, a detailed Bill of Quantities, specifying the materials which, on a

preliminary determination made by the Contractor, will be required for incorporation

in the Permanent Work. Each item entered in the Bill of Quantities shall be priced, to

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

the extent possible, in conformity with the details given in the Bid. Engineer-in-

Charge shall review or cause to be reviewed the adequacy, sufficiency, validity and/or

suitability of the materials listed in the Bill of Quantities and of the prices indicated in

the Bill of Quantities in this regard. Such review shall be performed in conjunction

with design, engineering and other technical reviews to be done by Engineer-in-

Charge and all provisions applicable to review of critical drawings and designs shall

be applicable to the review of the Bill of Quantities. However, no such review or

Approval of the priced Bill of Quantities by Engineer-in-Charge shall absolve the

Contractor of its obligation to supply all Goods and Materials required to be

incorporated in the Permanent Work, within the price quoted for such Goods and

Materials in the Price Schedule.

9.1.7 The Contractor shall supply all materials, works, labour and other services, which

although not specifically mentioned in the Contract:

(a) can be reasonably inferred from and is necessary for the execution of the

Works, in accordance with Good Industry Practice, including where the

Contract describes any portion of the Works in general terms but not in

complete detail; or

(b) that are necessary in order for the Contractor to cause the Facility to satisfy

the Guaranteed Performance Levels and the warranties set forth in the

Contract or as otherwise necessary in order to meet the purposes for which

the Facility is being developed,

as if such superintendence, materials, works, labour and other services were expressly

mentioned in the Contract. The performance of such obligations by the Contractor

shall not be construed as a Variation and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any revision of the Contract Price or extension of the Time for Completion.

9.1.8 The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the methods of construction,

adequacy, stability and safety of the operations carried out at the Site relating the

execution of the Works, all Contractor's Documents, Goods and Materials,

Contractor's Equipment, irrespective of any Approval or consent by the Engineer-in-

Charge.

9.1.9 The Works shall be free of all Defects in materials and workmanship and shall be

adequate, stable, safe and strictly compliant with the instructions of Engineer-in-

Charge, the Drawings and Designs, the Specifications and Good Industry Practice,

such that the Facility when complete shall be capable of meeting the Guaranteed

Performance Levels.

9.1.10 The Contractor shall use proven and reliable technologies, configurations and

architecture and exercise strict professional standards of skill, care and diligence,

adhered to by experienced and competent contractors specializing in performing

services of the same type and magnitude.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.1.11 Within 30 (thirty) days of the Effective Date, the Contractor shall, to the extent

necessary, register itself and the Contract, at its own Cost, with Reserve Bank of

India, Income Tax Authorities, Sales Tax Authorities, Excise Authorities and other

relevant statutory Authorities and provide copies of all documents related to such

registrations to Owner for record.

9.1.12 Notwithstanding anything contained herein, the Contractor shall obtain and maintain

all permits, licenses and approvals required for the execution of the Works as per

Applicable Laws.

9.1.13 (a) If there is any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the Contract or

error, omission or contradiction therein or any of them, the Contractor shall

prior to commencing the relative work, apply in writing to the Engineer-in-

Charge for his decision in resolution of the doubt, ambiguity, contradiction or

correction of the error or omission, as the case may be. Should the Contractor

fail to apply to the Engineer-in-Charge for his decision, as aforesaid, prior to

commencing the relative Work, the Contractor shall perform the said work at

his own risks, and the provisions of Clause 9.1.13(b) hereof shall apply to any

such Work performed by the Contractor.

(b) In the event of the Contractor having already performed or executed any Work at variance with the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as aforesaid,

then, notwithstanding payment in respect of such Work having made to the

Contractor, such Work shall be deemed to be Defective Work and the relevant provisions hereof and associated Clauses thereunder shall apply

thereto.

9.1.14 The Contractor is deemed to have satisfied itself as to the correctness and sufficiency

of the Specifications and other terms of the Contract relating to its risks, liabilities

and obligations set out in or implied by the Contract and all matters and things

necessary for the proper execution of the Works.

9.1.15 The Contractor shall take all steps to cause minimum disturbance of vehicular traffic

and other movement of the public, on or in the vicinity of the Site.

9.1.16 Without prejudice to the provisions of the Contract and notwithstanding any testing or

certification pursuant to this Contract, Owner shall at any time during the subsistence

of this Contract, have the right (but not the obligation) to reject any part of the Works,

the Plant, the Goods and Materials, or the Contractor's Equipment, which is found not

to be in compliance with the requirements of this Contract including, the

Specifications.

9.1.17 In such a situation, Owner may instruct the Contractor to:

(a) remove from the Site and replace the rejected Plant, Goods and Materials or

Contractor's Equipment or re-instate the Works; or

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(b) execute any work which is urgently required for the safety of the Works,

whether because of an accident, unforeseeable event or otherwise,

in accordance with the requirements of this Contract, the cost of which shall be to the

sole account of the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with the instruction

within a reasonable time, which shall be the time (if any) specified in the instruction,

or immediately if urgency is of the nature specified under paragraph (b).

9.1.18 If the Contractor fails to proceed with the repair or replacement of the rejected item

of the Works or the Contractor's Equipment within reasonable time, Owner may, by

contract with third Persons or otherwise, repair or replace such part of the Works

and/or terminate this Contract pursuant to Clause 32.2 and the Contractor shall be

liable to reimburse Owner upon demand for all costs and damages incurred by Owner

relating to such repair or replacement by a third party.

9.1.19 If Owner requires the Works, Goods and Materials, Contractor's Equipment or

workmanship to be retested after such remedy of the Defect therein or replacement,

the tests required to be conducted under this Contract and as instructed by Owner

shall be repeated under the same terms and conditions. If the rejection and retesting

cause Owner to incur additional costs, the Contractor shall pay these costs to Owner.

9.1.20 The Contractor shall provide, comply with and require and ensure that its

Subcontractors also provide and comply with such documentation/information or any

other support as may be requested by Owner from time to time as may reasonably be

deemed fit by Owner for meeting its obligation under any Applicable Laws for the

time being in force or in relation to the said Works, as also matters including but not

limited to exemptions, concessions etc. as may be availed, sought to be availed by

Owner.

9.1.21 The Contractor shall furnish to Owner, promptly upon request, such information

concerning the Contractor, its Subcontractors and their respective employees or the

Works as Owner may be required to furnish to any competent Authority for the

procurement of any licences, permits or approvals mentioned in Clause 8.2.

9.1.22 To the extent possible, the information regarding existing structures/ overhead lines,

existing pipelines and utilities are already indicated on alignment sheets forming part

of the Background Information. However, the Contractor may encounter other

structures/ pipelines/ optical fiber cables etc. that may not be appearing on alignment

sheets, for which, the Contractor is required to collect information on his own before

commencing the Work. The Contractor shall execute the Works in such a manner that

the said structures, utilities, pipelines etc. are not disturbed or damaged, and shall

indemnify and keep indemnified Owner from and against any destruction thereof or

damages thereto.

9.2 Contractor's Representative

9.2.1 The Contractor shall, within 30 (thirty) days of the Effective Date, appoint the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Contractor's Representative with the prior written Approval of Owner (and such

Approval shall not be unreasonably withheld) and vest in him the authority to act on

behalf of the Contractor for all purposes of the Contract. If the consent is withheld or

subsequently revoked, or if the appointed person fails to act as the Contractor's

Representative, the Contractor shall submit the name and particulars of another

suitable person for such appointment.

9.2.2 The Contractor shall not, without the prior consent of Owner, revoke the appointment

of the Contractor's Representative or appoint a replacement.

9.2.3 The Contractor's Representative shall coordinate all matters relating to the Contract

with Engineer-in-Charge, receive all instructions from Engineer-in-Charge and shall

devote substantially all of his time to the performance of the Contractor's obligations

under the Contract.

9.3 Mobilisation

9.3.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for Mobilisation including, setting up of offices at

the Site with infrastructure facilities such as power, water, communication,

conveyance etc., procuring an adequate strength of skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled

workers, who, with such infrastructure facilities shall be in a position to commence

and execute the Works. The Contractor shall carry out the Mobilisation in accordance

with the agreed quality standards and Applicable Laws.

9.3.2 The Contractor shall complete Mobilisation in accordance with the terms of the

Contract within the Time for Mobilisation, which is 21 (twenty one) days from the

Effective Date.

9.4 Security

9.4.1 Mobilization Advance Guarantee

(a) The Contractor shall furnish the Mobilization Advance Guarantee for a sum

equal to 10% (ten percent) of 110% (one hundred and ten percent) of the

Contract Price, to cover the Mobilization Advance to be received by the

Contractor under the Contract from and Indian nationalized / scheduled bank /

Indian branch of an international bank acceptable to Owner, in the form set out

at Appendix 2 (Form of Mobilization Advance Guarantee). The Mobilization

Advance Guarantee shall have a claim period of 90 (ninety) days beyond its

validity.

(b) The mobilization advance guarantee shall remain valid until the earlier of the

following:

i) Upto the date when the mobilization advance has been fully recovered; or

ii) Upto the date of Final Completion;

(c) If the Mobilization Advance Guarantee is or becomes invalid for any reason

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(other than its expiry), the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer-in-

Charge and obtain within 7 (seven) days a replacement Mobilization Advance

Guarantee in the form appearing in Appendix 2 (Form of Mobilization Advance

Guarantee).

(d) Owner shall have an unqualified option under the Mobilization Advance

Guarantee to draw on the guarantee and claim the amount there under in the

event of the inadequate adjustment of the Mobilization Advance in accordance

with Clause 23.1.3.

(e) The provision, maintenance or renewal, as the case may be, of the Mobilization

Advance Guarantee by the Contractor in accordance with the terms of the

Contract shall be a condition precedent to any payment by Owner to the

Contractor.

(f) If the Contractor fails to provide, maintain or renew the Mobilization Advance

Guarantee in accordance with the Contract, then Owner may, without prejudice

to any other rights and remedies to which it may be entitled, by written notice

forthwith terminate the Contract.

(g) The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that Owner shall be entitled to assign

the Mobilization Advance Guarantee in favour of any party to whom this

Contract may be assigned by Owner.

(h) Owner shall endeavour to release the Mobilization Advance Guarantee to the

Contractor, within 30 (thirty) days after total recovery of the Mobilization

Advance, including any interest/ charges, as applicable, on request of

Contractor.

9.4.2 Contract Performance Bank Guarantee

(a) Within fifteen (15) days of the Effective Date, the Contractor shall furnish to

Owner, the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee from any Indian

Nationalized / Scheduled Bank / Indian branch of an International Bank

acceptable to Owner for an amount equivalent to 10% (ten percent) of the

awarded Contract Price in types and proportions of currencies in which the

Contract Price is payable in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall

procure the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee in the form set out in

Appendix 1 (Form of Contract Performance Bank Guarantee). The Contractor

shall maintain the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee at its own expense,

and shall ensure it shall remain valid for a period of not less than 3 (three)

months after the expiry of the Extended Defect Liability Period. The Contract

Performance Bank Guarantee shall be extended by such period as Owner may

require if the Completion is delayed beyond the Time for Completion and/or

the Final Completion is delayed beyond the scheduled date of Final Completion

and any extension thereof as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. In the

event that the Contract Price is increased during the Contract Validity Period

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

for any reason whatsoever, the value of the Contract Performance Bank

Guarantee shall be increased proportionately by the Contractor within 7 (seven)

Business Days to ensure that it remains an amount which is equivalent to 10%

(ten percent) of the revised Contract Price, as determined by the Engineer-in-

Charge.

(b) Owner shall have an unqualified option under the Contract Performance Bank

Guarantee to draw on the security and claim the amount thereunder in the event

of the Contractor's failure to honor any of its obligations, responsibilities or

commitments under the Contract or in respect of any amount due from the

Contractor to Owner. Provided however that, nothing stated under this Clause

shall make it incumbent upon Owner to utilize the Contract Performance Bank

Guarantee in preference to any other remedy which Owner may have, nor shall

it be construed as confining the claims of Owner against the Contractor to the

value of the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee.

(c) If the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee is or becomes invalid for any

reason (other than its expiry), the Contractor shall immediately notify the

Engineer-in-Charge and obtain within 7 (seven) days a replacement Contract

Performance Bank Guarantee in the form appearing in Schedule 1 (Form of

Contract Performance Bank Guarantee).

(d) Without prejudice to the obligation of the Contractor under sub-clause (a)

above, not later than 30 (thirty) Business Days before the expiry of the Contract

Performance Bank Guarantee, the Contractor shall, upon request of the

Engineer-in-Charge obtain extension of the validity of such Contract

Performance Bank Guarantee for the period stated in such request by the

Engineer-in-Charge and provide a copy of such renewed security. If the

Contractor fails to extend the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee, Owner

shall be entitled to receive the un-drawn amount there under pending the

completion of the Works, provided that the amount so received shall be treated

as a cash retention and to the extent that there are no outstanding claims thereto,

shall be released upon submission of a new Contract Performance Bank

Guarantee acceptable to Owner.

(e) The Contract Performance Bank Guarantee shall be returned to the Contractor

after 3 (three) months from the expiry of Extended Defect Liability Period.

(f) If the Contractor fails to provide, maintain or renew the Contract Performance

Bank Guarantee in accordance with the Contract, then Owner may, without

prejudice to any other rights and remedies to which it may be entitled, by

written notice terminate the Contract forthwith.

(g) The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that Owner shall be entitled to assign

the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee in favour of any party to whom this

Contract may be assigned.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.5 Site Data

9.5.1 Engineer-in-Charge has made available to the Contractor all the relevant data in

Engineer-in-Charge’s possession on hydrological and subsurface conditions relating

to the Site. The accuracy or reliability of the data/studies/reports and of any other

information supplied at any time by Engineer-in-Charge is not warranted and the

Contractor shall be solely responsible for the consequences of its interpretation of all

such data/studies/reports. The Contractor shall conduct further investigations

considered necessary by it at its own Cost and any error or discrepancies, if found in

the data made available by Engineer-in-Charge at any stage shall not constitute

ground for extension of the Time for Completion or any monetary claim.

9.5.2 The Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information as to risks,

contingencies and other circumstances which may influence or affect the execution of

the Works.

9.5.3 The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site, its

surroundings, the studies/reports/data mentioned in Clause 9.5.1 above and other

available information with respect to the viability of its design and the execution of

Works and satisfied itself by careful examination before submitting its Bid, as to all

the relevant matters including:

(a) The form and nature of the Site, including the surface strata, sub-soil, sub-

surface conditions, local conditions;

(b) The hydrological and climatic conditions;

(c) The extent, nature and magnitude of the Work, availability of the Plant and

Goods and Materials necessary for the execution of the Works and remedying

any defects;

(d) Applicable Laws;

(e) The Contractor's requirement for access, accommodation, facilities,

personnel, supply of power and water, availability of labour/ manpower

(skilled and unskilled), transport and other services;

(f) The risk of injury or damage to property adjacent to the Site and to the

occupiers of such property or any other risk;

(g) The state of traffic both of passengers and vehicles on, along and adjacent to

the Site at all times of the day, during various seasons, festivals, etc.; and

(h) The suitability of any building, structure, foundation or means of access to

the Site to be provided by Owner for reception, movement, commissioning

and maintenance of the Works within the time or times indicated in the

Works Programme.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.5.4 The Contractor now hereby agrees that the Contractor shall not be relieved from any

risks or obligations imposed on or undertaken by it in relation to the Works on the

grounds of any misunderstanding or misapprehension in respect of the matters

referred to in paragraphs (a) to (h) above or on the ground that it did not or could not

reasonably have been expected to foresee any such matter stated above which may, in

fact, affect or have affected the Completion of the Works and remedying of any

Defects therein or the meeting of its obligations in respect of the Works under the

Contract.

9.5.5 The Site shall be handed over to the Contractor free from any encroachment and the

Contractor shall satisfy itself to such effect prior to taking over the Site for the

execution of the Works. It is clarified for the avoidance of doubt that after handing

over of the possession of the Site or part of the Site, it shall be the sole obligation of

the Contractor to ensure that the Site or part of the Site handed over remains free from

any encroachment or squatters and the Contractor shall take all necessary steps at its

Cost and expense to give effect to its obligations under this Clause 9.5.5.

9.6 Access Routes

9.6.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied itself as to the suitability and

availability of the access routes to the Site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the

maintenance of such access routes. The Contractor shall construct, if necessary, at his

own cost and initiative, temporary access road to site from main public feeder roads.

The Contractor shall provide at its own Cost, signs or directions which it may

consider necessary or as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge for the guidance of its

employees, labourers, representatives and others. Upon the request of the Contractor

and at the risk and Cost of the Contractor, Owner may assist the Contractor to obtain

any permission, concessions and related easement right that may be required from the

relevant authorities for the use of such routes, signs and directions.

9.6.2 Owner shall not be responsible for any claims which may arise from the use or

otherwise of any access route. Owner does not guarantee the suitability or availability

of any particular access route, and shall not be liable to any claim for any non-

suitability or non-availability for continuous use during the execution of the Works of

any such route.

9.6.3 All transport operations for the execution of the Works shall be carried out as

stipulated in the Specifications. The Contractor shall indemnify Owner in respect of

all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever

arising out of or in relation to any such matters.

9.6.4 The Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that the transportation of

the Contractor's Personnel, Goods and Materials or Contractor's Equipment do not

interfere with local traffic in the vicinity of the Site.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.7 Rights of Way and Facilities

Owner shall provide a non-exclusive right of way for access to the Site. The Contractor shall bear all Costs and charges for special or temporary rights of way

which it may require including those for access to the Site. The Contractor shall also

obtain, at its risk and Cost, any additional facility outside the Site which it may require for the purpose of the execution of Works. Owner reserves the right to make

use of these service roads/rights of way for itself working in the area, as and when

necessary without any payment to the Contractor.

9.8 Sufficiency of Contract Price

9.8.1 The Contractor in fixing the rates/prices specified in the Price Schedule shall be

deemed to have independently obtained all information necessary for the purpose of preparing the Bid and executing the Works and to have satisfied itself as to the

correctness and sufficiency of the Bid and the Contract Price. Any error in description

of the quantity or quality of the Works or omission of any item of work shall not vitiate the Contract or release the Contractor from its obligation to perform the Works

at the prices specified in the Price Schedule and the Contractor shall be deemed to

have known the scope, nature and magnitude of the Works and the materials, equipment and labour required for executing the Works.

9.8.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contract Price and the rates and prices

stated in Contract shall, except as otherwise provided for in the Contract, cover all its obligations under and in relation to the Contract, including the obligation to supply

Contract Spares (if applicable); and all matters and all things necessary for the proper

execution of the Works. The Contract Price shall not be adjusted save as expressly provided in the Contract, and includes any and all direct, indirect and ancillary

charges and costs of whatsoever nature, all profit, all licenses, royalty and other fees,

the cost of all spare parts required for the execution of the Works. The Contractor

acknowledges and agrees that the Contractor shall be liable to arrange and obtain any and all licenses on Intellectual Property rights required to execute the Works and to

perform the Contract, and that any fees associated with such licenses shall be

included within the Contract Price and shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

9.9 Works Programme

9.9.1 The Contractor shall submit a detailed Works Programme to the Engineer-in-Charge

not later than 30 (thirty) days from the Effective Date. The Contractor shall also

submit a revised Works Programme whenever the Engineer-in-Charge finds that the

previous Works Programme is inconsistent with actual progress as provided in the

Specifications/ scope of Work.

9.9.2 No alteration to the Works Programme, or to such arrangements and methods

specified therein, shall be made without obtaining prior written consent of the

Engineer-in-Charge. If the progress of the Works does not conform to the Works

Programme, the Engineer-in-Charge may instruct the Contractor to revise the Works

Programme, showing the modifications necessary to achieve Completion within the

Time for Completion. The Contractor shall then follow the revised Works Programme

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

at its own Cost.

9.9.3 The consent by the Engineer-in-Charge to the Works Programme shall not relieve the

Contractor of any of its responsibilities or obligations under the Contract. If the

Works Programme indicate that a Key Date has not, or shall not be met, it shall not,

by itself entitle the Contractor to an extension of time in relation to such Key Date.

9.10 Progress Reports

9.10.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner and a copy thereof to Engineer-in-Charge,

by the end of each month, Monthly Progress Report which shall, amongst other

things, highlight actual or potential departures from the Works Programme and state

the measures which the Contractor proposes to take in order to make good or reduce

any delay.

9.10.2 The Contractor shall continue to submit the Monthly Progress Report until the end of

the completion of all works in all respect to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-

Charge. However, if there is any defect during the Defect Liability Period/ Extended

Defect Liability Period (as the case maybe), progress report shall also be submitted

during that period as directed by Owner. Each Monthly Progress Report shall include:

(a) An executive summary;

(b) Charts showing the status of the Works;

(c) For the execution of each main part of the Works, the extent of progress

(percentage of the whole), the actual or expected dates of commencement,

anticipated completion date of the Stage, inspections and Tests on

Completion to be carried out by the Contractor;

(d) Records of manpower and Contractor's Equipment on the Site;

(e) Copies of quality assurance documents or reference thereto, test results and

certificates;

(f) Safety statistics, including details of any hazardous incidents and activities

relating to environmental aspects;

(g) Comparisons of actual progress against the planned progress, variance

analysis and reasons for the variance and steps taken to mitigate the same,

with details of any aspects which may jeopardize the Completion of the

Works in accordance with the Contract, and the measures being (or to be)

adopted to overcome such aspects;

(h) Inspection reports of regulatory authorities; and

(i) Status and details of Licenses/registrations/approvals/permits obtained/

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

required to be obtained under Applicable Laws.

9.10.3 The Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer-in-Charge such other reports as may

reasonably be required by it or any relevant authority or public body.

9.10.4 The Contractor hereby acknowledges and accepts that any programme, Monthly

Progress Report, schedule, plan, daily report or any other information to be submitted

by it in accordance with this Clause shall not constitute the notices which it is

required to give under any provision of the Contract.

9.11 Packing and Forwarding

9.11.1 Imported Supplies

(a) The Contractor shall, wherever applicable, after proper painting, pack and crate

all materials for shipment in a manner suitable for export, in accordance with

internationally accepted export practices and in such manner so as to protect the

supplies from damage and deterioration in transit by road, rail and/or sea and

during storage at Site. Without prejudice to any other liabilities or obligations

of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to the

supplies due to improper packing.

(b) The Contractor shall notify Owner and the Engineer-in-Charge of the date of

each shipment from the port of loading as well as the expected day of arrival of

such shipment at the designated port of arrival.

(c) The Contractor’s notification shall give complete shipping details with regard

to the weight, size and content of each package, along with any other

information which Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge may require.

(d) The following documents shall be sent to Owner within 3 (three) days from the

date of dispatch of the shipment to Owner or any other person designated by

Owner:

(i) Invoices (2 copies) or any other document of title evidencing sale in

transit

(ii) Packing list (2 copies)

(iii) Test certificate (4 copies)

(iv) Insurance certificate (2 copies)

(v) Third party inspection certificate as per Quality Assurance Plan

Approved by Owner/Engineer-in-Charge (2 copies).

(vi) Shipping Details

9.11.2 Domestic Supplies

(a) The Contractor shall, wherever applicable, after proper painting, pack and

crate all materials for in such manner so as to protect the supplies from

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

damage and deterioration in transit by road and/or rail and during storage at

Site. Without prejudice to any other liabilities or obligations of the

Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to the supplies

due to improper packing.

(b) The Contractor shall notify Owner and the Engineer-in-Charge of the date of

each shipment from the works, factory or warehouse and expected date of

arrival at the Site.

(c) The Contractor’s notification shall give complete shipping details with regard

to the weight, size and content of each package, along with any other

information which Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge may require.

(d) The following documents shall be sent to Owner within 3 (three) days from

the date of dispatch of the shipment to Owner or any other person designated

by Owner:

(i) Invoices (2 copies) or any other document of title evidencing sale in

transit

(ii) Packing list (2 copies)

(iii) Test certificate (4 copies)

(iv) Insurance certificate (2 copies)

(v) Third party inspection certificate as per approved Project Quality

Plan/Quality Assurance Plan Approved by Owner/TCE (2 copies).

(vi) Lorry Receipt/ Railway Receipt (as applicable)

9.12 Contractor's Equipment/Materials

9.12.1 All Contractor's Equipment and Temporary Works provided by the Contractor or any

Subcontractor shall, when brought on to the Site, be deemed to be exclusively

intended for execution of the Works and not be removed without the consent, in

writing, of the Engineer-in-Charge. Such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld

or delayed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

(a) Upon Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall remove from Site, the

eentire Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works and surplus materials as

defined in sub-clause 0(b) below, as per the directions of the Engineer-in-

Charge.

(b) Surplus materials

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Surplus civil construction materials comprising sand, cement, bricks, stones,

aggregates and the products of dismantling the Temporary Works erected by the Contractor shall vest in and belong to the Contractor upon Completion of

the Works and/or earlier termination of the Contract for any cause. The

Contractor shall have the right, subject to the other terms & conditions of the Contract, to remove the surplus civil construction material from the Site,

subject to satisfactory proof of supply. No other surplus material will be

allowed to be removed from the Site and shall be deemed to be the property of Owner and the same shall be transported properly to Owner’s store or as

directed by Owner. The Contract Price quoted by the Contractor shall be

deemed to include the cost of all surplus materials which are deemed to be the property of Owner.

9.12.2 Owner shall not at any time be liable for the loss or damage to any of the Contractor's

Equipment, Temporary Works or materials brought on Site by the Contractor for

execution of the Works.

9.12.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining physical clearance from the

customs, if any required for constructional plant, materials and other things required

for the execution of the Works.

9.12.4 The Contractor shall, upon written request by the Engineer-in-Charge, produce to the

Engineer-in-Charge, all documents evidencing title to or the contractual arrangement

giving the right to the Contractor to use the Contractor's Equipment. In the event of

failure to comply with such request within 15 (fifteen) days, then without prejudice to

any other rights, Owner shall be entitled to withhold the payments due to the

Contractor under the Contract.

9.12.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the Contractor's Equipment at the

Site in a safe and reliable working condition.

9.12.6 The Contractor shall be liable for loss of or damage to any of the Contractor's

Equipment or to any Persons, as a result of handling, storage or use of the

Contractor's Equipment which may occur at any time during the execution of the

Works or the remedying of Defects therein.

9.12.7 Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any or all of the Clauses of this

Contract, where any goods, materials or equipment for the execution of the Contract

are procured with the assistance of any Authority either by issue from the Authority

stocks or purchased under orders, permits or licenses issued by the Authority, the

Contractor shall use such goods, materials or equipment economically and solely for

the purpose of the Contract and shall not dispose of them without the prior written

permission of Owner/Engineer-in-Charge.

9.13 Contractor's Documents

9.13.1 The Contractor shall submit to Engineer-in-Charge a detailed list of the Contractor's

Documents to be submitted as well as a schedule for submissions of the Contractor's

Documents (taking into account the requirement for Approval by the Engineer-in-

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Charge or any third party consultant appointed by Engineer-in-Charge) within 3

(three) months from the Effective Date, which shall be subject to Approval by

Engineer-in-Charge

Engineer-in-Charge shall, within 21 (twenty one) Working Days of the date of

submission of such schedule, either Approve the same or reasonably require

amendments to such schedule by a written notice to the Contractor. Where Engineer-

in-Charge requires amendments to be made to the submission schedule, the Contractor shall make such changes and submit a fresh schedule for submissions. If

Engineer-in-Charge r does not notify its refusal to Approve such schedule within 30

(thirty) Working Days of the receipt of such schedule, then it shall be deemed to be Approved by Engineer-in-Charge. The latest revision of the Approved schedule for

the submission of Contractor's Documents shall be the “Submissions Schedule” and

shall form a Contract Document.

The Contractor shall comply with the Submissions Schedule for the purposes of

submissions of the Contractor's Documents and shall, in any event, ensure the

submission of the Contractor's Documents in relation to any element of the Works simultaneously with the performance of that element of the Works. Failure by the

Contractor to do so shall entitle Owner to reject that element of the Works and the

consequences thereof shall be borne by the Contractor at its own Cost.

9.13.2 The Contractor's Documents shall be prepared in sufficient detail and shall satisfy all

regulatory approvals. The Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to inspect/review

the preparation of the Contractor's Documents, wherever they are being prepared.

9.13.3 Each of the Contractor's Documents shall, when considered ready for use, be

submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for its review. Unless otherwise stated in the

Specifications or elsewhere in the Contract, each review by the Engineer-in-Charge

shall not exceed the Review Period.

9.13.4 If the Engineer-in-Charge gives notice to the Contractor that a Contractor's Document

fails (to the extent stated) to comply with the Specifications, it shall be rectified,

resubmitted and reviewed (and if specified, Approved) by the Engineer-in-Charge, at

the Contractor's Cost within such time as the Engineer-in-Charge may specify to the

Contractor.

9.13.5 Design, procurement, construction, manufacture and/or installation of any part of the

Works shall not commence prior to the expiry of the Review Period for Contractor's

Documents which are relevant for the execution of such part of the Works.

9.13.6 If the Contractor wishes to modify any Contractor's Document which has previously

been submitted for such pre-construction review, the Contractor shall immediately

notify the Engineer-in-Charge, and based on the Engineer-in-Charge’s Approval,

shall subsequently submit revised Contractor's Documents to the Engineer-in-Charge

in accordance with the procedure set out in Clause 9.13.1.

9.13.7 If the Engineer-in-Charge instructs that further Contractor's Documents are required

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

to be submitted by the Contractor which is necessary for carrying out the Works, the

Contractor shall promptly and at Contractor's Cost prepare such documents.

9.13.8 If any errors, omissions, ambiguities, inconsistencies, inadequacies and other defects

are found in the Contractor's Documents at any time, then such errors, omissions,

ambiguities, inadequacies or other defects shall be rectified by the Contractor at its

own Cost and any Approval or consent or review by the Engineer-in-Charge of the

Contractor's Documents shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligations or

responsibility under the Contract.

9.13.9 Notwithstanding anything contained in this Contract in relation to the Contractor's

Documents, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the adequacy of the

Contractor's Documents for the execution of the Works, any failure of the Contractor

to comply with the Contract, or otherwise, for any ambiguity, inconsistency,

deficiency, lack of fitness for purpose, errors and/ or omissions in such Contractor's

Documents.

9.13.10 The Contractor's Documents shall be in the custody and care of the Contractor during

the Contract. Unless otherwise stated in the Specifications, the Contractor shall

provide 6 (six) copies of the Contractor's Documents, along with a soft copy, of the

Contractor's Documents for the use of the Engineer-in-Charge.

9.13.11 The Contractor shall keep on the Site, 1 (one) complete set of all relevant documents,

including the Contract and all documents related to Variations, other communications

given or issued from time to time under the Contract and all the Contractor's

Documents Approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. TCE, the Engineer-in-Charge.

Owner and Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to access these documents at all

reasonable times.

9.13.12 If a Party becomes aware of an error or Defect of a technical nature in the Drawings

and Designs or in the Contractor's Documents or any other document which was

prepared for use in executing the Works, such Party shall promptly give notice to the

other Party of such error or Defect.

9.13.13 As-Built-Drawings: The Contractor shall prepare, and keep up to date, a complete set

of “as-built records” of the execution of the Works, showing the exact “as-built”

locations, sizes and details of the Works as executed, with cross references to relevant

specifications and data sheets in accordance with Clause 10.5.

9.13.14 Test-Reports: After the Performance Tests have been conducted in respect of the

Facility, the Contractor shall furnish the test reports to the Engineer-in-Charge for

evaluation in accordance with Clause 16.2.

9.14 Subcontractors

9.14.1 The Contractor shall not subcontract the whole of the Works and unless otherwise

specifically stated:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(a) The Contractor shall not be required to obtain consent for purchases of Goods

and Materials which are in accordance with the Approved vendor list/

Approved makes specified in the Contract or for provisions of labour or for

the subcontracts for which the Subcontractors are named in the Contract

Agreement/ Contract;

(b) The prior consent of Engineer-in-Charge shall be obtained for subcontracting

any part of the Works other than as specified under Clause 9.14.1(a) provided

that the execution of the Works (or any part thereof) by petty contractors or

on piece work basis under the supervision of the Contractor (or its

representative) shall not be deemed to be Subcontracting under the Contract;

and

(c) Not less than 30 (thirty) days before the intended date of each Subcontractor

commencing work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-Charge of

such intention.

9.14.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for observance by all Subcontractors of any

Applicable Laws and all the provisions of the Contract. The Contractor shall be

entirely responsible for the acts or defaults of any Subcontractor, its representatives or

employees, as if they were the acts, omissions or defaults of the Contractor, its

representatives or employees and nothing contained in Clause 9.14.1(a) shall

constitute a waiver of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. The Contractor

shall provide to the Engineer-in-Charge, certified true copies of all the executed

Subcontracts containing complete terms and conditions, and annexures other than the

price. The Contractor shall make timely payments to the Subcontractors and resolve

all matters and differences with any Subcontractor speedily, without affecting the

execution of the Works in any manner.

9.14.3 The terms and conditions of any Subcontract shall impose on the Subcontractor such

terms and conditions of the Contract as are applicable and appropriate to the part of

the Works to be executed by the Subcontractor, to enable the Contractor to comply

with its obligations under the Contract.

9.14.4 Notwithstanding any consent to the selection of the Subcontractor given by the

Engineer-in-Charge, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have full power to order the

Contractor to terminate any Subcontractor and substitute such Subcontractor with any

other sub-contractor and the Contractor shall be bound to follow such order, provided

that such order is provided in writing by Engineer-in-Charge, clearly specifying the

reasons for such termination.

9.14.5 Engineer-in-Charge /Owner shall, under no circumstances be liable to any

Subcontractor and the Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified Engineer-in-

Charge/ Owner against all liabilities, costs, claims and demands of whatsoever nature

by any Subcontractors.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.14.6 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the payments to be made to the

Subcontractors in accordance with their respective Subcontracts and ensure proper

and uninterrupted execution of the Works. Engineer-in-Charge shall not interfere in

the day to day management of the Subcontract between the Contractor and its

Subcontractor, but if any complaint is received by Engineer-in-Charge from any

Subcontractor regarding non-payment or delay in payment by the Contractor to such

Subcontractor, then Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge may, by a written notice, require the

Contractor to resolve such complaint within a reasonable period (to be specified in

the notice) and provide the details of the steps taken by the Contractor to resolve the

complaint, to Engineer-in-Charge /Owner. If the issue is not satisfactorily resolved

and the details provided by the Contractor are not considered satisfactory, Engineer-

in-Charge /Owner may, at its sole discretion, make direct payment to the

Subcontractor as per its claim and recover such payments from any payment due to

the Contractor under the Contract.

9.15 Setting Out

9.15.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for:

(a) The accurate setting out of the Works in relation to the original points, lines

and levels of reference given by the Engineer-in-Charge in writing;

(b) The correctness of position, levels, dimensions and alignments of all parts of

the Works;

(c) The provisions of all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus and labour

in connection with the foregoing responsibilities; and

(d) Carefully protecting and preserving all bench marks, sight rails, pegs and

other things used in setting out the Works.

9.15.2 The Contractor shall first review, validate and undertake its own due diligence of

Owner's alignment survey reports and fix the alignment of the Works, pier locations,

maintaining vertical and horizontal clearances keeping in view the important Site

references and obligatory locations, in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge.. The

Contractor shall establish, at suitable points and at its own Cost, additional reference

lines and benchmarks as may be necessary for the proper execution of the Works

while ensuring, at all times, that the reference lines, points and benchmarks fixed by

the Engineer-in-Charge are not disturbed and/ or damaged and the Contractor shall be

liable to make good any damage thereto. The verification/ inspection of any setting

out or of any line or level by the Engineer-in-Charge shall not in any way relieve the

Contractor of its responsibility for the accuracy or correctness thereof and the

Contractor shall carefully protect and preserve all benchmarks, sigh-rails, pegs and

other things used in setting out the works.

9.15.3 If at any time during the execution of the Works, an error appears in the positions,

levels, dimensions or alignment of any part of the Works, the Contractor, on being

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

required to do so by the Engineer-in-Charge, shall, at Contractor's Cost, rectify such

error to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

9.16 Safety of Works

9.16.1 The Contractor shall throughout the execution of the Works:

(a) Take full responsibility for the adequacy, stability, safety and security of the

Works, Plant, Contractor's Equipment, Temporary Works, operations on the

Site and methods of manufacture, construction and transportation;

(b) Have full regard for the safety of all persons on or in the vicinity of the Site

(including persons to whom access to the Site has been allowed by the

Contractor), comply with the Safety Code, all relevant safety regulations,

including provision of safety gear. Insofar as the Contractor is in occupation

or otherwise is using areas of the Site, the Contractor shall keep the Site and

the Works (so far as the same are not completed and occupied by Owner) in

an orderly state appropriate for the avoidance of injury or accident to all

persons on and in the vicinity of the Site and shall keep Owner indemnified

against all costs, charges, losses and damages that may be suffered by Owner

in any manner whatsoever as a result of any injury or accident to any person

on or in the vicinity of the Site in connection with the execution of the

Works;

(c) Provide and maintain all lights, guards, fences and warning signs and

watchmen when and where necessary or as required by the Engineer-in-

Charge or by any Applicable Laws or by any relevant Authority for the

protection of the Works and for the safety and convenience of the public and

all Persons on or in the vicinity of the Site;

(d) Where any part of the Works would otherwise be carried out in darkness,

ensure that all parts of the Site where such part of the Works is being carried

out are so lighted as to ensure the safety of all Persons on or in the vicinity of

the Site and of such part of the Works;

(e) The Contractor shall ensure that its employees and the employees of the

Subcontractors wear identification badges (cards), uniforms, helmets, safety

shoes, gum boots and other safety/protection wear as directed by the

Engineer-in-Charge, and to be provided by the Contractor.

(f) Without prejudice to the other terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall take

all safety measures during working in the monsoon period by dewatering at

the construction work site to keep it free from water and to prevent all

electrical shocks.

9.16.2 The Contractor shall submit a detailed and comprehensive contract specific Site

safety plan and system safety assurance plan in accordance with the Specifications.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.16.3 The Engineer-in-Charge's consent or rejection of the safety plans and/or supplements

thereto shall be without prejudice to the Contractor's obligations with respect to safety

measures required to be undertaken or implemented in accordance with the Safety

Code and shall not excuse any failure by the Contractor to adopt proper and

recognized safety practices throughout the execution of the Works.

9.16.4 The Contractor shall provide all necessary access, assistance and facilities to enable

the Engineer-in-Charge or any other third party safety audit agency to carry out

inspections to verify that the safety plans are being properly and fully implemented.

9.16.5 The Works, including materials to be used for execution of the Works shall be

protected from exposure to and damage due to water.

9.16.6 The execution of the Works shall not be carried out in weather conditions that may

adversely affect the execution of the Works or damage the Works (or any part

thereof) unless proper protection is provided, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-

Charge.

9.16.7 During the execution of the Works, storm restraint systems shall be provided by the

Contractor where necessary to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

9.16.8 The Contractor shall ensure that the Execution of the Works is carried out in such

manner that there is no damage to or interference with:

(a) watercourses and drainage systems on and in the vicinity of the Site;

(b) utility services on and in the vicinity of the Site;

(c) structures (including foundations), roads, street fixtures, etc. on and in the

vicinity of the Site;

(d) public or private, vehicular or pedestrian access routes and roads on and in

the vicinity of the Site; and

(e) monuments, graves or burial grounds other than to the extent that is necessary

for them to be removed or diverted for the execution of the Works. Heritage

structures shall not be damaged or disfigured on any account. The Contractor

shall inform the Engineer-in-Charge, as soon as practicable, of the structures

or roads which are not stated in the Contract to be removed or diverted but

which the Contractor considers necessary to be removed or diverted. The

Contractor shall not remove or divert any such structure or roads until the

consent of the Engineer-in-Charge to such removal or diversion has been

obtained.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.17 Security of the Site

The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for security of the Site and the Works. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract:

(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping unauthorized persons off the Site; and

(b) Authorized persons shall be limited to the employees, workmen or consultant or representative of the Contractor and its Subcontractor or persons

authorized by the Engineer-in-Charge.

9.18 Contractor's Operations on Site and Clearance of Site

9.18.1 The Contractor shall confine his operations to the Site, and to any additional areas

which may be obtained by the Contractor and agreed by Owner as working areas. The

Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to keep Contractor's Equipment and

Contractor's Personnel within the Site and these additional areas, and to restrain them

from encroaching on adjacent land.

9.18.2 At all times during the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall keep the Site

clean, safe, in a workmanlike condition and free from all unnecessary obstruction,

and shall safely store or dispose of any Contractor's Equipment or surplus materials.

The Contractor shall clear away and remove from the Site any wreckage, rubbish and

Temporary Works which are no longer required in accordance with Good Industry

Practice, Applicable Laws and instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge, unless required

to be maintained at the Site as per the express instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.

9.18.3 Upon Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall leave the Site and the Works in a

clean and safe condition. However, the Contractor may retain on Site, during the

Defect Liability Period, such Goods and Materials or Contractor's Equipment as are

required for the Contractor to fulfil its obligations under the Contract.

9.18.4 The Contractor shall not sell or otherwise dispose of or remove except for the purpose

of performing the Works, the sand, clay, ballast, earth, rock or other substances or

materials obtained from any excavation made for the purposes of the Works or any

building or produce that was on the Site at the time of handing over of the Site to the

Contractor and all such substances, materials, buildings and produce shall be the

property of Owner, provided that the Contractor may use such substances, materials,

buildings for the performing the Works with the prior permission of the Engineer-in-

Charge at the rates determined by the Engineer-in-Charge.

9.18.5 The Contractor shall take prior permission for working on Sundays and Holidays

without any additional cost to Owner. On working days, works beyond the normal

working hours can be carried out without any additional cost to the Owner

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.19 Quality Management System

9.19.1 Unless otherwise agreed with Owner, the Contractor’s proposed quality system shall

fully satisfy all the elements of ISO 9001 – 2000 “Quality Management Systems

Requirement”. As evidence of compliance with ISO 9001 – 2000 “Quality

Management Systems Requirement”, the Contractor shall be required to submit either

the current certificate of quality system registration with ISO 9001 or a recent

compliance audit recommending registration from a Registrar acceptable to Owner.

The quality management system developed by the Contractor shall provide for the

planned and systematic control of all quality related activities for execution of the

Works. Implementation of the quality management system shall be in accordance

with the standard specification for quality management system provided with the

Bidding Documents.

9.19.2 As a part of the quality management system to be developed and implemented by the

Contractor, the Contractor shall prepare and submit the Project Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance Plan for the Engineer-in-Charge's review, comments (if any) and approval

within 21 (twenty one) days after the Effective Date. The Engineer-in-Charge shall

review the Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan and provide any comments to the Contractor within 21 (twenty one) Working Days after its receipt of such draft.

Within 14 (fourteen) days after its receipt of the Engineer-in-Charge’s comments, the

Contractor shall implement such comments re-submit the Project Quality

Plan/Quality Assurance Plan to the Engineer-in-Charge for Approval. This procedure shall be repeated until the Project Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance Plan is approved

by the Engineer-in-Charge. Any compliance by the Contractor with the Engineer-in-

Charge's comments shall neither constitute a Variation nor entitle the Contractor to any extension of the Time for Completion or increase in the Contract Price. No

proposed change to the Project Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance Plan shall be

effective unless the Engineer-in-Charge approves of such proposed change.

Notwithstanding any comments provided by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall remain fully responsible for the Project Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance Plan,

including rectifying all defects therein.

9.19.3 The Contractor shall follow and comply with the Approved Project Quality Plan/

Quality Assurance Plan and shall not amend it without the prior written consent of the

Engineer-in-Charge. TCE Owner may, at any time during performance of the Works,

conduct a compliance audit with respect to the Project Quality Plan/ Quality

Assurance Plan. If such audit demonstrates non-compliance with any aspect of the

Quality Assurance Plan, Owner may notify the Contractor of such non-compliance

and the Contractor shall promptly undertake appropriate remedial action, at

Contractor's sole risk, Cost and expense.

9.20 Fossils

9.20.1 All fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity and structures and other remains or

things of geological or archaeological interest discovered on the Site shall, as between

the Contractor and Owner, be deemed to be the absolute property of Owner. The

Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent the Contractor's Personnel or

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

any other person from retaining or damaging any such article or thing and shall,

immediately upon discovery thereof and before removal, acquaint Engineer-in-

Charge/ Owner with such discovery and carry out Engineer-in-Charge /Owner's

instructions for dealing with the same.

9.20.2 If, by reason of complying with Engineer-in-Charge /Owner's instructions under

Clause 9.20.1, the Contractor incurs any costs and/or any delay, then Engineer-in-

Charge /Owner shall, after following the procedure set forth at Clause 24, treat the

same as a Variation.

9.21 Land, Power, Water and Other Facilities

The Contractor shall be responsible to provide within the scope of Work all facilities necessary for performance of the Works including (but not limited to) water

(including water for hydrostatic testing, if any), power, transportation, handling and

construction equipment, vehicles, vessels and any additional land at or about the Site

required for the Contractor’s field office(s), camps, godowns, workshops and residential accommodation for the Contractor’s staff, quarry rights, borrow areas and

access roads, to or about the Site and the Contractor’s offices, camps, godown,

workshops, accommodations, and Temporary Works and facilities whatsoever required for execution and Completion of the Works.

9.21.1 Water

9.21.1.1 Subject to availability, Owner / Engineer-in-Charge may endeavour to provide

water to the Contractor, at the cost specified in the Bidding Documents, for

construction purposes at one point at the Site which is convenient to Owner. In

such case, the Contractor shall, at its own Cost, provide for water meters

approved by Owner/ TCE for measurement of the quantity of water supplied to

the Contractor for determination of payment due thereon to Owner. Such meters

shall be in custody of Owner. The Contractor shall also provide at its own Cost

and initiative other pipe networks etc. from source of supply to the Site and such

distribution pipe network shall have prior approval of TCE so as not to interfere

with the layout and progress of the other construction works.

9.21.1.2 In the event of failure or defect of meters, water charges will be calculated on the

consumption determined by the Engineer-in-Charge (whose decision shall be final both as regards the existence of a defect or failure and as regards to the

water consumed). The amount due to Owner in respect of the water supplied

shall, without prejudice to any other mode of recovery available to Owner, be deductible from the Running Bills/Final Bill of the Contractor and/or any monies

due or becoming due to the Contractor from time to time.

9.21.1.3 Owner/Engineer-in-Charge may without notice or specifying any cause suspend or discontinue water supply to the Contractor and such suspension or

discontinuation shall not entitle the Contractor to any compensation or damages

or constitute a basis or ground for extension of the Time for Completion.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.21.1.4 The Contractor shall forthwith on Completion of the Work or earlier

determination of the Contract or during the execution of the Works, if so required by the Engineer-in-Charge, on grounds of hindrance or obstruction caused

thereby or other cause whatsoever at its own Cost and initiative remove or re-

route, as the case may be, any installation, pipes and/or other equipment put up or erected by the Contractor for the transportation and/or distribution of water, and

fill any trenches, ditches or other excavations done by the Contractor for the

purpose thereof and restore the Site to the same condition in which it was prior to the installation.

9.21.2 Power

9.21.2.1 Subject to availability of power supply, Owner may, at its discretion provide for

supply of power to the Contractor for execution of the Work from Owner’s

convenient & nearest substation, from which source the Contractor shall at his

own Cost and initiative make arrangements for temporary distribution of power to

Contractor’ Works at the Site.

9.21.2.2 All arrangements for the distribution or power from source aforesaid and the

work relative thereto shall be made, performed and/or installed in conformity

with Indian Electricity Act and other Applicable Laws governing the supply and

transmission, distribution of electricity and shall be subject to prior approval by

TCE.

9.21.2.3 The Contractor shall, at his own Costs and initiative on Completion or prior

determination of the Contract or otherwise during execution of the Work, if

required by TCE because of hindrance caused thereby or for any other cause,

forthwith remove or re-route the distribution lines, installations and/or works or

part(s) thereof, as the case may be required to be removed or re-routed.

9.21.2.4 Owner shall recover from the Contractor for the power consumed by the

Contractor from Owner’s source(s) of supply the cost thereof to Owner as

determined by Owner in this behalf from time to time. The amount due to Owner

in respect of such power supplied shall, without prejudice to any other mode of

recovery available to Owner, be deductible from the Running Bill/Final Bill(s) of

the Contractor and/or any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor from

time to time.

9.21.2.5 The Contractor shall provide at his own Cost suitable electric meters approved by

the Engineer-in-Charge for measurement of the power units supplied to the

Contractor for determination of the payment due thereon to Owner. Such meters

shall be under the custody and control of Owner.

9.21.2.6 In the event of failure or defect of meter(s), power charges shall be calculated on

the consumption determined by Engineer-in-Charge (whose decision shall be

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

final both as regards the existence of a defect or failure and as regards the power

consumed).

9.21.2.7 Owner may at any time without notice and without specifying any cause,

suspend or discontinue power supply as aforesaid to the Contractor, and such

suspension or discontinuance shall not entitle the Contractor to any compensation

or damages or constitute a basis for extension of Time for Completion.

9.21.2.8 Power supplied by Owner to the Contractor shall be entirely at the risks of

Contractor as to the continuity and regularity of supply, maintenance of voltage

and adequacy of load and frequency without any warranty by or liability to

Owner in respect thereof and without entitlement to the Contractor to claim

compensation from Owner on grounds of discontinuance, fluctuation of voltage

or inadequacy of load or frequency or any other cause whatsoever.

9.21.3 Land

9.21.3.1 Land for Contractor’s Field Office, Godown and Workshop Owner may, at

his own discretion and convenience and for the duration of the execution of the

Works make available near the Site, land for construction of Contractor's

temporary field office, godowns, workshops and assembly yard required for the

execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall at his own Cost construct all these

temporary buildings and provide suitable water supply and sanitary arrangement

and get the same approved by TCE. On Completion of the Works undertaken by

the Contractor, it shall remove all Temporary Works erected by it and have the

Site cleaned as directed by TCE.

If the Contractor shall fail to comply with these requirements, TCE may at the Cost of the Contractor remove such surplus, and rubbish materials and dispose off

the same as he deems fit and get the Site cleared as aforesaid; and Contractor

shall forthwith pay the amount of all expense so incurred and shall have no claim

in respect of any such surplus materials disposed off as aforesaid. TCE reserves the right to ask the Contractor any time during the pendency of the Contract to

vacate the land by giving 7 days’ notice on security reasons or on national interest

or otherwise. Rent may be charged by Owner for the land so provided to and occupied by the Contractor, which may be deducted from the Running Bills/Final

Bill of the Contractor or from any other amount due or that becomes due to the

Contractor.

The Contractor shall put up temporary structures as required by it for their office,

fabrication shop and construction stores only in the area allocated to them on the

Site by Owner or his authorised representative. In addition, for uninterrupted fabrication work, the Contractor shall put up temporary covered structures at its

Cost within area allocated to it within the Site by Owner or its authorised

representative. No tea stalls/canteens should be put up or allowed to be put up by any Contractor on the allotted land or complex area without written permission of

Owner

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

No unauthorised buildings, constructions or structures should be put up by the Contractor anywhere on the Site.

No person except for authorised watchman shall be allowed to stay on the Site, including on any area allotted to the Contractor pursuant to this Clause 9.21.3

after completion of the day's work without prior written permission from TCE.

9.21.3.2 Land for Residential Accommodation

No Land shall be made available for residential accommodation for staff and

labour of Contractor.

9.22 Access for TCE and Owner

The Contractor shall allow the Owner, TCE or their representatives or any other

person authorized by the Owner and/ or TCE, access to the Site at all times, and to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being carried out or is

intended to be carried out and to any place where Goods and Materials or Plant are

being manufactured, fabricated, constructed and/or assembled for incorporation in the Facility, during usual working hours and beyond usual working hours, upon prior

intimation. The Contractor shall ensure that the Subcontracts, if any, shall contain

provisions entitling the Owner and TCE or any person authorized by them to have

such access.

9.23 Contract Spares

The Contractor shall procure and supply:

(a) all spare parts required during pre-commissioning and commissioning of the

Facility and associated systems;

(b) all mandatory spares required for the Facility and specified in the Bidding

Documents;

(c) all operation and maintenance spares, required during the Defect Liability

Period

(collectively the “Contract Spares”).

The Contract Price shall include the cost of procuring and supplying the Contract

Spares, unless otherwise specified in the Contract.

9.24 Avoidance of Damage

9.24.1 While transporting any Plant, Goods and Material, Contractor's Equipment or any

other equipment, the Contractor shall comply with Applicable Laws and take all steps

necessary to ensure that roads, viaducts and bridges on any route leading to the Site,

including access and link roads to the Site as well as any third party properties, are

not damaged.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.24.2 In case the transportation of any Plant, Goods and Material, Contractor's Equipment

or other equipment by the Contractor is likely to cause damage to any road, viaduct or

bridge on any route leading to the Site, including access and link roads to the Site and

any third party property, it shall inform the concerned Authorities before transporting

such Plant, Goods and Material, Contractor's Equipment or other equipment and

obtain all necessary approvals and permits from the relevant Authorities as may be

required, or give its proposal for strengthening such roads, viaducts or bridges. Any

Cost incurred in this regard shall be borne by the Contractor.

9.24.3 The Contractor shall indemnify and keep Owner indemnified against all losses,

damages and claims incurred by Owner due to any damage caused to any bridge or

road or any other structure or street furniture leading to the Site, arising from the

transportation of any Plant, Goods and Material, Contractor's Equipment or other

equipment.

9.25 Quality Control

9.25.1 All Goods and Materials to be supplied under the Contract shall be constructed, and

all Works shall be executed by the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Contract.

Where the manner of manufacture, construction and the execution is not set out in the

Contract, the Works shall be executed in a proper, workman like and careful manner,

with properly equipped facilities and non-hazardous materials, and in accordance

with recognized and internationally accepted industrial standards and Good Industry

Practice. The successful execution of the Works is the sole responsibility of the

Contractor.

9.25.2 Owner shall be entitled at all times, at the risk of the Contractor, to inspect and/or test

by itself or through an independent person(s) or agency(ies) appointed by TCE and/or

to direct the Contractor to inspect and/or test or to get inspected and/or tested, all

materials, items and components, whatsoever supplied or proposed for supply for

incorporation in the works, inclusive during the course of manufacture or fabrication

by the Contractor and/or at the Contractor’s or his sub-vendors’ works or otherwise,

of such material, item or component. The inspection and/or tests shall be conducted at

the expense of the Contractor and may be directed by TCE to be conducted by

authorized representatives of TCE or third party inspection agency(ies) appointed by

Owner. Owner may also require that all the inspections and tests conducted by the

Contractor at his works or his sub-vendors’ works be carried out in the presence of

authorized representatives of TCE / third party inspection agency(ies) appointed by

Owner. The Contractor shall provide TCE and/or its representatives/Agents every

facility of assistance necessary for carrying out or witnessing, as the case may be the

Test(s) / Inspection(s).

9.25.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for procurement, transport, receiving, unloading

and safe keeping of all Goods and Materials and other things at the Site required for

the successful execution of the Works.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.25.4 The Contractor shall provide all documents and other information necessary for

testing of the Goods and Materials and such assistance, labour, materials, electricity,

fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as are necessary to carry out such tests

efficiently.

9.25.5 The Contractor shall agree with TCE, the time and place for the testing of any Goods

and Materials and other parts of the Works as specified in the Contract.

9.25.6 If TCE does not attend at the time and place agreed, or if the Contractor and TCE

agree that TCE shall not attend, the Contractor may proceed with the tests, unless

TCE instructs the Contractor otherwise, such tests shall be deemed to have been made

in TCE’s presence.

9.25.7 The Contractor shall promptly forward to TCE duly certified reports of the tests. If

TCE has not attended the tests, TCE shall accept the readings as accurate, except

where there is a manifest error.

9.25.8 If, as a result of inspection, examination or testing, any Goods and Materials is found

to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract, TCE may reject the

same within 15 (fifteen) Working Days of such inspection, examination or testing by

giving notice to the Contractor with reasons. The Contractor shall then promptly

make good the defect and ensure that the rejected item after rectification complies

with the Contract.

9.25.9 If TCE requires such Goods & Materials to be retested, the tests shall be repeated

under the same terms and conditions.If such rejection and retesting causes Owner to

incur additional costs, such costs shall be recoverable from the Contractor, and may

be deducted by Owner from any monies payable to the Contractor under the Contract.

9.25.10 The Contractor shall not be released from any of its liabilities or obligations under the

Contract by reason of any such inspection or testing or witnessing of testing, or by the

submission of reports of inspection or testing to TCE.

9.25.11 Subject to Clause 11.5, each item of the Goods and Materials shall become the

property of Owner upon the earlier of: (i) delivery of such item to the Site; or (ii)

payment for such item, either in part or full, by Owner. The Contractor shall however

continue to bear the risk and responsibility in respect of such items which continue to

remain in its possession until the date of issuance of the Completion Certificate.

9.26 Covering up of Works

9.26.1 No Works or part of the Works shall be covered up or put out of view, without the

prior Approval of TCE or its representative.

9.26.2 The Contractor shall provide full opportunity to TCE to examine part of the Works

which is to be covered up and to examine foundations before the Permanent Works

are executed at such place. The Contractor shall also give due notice to TCE,

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

whenever any such work or foundation is ready for examination and TCE shall

without unreasonable delay, examine and/or measure such work.

9.26.3 The Contractor shall uncover any part or parts of the Works, or make openings in or

through the same, as TCE may from time to time direct, and shall reinstate and make

good such part or parts, to the satisfaction of TCE. If any such part or parts have been

covered up, or put out of view and the Works are found to be executed in accordance

with the Contract, the expenses of uncovering, making openings in or through,

reinstating and making good the same, shall be borne by Owner, but if the Works are

found to be defective, costs shall be borne by the Contractor.

9.26.4 In case after completion of a part of the Works, such part of the Works is not fully

consistent with the Specifications and in the view of TCE cannot be changed or

removed, then such part of the Works in its present condition (provided it has no

implication on safety and operation) shall be accepted only after suitable reduction (as

reasonably determined by TCE) has been made from the Contract Price.

9.27 Samples

9.27.1 The Contractor shall submit at its own Cost the following samples and relevant

information to TCE for pre-construction and/or pre-manufacture review:

(a) Manufacturer's standard samples of Goods and Materials;

(b) Samples (if any) specified in the Specifications.

Each sample shall be labelled as to its origin and intended use in the Works.

9.28 Records

The Contractor shall from time to time maintain at the Site (in addition to any other records or registers required to be maintained by the Contractor under any Applicable

Law) such records and registers with respect to the Works as TCE or Owner may

require the Contractor to keep and/or maintain from time to time. The failure to

maintain or submit any record or register required pursuant to this Clause 9.28 shall disentitle the Contractor from submitting any Running Bill pursuant to Clause 23.3

and shall constitute a breach of this Contract.

The review or acceptance of any record or register maintained by the Contractor

pursuant to this Clause 9.28 shall be without prejudice to the rights and remedies of

Owner and obligations and liabilities of the Contractor under this Contract and shall not otherwise operate as an estoppel against Owner by reason only of the fact that no

notice of or objection to any information contained in any such record or register was

taken.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

9.29 Free Issue Materials

9.29.1 If Owner has undertaken in the Bidding Documents to procure and supply Free Issue

Materials, the supply of Free Issue Materials to the Contractor shall be on the

following terms and conditions:

(a) Deliveries shall be either from the storage of Owner or from the

factory/storage of a supplier designated by Owner or from nearest suitable

railhead or other point(s) of collection as may be determined by Owner taking

into account the source(s) of supply of the Free Issue Materials.

(b) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at his own risks and Costs to take delivery of the Free Issue Materials from the stores, factory, railhead or

other collection point, as the case may be, and to arrange for its loading,

transportation to the Site and unloading at the Site or other place of storage.

The Contractor shall in taking delivery ensure compliance with any conditions for delivery applicable to deliveries from Owner’s or supplier’s

factory/stores or railways or other transporters concerned, and shall be

exclusively responsible to pay and bear any demurrage or penalty or other charges payable by virtue of any failure or delay by the Contractor in lifting

the supplies and/or any failure by the Contractor to observe the conditions of

supply as aforesaid, and shall keep Owner indemnified from and against all

consequences thereof.

(c) The Contractor shall inspect the Free Issue Materials supplied to it at the time

of taking delivery thereof and satisfy itself of the quality, quantity and

condition thereof prior to taking delivery and Owner shall not be liable for

any claims or complaints whatsoever in respect of quality, quantity or

conditions of the Free Issue Materials once the Contractor has taken delivery

thereof.

(d) The Contractor shall on receiving and opening the packing cases or other

packaging of Free Issue Materials on behalf of Owner, verify and tally the

actual contents with the packing list and bring any discrepancies to the notice

of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall also sort out and segregate

and hand over to Owner’s stores, the instruction manuals, operation and

maintenance manuals, special maintenance tools, erection spares,

commissioning spares, and maintenance spares and other extras, if received

with the main equipment. The erection spares may be got issued from

Owner’s stores if required, after getting authorization from the Engineer-in-

Charge. The commissioning spares may be got issued from Owner’s stores, if

commissioning is included in the Contractor’s scope.

(e) The Free Issue Materials supplied or procured by Owner shall be utilized by

the Contractor only for incorporation in the Permanent Works and even so

shall not unless specifically authorized by Owner in this behalf) be utilized

for manufacturing any item(s) which can be obtained in finished form from

standard manufactures.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(f) The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge sufficiently in

advance a detailed statement showing his requirement of the types and

quantities of Free Issue Materials agreed to be supplied by Owner, indication

of the time when relative types and quantities thereof shall be required by it

for the Works so as to enable Owner to verify the quantities of Free Issue

Materials specified by the Contractor and to enable Owner to make

arrangements for the supply thereof.

(g) Owner shall not be responsible for any delay in the supply of any Free Issue

Materials supplied or procured or agreed to be supplied or procured by

Owner, and no such delay or failure shall anyway render Owner liable for any

claim for damages or compensation by the Contractor notwithstanding that an

increase in the time of performance of the contract be involved by virtue of

such delay and notwithstanding any labour, machinery or equipment brought

upon the Site by the Contractor for the performance of the Work being

rendered idle by such delay or failure, provided that if such delay shall in the

opinion of the Contractor, necessitate an extension of Time for Completion,

the provisions of Clause 14 hereof relating to extension of time and

associated provisions thereof shall apply.

(h) The Contractor shall maintain a day to day account of all Free Issue Materials

supplied to it by Owner indicating the daily receipt(s), consumption and

balance(s) in hand of each Free Issue Material and category thereof. Such

account shall be maintained in such from (if any) as shall be prescribed by

TCE and shall be supported by all documents necessary to verify the

correctness of the entries in the account. Such account shall be maintained at

the Contractor’s office at the Site, and shall be open for inspection and

verification (by verification of documents in support of the entry as also by

physical verification of the stocks) at all times by TCE without notice and for

this purpose TCE shall be permitted and enabled without obstruction to enter

into any godown or other place or premises where the Free Issue Materials or

any part thereof shall be stored and to inspect the same and to take by himself

and/or through his representative(s) an inventory thereof.

(i) All Free Issue Materials supplied by Owner shall be taken delivery of, held,

stored and utilized by the Contractor as trustee of Owner, and delivery of

Free Issue Materials to the Contractor shall constitute an entrustment thereof

by Owner to the Contractor, with the intent that any utilization, application or

disposal thereof by the Contractor otherwise than for incorporation in the

Permanent Works in terms hereof shall constitute a breach of trust by the

Contractor.

(j) The Contractor shall hold and store any Free Issue Materials supplied by

Owner only at such place and/or premises as may be approved by the

Engineer-in-Charge, provided that no such approval shall absolve the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Contractor in whole or part of his full liabilities in respect of such Free Issue

Material, and the Contractor shall be and remain responsible at all times at his

own risk and cost to ensure that the Free Issue Materials supplied by Owner

is/are retained at all times in premises that are air and water tight and

otherwise suitable for the storage of the concerned Free Issue Materials so as

to prevent damage or deterioration for any cause whatsoever or theft or other

loss, and shall arrange such watch and ward therefore as shall be necessary to

ensure the safety thereof.

(k) The Engineer-in-Charge may at its discretion require that all premises in

which any Free Issue Materials supplied by Owner are stored, shall be double

locked with the keys to one lock retained by Engineer-in-Charge or its

representative and the other with the Contractor with the intent that all issues

of Owner supplied Free Issue Materials shall be with concurrence of the

Engineer-in-Charge or its representative, as the case may be, provided that

any such double-locking and/or concurrence as aforesaid shall be an

additional precaution and shall not anywise absolve the Contractor of his full

liabilities or responsibilities in respect of such Free Issue Materials.

(l) The Free Issue Materials supplied by Owner shall be insured by Owner

against normal risks during transit, storage and erection. The Contractor shall,

however, be responsible forthwith to make and pursue on behalf of Owner

any and all claims under the policy(ies) and to fulfill all formalities required

to obtain payment thereunder and/or to assist Owner in making or pursuing

any such claim(s) and/or in obtaining payment thereunder.

(m) Wherever the Contractor is required to take out any material supplied by

Owner to a location outside the Plant premises, the Contractor shall be

required to take out at his own Cost and initiative and keep in force at all

times during the pendency of the Works, policy(ies) of insurance against the

risks of fire, lightning, earthquake, riot, strike and theft and against any other

damage or loss, for the full value (on reinstatement value basis) of the Free

Issue Materials lying in the Contractor’s custody and/or storage pending

utilization/ incorporation in the Permanent Work and during incorporation in

the Permanent Work. The insurance shall be kept valid till the Completion of

the Works and till the Free Issue Materials is duly accounted for to the

satisfaction of Owner.

(n) Such insurance policy(ies) shall be in the joint names of Owner and the

Contractor with exclusive right of Owner to receive all money(ies) due in

respect of such policy(ies), and with right in Owner (but without obligation to

do so) to take out and/or pay the premium for any such policy(ies) and deduct

the premium and any other costs and expenses in this behalf from the

money(ies) for the time being due to the Contractor.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(o) Notwithstanding anything stated above, it shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor to lodge with insurers and follow up claim(s), if any, under any

policy(ies) of insurance aforesaid, and nothing herein provided shall absolve

the Contractor from his full liabilities under the provisions of this Clause and

associated provisions hereof.

(p) Where the Free Issue Materials are being stored within the battery area under

the security and gate-pass control of Owner and are covered by the Overall

Storage-cum-insurance Policy taken by Owner for the Works, Owner may, at

his sole discretion, permit the Contractor to furnish an Indemnity Bond in the

proforma prescribed by Owner, for the entire value of Owner supplied Free

Issue Materials and for the entire duration during which the Free Issue

Materials shall be lying in the storage and custody of the Contractor.

(q) No such Insurance(s), as aforesaid, shall absolve the Contractor from his full

liabilities hereunder, with the intent that the same shall be held merely by

way of additional security and not by way of substitution of liability. The

Contractor shall at all times be exclusively responsible for any and all

loss(es), damage(s), deterioration, misuse, theft or other application or

disposal of the Free Issue Materials, supplied by Owner or any of them

contrary to the provisions hereof and shall keep Owner indemnified from and

against the same and shall forthwith at his own Cost and expense replace any

such Free Issue Materials lost, damaged, deteriorated, misused, stolen,

applied and/or disposed as aforesaid, with other equipment or material of

equivalent quality and quantity to the extent that the same is not covered by

any insurance as above, and if covered, payment under the relative policy(ies)

is for any reason not available to Owner.

(r) The Contractor shall use the Free Issue Materials supplied by Owner for

incorporation in the Permanent Works, carefully and judiciously with no

wastage or the minimum possible wastage, wherever some wastage is

inevitable or unavoidable, in any case within the wastage limit, if any,

specified by Owner in respect of any such Free Issue Materials. For any

excess wastage or scrap, due to misuse or injudicious, careless or wrong use

of the Free Issue Materials, or in case of loss, damage or deterioration of the

Free Issue Materials during storage with the Contractor, as to all of which

the decision of TCE shall be final and binding on the Contractor, the

Contractor shall be bound to replace the Free Issue Materials with materials

of equivalent quantity and grade, acceptable to Owner within the time limit

specified by Owner, and where this is not possible, practicable or advisable,

in the opinion of Owner, which shall be final and binding on the Contractor,

Owner shall be compensated by the Contractor for the loss caused, for the

replacement costs, which shall be worked out by Owner based on the

assessed landed cost plus the costs of procurement at 15% (fifteen percent) of

the assessed landed costs for Owner. This amount shall forthwith be remitted

by the Contractor within a week of demand made by Owner, failing which

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Owner shall be entitled to recover/adjust the amount demanded from any

money(ies) due from Owner to the Contractor and / or from any security or

any other deposits of the Contractor lying with Owner, under this and/or any

other contract, without any further notice to the Contractor. The decisions of

Owner in respect of the actions contemplated in this Clause shall be final and

binding on the Contractor.

(s) Notwithstanding anything herein provided and notwithstanding the transfer of

all risks in respect of such Free Issue Materials to the Contractor, the

ownership in respect of all the Free Issue Materials shall at all times be and

remain with Owner.

(t) The excess equipment and material and the scrap material generated from the

Work, in so far as the Free Issue Materials are concerned, shall be returned to

Owner’s Stores. On Completion of the Work, the Contractor shall duly render

accounts for the materials and equipment issued by Owner, to the satisfaction

of Owner. Any shortages, losses and/or damages shall be to the Contractor’s

account and all the conditions stipulated under sub-clause (r) above shall

apply in this case also.

9.30 Owner may do part of the Works

Upon failure of the Contractor to comply with any instructions given in accordance

with the Contract, Owner shall have the right to deploy additional labour force, tools,

equipment and materials for such part of the Works as Owner may designate and/or engage another contractor to carry out the Works. In such cases, Owner shall deduct

from the amount which might otherwise become due to the Contractor the cost of

deploying additional labour or materials of the cost of engaging another contractor to complete the Works along with an additional 10% of such cost to cover all other

expenses and departmental charges incurred by Owner in this regard. Should the total

amount thus calculated exceed the amount due to the Contractor, the difference shall

be recovered from the Contractor as a debt due. 10 DESIGN, PLANS AND MANUALS

10.1 Design Data

10.1.1. Engineer-in-Charge shall prepare or cause to be prepared the Design Data required by

the Contractor for preparing the Drawings and Designs and for the execution of the

Works. The Design Data shall be supplied to the Contractor prior to commencement

of the Works.

10.1.2. The Design Data and all other information forming a part of the Bidding Documents

have been provided by Engineer-in-Charge in good faith with a view to assist the

Contractor in preparing the Drawings and Designs and executing the Works. Owner/

Engineer-in-Charge assumes no responsibility for the accuracy or adequacy of the

Design Data and the Contractor is expected to undertake a complete and independent

survey of all factors relevant to the performance of the Works and to verify the Design

Data. The Contractor shall proceed with the use of the Design Data only after satisfying

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

itself of its sufficiency and appropriateness for use.

10.1.3. The Design Data shall be in the custody and care of Engineer-in-Charge. Unless

otherwise stated in the Contract, 2 (two) copies of the Design Data shall be supplied

to the Contractor, who may make or request further copies at the Cost of the

Contractor.

10.2 Contractor’s General Obligations

10.2.1 The Contractor shall design and provide all necessary specifications for the Works,

strictly in accordance with the Specifications and the Design Data. Any design detail,

plan, drawing, specifications, notes, annotations and information required shall be

provided in sufficient detail, size and scale and within such time as may be required to

ensure effective execution of the Works and/or as otherwise required by the

Specifications.

10.2.2 All Drawings and Designs, assumptions, calculations, schedules, patterns, models and

other relevant information provided by the Contractor or as may be required under the

Specifications or as may be required by the Contractor for the execution of the Works,

or as the Engineer-in-Charge may require for a full appreciation of any design, methods

of construction and installations proposed by the Contractor, shall be submitted to the

Engineer-in-Charge for acceptance in accordance with Clause 9.13 prior to

implementation. Any acceptance by the Engineer-in-Charge shall not however relieve

the Contractor of any of his responsibilities for the accuracy, suitability, adequacy,

performance and practicality of any such Design and Drawings, assumptions,

calculations, schedules, patterns, etc. and any subsequent amendment thereof. The cost

of all necessary remedial works in relation to any Works required as a result of any

inaccuracy, inadequacy or impracticality in the Contractor's proposals and any

subsequent amendments at any time during and after the execution of the Works, shall

be the entire responsibility of and shall be borne by the Contractor.

10.2.3 The Engineer-in-Charge shall have full power and authority to require the Contractor to

amend or modify any Drawings and Designs (including related calculations, design

documents or other affected particulars) if it finds any shortcomings thereto and the

Contractor shall without delay, correct such shortcomings at its own Cost and submit all

revised Drawings and Designs, calculations, design documents or other affected

particulars to the Engineer-in-Charge for its Approval in accordance with the provisions

of Clause 9.13. Such instructions shall not however in any way relieve the Contractor of

any of its responsibilities for the accuracy, suitability, adequacy, performance and

practicality of the amended or modified Drawings and Designs.

10.2.4 Engineer-in-Charge or Owner shall have no liability whatsoever for the cost of orders

placed or of manufacturing, construction or installation commenced by the Contractor,

other than orders placed or of manufacturing, construction or installation commenced

following the acceptance of Engineer-in-Charge as provided under Clause 10.2.2.

10.2.5 The Contractor confirms that the Contractor possesses the experience and capability

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

necessary for the design in relation to the Works. The Contractor undertakes that the

Contractor (and its employees) shall be available to attend discussions with the

Engineer-in-Charge to enable the Engineer-in-Charge to seek Approval of Owner at all

reasonable times during the Contract Validity Period.

10.3 Contractor's Warranty of Design

10.3.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible, for the suitability, adequacy, integrity,

durability and practicality of the Drawings and Designs.

10.3.2 The Contractor warrants that the Drawings and Designs meet the Specifications and

are fit for the purpose thereof. Where there is any inadequacy, insufficiency,

impracticality or unsuitability in or of the Specifications of the Design Data or any part

thereof, the Drawings and Designs shall take into account, address or rectify such

inadequacy, insufficiency, impracticality or unsuitability at Contractor's own Cost.

10.3.3 The Contractor warrants that the Works have been and/or shall continue to be executed

in accordance with the standards specified in the Specifications and utilising proven up

to date technology, systems, procedures, high quality goods, materials and equipments

and high standards of workmanship and fabrication, in accordance with Good Industry

Practice.

10.3.4 The Contractor warrants that the execution of the Works have taken or shall have

taken full account of the effects of the transportation of material and equipment, and

other logistics movement, Site constraints, traffic constraints, climatic conditions,

intended construction and manufacturing methods, Temporary Works and Contractor's

Equipment.

10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify Owner and TCE against any damage, expense,

liability, loss or claim, which Owner and/ or TCE might incur, sustain or be subject to,

arising from any breach of the Contractor's design responsibility and/or warranty set

out in this Clause 10.3.

10.3.6 No claim for additional payment or extension of the Time for Completion shall be

entertained and/or the Contractor shall not be relieved from any obligation/liability

under the Contract, for any delay, suspension, impediment to or adverse effect upon

the progress of the Works due to any mistake, inaccuracy, discrepancy or omission in

the Design Data provided by Engineer-in-Charge, the Drawings and Designs or any

failure by the Contractor to prepare any Drawings and Designs or submit the same to

the Engineer-in-Charge in due time and the Contractor shall promptly make good any

such Defect at its own Cost.

10.3.7 For each part of the Work, and except to the extent that the Parties otherwise agree:

(a) execution of such part of the Work shall not commence prior to the expiry of

the Review Periods for all the Drawings and Design which are relevant to its design and execution;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(b) execution of such part of the Work shall be in accordance with the relevant Drawings and Designs, as Approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Where any

Work or part of the Work executed by the Contractor is not in conformity with

the Approved Drawings and Designs, the Engineer-in-Charge shall be entitled to require the Contractor to repair, rectify, dismantle and/or reconstruct such

Work or part of the Work, as the case may be and all costs and expenses for

such rectification, repair, dismantling and/or reconstruction of such Work or part of the Work shall be borne by the Contractor;

(c) if the Contractor wishes to modify any Drawings and Designs which has

previously been submitted for review, the Contractor shall immediately give notice to the Engineer-in-Charge. Thereafter, the Contractor shall submit the

revised documents to the Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with the above

procedure.

10.4 Technical Standards and Regulations

The Contractor's Documents (including Drawing and Designs) shall, in addition to complying with the Specifications, comply with the technical standards, building

construction, safety and environmental regulations and other standards specified

under or defined by Applicable Laws.

10.5 As-Built Drawing and Documents

10.5.1 The Contractor shall prepare, and keep up to date, a complete set of “as-built records”

of the execution of the Works, showing the exact “as-built” locations, sizes and details

of the Works as executed, with cross references to drawings, relevant specifications and

data sheets. These records shall be kept on the Site and shall be used exclusively for the

purposes of this Contract. One original copy, 6 (six) hard copies of such “as built”

records, together with a soft copy of such “as built” records shall be submitted to the

Engineer-in-Charge prior to the commencement of the Tests on Completion.

10.5.2 In addition, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge “as-built

drawings” of the Works, showing all Works as executed by the Contractor. The

drawings shall be prepared as the Works proceed, and shall be submitted to the

Engineer-in-Charge for its review and inspection. The Contractor shall obtain the

consent of the Engineer-in-Charge as to their size, the referencing system, and other

pertinent details.

10.5.3 Prior to the issue of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall submit to the

Engineer-in-Charge one soft copy, one full-size original copy and six (6) printed copies

of the relevant “as-built drawings”, and any further Contractor's Documents specified in

the Specifications. The Works shall not be considered to be completed and the

Completion Certificate shall not be issued under Clause 17 until the documents referred

above have been submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with this Clause

10.5.3.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

10.6 Alteration in Specifications, Plans, Drawings and Designs, Extra- Works

10.6.1 The Engineer-in-Charge shall have the power, by written notice to the Contractor, at

any time prior to or during the execution of the Works, to alter, amend or modify any

Specification. To the extent that such alteration, amendment or modification requires

any corresponding amendment to the Drawings and Designs or any other Contractor’s

Document, the Contractor shall make such amendments to the Drawings and Designs

or, as the case may be, the relevant Contractor’s Document.

10.6.2 Contractor shall be bound to carry out such altered/extra/new items of work in

accordance with any instruction which may be given to it by the Engineer-In-Charge.

10.6.3 Subject to Clause 24.10.2, if any alteration, amendment or modification of the

Specifications pursuant to Clause 10.6.1 shall, in the opinion of the Contractor and/or

Owner, result in an increase, reduction or change in the Works that are covered in the

Price Schedule, which would render the Contract Price unreasonable, Owner and the

Contractor shall negotiate a suitable increase or, as the case may be, reduction in the

Contract Price. If Owner and the Contractor fail to agree on a revised Contract Price,

the Engineer-in-Charge shall, as an interim measure, decide on an appropriate

adjustment to the Contract Price and pending a final decision on the quantum of

increase or, as the case may be, reduction in the Contract Price under Clause 35, the

Contractor shall be bound to execute the Works on the basis of the revised Contract

Price determined by the Engineer-in-Charge.

For the avoidance of doubt, it hereby clarified that if the rate(s) of any additional,

altered or substituted item of Work are specified in the Price Schedule, the Contractor shall be bound to carry on the additional, altered or substituted items of Work at the

same rate(s) as are specified in the Price Schedule.

10.6.4 If any alteration, amendment or modification of the Specifications pursuant to Clause

10.6.1 shall, in the opinion of the Contractor and/or Owner, necessitate any additional,

altered or substituted items of Work that are not covered in the Price Schedule, the

remuneration for such additional, altered or substituted items of Work that are not

covered in the Price Schedule shall be determined by the Engineer-in-Charge in the

following manner:

(a) If it is possible to derive the rate(s) for such additional altered or substituted

items of Work from any of the items of Work covered in the Price Schedule,

the rate(s) for such additional altered or substituted items of Work shall be the

rate(s) arrived at on the basis of such derivation. The opinion of the Engineer-

in-Charge as to whether the rate(s) for the additional altered or substituted

items of Work can be derived from the rate(s) of items already covered in the

Price Schedule shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

(b) If, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, it is not possible to derive the

rate(s) for the additional altered or substituted items of Work from any of the

items of the Work covered in the Price Schedule, then the rate(s) for such items

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

of Work shall be determined by taking:

(i) the issue rate(s) of materials supplied by Owner, if applicable;

(ii) materials supplied by the Contractor and incorporated in the Permanent

Works at the rate(s), if any, specified in the Price Schedule;

(iii) labour cost at rate(s) for labour, if any, specified in the Price Schedule;

(iv) if the additional altered or substituted items of Work involve the use of

any material or labour not covered in the Price Schedule, for the purpose

of determining the rates under sub-paragraph (ii) and/or (iii) above, the

prevailing market rate(s) shall be taken into account for determining the

rate(s) of such materials and/or labour and an additional 15% (fifteen

percent) shall be added to the market rate(s) to cover the Contractor’s,

supervisions, overheads and profits.

(v) the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the quantity or quality of

materials and/or labour involved in executing the additional altered or

substituted items of Work or as to whether the additional altered or

substituted items of Work involve the use of materials and/or labour that

are not covered in the Price Schedule and if not, as to the market rate(s)

that shall be applicable shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

10.7 Operations and Maintenance Manuals

10.7.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge, the Operation

and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with the Specifications and in sufficient

detail for Owner to operate, maintain, dismantle, reassemble, adjust and repair the

Facility. The Contractor shall not be entitled to receive the Completion Certificate

unless the Operation and Maintenance Manuals have been submitted to the Engineer-

in-Charge and received its consent.

10.7.2 The Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted by the Contractor shall, if

required, be updated by the Contractor during the Defect Liability Period and re-

submitted for review by the Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with Clause 9.13.

11 TRANSFER OF TITLE AND RISK

11.1. Subject to Clause 11.5 below, the title of domestic supply of Goods and Material and

Plant shall pass to Owner in the manner set out below:

11.1.1 In the event the Contractor is the manufacturer of the domestic Goods and Material

and Plant (including the mandatory spares etc.), the title to such domestic Goods and

Material and Plant shall be transferred to Owner ex-factory, ex works or ex

warehouse basis i.e. upon the dispatch of such goods by the Contractor from its

premises.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

11.1.2 In the event the Contractor is not the manufacturer of the domestic Goods and

Material and Plant (including the mandatory spares etc.), and instead procures the

same from a Subcontractor/ vendor / original manufacturer, then the title shall be

transferred in the following manner:

(a) If pursuant to the above arrangement between Owner and the Contractor and

between the Contractor and its Subcontractor/ vendor, the goods move from

outside the state where the Site is located to the Site, the title shall be

transferred by the Contractor to Owner during the transport of such goods

from the Subcontractor/ vendor/ original manufacturer’s premises, as the case

may be, to the Site, by endorsement of documents of title by the Contractor in

favour of Owner.

(b) If pursuant to the above arrangement between Owner and the Contractor and

between the Contractor and its sub-contractor/ vendor, the goods move within

the state where the Site is located, then the title shall be transferred to Owner

upon the dispatch of the goods by the Contractor or its Subcontractor/ vendor

/ original manufacturer, as the case may be, from its premises.

Notwithstanding the transfer of title of the domestic Goods and Material and Plant

(including the mandatory spares etc.), the responsibility for care and custody thereof

together with the risk of loss or damage thereto shall remain with the Contractor until the issuance of Completion Certificate by Owner. However, the risk for any defect or

shortcoming in such Goods and Materials and Plant shall continue to remain with the

Contractor until issuance of the Final Completion Certificate.

11.2. Subject to Clause 11.5 and 11.6 below, the title of Goods and Material and Plant

imported by the Contractor or its Subcontractor for supply to Owner for the execution

of Works shall be transferred by the Contractor in favour of Owner by effecting

appropriate sales through endorsement of the Bill of Lading or such other documents

of title in relation to such imported Goods and Material and Plant before the same

cross the customs frontiers of India on high sea sale basis or FOB (free on board

basis) at the port of loading of the Goods and Material and Plant, as may be agreed

between the Parties.

The Contractor and its Subcontractor/ vendor shall accordingly execute such documents as may be necessary for effecting the transfer of title in favour of Owner

in a manner indicated herein above, such that the Contractor has proper title over the

imported Goods and Material and Plant before it transfers the title over such imported Goods and Material and Plant in favour of Owner.

Notwithstanding the passing of title as mentioned hereinabove such passing of title to

Owner shall not in any way absolve, diminish, or dilute the responsibilities and obligations of the Contractor under the Contract.

Notwithstanding the transfer of title as above, the Contractor shall continue to be responsible for the risk to, quality and performance of such imported Goods and

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Material and Plant and for their compliance with the performance guarantees and the

technical specifications until the issuance of the Completion Certificate by Owner. However, the risk for any defect or shortcoming in such Goods and Materials and

Plant shall continue to remain with the Contractor till issuance of the Final

Completion Certificate.

The Contractor warrants that all imported Goods and Material and Plant supplied by

the Contractor shall be free of any encumbrance or lien.

11.3. The title of the Contractor’s Equipment used by the Contractor or its Subcontractor in

connection with the Contract shall remain with the Contractor or its Subcontractor, as

the case may be.

11.4. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the foregoing provisions of this

Clause 11, the title of all Consumables, shall only be deemed to be transferred by the

Contractor to Owner, upon Final Completion, subject to the provisions of Clause 0.

For the purposes of the foregoing, “Consumables” shall mean and include all raw

material and consumables, comprised in the Goods and Materials and Plant,

including, without limitation, such as sand, bricks, stones, tiles, cement,

reinforcement steel, structural steel, and civil construction materials, subject to CENVAT credit for such items, not being available under Applicable Laws in India.

11.5. Further, the Contractor shall ensure that all Goods and Material and Plant procured by

the Contractor from the Subcontractors/ vendor / original manufacturer, or otherwise

supplied by the Contractor are consigned by the Subcontractor/ vendor / original

manufacturer or the Contractor (as applicable) directly to the Site, unless otherwise

agreed between the Parties.

11.6. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in Clause 11.1 and 11.2 above,

but subject to Clause 11.4:

(i) title in respect of any Goods and Materials and/ or Plant, which are

consigned, in breach of the foregoing provisions of Clause 11.5, to any location other than the Site, shall only be deemed to be transferred to Owner,

in accordance with the provisions of Clause 11.1 or 11.2 above, where the

said Goods and Material and/ or Plant are duly consigned to the Site; and

(ii) notwithstanding transfer of title in accordance with Clause 11.1 above,

Contractor shall retain care, custody, and control of all such Goods and Materials and/or Plant and exercise due care thereof until Completion.

Further, such transfer of title shall in no way affect Owner’s rights under any

other provision of this Contract

(iii) Contractor shall, in order to protect Owner's interest in all Goods and

Materials and/or Plant to which title has passed to Owner but which remains

in the possession of the Contractor or any another party, take or cause to be taken all steps necessary under the Applicable Laws to protect Owner’s title

and to protect Owner against claims by other parties with respect thereto.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Contractor shall fully indemnify Owner in this regard. Further, to the extent

reasonably required, Contractor shall cause such Goods and Materials and/or Plant to be suitably marked with an identifying mark or symbol indicating

that such Goods and Materials and/or Plant are the property of Owner.

12 CONTRACTOR'S PERSONNEL

12.1. The Contractor shall make arrangements for the engagement of staff and labour for

the execution of the Works at its own Cost. The Contractor shall, if required by the

Engineer-in-Charge, deliver to the Engineer-in-Charge or his assistant, a report in

detail, in such form and at such intervals as the Engineer-in-Charge may prescribe,

showing the number of personnel employed in different categories by the Contractor

on the Site.

12.2. The Contractor shall designate and propose suitable, adequately skilled and qualified

persons as key personnel (“Key Personnel”), whose identities and resumes will be

submitted by the Contractor to Engineer-in-Charge within 30 (thirty) days of the

Effective Date, to supervise the execution of the Works and to liaise with Engineer–

in-Charge or any competent Authority, as appropriate.

Should the Contractor intend to make any change in Key Personnel appointed

pursuant to this Clause 12.2, it shall immediately notify the Engineer-in-Charge of such intended change and seek Approval for replacement of such Key Personnel.

12.3. The Contractor shall ensure that the Contractor's Personnel shall be sufficient and

competent in number, suitably qualified and experienced for the purpose of execution

of the Works at the Site and that it shall provide such numbers of Contractor's

Personnel at the Site until Completion has been achieved and that the selection of the

Contractor's Personnel shall maximise productivity and prevent slow-downs, work

stoppages or other disruptive concerted actions of the Contractor's Personnel.

12.4. Throughout the execution of the Works, and as long thereafter as is necessary to fulfil

the Contractor's obligations, the Contractor shall provide all necessary

superintendence to plan, arrange, direct, manage, inspect and test the Works.

Superintendence shall be given by a sufficient number of persons with adequate

knowledge of the language for communications and of the operations to be carried

out (including the methods and techniques required, the hazards likely to be

encountered and methods of preventing accidents), for the satisfactory and safe

execution of the Works.

12.5. If and whenever any of the Contractor’s or Sub-Contractors agents, sub-agents,

assigns, consultants or employees shall in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge

(whose opinion in this behalf shall be final) or its authorized person be guilty of

misconduct or be incompetent or not qualified for, or negligent in, the performance of

his/their duties, or if in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge (which shall be final) it

is undesirable for any reason (which need not be disclosed to the Contractor) for such

person(s) to be employed in the Works, the Contractor, if so directed by the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Engineer-in-Charge or its authorized person shall forthwith remove or cause to be

removed such person(s) from employment thereon, and any person(s) so removed

shall not be re-employed in the Works except with the prior permission in writing of

the Site. Should the Contractor be requested to repatriate any person removed from

the Works; the Contractor shall do so forthwith at its own Cost. Any person(s) so

removed from the Works shall be immediately replaced at the expense of Contractor

by a qualified and competent substitute.

12.6. The Contractor shall make itself aware of all labour regulations and their impact on

the cost and build up the same in the Contract Price. Subject to Clause 25, during the

Contract Validity Period no extra amount in this regard shall be payable to the

Contractor, for any reason whatsoever.

12.7. In the event of default being made in the payment of any money in respect of wages

of any person employed by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractor of any tier in

and for carrying out of the Contract and if a claim thereof is filed in the office of the

labour Authorities and proof thereof is furnished to the satisfaction of the labour

Authorities, Owner may, failing payment of the said money by the Contractor or the

Subcontractor, as the case may be, make payment of such claim on behalf of the

Contractor, to the said labour Authorities and any sums so paid shall be recoverable

by Owner from the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to pay any amount required to

be paid to Owner as aforesaid, within 7 (seven) days of its demand, Owner shall be

entitled to recover the amount from any moneys due or accruing to the Contractor

under the Contract.

12.8. The establishment of the Contractor and its sub-contractors shall be duly registered

under the Employees’ Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 and

the Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948 and the Contractor shall duly and timely

pay and ensure payment by its subcontractors of contributions and its/their employees

to the Authorities prescribed under the said Acts and any schemes framed thereunder

in respect of all labour employed by it for the execution of the contract. Copies of

challans/receipt of such payments along with the list showing persons employed

together with emoluments paid for the purpose of provident fund deductions shall be

submitted to Owner before the end of every calendar months. In case the relevant

provident fund Authority’s receipt/challans referred to above are not furnished,

Owner shall deduct 5% (five percent) of the payable amount from the Running Bill

and retain the deducted amount as a security for the contribution to provident fund.

Such retained amounts shall be released to the Contractor only on production of

challan/receipts of the relevant provident fund Authority for the period covered by the

related deduction.

12.9. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) shall obtain from the Authority(ies) designated

in this regard under any Applicable Law, including but not limited to the Factories

Act, 1948 and Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition Act, 1970 (in so far as

applicable) any and all such licence(s), consent(s), registration(s) and/or other

authorization(s) as shall from time to time be or become necessary for or relative to

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

the execution of the Works or any part or portion thereof or the storage or supply of

any material(s) or otherwise in connection with the performance of the Contract and

shall at all times observe and ensure due observance by the Subcontractors, servants

and agents of all terms and conditions of the said license(s), consent(s), regulation(s)

and other authorization(s) and laws, rules and regulations applicable thereto.

12.10. Without prejudice to the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with the

Applicable Laws under the Contract, the Contractor shall, in relation to the execution

of the Works, comply and shall ensure that the Subcontractors comply with all labour

laws, including but not limited to the Factories Act, 1948, the Workmen's

Compensation Act, 1923, the Payment of Wages Act, 1936, the Minimum Wages

Act, 1948, the Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, the Employees’ State Insurance Act

1948, the Weekly Holidays Act, 1942, the Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, the

Employees Provident Funds Scheme, 1952, the Employees Provident Funds and

Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952, the Maternity Benefit Act, 1962, the Contract

Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970, the Equal Remuneration Act, 1976, the

Inter-State Migrant Workmen (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service)

Act, 1979, the Labour Laws (Exemption from Furnishing Returns and Maintaining

Registers by Certain Establishments) Act, 1988 , the Children (Pledging of Labour)

Act, 1933, the Child Labour Prohibition and Regulation Act, 1951, the provisions of

the Income Tax Act, 1961, Environment Protection Act, 1986, Maritime Act, 2008,

Wild life (Protection ) Act, 1972 and any other Applicable Law relating to the

employment of workmen, employees or labour or any subsequent modification or re-

enactment thereof.

12.11. Without prejudice to the generality of the scope of Clause 12.8 above, the Contractor

shall comply with the provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and the Rules and

Orders issued there under from time to time. Any failure to comply with the

Apprentices Act, 1961 shall amount to a breach of the Contract and Owner may, at

his discretion, terminate the Contract. The Contractor shall also be liable for any

pecuniary liability arising on account of any violation of the Apprentices Act, 1961

by him.

12.12. (a) In order to govern welfare and working conditions of labourers engaged in

construction activities, the Building and other Construction Workers’

(Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service Act, 1996, hereinafter

referred to as the “RE &CS”) came into force. The RE&CS Act is applicable

in respect of building and other construction work. Wherever applicable, the

Contractor shall strictly comply with the provisions pertaining to RE&CS

Act. The Contractor must be registered with the concerned authorities under

the RE&CS Act, or in case of non-registration the Contractor should obtain

registration within one month of the award of the Contract.

(b) The Contractor shall comply with the Building and Other Construction Workers’ Welfare Cess Act, 1996, the Building and other Construction

Workers’ Rules, 1998 and the Building and Other Construction Workers

Welfare Cess Rules, 1998.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Cess as per the prevailing rate, shall be deducted at source from bills of the Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge of the contract and remitted to the

“Secretary, Building and Other Construction Workers Welfare Board” of the

concerned State. The Contractor shall be responsible to submit final assessment return of the cess amount to the assessing officer after adjusting

the cess deducted at source.

12.13. The Contractor shall and shall cause its Subcontractors to comply with the following:

(a) the provision and maintenance of such temporary accommodation, canteen

facilities and other amenities as may be reasonably necessary for all of the

Contractor's Personnel employed at the Site, including fencing, first aid, water supply (both for drinking and other purposes), electricity supply, sanitation,

fire prevention and fire-fighting equipment, a crèche where 10 (ten) or more

women workers may keep their children below the age of 6 years, any other facility/utility as may be required under the Contract as well as under the

applicable statutory provisions and other general requirements in connection

with such accommodation or amenities, provided that the Contractor's Personnel shall not maintain any temporary or permanent living quarters

within the structures forming part of the Permanent Works;

(b) due regard shall be given to all recognised festivals, days of rest and religious or other customs prevalent in the location where the Site is situated, in all

dealings with the Contractor's Personnel;

(c) no work shall be carried out on the Site outside the normal working hours,

unless, permitted by Engineer-in-Charge/ Owner or if the work is

unavoidable or necessary for the protection of life or property or for the

safety of the Works, in which case the Contractor shall immediately intimate Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge;

(d) all reasonable precautions shall at all times be taken to prevent any unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct by or amongst the Contractor's Personnel and to

preserve peace at the Site and to ensure the protection of all persons

(including the Contractor's Personnel) and property at or in the neighbourhood of the Site, against any such disruption. If Owner is required

to maintain special police force/security personnel in consequence of

unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct by or amongst the Contractor's

Personnel, all costs and damages incurred by Owner in this regard shall be borne by the Contractor; and

(e) the Contractor shall not employ, for the purposes of Works, any Person below the age as is statutorily forbidden.

12.14. The Contractor shall keep Owner and TCE and their personnel indemnified from

and against all personal and third party claims whatsoever (inclusive of all costs

incurred between attorney and client) arising out of any act, omission or inter-

omission on part of any Sub-Contractor or agent, sub-agent, consultant or employee

of the Contractor or any Sub-Contractor, whether committed, omitted or arising

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

within or without the scope of the Contract, Sub-Contract, agency or employment, as

the case may be.

12.15. If, the Contractor directly or through petty contractors or Subcontractors supplies any

labour to be used wholly or partly under the direct orders and control of the Engineer-

in-Charge or Owner, whether in connection with any work being executed by the

Contractor or otherwise for the purposes of Owner, such labour shall, for the purpose

of this Clause, be deemed to be persons employed by the Contractor.

12.16. The Parties hereto agree that the employment of the personnel and/or workmen by the

Contractor, Subcontractor in relation to the execution of the Works shall not

constitute any Owner-employee relationship between Owner and such personnel

and/or workmen as employed by the Contractor and the Subcontractor in relation to

the execution of the Works.

12.17. (a) The Contractor shall ensure that local labour, skilled and/or unskilled, to the

extent available shall be employed in this work. In case of non-availability of

suitable labour in any category out of the above persons, labour from outside

may be employed.

(b) The Contractor shall not recruit personnel of any category from among those

who are already employed by the other agencies working at Site.

12.18. All foreign nationals coming to India for execution of the Contract will have to apply

for employment visa only and that grant of employment visa would be subject to

strict adherence of following norms:

(a) Employment visa is granted only for the skilled and qualified professionals or

to a person who is being engaged or appointed by a company, organization,

industry or undertaking etc. in India on contract or employment basis at a

senior level or at a skilled position such as technical expert, senior executive

or in managerial position etc.

(b) Request for employment visa for jobs for which large number of qualified

Indians are available, is not considered.

(c) Under no circumstances an employment visa is granted for routine, ordinary

secretarial/ clerical jobs.

The Contractor must check the latest visa rules from Indian Embassy/ High

Commission in their country in case foreign nationals are required to be deputed to India during execution of the Contract.

13 TIME FOR COMPLETION AND PRICE REDUCTION DUE TO DELAY IN

COMPLETION

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

13.1 Time for Completion

Time is the essence of the Contract. The Parties agree and acknowledge that it is of

paramount importance that the Works are executed strictly in accordance with the

Works Completion Schedule, as may be revised from time to time and completed in accordance with the Specifications, within the Time for Completion.

13.2 Price Reduction due to delay in completion

13.2.1 If the Contractor fails to complete the Works within the Time for Completion, and/or

if completion of any specific work(s) in respect of which a separate progress schedule

has been established is not achieved by the date of completion thereof specified in the

Works Completion Schedule (each of the said date(s) is hereinafter referred to as the

“starting date for discount calculation) other than due to an event of Force Majeure or

any reason solely attributable to Owner, then the Contract Price shall be reduced by 1

% ( one percent) per week of delay or part thereof subject to a maximum deduction

of 10% (ten percent) of the Contract Price. After any adjustments made to the

Contract Price pursuant to this Clause 13.2.1, if any amount is due to Owner from the

Contractor, then such amount will either be set-off against any amount due or that

becomes due to the Contractor or be recovered by invoking the Contract

Performance Bank Guarantee.

The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge in regard to applicability of price reduction shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

13.2.2 The reduction of Contract Price shall not relieve the Contractor from its obligations to

complete the Works and the Facilities, or from any of its other duties, obligations or

responsibilities under the Contract. The Contractor shall use and continue to use its

best endeavour to avoid or reduce further delay to the Works, or the issue of the

Completion Certificate.

13.2.3 It is specifically acknowledged that the provisions of Clause 13.2 constitute purely a

provision for price adjustment and/or fixation and are not to be understood or

construed as a provision for liquidated damages or penalty under Section 74 of the

Indian Contract Act, 1872 or otherwise.

13.2.4 Application of price reduction under this Clause 13.2 above shall be without

prejudice to any other right of Owner, including the right of termination under Clause

32.2 and associated clauses thereunder.

14 EXTENSION OF TIME

14.1. Without prejudice to, and subject to Clause 14.3 below, to the extent that any of the

following events cause the Contractor to suffer a delay in the critical path progress of

the Works, which in turn prevents the Contractor from completing the Works within

the Time for Completion, the Contractor may apply for an extension of the Time for

Completion of the Works:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(a) Occurrence of a Force Majeure event;

(b) There is delay in handing over the possession of the Site (save and except

sequential handing over of Site as per provisions of Clause 8.1.2) to the

Contractor not caused due to default of the Contractor;

(c) Instruction of Owner to suspend the Works and the Contractor not being in

default;

(d) Any order of Court restraining the performance of the Contract in full or in any

part thereof, unless such order is attributable to any default, breach or non-

compliance by the Contractor;

(e) Under Clause 24.7 due to Owner’s Variation;

(f) Delay in Approval of the Contractor's Document in terms of Clause 9.13;

(g) Under Clause 9.29 due to Owner’s failure to supply the Free Issue Materials

(h) Under Clause 25 due to Change in Law;

(i) Under Clause 17.6 due to taking of possession of the Works or any part thereof

by the Engineer-in-Charge prior to Completion.

14.2. Except as specified in Clause 14.1 above, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any

extension of the Time for Completion for any reason whatsoever. Provided,

notwithstanding anything contained in Clause 14.1 or otherwise, the Contractor shall

not be entitled to any extension of time:

(a) where the instructions or acts of Engineer-in-Charge are necessitated by or

intended to cure any default of or breach of the terms of the Contract

committed by the Contractor;

(b) where any delay is due to:

(i) The failure of its Subcontractor, to commence or to carry out the part

of the Works in due time; or

(ii) Non-availability, or shortage of Contractor's Equipment, labour,

utility services, Plant and Goods and Materials; or

(iii) Inclement weather conditions or the occurrence of an event of Force

Majeure.

14.3. The Contractor shall, as soon as reasonable practicable and in any event within 7

(seven) days, after the Contractor knew or ought reasonably to have known of its

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

occurrence of any of the events specified in Clause 14.1, provide to Engineer-in-

Charge with copy to Owner, in writing, the full particulars of such event and the

probable material adverse effect that such event is likely to have on the performance

of its obligations under the Contract.

14.4. Any notice issued pursuant to Clause 14.3 shall include full particulars of:

(a) The nature and extent of each such event which is the subject of any claim for

relief under Clause 14.3 with evidence in support thereof;

(b) The estimated duration and the effect or probable effect which such event is

having or shall have on the Contractor's performance of its obligations under

the Contract;

(c) The measures which the Contractor is taking or proposes to take, to alleviate

the impact of such event; and

(d) Any other information relevant to the Contractor's claim.

The Engineer-in-Charge shall not consider any claim for relief from the Contractor, if the Contractor fails to comply with the provisions of Clause 14.3 and this Clause

14.4.

14.5. The Parties agree and acknowledge that:

(a) the Contractor shall constantly use its reasonable endeavours to prevent

and/or minimise delay in the progress of the Works, howsoever caused, and

to prevent delay in the performance of Works beyond the Works Completion

Schedule and the Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of the

Works Completion Schedule in respect of any cause of delay nor for any

period of delay which by the exercise of reasonable endeavours could be

avoided or reduced (to the extent that such delay could have been reduced).

The onus of proving that the Contractor has exercised all reasonable

endeavours, and that despite such endeavours, the delay could not be

avoided or reduced, shall in all cases rest with the Contractor;

(b) the Contractor shall not under any circumstances be entitled to an extension

of the Works Completion Schedule where the delay or likely delay is, or

would be, attributable to the default, breach, negligence, improper conduct or

lack of endeavour of the Contractor or any persons for whom it is

contractually or otherwise responsible for and further the Contractor shall not

be entitled to an extension of the Time for Completion where delay arises as a

consequence of the termination of a Sub-contractor's employment by the

Contractor;

(c) if there are two or more concurrent causes of delay and only one of those

concurrent causes is a delay which would entitle the Contractor to an

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

extension of the Works Completion Schedule, the Contractor would not be

entitled to an extension of the Works Completion Schedule for the period of

that concurrence;

(d) it is a further condition precedent to the Contractor's entitlement to an

extension of the Works Completion Schedule that the critical path progress of

the Works is affected in a manner which might reasonably be expected to

result in a delay to the Contractor in the performance of the Works as per the

Works Completion Schedule; and

(e) no relief shall be granted to the Contractor to the extent that any failure or

delay in the performance of the Works by the Contractor, would nevertheless

have been experienced by the Contractor, had an event of Force Majeure or

other relevant event(s) specified in Clause 14.1 entitling the Contractor to

otherwise claim an extension of time, not occurred.

14.6. If the delay in the completion of the Works or a portion thereof, for which an earlier

completion period is stipulated, is due to the Contractor's failure or fault, and the

Engineer-in-Charge is of the view that the remaining Works can be completed by the

Contractor in a reasonable and acceptable short time, then Owner may allow the

Contractor an extension of the Time for Completion at its discretion with or without a

reduction in the Contract Price, as it may decide.

14.7. The extension of time shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any cause or

event of delay mentioned in Clause 14.1 or elsewhere in the Contract and other than

as provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim any damages

or compensation in addition to or in lieu of such extension of time.

15 MECHANICAL COMPLETION AND PRE-COMMISSIONING

15.1. For the purposes of this Contract, “Mechanical Completion” shall mean the

completion of the following activities in relation to the Facility:

(i) the construction of the Facility has been completed, checklist generated &

punched with minor exceptions, Flushing, chemical cleaning including all

other Pre-commissioning activities, MRT (Mechanical Run Test for

Machine) & final boxup excluding system dry out and catalyst loading;

(ii) all Plant, equipment and machinery are installed and aligned;

(iii) all piping and instrumentation work and loop testing is complete;

(iv) all electrical work is complete, electrical systems are energized and motor no

load runs are complete;

(v) all hydrostatic/pneumatic testing is completed;

(vi) safety valves and pressure relief valves are set and checked;

(vii) speed and direction of rotation of all prime movers are checked; and

(viii) DCS system (if applicable) is complete.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

15.2. As soon as the conditions mentioned in Clause 15.1 have been satisfied in the opinion

of the Contractor, the Contractor shall notify Engineer-in-Charge with copy to Owner

in writing that the Facility is mechanically complete.

15.3. The Contractor shall divide the Facility into systems/subsystems as per the

process/pre-commissioning requirement mentioned in the Specifications.

15.4. The Contractor shall issue a certificate in the format set out at Appendix 5 Part A

(“Format-I”) for each system for inspection and verification by the Engineer-in-

Charge with copy to Owner that construction has been completed in accordance with

the Specifications.

15.5. Except for any deviation or modification agreed between Owner, the Engineer-in-

Charge and the Contractor, if the Engineer-in-Charge is not satisfied that the relevant

system/subsystem has achieved Mechanical Completion, it may endorse Format-I

accordingly / issue Format II as set out at Appendix 5 Part B, stating in what way the

system/subsystem has not achieved Mechanical Completion in accordance with the

Contract. The Contractor shall then expeditiously complete or rectify the list of

outstanding items in accordance with the Engineer-in-Charge’s suggestions and issue a

certificate in the format set out at Appendix 6 (“Format-III”), with agreed Punch-list

Items to be attended to later.

15.6. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge along with each

Format-III, a preliminary, but as definitive as possible a list containing all the

outstanding Punch-list Items and procedures that require completion or rectification

before the taking over of the Facility by Owner (the “Punch List”).

15.7. Upon the submission of the Punch List by the Contractor pursuant to Clause 15.6, the

Engineer-in-Charge shall either approve such list or require such additions to and/or

amendments of such list as it may reasonably consider necessary.

15.8. When Format-IV for all systems/sub-systems comprising the Facility is issued, the

Facility will be deemed to have achieved Mechanical Completion.

15.9. The Contractor shall thereafter be responsible for ensuring that:

(a) the Punch-list Items are completed before the Facility is taken over by Owner

unless otherwise agreed between the Parties; and

(b) any pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures needed before the

Facility is put into use are safely carried out.

15.10 Pre-Commissioning

15.10.1 For the purposes of this Contract, “Pre-Commissioning” shall mean performance of

those activities, which are required to be performed after acceptance of system on

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

liquidation of all the punch point to make the Facility ready for commissioning and

includes the completion of the following activities in relation to the Facility:

(a) system checking as per Specifications;

(b) Site modifications, if necessary;

(c) internal inspection of Plant and equipment;

(d) flushing/steam blowing;

(e) air blowing of pipelines including gasket blowing;

(f) purging of systems using inert gas;

(g) leak test both for low/high pressure systems;

(h) calibration of instruments;

(i) checking of the electrical equipment for proper earthing;

(j) conducting operability test on individual equipment/system;

(k) charging of lubes and other chemicals;

(l) Integration of all control systems of the unit with the control system of the

Plant

(m) Chemical Cleaning/De greasing where ever applicable

(n) any other pre-commissioning activities mentioned in the Specifications.

15.10.2 Contractor will start Pre-Commissioning activities after acceptance of Format -III for

all systems/subsystems comprising the Facility by Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge. The

Contractor shall also be responsible for any fabrication and supply of temporary

facilities such as temporary bypasses, spools, blinds, jump-overs, vents, strainers,

screens etc. which will be required to carry out Pre-Commissioning activities.

15.10.3 The Contractor shall issue a ‘ready for commissioning’ certificate for the Facility to

Engineer-in-Charge for its Approval with a copy to the Owner, in the format set out at

Appendix 7 (“Format-IV”). If the Engineer-in-Charge is not satisfied that the

Facility is ready for commissioning, it may endorse Format-IV accordingly, stating in

what way the Facility is not ready for commissioning in accordance with the

Specifications. The Contractor shall then expeditiously complete or rectify the list of

outstanding items in accordance with the Engineer-in-Charge’s suggestions and once

all such outstanding items are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-

Charge, the Engineer-in-Charge shall declare the Facility to be ready for

commissioning.

16 TESTS ON COMPLETION

16.1 Commissioning, Trial Operation and Performance Guarantee Test Run

For the purpose of this Contract, ‘Commissioning’ shall mean the successfully

putting in to service the Plant, equipment, vessels, tanks, pipelines, machines,

systems, sub systems, controls, monitoring, shutdown comprising the Facility in accordance with the procedures set out in the relevant operating manuals and/or as

per the requirement of the process licensor and /or detailed engineering contractor/

Engineer–in-Charge and relevant statutory agencies after successful testing, pre

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

commissioning and the trial runs and the documentation as per Engineer-in-Charge’s

format system.

16.1.1 As soon as:

(a) all parts of the Facility has been demonstrated to have achieved Mechanical Completion pursuant to Clause 15 and the Contractor has issued Format-III

relating to all systems/subsystems comprising the Facility in accordance with

the provisions of Clause 15.5;

(b) the Contractor has completed all Pre-Commissioning activities and has issued

Format-IV;

(c) Facility is ready for the conduct of the Trial Operation and Performance Tests

in relation thereto; and

(d) all the services and facilities which are necessary for the conduct of the Trial

Operation and/or Performance Tests are available,

the Contractor shall notify Owner and the Engineer-in-Charge that it is ready to

commence Trial Operation. Such notification must be sent by the Contractor to

Owner and Engineer-in-Charge within 7 (seven) days of the issuance of Format-IV under Clause 15.10.3. Unless otherwise agreed the Trial Operation shall commence

on such day as the Contractor shall notify to Owner and the Engineer-in-Charge

(which shall not be more than 10 (ten) days after Owner’s/ Engineer-in-Charge’s receipt of the above-mentioned notice from the Contractor) and shall be conducted in

accordance with the Contractor's Documents relating to the same as Approved by the

Engineer-in-Charge pursuant to Clause 9.13.

16.1.2 The Trial Operation of the Facility shall be carried out for 14 (fourteen) days in

accordance with the Contractor's Documents. During the Trial Operation the Parties

shall arrange for the conduct of Performance Guarantee Test Run (PGTR). The PGTR

shall be conducted only after the Facility has been on stable operation, with all

controls and safety systems in normal operation, for a period of not less than 72

hours. The load at which the Facility is operated during the PGTR shall be

determined by the Engineer-in-Charge at its discretion.

16.1.3 Upon successful completion of the PGTR, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-

Charge, the Engineer-in-Charge shall direct Owner to issue a certificate to the

Contractor in the format set out at Appendix 8 (“Format-V”).

16.1.4 The Contractor shall at its own Cost arrange for all tools, equipments, gadgets,

facilities or other things as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer-in-Charge for

carrying out the Tests on Completion.

16.2 Performance Tests

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

16.2.1 The Performance Tests shall be conducted within 30 (thirty) days (or as directed by

Engineer-in-Charge) of the successful completion of the Trial Operation of the

Facility or before the expiry of such other period as may be agreed between Owner

and the Contractor, to ascertain whether the Facility is capable of meeting the

Guaranteed Performance Levels and is ready for continuous, safe and stable

commercial operation. The Contractor will give Owner and the Engineer-in-Charge at

least 7 (seven) days advance written notice of the expected date of such Performance

Tests. In the event that there is a delay in carrying out the Performance Tests, the

Contractor shall notify Owner and the Engineer-in-Charge of such delay. If the

Engineer-in-Charge fails to attend at any time or place duly appointed for conducting

any Performance Tests, the Contractor shall be entitled to proceed in its absence and

the relevant Performance Tests shall be deemed to have been made in the presence of

the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall forward to Owner and the Engineer-in-

Charge duly certified copies of the results of each Performance Test.

16.2.2 After the Performance Tests have been conducted in respect of the Facility, the

Contractor shall furnish the test reports to the Engineer-in-Charge for evaluation.

Within 7 (seven) Working Days of receipt of the test reports, the Engineer-in-Charge

shall, after evaluating the test reports, decide whether the Facility complies with the

Guaranteed Performance Levels.

16.2.3 Upon such evaluation, if the Engineer-in-Charge is of the opinion that the Facility has

not achieved 100% (hundred percent) of the Guaranteed Performance Levels, then:

(a) the Contractor shall at its own risk, Cost and expense be responsible for the

repair or replacement of the Works for the Facility if required by Owner/

Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with the provisions of this Contract, within

3 (three) months of the conduct of such Performance Tests; and

(b) the Contractor shall be required to re-conduct the Performance Tests within

such reasonable period of time as may be required by Engineer-in-Charge.

The period for repairing or replacing the Works or for re-conducting the Performance Tests shall not amount to an extension of the Works Completion Schedule or be

deemed to entitle the Contractor to an increase in the Contract Price. The re-conduct

of the Performance Tests shall not prejudice any rights or remedies of Owner in respect of defective Works under the Contract and shall not be construed as a waiver

thereof.

16.2.4 If, despite the repetition of the Performance Tests in accordance with Clause 16.2.3

above, the results of the Performance Tests indicate that 100% (hundred percent) of

the Guaranteed Performance Levels have not been satisfied, then the following

consequences shall follow:

(a) Where the Facility and the Works achieves more than 90% (ninety percent)

of the Guaranteed Performance Levels, Owner shall be entitled to levy the

Performance Compensation in accordance with Clause 20 and Owner may

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

further require the Contractor to make additional repairs or remedy the Works

within 3 (three) months of the completion of the repeated Performance Tests, at the Contractor's Cost; or

(b) Where the Facility achieves less than or equal to 90% (ninety percent) of the Guaranteed Performance Levels, Owner shall have the right (but not an

obligation) to reject the Works by giving notice thereof within 15 (fifteen)

Working Days of the receipt of the results of the Performance Tests.

In the event that Owner does not exercise its right to reject the Works in accordance

with paragraph (b) above, then the consequences at paragraph (a) above shall also

apply to such defective Works. Owner shall be entitled to enforce the Performance Guarantee for recovering the sums due from the Contractor under Clause 16.2.4 (a).

16.2.5 Upon the issuance of a notice by Owner under Clause 16.2.4(b), a Contractor Event

of Default shall be deemed to have occurred and this Contract shall stand terminated

forthwith. The provisions of Clause 32 shall apply upon such termination.

16.2.6 The acceptance and use by Owner of the Works, or any part thereof, for Trial

Operation shall not absolve the Contractor from the fulfilment of other obligations

under the Contact.

17 COMPLETION

17.1 Where the Contract is a lump-sum turnkey contract

When the Contractor has:

(a) successfully completed Trial Operation and PGTR, as demonstrated by

issuance of Format-V by Owner;

(b) successfully completed the Performance Tests;

(c) completed all Punch-list Items;

(d) submitted the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee in accordance with

Clause 9.4.2;

(e) provided to Owner such certification by the Contractor or other written

evidence, as Owner may reasonably require, to demonstrate that the

Contractor has complied with all relevant Applicable Laws and has obtained

all relevant clearances in connection with the Works which it is the

Contractor's responsibility to comply with or to obtain; and

(f) provided to Owner all such documentation and information such as manuals,

systems descriptions, computer programs, access codes etc. that are necessary

to enable Owner to properly test and use any part of the Works in accordance

with Good Industry Practice and in compliance with the laws and regulations

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

relating to environment, safety etc. and in order to attain the Guaranteed

Performance Levels by Owner,

the Contractor shall so notify Owner in writing.

17.2 Where the Contract is an item rate contract

When the Contractor has successfully completed the total Works as per the scope of Works defined in the Contract and the Specifications and the Facility is ready for

commercial operations, the Contractor shall so notify Owner in writing.

17.3 Owner shall, subject to provisions of Clause 17.1, Clause 17.2 and Clause 17.4,

within 30 (thirty) Working Days of receipt of a notification from the Contractor

pursuant to Clause 17.1 or, as the case may be Clause 17.2, along with all the

documents mentioned in Clause 17.4(b) below:

(a) inspect the Works and if it is satisfied that the Works are complete in all

respects in accordance with the Specifications and free of all Defects, issue a

completion certificate to the Contractor (“Completion Certificate”) and the

Works shall be taken over by Owner on the date of issue of the Completion

Certificate; or

(b) if the Engineer-in-Charge is not satisfied that the Works are complete in all

respects in accordance with the Specifications or discovers any Defects in the

Works, notify the Contractor of the reasons why it considers that the notice

given pursuant to Clause 17.1 or Clause 17.2 was improperly or prematurely

issued and notify the Contractor of:

(i) any items of work which are in Owner's or TCE’s reasonable opinion

required to render the Facility ready for being taken over; or

(ii) any Defects in the Facility which are required to be rectified and

following completion such items or, as the case may be, rectification

of such Defects, the Contractor shall submit a fresh notice to Owner

to which the provisions of this Clause 17.1 shall apply mutatis

mutandis.

17.4 Notwithstanding anything contained in Clause 17.3, Owner shall not issue the

Completion Certificate until:

(a) the Contractor has cleared the Site of all scaffolding, wiring, pipes, surplus

materials, Contractor’s labour, equipment and machinery, demolished,

dismantled and removed all the Contractor’s Site offices and quarters and

other Temporary Works, structures and constructions and other items and

things whatsoever brought upon or erected at the Site and not incorporated in

the Permanent Works, removed all rubbish from the Site, cleared and leveled

the Site to the satisfaction of TCE and put Owner in undisputed custody and

possession of the Site, free & clear of all encumbrances and encroachments;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

and

(b) the Contractor has submitted the following documents to Owner:

(i) the technical documents according to which the Work was carried

out;

(ii) complete set of “as-built” drawings showing therein corrections and

modifications (if any) made during the course of execution of the

Works, signed by the Engineer-in-Charge;

(iii) Statement of final levels as set for various works, signed by the

Engineer-in-Charge;

(iv) Records of the final test as maintained jointly and signed by the

representative of the Contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge or

Format-III (if Commissioning is not within the Contractor's scope of

Work) and Format -V (if Performance Tests are not within the

Contractor's scope of Work) and Performance Test certificate issued

by the Engineer-in-Charge upon successful completion of the

Performance Tests (if Performance Tests are within the Contractor's

scope of Work).;

(v) Item-wise list of surplus materials including the quantity & estimated

value of each surplus item (out of the Free Issue Materials or

materials brought on the Site by the Contractor) returned to Owner’s

or otherwise disposed of, duly signed by the Engineer-in-Charge;

(vi) Materials-at-site accounting for the Free Issue Materials supplied to

the Contractor under the Contract, signed by the Engineer-in-Charge;

(vii) Discharge in respect of Owner supplied equipment and machinery,

signed by the Engineer-in-Charge; and

(viii) Declaration by the Contractor that it has duly cleared any and all of

the dues payable by it to its labourers, employees, piece rate workers

(PRWs), and other personnel, Subcontractors, suppliers, vendors,

income Tax, sales tax, octroi, entry tax, service tax, excise, customs

duty, provident fund, employees state insurance (ESI) and royalties,

or other amounts payable under any Applicable Law (if any).

17.5 Upon the issuance of the Completion Certificate, Owner shall take over the

possession, care, custody and control thereof from the Contractor.

17.6 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially

completed Work or part of the Works. Such possession or use shall not be deemed to

be an acceptance of any Works. If such prior possession or use by the Engineer-in-Charge delays the progress of Work, equitable adjustment in the Time for Completion

shall be made in accordance with Clause 14.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

18 DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD

18.1. The Defect Liability Period shall be a period of 12 (twelve) months from the date of

Completion mentioned in the Completion Certificate.

18.2. The Contractor warrants that during the duration of the Defect Liability Period, the

Works shall be free of all Defects.

18.3. If, during the Defect Liability Period, any Defects are discovered in the Works or any

part thereof; or the Works or any part thereof fails to meet the Guaranteed

Performance Levels, Owner will notify the Contractor of such Defects or failure.

Upon receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace such

Work (including any necessary uncovering, covering and recovering) in accordance

with the Contract, Good Industry Practices and Applicable Laws. At Owner's option

and Contractor's expense, Owner shall have the right to provide labour in connection

with such repair or replacement to the extent that such labor can be provided by

Owner's then-current permanent employees working at during normal working hours.

The Contractor shall provide for all additional labor required for such repair or

replacement and shall bear all Costs and expenses associated with repairing or

replacing any Work, including costs incurred by Owner in relation to providing labor,

employees and personnel for any such repairs or replacement. Upon completion of

any repair or replacement work, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, and with

Owner's coordination and Approval, perform such tests as necessary to demonstrate

that pursuant to cure of Defects under this Clause 18.3, the Works meet the

Guaranteed Performance Levels.

18.4. If the Contractor fails to rectify any Defects in the Work during the Defect Liability

Period, Owner (at its sole discretion) may:

(a) Carry out the work itself or by others, in a reasonable manner at the risk and

Cost of the Contractor; In addition to the costs, Owner shall be entitled to claim

15% (fifteen percent) of such costs towards the genuine pre-estimated damages

suffered by Owner; or

(b) If the Defect or damage is such that Owner has been deprived of substantially

the whole of the benefit of the Works or part of the Works, terminate the

Contract in respect of such parts of the Works as cannot be put to the intended

use. Without prejudice to any other rights, under the Contract or otherwise,

Owner shall then be entitled to recover all sums paid for such parts of the Works

together with the cost of dismantling the same, clearing the Site and returning

Goods and Materials to the Contractor and the provisions of Clause 32 shall not

apply.

18.5. If the Defect or damage is such that it cannot be remedied expeditiously on the Site

and if Owner gives consent, the Contractor may, remove from the Site for the purpose

of repair any part of the Works, which is defective or damaged. The consent may

require the Contractor to increase the amount of Contract Performance Bank

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Guarantee by the full replacement cost of items which are to be replaced or to provide

other appropriate security acceptable to Owner.

18.6. If the repair or remedy of any Defect or damage is such that it may affect the

performance of the Works, Owner may, within 30 (thirty) Working Days after such

repair or remedy, require that certain tests be repeated as may be necessary to

demonstrate compliance with the Guaranteed Performance Levels.

18.7. If any part of the Works has been replaced, renewed or repaired during the Defect

Liability Period, the Defect Liability Period in respect of such part shall start again

for a period of 12 (twelve) months from the date on which such replacement, renewal

or repair has been completed to the satisfaction of TCE (“Extended Defect Liability

Period”).

19 FINAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

Upon the expiry of the Defect Liability Period (or Extended Defect Liability Period,

as applicable), but subject to there being no outstanding obligation of the Contractor

to rectify the defects notified during such period, Owner shall issue the Final Completion Certificate to the Contractor (“Final Completion Certificate”). The

Contract shall not be considered to have been completed until the Final Completion

Certificate has been signed by Owner and delivered to the Contractor, stating the date

on which the Contractor has completed its obligations under the Contract. Only the Final Completion Certificate shall be deemed to constitute Approval of the Works by

Owner.

20 COMPENSATION

20.1. If the Works and the Facility, or any part thereof, fails to meet the Guaranteed

Performance Levels, then the Contractor shall pay to Owner Performance

Compensation at the rates specified in the Contract (“Performance Compensation”).

The liability of the Contractor towards Performance Compensation under this Clause

20.1 shall not exceed a sum that is greater than 10% (ten percent) of the Contract

Price. The Parties acknowledge that the Performance Compensation are a genuine

pre-estimate of and reasonable compensation for the losses and damages that will be

suffered by Owner in the event that the Works, or any part thereof, fail to meet the

Guaranteed Performance Levels and the Contractor irrevocably undertakes that it will

not, whether by legal proceedings or otherwise, contend that the amount of the

Performance Compensation are not reasonable.

20.2. Owner may:

(a) deduct and retain the amount of the Performance Compensation becoming

due under Clause 20.1 from any sums due or which become due to the

Contractor; or

(b) invoke the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee submitted by the

Contractor to Owner; or

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(c) require the Contractor to pay such amount to Owner within 28 (twenty eight) days from the date receipt of a written notice for such payment from Owner,

notwithstanding any Dispute between the Parties as to the amount due or the liability to make payment of the same.

20.3. The payment of the Performance Compensation does not in any way relieve the

Contractor from any of its obligations to perform the Works or from any other

obligations and liabilities of the Contractor under the Contract.

20.4. The Contractor agrees that the payment of Performance Compensation shall not affect

the right of Owner to recover damages resulting from the breach of any other terms of

this Contract, seek specific performance, or terminate the Contract pursuant to any

other provisions hereof.

21 CONTRACT PRICE

In consideration of the full and complete discharge of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract, Owner shall pay to the Contractor the Contract Price at the time and in the manner

set forth in the Payment Schedule, subject to such deductions and adjustments as may be

permissible under the Contract.

21.1 For Lump-Sum Contract

The Contract Price is a fixed lump-sum price inclusive of all Taxes and shall not be subject to any escalation, variation or alteration whatsoever throughout the Contract Validity Period,

except as provided in the Contract or the Bidding Document; and includes any and all direct,

indirect and ancillary costs, including profits, license, royalty and other fees, cost of all Goods and Materials, Plant and Contractor's Equipment and all other charges arising out of or in

connection with the execution of the Works. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the

lump-sum price and the rates set out in the Price Schedule and the Contract Price shall hold

good till the completion of the Works and shall not be adjusted for any fluctuation in the market costs of labour or materials.

21.2 For Item Rate Contract

21.2.1 The Contract Price shall be deemed to include and cover the following:

(a) all costs, expenses, outgoings and liabilities of every nature and description

and all risks whatsoever to be taken or which may occur in relation to the

acquisition, loading, unloading, transporting, storing, fabricating any Plant,

equipment or system or the execution, completion, testing, commissioning

and/or handing over of the Facility to Owner;

(b) cost of all construction, Plant, Goods and Materials and all other items,

materials and things required for incorporation in the Permanent Works or

otherwise in execution of the Works, including cost of procuring Contractor’s

Equipment, supply of water and power, construction of Temporary Works/

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Facilities, temporary roads, cost of labour, spares, fuel, stores and supplies to

be provided or arranged in connection with the execution of the Works;

(c) cost of all Drawings and Designs, Contractor’s Documents, plans, models,

studies and other documents required to be prepared and furnished by the

Contractor under the Contract;

(d) cost of mobilisation including, mobilisation of vehicles, machinery,

equipment, tools, consumables and other items, goods and personnel

necessary to commence the execution of the Works;

(e) cost of all Taxes, other than to the extent provided in Clause 22 below;

(f) cost of all rents, royalties, licenses, permits, permissions and other fees,

duties, penalties, levies and damages payable on the performance of the

Works including, the excavation, removal or transportation of any material or

acquisition or use of any right of way or other rights, permits or privileges in

connection with the performance of the Works;

(g) cost of all insurance(s) (including insurance premium) required to be obtained

and maintained by the Contractor in terms of the Contract;

(h) cost of all inspections, tests and cost of items, instruments and/or tools

required to conduct such inspections or tests;

(i) cost of all escalations including, Taxes, labour costs, cost of materials and

other inputs;

(j) cost of supervision, establishment overheads and financing;

(k) cost of all Contractor’s indemnities under the Contract; and

(l) cost of all deductions, discounts, adjustments and withholdings whatsoever

under or in connection with the Contract.

22 TAXES AND DUTIES

22.1. All the Taxes and levies payable in India whether under Central, State or Local laws

applicable in India as well as those leviable outside India, shall form part of the

Contract Price. The Contractor shall bear all the Taxes, duties, levies on the supply of

Goods and Material and Plant (including customs duties payable on imported Goods

and Materials and Plant) and on performance of the services, under Central, State or

Local laws applicable in India as well as those leviable outside India.

22.2. In respect of Goods and Material and Plant to be supplied by the Contractor from

within India the Ex-factory value of such Goods and Material and Plant and all the

indirect Taxes leviable on the transaction between ‘Owner and Contractor’ shall be

separately indicated in the Price Schedules (as indicated in the Price Schedule) along

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

with the rate of Tax so applied in computing such indirect Taxes.

22.3. The Contract Price comprises the base price of the Goods and Material, Plant and

services and the Taxes thereon and therefore the Contractor is mandatorily required to

indicate the Taxes in the format prescribed under Price Schedules.

22.4. The customs duty shall be to the account of the Contractor and the Contractor shall be

responsible for the timely payment of the custom duties to the relevant Government

Authorities. Owner shall assist in provision of all necessary documents required by

the Contractor to clear the Goods and Material and Plant on availing the benefit of

any concessional rate of customs duty available.

The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall exercise due diligence in properly classifying the Goods and Material and Plant, undertaking the payment of customs

duties, and/ or otherwise complying with all Applicable Laws with respect to any

import of the Goods and Material and Plant. In case Owner is exposed to any penal

action (interest and/ or penalties) by the customs Authorities for incorrect declaration and/ or valuation of the Goods and Material and Plant by the Contractor, or otherwise

on account of any breach of Applicable Laws in the course of the import of the Goods

and Material and Plant, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless, Owner for any and all costs, expenses or losses suffered or incurred by Owner in this regard.

22.5. Owner shall issue in accordance with relevant legislation, the requisite sales tax

declaration forms (including but not limited to Form C for materials other than raw

materials/consumables as defined elsewhere in the contract) to the Contractor in order

to get the benefit of any concession in the rate of VAT/ CST, as the case may be. The

Contractor shall provide relevant statutory declaration forms to Owner in accordance

with relevant legislation, within the period specified under the relevant sales tax

legislation.

22.6. Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract, the Contractor shall be solely liable for

payment of the following amounts:

(a) all Taxes imposed and assessments made in relation to the Contractor's

Equipment and the Works (including any Taxes applicable to the Works

performed by the Subcontractors) which are payable in India;

(b) all contributions payable under Applicable Laws, awards or pursuant to any

contract with an industrial or trade union or other association of employees;

or otherwise with respect to or ascertained by reference to the wages, salaries

or other compensation paid to the employees of the Contractor or any

Subcontractor in respect of the Works, including Taxes or contributions for

workers' compensation, unemployment or sickness benefit, old age benefit,

welfare funds, pensions and disability insurance;

(c) all harbour dues, pilotage fees, port fees, wharf fees, unloading costs incurred

in India in respect of any imported Contractor's Equipment;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(d) all direct Taxes, including income tax, profession tax and wealth tax for

which the Contractor is the responsible party.

22.7. The Contractor and its Subcontractor/ vendor/ original manufacturer shall issue

proper invoice, as stipulated under the customs, excise, VAT/CST, service tax and

other Applicable Laws, and other necessary documents as may be relevant from time

to time to enable Owner or any person designated by Owner to avail the credit of such

Taxes, wherever applicable, paid by the Contractor or any Subcontractor/ vendor/

original manufacturer within the time period specified under the applicable legislation

in this regard.

If Owner is not able to avail the credit (as indicated in the Price Schedule, unless

otherwise mentioned in this Contract), partially or entirely because the Contractor or any Subcontractor/ vendor/ original manufacturer issued a defective invoice or failed

to produce the requisite documents, then the Contractor shall immediately indemnify

Owner for such loss of Tax credit which would be otherwise available to Owner.

Owner, in such case, may, in its sole discretion, decide to recover such loss by way of deduction from payment due to the Contractor or invoking the Contract Performance

Bank Guarantee.

22.8. The benefit of any Tax exemption, concessions, rebate or any other incentives

available when the Contractor or its Subcontractors/ vendor are performing their

obligations under the Contract, shall be passed on to Owner.

22.9. Contractor agrees for withholding from wages and salaries of its agents, servants or

employees all sums, required to be withheld by the laws of the Republic of India or

any other agency having jurisdiction over the area where Contractor is conducting

operations, and to pay the same promptly and directly when due to the proper

authority. Contractor further agrees to comply with all accounting and reporting

requirements of any Nation having jurisdiction over the subject matter hereof and to

confirm to such laws and regulations and to pay the cost of such compliance. If

requested by Owner/TCE, Contractor will furnish Owner/TCE the evidence of

payment of applicable Taxes, in the country (ies) of the Contractor's and his sub-

Contractor(s) and expatriate employees.

Owner shall issue a Tax deduction or withholding certificate to the Contractor

evidencing the Tax deducted or withheld and deposited by Owner on payments made

to the Contractor to enable the Contractor to claim the credit of the Tax deducted or

withheld by Owner.

22.10. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all procedural compliances related to

the payment of Taxes under the Contract and it shall protect, indemnify and hold

harmless Owner, from any and all cost, penalty, claims or liability:

(a) to pay any Taxes assessed or levied by any competent Authority on the Contractor or its Subcontractors/ vendor / original manufacturer or on Owner

for or on account of any act or omission on the part of the Contractor or its

Subcontractors/ vendor/ original manufacturer; or

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(b) on account of the Contractor's or its Sub-contractor's/ vendor’s failure to file Tax returns as required by Applicable Laws or comply with reporting or

filing requirements under Applicable Laws relating to Taxes; or

(c) arising directly or indirectly from or incurred by reason of any

misrepresentation by or on behalf of the Contractor or its Subcontractors to

any competent Authority in respect of Taxes; or

(d) arising from any proceedings initiated against Owner by any competent

Authority in respect of any non-compliance, non-payment, short-payment of

Taxes.

22.11. In case the Contractor is a foreign entity, it is mandatory to furnish the Contractor’s

Permanent Account Number (PAN), as per the Indian Income Tax requirements,

failing which the Contractor shall be responsible for any additional Tax deduction at

source as per the provisions of the Indian Income Tax Act/Rules. The PAN shall be

furnished before release of any payment or within one month of award of work,

whichever is earlier.

22.12. Taxes, Duties and Levies in Foreign Countries

The Contractor shall accept full and exclusive liability at his own Cost for the

payment of any and all Taxes, duties, cesses and levies howsoever designated, as are

payable to any government, local or statutory authority in any country other than India as are now in force or as are hereafter imposed, increased or modified and as are

payable by Contractor, his agents, Sub-Contractors and its/their respective employees

for or in relation to this performance of this contract. The Contractor shall be deemed to have been fully informed with respect to all such liabilities and considered and

included the same in its bid and the quoted price shall not be varied in any way on

this account.

23 TERMS OF PAYMENT

23.1 Mobilization Advance

23.1.1 Contractor may ((if specified by it in its Bid and accepted by Owner) be provided a recoverable interest bearing Mobilization Advance up to a maximum of 10% (ten

percent) of the awarded Contract Price towards Mobilisation and execution of the

Works. Mobilization advance shall carry an interest rate as defined in the Contract.

23.1.2 Mobilisation Advance shall be paid to the Contractor in two instalments subject to the

fulfilment of the following conditions:

(a) First Instalment

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(i) 5% (five percent) of awarded Contract Price shall be payable as the

first instalment of Mobilization Advance, within 15 (fifteen)

Business Days, after fulfilling the following formalities by the

Contractor:

(ii) Signing of the Contract Agreement by the Contractor;

(iii) Submission of the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee in

accordance with Clause 9.4.2; and

(iv) Submission of the Mobilization Advance Guarantee in accordance

with Clause 9.4.1. The Contractor may submit 2 (two) separate

Mobilization Advance Guarantees, one against each instalment of the

Mobilisation Advance (5% each instalment).

(b) Second Instalment

Balance 5% (five percent) Mobilisation Advance shall be payable to the

Contractor after the Contractor has constructed a site office, storage shed, fabrication yard, etc. and has physically mobilised construction equipments

and is ready to start the Works to the entire satisfaction of TCE and

commencement of work at Site. Where the Contractor elects to submit 2 (two) separate Mobilization Advance Guarantees, one against each instalment

of the Mobilization Advance, the second instalment of the Mobilization

Advance will be released by Owner only upon receipt of the second

Mobilization Advance Guarantee.

23.1.3 Recovery of Mobilisation Advance

The Mobilisation Advance together with the interest accrued, thereon, shall be recovered from each Running Bill @ 12% (twelve percent) of gross amount of each

Running Bill in such a manner that the total Mobilization Advance and interest

accrued thereon is recovered by the time approximately 85% (eighty five percent) of the Contract Price is paid to the Contractor. Balance amount, if any, shall be deducted

in full from the pre-final Bill. Mobilization advance Bank Guarantee will be reduced

accordingly on quarterly basis against the request of the Contractor.

23.1.4 If the Mobilization Advance has not been fully adjusted against the Running Bills

within 30 (thirty) days of the expiration of the Time for Completion or pre-final bill

whichever is earlier or immediately prior to termination under Clause 32, the whole

of the balance of the Mobilization Advance then outstanding shall immediately

become due and payable by the Contractor to Owner and Owner shall be entitled to

call upon the Mobilization Advance Guarantee.

23.2 Secured Advance

23.2.1 Owner may provide a Secured Advance to the Contractor for non-perishable, non-

fragile and non-combustible Goods and Materials brought on the Site for execution of

the Works, in the following manner:

(a) in the case of steel, 75% of the value of the Goods and Materials on

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

receipt of the Goods and Materials at the Site or 75% of the quoted value of

corresponding SOR item in which the Goods and Materials are to be

incorporated, whichever is lower, and Approval of the Goods and Materials

by Owner/TCE. For cement, the Secured Advance will be released only when

the Contractor has established proper storage and handling facility at the Site;

(b) in the case of non-perishable Goods and Materials other than steel, 75% of

the landed cost on receipt of the Goods and Materials at the Site or 75% of

the quoted value of corresponding SOR item in which the Goods and

Materials are to be incorporated, whichever is lower, and Approval of the

Goods and Materials by Owner/TCE(as per the list for Category B Items

provided in SCC in the Bidding Document),

against submission of the following documents:

(a) vendor’s/manufacturer’s invoice with proof of full payment, indicating

quantity, unit rate and amount of the procured Goods and Materials, with the

lot/batch numbers, as applicable;

(b) in the case of imported Goods and Materials, copy of bill of lading, proof of

payment of customs duty;

(c) original factory test and inspection certificate with the lot/batch numbers,

wherever applicable;

(d) inspection release note signed by Owner/TCE;

(e) an indemnity bond in the format set out at Appendix 4;

(f) copy of IMIR (Incoming Material Inspection Report) document duly

authenticated;

(g) copy of insurance policy for full value of the Goods and Materials for which

the Secured Advance is being provided (in respect of specific goods and

materials mentioned elsewhere in the contract), including landed cost at the

Site, during storage and erection against all risk insurance, obtained in the

joint names of Owner and the Contractor with Owner as the first beneficiary.

23.2.2 The Secured Advance shall not be payable for items not mentioned in the

Specifications or Contract or for such items payment on the supply of which is

covered in the payment schedule.

23.2.3 The Secured Advance will be recovered from the Running Bills proportionate to the

extent that the Goods and Materials in respect of which the Secured Advance was

provided are incorporated in the Permanent Work. The balance amount if any will be

recovered completely on the earlier of:

(a) 90% of the Contract Price being paid to the Contractor; and

(b) Submission of the Final Bill.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

23.2.4 No interest shall be levied on the Secured Advance, provided that the Goods and

Materials for which the Secured Advance is provided are incorporated in the

Permanent Work within the agreed Works Completion Schedule. If there is any

inordinate and inexcusable delay in incorporation of the Goods and Materials for

which the Secured Advance is provided in the Permanent Work, Owner may levy

interest at the rate as defined in the contract on the value of the unutilised Goods and

Materials from the date on which such Goods and Materials were scheduled to be

incorporated in the Permanent Work as per the Works Completion Schedule till the

date on which the Goods and Materials are incorporated in the Permanent Work.

23.3 Progressive Payments/On Account Payment

23.3.1 (a) Where the Contract is a lump-sum Contract,

The Contractor shall submit to Owner, within 30 (thirty) days of the Effective

Date, the Billing Schedule, which shall be taken into account by Owner when

releasing payment of Running Bills.

Within 30 (thirty) Working Days of the receipt of such Billing Schedule, the

Parties shall mutually agree upon the same. In the event that the Parties are

not able to reach an agreement, Owner's decision regarding the Billing

Schedule shall be final and binding on the Parties. Such Billing Schedule

shall be deemed to be a Contractor’s Document and shall form the basis of

progressive payments of the Contract Price as stated in the payment terms, in

accordance with this Clause 23.3.

(b) Where the Contract is an item rate contract:

(i) The Contractor may raise Running Bills, as specified below, every

alternate month and if an ad hoc payment is made by Owner in

respect of the intervening month, for the amount certified by the

Engineer-in-Charge on the basis of a summary assessment made by

the Engineer-in-Charge of the value of the Works performed by the

Contractor during the intervening month, such ad hoc payment(s)

shall be deducted from the amount(s) certified by the Engineer-in-

Charge as payable on the next Running Bill raised by the Contractor.

(ii) Where a lump sum rate is stipulated in the Schedule of Rate(s) or

otherwise in respect of any particular Work or part thereof and the

Works are not, at any intervening stage, capable of measurement, the

Running Bill to be prepared by the Contractor shall be prepared on

the basis of a value assessment of the percentage of the particular

Work or part thereof completed by the Contractor for which the

lump-sum rate is stipulated in the Schedule of Rates, as certified by

the Engineer-in-Charge.

23.3.2 (a) Within 7 (seven) days after completion of a Payment Milestone (in case of a

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

lump-sum contract)/ individual item of Work (in case of an item rate

contract), the Contractor must submit to Engineer-in-Charge a Running Bill.

Each Running Bill must set out:

(i) the estimated value of the Works executed by the Contractor and the

Contractor's Documents produced until the date of the Running Bill

(including Variations);

(ii) any amounts to be deducted on a pro rata basis towards the

adjustment of the Mobilization Advance in accordance with Clause

23.1 above;

(iii) any interim ad-hoc payments made by Owner in accordance with

Clause 23.3.1(b)(i) above;

(iv) any other additions or deductions which may have become due under

the Contract or otherwise, including those under Dispute; and

(v) the deduction of amounts certified in all previous Running Bills and

paid by Owner to the Contractor in accordance with Clause 23.

(b) Each Running Bill must contain the Contractor's certification with supporting

documentation:

(i) that each obligation, item of cost or expense mentioned in that

Running Bill has been properly incurred and is a proper charge and

that all physical progress is as represented;

(ii) that it has reviewed all financial and budget data contained in the

Running Bill and the same is true and complete;

(iii) that the quality of all completed Works is in accordance with the

Specifications;

(iv) that each obligation, item of cost or expense has not been the basis of

any previous payment (unless the amount of the payment was

subsequently reimbursed to Owner); and

(v) that all the requisite original statutory declarations or forms or

documents, challans, required for availing of any Tax concessions or

rebate or refund or credits or set-off or discounts as prescribed under

any of the Applicable Laws for the time being in force in India have

been submitted.

(c) Within 30 (thirty) Business Days after receipt of a Running Bill submitted in

full compliance with Clause 23.3.2 and not more than once a month, Owner

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

shall endeavour to pay the amount requested or pay a lesser amount as it or

the Engineer-in-Charge determines is properly due, in each case less any

amounts retained, withheld or set off in accordance with the terms of the

Contract subject to Owner's right under Clause 23.3 to set off against

amounts due from the Contractor. If less than the full amount of the Running

Bill is paid, Owner shall state in writing the reasons for paying the lesser

amount. Notwithstanding anything contained in this Clause 23.3.2 (c), Owner

may, at its sole discretion, release 75% of the amount of a Running Bill, as

certified by the Engineer-in-Charge, within 7 (seven) Business Days from the

receipt of the Running Bill.

23.4 Payments Withheld

Owner may withhold from any payment due to the Contractor amount Owner deems

reasonably necessary or appropriate because of any one or more of the following

reasons:

(a) Defects and deficiencies in any Works, whether or not payment has been

made in relation to that part of the Works;

(b) failure by the Contractor to provide certificates of insurance or insurance

policies in accordance with the terms of the Contract;

(c) reasonable evidence that completion of the Works will not occur within the

Time for Completion;

(d) failure, in any material respect, to perform the Works or any of the

Contractor's other obligations under the Contract;

(e) any overpayments made by Owner in a previous payment;

(f) any payment required to be withheld under any Applicable Laws;

(g) a dispute exists as to the accuracy or completeness of any Running Bill (but

only with respect to the amount then in dispute);

(h) amount of Taxes which Owner may have to pay if conditions of Clause 22

are not fulfilled; and

(i) any amount expected to be paid by Owner to any person, on behalf of the

Contractor or its affiliates under any agreement or any Applicable Laws for

the time being in force or any court order or any other reason or purpose.

(j) Any amount otherwise specified under the Contract, as being deductible from

the payments to be made by Owner to the Contractor.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

23.5 Final Payments

23.5.1 Within 15 (fifteen) days after receipt of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor

must submit a payment claim and endorse it as the “Final Bill”. The Contractor must

include in that claim:

(a) statements for the Contract Price, summarising and reconciling all previous

payments made by Owner and adjustments in the Contract Price; and

(b) any further sums which the Contractor considers to be due to it under the

Contract.

23.5.2 Except as provided in Clause 23.5.4, within 90 (ninety) Business Days after the

receipt of the Final Bill complete in all respects in accordance with the Contract,

Owner must pay to the Contractor the amount mentioned in the Final Bill and

certified by the Engineer-in-Charge, less any disputed amounts, subject to Owner's

right under Clause 23.3 to set off against amounts due from the Contractor. If the

amount that the Contractor owes to Owner under Clause 23.3 is greater than the

amount mentioned in the Final Bill and certified by the Engineer-in-Charge, then the

Contractor must pay the excess amount which is a debt due and payable to Owner

within 90 (ninety) days after Owner's receipt of the Final Bill.

23.5.3 After the expiry of the 15 (fifteen) days period referred to in Clause 23.5.1, a claim

which the Contractor was entitled to make, but has not made in the Final Bill, is

barred and the Contractor waives any right to bring such a claim.

23.5.4 The amount certified in the Final Bill will not become due under Clause 23.5.2 until

the Contractor submits to Owner:

(a) a certificate of release certifying that the Contractor waives all rights to bring

any claims which the Contractor is entitled to make, but which are not

included in the Final Bill;

(b) if requested by Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction,

including receipts, releases, and waivers as may be required by Owner;

(c) a confirmation from the Contractor that there has been no Change of Law that

it has not notified Owner which may result in a reduction in the Contract

Price; and

(d) any and all outstanding documentation required to be given to Owner by the

Contractor.

23.2. No interim payment by Owner constitutes acceptance by Owner of the Works or any

part thereof, or releases the Contractor from any of its obligations or liabilities under

the Contract.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

23.3. Payment of the amount mentioned in the Final Bill by Owner shall not mean release

of the Contractor from all of its liabilities under the Contract. The Contractor shall be

liable to fulfill and discharge all his liabilities and responsibilities under the Contract

until the end of the Contract Validity Period and release of the Contract Performance

Bank Guarantee.

23.4. Without limiting Clause 23.4 and 23.5, Owner may at any time deduct from any

moneys which are or may be payable to the Contractor (including security), any sums

which may be or are payable by Owner pursuant to the Contract. Nothing in this

Clause 23.4 affects the right of Owner to recover from the Contractor, the whole of

the debt or any balance that remains owing after any deduction.

23.5. If the Contractor fails to pay a Subcontractor on time such sum as is properly due

under the agreement between the Contractor and such Subcontractor, then Owner

may, on behalf of the Contractor, make the payment direct to the Subcontractor and

the amount so paid will be a debt due and payable from the Contractor to Owner.

23.6 Mode of Payment

23.6.1 Subject to the other provisions of the Contract, if the execution of the Works shall

necessitate the importation into India of materials, plant or equipment or if the Works

or any part thereof are to be executed by labour from outside India, a portion of the

payments to be made under the Contract shall be made in the appropriate foreign

currencies as requested in the Bid and accepted by Owner.

23.7 All payments required to be made by Owner to the Contractor shall be made by wire

transfer to an account or accounts to be designated by the Contractor, which is

maintained by the Contractor: (a) for payments in Indian currency, with a bank or

banks in India; and (b) for payments in foreign currency, with a bank or banks in the

country in which the payment is to be received. Owner’s liability to make payment

shall be deemed to have been discharged when the amount due is deposited in the

accounts or accounts designated by the Contractor for this purpose and subject to all

acts necessary to initiate the relevant wire transfer being completed within the time

stipulated for making payment of the amount due, any delay within the international

or domestic banking system in the transfer of such amount to the Contractor’s

account or accounts shall not give rise to a claim that Owner is in breach of its

payment obligations under the Contract.

23.8 Measurement

23.8.1 All measurements under this Contract shall be in the metric system and except where

expressly indicated to the contrary in the Contract, all measurements shall be taken in

accordance with the procedure set out in the Contract notwithstanding any

provision(s) in the relative standard method of measurement or any other general or

local custom to the contrary.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

23.8.2 All measurements shall be taken jointly by the Engineer-in-Charge or its

representative on the one hand and the Contractor or the Contractor’s Representative

on the other hand and the Contractor shall be bound to present the Contractor’s

Representative for measurement(s) whenever so required by the Engineer-in-Charge

and the Contractor’s Representative shall remain present throughout the time required

for joint measurements.

23.8.3 If the Contractor absents itself for any reason whatsoever on the date appointed for

joint measurements, the measurements shall be taken by the Engineer-in-Charge or its

representative in the absence of the Contractor and such measurements signed by the

Engineer-in-Charge or its representative shall be final and binding upon the

Contractor.

23.8.4 Measurements shall be signed and dated on each page by the Contractor or the

Contractor’s Representative and the Engineer-in-Charge or its representative. If the

Contractor objects to any of the measurements recorded, including the mode of

measurement, such objection shall be noted in the measurement book against the item

objected to and such note shall be signed by the Contractor’s Representative and the

Engineer-in-Charge or its representative. In the absence of any noted objections, the

Contractor shall be deemed to have accepted the relative measurements as entered in

the measurement book and shall be barred from making or recording any objection in

respect of the measurements recorded in the measurement book.

23.8.5 All measurement(s) relative to which any objection(s) have been noted in the

measurement book shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for its decision and

the decision of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

23.8.6 In case of discrepancy between measurement of work specified in the special

conditions of contract, Standard Specification/ Job Specification, Schedule of Rates

etc., precedence shall be given in following order:

a) Measurement of works in accordance with item description of relevant item

mentioned in Schedule of Rates.

b) Measurement of works as specified in Special Conditions of Contract. c) Measurement of works as mentioned in Standard Specification/ Job

Specification.

In case the clarity is not available through (a), (b) & (c) above, then it shall be as

prescribed by the Bureau of Indian Standards (“BIS”) and if it does not so prescribed

by BIS, then measurement of works shall be as decided by Engineer-in-Charge,

which shall be final and binding upon the Contractor.

23.8.7 Wherever the unit of items has been indicated as lump sum, the payment shall be

made on lump sum basis on completion as per payment break-up schedule, and no

mode of measurement shall be applicable.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

24 VARIATION

24.1. Engineer-in-Charge may at any time during the performance of the Works instruct the

Contractor, by issuing a written notice, to carry out a Variation (“Variation Order”);

and the Contractor must perform and be bound by a Variation. Engineer-in-Charge

shall not propose a Variation which:

(a) will have a material adverse effect upon the Contractor's ability to cause the

Works to meet the Guaranteed Performance Levels upon completion of the

Facility;

(b) is not technically feasible, such feasibility being determined in accordance

with Good Industry Practice.

24.2. The Contractor may propose to Owner any Variation which the Contractor considers

necessary or desirable to improve the quality, efficiency, reliability, operability,

maintainability or safety of the Facility. Owner may, in its absolute discretion,

Approve or reject any Variation proposed by the Contractor. Any Approval must be

notified to the Contractor.

24.3. Notwithstanding anything contained in Clauses 24.1 and 24.2, a Variation made

necessary due to any act, omission or default of the Contractor in the performance of

its obligations under the Contract will not result in any payment to the Contractor or

an increase in the Contract Price.

24.4. No Variation shall invalidate the Contract. The Contractor agrees that a Variation

may involve the omission of any part or parts of the Works and the Contractor agrees

that Owner may engage others to perform that part or parts of the Works which have

been omitted. The Contractor further acknowledges that any omission or omissions

will not constitute a basis to allege that Owner has repudiated the Contract no matter

the extent or timing of the omission or omissions.

24.5. Within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of the direction referred to in Clause 24.1, the

Contractor must prepare and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge a statement setting

out:

(a) detailed particulars of the Variation;

(b) the work required or no longer required;

(c) an estimate of the increase or decrease in the Contract Price;

(d) any requisite adjustment to Works Completion Schedule; and

(e) any proposed modifications to the Contract and/or any effect such Variation

would have on the Works and/or on any other provisions of the Contract.

24.6. Owner may accept the offer given under Clause 24.5 or request the Contractor to

submit revised estimates. If Owner accepts any offer it shall issue an instruction

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

identifying the offer that is being accepted and requesting the Contractor to proceed

with the Variation.

24.7. If agreement of an estimate is not reached under Clause 24.6, Owner may issue an

instruction to the Contractor to proceed with the Variation and:

(a) the Variation will be valued under Clause 24.8(b);

(b) the Contractor's right to an extension of the Time for Completion will be

determined under Clause 14.

24.8. The valuation of the Variation shall be calculated as follows:

(a) by agreement by making reference to the cost of similar or analogous work

being executed by the Contractor under the Contract; or

(b) failing agreement under Clause 24.8(a), the Engineer-in-Charge will

determine the valuation.

Clause 35 shall apply to this Clause 24.8.

24.9. If a Variation results in a reduction of the time required to complete the Works, the

Engineer-in-Charge may determine a reasonable reduction and notify the Contractor

of the revised Time for Completion and other dates as set out in the Works

Completion Schedule.

24.10. Quantity of Works

24.10.1 The quantities set out in the Price Schedule are estimated quantities for the execution

of the Works and such quantities shall not be taken as the actual and correct quantities

required for the execution of the Works. The Contractor shall be paid only for the

actual quantities of Works executed by it on the basis of the rates set out in the Price

Schedule and in accordance with the Payment Schedule and other relevant provisions

of the Contract.1

24.10.2 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Clause 21 and this Clause 24.10,

variations in the quantities of the items set out in the Price Schedule shall be paid for

by Owner in the following manner:2

(a) There shall be no variation in the rates of the items specified in the Price

Schedule as a result of any increase in the total Contract Price up to 25%

(twenty five percent);

(b) If the increase in the total Contract Price is likely to be more than the limit

specified in Clause 24.10.2 (a) above, the rates for the additional quantities

1 This Clause is not applicable if the Contract is a lump-sum price contract

2 This Clause is not applicable if the Contract is a lump-sum price contract

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

shall be mutually agreed between Owner and the Contractor, duly accounting

for savings, if any, that may be available to the Contractor in case of

increased quantities.

24.10.3 The Contractor shall be bound to notify TCE at least 15 (fifteen) Working Days

before the necessity arises for the variation in the quantities of item(s) set out in the

Price Schedule, in excess of the limits of variation specified above. If TCE and the

Contractor are unable to agree on the revised rates on account of variation in

quantities of item(s) in excess of the limits mentioned above, the revised rates of such

varied quantities of item(s) shall be determined in accordance with Clause 35,

pending which the Contractor shall be bound to perform the Works in relation to such

varied quantities in accordance with the Contract.

24.10.4 There shall be no variation in the rates of the items specified in the Price Schedule,

unless specifically, mentioned elsewhere in the Bidding Document as a result of any

decrease in the total Contract Price and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any

compensation in this regard.

24.10.5 Except as provided in Clause 24.10.2 above, the quantities of the Works stated in the

Price Schedule are indicative and as such (in case of item rate tender) do not form

part of the Contract and Owner shall neither be liable for any increase or decrease in

the actual quantities of the Works performed, nor shall such increase or decrease in

the actual quantities of the Works performed form the basis of any alteration of the

rates quoted in the Price Schedule or for any claim for additional compensation,

damages or loss of profits. Notwithstanding the quantities mentioned in the Price

Schedule and the Contract Price mentioned in the Letter of Award, the Contractor

shall only be entitled to payment in respect of actual quantities of the Works

performed by it.

24.10.6 The quantities of the Works and the gross value of the Works actually performed by

the Contractor as valued on finalisation of all dues to the Contractor is the sole

liability of Owner towards the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to

any compensation in addition to such amounts.

25 CHANGE IN LAW

25.1. In the event that the Contractor reasonably considers that there is a Change in law as a

result of which the Contractor suffers an increase in Cost or reduction in net financial

burden payable with respect to execution of the Works, the Contractor shall give

notice to TCE as soon as is reasonably practicable with:

(a) details of the Change in Law;

(b) any other information which TCE reasonably requires (including the

Contractor's estimate of any increase or decrease in the Contract Price

incurred by it as a consequence of a Change of Law, any Variation for

making the Works compliant with the Change in Law and/or changes to the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Works Programme that will be incurred in complying with that Change of

Law).

25.2. If the Change of Law requires a Variation or the Contractor is beneficially affected by

a Change of Law, TCE must within 14 (fourteen) Working Days of receiving the

Contractor's notification under Clause 25.1 provide a direction to either:

(a) proceed with the Variation as proposed by the Contractor or as deemed

appropriate by Owner; or

(b) vary the Works on a different basis as directed by Owner; or

(c) not proceed with the Works in which event the Contractor will be relieved of its

obligations to comply with the subject of the Change in Law.

25.3. If TCE provides a direction under Clauses 25.2(a) and 25.2(b), such direction will be

treated as a Variation to which the provisions of Clause 24 will apply.

25.4. To the extent that a Change of Law causes the Contractor to incur more Cost or less

Cost than it would otherwise have incurred, the difference shall be compensated by

Owner or the benefit of lower Costs shall be passed on to Owner by the Contractor, as

the case maybe. The Contractor shall produce sufficient proof and estimate of

increase in Costs for Owner's consideration.

26 SUSPENSION

26.1. The Engineer-in-Charge may at any time by issuing a written order (“Suspension

Order”) to the Contractor (with a copy to Owner) suspend the execution of part or all

of the Works including: (a) delivery of Contractor's Equipment which is ready for

delivery to the Site; or (b) the erection of the Plant or part thereof which has been

delivered to the Site; or (c) testing and commissioning of the Works.

26.2. The Suspension Order may be issued by the Engineer-in-Charge under the following

circumstances:

(a) Due to Contractor's default under the following circumstances:

(i) any act, default, omission or breach by the Contractor or for some

default or breach by the Contractor reasonably anticipated by the

Engineer-in-Charge; or

(ii) for the proper execution of the Works; or

(iii) existence of any emergency on the Site or at any place where the

Works (or any part thereof) are being executed leading to unsafe

conditions; or

(iv) as a consequence of any action by a statutory authority; or

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(v) failure to furnish Contract Performance Bank Guarantee or extension

of Mobilization Advance Guarantee or renewal of such guarantees.

(b) For any other reason which the Engineer-in-Charge thinks reasonable.

26.3. Upon issuance of any Suspension Order under Clause 26.1, the Contractor shall

protect, store and secure such part or whole of the Works or any Plant or Contractor's

Equipment to which the Suspension Order relates to, against any deterioration, loss or

damage and shall not remove any goods or equipment (including any Goods and

Materials and Plant) from the Site without the prior written consent of Owner, during

the entire suspension period. The Contractor shall take all steps to minimize cost and

losses to Owner due to suspension and shall meet Owner on a regular basis.

26.4. On issuance of the Suspension Order due to events specified in Clause 26.2(a), the

Contractor shall within 10 (ten) days undertake all necessary steps (including such

steps as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge) to remedy the circumstances leading to

Suspension Order and immediately inform the Engineer-in-Charge on completion of

such actions. Within 7 (seven) Working Days of receipt of such intimation from the

Contractor, if he Engineer-in-Charge is satisfied that its instructions above have been

fulfilled and complied with, issue a letter instructing the Contractor to resume the

Works or such part of the Works that are subject of a Suspension Order. If the

Engineer-in-Charge is of the view that such instructions have not been complied, the

Engineer-in-Charge shall identify by means of further written notice the additional

action required to be taken by the Contractor before any instruction to resume can be

given.

26.5. The Engineer-in-Charge may at any time instruct the Contractor to resume the Works

or such part of the Works that are subject of a Suspension Order, in which case the

Contractor shall do so as soon as is reasonably practicable and in any event within 5

(five) days of receiving such instructions. The Contractor shall, after notice to the

Engineer-in-Charge, and together with Engineer-in-Charge, examine the Works,

Plant, Goods and Materials affected by the Suspension Order. The Contractor shall

make good any deterioration or Defect in or loss of/ to the Works, Plant, Goods and

Materials, which has occurred during the suspension.

26.6. The Contractor shall under no circumstances be entitled to any extension of the Time

for Completion or claim for any monetary compensation where Suspension Order has

been issued by the Engineer-in-Charge under Clause 26.2(a).

26.7. Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Contractor shall not be

entitled to any Costs for preserving the Works during the period of suspension caused

due to any Force Majeure event.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

27 FORCE MAJEURE

27.1. Neither Party is responsible for any failure to perform its obligations under the

Contract, if it is prevented or delayed in performing those obligations by an event of

Force Majeure.

27.2. An event of Force Majeure is an event or circumstance which is beyond the control

and without the fault or negligence of the party affected (“Affected Party”) and

which by the exercise of reasonable diligence the Affected Party was unable to

prevent and which is not caused or contributed by the Affected Party, provided that

event or circumstance is limited to the following:

(a) act of terrorism;

(b) riot, war, invasion, act of foreign enemies, hostilities (whether war be

declared or not), civil war, rebellion, revolution, insurrection of military or

usurped power;

(c) ionising radiation or contamination, radio activity from any nuclear fuel or

from any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel, radioactive toxic

explosive or other hazardous properties of any explosive assembly or nuclear

component;

(d) epidemics, earthquakes, flood, fire, hurricanes, typhoons or other physical

natural disaster, but excluding weather conditions regardless of severity; and

(e) freight embargoes, strikes and/or hartals and/ or bandh at national or state-

wide level or industrial disputes at a national or state-wide level in any

country where Works are performed, and which affect an essential portion of

the Works but excluding any industrial dispute which is specific to the

performance of the Works or the Contract.

For the avoidance of doubt, inclement weather, third party breach, delay in supply of

materials (other than due to a nationwide transporters’ strike) or commercial hardship

shall not constitute a Force Majeure event.

27.3. Where there is an event of Force Majeure, the Affected Party must notify the other

Party in writing as soon as possible and in any event within 10(ten) days of becoming

aware of or the date it ought to have become aware of the occurrence of an event of

Force Majeure giving full particulars of the event of Force Majeure and the reasons

for the event of Force Majeure preventing the Affected Party from, or delaying the

Affected Party in performing its obligations under the Contract. The Affected Party

must use its reasonable efforts to mitigate the effect of the event of Force Majeure

upon its performance of its obligations under the Contract and notify the other party

of the measures being taken to mitigate the effect(s) of the event of Force Majeure.

27.4. Upon completion of the event of Force Majeure the Affected Party must as soon as

reasonably practicable recommends the performance of its obligations under the

Contract. Where the Affected Party is the Contractor, the Contractor must provide an

amended Works Programme rescheduling the Works to minimise the effects of the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

prevention or delay caused by the event of Force Majeure.

27.5. An event of Force Majeure does not relieve a party from liability for an obligation

which arose before the occurrence of that event, nor does that event affect the

obligation to pay money in a timely manner which matured prior to the occurrence of

that event.

27.6. The Contractor has no entitlement and Owner has no liability for:

(a) any costs, losses, expenses, damages or the payment of any part of the

Contract Price during an event of Force Majeure; and

(b) any delay costs in any way incurred by the Contractor due to an event of Force

Majeure.

27.7. If an event of Force Majeure occurs and its effect continues for a period of 180 (one

hundred eighty days or more in a continuous period of 365 (three hundred sixty five)

days after notice has been given under this Clause 27, either Party may terminate the

Contract by issuing a written notice of 30 (thirty) days to the other Party.

27.8. In the event that the Parties are unable to agree in good faith about the existence or

occurrence of a Force Majeure event, such dispute shall be finally settled in

accordance with the dispute resolution mechanism provided herein; provided

however that the burden of proof as to the occurrence or existence of such Force

Majeure event shall be upon the Party claiming relief on account of such Force

Majeure event.

28 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

28.1. The Contractor (with full title guarantee) hereby grants to Owner a royalty-free,

irrevocable, non-exclusive licence to use, modify and reproduce the Contractor's

Documents and any Intellectual Property contained in the Facility, the Works and the

Contractor's Documents for any purpose whatsoever connected with the Facility; and

the licence hereby granted shall carry the right to grant sub-licences and shall be

transferable to third parties. This licence does not include a licence to reproduce the

Intellectual Property contained in the Works and the Contractor's Documents for any

other project undertaken by Owner or any third person.

28.2. Owner shall grant or shall grant to the Contractor a royalty-free, exclusive licence to

use the Background Information and any Intellectual Property contained in the

Background Information for the sole purpose of the performance of the Contractor's

obligations under this Contract. The Contractor shall have no right to create any

copies of, reproduce or to disclose the Background Information to any third Persons

without the prior written consent of Owner, except in favour of the Contractor's

Personnel and its Subcontractors (provided that the Contractor's Personnel and its

Subcontractors shall be bound by the terms of the license granted under this Clause

28.2).

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

28.3. The Contractor warrants and represents that:

(a) it has all rights and licences necessary to grant, assign and transfer to Owner

licences to the Contractor's Documents and any Intellectual Property

contained in the Works and the Contractor's Documents in accordance with

this Contract;

(b) it has no title or ownership to the Background Information and shall make no

claim against or create any encumbrance over the Background Information or

any Intellectual Property therein;

(c) no infringement of any Intellectual Property of any kind of any third Person

will result from the performance of this Contract; and

(d) it has paid all royalty on any and all Intellectual Property licensed by it

28.4. The Contractor acknowledges that the Contractor is the author of the Contractor's

Documents referred to in Clause 28.1 and the Contractor waives any moral rights

which the Contractor might otherwise possess and the Contractor shall obtain a

waiver of all rights that any of its employees, agents or Subcontractors may have

pursuant to Applicable Laws in relation to the Contractor's Documents.

28.5. The Contractor shall, if so requested by Owner, at any time, execute such documents

and perform such acts as may be required fully and effectively to assure to Owner the

rights referred to in this Clause 28.

28.6. If, consequent to an infringement of Intellectual Property, the Contractor is prevented

from performing the Works, or Owner is prevented from using the Works or the

Contractor's Documents, the Contractor shall at its own expense and at its option:

(a) procure for Owner the right to continue using the Works and the Contractor's

Documents or any portion thereof;

(b) re-perform the Works or part thereof, or replace the Contractor's Documents

or part thereof with a non-infringing plant and equipment or part thereof; or

(c) modify the Contractor's Documents or part thereof so it becomes non-

infringing.

28.7. The Contractor shall indemnify Owner, TCE and their officers, advisors,

representatives, agents, personnel and employees from and against all claims,

liability, loss, damage costs and expenses (including but not limited to legal costs)

arising out of any claim that any Intellectual Property contained in the Works or the

Contractor's Documents or any use of such Intellectual Property by or on behalf of

Owner infringes the Intellectual Property of a third party.

28.8. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, if any, for materials, apparatus,

methods, processes, systems, software or other Intellectual Property rights purchased

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

or used by Contractor or any Subcontractor for execution of the Works. The

Contractor represents and warrants that except for amounts included in the Contract

Price, no royalties or other payments are due or payable by Owner or any other

Person in respect of the Intellectual Property used by the Contractor or any

Subcontractor in relation to the Works.

29 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

29.1 General Representations and Warranties

The Contractor makes the following representations and warranties to Owner each of

which is true and correct during the term of the Contract:

(a) it has been incorporated as a company under the laws of India and is validly

existing under those laws;

(b) it has power to enter into the Contract and comply with its obligations under

it;

(c) the Contract and the transactions under it do not contravene its constituent

documents or any Applicable Law or obligation by which it is bound or to

which any of its assets are subject or cause a limitation of powers or the

powers or its directors to be exceeded;

(d) it has in full force and effect the authorisations necessary for it to enter into

the Contract and the transactions under it;

(e) its obligations under the Contract are valid and binding and are enforceable

against it in accordance with the terms of the Contract;

(f) it is not in breach of any Applicable Law or obligation affecting it or its

assets in a way which may result in a material adverse effect on the business

or financial condition of the Contractor;

(g) there is no pending or threatened proceeding affecting the Contractor or any

of its assets that would affect the validity or enforceability of the Contract,

the ability of the Contractor to fulfil its commitments under the Contract in

any material respect, or that could result in any material adverse change in the

business or financial condition of the Contractor;

(h) there are no reasonable grounds to suspect that it is unable to pay its debts as

and when they become due and payable;

(i) it has the necessary skills and experience to perform the Works in accordance

with the Contract;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(j) it owns or has the right to use or provide to Owner all Intellectual Property

necessary to perform its obligations under the Contract; and

(k) it will perform its obligations under the Contract and conduct its business

with a high level of integrity which is reasonably expected of an international

contractor of similar size and profile, conducting a similar line of business,

and will not engage in any corrupt or fraudulent practices.

29.2 Warranties related to Works

Without prejudice to any other warranties expressed elsewhere in the Contract, and

despite any inclusion of Engineer-in-Charge’s /Owner's documents in the Contract

(including in the Specifications) or any Approval given or withheld by Owner/

Engineer-in-Charge under the Contract, the Contractor warrants:

(a) the Works will be performed with all the skill and care to be expected of

appropriately qualified and experienced contractors with experience in

performing works and services of a similar size, type, nature and complexity

to the Works and in accordance with Good Industry Practice;

(b) the Works will be performed in accordance with, all the requirements in the

Contract and the Specifications, by properly qualified and accredited

personnel, for the Contract Price and by the Time for Completion;

(c) the Works will be performed with the highest regard for safety and protection

of the environment and so that the Facility is capable of being operated and

utilised in accordance with all Applicable Laws and the Contract;

(d) the Works will be fit for their intended purpose as described in, or reasonably

inferable from, the Contract;

(e) the Works utilise proven technology, being a technology that has operated

commercially at other coal fired power stations of similar net output capacity

and which, as of the date of the Contract, is capable of being insured on a

reasonable commercial basis; and

(f) the Works will comply with all Applicable Laws.

30 INDEMNITY

30.1. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, the Engineer-in-Charge,

their officers, advisors, representatives, agents, personnel and employees from and

against all actions, suits, proceedings, claims, damages, losses, expenses and

demands of every nature and description, by reasons of any breach of the provisions

of the Contract by the Contractor or any act or omissions of the Contractor, its

representative or its employees, agents, and sub-contractors in the execution of the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Works, including any professional services provided by the Contractor.

30.2. These indemnification obligations shall include but not be limited to claims,

damages, losses, damage proceedings, charges and expenses which are attributable

to:

(a) Sickness, disease or death of, or injury to any person;

(b) Loss of, or damage to, or destruction of any property;

(c) Loss, damage or costs arising from the carriage of Goods and Materials and/or

ownership or chartering of marine vessels by the Contractor, or Subcontractor

of any tier.

The Contractor shall also indemnify and hold harmless Owner and TCE from and against all

claims and proceedings on account of infringements of patents rights, design, trademark, etc.,

as detailed out in Clause 28.

30.3. All sums payable by way of compensation under these conditions shall be considered

reasonable compensation payable to Owner with reference to the actual loss or

damage sustained by Owner. The decision of TCE as to compensation claimed shall

be final and binding.

30.4. Notwithstanding anything in the Contract to the contrary, no liabilities owed by the

Contractor to Owner that is covered by insurance obtained by the Contractor or

Owner pursuant to Clause 33 is included in the Contractor's aggregate liability for

the purpose of determining the limit of the Contractor's liability under the Contract.

30.5. Neither Party shall be liable to the other Party for any kind of indirect or

consequential loss or damage including, loss of use, loss of profit, loss of production

or business interruption which is connected with any claim arising under the

Contract.

30.6. Contractor's Care of the Works

The Contractor shall take full risk and responsibility for the care of the Works, or any

part thereof, including full risk and responsibility for the care of the Works being

constructed/ installed, or stored off-Site for inclusion in the Works, until the date of

issue of the Completion Certificate, when risk and responsibility shall pass to Owner.

31 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

31.1 The aggregate total liability of the Contractor to Owner under the Contract shall not

exceed the total Contract Price, except that this Clause 31 shall not limit the liability

of the Contractor for following:

(a) In the event of breach of any Applicable Law;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(b) In the event of fraud, willful misconduct or illegal or unlawful acts, or gross

negligence of the Contractor or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor;

or

(c) In the event of acts or omissions of the Contractor which are contrary to the

most elementary rules of diligence which a conscientious Contractor would

have followed in similar circumstances; or

(d) In the event of any claim or loss or damage arising out of infringement of

Intellectual Property; or

(e) For any damage to any third party, including death or injury of any third

party caused by the Contractor or any person or firm acting on behalf of the

Contractor in executing the Works.

31.2 Neither Party shall be liable to the other Party for any kind of indirect or

consequential loss or damage including, loss of use, loss of profit, loss of

production or business interruption which is connected with any claim arising under

the Contract.

32 TERMINATION

32.1 Termination for Convenience

Owner shall, in addition to any other right enabling it to terminate the Contract, have

the right to terminate the Contract at any time by giving prior written notice of at least

14 (fourteen) days to the Contractor. Such termination shall be without prejudice to

the rights of the Parties that have accrued on or before the date of termination of the

Contract.

32.2 Termination Due to Contractor's Default

The Contract may be terminated by Owner, at its sole and absolute discretion, upon

the occurrence of any of the following events/acts committed by the Contractor (each

a “Contractor's Event of Default”) by issuing a notice to the Contractor, stating the

intention of Owner to terminate the Contract:

(a) fails to complete Mobilisation within the Time for Mobilisation under Clause

9.3;

(b) commits a material breach of its obligations under the Contract;

(c) abandons or repudiates the Contract or suspends the execution of the Works

during the subsistence of any Dispute under the Contract;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(d) fails to adhere to the Specifications and/or Variations in terms of the

Contract;

(e) the Contract Price is reduced to the maximum extent specified in Clause 13.2,

yet the delay in respect of which the reduction was made continues to subsist;

(f) a petition for the winding up of the Contractor has been admitted and a

liquidator or provisional liquidator has been appointed or an order of

bankruptcy or an order for the winding up or dissolution of the Contractor has

been made by a Court of competent jurisdiction, except voluntary change in

partnership/ constitution of Contractor’s organisation (if a partnership/

Company) or liquidation for the purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction

subject to Owner’s acceptance to continue the Contract with the re-

constituted firm/ company.

(g) Contractor fails to replace or remedy Defective Work pursuant to Clause

9.1.18;

(h) Contractor's liability for compensation under Clause 20 reaches 10 % (ten

percent) of the Contract Price and the Defect for which the compensation

are/were charged continues to exist;

(i) gives any warranty or makes any representation under the Contract which is

found to be false or misleading;

(j) fails to furnish or renew the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee;

(k) fails to obtain and maintain insurance in accordance with its obligations

under the Contract; or

(l) commits any default under any Applicable Law.

32.3. If the Contractor fails to remedy or rectify the default stated in the notice issued by

Owner under Clause 32.2 within 30 (thirty) days of receipt of such notice, Owner

shall be entitled to terminate the Contract by issuing a termination notice and may

prevent the Contractor from entering the Site (but without thereby releasing the

Contractor from any of its obligations or liabilities under the Contract, or affecting the

rights and powers conferred on Owner under the Contract up to the date of

termination). However, in case of events specified in Clause 32.2 (c) and (f), Owner

shall be entitled to immediately terminate the Contract without giving any notice to

the Contractor.

32.4. Procedure on Termination

32.4.1 Upon termination of the Contract under Clause 32.3:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(a) Owner may complete the Works and/or arrange for other entities to do so at the

risk and Cost of the Contractor. Owner and its entities may then use the access

roads, the Contractor's Documents and all other facilities made by or on behalf

of the Contractor;

(b) Call upon the whole or such portion of the Contract Performance Bank

Guarantee amount as Owner may consider fit;

(c) Recover from the Contractor the cost of carrying out the balance Works in

excess of the sum which the Contractor would have been paid according to the

Final Bill, if the Works had been carried out and completed by the Contractor

under the terms of the Contract. The amount to be recovered may be deducted

by Owner from any amount due to the Contractor under the Contract. Any

amount outstanding to Owner under this Clause 32.4.1(c) shall be recovered

from the Contractor as a debt due;

(d) Enter upon the Site and debar the Contractor from entering the Site. Further:

Owner may, to the exclusion of any right of the Contractor, take over and use,

without payment to the Contractor, any Contractor’s Equipment, materials,

goods, machinery or other items which are on the Site in connection with the

Works for any reasonable period as Owner considers necessary for the

performance and completion of the Works.

32.4.2 Upon termination of the Contract under Clause 32.3, the Contractor must either

immediately or upon any date as is specified in the notice of termination:

(a) cease all further work, except for any work Owner may specify in the notice

of termination;

(b) terminate all Subcontracts, except those to be assigned or novated to Owner

in accordance with paragraph (d) below;

(c) deliver to Owner the parts of the Works performed by the Contractor up to

the date of termination;

(d) to the extent legally possible assign or novate to Owner all right, title and

benefit of the Contractor to the Works as at the date of termination, and, as

may be required by Owner, in any subcontracts between the Contractor and

its Subcontractors;

(e) subject to Clause 32.4.1(d), remove all Contractor's Equipment, surplus

materials (as per Clause 0 (b), scaffolding from the Site, dismantle and

remove its Site offices and quarters and other Temporary Works and

structures and repatriate the Contractor's Personnel from the Site, remove

from the Site any wreckage, rubbish and debris of any kind, and leave the

whole of the Site in a clean and safe condition; and

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(f) deliver to Owner all documents prepared by the Contractor in connection

with the Works as at the date of termination.

Should the Contractor fail to comply with the provisions of sub-Clause (e) above,

Owner shall have the right, at the sole risk and Cost of the Contractor, to clear the

Site of all rubbish, scaffolding, surplus materials, Contractor’s Equipment,

machinery, dismantle and remove the Contractor’s Site offices and other Temporary

Works and store, sell, dispose of and/or otherwise deal with any of the above and the

Contractor shall forthwith on demand pay Owner the costs and expense incurred by

Owner in this regard with an additional amount equivalent to 15% (fifteen percent) of

such costs and expenses to cover Owner’s overheads. Owner shall have the right to

recover such amounts from: (i) the proceeds of any sale of disposal of the

Contractor’s Equipment, machinery, surplus materials, Temporary Works or other

items removed from the Site; and (ii) any amounts due to the Contractor under the

Contract.

Nothing contained in this Clause or otherwise in the Contract shall constitute Owner

as a trustee or bailee for or in respect of any of the Contractor’s Equipment, surplus

materials, machinery or other items or things removed, cleared, demolished or

dismantled as mentioned above and Owner shall not be bound by any duty of care in

respect thereof.

32.4.3 Notwithstanding anything contained in Clause 32.4.2 above, upon termination of the

Contract, Owner may require the Contractor to:

(a) complete or take to an intermediary stage of completion any item of the

Works already commenced by the Contractor; and

(b) take such steps as are considered necessary by TCE for properly protecting

and securing the Works already completed by the Contractor.

32.5 Payment on Termination

32.5.1 If the Contract is terminated under Clause 27.7 or 32.1, the Contractor is entitled to be

paid :

(a) the Contract Price attributable to the Works performed as at the date of

termination, or in the case of a termination under Clause 27.7, the

commencement of the relevant event of Force Majeure; and

(b) the costs, if any, necessarily incurred in performing the work (if any)

specified in the notice of termination issued by Owner under Clause 32.1 or

as instructed by Owner pursuant to Clause 32.4.3; and

(c) if the Contract is terminated in accordance with Clause 32.1, additionally (but

without duplication):

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(i) the costs reasonably incurred by the Contractor in terminating any

subcontracts as a result of the termination of the Contract; and

(ii) the costs reasonably incurred by the Contractor in the repatriation of

the Contractor's and the Subcontractor's employees,

less the aggregate of all previous payments allocated to the Works. Any sums

due to Owner from the Contractor accruing prior to the date of termination or

the commencement of the relevant event of Force Majeure (as the case may

be) will be deducted from the amount to be paid to the Contractor under the

Contract. If, as a result of any such deductions, there is a negative amount

payable to the Contractor, then the Contractor must pay an amount equal to

that negative sum to Owner within 15 (fifteen) days of Owner raising an

invoice for that amount.

The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that payment of termination compensation

in terms of this Clause 32.5.1 shall be the sole and exclusive liability of Owner and

the sole and exclusive remedy of Contractor, with respect to a termination of the

Contract under Clause 32.1 or Clause 27.7.

32.5.2 If the Contract is terminated under Clause 32.3, Owner will not be bound to make any

further payment to the Contractor until the full and final cost of completion of the

Works by Owner or other contractors and all damage, loss or expense suffered or

incurred by Owner as a result of the termination of the Contract have been

ascertained.

32.5.3 Upon all cost, damages, loss and/or expense being ascertained under Clause 32.5.2,

TCE must issue a certificate stating the total amount of the cost of completing the

Works and any damage, loss or expense suffered or incurred by Owner as a result of

the termination of the Contract.

32.5.4 If the Contract Price attributable to the Works performed as at the date of termination

less the aggregate of: (a) all previous payments allocated to the Works which have

been paid to the Contractor; and (b) the amount stated in the certificate under Clause

32.5.3,

(a) is a positive amount payable to the Contractor, then Owner must pay such

amount to the Contractor within 15(fifteen) Business Days of the issuance of

the certificate pursuant to Clause 32.5.3; or

(b) is a negative amount payable to the Contractor, then an amount equal to that

negative sum will be a debt due and payable to Owner by the Contractor and

the Contractor must pay such amount to Owner within 15 (fifteen) days of

Owner raising an invoice for that amount.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

33 INSURANCE

33.1. Owner shall at its own Cost, take out and maintain in effect, or cause to be taken out

and maintained in effect, during the execution of the Works, a comprehensive

Erection All Risks Policy (“Owner's Insurance”).

33.2. Without prejudice to Clause 33.1, the Contractor shall be required to take out and

maintain at all times during the subsistence of this Contract, adequate insurance

coverage in respect of:

(a) any damages or compensation against claims, demands, proceeding, costs,

charges and expenses, whatsoever in respect or in relation thereto, payable

under Applicable Laws in respect or any consequence of any accident or

injury to any Contractor's Personnel during or pursuant to their employment

by the Contractor or by the Contractor's Subcontractors, save and except an

accident or injury resulting from any act or fault of Owner;

(b) all Contractor's Equipment brought on to the Site by the Contractor or its

Subcontractors for use in connection with the Works, to the extent of their

full value against all loss or damage from whatever cause arising; and

(c) third party liability for physical loss of or damage to any third party property

or injury to or death of any third party which may arise out of or in

connection with the execution of the Works at the Site by the Contractor or

Owner,

(collectively “Contractor's Insurance”).

33.3. Owner's Insurance and the Contractor's Insurance shall each be composite policies in

the joint names of the Parties, for their respective rights and interests. The terms of

Owner's Insurance and the Contractor's Insurance shall entitle the respective Parties to

maintain the policies in force after termination of the Contract.

33.4. Either Party shall, at the request of the other Party, produce within 7 (seven) days of

request, such evidence as the other may reasonably require and as is obtainable from

insurers that Owner's Insurance or the Contractor's Insurance (as relevant) have been

effected, which evidence may include sight of the insurance policies and confirmation

of the payment of all premiums to keep the policies in force.

If either Party fails upon request to produce to the other satisfactory evidence in

accordance with this Clause 33.4 that there is in force any of Owner's Insurance or the

Contractor's Insurance (as relevant), the other Party may effect and keep in force any

such insurance and the Party failing to evidence insurance shall pay to the other all

reasonable costs incurred by the other for such purpose.

33.5. Each Party shall ensure that it and its personnel, Subcontractors, servants and agents

at all times:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(a) Comply with the terms and conditions of Owner's Insurance or the

Contractor's Insurance, as relevant;

(b) Comply with the procedures for claims notification and administration there

under; and

(c) Do nothing nor omit to do anything which might entitle any insurer to refuse

to pay any claim under, or which might otherwise prejudice any of Owner's

Insurance or the Contractor's Insurance.

33.6. Owner's Insurance as well as the Contractor's Insurance, shall wherever possible,

provide for 30 (thirty) days written notice of any cancellation, non-renewal or

material modification of any such policy to be given by the insurers to the insured

persons. Further, Owner's Insurance and the Contractor's Insurance shall contain a

clause to the effect that the insurers have agreed to waive all rights of subrogation

against the persons assured (including all beneficiaries thereof).

33.7. Regardless of the extent of settlement of claims for insurance proceeds under Owner's

Insurance or under the Contractor's Insurance or the time taken for settlement of such

claims, the Contractor shall promptly make good any loss or damage for which it is

responsible under the terms of this Contract. The Contractor shall be reimbursed to

the extent that any insurance proceeds are received and payable to the Contractor.

34 GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION

34.1 The Contract shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of India

and the courts at Guwahati, Assam shall have exclusive jurisdiction over all Disputes

arising under or in connection with the Contract.

35 CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

35.1 Claims

35.1.1. If the Contractor intends to claim any additional payment on the occurrence of any

event which entitles the Contractor to claim such additional payment, the Contractor

shall give notice to TCE as soon as possible and in any event within 10 (ten) days of

the Contractor becoming aware of such event.

35.1.2. The Contractor shall keep such contemporary records as may be necessary to

substantiate any claim. Without admitting Owner’s liability, TCE may on receipt of a

notice pursuant to Clause 35.1.1 above, inspect such records and may instruct the

Contractor to produce and maintain further records. The Contractor shall permit TCE

to inspect all such records and shall (if instructed) submit copies to TCE.

35.1.3. Within 30 (thirty) days of issuing a notice pursuant to Clause 35.1.1, the Contractor

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

shall send to TCE an account, giving detailed particulars of the amount and basis of

the claim.

35.1.4. If the Contractor fails to comply with this Clause 35.1, the Contractor shall not be

entitled to claim any additional payment.

35.1.5. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Contract, Owner shall not be liable

for any claim arising out of or in connection with the Contract or the execution of the

Works, unless the Contractor shall have given notice of such claim within 60 (sixty)

days from the date of issuance of the Completion Certificate.

35.1.6. The Contractor shall be entitled to additional costs as TCE considers due, after taking

Approval from Owner. If the particulars supplied are insufficient to substantiate the

whole of the claim, the Contractor shall be entitled to payment for such part of the

claim as has been substantiated by TCE and agreed to by Owner.

35.2 Dispute Resolution

35.2.1. If any disagreement arises out of or in connection with the validity, application or

interpretation of the Contract (the “Dispute”), the Parties shall endeavour in good

faith to resolve the Dispute through negotiation within 7 (seven) days of a written

notice setting out the nature of such Dispute.

35.2.2. In the event that any Dispute is unable to be resolved between the Parties pursuant to

Clause 35.2.1 within 21 (twenty-one) days of receipt of the notice under Clause

35.2.1, then such Dispute shall be referred to arbitration.

35.2.3. The arbitration will be conducted as per the Arbitration Act. The arbitral tribunal shall

comprise of a sole arbitrator whom shall be appointed by Owner. The place of

arbitration for any Disputes and Related Disputes shall be Guwahati, Assam. The

language to be used in the arbitral proceedings shall be English. The arbitral award

shall be final and binding upon both the Parties.

35.2.4. Responsibility of payment for all costs of arbitration, excepting counsel fees, shall be

as per the arbitration award.

35.2.5. While any Dispute under this Contract is pending; and except where this Contract has

been terminated in accordance with the terms of this Contract, the Parties shall

continue to perform all of their respective obligations under this Contract without

prejudice to the final determination in accordance with the provisions under this

Clause 35.

35.2.6. Where, in Owner's absolute discretion, it is beneficial for the completion of the

Facility for any Dispute between Owner and the Contractor, in respect of which an

arbitration notice has been given, to be resolved in the same arbitration proceedings

as a dispute between Owner and any other party or parties engaged in relation to the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

completion of the Facility (the “Related Dispute”) then:

(a) if a notice to concur in the appointment of an arbitrator has been served in the

Related Dispute, the Contractor hereby agrees that, at Owner's sole option,

the Dispute between Owner and the Contractor shall be referred to the

arbitrator appointed or to be appointed in respect of the Related Dispute and

be determined at the same time as such Related Dispute;

(b) where an arbitrator has already been appointed in connection with the Related

Dispute, the Contractor hereby agrees that, at Owner's sole option, the

Dispute between Owner and the Contractor shall be referred to and be

determined by the arbitrator so appointed contemporaneously with the

Related Dispute.

35.3 Settlement of dispute between Govt. Dept. / Public Sector Undertaking

If the Contractor is a Public Sector Undertaking or Enterprise or is a Govt.

Department, any disputes or differences between the Contractor and Owner hereto

arising out of any notified claim of the Contractor in terms hereof and/or arising out

of any amount claimed by Owner (whether or not the amount claimed by Owner or

any part thereof shall have been deducted from the final bill of the Contractor or any

amount paid by Owner to the Contractor in respect of the work), then in suppression

of the provisions of Clause 35.2of the General Conditions of Contract, the following

provisions shall apply, namely; such disputes or differences shall be resolved

amicably by mutual consultation or through the good offices or empowered agencies

of the Government. If such resolution is not possible, then the unresolved disputes or

differences shall be referred to arbitration of an arbitrator to be nominated by the

Secretary, Department of legal affairs (Law Secretary) in terms of the Office

Memorandum No. DPE/4(10)/2001-PMA-GL-I dated 22nd January, 2004 issued

by the Cabinet Secretariat (Department of Cabinet Affairs) as modified from time to

time. The Arbitration Act shall not be applicable to the arbitrator under this Clause.

The award of the arbitrator shall be binding upon parties to the dispute, provided,

however any party aggrieved by such award may make a further reference for setting

aside or revision of the award to Law Secretary whose decision shall bind the parties

finally and conclusively. The parties to the dispute will share equally the cost of

arbitration as intimated by the arbitrator.

35.3.1 Notwithstanding the existence of any dispute or arbitration in terms hereof or

otherwise, the Contractor shall continue and be bound to continue and perform the

Works to completion in all respects according to the Contract (unless the Contract or

Works be determined by Owner) and the Contractor shall remain liable and bound in

all respects under the Contract.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

36 MISCELLANEOUS

36.1 Personal Acts and Liabilities

(a) No director, officer or other employee of Owner (or TCE) shall in any

manner be personally bound or liable to the Contractor for acts, commissions

or obligations of Owner under the Contract or otherwise or be personally

answerable to the Contractor for any default or omission in the performance

of any act(s), deed(s) or things to be observed and/or performed by Owner

under the Contract.

(b) The Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the rate(s) mentioned

in the Price Schedule or to any other payment by reason of any

representation, explanation or assurance given or alleged to have been given

by TCE or any employee, representative, consultant or agent of Owner.

(c) No director, officer or other employee of Owner shall be personally liable to

the Contractor for any representation, explanation, statement or assurance

given or alleged to have been given by him to the Contractor in connection

with the Contract.

(d) The Contractor shall not, under any circumstances, pay or advance to any

officer(s), servant(s) or agent(s) of Owner any money on any account without

the prior Approval of Owner and any payment without such Approval shall

be entirely at the risk of the Contractor and Owner shall have no liability in

this regard.

(e) Any money paid to any director, attorney, agent, officer or employee of the

Contractor and any receipt, settlement, acknowledgement of liability or other

arrangement, agreement or document whatsoever signed by any such

director, attorney, agent, officer or employee of the Contractor or erstwhile

director, attorney, agent, officer or employee (without notice of his cessation

of interest) or by any person held to be a director, attorney, agent, officer or

employee of the Contractor authorised to act on behalf of the Contractor

shall, as between the Contractor and Owner, be binding upon the Contractor

and shall constitute a full release and discharge to Owner and/or a valid

settlement, acknowledgement of obligation of the Contractor, as the case may

be.

(f) Any money paid to or dealing had with any partner or member of the

Contractor (if a firm or consortium) and any receipt, settlement,

acknowledgement of liability or other arrangement, agreement or document

whatsoever signed by any one of the partners of the firm or members of the

consortium or erstwhile partner of the firm or member of the consortium

(without notice of the cessation of his interest) or with any person held to be a

partner of the firm or member of the consortium shall be binding on the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Contractor and shall constitute a full release and discharge to Owner and/or a

valid settlement, acknowledgement of obligation of the Contractor, as the

case may be, provided that Owner shall always have the right to call upon all

or any of the partners/members of the Contractor’s firm/consortium to sign

any receipt, settlement, acknowledgement or other document and all or any of

the partners of the firm or members of the consortium shall, when called upon

to do so by Owner, immediately sign the receipt, settlement,

acknowledgement or other document required to be so signed.

36.2 Assignment

The Contractor shall not assign, novate or charge the whole or any part of the

Contract or create any encumbrance over the Facility, without the prior written

consent of Owner. In the event of an assignment or novation by the Contractor, any

stamp duty and all costs and expenses payable in respect of such documents, required

to be signed by Owner, shall be to the account of the Contractor. Owner shall be

entitled to assign and/or transfer its rights and obligations under the Contract to any

party, without requirement of any further consent of the Contractor.

36.3 Partnership

Nothing contained or implied in Contract shall constitute or be deemed to constitute a

partnership or agency between the Parties and none of the Parties shall have any authority to bind, commit or make any representations on behalf of the other Party.

36.4 Severability

If any provision of the Contract shall be determined to be invalid, illegal or

unenforceable under Applicable Laws, all other provisions of the Contract shall

continue in full force and effect unless such invalidity or unenforceability adversely affects the underlying intent of the Contract or unless the invalid or unenforceable

provision comprises an integral part of, or is inseparable from the remainder of the

Contract. In such circumstances the Parties shall negotiate in good faith with a view to agreeing upon one or more provisions which may be substituted for such invalid,

illegal or unenforceable provisions, as nearly as is practicable. Provided failure to

agree upon any such provisions shall not be subject to dispute resolution under this Contract or otherwise.

36.5 Entire Agreement

The Contract contains all covenants stipulations and provisions agreed by the Parties,

and constitutes the entire Contract between the Parties hereto and supersedes any oral

or written representations, understandings, proposals, or communications heretofore entered into by or on account of the Parties and may not be changed, modified, or

amended except in writing and signed by the Parties hereto.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

36.6 Reservation of Rights

No forbearance, indulgence, relaxation or inaction by Owner at any time to require

performance of any of the provisions of the Contract shall in any way affect, diminish

or prejudice the right of Owner to require performance of that provision, and no delay in exercising or omission to exercise any right, power or remedy accruing to Owner

upon any default or otherwise under the Contract shall impair any such right, power

or remedy or shall be construed to be a waiver thereof or any acquiescence in such

default, nor shall the action or inaction of Owner in respect of any default or any acquiescence by it in any default, affect or impair any right, power or remedy of

Owner in respect of any other default.

36.7 Abnormally High Rates (AHR items)

In item rate contract where the quoted rates for the items exceed 50% (fifty percent) of the

Owner’s estimated rates, such items will be considered as Abnormally High Rates Items (AHR) and payment of AHR items beyond the contracted quantities shall be made at the

lower of the following rates:

(a) Rates as per the Schedule of Rates, quoted by the Contractor.

(b) Rate of the item, derived as follows:

(i) Based on rates of machine and labour as available from the Contract

(which includes Contractor’s supervision, profit, overheads and other

expenses).

(ii) In case rates are not available in the Contract, rates will be calculated

based on prevailing market rates of machine/equipments, material

and labour plus 15% (fifteen percent) to cover Contractor’s

supervision profit, overhead & other expenses.

36.8 Corrupt and Fraudulent Practices

36.8.1 Bidders are required to furnish the complete and correct information/ documents

required for evaluation of their bids. If the information/ documents forming basis of

evaluation is found to be false/ fake/ forged, the same shall be considered adequate

ground for rejection of the bids and forfeiture of earnest money deposit.

36.8.2 Owner requires that the Contractor observes the highest standard of ethics during the

execution of Contract. In pursuance of this policy, Owner defines, for the purposes of

this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:

(a) “Corrupt Practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of

anything of value to influence the action of public official in contract

execution; and

(b) “Fraudulent Practice” means a misrepresentation of facts in order to

influence the execution of a Contract to the detriment of Owner, and includes

collusive practice among bidders (prior to or after bid submission) designed

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels and to deprive

Owner of the benefits of free and open competition.

(c) “False/Fake” means to make or construct falsely. “Faked alibi” is a made,

manufactured, or false alibi. Something that is not what is purports to be;

counterfeit, an imposter.

(d) “Forgery” means the false making or the material altering of a document

with the intent to defraud. A signature of a person that is made without the

person’s consent and without the person otherwise authorizing it. A person is

guilty of forgery if, with the purpose to defraud or injure anyone or with

knowledge that he is facilitating a fraud or injury to be perpetrated by anyone,

the actor (i) alters any writing of another without his authority (ii) makes,

completes, authenticates, executes, issues or transfers any writing, so that it

purports to be the act of another who did not authorize that act or to have

been executed at a time or place or in a numbered sequence other than was in

fact the case, or to, be a copy of an original when no such original exists.

Utters any writing which he knows to be false in a manner specified in (a) &

(b) above.

36.8.3 Owner may terminate the Contract if it discovers subsequently that the Contractor had

engaged in Corrupt Practices, or Fraudulent Practices in competing for the Contract.

36.8.4 The Contractor is required to execute the “Integrity Pact” attached in the Bid

Document as a condition precedent to execution of the Contract.

36.8.5 In case, the information/ document furnished by the Contractor forming basis of

evaluation of its Bid is found to be false / fake/ forged after the award of the Contract,

Owner shall have the right to terminate the Contract and get the remaining Works

executed by a third party at the risk & Cost of the Contractor and without any

prejudice to other rights available to Owner under the Contract such as forfeiture of

the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee, withholding of payment etc.

36.8.6 In case, this issue of submission of false/fake documents comes to the notice after

execution of the Works, Owner shall have full right to forfeit any amount due to the

Contractor along with forfeiture of the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee

furnished by the Contractor.

36.8.7 Further, any Contractor which is found guilty of any Corrupt or Fraudulent Practice

or submission of false/fake /forged documents, shall be put on the negative/ holiday

list of Owner debarring them from future business with Owner.

36.9 Integrity Pact

The Integrity Pact forming a part of the Bidding Document, duly signed by the

authorized person(s) of Owner and the Contractor, will form part of the Contract. If the

Contract has been terminated according to provisions of the Integrity Pact, or, if

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Owner is entitled to terminate the Contract according to provisions of Integrity Pact,

Owner shall be entitled to demand and recover from Contractor an amount specified in the Integrity Pact, which amount may be recovered by forfeiting the Contract

Performance Bank Guarantee.

36.10 Liability of Government of India

(a) It is expressly understood that Govt. of India is not a party to this Contract

and has no liability, obligations or rights hereunder. It is expressly understood

that Owner is an independent legal entity with power and authority to enter

into the Contract solely on its behalf under the Applicable Laws and general

principles of contract law.

(b) The Contractor expressly agrees and acknowledges and understands that

Owner and TCE are not an agent, representative or delegatee of Government

of India.

36.11 Computerized Contractor's Billing System

Contractor should follow the following billing system:

(a) The Running Bills will be prepared by the Contractor on their personal

computers as per the standard formats and codification scheme proposed by

Owner. The Contractor will be provided with data entry software to capture

the relevant billing data for subsequent processing. The Contractor will

submit these data to Owner in an electronic media along with the hard copy

of the bill, necessary enclosures and documents. The Contractor will also

ensure the correctness and consistency of data so entered with the hard copy

of the bill submitted for payment.

(b) Owner will utilize this data for processing and verification of the Running

Bills of the Contractor.

36.12 Terms applicable to Consortium Contractors

Where the Contractor is a consortium, the lead member of the consortium shall represent the Contractor in all dealings with Owner and shall do all acts, deeds,

matters and things required to be done by the Contractor under the Contract,

including (but not limited to) exchange of correspondence, raising invoices, drawings, documents and receiving payments.

(a) All dealings had with and/or all acts, deeds, matters and things and things

done by or payments made to and invoices/documents drawn and/or

negotiated by the lead member shall be binding upon the Contractor and each

member of the consortium, and in so far as Owner shall require a discharge in

respect of any dealing had or act, deed, matter or thing done or payment made

as aforesaid, the same shall constitute a valid discharge to Owner.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(b) Each and every member of the consortium shall be jointly and separately

liable to Owner for and in respect of all liabilities obligations of the

Contractor under the Contract.

The constitution of the Consortium or the relative distribution of the Work(s) and/or

activities amongst the consortium members as approved by Owner shall not be altered

or assigned, as the case may be except with the prior written consent of Owner and

any contrary alteration or re-assignment shall be deemed to be an unauthorized assignment of the Contract with attendant liabilities including termination of the Contract.

36.13 Government Controlled Materials

In respect of all Government controlled or other scarce/imported materials in respect

of which licenses, release orders, permits or authorizations have been granted in the name of Owner, the Contractor shall be deemed to be acting on behalf of Owner and

as agent of Owner in respect of deliveries taken by the Contractor against any

licences, release orders, permits, or authorizations issued in the name of Owner for

Government controlled materials. The ownership in such materials shall (without prejudice to the responsibility/liability of the Contractor in respect thereof as set out

in the various conditions hereof) vest in Owner from the point of time when it would have ordinarily vested in Owner on a direct delivery to Owner.

36.14 Distinction between Foundation and Superstructure

To distinguish between work in foundations and superstructures, the following criteria shall apply:

(a) For all equipment pedestals, pipe racks, other foundation and R.C.C.

Structures, work done up to 300 mm level above finished grade level will be

taken as work in foundations and work above this level will be treated as

work in superstructures and payments would be made accordingly.

(b) For buildings only, all works up to plinth level corresponding to finished

floor level shall be treated as `work in foundation' and all works above the

finished floor level shall be treated as "work in superstructure".

(c) Irrespective of what has been stated above, all pavements, R.C.C. retaining

wall, all pipe sleepers and any similar item would be taken as work done in

foundations irrespective of locations, nomenclature and levels given

anywhere.

(d) Where not specifically pointed out all works in cellars/ sumps, tank pads,

cable trenches, or such similar item would be taken as work in foundation.

36.15 Excavation by Blasting

The Contractor shall obtain licence from the relevant Authorities for undertaking

blasting work as well as for obtaining and storing the explosive as per Explosive Rules 2008 (as made under the Explosives Act, 1884), as amended from time to time.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

The Contractor shall purchase the explosives, fuses, detonators etc. only from a

licensed dealer and shall be responsible for the safe custody and proper accounting of the explosive materials. TCE and its authorized representatives shall have access to

check the Contractor's store of explosives and its accounts. In case where the

explosives are required to be transported and stored at Site, relevant clauses of the Explosives Rules 2008 as amended subsequently shall apply. The Contractor shall be

responsible for any accident to workman, public or property, due to blasting

operations.

36.16 Import Licence

Contractor shall arrange for the import of all materials required for permanent

incorporation in the Works as well as construction equipment as per the guidelines

laid down by the Government of India. Owner shall not provide import licence.

36.17 Retired Government or Company Directors

No Director of Owner is allowed to tender for a contract to be awarded by Owner for a period of 2 (two) years after his retirement from the employment of Owner, without

the previous permission of Owner. The Contract if awarded is liable to be cancelled if

the Contractor is found at any time to be such a person and has not obtained the permission of the Owner before submission of the tender. Any tender by a person

aforesaid shall carry a disclosure thereof on the tender, and shall be accompanied by a

copy of the document by which the requisite consent is given. Such disqualifications shall apply to every partner of a partnership firm.

36.18 Other Contractors

The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that that access to the Site and access routes thereto, has been granted to the Contractor on a non-exclusive basis, and that Owner,

may at its sole discretion, grant access thereto, to other Persons (“Other

Contractors”) to undertake thereon, any works other than those contemplated under

the Contract. Further, the Contractor shall at all times undertake its works in such manner, as to not cause minimal disturbance to the Other Contractors, in the

performance of the works allocated to such Other Contractors.3

36.19 Survival

The termination of the Contract shall not relieve the Contractor or Owner of any

obligations hereunder which expressly or by implication survives termination. Further, except as otherwise provided in any provision of the Contract expressly

limiting the liability of either Party, the termination of the Contract shall not relieve

either Party of any obligations or liabilities for loss or damage to the other Party

arising out of or caused by acts or omission of such Party prior to the effectiveness of such termination or arising out of such termination.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 1

FORM OF CONTRACT PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE

[ON APPROPRIATE STAMP PAPER]

Beneficiary: Assam Petro-chemicals Limited

Bank Guarantee No. [.............................................●]

THIS DEED OF GUARANTEE is executed on this [...............insert day] day of

[....................insert month and year] at [...................insert place] by [.........................................INSERT NAME OF BANK] having its head/registered office at

[........................................................insert address], (hereinafter referred to as the

"Guarantor", which expression shall unless it is repugnant to the subject or context thereof

include successors and assigns)

IN FAVOUR OF:

ASSAM PETRO-CHEMICALS LIMITED, a public limited company incorporated under

the Indian Companies Act, 1956, having its registered office at 4th Floor, Orion Place

Bhangagarh, G.S. Road, Guwahati 781005, (hereinafter referred to as "Owner", which expression shall unless it is repugnant to the subject or context thereof include successors and

assigns).

WHEREAS

A. Owner has entered into an Engineering, Procurement and Construction Contract dated

[............................■] (the "Contract") with [.............................................insert name

of Contractor], a company incorporated under the Indian Companies Act, 1956 and

having its registered office at [............................................................■] (the

"Contractor", which expression shall, unless it be repugnant to the context or

meaning thereof, include its successors-in-title and permitted assigns), for the Project.

B. In terms of the Contract, the Contractor is required to furnish to Owner, an

unconditional, irrevocable, on demand bank guarantee for an amount equal to 10% of

the Contract Price as security for due and punctual performance/discharge of the

Contractor's obligations under the Contract for the Contract Validity Period.

C. At the request of Owner and for sufficient consideration, the Guarantor has agreed to

provide an unconditional, irrevocable and on-demand bank guarantee, for the due and

punctual performance/discharge by the Contractor of its obligations under the

Contract during the Contract Validity Period.

NOW THEREFORE THIS DEED WITNESSETH AS FOLLOWS:

1. Capitalised terms used herein but not defined shall have the meaning ascribed to them

in the Contract.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

2. The Guarantor hereby irrevocably and unconditionally guarantees and secures (as

primary obligor and not merely as guarantor) to Owner the payment in full of all

amounts at any time that may be due, owing or payable to Owner from the Contractor

for the failure of the Contractor to duly and punctually perform all of its obligations

under the Contract (the "Guarantee"), without any demur, reservation, protest or

recourse, immediately on receipt of a demand from Owner.

The Guarantee is given in consideration for consideration received from the

Contractor (the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged).

The Guarantor agrees that the value of the Guarantee shall at all times be maintained

at the amount of Rs. [................................................insert amount] (the "Guaranteed

Amount").

The Guarantor further agrees that this Guarantee does not limit the number of claims

that may be made by Owner against the Guarantor. Upon a payment being made

under this Guarantee, the amount of the Guarantee shall automatically be replenished to the full Guaranteed Amount.

Any payment made hereunder shall be made free and clear of and without deduction

for, or on account of, any present or future Taxes, deductions or withholdings of any nature whatsoever and by whomsoever imposed, and where any withholding on a

payment is required by any Applicable Law, the Guarantor shall comply with such

withholding obligations and shall pay such additional amount in respect of such payment such that Owner receives the full amount due hereunder as if no such

withholding had occurred.

3. The Guarantor shall, pay to Owner sums not exceeding the Guaranteed Amount,

within 5 (five) Business Days of receipt of a written demand from Owner stating that

the Contractor has failed to meet its performance obligations under the Contract. The

Guarantor shall not be required to go into the veracity of any breach or failure on the

part of the Contractor or validity of demand so made by Owner and shall pay the

amount specified in the demand notwithstanding any direction to the contrary given

or any dispute whatsoever raised by the Contractor or any other Person. The

Guarantor's obligations hereunder shall subsist until all such demands are duly met

and discharged in accordance with the provisions hereof.

4. The obligations of the Guarantor herein are absolute and unconditional, irrespective

of the value, genuineness, validity, regularity or enforceability of the Contract or the

insolvency, bankruptcy, reorganization, dissolution or liquidation of the Contractor or

any change in ownership of the Contractor or any purported assignment by the

Contractor or any other circumstance whatsoever which might otherwise constitute a

discharge or defence of a guarantor or a surety.

Further, this Guarantee is in no way conditional upon any requirement that Owner

first attempt to procure the Guaranteed Amount from the Contractor, or any other

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Person, or resort to any other means of obtaining payment of the Guaranteed Amount,

prior to make any recourse to this Guarantee.

5. In order to give effect to this Guarantee, Owner shall be entitled to treat the Guarantor

as the principal debtor. The obligations of the Guarantor under this Guarantee shall

not be affected by any act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this provision,

would reduce, release or prejudice the Guarantor from any of the Guaranteed Amount

or prejudice or diminish the Guaranteed Amount in whole or in part, including

(whether or not known to it, or Owner):

(a) any time or waiver granted to, or composition with, the Contractor or any

other Person;

(b) any incapacity or lack of powers, Owner or legal personality of or

dissolutions, or insolvency, or bankruptcy, or change in the status of the Contractor or any other Person;

(c) any variation of the Contract so that references to the Contract in this Guarantee shall include each variation;

(d) any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any Person

under the Contract or any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of the obligations of the Guarantor under this Guarantee or the unenforceability,

illegality or invalidity of the obligations of any Person under any other

document or guarantee, to the extent that each obligation under this Guarantee shall remain in full force as a separate, continuing and primary

obligation, and its obligations be construed accordingly, as if there were no

unenforceability, illegality or invalidity;

(e) the partial or entire release of any Guarantor or other Person primarily or

secondarily liable or responsible for the performance, payment or observance

of any of the Contractor's obligations during the Construction Period; or by any extension, waiver, or amendment whatsoever which may release a

guarantor or Guarantor (other than performance or indefeasible payment of a

Guaranteed Amount); or

(f) any part performance of the Contract by the Contractor or by any failure by

Owner to timely pay or perform any of its obligations under the Contract.

6. If, and to the extent that, for any reason the Contractor enters or threatens to enter into

any proceedings in bankruptcy or reorganization or otherwise, or if, for any other

reason whatsoever, the performance or payment by the Contractor of the Guaranteed

Amount becomes or may reasonably be expected to become impossible, then the

Guaranteed Amount shall be promptly paid by the Guarantor to Owner on demand.

7. So long as any sum remains owing by the Contractor to Owner, the Guarantor shall

not exercise any right of subrogation or any other rights of a guarantor or enforce any

guarantee or other right or claim against the Contractor (whether in respect of its

liability under this Guarantee or otherwise) or claim in the insolvency or liquidation

of the Contractor or any such other Person in competition with Owner. If the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Guarantor receives any payment or benefit in breach of this Clause 7, it shall hold the

same upon trust for Owner.

8. This Guarantee shall remain in full force and effect from the date hereof until the end

of the Contract Validity Period i.e., up to midnight of {.................... insert date} plus

additional 90 days to enable claims to be made i.e., up to midnight of {....................

insert date}, unless discharged/ released earlier by Owner in accordance with the

provisions of the Contract. No claim made after such date shall be valid against the

Guarantor.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, this Guarantee shall continue in effect until the sums

payable under this Guarantee have been indefeasibly paid in full and the Guarantor receives written notice thereof from Owner (such notice to be issued promptly upon

such occurrence).

9. The Guarantor represents and warrants to Owner that:

(a) it has the power to execute, deliver and perform the terms and provisions of

this Guarantee and has taken all necessary action to authorize the execution,

delivery and performance by it of this Guarantee;

(b) the Guarantor has duly executed and delivered this Guarantee, and this

Guarantee constitutes its legal, valid and binding obligation enforceable in accordance with its terms except as the enforceability thereof may be limited

by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, moratorium or other similar laws

affecting the enforcement of creditors' rights generally and by general

equitable principles;

(c) neither the execution, delivery or performance by the Guarantor of this

Guarantee, nor compliance by it with the terms and provisions hereof will: (i) contravene any material provision of any law, statute, rule or regulations or

any order, writ, injunction or decree of any court or governmental

instrumentality; (ii) conflict or be inconsistent with or result in any breach of any of the material terms, covenants, conditions or provisions of, or constitute

a default under any agreement, contract or instrument to which the Guarantor

is a party of by which it or any of its property or assets is bound; or (iii)

violate any provision of the Guarantor's constituent documents; and

(d) no order, consent, approval, license, authorization or validation of, or filing,

recording or registration with (except as have been obtained or made prior to the date hereof), or exemption by, any governmental or public body or

Owner, or any subdivision thereof, is required to authorize, or is required in

connection with: (i) the execution, delivery and performance of this

Guarantee; or (ii) the legality, validity, binding effect or enforceability of this Guarantee.

10. This Guarantee is a continuing one and all liabilities to which it applies or may apply

under the terms hereof shall be conclusively presumed to have been created in

reliance hereon. No failure or delay on the part of Owner in exercising any right,

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

power or privilege hereunder and no course of dealing between Owner and the

Guarantor, or the Contractor, shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or

partial exercise of any right, power or privilege hereunder preclude any other or

further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege.

11. The rights, powers and remedies expressly provided in this Guarantee are cumulative

and not exclusive of any rights, powers or remedies which Owner would otherwise

have. No notice to or demand on the Guarantor in any case shall entitle the Guarantor

to any other further notice or demand in similar or other circumstances or constitute a

waiver of the rights of Owner to any other or further action in any circumstances

without notice or demand.

12. If any one or more of the provisions contained in this Guarantee are or become

invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality and

enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or

impaired thereby, and the Guarantor shall enter into good faith negotiations with

Owner to replace the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision.

13. The Guarantor hereby agrees to execute and deliver all such instruments and take all

such actions as may be necessary to make effective fully the purposes of this

Guarantee.

14. This Guarantee may be executed in one or more duplicate counterparts, and when

executed and delivered by the Guarantor and Owner shall constitute a single binding

agreement.

15. Any notice, request or other communication to be given or made under this Guarantee

shall be in writing addressed to the Guarantor at the location set opposite its signature hereto and in the manner as set out in respect of notices under the Contract.

16. This Guarantee shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of

India. The Guarantor irrevocably agrees that any legal action, suit or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Guarantee may be brought in the courts in Guwahati,

Assam.

17. Owner may assign or transfer all or any part of its interest herein to any other person

with prior notification to the Guarantor. The Guarantor may not assign or transfer any

of its rights or obligations under this Guarantee.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Guarantor has set its hands hereunto on the day, month and

year first hereinabove written.

Signed and delivered by [.............................................................insert name of Bank] Bank by

hand

Name: Designation:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 2

FORM OF MOBILIZATION ADVANCE GUARANTEE

[ON APPROPRIATE STAMP PAPER]

Beneficiary: Assam Petro-chemicals Limited

Bank Guarantee No. [..................................................●]

THIS DEED OF GUARANTEE is executed on this [.........................insert day] day of

[................................insert month and year] at [............................................insert place] by

[...............................................INSERT NAME OF BANK] having its head/registered office at [......................insert address], (hereinafter referred to as the "Guarantor", which

expression shall unless it is repugnant to the subject or context thereof include successors and

assigns)

IN FAVOUR OF

ASSAM PETRO-CHEMICALS LIMITED, a company incorporated under the (Indian) Companies Act, 1956, with its registered office at 4th Floor, Orion Place, G S Road,

Guwahati, Assam - 781005 , India (hereinafter referred to as the " Owner", which expression

shall unless repugnant to the context thereof, be deemed to include its successors-in-interest and permitted assigns).

WHEREAS

A. [.........................■] with its registered office at [.....................................................■]

(hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor", which expression shall unless repugnant

to the context thereof, be deemed to include its successors-in-interest and permitted assigns) has been awarded a contract by Owner for the engineering, procurement,

construction, testing and commissioning of the Facility ("Contract").

B. In terms of Clause 9.4.1 of the Contract, Contractor is required to furnish a

Mobilization Advance Guarantee to Owner in the form of an unconditional,

irrevocable, on demand bank guarantee for securing the Mobilization Advance made

to Contractor in accordance with the Contract ("Mobilization Advance Guarantee") for INR [.....................................insert amount] or US$

[............................................insert amount] ("Guaranteed Amount").

C. At the request of the Contractor and for sufficient consideration, the Guarantor has

agreed to issue this guarantee in favour of Owner.

NOW THEREFORE THIS DEED WITNESSETH AS FOLLOWS:

1. Capitalised terms used herein but not defined shall have the meaning ascribed to them

in the Contract.

2. The Guarantor shall upon a written demand from Owner informing the Guarantor that

the Mobilization Advance made to the Contractor has not been adequately adjusted,

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

pay to Owner, within 5 (five) days of receipt of such written demand from Owner,

without further proof or conditions and without contest, recourse, demur or protest

and without any enquiry to Owner or the Contractor, forthwith and in full amount,

without any deductions or set off or counter claims whatsoever, the sum claimed by

Owner in such demand not exceeding an amount equivalent to the Guaranteed

Amount. The Guarantor will pay the amount specified in the demand notwithstanding

any direction to the contrary given or any dispute raised by the Contractor or any

other person.

The Guarantor agrees that this Mobilization Advance Guarantee does not limit the

number of claims that may be made by Owner against the Guarantor provided that

such claims taken together shall not exceed the Guaranteed Amount.

Any payment made hereunder shall be made free and clear of and without deduction

for, or on account of, any present or future Taxes, deductions or withholdings of any

nature whatsoever and by whomsoever imposed, and where any withholding on a payment is required by any Applicable Law, the Guarantor shall comply with such

withholding obligations and shall pay such additional amount in respect of such

payment such that Owner receives the full amount due hereunder as if no such withholding had occurred.

3. This Mobilization Advance Guarantee shall be a continuing guarantee during its

currency and shall remain in force and effect until the earlier of: (i) date when the

Mobilization Advance has been fully recovered; and (ii) [...................insert date],

upon which the obligations of the Guarantor under this Mobilization Advance

Guarantee shall stand discharged.

4. The obligations of the Guarantor herein are absolute and unconditional, irrespective

of the value, genuineness, validity, regularity or enforceability of the Contract or the

insolvency, bankruptcy, reorganisation, dissolution or liquidation of the Contractor or

any change in ownership of the Contractor or any purported assignment by the

Contractor or any other circumstance whatsoever which might otherwise constitute a

discharge or defence of a guarantor or a surety.

Further, this Mobilization Advance Guarantee is in no way conditional upon any

requirement that Owner first attempts to procure the Guaranteed Amount from the Contractor or any other person, or resort to any other means of obtaining payment of

the Guaranteed Amount, prior to making recourse to this Guarantee.

5. The Guarantor shall not be required to go into the veracity of any breach or failure on

the part of the Contractor or validity of demand so made by Owner and shall pay the

amount specified in the demand notwithstanding any direction to the contrary given

or any dispute whatsoever raised by the Contractor or any other Person. The

Guarantor's obligations hereunder shall subsist until all such demands are duly met

and discharged in accordance with the provisions hereof.

6. The Guarantor hereby agrees that its liability under this Mobilization Advance

Guarantee shall not be discharged by virtue of any agreement between the Contractor

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

and Owner, whether with or without the Guarantor’s knowledge, or by reason of

Owner showing any indulgence or forbearance to the Contractor.

7. The Guarantor's obligations under this Mobilization Advance Guarantee for the

Guaranteed Amount is primary, independent and absolute and not by way of surety

only.

8. The obligations of the Guarantor under this Mobilization Advance Guarantee shall

not be affected by any act, omission, matter or thing which, but for this provision,

would prejudice or diminish the Guaranteed Amount in whole or in part, including

(whether or not known to it or Owner):

(a) any time or waiver granted to, or composition with, the Contractor or any

other person;

(b) any incapacity or lack of powers, authority or legal personality of or

dissolutions, or insolvency or bankruptcy, or change in the status of the

Contractor or any other Person; (c) any variation of the Contract so that references to the Contract in this

Mobilization Advance Guarantee shall include each variation;

(d) any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of any obligation of any person under the Contract or any unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of the

obligations of the Guarantor under this Mobilization Advance Guarantee or

the unenforceability, illegality or invalidity of the obligations of any person under any other document or guarantee, to the extent that each obligation

under this Mobilization Advance Guarantee shall remain in full force as a

separate, continuing and primary obligation, and its obligations be construed

accordingly, as if there were no unenforceability, illegality or invalidity; (e) any extension, waiver, or amendment whatsoever which may release a

guarantor or the Guarantor (other than performance or indefeasible payment

of a Guaranteed Amount); or (f) any part performance of the Contract by the Contractor or by any failure by

Owner to timely pay or perform any of its obligations under the Contract.

9. So long as any sum remains owing by the Contractor to Owner, the Guarantor shall

not exercise any right of subrogation or any other rights of a guarantor or enforce any

guarantee or other right or claim against the Contractor (whether in respect of its

liability under this Mobilization Advance Guarantee or otherwise) or claim in the

insolvency or liquidation of the Contractor or any such other person in competition

with Owner. If the Guarantor receives any payment or benefit in breach of this

Clause, it shall hold the same in trust for Owner.

10. The Guarantor represents, warrants and undertakes to Owner that:

(a) it has the power to execute, deliver and perform the terms and provisions of

this Mobilization Advance Guarantee and has taken all necessary action(s) to

authorize the execution, delivery and performance by it of this Mobilization

Advance Guarantee;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(b) the Guarantor has duly executed and delivered this Mobilization Advance

Guarantee, and this Mobilization Advance Guarantee constitutes its legal, valid and binding obligation enforceable in accordance with its terms except

as the enforceability thereof may be limited by applicable bankruptcy,

insolvency, moratorium or other similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally and by general equitable principles;

(c) neither the execution, delivery or performance by the Guarantor of this

Mobilization Advance Guarantee, nor compliance by it with the terms and

provisions hereof will: (i) contravene any material provision of any law,

statute, rule or regulations or any order, writ, injunction or decree of any

court or governmental instrumentality; (ii) conflict or be inconsistent with or

result in any breach of any of the material terms, covenants, conditions or

provisions of, or constitute a default under any agreement, contract or

instrument to which the Guarantor is a party or by which it or any of its

property or assets is bound; or (iii) violate any provision of the Guarantor's

constituent documents;

(d) no order, consent, approval, license, authorization or validation of, or filing,

recording or registration with (except as have been obtained or made prior to

the date hereof), or exemption by, any governmental or public body or authority, or any subdivision thereof, is required to authorize, or is required in

connection with: (i) the execution, delivery and performance of this

Mobilization Advance Guarantee; or (ii) the legality, validity, binding effect or enforceability of this Mobilization Advance Guarantee; and

(e) this Mobilization Advance Guarantee will be enforceable when presented for

payment to a Scheduled Bank (as defined by the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934) in [...................................................................Insert name of place].

11. This Mobilization Advance Guarantee is a continuing one and all liabilities to which

it applies or may apply under the terms hereof shall be conclusively presumed to have

been created in reliance hereon. No failure or delay on the part of Owner in

exercising any right, power or privilege hereunder and no course of dealing between

Owner and the Guarantor, or the Contractor, shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor

shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege hereunder preclude

any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or

privilege.

12. If any one or more of the provisions contained in this Mobilization Advance

Guarantee are or become invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, the validity,

legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be

affected or impaired thereby, and the Guarantor shall enter into good faith

negotiations with Owner to replace the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision.

13. The Guarantor hereby agrees to execute and deliver all such instruments and take all

such actions as may be necessary to make effective fully the purposes of this

Mobilization Advance Guarantee.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

14. This Mobilization Advance Guarantee may be executed in one or more duplicate

counterparts, and when executed and delivered by the Guarantor and Owner shall

constitute a single binding agreement.

15. Any demand, notice, request or other communication to be given or made under this

Mobilization Advance Guarantee shall be deemed to have been duly given or served:

(i) Upon Owner, at P.O. Parbatpur, Namrup, Dibrugarh, Assam – 786623,

marked for the attention of Shri Ratul Bordoloi / Shri Atul Ch. Barman; (ii) Upon a Scheduled Bank (as defined by the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934),

at [....................insert], India.

16. The Guarantor:

(a) acknowledges that the lenders of the Owner will review this Mobilization

Advance Guarantee and may require changes thereto as a condition of granting financing and/or providing political risk insurance; and

(b) shall consider any such requirements in good faith.

17. This Mobilization Advance Guarantee shall be governed by, and construed in

accordance with, the laws of India. The Guarantor irrevocably agrees that any legal

action, suit or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Mobilization Advance

Guarantee may be brought in the courts in Guwahati, Assam.

18. Owner may assign or transfer all or any part of its interest herein together with the

Contract to any other person with prior intimation to the Guarantor. The Guarantor

may not assign or transfer any of its rights or obligations under this Mobilization

Advance Guarantee.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Guarantor has set its hands hereunto on the day, month and

year first hereinabove written.

Signed and delivered by [...........................................................................................insert name

of Guarantor] Guarantor by hand

Name:

Designation:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 3

SAFETY CODE

1. GENERAL

1.1 The CONTRACTOR shall adhere to safe construction practices and guard against

hazardous and unsafe working conditions and shall comply with Owner’s safety rules

as set forth herein.

1.2 In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall adhere to and be bound by the "Safety

Practices during Construction" (OISD-GDN-192 and OISD-207) formulated by the

Oil Industry Safety Directorate from time to time. A copy of the existing "Safety

Practices During Construction" as presently formulated by the Oil Industry Safety

Directorate is annexed hereto as Appendix 3.

1.3 In the event of any irreconcilable conflict between the “Safety Practices during

Construction” prescribed by the Oil Industry Safety Directorate and the Safety

provisions set out herein, the "Safety Practices during Construction" established by

the Oil Industry Safety Directorate shall prevail to the extent of the irreconcilable

conflict.

1.4 In this Section any reference to the Facility shall wherever applicable include any

existing plant, unit or installation in or adjacent to which the Site or any part thereof

is located.

2. FIRST AID AND INDUSTRIAL INJURIES

2.1 The Contractor shall maintain first aid facilities for its employees and those of its sub-

contractors.

2.2 The Contractor shall make outside arrangements for ambulance service and for the

treatment of industrial injuries. Names of those providing these services shall be

furnished to TCE prior to start of construction, and their telephone numbers shall be

prominently posted in Contractor’s field office.

2.3 All critical industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to TCE, and a copy of

Contractor’s report covering each personal injury requiring the attention of a

physician shall be furnished to Owner.

3. GENERAL RULES

Carrying/Striking of matches, lighters within the Site, smoking within the Site, tank, farm, or dock limits are strictly prohibited. Violators of the "No Smoking" rules shall

be discharged immediately. Within the operation area, no hot work shall be permitted

without valid gas safety/fire permits. The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all lapses of his subcontractors/employees in this regard.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

4. CONTRACTOR'S BARRICADES

4.1 The CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain barricades required in connection with

his operation to guard or protect:

(i) Excavation

(ii) Hoisting areas

(iii) Areas adjudged hazardous by the Contractor’s or Owner’s inspectors.

(iv) Owner’s existing property liable to damage by Contractor's operations, in the opinion of TCE.

(v) Railroad unloading spots.

4.2 The Contractor’s employees and those of its sub-contractors shall become acquainted

with Owner’s barricading practices and shall respect the provisions thereof.

4.3 Barricades and hazardous areas adjacent to but not located in normal routes of travel

shall be marked by red flasher lanterns at nights.

5. SCAFFOLDING

5.1 Suitable scaffolding shall be provided for workmen for all works that cannot safely be

done from the ground or from solid construction except such short period work as can

be done safely from ladders. When a ladder is used, an extra person shall be engaged

for holding the ladder and if the ladder is used for carrying materials as well, suitable

footholds and handholds shall be provided on the ladder and the ladder shall be given

an inclination not steeper than 1 in 4 (1 horizontal 4 vertical).

5.2 Scaffolding or staging more than 12' (twelve feet) above the ground floor, swung or

suspended from an overhead support or erected with stationary support shall have a

guard rail properly attached, bolted, braced and otherwise rewinded at least 3' high

above the floor or platform of scaffolding or staging and extending along the entire

length of the outside and ends thereof with only such openings as may be necessary

for the delivery of materials. Such scaffolding or staging shall be so fastened as to

prevent it from swaying from the building or structure.

5.3 Working platforms, gangways and stairways should be so constructed that they

should not sag unduly or unequally and if the height of the platform or the gangway

or the stairway is more than 12' above ground level or floor level, they should be

closely boarded, should have adequate width and should be suitably fastened as

described in Clause 5.2 above.

5.4 Every opening in the floor of a building or in a working platform shall be provided

with suitable fencing or railing whose minimum height shall be 3 feet to prevent the

fall of persons or materials by providing.

5.5 Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other working

places. Every ladder shall be securely fixed. No portable single ladder shall be over

30' in length while the width between the side rails in rung ladder shall in no case be

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

less than 11.5" for ladder up to and including 10' in length. For longer ladders this

width would be increased by at least ¼'' for each additional foot of length. Uniform

step spacing shall not exceed 12''. Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent

danger from electrical equipment. No materials on any site of work shall be so

stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to any person or public. The

Contractor shall also provide all necessary fencing and lights to protect the workers

and staff from accidents, and shall be bound to bear the expenses of defense of every

suit, action or other proceedings, that may be brought by any person for injury

sustained owing to neglect of the above precautions and to pay damages and costs

which may be awarded in any such suit or action or proceedings to such person, or

which may with the consent of the Contractor be paid to compromise any claim by

any person.

6. EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING

6.1 All trenches 4' (Four feet) or more in depth, shall at all times be supplied with at least

one ladder for each 100' length or fraction thereof.

6.2 The Ladder shall be extended from bottom of the trench to at least 3' 3" above the

surface of the ground. The site of the trenches which is 5' (Five feet)or more in depth

shall be stepped back to give suitable slope, or securely held by timber bracing, so as

to avoid the danger of sides to collapse. Cutting shall be done from top to bottom.

Under no circumstances shall undermining or undercutting be done.

7. DEMOLITION

7.1 Before any demolition work is commenced and also during the process of such works

all roads and open areas adjacent to the Site shall either be closed or suitably

protected.

7.2 No electric cable or apparatus which is liable to be a source of danger over a cable or

apparatus used by the operator shall remain electrically charged.

7.3 All practical steps shall be taken to prevent danger to persons employed, from risk of

fire or explosion or flooding. No floor or other part of the building shall be so

overloaded with debris or material as to render it unsafe.

8. SAFETY EQUIPMENT

8.1 All necessary personal safety equipment as considered adequate by TCE should be

made available for the use to the persons employed on the Site and maintained in a

condition suitable for immediate use, and the Contractor should take adequate steps to

ensure proper use of equipment by those concerned.

8.2 Workers employed on mixing asphaltic materials, cement and lime mortars shall be

provided with protective footwear and protective gloves.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

8.3 Those engaged in white washing and mixing or stacking of cement bags or any

materials which are injurious to the eyes shall be provided with protective goggles.

8.4 Those engaged in welding and cutting works shall be provided with protective face

and eye- shields, and gloves, etc.

8.5 Stone breakers shall be provided with protective goggles and protective clothing and

seated at sufficiently safe intervals.

8.6 When workers are employed in sewers and manholes, which are in use, the

Contractor shall ensure that the manhole covers are opened and are ventilated at least

for an hour before the workers are allowed to get into the manholes, and the manholes

so opened shall be cordoned off with suitable railing and provided with warning

signals or boards to prevent accident.

8.7 The Contractor shall not employ men below the age of 18 years and women on the

work of painting or products containing lead in any form. Wherever men above the

age of 18 years are employed on the work of lead painting, the following precautions

should be taken:

(a) No paint containing lead product shall be used except in the form of paste or

readymade paint.

(b) Suitable face masks shall be supplied for use by the workers when paint is

applied in the form of spray or if a surface having lead paint dry rubbed and

scrapped.

(c) Overalls shall be supplied by the Contractor to workmen and adequate

facilities shall be provided to enable the working painters to wash during and

on cessation of Work.

9. RISKY PLACES

When the work is done near any place where there is a risk of drowning, all necessary

safety equipments shall be provided and kept ready for use and all necessary steps

taken for prompt rescue of any person in danger and adequate provision should be made for prompt first aid treatment of all injuries likely to be sustained during the

course of the work.

10. HOISTING EQUIPMENT

Use of hoisting machines and tackle including their attachments, anchorage and

supports shall conform to the following standards or conditions:

(a) These shall be of good mechanical construction, sound materials and

adequate strength and free from patent defect and shall be kept in good

condition and in good working order.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(b) Every rope used in hoisting or lowering materials or as a means of

suspension shall be of durable quality and adequate strength and free from patent defects.

(c) Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly qualified

and no person under the age of 21years should be in charge of any hoisting

machine including any scaffolding winch or to give signals to the operator.

(d) In case of every hoisting machine and of every chain, ring, hook, shackle,

swivel and pulley block used in hoisting or lowering or as a means of

suspension, the safe working load shall be ascertained by adequate means.

(e) Every hoisting machine and all gear referred to above shall be plainly marked

with the safe working load and the condition under which it is applicable

shall be clearly indicated. No part of any machine or any gear referred to

above in this paragraph shall be loaded beyond the safe working load except

for the purpose of testing.

(f) In case of departmental machines, the safe working load shall be notified by

TCE. As regards Contractor’s machines, the Contractor shall notify the safe

working load of the machine to TCE, whenever he brings any machinery to

Site of work and get it verified by TCE.

11. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Motor, Gearing, Transmission, wiring and other dangerous parts of hoisting appliances shall be provided with efficient safeguards. Hoisting appliances should be

provided with such means as will reduce to the minimum, the risk of accidental

descent of the load. Adequate precautions shall be taken to reduce to the minimum

the risk of any part of a suspended load becoming accidentally displaced. When workers are employed on electrical installations which are already energized,

insulating mats, wearing apparel, such as gloves and boots as may be necessary shall

be provided. The workers shall not wear any rings, watches and carry keys or other materials which are good conductors of electricity.

12. MAINTENANCE OF SAFEY DEVICES

All scaffolds, ladders and other safety devices mentioned or described herein shall be

maintained in safe conditions and no scaffold, ladder or equipment shall be altered or

removed while it is in use. Adequate washing facilities should be provided at or near

the place of work.

13. DISPLAY OF SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

These safety provisions should be brought to the notice of all concerned by display on a notice board at a prominent place at the Site. The person responsible for compliance

of the safety code shall be named therein by the CONTRACTOR.

14. ENFORCEMENT OF SAFETY REGULATIONS

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to safety precautions, the arrangements made by the Contractor shall be open to inspection by

the Welfare Officer, TCE or Safety Engineer of Owner or their representatives.

15. NO EXEMPTION

15.1 Notwithstanding anything provided in this Appendix 3, the Contractor shall be bound

by the provisions of any other Act or rules in force in the Republic of India, with a

view that the provisions hereof be in addition thereto and not in lieu thereof.

15.2 The works throughout including any temporary works shall be carried on in such a

manner as not to interfere in any way whatsoever with the traffic on any roads or

footpaths at the Site or in the vicinity thereof or with any existing works whether the

property of Owner or of a third party.

15.3 The Contractor shall also arrange to obtain valid gate passes for his men and

equipment from the concerned Authorities.

15.4 No man/material/equipment not covered by valid passes shall be permitted within the

Site no material/equipment shall be permitted to be taken out of the Site, unless

authorized by the concerned Authorities. The Contractor shall be held fully

responsible for any or all delays/ losses/ damages that may result consequent on any

lapse(s) that may occur on the part of his subcontractors/employees in this regard.

16. ENTRY PASSES

16.1 The CONTRACTOR has to apply for photo Entry Passes for his workers and staff

and the workers and staff of his Sub-Contractors in a prescribed proforma provided

by Owner. The Application shall be accompanied by a Statement and Declaration in

the form prescribed by Owner signed by the employees for whom the Entry Passes

are sought and confirmed by the employer. The photo Entry Passes shall be issued by

Owner for a maximum period of 3 (three) months, which will be extendable upon the

Contractor’s application. As a special case, Temporary Passes may be issued for a

maximum period of 7 (seven) days.

16.2 Unutilized/expired Entry Passes/Identity Cards shall have to be immediately

surrendered to Owner.

16.3 In case of the loss of an Entry Pass/Identity Card, the Contractor shall immediately

lodge an FIR with the local police station and inform TCE of the loss and shall pay a

charge of Rs.150/- against Entry Pass/Identity Card lost. The Contractor is required to

keep an account and track of all Entry Passes issued and surrendered.

Gate Passes/Identity Cards issued by the Security Section should always be displayed

by the Contractor’s or Sub-contractor’s employees while working inside the Plant.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

17. GATE PASSES

17.1 To bring materials, equipment, tools and tackle and other things inside the Site for

construction Work, the Contractor has to produce proper documents of title or

authority relative thereto for inspection by Owner’s personnel at the gate. These shall

be checked thoroughly by Owner’s personnel at the Gate and recorded in their

Register before permitting the same to be brought inside within the Site. It is the

Contractor’s responsibility to see that the entry is duly recorded in the Register with

proper Entry Number, date and signature of Owner’s authorized representative and

that the supporting challans/documents are stamped and signed by Owner’s personnel

at the gate at the time of entry.

Those materials which need repairing/ replacement as per Site condition will be

allowed to move beyond Owner’s battery limit only after exchange of good equivalent material.

18. WORK PERMIT

18.1 In order to keep Owner informed of the various jobs being undertaken within the Site

and to enable Owner to regulate the same to ensure the observance of safety

regulations relative thereto, when Work is to be carried out in hazardous areas, a Hot

Work Permit is to be obtained by the Contractor from Owner before start of Work on

jobs which are capable of generating a flame, spark or heat e.g., gas cutting, grinding,

welding, use of any electrical, diesel, petrol or battery operated prime mover,

machine, tool or equipment or generator set, mixer machine, drilling machine, pump,

crane, fork lift or hand truck or trailer or chipping or breaking of rocks or concrete or

hacksaw cutting and drilling. Similarly the Contractor shall obtain a Cold Work

Permit from Owner for jobs which do not come under the category of hot work and in

respect of which there is no risk of fire, e.g., transportation, backfilling of ordinary

soil by manual process, pile testing, hydro-testing, shuttering, fixing of reinforcement,

hand mixed concreting, plastering and brickwork.

18.2 Depending on the nature of the Work and the equipments and tools involved, the

Contractor shall apply for Cold/Hot Permit in a prescribed format at least 7(seven)

days before the Work is planned to start. No Work Permit shall be issued by Owner

unless proper arrangement is made by the Contractor to ensure safe performance of

the Work inside the Site limit. Job-wise and area-wise permits shall be issued to the

Contractor and for Work against each permit the Contractor shall post at Site at least

one Construction Supervisor and one Safety Supervisor of required level to ensure the

due observance of all safety requirements.

19. VEHICLE PERMIT

Permits are to be obtained separately for entry/use of vehicles/trailers and other

mobile equipment inside the Site limits. All the Contractor’s vehicles should have a valid ‘PUC Certificate’. The following requirements are to be met to obtain vehicle

permit:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(i) Vehicle/Equipment shall be in good condition and fitted with spark arrestor. (ii) Vehicles should carry, wherever applicable, valid Road Tax Certificate and

Fitness Certificate from the competent authority and insurance policy.

(iii) Valid operating/driving license of driver/operator.

20. VALIDITY OF THE PERMIT

(i) Any Hot or Cold Work Permit issued is valid only for 24 hours. (ii) Thereafter the validity of the Permit must be renewed for each shift (morning

& evening) by the shift in-charge/ shift representative of Owner.

(iii) The permit may be renewed for a maximum period of one month from the

date of issue and if extension is required, the Contractor has to apply for a fresh permit.

(iv) A permit is not valid for Work on holidays unless special permission of

Owner is obtained for the purpose.

21. SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS

21.1 REGARDING WORK PERMIT

(a) The Work shall be carried out inside the Site to conform to the Owner’s

safety section and in accordance with any instructions of TCE issued from

time to time. Sometimes working hours may be drastically reduced or

increased to satisfy safety requirements and the Contractor shall meet these

requirements without any time and cost implications. No claim for idling of

machinery, plant, manpower or equipment shall be entertained for reason of

delay in the issue of a Work Permit and it shall be the exclusive responsibility

of the Contractor to apply for, pursue and obtain the requisite Work Permit(s)

well in advance of the relative requirement(s).

(b) The Contractor shall abide by all safety regulations of the Plant and ensure

that safety equipment for specific jobs as stipulated in the Factories Act

Safety Handbook is issued to all employees during the execution of Work,

failing which all the works at Site shall be suspended.

(c) HSE specifications, OISD and other requirements shall be followed in

totality.

21.2 REGARDING HOT WORK

(a) When doing hot work inside the plant, the Contractor must ensure that the

fire hose is hooked up with the fire water system and extended to the Site/

suitable alternative fire- fighting arrangements are made to the satisfaction of

the Engineer-in-Charge. In addition, at least one fire extinguisher must be

kept near the working spot. The area around and below the place of hot work

must be adequately protected from sparks and hot metals by a booth made of

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

asbestos cloth/sheet and by wetting with water. In addition, depending on the

location and hazard of the work, the Contractor shall at its own Cost arrange

sufficient number of additional fire hoses and such firefighting equipment of

approved quality as may be required to carry out hot job inside the plant.

(b) Welding & electrical cables should be of approved quality and no jointing or

loose connection shall be permitted.

(c) At the end of the working day the Contractor must inform the electrical

section to switch off power at sub-station end.

(d) The Contractor must provide cotton clothes, safety shoes, safety helmet,

safety belt, and hand gloves of approved quality to his workers to meet the

safety requirement of various jobs to be carried out inside the Plant.

21.3 REGARDING USE OF VEHICLE

(a) Vehicle must not ply on any road within the Site at a speed exceeding 20

KM/hr.

(b) Mobile cranes, loaded trucks and trailers must not exceed the speed limit of

15 KM/hr. inside the plant.

(c) No crane is allowed to move inside the plant with load.

(d) No vehicle is allowed to be parked inside the plant.

(e) Limited number of vehicles will be permitted inside the battery area due to

security reasons.

22. DEDUCTIONS FROM CONTRACT PRICE

22.1 In addition to price reduction and deductions as provided for, Owner shall be entitled

to deduct from any payment due to the Contractor, any amount claimed by Owner

under the Contract and any costs, damages or expenses for which the Contractor is

liable under the Contract.

22.2 In addition to price reduction and deductions as provided for in the Contract, Owner

shall be entitled to deduct from any payment due to the Contractor, for violations of

safety provisions, as per details given below:

(i) Violation of applicable safety, health and environment related norm, a price

reduction of INR 5000/- per occasion

(ii) Violation as above resulting in (a) Any physical injury - a price reduction of 0.5% of the Contract Price (maximum of INR 2,00,000) per injury in addition

to INR 5,000/; or (b) Fatal accident - a price reduction of 1% of the Contract

Price (maximum of INR 10,00,000) per fatality in addition to INR 5,000/-

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

23. SPECIAL CONTRIBUTIONS

With a view to ensure the formulation and enforcement of a safety code by the

Contractor, it is stipulated that in the event of any act, omission or accident at the Site

which results in the death of a person, the Contractor shall contribute a sum of INR 5,00,000/- (Rupees five lakh only), or which results in the permanent disablement of a

person, the Contractor shall contribute a sum of INR 3,00,000/- (Rupees three lakh

only) in addition to any other sum(s) required to be paid by the Contractor under any law or other contract, to a welfare fund to be established by Owner for, inter alia,

such contributions, and until such fund is established, to a charity nominated by

Owner.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 4

INDEMNITY BOND

(TO BE NOTORISED AND ON STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)

To

Assam Petro-chemicals Limited (Owner)

(Address as applicable)

Dear Sirs,

WHEREAS Owner and having its head/registered office at 4th Floor, Orion Place, G S Road,

Guwahati, Assam - 781005, India (hereinafter called “the Indemnified” which expression

shall include its successors and assigns) has awarded to

M/s…………………………………… a Partnership Firm/ Sole Proprietor Business/ a company having its Registered Office at ……………………………………. (hereinafter

called “the Indemnifier”, which expression shall include its successors and assigns) a contract

for conditions set out, inter-alia, in “the Indemnified” Purchase Order No. ………………… dated……………………….. (hereinafter referred to as “the said Contract”) to “the

Indemnifier”.

AND WHEREAS “the Indemnified” has agreed to supply to “the Indemnifier” raw material/

components to the value of INR……………... (Rupees……………………

…………………… only) for incorporation in fabrication by “the Indemnifier” in terms of

“the said contract”, the components/ raw material to be supplied by “the Indemnified” to “the Indemnifier” for the said fabrication, (hereinafter, or the sake of brevity, referred to as “the

said material”) and pending fabrication and delivery at job-site of the completed fabricated

work(s) incorporating “the said material” and accounting for “the said material” shall be under the sole custody and charge of “the Indemnifier” and shall be kept, stored, altered,

worked upon and/ or fabricated at the sole risk and expenses of “the Indemnifier”.

As a Pre-condition to the supply of “the said material” by “the Indemnified” to “the

Indemnifier”, the Indemnified” has required “the Indemnifier” to furnish to “the Indemnified”

security in the manner and upon terms and conditions hereinafter indicated:

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises aforesaid “the Indemnifier”

Shri…………………………………, Shri……………………………. all Directors/ Partners/

Sole proprietor of “the Indemnifier” in consideration of aforesaid “contract” hereby irrevocably and unconditionally and jointly and severally undertake to indemnify and always

keep “the Indemnified” from and against all loss, damage and destruction (inclusive but not

limited to any or all loss or damage or destruction to or of “the said material” or any item or

part thereof) by theft, fire, flood, storm, tempest, lightning, explosion, storage, chemical or physical action or reaction, bending, wrapping, exposure, rusting, faulty workmanship, faulty

fabrication or faulty method of technique of fabrication, riot, civil commotion or other act of

omission or commission whatsoever within or beyond the control of “the Indemnifier”, misuse and misappropriation by “the Indemnifier’s” servants and/or agents whatsoever to, of

or in “the said material” or any part or item thereof between the date that the same or relative

part or item thereof was supplied to “the Indemnifier” up to and until the return to “the Indemnified” on due dates of “the said material” or relative part or item thereof or completed

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

fabricated work(s) incorporating the said material AND jointly and severally undertake to pay

to “the indemnified” forthwith on first demand in writing without protest or demur the value of “the said material” or item part thereof lost, damaged, destroyed, misused and/or

misappropriated, as the case may be, inclusive of “the Indemnified” ’s cost and expenses

(inclusive but not limited to handling, transportation, cartage, insurance, freight, packing and inspection costs and/ or expenses) as specified in the said demand.

AND “the Indemnifier” hereby agree with “the Indemnified” that:

1. This Indemnity shall remain valid and irrevocable until the settlement of all claims of “the

Indemnified” arising hereunder.

2. This Indemnity shall be in addition to any other Indemnity, Guarantee or Security

whatsoever that “the Indemnified” may now or any time anywise have in relation to “the

Indemnifier” ‘s obligations/ liabilities under and/ or in connection with the said contract

inclusive of “the said material” and “the Indemnified” shall have full authority to take

recourse to or enforce this security in preference to the other security (ies) at its sole

discretion, and no failure on the part of “the Indemnified” in enforcing or requiring

enforcement of any other security shall have the effect of releasing “the Indemnifier”

from its full liability hereunder:

3. “The Indemnified” shall be at liberty without reference to “the Indemnifier” and without

affecting the full liability of “the Indemnifier” hereunder to take any other such security

in respect of “the Indemnifier’s” obligations and/or liabilities under or in connection with

the “said contract” inclusive of “the said material” and to vary the terms vis-a-vis “the

Indemnifier” of “the said contract” or to grant time and/or indulgence to “the

Indemnifier” or to reduce or to increase or otherwise vary the prices or the total contract

value or the quantity, quality, description or value of the said material or to release or to

forbear from endorsement of all or any of the obligations of “the Indemnifier” under the

said contract (inclusive of anything in respect of “the said material”) and/or to remedies

of “the Indemnified” under any other security (ies) now or hereinafter held by “the

Indemnified” and no such dealing(s), variations(s), reduction(s), increase (s) or other

indulgence (s) or arrangement(s) with “the Indemnifier” or release “the Indemnifier” from

their full liability to “the Indemnified” hereunder or of anywise prejudicing rights of “the

Indemnified” against “the Indemnifier” and “the Indemnifier” hereby waive all rights, if

any, at any time, inconsistent with the terms of this Indemnity.

4. This Indemnity shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or winding up,

dissolution, or change of constitution or bankruptcy or insolvency of “the Indemnifier”

and the obligations of “the Indemnifier” in terms hereof shall not be anywise affected or

suspended by reason of any dispute or disputes having been raised by “the Indemnifier”

(whether now pending before any Arbitrator, Officer, Tribunal or Court) or any denial of

liability by “the Indemnifier” or any other order or communication whatsoever by “the

Indemnifier” or any other order or communication whatsoever by “the Indemnifier”

stopping or preventing or purporting to stop or prevent any payment by “the Indemnifier”

to “the Indemnified” in terms hereof.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

5. The mere statement made by or on behalf of “the Indemnified” in any notice or demand

or other writing addressed to “the Indemnifier” as to any of “the said material” or item or

part thereof supplied to “the Indemnifier” having been lost, damaged, destroyed, misused

or misappropriated while in the custody of “the Indemnifier” before or after completion of

the completed fabricated work(s) incorporating “the said material” and delivery at job site

thereof shall as between “the Indemnifier” and “the Indemnified” be conclusive of the

factum of “the said material” or item or part thereof having been supplied to “the

Indemnifier” and/or the loss, damage, destruction, misuse or misappropriation thereof, as

the case may be, while in the custody of “the Indemnifier” and/or prior to the completion

of the completed fabricated work(s) and delivery to job site thereof without necessity on

the part of “the Indemnified” to produce any documentary proof or other evidence

whatsoever in support of this.

6. The amount stated in any notice of demand addressed by “the Indemnified” to “the

Indemnifier” as the value of any of “the said material”, lost, damaged, destroyed or

misused or misappropriated, inclusive relative to the cost and expenses incurred by “the

Indemnified” in connection therewith shall as between “the Indemnifier” and “the

Indemnified” be conclusive of the value of such “said material” and the said costs and

expenses as also of the amount liable to be paid by “the Indemnifier” to “the Indemnified”

in terms and for the purpose of, without necessity for “the Indemnified” to produce any

voucher, bill or other documentation or evidence whatsoever in support thereof.

In witness whereof “the Indemnifier” have hereunto set and subscribed his hand this day and year first hereinabove written in the presence of witnesses.

Yours faithfully,

1.

2.

3.

WITNESSES:

1.

2.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 5

PART A

FORMAT-I

INTIMATION REGARDING SYSTEM COMPLETION

PROJECT: ___________ CUSTOMER: ______________

UNIT: _____________ Following system/sub-system has been mechanically completed in all respects with

exceptions noted below. The system/sub-system can be taken up for checking and preparation

of checklist.

SYSTEM NO.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

EXCEPTIONS:

SIGNATURE DATE

CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION:

CO-ORDINATOR

The system is ready/ not ready for Check listing

Owner/ TCE

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

PART B

FORMAT-II

CHECKLIST

PROJECT: _____________ CUSTOMER: _____________ UNIT: ______________

SYSTEM/SUB-SYSTEM _______________________________________________

CHECKLIST TYPE PRELIMINARY/FINAL

SL.NO. CHECKLIST ITEMS REMARKS

SIGNATURE DATE

Owner/TCE:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 6

FORMAT-III

READY FOR PRE-COMMISSIONING CERTIFICATE



This is to certify that the following Plant/system/sub-system as detailed below is completely installed and all the Checklist points are carried out except for minor details s given in the

attached list.

DESCRIPTION ON PLANT/SECTION/SUB-SECTION

________________________________

SIGNATURE DATE CONTRACTOR’S CONTRACTION

CO-ORDINATOR:

CONTRACTOR’S COMMISSIONING CO-ORDINATOR:

The system is ready/ not ready for Check listing Owner/TCE:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 7

FORMAT-IV

READY FOR COMMISSIONING CERTIFICATE



This is to certify that all the necessary pre-commissioning activities for the system/sub-system

as detailed below have been completed and the system/sub-system is ready for

commissioning except for the minor details as given below which will not affect the commissioning trial runs.


________________________________

SIGNATURE

DATE

CONTRACTOR’S COMMISSIONING:

CO-ORDINATOR

SIGNATURE

DATE

Owner/ TCE:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-04



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

APPENDIX 8

FORMAT-V

COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING CERTIFICATE



This is to certify that the system/sub-system as detailed below has been successfully

commissioned and is under operational control of Client’s Production department. The minor

items, which will not affect the normal operation of the system/sub-system, are given in the attached list.


________________________________

SIGNATURE

DATE

CONTRACTOR’S COMMISSIONING:

CO-ORDINATOR

SIGNATURE

DATE

Owner/ TCE:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05


SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT SHEET: 1 OF 34

ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 The General Conditions of Contract (GCC) in Section E are supplemented / superceded (as described) by this Special Conditions of Contract which together comprise the Contract Conditions.

1.2 These Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) shall be read in conjunction with the General Conditions of Contract (GCC), Schedule of Rates, specifications of work, drawings and any other document forming part of this Contract wherever the context so requires.

1.3 It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to bring to the notice of Engineer-in-Charge any irreconcilable conflict in the Contract documents before starting the work (s) or making the supply with reference to which the conflict exists.

1.4 In the absence of any Specifications covering any material, design or work(s) the same shall be performed/ supplied/ executed in accordance with standard Engineering practice as per the instructions/directions of the Engineer-in-Charge, which will be binding on the Contractor.

2.0 SUPPLEMANTARY CLAUSES TO GCC

GCC CLAUSE

NO. SUPPLEMENT DESCRIPTION

1(13)

Clause is modified as :

“Bill of Quantities” or “Bill of Materials” means the bill of

quantities as per the provisions of the Contract

1 (24)

Clause is modified as:

“Contract” means the agreement between Owner and the

Contractor for execution of the Works and includes the Contract

Agreement, the General Conditions of Contract, the Special

Conditions of Contract, the other Bidding Documents, the

Specifications, and such further documents which are listed in the

Contract Agreement and/or these General Conditions of Contract

and includes any amendment thereto made in accordance with

the provisions hereof.

1(26)


“Contract Agreement” means the agreement entered into

between Owner and the Contractor and other annexures and

includes any amendments thereto made in accordance with the

provisions thereof.

1(29)


“Contract Price” or “Lumpsum Price” or “LSTK Price” means

the total price payable to the Contractor for performing the

Works, subject to such additions thereto and deductions

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GCC CLAUSE


therefrom as may be made under the Contract and as adjusted

by the actual quantities, if applicable, utilized in the execution of

the Works.

1 (44)


“Engineer–in-Charge” or “TCE” or “PMC” means Tata Consulting

Engineers Limited, a company incorporated under the Companies Act,

1956 with its registered office at Matulya Centre ‘A’,1st Floor, 249,

Senapati Bapat Marg, Lower Parel (West), Mumbai- 400013 and its

Corporate Office at Unit no. NB 1502 & SB 1501 15th Floor Empire

Tower, Cloud City Campus, Thane- Belapur Road, Airoli, Navi

Mumbai 400708 acting in its capacity as the Project Management

Consultant (PMC) of the Owner (which expression shall be deemed to

include the successors, and assigns of TCE).

1(84)

“Price Schedule” or “Schedule of Rates” or “Schedule of

Prices” shall mean the Price Schedule annexed to the Detailed

Letter of Acceptance which shall be derived based on the

percentage(s) quoted by bidder in its Unpriced bid for the break-

up of the Lumpsum price.

1 (102)


“Taxes” means all taxes, duties, imposts, levies and charges

pursuant to any law (whether currently in force or coming into

force on or after the date of base date as defined above),

including income tax, capital gains tax, Goods and Service

Tax(GST), customs duty, fees, cess, octroi, entry tax, fringe

benefit tax and any interest, surcharge, penalty or fine in

connection therewith.

8.1.2


Without prejudice to Clause 8.1.1 above, the Contractor agrees

that the Site will be handed over to the Contractor in stages with

a view that the Contractor shall plan the Works in a manner so as

to achieve Completion in a sequential manner, without affecting

the Time for Completion and without starting all the Works at the

same time. To this end, within 10 (ten) Working Days from the

Effective Date, the Contractor shall finalize, in agreement with

the Engineer-in-Charge, sequential requirement of the Site,

taking into account the other works concurrently being

undertaken by Owner at or about the Site or on the performance

of which depends the Contractor’s performance of the Works.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GCC CLAUSE


9.1.6

9.1.6.1 The CONTRACTOR shall within 15 days from the effective date, submit to the OWNER a detailed Bill of quantities specifying the materials, which on preliminary determination made by the CONTRACTOR, will be required to be incorporated in the permanent works in order to establish the Works/ and to operate the Plant/ (to the extent of the mandatory spares), including construction materials.

9.1.6.2 Each item entered in the Bill of Quantities shall be priced, so far as possible, in conformity with the details given in this behalf in the priced bid. The Bill of Quantities and said price break–up therein and in the price bid are intended only to form a basis for the purpose of calculating on account payments and for calculating payments due to the CONTRACTOR and for no other purpose.

9.6.3 The OWNER shall review or cause to be reviewed the prima facie adequacy, sufficiency, validity and/or suitability of the materials listed in the Bill of Quantities for the works for which they are intended, and of the prices indicated in the Bill of Quantities in respect thereof. Such review shall be performed in conjunction with the design, engineering, specification and other technical reviews to be done by the OWNER and all provisions applicable thereto with reference to critical drawings shall be applicable to the review of the Bill of Materials.

9.6.4 The priced Bill of Quantities as approved by the OWNER shall constitute the Bill of Quantities envisaged in the Contract documents. However, no such approval shall, in any manner, absolve the CONTRACTOR of his full responsibility under the Contract to sell and supply to the OWNER at and within the price of materials quoted in the Price Schedule, all materials required for the permanent incorporation in the works and which are required to establish, commission and operate (to the extent of mandatory spares) the Plant/ in accordance with the contract and the specifications, complete in all respects including spares, tools, tackles and testing equipment, so far as included within the scope of supply, whether or not any particular material is actually included within or omitted in the Bill of Quantities and whether or not the price thereof is included in the price indicated in the Bill of Materials and whether or not the price thereof is in conformity with the price thereof indicated in the Bill of Quantities. The review and approval of the Bill of Materials and the prices

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GCC CLAUSE


therein are intended only for the satisfaction of the OWNER that the priced Bill of Materials, prima-facie covers the materials required to be supplied by the CONTRACTOR within the scope of supply.

9.6.5 The Bill of Materials shall be subject to amendment in both items and prices in so far as necessary consequent upon any amendment in any relevant related technical particulars, and upon any amendment, the amended Bill of Materials as approved by the OWNER, shall thereafter constitute the Bill of Materials as envisaged in the contract documents, provided that unless the amendment results from a Change Order and/or Agreed Variation, no such amendment shall anywise impose any liability on the OWNER to pay customs and other import duties in excess of the customs and other import duties payable on the value of imported materials as indicated in the Price schedule but for such amendment.

9.2.1


The Contractor shall, within 7 (Seven) days of the Effective Date,

appoint the Contractor's Representative with the prior written

Approval of Owner (and such Approval shall not be unreasonably

withheld) and vest in him the authority to act on behalf of the

Contractor for all purposes of the Contract. If the consent is

withheld or subsequently revoked, or if the appointed person fails

to act as the Contractor's Representative, the Contractor shall

submit the name and particulars of another suitable person for

such appointment.

9.3.2


The Contractor shall complete Mobilisation in accordance with

the terms of the Contract within the Time for Mobilisation, which

is 15 (Fifteen) days from the Effective Date.

9.9.1


The Contractor shall submit a detailed Works Programme to the

Engineer-in-Charge not later than 15 (Fifteen) days from the

Effective Date. The Contractor shall also submit a revised Works

Programme whenever the Engineer-in-Charge finds that the

previous Works Programme is inconsistent with actual progress

as provided in the Specifications/ scope of Work.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GCC CLAUSE


9.13.1


The Contractor shall submit to Engineer-in-Charge a detailed list

of the Contractor's Documents to be submitted as well as a

schedule for submissions of the Contractor's Documents (taking

into account the requirement for Approval by the Engineer-in-

Charge or any third party consultant appointed by Engineer-in-

Charge) within 21 (twenty one) days from the Effective Date,

which shall be subject to Approval by Engineer-in-Charge

Engineer-in-Charge shall, within 15 (fifteen) Working Days of the date of submission of such schedule, either Approve the same or reasonably require amendments to such schedule by a written notice to the Contractor. Where Engineer-in-Charge requires amendments to be made to the submission schedule, the Contractor shall make such changes and submit a fresh schedule for submissions. If Engineer-in-Charge r does not notify its refusal to Approve such schedule within 30 (thirty) Working Days of the receipt of such schedule, then it shall be deemed to be Approved by Engineer-in-Charge. The latest revision of the Approved schedule for the submission of Contractor's Documents shall be the “Submissions Schedule” and shall form

a Contract Document.

The Contractor shall comply with the Submissions Schedule for the purposes of submissions of the Contractor's Documents and shall, in any event, ensure the submission of the Contractor's Documents in relation to any element of the Works simultaneously with the performance of that element of the Works. Failure by the Contractor to do so shall entitle Owner to reject that element of the Works and the consequences thereof shall be borne by the Contractor at its own Cost.

9.14.1 (c)


Not less than 15 (Fifteen) days before the intended date of each

Subcontractor commencing work, the Contractor shall notify the

Engineer-in-Charge of such intention.

9.19.2


As a part of the quality management system to be developed and implemented by the Contractor, the Contractor shall prepare and submit the Project Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance Plan for the Engineer-in-Charge's review, comments (if any) and approval

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GCC CLAUSE


within 10 (Ten) days after the Effective Date. The Engineer-in-Charge shall review the Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan and provide any comments to the Contractor within 7(Seven) Working Days after its receipt of such draft. Within 7 (Seven) days after its receipt of the Engineer-in-Charge’s comments, the Contractor shall implement such comments re-submit the Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan to the Engineer-in-Charge for Approval. This procedure shall be repeated until the Project Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance Plan is approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Any compliance by the Contractor with the Engineer-in-Charge's comments shall neither constitute a Variation nor entitle the Contractor to any extension of the Time for Completion or increase in the Contract Price. No proposed change to the Project Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance Plan shall be effective unless the Engineer-in-Charge approves of such proposed change. Notwithstanding any comments provided by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall remain fully responsible for the Project Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance Plan, including rectifying all defects therein.

10.6.3


Subject to Clause 24.10.2, if any alteration, amendment or

modification of the Specifications pursuant to Clause 10.6.1. shall,

in the opinion of the Contractor and/or Owner, result in an

increase, reduction or change in the Works that are covered in the

Price Schedule, which would render the Contract Price

unreasonable, Owner and the Contractor shall negotiate a suitable

increase or, as the case may be, reduction in the Contract Price. If

Owner and the Contractor fail to agree on a revised Contract

Price, the Engineer-in-Charge shall, as an interim measure,

decide on an appropriate adjustment to the Contract Price and

pending a final decision on the quantum of increase or, as the

case may be, reduction in the Contract Price under Clause 35, the

Contractor shall be bound to execute the Works on the basis of

the revised Contract Price determined by the Engineer-in-Charge.

10.6.4 (b) (iv)


if the additional altered or substituted items of Work involve the

use of any material or labour not covered in the Price Schedule,

for the purpose of determining the rates under sub-paragraph (ii)

and/or (iii) above, the prevailing market rate(s) shall be taken into

account for determining the rate(s) of such materials and/or

labour and an additional 15% (fifteen percent) shall be added to

the market rate(s) to cover the Contractor’s, supervisions,

overheads and profits, provided the cumulative amount of

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GCC CLAUSE


varaiations exceeds 25 (twenty five) % of the Contract Price.

11.4

Clause shall be read as follows:

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the

foregoing provisions of this Clause 11, the title of all

Consumables, shall only be deemed to be transferred by the

Contractor to Owner, upon Final Completion, subject to the

provisions of Clause 9.12.2.

For the purposes of the foregoing, “Consumables” shall mean and include all raw material and consumables, comprised in the Goods and Materials and Plant, including, without limitation, such as sand, bricks, stones, tiles, cement, reinforcement steel, structural steel, and civil construction materials, subject to TAX credit for such items, not being available under Applicable Laws in India.

13.2


Price Reduction due to delay in completion of Phase I and

Phase II

If the Contractor fails to complete the Works within the Time for

Completion, and/or if completion of any specific work(s) in respect of

which a separate progress schedule has been established is not achieved

by the date of completion thereof specified in the Works Completion

Schedule (each of the said date(s) is hereinafter referred to as the

“starting date for discount calculation) other than due to an event of

Force Majeure or any reason solely attributable to Owner, then the

Contract Price shall be reduced by 1 % ( one percent) per week of

delay or part thereof subject to a maximum deduction of 10% (ten

percent) of the proportionate of Contract Price for Phase I and Phase II

as applicable . After any adjustments made to the Contract Price

pursuant to this Clause 0, if any amount is due to Owner from the

Contractor, then such amount will either be set-off against any amount

due or that becomes due to the Contractor or be recovered by invoking

the Contract Performance Bank Guarantee.

The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge in regard to applicability of

price reduction shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

15.

Term “ Mechanical Completion” shall mean completion of Phase

I of the Works.

Clause 15.1 is not applicable. Please refer specifications of for

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GCC CLAUSE


Completion of Phase I of Works.

Clause 15. 9 (b) is not applicable to this Contract.

Clause 15.10 is not applicable to this Contract.

16 Clause 16 is not applicable to this Contract. Please refer

Specifications for test on Completion of Phase I and Phase II.

17.1 Clause 17.1 is replaced by clause stipulated in Specification for

Completion of Phase II of Works.

17.2 Not Applicable

20.1

Clause is modified as follows:

If the Works and the Facility, or any part thereof, fails to meet the

Guaranteed Performance Levels, then the Contractor shall pay to

Owner Performance Compensation at the rates specified in the

Contract (“Performance Compensation”). The liability of the

Contractor towards Performance Compensation under this

Clause 0 shall not exceed a sum that is greater than 100%

(hundred percent) of the Contract Price. The Parties

acknowledge that the Performance Compensation are a genuine

pre-estimate of and reasonable compensation for the losses and

damages that will be suffered by Owner in the event that the

Works, or any part thereof, fail to meet the Guaranteed

Performance Levels and the Contractor irrevocably undertakes

that it will not, whether by legal proceedings or otherwise,

contend that the amount of the Performance Compensation are

not reasonable.

21.2 Not Applicbale

22.1


All the Taxes and levies payable in India whether under Central,

State or Local laws applicable in India as well as those leviable

outside India, shall form part of the Contract Price except Goods

and Service Tax(GST). The Contractor shall bear all the Taxes,

duties, levies on the supply of Goods and Material and Plant

(including customs duties payable on imported Goods and

Materials and Plant) and on performance of the services, under

Central, State or Local laws applicable in India as well as those

leviable outside India, except Goods and Service Tax(GST).

22.2


The Contract Price comprises the base price of the Goods and

Material, Plant and services and the GST thereon and therefore

the Contractor is mandatorily required to indicate the GST in the

format prescribed under Price Schedules.

22.2 Clause is modified as under:

In respect of Goods and Material and Plant to be supplied by the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

GCC CLAUSE


Contractor from within India the DAP (INCO TERMS 2010) Site

value of such Goods and Material and Plant and the GST

leviable on the transaction between ‘Owner and Contractor’ shall

be separately indicated in the Price Schedules (as indicated in

the Price Schedule) along with the rate of Tax so applied in

computing such indirect Taxes.

22.5


Owner shall issue in accordance with relevant legislation, the

requisite Goods and Service Tax (GST) declaration forms, as

applicable to the Contractor in order to get the benefit of any

concession in the rate of Taxes , as the case may be. The

Contractor shall provide relevant statutory declaration forms to

Owner in accordance with relevant legislation, within the period

specified under the relevant GST legislation.

22.7

Fisrt para of this Clause is modified as:

The Contractor and its Subcontractor/ vendor/ original

manufacturer shall issue proper invoice, as stipulated under the

customs, Goods and Service Tax (GST) and other Applicable

Laws, and other necessary documents as may be relevant from

time to time to enable Owner or any person designated by Owner

to avail the credit of such Taxes, wherever applicable, paid by

the Contractor or any Subcontractor/ vendor/ original

manufacturer within the time period specified under the

applicable legislation in this regard.

23.1, 23.2 and 23.3

Please refer Schedule of Payment in Annexure IX of this SCC

24.5

First sentence of this clause is modified as under:

Within 7 (seven) days of receipt of the direction referred to in

Clause 24.1, the Contractor must prepare and submit to the

Engineer-in-Charge a statement setting out:

24.10.1 This clause in Not Applicable

24.10.2 This clause is Not Applicable

24.10.3 This clause is Not Applicable

24.10.5


Notwithstanding he Price Schedule and the Contract Price

mentioned in the Letter of Award, the Contractor shall only be

entitled to payment in respect of actual quantities of the Works

performed by it.

Appendix 6,7 and 8

Appendix 6, 7 and 8 is not applicable to this Contract.

3.0 Tax Indemnity

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

3.1 It shall be the duty of the CONTRACTOR to duly observe and perform all laws, rules, regulations, orders and formalities applicable to GST (IGST / CGST / SGST / UTGST) and Customs Duty on the supply including import of any material to OWNER and/or on the services performed by the CONTRACTOR pursuant hereto. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the OWNER and the PMC indemnified for and against any and all claims, demands, prosecutions, penalties, damages, demurrages and/or other levies whatsoever made or levied by the Court or Customs Authorities with respect to any alleged breach, evasion or in fraction of such duties, taxes, charges or levies or any breach or in fraction of such laws, rules, regulations, orders or formalities concerning the same and from the consequence thereof.

3.2 The award of work under the entire contract shall be on ‘Work Contract Service’ basis. The contractor shall be responsible for payment of any tax levied on the transfer of property and goods involved in the “Works contract Service‟ in accordance with relevant GST act and rules made there under including amendments, if any. The contractor shall be liable to ensure to have registered with the respective tax authorities and to submit self -attested copy of such registration certificate(s) and any taxes/ duties/ levies being charged by the Contractor would be claimed by issuing proper tax invoice/challan indicating details/ elements of all taxes charged and necessary requirements as prescribed under the respective tax laws and also to mention correct and valid registration number(s) on all tax invoices raised to Owner.

3.3 It shall be mandatory for the Contractor to get Goods and Services Tax Registration Number (GSTIN) within 1 Months from the award of Order or prior to release of any payment including advance, whichever is earlier. No payment shall be released till such time Contractor obtains the GST Number and submits the same to Owner.

3.4 The Bidders who are already registered with GST authorities shall submit copy of their registration certificate along with their unpriced Bids. In case registration certificate is not available at the time of submission of offer, an undertaking should be furnished by the bidder for submission of registration certificate in line with clause No. 3.3.

3.5 It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to submit to the concerned Indian authorities, the returns and all other concerned documents required for this purpose and to comply in all respects with the requirements of the laws in this regard, in time. In case of mismatch in the outward supplies return of contractor and inward supplies return of Owner due to any reason attributable to Contactor, the same shall be recovered from Contactor’s bills.

3.6 The Contractor would be liable to reimburse or make it good of any loss/ claim by Owner towards tax credit rejected/ disallowed by any of the tax authorities due to non-deposit or delayed deposit of taxes or non-compliance or delayed compliance of tax laws by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be liable to reimburse Owner, for all such losses and other consequences related to GST including, but not limited to the tax loss, interest and penalty.

3.7 The contractor will be under obligation for quoting/charging correct rate of tax

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

as prescribed under the respective Tax Laws. Further, the Contractor shall avail and pass on benefits of all exemptions/concessions/benefits/waiver or any other benefits of similar nature or kind available under the Tax Laws. In no case, differential Tax Claims due to wrong classification of goods and/or services or understanding of law or rules or regulations or any other reasons of similar nature shall be entertained by Owner.

3.8 The Contractor has to get registered as per tax law of the State where the work is to be executed and the Contractor will be responsible for procurement of material in its own registration (GSTIN) and also to issue its own Road Permit, E-way Bill, if applicable etc. E- way bills / Transit passes / Road Permits, if required for materials etc., brought into the project site is to be arranged by the Contractor only. Delays on account of arranging road- permits/e-way bills shall not make Contractors eligible for waiver of late delivering penalties in terms of Contract. The Contractor will be under obligation for proper utilization for the specific supply and in case of seizure of goods/ vehicle, the Contractor will be wholly responsible and indemnify Owner /PMC against any litigation cost.

3.9 It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to obtain e-way bill in case of movement of goods exceeding limit as prescribed under the GST Act. Contractor would indemnify Owner in case of any non-compliance or default or due to lack of diligence on the part of the Contractor to comply with the e-way bill requirement.

3.10 Except as herein elsewhere expressly otherwise provided, the CONTRACTOR shall be liable for and shall pay any and all Indian fees, cesses, taxes, duties and levies assessable against CONTRACTOR in respect of or pursuance to the Contract.

3.11 In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for payment of all Indian duties, levies, and taxes assessable against the CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR’s employees or Sub-contractor’s whether corporate or personal or applicable in respect of property.

3.12 The Contractor shall issue proper tax invoice, as stipulated under the customs, GST and other Applicable Laws, and other necessary documents as may be relevant from time to time to enable Owner to avail the credit of such Taxes, wherever applicable, paid by the Contractor within the time period specified under the applicable legislation in this regard

If Owner is not able to avail the credit (as indicated in the Price Schedule, unless otherwise mentioned in this Contract), partially or entirely because the Contractor issued a defective tax invoice or failed to produce the requisite documents, then the Contractor shall immediately indemnify Owner for such loss of input tax credit including interest and penalty imposed, if any, which would be otherwise available to Owner. Owner, in such case, may, in its sole discretion, decide to recover such loss by way of deduction from payment due to the Contractor or invoking the Composite Performance Bank Guarantee or any other measure available with the Owner in addition to the amount of GST, Owner shall also be entitled to recover interest at the rate

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

prescribed under GST Act and penalty, in case any penalty is imposed by the tax authorities on Owner.

3.13 The Contractor's Construction Equipment and Machinery (cranes, batching plant, etc.) which are not part of permanent incorporation in the work under this contract, any tax (if applicable) PAYABLE as per any tax legislation on such items shall be borne by Contractor. The Owner shall not be Liable for the same. Contactor shall be solely responsible to check/examine necessary Act / rules as applicable in the State where the work is to be finally executed.

3.14 Any changes in statutory rules and regulations under GST regime Shall be followed by Contractor.

3.15 The payment towards all Indian Taxes and duties (CGST/SGST/IGST) payable by the OWNER under the Contract will be paid in Indian Rupees at actuals limited to the amount indicated in their bid except for statutory variation.

3.16 The benefit of any Tax exemption, concessions, rebate or any other incentives available when the Contractor or its Subcontractors/ vendor are performing their obligations under the Contract, shall be passed on to the Owner.

3.17 In case of Price Adjustment for delay in Completion applicable appropriate Debit Note / Credit Note shall be Issued by Owner / Contract as per GST laws.

3.18 Tax element on any Debit Note / Supplementary invoice, raised by the CONTRACTOR will be reimbursed by Owner as long as the same is within the permissible time limit as per the respective taxation laws and also permissible under the Contract terms and conditions. Contractors to ensure that such debit Notes are uploaded while filing the Statutory returns as may be prescribed from time to time.

3.19 Contractor to share the monthly information with Owner which would be uploaded by the CONTRACTOR in its GSTR -1 along with the information of input tax credit to be claimed by Owner in such month.

3.20 CONTRACTOR shall be liable to comply with all the compliances as may be the rating prescribed to ensure that compliance rating is not reduced below the prescribed limit as laid down under GST Act and GST regulations. Contractor shall be required to submit a self- declaration from time to time that they are not black-listed on the GST portal. Notwithstanding anything contained in agreement, in the event of black listing of Contractor i.e. compliance rating reduced below the prescribed limit, the amount related to tax shall be paid to CONTRACTOR only on receipt of input tax credit to Owner.

4.0 INTEGRATED GOODS AND SERVICES TAX (IF APPLICABLE) FOR SUPPLIES (GOODS / SERVICES)

5.0 INTRASTATE SALES (CENTRAL GOODS AND SERVICES TAX (CGST) PLUS STATE GOODS AND SERVICES TAX (SGST) / UNION TERRITORY GOODS AND SERVICES TAX (UTGST)) FOR SUPPLIES (GOODS/SERVICES)

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

5.1 The OWNER shall pay CGST plus SGST levied on and paid by the CONTRACTOR on such indigenous supplies of goods/services by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER under the Contract. CONTRACTOR shall be obligated to issue a valid tax invoice complying with GST Invoice Rules for the supply made by him. If any error/discrepancies found in the invoice issued by contractor, it shall not be accepted by OWNER as a valid invoice and OWNER shall have the full power to send back such tax invoice for rectification to the The CONTRACTOR shall be under an obligation for the rectification of such a tax invoice. In case any error/discrepancy is found at a later date post acceptance of the invoice, owner shall have the full authority to make any loss good from any due/security available with the owner.

5.2 To enable the OWNER to avail of such creditable benefits, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER a valid tax invoice to avail of the creditable benefits with respect to GST reimbursed by the OWNER on supplies to the OWNER. GST will be reimbursed on submission of valid tax invoice by the CONTRACTOR.

5.3 The classification of goods/services as per GST Tariff should be correctly done by the CONTRACTOR to ensure that input tax benefit is not lost to the OWNER on account of any error on the part of the CONTRACTOR.

5.4 The OWNER shall not reimburse GST taxes, if the requirements as specified above are not fulfilled by the CONTRACTOR.

5.5 Any statutory increase in the amount of GST resulting from an increase in the rate of GST payable against certain supplies made to the OWNER shall be reimbursed by the OWNER at actuals. Similarly, any reduction in the amount of GST resulting from a reduction in the rate of GST or remission or exemption from GST with respect to supplies made to the OWNER shall be refundable to the OWNER at actuals with reference to the amount of GST indicated in the Bill of Materials for such materials.

5.6 CGST plus SGST/UTGST excluded by Bidder in Lumpsum price shall be paid against the CONTRACTOR‟s certified invoices for the amounts indicated in the Bill of Materials (subject to variations as elsewhere indicated)

5.7 In case Owner’s Input Tax Credit (ITC) is rejected on account of wrong levy of tax i.e. payment of Integrated Tax in place of Central Tax+ State/Union Territory Tax, the CONTRACTOR is liable to make good the loss suffered by Owner by issuance of suitable credit note to Owner. In case, contractor does not issue credit note to Owner, Owner would be constrained to recover the amount including interest payable along with Statutory levy, if any, payable on such recovery.

6.0 INPUT TAX CREDIT AND INVOICES

6.1 Tax Invoice to be submitted by the bidder in compliance with the prevailing tax laws at the time of execution / delivery.

6.2 Contactor is requested to acquaint themselves about GST Law and other tax

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

provisions / legislations before bidding. Contractor are advised to quote the rate considering "input tax credit" available to them under GST.

6.3 The credit of GST will be factored for Bid evaluation purposes by the Owner, to the extent the Owner may be eligible Contractor shall be required to issue tax invoice /debit note/ Credit invoice in accordance with GST Rules so that input credit can be availed by Owner. In the event that the Contractor fails to provide the invoice in the form and manner prescribed under the GST Act read with GST Invoicing Rules thereunder, Owner shall not be liable to make any payment on account of GST against such invoice.

6.4 The Contractor shall comply with all the provisions of the GST Act / Rules / requirements like providing of tax invoices, payment of taxes to the authorities within the due dates, filing of returns within the due dates etc. to enable Owner to take Input Tax Credit. The Contractor shall always comply with the requirements of applicable laws and provide necessary documents as prescribed under the Rules & Regulations, as applicable from time to time. In particular, if any tax credit, refund or other benefit is denied or delayed to Owner due to any non-compliance / delayed compliance by the Contractor under the Goods & Service Tax Act (such as failure to upload the details of the sale on the GSTN portal, failure to pay GST to the Government) or due to non-furnishing or furnishing of incorrect or incomplete documents by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be liable to reimburse Owner for all such losses and other consequences including, but not limited to the tax loss, interest and penalty.

6.5 Notwithstanding anything contained anywhere in the Agreement, in the event that the input tax credit of the GST charged by the Contractor is denied by the tax authorities to Owner for reasons attributable to Contractor, Owner shall be entitled to recover such amount from the Contractor by way of adjustment from the next invoice (or from any other Securities like Bank Guarantees available to Owner). In addition to the amount of GST, Owner shall also be entitled to recover interest, penalty or any other liability arising due to this on the owner

6.6 It would be the responsibility of the Contractor to declare correct information on invoice and GST portal viz. the amount, the place of supply, rate of tax etc. In case, the eligibility of input tax credit is questioned or denied to Owner on account of default by the Contractor, the same would be recovered by Owner from the Contractor;

6.7 E-way bill number should be mentioned on the invoices as applicable.

7.0 Imports (CUSTOMS DUTY, EC, Social Welfare Surcharge and IGST)

7.1 Contractor shall be responsible for payment of custom duty, EC, Social Welfare Surcharge and IGST for imports for the purpose of permanent incorporation in the works, in line with any other applicable Scheme in force for the project

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

7.2 The Contractor shall pay the Customs Duties and all other duties/taxes/cess applicable on the material imported for the purpose of permanent incorporation in the works. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for Port and Customs clearance including stevedoring, handling, unloading, loading and storage and for satisfying all Port and Customs formalities for the clearance of the goods, including preparation of the Bill(s) of Entry and other documents required for import and/or clearance of the goods. The CONTRACTOR shall also be fully responsible for any delays, penalties, demurrages, shortages and other charges and losses, if any, in this regard.

7.3 The CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with all necessary documents like Bill of lading, Bill of Entry, Invoices etc. These document should have reference that “the material imported is intended for use of “Transshipment Project”. These documents are only for Insurance purpose and shall not be linked with any milestone payment.

7.4 The CONTRACTOR shall appoint a Customs House Clearing Agent of good standing and ensure speedy customs clearance.

7.5 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to register the Import License with Customs Authorities at the Port of Import, and to answer and sort out technical queries (if any) raised by Customs Authorities in regard to any import(s).

7.6 Contractor’s Lumpsum prices shall be inclusive of Custom and Custom related duties including Basic Custom Duty, Social Welfare Surcharge, ST, GST Compensation Cess etc. as applicable.

7.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall exercise due diligence in properly classifying the Goods & Material, undertaking the payment of customs duties, IGST and/or otherwise complying with all Applicable Laws with respect to any import of the Goods & Materials. In case Owner /CONSULTANT is exposed to any penal action (interest and / or penalties) by the customs Authorities for incorrect declaration and/ or valuation of the Goods or Materials by the Contractor, or otherwise on account of any breach of Applicable Laws in the course of the import of the Goods and Materials by Contractor, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless, Owner/PMC for any and all costs, expenses or losses suffered or incurred by Owner/PMC in this regard.

7.8 As the above statutory provisions are frequently reviewed by Government of India (GOI), the CONTRACTOR is advised to check the latest position in their own interest and Owner will not bear any responsibilities for any incorrect assessment of statutory levies by the CONTRACTOR

7.9 High Sea Sales shall not be applicable for this contract/ Work

8.0 INCOME TAX

8.1 The CONTRACTOR shall be exclusively responsible and liable to pay all

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

income taxes on any payments arising out of the Contract, whether payable in India or in any other jurisdiction.

8.2 The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for ensuring compliance with all provisions of the direct tax laws of India including, but not limited to, the filing of appropriate Returns and shall promptly provide all information required by the OWNER for discharging any of its responsibilities under such laws in relation to or arising out of the CONTRACT. For the lapses, if any, on the part of the CONTRACTOR and consequential penal action taken by the Income Tax department, the OWNER shall not take any responsibility whether financial or otherwise.

8.3 The employees of such foreign companies/concerns/Joint Ventures, their SUBCONTRACTOR and assignees are also required to comply with various Direct tax laws of India, as applicable.

8.4 Withholding tax/tax deductible at source is applicable to all payments to be made to the CONTRACTOR. Withholding/deduction is required to be made at the rates specified in the Indian Income Tax Act. However, in case of non-resident contractors, lower of the rate of withholding tax as available in the relevant Double Taxation Avoidance Convention or Agreements (DTAA) as notified or amended from time to time as compared to the rate applicable as per relevant Finance Act will be applicable subject to certain specified documentary compliances. Therefore, it is incumbent upon the Contractor to decide and declare whether it intends to take benefits of lower rate of Withholding Tax and commit to provide necessary documents. As per extant provisions of Income Tax Act and Rules made there under following documents are mandatory for this purpose (a)Tax Residency Certificate (TRC) issued by the competent authority of the country of residence of the Contractor (b) Form 10F as described in Income Tax Rules, 1962 and (c) A declaration in specified format in lieu of Permanent Account Number (PAN).

8.5 The Indian Income Tax Act and rules made there under contains provisions permitting deduction of tax at a lesser rate if the CONTRACTOR is able to justify to the Income Tax Authorities such lesser rate of deduction. However, a deduction once made has to be deposited by the OWNER with the Income Tax Authorities in India and will not be adjustable by the OWNER. It is therefore in the interest of the CONTRACTOR that prior to release of any payment due to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract that the CONTRACTOR obtains, from the relevant Income Tax Authorities in India, a certificate specifying the rate of deduction/withholding of Income tax at source, failing which, payment to the CONTRACTOR shall be made by the OWNER after Withholding/deduction at the highest rate as may be applicable to the non-resident contractors as per Provisions of Income Tax Act, 1961.

9.0 TAX DEDUCTION AT SOURCE (TDS), IF APPLICABLE

9.1 At present, no GST-TDS is applicable. If the same is applicable in future, the CONTRACTOR shall be exclusively responsible and liable to deduct TDS, if applicable, from the subcontractors / sub-vendors and remit the same to the

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Govt. within the due date, as per GST legislation(s).

9.2 Deduction towards Tax on works contract according to provisions of GST Laws shall be made from Contractor’s bill at rate(s) notified from time to time. A certificate for tax deducted at source by OWNER shall be provided to Contractor in accordance with applicable GST laws.

10.0 PERSONNEL TAXES

10.1 The CONTRACTOR shall bear all personnel taxes levied or imposed on its personnel, SUB- CONTRACTOR’ s personnel, vendors, consultants etc. on account of payment received under this CONTRACT. Contactor shall also bear, within the quoted rates, the Corporate Tax, as applicable, on the income arising out of this contract.

11.0 BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION WORKERS WELFARE CESS

11.1 BOCW is not applicable. However, in case BOCW become applicable later on, the same will be paid extra at actual against the documentary proof of submission of BOCW to relevant tax authority.

11.2 Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner shall not bear any liability in respect of:

11.2.1 Personal taxes on the personnel deployed by the Contractors, his sub-contractors and Agents, etc.

11.2.2 The Corporate Taxes in respect of Contractor and his Sub-contractors and other Agents, Indian or foreign based.

12.0 SEIGNIORAGE FEE & CESSES FOR CIVIL WORKS (If applicable )

12.1 If applicable in the state of Assam, whoever have entered into an agreement for a particular civil work and the quantities of minor minerals consumed/used in the work, should be informed to the Assistant Director of Mines and Geology.

12.2 The contractor will also be required to furnish to Engineer-in-Charge ‘MINERAL REVENUE CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE’ from the Deptt. Of Mines and Geology, wherever applicable, along with their bills for deduction of normal seigniorage fee on supply of minor materials to OWNER, as per the guidelines of the statutory body (If Seigniorage Fee shall be as applicable and in force in the state of Assam). Non-submission of the said certificate shall lead to deduction of 6 times the normal seigniorage fee/non-processing of the bill

13.0 BILLING OF WORKS EXECUTED

13.1 The Contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma in quadruplicate to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge of the work giving abstract and detailed measurement for the various items executed during a month, before the expiry of

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

the first week of the succeeding month. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall take or cause to be taken the requisite measurements for the purpose of having the bill verified and/or checked before forwarding the same to the disbursement office of the Owner for further action in terms of the Contract and payment thereafter. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall verify the bills within 7 days of submission of the Bill by the Contractor.

14.0 TECHNICAL LOADING OF OFFERS

14.1 Technical loading of offers shall be as per Section D of this ENQUIRY document

15.0 COORDINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES

15.1 Work shall be carried out in such a manner that the work of other agencies operating at the site is not hampered due to any action of the CONTRACTOR. Proper coordination with other agencies will be responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. In case of any dispute, the decision of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ATTACHMENT-I

VENDOR DOCUMENT REVIEW STATUS CODES FORMAT FOR STAMP AND STICKER

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ATTACHMENT - III

PROFORMA FOR CONTRACT AGREEMENT

(To be executed on non judicial stamp paper of appropriate value)

This Agreement made the ----- day of ------------ Between between Assam

Petrochemicals Ltd, a company registered under companies Act,1956 having its

registered office at Orion Place ,G.S.Road, Guwahati (hereinafter called

“Owner/APL”, which expression unless excluded by or repugnant to the context

include its successors and permitted assign ) of the one part,

AND

------------------------------ having its registered office at ------------------------------------------

------- and having its Corporate office at -----------------------------------------------------------

(hereinafter called “CONTRACTOR” which expression unless excluded by or

repugnant to the context include its successors and permitted assign ) of the other

part .

RECITALS

WHEREAS:

1. The Owner being desirous of having provided and executed works mentioned,

enumerated or referred to in the tender documents (Volume I, VolumeII and

Volume III) including and not limited to General Conditions of Contract, Special

Conditions of Contracts, Specifications, Drawings, Plans, Time Schedule for

Completion of jobs, Agreed Deviations, other documents, has called for Tender.

2. The contractor has inspected the site and surroundings of the works specified in

the tender documents and has satisfied himself by careful examination before

submitting his tender as to the nature of the surface strata, soil, sub-soil and

ground, the form and nature of site and local conditions, the quantities, nature

and magnitude of the work, the availability of labour and material necessary for

the execution of work, the means of access to site, the supply of power and

water thereto and the accommodation he may require and has made local and

independent enquiries and obtained complete information as to the matters and

things referred to, or implied in the tender documents or having any connection

therewith and has considered the nature and extent of all probable and possible

situations, delays, hindrances, or interferences to or with the execution and

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

completion of the work to be carried out under the Contract and has examined

and considered all other matters, conditions and things and probable and

possible contingencies and generally all matters incidental thereto and ancillary

and thereof effecting the execution and completion of the work and which might

have influenced him in making his tender.

3. The Contractor has represented that it has experience, expertise, capability and

knowhow to ensure that the Road and Drain Facility Works are executed and

completed in accordance with the provisions of the Contract and in a safe and

environmentally responsible manner;

4. Solely relying upon the representation in Recital 2 above, the Owner agrees to

appoint the Contractor to execute the Works and the Contractor agrees to carry

out and complete the Works within the Time for Completion and undertakes to

remedy any defects therein, in accordance with the terms and conditions

contained in this Contract; and

5. The terms of and Conditions of the Contract have been fully negotiated and

agreed upon between the Owner and the Contractor as parties of competent

capacity and equal understanding.

THEREFORE IT IS AGREED as follows;

a. Capitalized words and expressions contained in this Contract Agreement

shall have the meanings assigned them in Conditions of the Contract.

b. The Owner hereby covenants to pay the Contractor, in consideration of the

execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein,

the Contract Price of Rs (YYYYYYY) [insert numbers and in words] at the

times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.

c. In considerations of the payments to be made by Owner to the Contractor

under the Contract, the Contractor shall execute and complete the Works

within the Time of Completion and discharge all other obligations on its part

specified in, or to be inferred from, and in all respects in accordance with the

Contract.

d. The following documents shall be deemed to be a part of and comprise the

Contract:

the Contract Agreement;

the Letter of Acceptance;

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Special Conditions of Contract

General conditions of Contract

the Specification;

the Drawings;

the Schedules and any other documents forming part of the Contract.

This Contract will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of

India. Each Party hereby submits to the jurisdiction as set out in Disputes Resolution

Procedure in the Conditions of the Contract.

IN WITNESS whereof this Contract has been executed and delivered as an

agreement by the Parties the day and year first before written and in accordance with

laws of India.

Signed By:____________________

Place:__________________

For and on behalf of “the Owner” in the

presence of

Witness:

Name:____________________

Address:__________________

Date:________________________

Signed By:____________________

Place:___________________

For and on behalf of “the

CONTRACTOR” in the presence of

Witness:

Name:_______________________

Address:_____________________

Date:________________________

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ATTACHMENT - V

NO DEMAND CERTIFICATE

(On contractor letter head)

1. NAME OF WORK : _______________________________________

2. NAME OF CONTRACTOR : _______________________________________

3. DATE OF AWARD : _______________________________________

4. TIME ALLOWED FOR COMPLETION: ________________________________

5. SCHEDULE DATE OF COMPLETION AS PER AGREEMENT: ______________

6. ACTUAL DATE OF COMPLETION: ___________________________________

CERTIFICATE THAT

1. The recoveries in respect of material issued to the contractor have been made from RA bills. Balance if any is to be recovered from final bill as per the statement enclosed.

2. Recovery on account of Water or Electricity are to be made by OWNER.

3. The contractor has made payment to the labour engaged by him and no complaint has since been received from any of the labour employed by the contractor in the performance of the above work. A certificate from sub-contractor to this effect is enclosed.

4. Work has been completed satisfactorily and is according to the specifications laid down in the contract.

5. None of the heavy equipment were given to the contractor on hire basis and nothing is recoverable on this account or recoveries in respect of hire charges of heavy equipment have been made from RA bill. Balance if any is to be recovered from Final bill as per statement enclosed.

6. Labour hutment has been/has not removed by the sub-contractor and ground rent is to be recovered as per statement enclosed.

7. The work has been completed within the schedule period. OR

The completion of the work has been delayed by _______months/days and as such the recovery of liquidated damages to the extent of INR.______________________(Rupees __________________may be made .

Extension for ______months/days has been granted by the competent authority vide letter No. ________________ dtd. ________________.

8. The requisite obligations as per contract have been fulfilled by the contractor.

ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE ____________________

RCM / CHIEF PROJECT MANAGER ____________________ ACCOUNTS ____________________

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

DATE ____________________

ATTACHMENT - VI

NO DUE CERTIFICATE

(On Contractors Letterhead)

NAME OF CONTRACTOR: M/S___________________________________________ DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ____________________________________________ WORK ORDER NO. & DATE: ____________________________________________ ACTUAL DATE OF COMPLETION OF JOB: _________________________________

We certify that we have fully paid and satisfied all claims for the work relating to labors, materials supplied equipment and any other entitlement whatever touching or affecting the contract. We undertake to indemnify and keep indemnified the owner from and against all claims, demands, debts, lines obligations and liabilities whatever arising there from or relating thereto.

_________________________

SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR

NAME: _____________________

ADDRESS: _____________________

_____________________

_____________________ DATE:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ATTACHMENT - VII

SITE CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE

(On Contractors Letterhead) NAME OF CLIENT : NAME OF CONSULTANT : NAME OF CONTRACTOR : P.O. NO. AND DATE : NAME OF WORK : COMPLETION TIME OF JOB WE HERE BY CERTIFY THAT ALL YOUR MATERIAL, EQUIPMENTS, SITE OFFICE ETC.

HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE _____________________ SITE. WE HAVE CLEARED

THE SITE IN ALL RESPECT AND HANDED IT OVER TO OWNER.

_____________________________


NAME:

ADDRESS:

DATE:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ATTACHMENT - VIII

LABOUR LIABILITY CERTIFICATE

(on Contractors Letterhead) NAME OF CLIENT : NAME OF CONSULTANT : NAME OF CONTRACTOR : P.O. NO. AND DATE : NAME OF WORK : COMPLETION DATE OF JOB : WE HERE BY CERTIFY THAT ALL OUR LIABILITIES TOWARDS OUR DEPLOYED

LABOUR HAVE BEEN CLEARED BY US AND WE KEEP M/s ASSAM PETROCHEMICAL

LTD. & CONSULTANT ______________________________ INDEMNIFIED AGAINST

ABOVE LIABILITIES.

_____________________________


NAME:

ADDRESS:

DATE:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ATTACHMENT - IX

SCHEDULE OF PAYMENT

1.0 TERMS OF PAYMENT

The billing of the entire price of materials and price of services shall be done from and to a single point only.

2.0 MOBILISATION ADVANCE

If requested, the Contractor shall be paid recoverable interest bearing Mobilisation Advance equivalent to 10% (Ten percent) of the Lumpsum Contract Price in the currency of quotation. GST as applicable on mobilisation advance shall be borne by the bidder. Mobilization Advance shall be paid to the Contractor in two equal installments after signing the contract agreement in the following manner.

2.1

FIRST INSTALLMENT 5% (five percent) of Lumpsum Contract Price shall be payable as the first

instalment of mobilization advance after fulfilling the following formalities by the Contractor:

a) Signing of the formal Contract between the OWNER and the

CONTRACTOR and completion of kick off meeting.

b) Submission of Bank Guarantee(s) equivalent to 110% (One Hundred Ten percent) of advance i.e. 11% (Eleven percent) of Lumpsum Contract Price of the said advance(s), valid for 3 (Three) months beyond scheduled date of Completion of the Works, from a Scheduled Bank (other than co-operative banks) in India recognised by RBI (including the Indian Branch of a Foreign Bank which is recognised as a Scheduled Bank (other than co-operative banks) by the Reserve Bank of India) and in a format acceptable to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall at the request of the OWNER suitably extend the validity of the Bank Guarantee (s) for such period or periods as may be required failing which, without prejudice to any other right or remedy available to the OWNER, the OWNER shall be entitled to encash the Bank Guarantee (s). However, Contractor may submit Bank Guarantee of 11% (Eleven percent) as above in two stages of 5.5% each for availing advance against sub-clause 2.2 below.

c) Submission of Bank Guarantee(s) by way of CPBG as stipulated in Clause 9.4.2 of the GCC. The CONTRACTOR shall at the

request of the OWNER extend the validity of the Bank Guarantee(s), where it is necessary to do so for the interest of the Project, for such further period or periods as may be required failing which, without prejudice to any other right or remedy available to the OWNER, the OWNER shall be entitled to encash the Bank Guarantee(s).

2.2

SECOND INSTALLMENT Balance 5% (five percent) Mobilisation Advance shall be payable to the Contractor after Contractor has constructed site Office, storage shed, fabrication yard etc. and has physically mobilized equipment and is ready to start the work to the entire satisfaction of PMC and commencement of work at

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

site and on submission of Bank Guarantees equivalent to 110% (One Hundred Ten percent) of advance i.e. 5.5% of the Lumpsum Contract Price.

2.3

The advance paid to the CONTRACTOR shall be used only for execution of this Contract and the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER/PMC in this regard whenever required. If it is found that the said advance has been utilised by the CONTRACTOR in whole or part for any other purpose, the OWNER may at its discretion forthwith recall the entire advance and without prejudice to any other right or remedy available to the OWNER, recover the same by recourse to any Bank Guarantee(s).

2.4

The Indian Rupee advance(s) shall carry simple interest @SBI PLR + 1% (one percent) per annum (as On the date of payment of mobilization advance) calculated on the reducing unadjusted balance(s) of the Indian Rupee advance(s) and the advance(s) shall, without prejudice to any other mode of recovery available to the OWNER, be recovered from the Running Account Bills and Final Bill of the CONTRACTOR @ 10% (Ten percent) of the Certified Bill amount. The interest accrued thereon shall be additionally

deducted from the amount payable.

2.5

All recoveries against advances shall first be apportioned to interest (along with GST applicable on Interest) and then to principal. At the

request of the CONTRACTOR, the PMC shall certify the mobilization advance repaid and the Bank Guarantee, issued on behalf of the CONTARCTOR to secure the mobilization advance, shall be allowed to be reduced by the amount and the currency of the repayment certified. Such reduction shall be allowed not more than 06 (six) occasions during the validity of Bank Guarantee.

3.0 ON ACCOUNT PAYMENTS

The CONTRACTOR, if so required, shall submit further breakup for various activities through a billing schedule for Design and Engineering, Procurement and Supplies and Construction which will be reviewed and approved by Engineer In-charge within 30 (thirty) days of submission of complete correct document in this regard by CONTRACTOR. For the purpose of billing for each discipline under Construction, further break up such as Civil and Structural,. shall be made which will be reviewed and approved by PMC. The CONTRACTOR shall be paid monthly running account bills at stages of completion of individual item/work, based on the value assessment by PMC in the following manner after deductions of necessary dues payable by CONTRACTOR to the OWNER in accordance with various provisions made elsewhere in this document. At any given point of time, the cumulative percent payment made shall not exceed the cumulative percent of actual physical progress of the PLANT. Subject to the other provisions of the Contract documents, on account payments shall be made as follows:

3.0 PHASE I of Works

3.1 DESIGN & ENGINEERING SERVICES

i) 44% (Forty Four percent) After completion of design of roads and temporary drains, permanent storm water drains, pipe culverts, box culvers, trenches with precast covers etc. in accordance with phase-1 scope and submittion of design calculations along with approval purpose drawings, including marking of all underground road crossings and after obtaining approval under code-1

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ii) 44% (Forty Four percent) After issuing good for construction

drawings at site for roads and drains

iii) 4% (four Percent) After issuing as built drawings

iv) 4% (four percent) After completion of construction of road upto and

including WBM till first 2000m length

v) 4% (four percent) After completion of construction of road upto and

including WBM from next 2000m onwards till complete length

3.2 Construction including supply and transportation

i) 80% (Eighty Percent) After completion of all layers below WBM/DLC, including laying of all underground road crossings as per scope and tender specifications, in accordance to priority stipulated in scope of enquiry (Section A). The breakup of 80% shall be as given below: a) 20% (Twenty Percent) on completion of 1000m length of road. b) 20% (Twenty Percent) on completion of next 750m length of road beyond 1000m length already completed. c) 20% (Twenty Percent) on completion of next 750m length of road beyond 1750m length already completed. d) 20% (Twenty Percent) on completion of balance length of road beyond 2500m length already completed.

ii) 10% (Ten Percent) After completion WBM layer, as per scope and tender specifications, in accordance to priority stipulated in scope of enquiry (Section A).

iii) 10% (Ten Percent) After completion of all road and drain construction activity as per scope and tender specifications and handing over the site to OWNER after phase-2

4. Phase 2 of Work

4.1 Design Engineering Services

i) 80% (Eighty Percent) on completion of residual engineering for roads and drains, pipe culverts, box culvers etc. and submittion of design calculations along with approval purpose drawing, including marking of all additional underground road crossings if any and after obtaining approval under code-1

ii) 5% (Five percent) After issuing good for construction drawings at site for road and drains.

iii) 5% (Five percent) After issuing as built drawings and after completion of As built Drawings

iv) 10% (Ten percent) After completion of all road and drain construction activity as per scope and tender specifications and handing over the site to OWNER after phase-2,

4.2 Construction including supply and transportation

i) 30% (Thirty percent) after rectifying the defects/damages of the roads, makring it to correct levels and alignments, including

compaction, completing all bitumen layers, including top coats/finishing coats/seal coat , construction of shoulders, kerbs, providing drainpipes for roads and connecting the same to nearest

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

storm water drain, including painting of kerb walls and Road marking etc. as per scope and tender specifications, in accordance to priority stipulated in scope of enquiry (Section A), for the roads which are constructed up to WBM under phase-1 work. The breakup of 20% is given below: a) 7.5% on completion of 1000m length of road. b) 7.5% on completion of next 750m length of road beyond 1000m length already completed. c) 7.5% on completion of next 750m length of road beyond 1750m length already completed. d) 7.5% on completion of balance length of road beyond 2500m length already completed.

ii) 30% (Thirty percent) After completion of concrete road/pavement including providing HDPE sheeting, DLC (Dry lean concrete layer), till top of concrete pavement, including providing expansion/contraction joints, including laying all underground road crossings as a part of residual engineering, construction of shoulders, kerbs, providing underground road crossings/trenches/RCC culverts/drains etc., including painting of road and kerb walls etc all complete in accordance to the scope of enquiry and tender specifications.

iii) 30% (Thirty percent) After completion of construction of storm water drain including all related works, road crossing, culverts, providing covers to drains wherever applicable etc. complete as per scope and specifications.

iv) 10% After completion of all work including residual engineering and construction activities in accordance to the scope of enquiry (Section A). and tender specifications and handing over the site to OWNER after phase-2,

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ATTACHMENT - X

PREAMBLE TO PRICE BREAKUP FORMAT AND PRICE BREAKUP FORMAT

FOR LSTK WORKS

Notes: Guidelines to fill the LSTK Price Breakup Format

1. Bidders shall provide percentage breakup of the lumpsum price quoted for

schedule 1 in the priced bid for the items 1a and 1b.

A) Lumpsum price shall be deemed to be inclusive of the cost of any other

supplies / work(s) / Services not specifically mentioned in the Bidding

Document but are essentially required for the efficient operation of the

Works, irrespective of whether the unspecified supplies / work(s) /

services are specifically mentioned in the LSTK price breakup or not.

B) The Price for Design and Detailed Engineering Component quoted in

1a shall not exceed 3% (Three Percent) and in 1b shall not exceed

2% (two percent) of the Total Lumpsum Price quoted by the bidder.

C) The Total Price of Contruction, excavation including supply and

transportation Component quoted in 1a and Scope of works in Phase 1

quoted in 1a shall not exceed 40% (Forty Percent) and scope of work

in phase 2 and in 1b shall not exceed 55% (Fifty five percent) of the

Total Lumpsum Price quoted by the bidder of the Total Lumpsum Price

quoted in price bid by the bidder.

D) In case the prices are beyond the limits mentioned under Sl. Nos. B

and C above, then such additional amount shall be raised by

Contractor in the final bill and shall be paid to the Contractor in the final

bill / invoice only.

Further percentage break-up for the sub-items of. 1a and 1b shall be

provided and the total sum of all the items (1a+1b) and the sub-items of

1a,1b and 1c shall be 100%

Bidder can provide the percentage break-up in decimal, up to a

maximum decimal place to 3 digits

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

LUMPSUM PRICE FOR LSTK CONTRACT FOR ROAD AND STORM WATER

DRAIN WORKS AS PER SCOPE OF WORK DETAILED IN SECTION A OF THE

DOCUMENT

SCHEDULE 1

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION

%age

breakup

of

lumpsum

price

IGST CGST SGST

1a PHASE I of Scope of works

i.

Design engineering & detailing including

issuing IFC drawings, preparing design

reports etc. complete till issuance of IFC

drawings in accordance to the scope of

enquiry.

ii.

Excavation, dewatering, providing any soil

improvement is required, compacting sub-

grade, preparing sub-grade, including filling

of material, soling etc. complete in

accordance to the scope of enquiry.

iii.

Supply and construction of sub-base of

designed thickness including all layers of

sub-base and filter material, including laying

all road crossings in accordance to the

scope of enquiry.

iv.

Supply and construction of WBM, including

providing temporary drains along the length

of the roads etc. in accordance to the scope

of enquiry.

1b PHASE II OF Work

i.

Residual design engineering & detailing

including issuing IFC drawings and

preparing design reports etc. complete till

issuance of IFC drawings

ii.

Supply and construction of bituminous roads

after rectifying the defects/damages of the

roads, makring it to correct levels and

alignments, including compaction,

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

completing all bitumen layers, including top

coats/finishing coats/seal coat , construction

of shoulders, kerbs, providing drainpipes for

roads and connecting the same to nearest

storm water drain, including painting of kerb

walls and Road marking etc as per scope

and tender specifications, in accordance to

priority stipulated in scope of enquiry

(Section A), for the roads which are

constructed up to WBM under phase-1

work.

iii.

Supply and construction of concrete

pavement for area demarcated in plot plan

and as per scope, including providing HDPE

sheeting, providing DLC layer,

expansion/contraction joints, dowel/tie bars,

sealant, fillers, construction of shoulders,

kerbs, including painting of kerb walls, for

road marking etc all complete in accordance

to the scope of enquiry and tender

specifications.etc.

iv.

Supply and construction of storm water

drains including excavation, dewatering,

backfilling, providing reinforced concrete,

providing, precast covers, box culverts etc.

wherever required as per specifications,

providing corner angles etc all complete as

per specifications.

Total of the above (1a+1b) 100%

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-05



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ATTACHMENT – XI

Sl No

ITEM DESCRIPTION Unit Quantity

PRICE (IN INR)

IN FIG IN

WORDS

1

LUMPSUM PRICE FOR LSTK CONTRACT

FOR ROAD AND STORM WATER DRAIN

WORKS AS PER SCOPE OF WORK

DETAILED IN SECTION A OF THE

DOCUMENT.

LS 1 QUOTED/ NOT QUOTED

QUOTED/NOT QUOTED

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06


INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER

(To be furnished by the bidder) SHEET 1 OF 15 OF 4


R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form B

Applicant:

COMPANY DETAILS ________________________________________________________________________

1. Firms are required to attach a copy of Articles of Association.

2. Firms are required to indicate main lines of Business, as indicated below (1) Since (2) Since (3) Since (4) Since (5) Since (6) Since (7) Since (8) Since (9) Since (10) Since

3. Type of Organization of Applicant ____________________________________________________________

4. Establishment Year and Country of Incorporation (Copy of Notarial Act to be attached) ____________________________________________________________

5. Local Office (India) Address: ____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Tel. No: ________________ Telex No. ______________________

Fax. No. :________________

6. Head office

Address: ____________________________________________________________

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06





R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

____________________________________________________________

Tel. No: ________________ Telex No._____________________

Fax. No. :________________

7. If the applicant is a subsidiary of or linked with any other company: 1) Describe the relationship with the associate or holding company 2) Identify common directorships 3) Identify the legal limits of liability of the company 4) Provide an organization chart(s) showing the Company or Group structure

8. List by name the owner and all executive directors of the company; include nationality, responsibility area, years of experience, years with the company.

Attach additional pages as necessary for identifying each appropriately.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06





R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form D

Applicant:

FINANCIAL STATUS: ANNUAL STATEMENT

1. Audited Financial Statements

Single companies and each member of the Joint venture are required to submit audited

financial statements for the last three years.

2. Submission of this Form by all Participants duly completed is mandatory. Noncompliance will result in Disqualification.

3. Summary of Assets and Liabilities

A summary of assets and liabilities derived from the audited financial statements and

converted to Indian Rupees (Rs) as shown in the following:

Financial Standing Rs

Year 2016-17

Rs

Year 2017-18

Rs

Year 2018-19

Currency Conversion

Rate

Date of Currency

Conversion

a. Current Assets

b. Fixed Assets

c. Other Assets

d. Short-term debts

e. Long-term debts

f. Net worth

g. Working capital

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06





R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

4. The annual value of works undertaken for each of the above mentioned years is shown in the following:

Category of

Work

Amount (Rs. Lakh)

Year 2016-17 Year 2017-18 Year 2018-19

Currency Conversion Rate

Date of Currency Conversion 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

(Signed and Stamped,

Authorized representative of applicant)

__________________

Date:

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06





R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Qualification Requirement Form D (Contd)

Applicant:

FINANCIAL STATUS: CREDIT FACILITIES

Banking details of applicant and Bank reference.

1. Please provide the name and address of the established Bank or financial institution that is providing your credit line:

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

2. Total amount and type of credit line. This must be stated in a clear and unequivocal terms on regular Bank letterhead and signed by own authorized representative of the Bank.

3. Each applicant shall provide a reference signed by an authorized representative of an established Bank.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06





R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form E

Applicant:

MANPOWER

List by category, the total number of employees of the company and the employees resident in

India. List by name and complete the biodata as required, including English language

capabilities of the personnel with relevant experience, detailed CV’s of available personnel are

to be included in Form J:

1. Total number of currently employed personnel

Category Total Employees

Executive Directors

General Management

Administrative

Technical/Management

Permanent v/s Contract

Contracts Management

Semi-skilled/ Skilled Personnel (Civil, M &E)

Site Agent

Site Supervisory staff

(Civil, M & E)

Permanently Established Groups

(e.g. Process / Plant design etc.)

Others

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06





R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

2. Available personnel with relevant experience for this project

Category Name Qualification Years with

Company

Relevant

experience

Including contract

values

Executive Directors

General

Management

Administrative

Technical /

Management

Permanent

Employee

Contract Employee

Contracts

Management

Semi-skilled / Skilled personnel (Civil, M&E)

Site Agent

Site supervisory

staff (Civil, M&E)

Permanently

Established

Groups (eg.

Process/ Plant

Design etc.)

Others

Attach additional pages as necessary identifying each appropriately.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06





R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form G

Applicant :

EXPERIENCE RECORD: SIMILAR TYPE OF WORKS AS COVERED IN SCOPE OF WORKS.

Country

/

Location

Name of

Project /

Employer

Project

Details

Value

in

Crore

Rs.

Percentage

Participation

of Company

in Project

Completed

Contract

Period

at

Award

Start

Date

Comple

-tion

Date

Supervising

/ Consulting

Firm

Attach additional pages as necessary identify each appropriately

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06





R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form H

Applicant :

EXPERIENCE RECORD: PROJECTS COMPLETED - “SIMILAR TYPE OF WORKS AS COVERED IN SCOPE OF

WORKS” IN THE LAST 5 YEARS

Country /

Location

Name of

Project /

Employer

Project

Details

Value

in

Crore

Rs.

Percentage

Participation

of Company

in Project

Completed

Contract

Period

at award

Start

Date

Comple

tion

Date

Design \

Supervising

Firm

1. India a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06



(To be furnished by the bidder)

SHEET 10 OF

15 OF 4


R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Country /

Location

Name of

Project /

Employer

Project

Details

Value

in

Crore

Rs.

Percentage

Participation

of Company

in Project

Completed

Contract

Period

at award

Start

Date

Comple

tion

Date

Design \

Supervising

Firm

2. Other

Countri

es

a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

Attach additional pages as necessary identify each appropriately

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06




SHEET 11 OF

15 OF 4


R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form J

Applicant :

KEY PERSONNEL (Proposed for this Project)

The technical qualification and experience of key staff will form an important part of the

evaluation process. A CV should be attached for each of the staff categories.

The resume for each key person available to be assigned to the project should indicate the

following information. The key personnel shall be associated with this project for the entire

project duration. In case, replacement of key personnel is required, the key person of equivalent

capacity shall be made available with prior approval of Owner.

a. Proposed position : ____________________________________________________

b. Name : ____________________________________________________

c. Date of Birth : ____________________________________________________

d. Nationality : ____________________________________________________

e. Education : ____________________________________________________

(Enclose photocopy of diploma/certification)

f. Language capability: __________________________________________________

g. Years of experience:____________________________________________________

(State speciality)

h. Countries where : ____________________________________________________

Experience obtained

i. Relevant experience: ___________________________________________________

(State value of projects in Indian Rs., duration of works and position(s) held)

j. Employment history : __________________________________________________

(State year, company, position held, works description and responsibilities)

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06




SHEET 12 OF

15 OF 4


R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form K

PROJECT EXECUTION PLAN (PEP)

The applicant is required to furnish Project Execution Plan (PEP) in the following format. A brief

but clear PEP is required describing planning and programming of the works.

a. Project Strategy: Outline statement of the organisation and methods to be employed by the applicant to undertake the work.

b. Organization chart : Preliminary organization chart indicating relationship between the head / branch office, different departments/companies which are assigned specific areas of responsibility, the site management, the on site direct works operations, suppliers and the supervising PMC/Consulting Engineer.

c. Responsibilities of Key Personnel: Identify all key personnel with management responsibilities by activity or section of work.

d. Management System: Outline the management techniques used to identify, evaluate and control the technical elements and schedule of the work.

e. Quality Management System: Provide a description of the Quality Assurance/Quality Control System; Organization and Procedures in use and identify the accreditation authority.

f. Project Safety Plan: Provide a statement outlining the Health and Safety plan operated by the company.

g. Contractor shall indicate any permanently established groups within the organization which would provide specific functions in the execution of the contract.

h. Program/Bar chart showing major activities.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06




SHEET 13 OF

15 OF 4


R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form L

Applicant :

EQUIPMENT & PLANT (Owned and Proposed for this Project)

Description Quantity

(Actual)

Capacity or

Output

Make and

Model

Year of

Manufacture

Owned

or

Leased

Present

Location

1. List of principal Plant / Equipment owned by the contractor

a) Tower Cranes

b) Cranes (Mobile),

c) Trucks,

d) Concrete Mixers,

e) Batching Plants,

f) Pumps,

g) Other (applicant to list)

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06




SHEET 14 OF

15 OF 4


R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Description Quantity

(Actual)

Capacity or

Output

Make and

Model

Year of

Manufacture

Owned

or

Leased

Present

Location

2. List of Plant / equipment (owned, Leased, hired) which contractor considers necessary for this contract

a)

b)

c)

d)

e)

f)

Note: Attach copies of form as necessary

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-06




SHEET 15 OF

15 OF 4


R6.docx

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

R6.docx

ISSUE

R0

Bidders Information Form N

Applicant :

ADDITONAL INFORMATION

The applicant is invited to include any other information that may further demonstrate his competence to perform the said project works.

DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-07


PROFORMA DOCUMENTS/SAMPLE FORMS SHEET 1 OF 4

ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

PROFORMA FOR BID SUBMISSION LETTER

Contractor’s Ref.: _______________________

Date: ______________________

TO, The General Manager (Project), Project Department, Assam Petrochemicals Limited, Namrup, P.O. Parbatpur, Dist- Dibrugarh, Pin -786623, Assam, India. Contact Person: Mr. Atul Barman Tel. No.: 0374-2500331 Fax. No.: 0374-2500231 Email: [email protected]

Copy to: Mr. Sandip De Email: [email protected]

Sub: Enquiry No - TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005 - Tender for Road and Storm Water Drain

Works

Dear Sir,

With reference to the above invitation by APL we have examined the ITB and related annexure for the above WORK downloaded from your website. We hereby offer to provide the services in conformity with the said ITB conditions and related annexure as per terms and conditions specified in the BID DOCUMENT.

We undertake to carry out the work as per the time schedule in the ITB.

We understand that APL is not bound to accept the lowest of the BIDs received and may reject all or any BID without assigning any reason thereof.

We hereby agree that unless and until a formal agreement is prepared and executed in accordance with the conditions of CONTRACT, this ITB together with your written letter of acceptance thereof (i.e. LETTER OF INTENT) in case our bid is accepted shall constitute a binding CONTRACT between us.

Yours faithfully,

Signature:

Name:

Company’s name:

Address:

Dated:

Name of Directors/partners of the Company

(1) ..................................................... (2) ........................................................ (3)



DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-07



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

PROFORMA OF LETTER OF AUTHORITY FOR ATTENDING PRE-BID MEETING

Bidder’s Ref ............................... Date: TO,

The General Manager (Project), Project Department, Assam Petrochemicals Limited, Namrup, P.O. Parbatpur, Dist- Dibrugarh, Pin -786623, Assam, India. Contact Person: Mr. Atul Barman Tel. No.: 0374-2500331 Fax. No.: 0374-2500231 Email: [email protected]


Dear Sir, We........................................hereby authorise the following representative(s) to attend the Pre-bid Meeting against your ENQUIRY No. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005 - Tender for Road and Storm Water Drain Works 1. Name & Designation & Mobile no. .....................................Signature............................ 2. Name & Designation & Mobile no. .....................................Signature............................ We confirm that we shall be bound by all and whatsoever our representative (s) shall commit. Yours faithfully,

Signature....................................................

Name & Designation....................................

For & on behalf of........................................

NOTE:

I. This Letter of Authority should be on the letterhead of the bidder and should be signed by a person competent and having the power of attorney to bind the bidder.

II. You must send this letter 48 hrs in advance to scheduled Pre-Bid Meeting as mentioned in the ENQUIRY. Non submission of this letter in stipulated time period will be considered as not willing to attend the Pre-Bid Meeting.

PRE-BID MEETING VENUE: ASSAM PETROCHEMICAL LIMITED, APL Site, Namrup, Dibrugarh, Assam, India



DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-07



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

PROFORMA OF LETTER OF AUTHORITY FOR ATTENDING TECHNICAL BID

OPENING AND PRICE BID OPENING

Ref ............................... Date: ....................

TO, The General Manager (Project), Project Department, Assam Petrochemicals Limited, Namrup, P.O. Parbatpur, Dist- Dibrugarh, Pin -786623, Assam, India. Contact Person: Mr. Atul Barman Tel. No.: 0374-2500331 Fax. No.: 0374-2500231 Email: [email protected]


Dear Sir, We........................................hereby authorise the following representative(s) to attend the

................................................. (Un-priced / priced bid) opening against your ENQ. No.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005 - Tender for Road and Storm Water Drain Works.

1. Name & Designation...............................................Signature............................

We confirm that we shall be bound by all and whatsoever our representative (s) shall commit. Yours faithfully, Signature................................................. Name & Designation................................ For & on behalf of.................................... NOTE:

I. This Letter of Authority should be on the letterhead of the bidder and should be signed by a person competent and having the power of attorney to bind the bidder.

II. Only One representative will be allowed for attending price bid opening.

III. Bidder’s Representative shall carry this letter and submit it to TCE / CLIENT at the time of Bid opening.



DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-07



ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

PROFORMA OF DECLARATION OF BLACK LISTING / HOLIDAY LISTING

In the case of a Proprietary Concern

I hereby declare that neither I in the name of my Proprietary concern M/s………………………………………………….which is submitting the accompanying Bid / Tender nor any other concern in which I am proprietor nor in any partnership firm in which I am involved as a Managing Partner have been placed on black list or holiday list declared by Client or TCE, except as indicated below:

(Here given particulars of black listing or holiday listing and in absence thereof state "NIL").

In the case of a Partnership Firm

We hereby declare that neither we, M/s .................................................................................... .................................................submitting the accompanying Bid / Tender nor any partner involved in the management of the said firm either in his individual capacity or as proprietor of any firm or concern have or has been placed on black list or holiday list declared by Client or TCE, except as indicated below:


In the case of Company

We hereby declared that we have not been placed on any holiday list or black list declared by Client or TCE, except as indicated below:


It is understood that if this declaration is found to be false in any particular, Client / TCE, shall have the right to reject my / our bid, and, if the bid has resulted in a contract, the contract is liable to be terminated.

Place: .................. Signature of the Bidder ....... ....................

Date: .................. Name of the Signatory ...................... .....

DOC. NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: E

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-

3005-08 CERTIFICATE AS PER SEC. 184 / 188 OF

COMPANIES ACT 2013 SHEET 1 OF 2 OF 4


ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(TO SUBMIT WITH UN-PRICED BID)

CERTIFICATE AS PER SEC. 184/188 OF COMPANIES ACT 2013

This has the reference to our proposed CONTRACT for Road and Storm Water Drain

Works of APL to be entered into with ASSAM PETROCHEMICALS LIMITED (APL).

For the purpose of section 184/188 of the Companies Act 2013, we certify that to the best of

my/our knowledge:

1) I am not a relative of any Director of APL.

2) We are not a firm in which a Director of APL or his relative is partner.

3) I am not a partner in a firm which a Director of APL or his relative is partner

4) We are not a private company in which a Director of APL is a member or Director.

5) We are not a company in which Directors of APL hold more than 2% of the paid up

share capital of our company or vice versa.

PLACE:

SEAL OF THE COMPANY

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER

DATE

Note:

1) The second copy of the certificate duly completed, signed and stamped must be

submitted with Un-priced BID indicating “QUOTED” in proposed contract.

2) The original copy of the certificate duly completed, signed and stamped must be

submitted with Priced BID after filling in the value of the proposed CONTRACT.

DOC. NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: E

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-

3005-08 CERTIFICATE AS PER SEC. 184 / 188 OF

COMPANIES ACT 2013 SHEET 2 OF 2 OF 4


ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(TO SUBMIT WITH PRICED BID)

CERTIFICATE AS PER SEC. 184/188 OF COMPANIES ACT 2013

This has the reference to our proposed CONTRACT for INR________ for Road and Storm

Water Drain Works of APL to be entered into with ASSAM PETROCHEMICALS

LIMITED (APL)

For the purpose of section 184/188 of the Companies Act 2013, we certify that to the best of

my/our knowledge:

1) I am not a relative of any Director of APL.

2) We are not a firm in which a Director of APL or his relative is partner.

3) I am not a partner in a firm which a Director of APL or his relative is partner

4) We are not a private company in which a Director of APL is a member or Director.

5) We are not a company in which Directors of APL hold more than 2% of the paid up

share capital of our company or vice versa.

PLACE:

SEAL OF THE COMPANY

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER

DATE

Note:

3) The second copy of the certificate duly completed, signed and stamped must be

submitted with Un-priced BID indicating “QUOTED” in proposed contract.

4) The original copy of the certificate duly completed, signed and stamped must be

submitted with Priced BID after filling in the value of the proposed CONTRACT.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-09


INTEGRITY PACT SHEET 1 OF 6 OF 4


ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

INTEGRITY PACT

BETWEEN

Assam Petrochemicals Ltd., hereinafter referred to as "The Principal",

AND

……………………………………………………………… hereinafter referred to as "The Bidder /

Contractor".

Preamble

The Principal intends to award, under laid down organizational procedures, Contract/s for

__________________________________________ The Principal values full

compliance with all relevant laws and regulations, and the principles of economic use of

resources, and of fairness and transparency in its relations with its Bidder/s and Contractor/s.

In order to achieve these goals, the Principal will appoint an external independent Monitor

who will monitor the tender process and the execution of the contract for compliance with

the principles mentioned above.

Section 1 - Commitments of the Principal

(1) The Principal commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption and to

observe the following principles: -

a) No employee of the Principal, personally or through family members, will in connection with

the tender for, or the execution of a contract, demand, take a promise for or accept, for

him/herself or third person, any material or immaterial benefit which he/she is not legally entitled

to.

b) The Principal will, during the tender process treat all Bidders- with equity and reason. The

Principal will in particular, before and during the tender process, provide to all Bidders the same

information and will not provide to any Bidder confidential / additional information through which

the Bidder could obtain an advantage in relation to the tender process or the tender execution.

c) The Principal will exclude from the process all known prejudiced persons.

2) If the Principal obtains information on the conduct of any of its employees which is a criminal

offence under the IPC / PC Act, or if there be a substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal

will inform its Vigilance Office and in addition can initiate disciplinary actions.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-09




ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Section 2 - Commitments of the Bidder / Contractor

(1) The Bidder / Contractor commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption.

He commits himself to observe the following principles during his participation in the tender

process and during the contract execution.

a) The Bidder / Contractor will not, directly or through any other person or firm, offer, promise or

give to any of the Principal's employees involved in the tender process or the execution of the

contract or to any third person any material or immaterial benefit which he / she is not legally

entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of any kind whatsoever during the

tender process or during the execution of the contract.

b) The Bidder / Contractor will not enter with other Bidders into any undisclosed

agreement or understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular to

prices, specifications, certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-submission of bids

or any other actions to restrict competitiveness or to introduce cartelization in the bidding

process.

c) The Bidder / Contractor will not commit any offence under the IPC / PC Act; further the Bidder /

Contactor will not use improperly, for purposes of competition or personal gain, or pass on to

others, any information or document provided by the Principal as part of the business

relationship

d) The Bidder / Contractor will, when presenting his bid, disclose any and all payments he has

made, is committed to or intends to make to agents, brokers or any other intermediaries in

connection with the award of the contract.

(2) The Bidder / Contractor will not instigate third persons to commit offences outlined above or

be an accessory to such offences.

Section 3 - Disqualification from tender process and exclusion from future contracts

If the Bidder, before award of contract has committed a transgression through a violation of

Section 2 or in any other form such as to put his reliability or credibility as Bidder into question,

the Principal is entitled to disqualify the Bidder from the tender process or to terminate the

contract, if already signed, for such reason.

(1) If the Bidder / Contractor has committed a transgression through a violation of Section 2 such

as to put his reliability or credibility into question, the Principal is entitled also to exclude the

Bidder / Contractor from future contract award processes. The imposition and duration of the

exclusion will be determined by the severity of the transgression. The severity will be

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-09




ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

determined by the circumstances of the case, in particular the number of transgressions,

the position of the transgressors within the company hierarchy of the Bidder and the amount of

the damage. The exclusion will be imposed for a minimum of 6 months and maximum of 3

years.

(2) The Bidder accepts and undertakes to respect and uphold the Principal's absolute right

to resort to and impose such exclusion

(3) Apart from the above, the Principal may take action for banning of business dealings / holiday

listing of the Bidder as deemed fit by the Principal.

(4) If the Bidder / Contractor can prove that he has restored / recouped the damage caused by

him and has installed a suitable corruption prevention system, the Principal may revoke the

exclusion prematurely.

(5) A transgression is considered to have occurred if in light of available evidence, no

reasonable doubt is possible.

Section 4 - Compensation for Damages

1) Without prejudice to any rights that may be available to the Principal under law or the Contract or

its established policies and laid down procedures, the Principal / Owner shall have the following

rights in case of breach of this Integrity Pact by the Bidder/ Contractors): Forfeiture of EMD /

Security Deposit: If the Principal has disqualified the Bidder(s) from the Tender process prior to the

award of the Contract or terminated the Contract or has accrued the right to terminate the Contract

according to Section 3, the Principal apart from exercising any legal rights that may have accrued

to the Principal, may in its considered opinion forfeit the Earnest Money Deposit / Bid-Security

amount of the Bidder / Contractor.

(2) If the Principal has terminated the contract according to Section 3, or if the Principal is entitled

to terminate the contract according to Section 3, the Principal shall be entitled to demand and

recover from the Contractor liquidated damages equivalent to 5% of the contract value or the

amount equivalent to Security Deposit / Performance Bank Guarantee, whichever is higher.

(3) The bidder agrees and undertakes to pay the said amounts without protest or demur subject

only to condition that if the Bidder / Contractor can prove and establish that the exclusion of the

Bidder from the tender process or the termination of the contract after the contract award has

caused no damage or less damage than the amount of the liquidated damages, the Bidder /

Contractor shall compensate the Principal only to the extent of the damage in the amount proved.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-09




ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Section 5 - Previous Transgression

(1) The Bidder declares that no previous transgressions occurred in the last 3 years with any other

Company in any country conforming to or with any other Public Section Enterprise in India that

could justify his exclusion from the tender process.

(2) If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from the tender

process or the contract, if already awarded, can" be terminated for such reason.

(3) If the Bidder / Contractor can prove that he has resorted / recouped the damage caused by him

and has installed a suitable corruption prevention system, the Principal may, at its own discretion

as per laid down organizational procedures, revoke the exclusion prematurely.

Section 6 - Equal treatment of all Bidders / Contractors / Sub-Contractors

(1) The Bidder / Contractor undertake to demand from all sub contractors a commitment in

conformity with this Integrity Pact. The Bidder / Contractor shall be responsible for any violation(s)

of the principles laid down in this agreement / Pact by any of its Subcontractors / Sub-vendors.

(2) The Principal will enter into agreements with identical conditions as this one with all

Bidders and Contractors.

(3) The Principal will disqualify from the tender process all bidders who do not sign this

pact or violate its provisions.

Section 7 - Criminal charges against violating Bidders / Contractors / Sub- Contractors

If the Principal obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder, Contractor or Sub-Contractor or of an

employee or a representative or an associate of a Bidder, Contractor or Sub-Contractor which

constitutes corruption, or if the Principal has substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal will

inform the Vigilance Office.

Section 8 - External Independent Monitor / Monitors (number depending on the size of

the contract to be decided by the Chairperson of the Principal)

(1) The Principal appoints competent and credible external independent Monitor

for this Pact. The task of the Monitor is to review independently and objectively, whether and to

what extent the parties comply with the obligations under this agreement.

(2) The Monitor is not subject to instructions by the representatives of the parties and performs

his functions neutrally and independently.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-09




ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

(3) The Contractor accepts that the Monitor has the right to access without restriction to all

Project documentation of the Principal including that provided by the Contractor. The Contractor

will also grant the Monitor, upon his request and demonstration of a valid interest,

unrestricted and unconditional access to his project documentation. The same is applicable

to Sub-contractors. The Monitor is under contractual obligation to treat the information and

documents of the Bidder / Contractor / Sub-con tractor with confidentiality.

(4) In case of tenders having an estimated value of INR 100 Crore, the Principal will provide to

the Monitor sufficient information about all meetings among the parties related to the Project

provided such meetings could have an impact on the contractual relations between the

Principal and the Contractor.

(5) As soon as the Monitor notices, or believes to notice, a violation of this agreement, he will so

inform the Management of the Principal and request the Management to discontinue or to

take other relevant action. The Monitor can in this regard submit non-binding

recommendations. Beyond this, the Monitor has no right to demand from the parties that

they act in a specific manner, refrain from action or tolerate action.

(6) The Monitor will submit a written report to the CEO of the Principal within 2 weeks

from the date of reference or intimation to him by the 'Principal' and, should the occasion

arise, submit proposals for correcting problematic situations.

(7) If the Monitor has reported to the CEO of the Principal substantiated suspicion of

an offence under the IPC / PC Act and the CEO has not, within reasonable time, taken visible

action to proceed against such offence or reported it to the Vigilance Office, the Monitor may also

transmit this information directly to the Central Vigilance Commissioner, Government of India,

(8) The word 'Monitor' would include both singular and plural.

Section 9 - Pact Duration

This Pact begins when both the parties have legally signed it. It expires for the Bidder / Contractor

12 months after the completion of work under Contract or till the continuation of guarantee period,

whichever is more and for all other bidders, till the contract is awarded.

If any claim is made / lodged during this time, the same shall continue to be valid despite the lapse

of this pact as specified it is discharged / determined by the CEO of the Principal.

DOC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-

3000-3005-09




ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Section 10 - Other Provisions

1) This agreement is subject to Indian Law. Place of performance and jurisdiction is the Registered

Office of the Principal, i.e. Guwahati.

2) Changes and supplements as well as termination notices need to be made in writing. Side

agreements have not been made.

3) If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this agreement must be signed by all partners

or consortium members.

4) Should one or several provisions of this agreement turn out to be invalid the remainder of this

agreement remains valid. In this the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their original

intentions.

_______________________________________ FOR THE PRINCIPAL

_______________________________________ FOR THE BIDDER/CONTRACTOR

WITNESS 1

WITNESS 2

Place : _____________________________

Date: ____________________________

SPEC. NO. TCE.M4-917


SAFETY CONDITIONS FOR UNDERTAKING SITE WORK SHEET 1 OF 9

ISSUE R2

TCE FORM NO. 329 R5 FILE NAME: M4917R2.DOC

1.0 SCOPE This document gives broad guidelines to be followed by the CONTRACTOR for

ensuring safe working conditions in and around the site. 2.0 SAFETY ORGANISATION 2.1 Each CONTRACTOR at site shall organise a Safety Group headed by a Safety

Officer who shall be responsible for providing, supervising and monitoring safe working conditions at all times for their workers. The Safety Officer shall be experienced in maintaining safe conditions for workers at site and shall be responsible for and shall have authority to enforce safe conditions for the workers.

2.2 The CONTRACTOR shall have a declared Safety Policy and shall get the same

approved by the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. The approved Safety Policy shall be displayed prominently in the CONTRACTOR’s site office.

2.3 The CONTRACTOR shall take active interest and participate in the

development and operation of safety programs at site. His responsibility does not cease with establishment of Safety Group and approval of its various activities. He shall demonstrate his involvement by regular participation in safety meetings, review of safety records and taking corrective action where required, introduction of safety promoting bulletins, posters, suggestions and awards and by setting example by strictly observing safety rules.

2.4 The CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste material and debris from and

around the work area and properly clean up the area at the end of each day before leaving the work site.

2.5 The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions not only for safe

working of his own workmen but also deploy all precautions to ensure safety of structures, equipment and workmen of other agencies in and around his work site.

2.6 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that his workmen do not trespass into

prohibited areas. 2.7 The PURCHASER/CONSULTANT shall have the right to inspect at any time, all

items of machinery or equipment brought to site by the CONTRACTOR, his agents or workmen and to prohibit the use on the site of any item, which in the opinion of the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT is or may be detrimental to the safety of the site. The exercise of such right or the omission to exercise it in any particular case shall not absolve the CONTRACTOR or his agents or workmen of their responsibility of adhering to the safe working practices.

2.8 The CONTRACTOR shall execute the work in a manner causing the least

possible interference with the business of the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT, or with the work of any other CONTRACTOR who may be engaged on the premises and shall at all times co-operate with the other CONTRACTORS working at site.




ISSUE R2


2.9 The CONTRACTOR shall obtain work permit from the PURCHASER/ CONSULTANT before starting any work at site. The work permits are issued to prevent the CONTRACTOR from working in unauthorised areas and shall be valid for specific area for a stipulated period

2.10 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure at all times that his workers do not lie down or

sleep under or around any machine, equipment, vessel or vehicle in his work area.

2.11 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY OFFICER 2.11.1 He is responsible and accountable for: (a) Preventing injury to personnel, damage to plant and equipment and

fires. (b) Instituting ways to improve existing work methods from safety point of

view. (c) Legal and contractual requirements affecting safety, health, and

welfare of his workmen (d) Provision and use of protective clothing and equipment and use of fire

fighting equipment (e) Suitability of new and hired equipment from a safety viewpoint (f) Identifying potential hazards. (g) Changes in safety requirements and fire precautions (h) Carrying out site surveys to see that only safe work methods are in

operation, health and safety requirements are being observed and welfare and first aid facilities are adequate and properly maintained.

(i) Determining the cause of an accident or dangerous occurrence and

recommend means of preventing recurrence. (j) Supervising the recording and analysis of information on injuries,

damage and production loss. Assess accident trends and review overall safety performance.

(k) Assisting with training of employees at all levels. Organising periodic

demonstration of practising safe working conditions by experienced safety instructors.

(l) Taking part in discussions on injury, damage and loss control. (m) Keeping up-do-date with recommended codes of practice and safety

literature. Circulating information applicable to each level of employees. (n) Fostering within the company an understanding that injury prevention




ISSUE R2


and damage control are an integral part of business and operational efficiency.

(o) Attending job progress meetings where safety is an item on the

agenda. Report on job safety performance. 2.11.2 The Safety Officer shall inspect and ensure the following: (a) All electrical equipment are securely earthed. (b) Standard access platforms and ladders are provided for inspection,

operation and maintenance of equipment. (c) The equipment are periodically inspected for their condition,

maintained properly and operated by trained personnel at design speeds and loads.

3.0 WORKING AT HEIGHTS For carrying out work at heights exceeding 2 meters or near openings in floors

and roofs etc. precautions as given in following paras shall be taken. 3.1 Adequate safety precautions like use of safety belts, crawling-ladders, safety

nets etc. shall be taken. The workers shall wear safety belts with hook properly fastened.

3.2 All workmen engaged on work at heights shall be experienced in such work. 3.3 Written permission of the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT shall be obtained

before undertaking work on roofs. 3.4 Wherever possible, steel staging or platform shall be erected. 3.5 Staging with toe guards shall be provided with simple safety rails or ropes at

waist height throughout its length on all open sides. 3.6 Staging supports shall be All Purpose Scaffolding (APS) steel tubes scaffolding,

safety secured and supported on firm level footings or slung from overhead beams. The supports shall be situated at maximum distance of 2.5 metres apart and the staging shall be secured to each support.

3.7 Wherever it is not possible to put up staging and/or use of safety belts and

safety nets, steel sheets shall be slung beneath the place of work for safety. 3.8 When working over open process vessels or tanks, safety belts and safety nets

shall always be used whether or not staging and scaffolding is provided. 3.9 Safe access to all points of works shall be provided in the form of suitable

ladders and stairways etc. 3.10 Area around the work place shall be barricaded suitably or fenced off to avoid




ISSUE R2


injuries to personnel passing by. Suitable warning boards and signs shall be put up.

4.0 EXCAVATION In the event of an excavation or removing a manhole cover, the CONTRACTOR

shall ensure that any opening, sump or pit caused is securely fenced and covered as required by the Factory Act before leaving the workplace for the day. Suitable warning boards and signs shall be put up near such opening while work is in progress to warn persons passing by.

5.0 LIFTING GEAR 5.1 The CONTRACTOR shall submit a valid Test Certificate to the

PURCHASER/CONSULTANT, from approved certifying authorities for all of his lifting gear and hoists, slings, chains, wire ropes, hooks, chain-pulley blocks, winches, hoists and cranes etc. before commencing work.

5.2 These certificates shall be available at site in the CONTRACTOR’s office for

inspection as and when required. 6.0 PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING 6.1 Pressure and leak testing of equipment shall be carried out hydraulically.

However, in special cases where pneumatic testing is specified, written approval shall be obtained from the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT before starting work. Under no circumstance gases other than nitrogen, carbon dioxide, air or steam shall be used for testing.

6.2 In case nitrogen or carbon dioxide is used for testing, the equipment shall be

adequately ventilated and gas tested to ensure oxygen content of 21% before permitting a worker to enter the equipment.

7.0 WORK INSIDE AN EQUIPMENT OR DRAINAGE SYSTEM 7.1 All equipment and associated piping shall be isolated, completely drained,

purged and well ventilated before entry of a worker. The atmosphere inside the vessel or equipment shall be tested to ensure absence of toxic and flammable gases.

7.2 Toxic and flammable liquids and gases in the equipment shall be safely

disposed off as per the instructions of the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. 7.3 Workers carrying out drainage, purging and testing operations shall wear gas

masks and other protective gear appropriate to the material being handled. 7.4 While a worker has entered an equipment or a drainage system, another worker

shall be present outside at all times to assist the worker inside in the event of an emergency.

8.0 ELECTRICAL




ISSUE R2


8.1 Portable power tools rated for above 50 V supply and hand lamps rated for above 24 V supply shall not be used at site.

8.2 An armoured cable with a 3 pin Reyrolle type plug, properly earthed shall be

provided between the CONTRACTOR’s DG set and step down transformer. 8.3 All power supply and distribution boards shall have canopy for protection and all

the distribution boards shall be earthed securely. 8.4 All supply points shall have proper plug and socket. 8.5 The CONTRACTOR shall check tightness of connection of cable terminations

and joints before starting the work. 9.0 WELDING 9.1 Only qualified welders shall be employed at the work site. The CONTRACTOR

shall organise the qualifying test at site for his welders and the PURCHASER/ CONSULTANT shall approve the welders. All welders shall have to undergo qualifying test and only on passing the test, they shall be allowed to work at site.

9.2 For all welding work at site, generator sets shall be used instead of AC

transformer sets. AC transformer sets are banned for welding jobs inside vessels (both open and closed top type).

9.3 The CONTRACTOR shall get his welding sets certified by the PURCHASER/

CONSULTANT before starting work. These certificates shall have to be renewed every two months. A copy of the certificates shall be displayed on respective welding sets.

9.4 Only cables in good condition and insulated holders shall be used. The length of

supply cable to welding site shall not exceed 8 metres and the welding set body shall be properly earthed.

9.5 A charged fire extinguisher of CO2 type shall be carried with each welding set.

The CONTRACTOR shall keep Halon or equivalent type fire extinguishers near hot jobs like cutting oil lines.

9.6 The welder shall not use a building structure, pipeline or railway track etc. as a

return path of the current. Adequately rated circuit breaker shall be provided in the power circuit for human protection on all power supply points.

10.0 HOT WORK 10.1 Before starting any hot work like gas cutting, welding and grinding etc., the

CONTRACTOR shall obtain hot work permit from the PURCHASER/ CONSULTANT. The permit shall be renewed on day-to-day basis.

10.2 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure purging of piping and equipment to make it totally safe before carrying out any hot work

10.3 Smoking is strictly prohibited in work areas except at designated locations.




ISSUE R2


Smoking areas shall be identified with sign board at strategic locations showing:

‘SMOKING IS PERMITTED IN THIS LOCATION ONLY’ 10.4 At permitted locations, cigarette ash or butts shall be disposed off only in ash

trays provided. 10.5 No combustible material shall be stored on or near any source of heat like hot

pipes, welding or gas. Before leaving the place of work or the CONTRACTOR’s sheds, the CONTRACTOR’s workmen shall ensure that no material or item that could start a fire is left at site. Special attention shall be paid to collection and disposal of oil soaked cotton waste or rags. On no account are these to be dropped into corners, pushed below equipment or left hanging on pipes.

10.6 Gas cylinders shall be used in a safe manner. These shall not be dropped from

heights or dragged on the floor. Trolley with rubber rimmed wheels shall be used for transporting gas cylinders within the site. Acetylene cylinders shall be kept in upright position. Oxygen cylinders shall not be kept near inflammable materials like oil etc.

10.7 Tarpaulins shall not be used in the vicinity of welding and gas cutting jobs. 10.8 The CONTRACTOR’s supervisor of the rank of a foreman or equivalent shall

examine the arrangements made for hot work before commencement of work and shall satisfy himself that all reasonable safety precautions have been taken.

10.9 The CONTRACTOR shall return the hot work permit after completion of welding

work. 11.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 11.1 Workmen shall wear protective clothing, head, leg and eye protection safety

equipment at all times as per the job requirements. These are to be supplied and provided by the CONTRACTOR.

11.2 Adequate number of IS approved safety helmets shall be available at site. 11.3 Welders shall wear good quality insulated welding gloves, goggles, face shield,

shoes and overalls while at work. 12.0 ACCIDENTS In case of injury or serious illness of a worker, the PURCHASER/

CONSULTANT shall be notified immediately. All accidents shall be recorded by filling in the ‘Accident Report’ form, which shall be kept in easy accessible location in the site office of the CONTRACTOR. Any ‘Near Miss’ incident shall also be reported by the CONTRACTOR and recorded.

13.0 INSURANCE




ISSUE R2


All the CONTRACTOR’s workmen shall be covered under the Employees State Insurance Scheme, Janata Policy or any other scheme which may be specified by the Statutory Authorities from time to time.

14.0 REVIEW MEETING The PURCHASER/CONSULTANT shall conduct fortnightly Safety Review

Meeting to review the safety conditions practised at work areas by the CONTRACTOR.

15.0 WORK AFTER NORMAL WORKING HOURS 15.1 Extra care shall be taken for jobs to be carried out after normal working hours

with due revalidated work permit and supervised by the CONTRACTOR’s site-in-charge. The site-in-charge shall make available his residential address and telephone number to the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT so that he can be contacted in case of an emergency.

15.2 Proper lighting shall be ensured at the workplace for any work carried out after

the normal working hours. 16.0 CONVEYANCE FOR EMERGENCY The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that conveyance and person with driving

license is available at site at all times of work execution so that in case of an accident, the victim can be rushed to nearest medical centre.

17.0 SAFETY PRACTICES 17.1 Avoid working under un-insulated live conductors or working on freshly painted

steel, which is still wet. 17.2 Stairs and railing shall be in place as long as necessary. Ladders shall be

periodically checked for any defects. Ladders shall be securely fastened to prevent movement while in use.

17.3 The CONTRACTOR shall advise his workmen to take the following precautions

while using ladders: (a) While ascending or descending, face the ladder. Use both hands for

holding. (b) Do not climb higher than the third rung from top on straight or

extension-ladders and second rung from top on set ladders. (c) Step-ladders shall be fully open before use. (d) Sliding down a ladder shall be prohibited. (e) Make shift ladders such as clear fastened across a single rail and short

ladders spliced together shall never be used.




ISSUE R2


(f) Ladders shall be kept free from dirt and grease. (g) Defective ladders shall be removed from use. (h) Ladders shall not be left un-attended unless these are securely

anchored at top and bottom. (i) While using ladders, shoes shall not be greasy, muddy or otherwise

slippery. (j) Ladder shall not be used during severe windy conditions. 17.4 Lumber shall be piled out of the work area. Nails shall be removed or bent while

handling lumber to avoid injury to workmen. 17.5 While tearing down plaster or brickwork, dust shall be controlled with water. 17.6 Walls shall not be subjected to lateral pressure or impact from materials stored

or falling materials. 17.7 The safety valves for boilers shall be set by trained personnel and shall be

sealed or padlocked at safe working pressure. Only authorised person shall change the setting of safety valves. The safety valve relieving pressures shall be checked as recommended by the manufacturer and applicable codes.

17.8 Blow down valves shall be operated strictly as per instructions. If blow cock is

not marked with an arrow to show open and close position, the same shall be marked at site.

17.9 Safety slogans and safety instructions shall be prominently displayed in English,

Hindi and local language at strategic locations. 18.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 18.1 The CONTRACTOR shall familiarize himself with the emergency procedures,

which apply to plants and areas in which his men are working. 18.2 First Aid Box shall be kept in the CONTRACTOR’s site office. The

CONTRACTOR’s site-in-charge and his key supervisors shall be trained in administering first aid, preliminary treatment for electrical shocks, fall from height and burns etc.

18.3 When an emergency condition exists or on hearing the ‘Stop Work Alarm’ every

supervisor shall ensure: (a) All work is stopped at once. (b) All equipment is shutdown. (c) All men are evacuated to a pre-determined assembly point.




ISSUE R2


(d) A roll call is taken and every man is accounted for. (e) No one shall be permitted to return to work until notification has been

received from a responsible authorised agency that it is safe to do so. 19.0 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR’S SITE INCHARGE His primary responsibility is safety of personnel and equipment. He shall: 19.1 Understand the company’s policy on maintaining safe working environment and

appreciate the responsibility allocated to each grade of supervision. 19.2 Know the safety requirements and relevant Government Regulations, and

ensure their implementation. 19.3 Ensure that sound, safe working methods and reasonable welfare facilities are

provided for workers. 19.4 Determine at the planning stage the following: (a) The most appropriate order and method of working (b) Allocation of responsibilities to supervisors (c) Storage areas and access etc. (d) Hazards which may arise from overhead or underground services (e) Facilities for welfare, first aid and sanitation (f) Work permit procedures and requirements (g) Basic fire precautions (h) Provide written instructions to establish work methods, to explain the

sequence of operations, to outline potential hazards at each stage and to indicate precautions to be adopted.



CONTRACTOR’S HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAMME SHEET 1 OF 19

ISSUE R1


1.0 SAFETY ORGANISATION 1.1 HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICY The CONTRACTOR’s organisation shall have a written HEALTH AND SAFETY

POLICY (POLICY) issued by the Chief Executive of the organisation, appropriate to the scale and nature of the risks involved in the CONTRACT works. A copy of the POLICY shall be made available to the PURCHASER at the time of the award of the CONTRACT in evidence of the CONTRACTOR’s commitment to management of employee's health and safety and compliance to statutory and regulatory requirements. The POLICY along with its component operation procedures shall be evidenced as working document publicised among the CONTRACTOR's and his SUB-CONTRACTORS' employees through appropriate language/s. All the CONTRACTOR’s employees shall be familiar with the POLICY and their role and obligations in its implementation. The POLICY shall meet the relevant statutory and regulatory requirements and the requirements of the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. The POLICY shall periodically be reviewed for updating with respect to new and emerging legal and other requirements.

1.2 SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE 1.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall appoint a Safety Representative (SR) meeting

statutory competence requirements, with a minimum experience of five years of safety management in comparable contracts, approved by the PURCHASER on the basis of his qualification and experience. The SR shall give his whole time to the superintendence of the ‘Health and Safety Programme’ of the CONTRACTOR

1.2.2 The CONTRACTOR shall also nominate in writing competent Safety Appointees

(SAs) from various disciplines to assist the SR in implementation of health and safety measures in their routine contract works. The SR shall have sufficient authority to direct the CONTRACTOR's or his SUB-CONTRACTOR's personnel to meet health and safety requirements and to stop performance of work until such requirements are met.

1.3 EMPLOYEE CONSULTATIONS, SAFETY COMMITTEE AND

COMMUNICATION 1.3.1 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure full involvement of all his employees

recognising their right to consultation on health and safety matters. The safety appointees of the various areas, in conjunction with the SR shall be responsible for ensuring employees' involvement through routine safety inspections, hazard and risk assessment in new and changed works and their control. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain appropriate operating procedures to guide these requirements.

1.3.2 The CONTRACTOR shall also appoint a Safety Committee (SC) comprising of

the SAs from the various areas under the chairmanship of the SR. The committee shall meet at periodic intervals to discuss the status and adequacy of the safety management, and any safety concerns of the employees. The




ISSUE R1


committee shall also formulate and validate the safety procedures incorporating controls to prevent or mitigate hazards and risks before submission for approval by the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. The minutes of the SC meeting shall be submitted to the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. The SR shall maintain the records of the meetings.

1.3.3 The CONTRACTOR shall communicate to the employees regularly on job

hazards applicable to their tasks in hand. The SAs or any of the SR's nominees shall hold 'Toolbox Talks' for this purpose on a routine basis before undertaking any safety critical and/or non-routine activities. Weekly meetings of the CONTRACTOR and his SUB-CONTRACTORS attended by the SR and the SAs shall include safety as a key item in the agenda to discuss hazards and risk assessments, job safety analysis and control procedures and to review accidents and incidents (Near-miss) for remedial measures to prevent such occurrence. The minutes of the meeting shall be submitted to the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. The SR shall maintain the records.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY REPORTS 1.4.1 The CONTRACTOR shall submit a monthly written report to the PURCHASER/

CONSULTANT, which shall be due on the fifth workday of every month. The health and safety of all full time, part-time, permanent, temporary, contract employees and any outsourced employee undertaking any part of the CONTRACT works shall be included in the safety report. The report shall include the total number of working hours for the month, the number of recordable accidents and the number of lost-time accidents. A cumulative trend plot of the monthly severity and frequency rate of the reportable accidents shall be included in the monthly safety report and calculated as:

LOST MANDAYS DUE TO LOSS-TIME INJURIES x 1,000,000

MANHOURS WORKED

FREQUENCY = NUMBER OF LOST TIME INJURY x 1,000,000

MANHOURS WORKED 1.4.2 The CONTRACTOR shall arrange to display the safety statistics and the

cumulative plot of severity and frequency of accidents mentioned above painted on a board prominently displayed, as a means of encouragement and assurance to all interested parties and for publicising the safety achievements.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S ACCIDENT/INCIDENT REPORTS 1.5.1 ‘Accident’ for the purpose of this para is defined as ‘Undesired Event Giving

Rise to Death, Ill-health, Injury, Damage or other Loss’ and ‘Incident’ is defined as ‘Event that gave rise to an Accident or had the Potential to lead to an Accident’. An accident where no ill health, injury, damage or other loss occurs is also referred to as ‘Near-Miss’. Incident includes Near-Miss. The CONTRACTOR shall report orally, to the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT regardless of their extent, duration and severity, immediately on occurrence of all accidents resulting in:




ISSUE R1


(a) Personal injury (b) Property damage (c) Fires (d) Spills (e) Near-Misses 1.5.2 The CONTRACTOR shall submit the accident and incident report in writing to

the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT within 24 hours of its happening in the form as prescribed by the governing statute or in the absence of which, in the form prescribed by the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. The CONTRACTOR shall detail in the ‘Accident/Incident Report’, the particulars of the dangerous occurrence leading to the accident, lost time of absence due to accident, root cause analysis and the corrective and preventive actions to prevent such recurrence. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall include his estimate of the impact of accident on project schedule. Incidents shall also be reported in the same manner identifying root cause/s to eliminate such potential occurrence or risks.

1.6 FIRST-AID PERSONNEL AND FACILITIES 1.6.1 The CONTRACTOR shall make available first-aiders, first-aid boxes and or first-

aid stations as per statutory requirements. The persons holding current certificates of competency of recognised institutions in prescribed numbers as per any governing statute and in the absence of such regulatory requirement a minimum of two first-aiders for each area of work for every hundred workmen. First-aiders' names shall be prominently displayed.

1.6.2 The first-aid boxes shall display contents of medical and medicinal articles with

quantity maintained, which shall be in accordance with governing statute. Nominated first-aider shall replenish stock promptly.

1.6.3 The first-aid refresher training shall be provided at least once in a year and all

employees shall be encouraged to undergo first-aid training. A record shall be kept of all first aid treatments with particulars of treatment and personnel providing the treatment.

1.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH CENTRE 1.7.1 Where required by the CONTRACT, the CONTRACTOR shall establish and

maintain an Occupational Health Centre where hazardous Processes are involved such as roof work, steel work, working above or below water, demolition and confined space. Where the PURCHASER maintains the Occupational Health Centre facilitating the CONTRACTOR, such a facility shall meet the requirements laid by the governing statute and this shall be stated in the CONTRACT. Where the CONTRACTOR out-sources such facility, it shall meet the statutory requirements and shall be approved by the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT and the statutory body.




ISSUE R1


1.7.2 The Occupational Health Centre shall be served by a full time medical officer holding a medical degree in allopathic medicine with a minimum of five years experience in Occupational Health/Medicine. A nurse, one dresser/compounder and one sweeper-cum-ward boy who will all be available during entire construction operation during the day shall assist the medical officer. One additional Medical Officer shall be posted for every additional thousand Construction workmen along with the team of nurse, compounder and ward boy

1.7.3 The Occupational Health Centre shall be capable of undertaking emergency

care services or emergency treatment facilities which shall include emergency life saving aids and appliances to handle head and spinal injuries, severe fractures, snake bites, burns of all nature, electric shocks, cases of asphyxiation and such other severe injuries as could be reasonably anticipated at the facilities and shall meet provisions of any governing statute.

1.8 AMBULANCE ROOM AND AMBULANCE VANS The PURCHASER shall arrange for an ambulance room and an ambulance van

directly or outsource the facilities meeting the governing statutory needs for prompt transportation of serious cases accident and or sickness to the hospital. Such facilities shall be maintained in good repair and equipped with facilities such as dry powder type extinguishers, flashlights, portable oxygen unit, self-contained breathing apparatus etc. as prescribed by the governing statute.

1.9 INDUCTION AND JOB-SAFETY TRAINING 1.9.1 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a procedure for identification of the training

needs and training his employees to create a health and safety conscious work-force that will comply with the law and safety requirements of the Organisation. He shall also maintain a procedure for safety induction and initial training as well as follow-up training on the job safety for new entrants. All employees shall receive effective training and periodic refresher training on the operation control procedures specific to their tasks designed to control the job-safety risks. A booklet of such operation control procedures and safety rules with need based pictorial illustrations shall be made available to all employees who are to learn and be familiar with such procedures. All training shall be monitored for effectiveness as per established procedures. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain records of all training.

1.9.2 The SR and the SAs shall conduct regular fortnightly or weekly mock-safety

drills for different imaginary accident scenarios, in premeditated work areas to provide on-job training such as:

(a) Use of safety appliances such as water monitors, hydrants, hydrant

pumps, fire-hoses, extinguishers, breathing apparatus and safety harness for working at height,

(b) Response to health and safety emergencies, (c) fighting fires using various equipment and




ISSUE R1


(d) First-aid 1.9.3 Participants shall receive training during mock-drills through role-play of their

normal expected tasks during emergencies and fire fighting. The degree of demonstrated ability in the chosen tasks during such safety drills shall be recorded as participants' competence level for planning his further training. The experience gained in mock drills shall be used to update of operational control procedures and the training needs. The roster of participants and contents for routine mock-drills shall be appropriately planned to cover all employees in the training at least once in four months.

1.9.4 The SR and the SAs shall be trained on a standardised comprehensive

advanced training programme covering safety management, legal aspects, techniques of hazard identification and risk assessment and specific job-safety in various disciplines such as Civil, Electrical, Instrumentation and Mechanical plant and equipment of the CONTRACTOR. The training records shall be maintained subject to audit by the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. Training effectiveness shall be assessed and recorded and used as input for further training plans of the employee.

1.10 HEALTH AND SAFETY PROMOTION Safety posters, banners and slogans displayed for safety promotion shall be

rotated at frequent intervals. The CONTRACTOR is encouraged to have safety promotion as an item in the SC agenda. The CONTRACTOR is encouraged to include safety promotion programmes such as: safety bulletins, magazines, competitions in slogan and poetry writing on safety, screening of safety films, celebration of national safety and environmental day, safety suggestion schemes and safety library etc.

1.11 PURCHASE AND PROCUREMENT CONTROL 1.11.1 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a procedure for control of his purchases to

ensure that all safety requirements are appropriately vetted by the safety personnel during all stages of procurement including planning of specifications, inspection for acceptance and commissioning in order that threats to safety are not overlooked and appropriate attention is paid to the training of personnel in the operation of the CONTRACTOR's new or changed machinery and their operation control procedures, to prevent/control risks.

1.11.2 The CONTRACTOR shall exercise due diligence in appointing his SUB-

CONTRACTORS and outsourcing contract services, that no new health and safety threats are created. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure personnel of SUB-CONTRACTORS and outsourced contract services are competent in health and safety management to meet the POLICY requirements. They shall be made aware of the safety rules, emergency procedures and any information that will have a bearing on the safety, health and related contractual obligations

1.12 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND RISK ASSESSMENT

1.12.1 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that his key personnel and safety personnel




ISSUE R1


are trained to be competent in hazard identification, risk assessment and risk control processes. The CONTRACTOR shall on a routine basis identify, evaluate and control all health and safety risks especially in the hazardous work activities and also to validate the previous risk assessments. Elements such as hazard identification, evaluation of risks with existing control measures in place and estimate of tolerability of the residual risks shall be an ongoing process. Any additional/New control measures shall be designed based on this process on need basis.

1.12.2 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a Hazard Identification, Risk Analysis and

Risk Control Manual (HIRARC) pertaining to all his activities duly updated as detailed above. The HIRARC manual shall be made available to the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT during regular inspections and audits

1.13 WORK PERMITS 1.13.1 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a work permit procedure to limit the

hazardous processes and high risks tasks to authorised personnel, who shall be informed of the job safety analysis and the job specific safety precautions, on issue of a work-permit. The work permit issued under the procedure shall be valid for a specified period and shall be issued only after all safety precautions are fulfilled and duly verified by the SR or the SA or specialist who is authorised for safety certification as a prerequisite for issue of a work permit. The work permit shall be appropriate for the purpose for which it is issued. Various work-permits are:

(a) Safety Work Permit (SWP) SWP is mandatory for working at heights, on fragile roofs such as

asbestos or such roofing works, steel erection, work over water, a live substation or switch-yard even if section of work is not electrically charged, demolition, blasting and such potentially hazardous CONTRACT works in the opinion of the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT.

(b) Hot Work Permit (HWP) HWP shall be used where hot working, like electric or gas welding, gas

cutting, or burning or any other operation involving heating, open flames or electric arcs, grinding and electrical works etc. are potentially dangerous in areas such as inflammable materials storage, plant and pipe lines handling inflammable and or explosive materials either presently or in the past, or where new works are undertaken adjoining such works which in the opinion of the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT are potential risks. A HWP shall be deemed mandatory in all such potentially dangerous areas. The CONTRACTOR shall get areas such as welding shops or maintenance areas approved by the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT for 'Permit-Free' operation.

(c) Confined Space Entry Permit (CSP) CSP is issued for entering and carrying out tasks in confined space.




ISSUE R1


Confined space for the purpose of this para is defined as an enclosed or partially enclosed space which is not intended or designed primarily as a work place and

(i) is at atmospheric pressure during occupancy (ii) has restricted entry and exit (iii) has potentially harmful level of toxic or inflammable

contaminant or unsafe level of oxygen (iv) is of a nature that could contribute to overwhelming a person

by an unsafe atmosphere (v) has a potential that safety on entry could be affected by

unsafe conditions stated above by accident or due to human errors

Confined spaces shall include but not limited to storage tanks, process

vessels, bins, boilers, ventilation or exhaust ducts, sewers, underground utility vaults, tunnels, pipelines and open top spaces more than 4 feet in depth such as pits, tubs, vaults and vessels.

(d) Electrical Safety permits/Lock-out and Tag out (ESP/LOTO) The CONTRACTOR shall institute an electrical safety permit system to

ensure safe electrical isolation. Safety permits shall not be issued until safe release tag is placed on the equipment isolated on all isolating points. The safety permit shall be returned on satisfactory completion of the job by the executing agencies duly signing off indicating that all shorts and grounds and men and materials are removed from the job and that the job safe for energising. This is a prerequisite to energise the isolated equipment. The safety tags shall be collected in the order first the isolated equipment and lastly the tag on the main control of the equipment The tags and permit system shall be auditable

1.14 JOB SAFETY INSPECTION 1.14.1 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a procedure for Safety Inspection at routine

intervals to provide assurance that the instituted safety procedures are in place to prevent deviations from established standards that could lead to a safety hazard and consequential risk. The CONTRACTOR shall establish appropriate standardised checklists for systematic job safety verification to ensure

(a) set standards are followed without deviation (b) employees are competent to perform as per prescribed operation

control procedures, (c) monitoring of safety of the various work areas/tasks and (d) adequacy of existing operation control procedures and practices to




ISSUE R1


mitigate and eliminate risks 1.14.2 Should the existing operation control procedures prove inadequate and the

residual risks are higher than tolerable levels, the SR shall initiate hazard and risk assessment and analysis and consultations with the SC to deploy appropriate remedial measures and improved operation control procedures. Periodic inspection reports and proposed remedial measures shall be submitted to the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. Records of changes change processes; consultations with the SC and revision of operational controls shall all constitute objective evidence of the existence of established procedures.

1.15 SAFETY AUDITS 1.15.1 The CONTRACTOR shall undertake periodic safety audits to confirm through

investigative methods the effectiveness of the measures set out in the POLICY. In order to be effective such safety audit shall be comprehensively covering all aspects detailed in this specification to ensure effective loss-control/accident prevention programme. Safety audits shall take into account the safety inspection records, remedial measures and effectiveness of the safety programme. Effectiveness of safety programme shall be based on the CONTRACTOR’s effective hazard identification and risk assessment processes for design of operation control procedures and on the safety statistics. Audit reports and preventive actions and safety improvement programmes shall be submitted to the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT.

1.15.2 The PURCHASER/CONSULTANT shall retain their right to audit the

CONTRACTOR’s Safety Management System either directly by their employees or his nominated representatives for its effectiveness.

2.0 EQUIPMENT, SUBSATANCES AND PERSONAL SAFEGUARDING 2.1 MECHANICAL SAFETY 2.1.1 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all his equipment and machinery are safe

to use while in motion or working. Operators shall have received training or instruction on operation of the machinery and the regulatory requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall have adequate procedure to ensure the stability and securing of his working machinery during operation. He shall restrict repair and maintenance of the machinery to trained personnel and maintain records of repairs and maintenance. The equipment shall have appropriately designed means of isolating from sources of energy and shall have emergency stop control, which is easily accessible. All controls shall be clearly and uniformly marked. All operation controls, interlocks, sensing devices and guards on tools and equipment shall be functional and their status shall be regularly checked and recorded. The CONTRACTOR shall provide evidence of compliance to these requirements in any contractual write-ups submitted to the PURCHASER/ CONSULTANT for approval in respect of critical construction/contract works.

2.1.2 The CONTRACTOR shall provide only good quality hand tools and ensure

control of condition, storage, routine inspection and use of such hand-tools. Unsafe tools such as with cracked or broken handles, mushroomed chisels and




ISSUE R1


punches, worn screwdrivers, hardened hammerheads; power tools with unsafe resistance to earth or without safety guards shall be prohibited.

2.1.3 All safety ladders, scaffolding and such access equipment shall meet

requirements of IS 3696 and IS 4014 and such standards as the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT may stipulate. The safety work permits shall be issued only after ensuring that all safety requirements of access equipment are complied with. Access equipment shall be inspected on a routine basis to prevent injuries caused by falls.

2.1.4 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure safety of all those concerned with lifting and

those who may be affected by material hoisting, lifting and handling using various mechanical aids. All lifting equipment such as cranes, hoists, lifting shackles, hooks chains and links shall be designed as per appropriate International codes of construction. Operators shall have been trained in operation and maintenance of such equipment besides training on standard hand signals to be employed during the hoisting and lifting operations. Safe Working Loads (SWL) shall be marked on equipment prominently. SWL shall be evidenced to have been established by test procedures in accordance with acceptable codes of practices.

2.1.5 Riding on construction equipment, forklifts and cranes shall be prohibited unless

such vehicles are provided with passenger seats. 2.1.6 Pressurised gas and air systems shall be maintained safe in good working order

and shall meet the requirements of the Factories Act 1948, The Static and Mobile Pressure Vessels Rules 1984 and the Gas Cylinder Rules 1934 as applicable. The safety relief valves, safety appurtenances and isolation systems shall be compliant with safety code of practices. Any statutory register of pressure vessel records and the code of practices shall be subject to periodic auditing by the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT.

2.1.7 The areas of highly dangerous activities like hoisting, lifting and rock blasting,

and radiation, shall be appropriately barricaded to protect personnel and machinery and guided by work permit discipline. Emergency plans shall cater to emergencies arising out of such activities.

2.1.8 Signs, barricades, barrier tapes and warning or entry restriction devices or

accessories shall be provided to minimise work related risks of accidents and injuries. Signage shall meet all regulatory requirements such as under The Building and other construction workers Act 1996, Factory Act 1948, Manufacture, Storage, Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules under Environmental Protection Act 1986, Indian Explosives Act 1984 and Gas Cylinder Rules 1981 and Indian Electricity Act 1910 and Rules there of and any other safety requirements of the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT.

2.2 ELECTRICAL SAFETY 2.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide only such equipment for work that is

electrically safe to work. The CONTRACTOR shall have a procedure to identify and record all his electrical equipment in a register, with provisions to record his




ISSUE R1


periodic inspections of such equipment. Inspection shall cover cables, extension leads, all electrical equipment drawing power from socket outlet. He shall identify and maintain in good working order all electrical installations such as distribution panels and major switchgear ensuring safe accessibility. A clear area shall be maintained around panels and switchgears. The installed equipment shall be periodically inspected by qualified personnel to ensure their continued safe operating condition. Inspection shall include earth polarity checks, continuity checks and earth resistance checks. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure use of flameproof and explosion proof switchgears and lighting fittings where required as per governing codes.

2.2.2 Approved earth leakage relays or alternative safety devices to relevant IS and

International codes shall be used on all portable electrical hand tools. Where possible low-voltage electric power supply shall be used for hand tools, earth leakage units shall protect electrical installations in workshops, kitchens, cafeterias, first-aid rooms, laboratories and offices. Record of regular checks shall be maintained. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with ‘Code of Practice for Earthing’ as per IS 3043.

2.2.3 Safety rubber matting of appropriate voltage rating conforming to IS 5424

entitled ‘Rubber Mats for Electrical Purposes’ shall be provided in front of all switchgears and power distribution panels for the safety of personnel operating such equipment.

2.2.4 The CONTRACTOR shall arrange displaying signage under Indian Electricity

Act 1910, such as: (a) Danger notices as per IS 2551 in conspicuous places on all low,

medium and High voltages as per Rule 35, (b) Instruction of restoration of persons suffering from electric shock in

English and local languages as per Rule 44 in switchgear rooms, substations and places where electricity is used and

(c) Notice prohibiting unauthorised entry in areas where electrical

apparatus are used. 2.2.5 All power cables providing construction power to various construction machinery

and the connectors shall be in safe and sound condition. Cables shall be routed through cable trays supported on appropriately designed structures, duly clamped, secured and identified. Road crossing cables shall be laid in conduits buried at least 600 mm below the surface to prevent damage due to vehicular traffic. All cables shall be off the floor to avoid damage or tripping hazard. Cables shall be terminated at the switchgear and sockets in a workman like manner to prevent loose contacts and flashover. Only safety receptacles shall be used for providing power connection to hand-tools. All switches and distribution boards shall be clearly marked. All electrical distribution and panel wiring diagrams shall be available with the electrical maintenance personnel. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a safe electrical isolation/lockout procedure.

2.2.6 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure lighting circuits are not used for hand-tools.




ISSUE R1


No electrical equipment shall be overloaded. Tools and test equipment used on electrical systems shall be insulated.

2.3 SUBSTANCES ABUSE PROGRAMME The CONTRACTOR is encouraged to have a ‘Substance Abuse Programme’,

and pre-employment drug testing. Drinking during working hours shall be strictly prohibited. The CONTRACTOR shall promote through poster and other publicity, awareness on abuse of substances such as alcohol and such depressant drugs that slows the activity of brain and spinal cord on abusive usage endangering the safety and health of users and others affected by their work.

2.4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES CONTROL 2.4.1 The CONTRACTOR shall prevent all injuries, illnesses and damage to property

or the environment caused by any article or substance, which proves to be hazardous. The code of practices of construction and operation and maintenance and control procedures shall meet required statutory and regulatory requirements. Personnel shall be trained on use, handling, storage, disposal and emergency spillage procedures.

2.4.2 The CONTRACTOR shall detail and deploy operational controls to reduce

hazardous wastes and their disposal as required by the statute ‘Hazardous Waste (Management and handling) Rules 2000’. Oil wastes, used oils, soil and cotton soaked in oil consequent to handling operations, grease and many class of paints and asbestos sheets and gaskets are typical hazardous wastes.

2.4.3 The CONTRACTOR shall identify, contain and control all sources of radiation.

Appropriate regulatory approvals shall be obtained before commencement of work involving radiation sources. Radiation protection advisors suitably qualified and experienced shall be appointed whose names shall be submitted to PURCHASER/CONSULTANT. Dosimetry and surveillance of personnel engaged in such work shall be maintained in accordance with regulatory requirements.

3.0 PERSONAL SAFGUARDING 3.1 PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE)-GENERAL The CONTRACTOR shall provide his employees required PPE meeting the

requirements of the stated IS specifications and guidelines or equivalent International Standards as may be prescribed by the PURCHASER/ CONSULTANT from time to time. The CONTRACTOR shall have instituted good working procedures and practices in providing PPE, maintenance, issue and training on their use. All PPE shall be periodically checked to ensure worn, damaged equipment are replaced expeditiously.

3.1.1 Control Issue, Use and Maintenance of the PPE




ISSUE R1


Employees shall be responsible for the PPE issued to them. The

CONTRACTOR shall meet requirements of IS 8519 entitled ‘Guide for Selection of Industrial Safety Equipment for Body Protection’ or any equivalent international specification that the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT may prescribe.

3.1.2 Head Protection The CONTRACTOR shall comply with requirements of IS 2925. Hard hats shall

be used and worn where a hazard of falling or flying objects exist. Hard hats intended for use by visitors shall have replaceable paper lining.

3.1.3 Eye and Face Protection Eye protection shall be worn during all operations by operators and people in

the vicinity, where there is a danger of flying particles of metal such as generated during use of hand tools such as chisels, grinding, welding and cutting lathe work on brass and cast iron acid and alkali splash, high pressure jet cleaning or insulation removal from heights using high pressure jets. The CONTRACTOR shall meet the requirements of IS 8520 entitled ‘Guide for Selection of Industrial Safety Equipment for Eye, Face and Ear Protection’.

3.1.4 Footwear Safety shoes, boots and gumboots fitted with steel toe-caps of approved quality

conforming to prescribed Indian or international standards. Wearing of unsafe safety shoes such as jogging shoes, tennis shoes, slippers and sandal etc. are prohibited. The CONTRACTOR shall meet the requirements of IS 10667 entitled ‘Guide for Selection of Industrial Safety Equipment for Protection of Foot and Leg’.

3.1.5 Protective Clothing The CONTRACTOR shall prevent hazards of loose clothes worn by workmen

getting caught in moving machine parts. Loose and thin garments such as dhoti and pyjamas are prohibited. While the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all workmen wear long sleeved shirts, jackets or the like with the sleeves rolled down and secured at the cuff, long pants/ trousers extending upto the top of the safety shoes so as to prevent injuries caused by contact with heat, cold abrasive and sharp surfaces shall be strictly enforced. Such protective clothing shall be mandatory in hazardous areas especially during start-up operations involving hot, inflammable, and other chemical hazards, furnaces and Boilers and such fired equipment and asphalting plants. Personnel exposed to acids and alkalies hot fluids and steam during such operations shall be provided with appropriate heat or corrosion resistant clothing. The CONTRACTOR shall meet the requirements of IS 8990 entitled ‘Maintenance and Care of Industrial Safety Clothing’.

3.1.6 Hand Protection




ISSUE R1


The CONTRACTOR shall provide appropriate hand gloves as per IS 8807

entitled ‘Guide for Selection of Industrial Safety Equipment for Protection of Arms and Hands’ to prevent injuries to hands during work. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain appropriate inventory of gloves for different applications like acid and alkali handling, general-purpose work gloves and asbestos or heat resistant hand gloves etc.

3.1.7 Safety Harness or Fall Arrest The CONTRACTOR shall provide safety harness or means of restraint such as

safety belts, harness and lifelines etc. to workmen engaged to work in heights such as open-sided floors, open-sided scaffoldings, floor and roof openings, overhead construction works of various nature etc. where there is a falling hazard of two metres or above. Storage, issue, wearing and maintenance of safety harness shall be under strict supervision and records shall be maintained. All fall arrests shall consist of full-body harnesses, lanyards with shock absorbers, lifelines, rope grabs and associated hardware. Two alternate lanyards shall be used to facilitate tying off at a new location before disconnecting from the previous location. Practices for safety harnesses and fall arrests shall conform to IS 4912, IS 11972 and IS 8519 or equivalent international codes.

3.1.8 Falling Object Protection Where work is in progress in elevated areas, barricades, barrier tapes, signs

and such entry restriction devices shall be used to keep area below clear of personnel to prevent injury due to falling objects. If work is required in the area below elevated work area, it shall be scheduled at a time different from elevated works. The workmen below shall be protected from falling objects by the debris net or a catch platform with an adequate toe board to prevent material from falling off. Use of safety net for elevated works shall be considered in the work-permits where appropriate. Where a lift is made above a working area, the area below the path of the lift shall be cleared of personnel during the lift and barricaded and guarded to prevent entry of persons generally in conformity with IS 4912, IS 11972 and IS 13416 for protective barriers in and around building and preventive measures against safety hazards in work places and safety requirements for floor and, wall opening, railings and toe-boards.

3.1.9 Respiratory Equipment The CONTRACTOR shall maintain where appropriate, procedures for training

and use of Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA). The SCBA shall be provided together with lifelines and rescue teams to safeguard personnel working in areas where gases such as carbon monoxide, methane chlorine and such life endangering atmospheres are present. The CONTRACTOR shall meet requirements of IS 9623 for ‘Selection, Use and Maintenance of Respiratory Protective Devices’. The CONTRACTOR shall have trained adequate number of personnel including the identified fire fighting teams, hose teams and SAs in the use of the SCBA. The CONTRACTOR shall use the periodic safety drills to demonstrate, train and establish competence of personnel in the use of SCBA.




ISSUE R1


3.1.10 Hearing Conservation The CONTRACTOR shall ensure reasonable precautions are taken to avoid

injury to the hearing of the employees. All noise levels shall be controlled within 85 dBA. The CONTRACTOR shall identify noise areas where noise levels exceed prescribed safe level for arranging for appropriate engineering revision. Where this is not feasible, appropriate earmuffs or protectors shall be provided to workmen ensuring these are worn by those exposed to noise levels beyond safe levels. Periodic hearing acuity tests shall be conducted on such persons exposed to high noise levels to ensure that they do not suffer any hearing impairment as per requirements of IS 8520.

3.2 MANUAL HANDLING AND ERGONOMICS 3.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall have procedures to identify risks involved in manual

handling operation and tasks. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure appropriate training to prevent any possible injury. Full use of mechanical aids shall be made to avoid risks arising out of such manual handling. Employees shall be adequately trained on such manual tasks and related safety precautions to reduce the risk of injury to personnel engaged in such work.

3.2.2 The CONTRACTOR shall undertake ergonomic study of manual operations to

prevent musculoskeletal injury during manual handling, besides visual fatigue and mental stress giving considerations to matters such as seating lighting and ventilation etc.

4.0 FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION 4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4.1.1 Where the PURCHASER maintains the fire protection equipment, the

CONTRACTOR shall comply with the PURCHASER's fire regulations, warning signals and procedures. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange to train his personnel meeting the prescribed qualifying competence needs, in requisite numbers in the operation of such fire protection equipment and systems.

4.1.2 Risk assessments shall be carried out to identify potentially vulnerable areas to

provide sufficient quantities of correct type of extinguishers and ancillary equipment to deal with various types of fire hazards.

4.1.3 Where required under the CONTRACT the CONTRACTOR shall provide

appropriate type of extinguishers close to areas of fire hazard but not too close they are cut off from use during a fire. Water based extinguishers shall not be positioned close to or used on electrical equipment.

4.1.4 Extinguishers shall be marked/labelled and recorded with location particulars in

a register. These shall be inspected at monthly intervals to ensure they are in operable sound condition. There shall be a systematic plan for servicing, repairing and recharging fire extinguishers and for recording such dates on the register and equipment.




ISSUE R1


4.1.5 The location of fire fighting equipment shall quickly and easily be identifiable

especially in emergencies in a conspicuous manner painted as high as possible to identify the location of the extinguisher to prevent it from being obscured by machinery and goods stacked in front and to return the equipment to its location after emergency use in other locations. In order to ensure this, ‘Keep Clear’ area shall be demarcated and maintained. Location plans of extinguishers and fire-fighting equipment shall be prominently displayed when desired by the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT.

4.1.6 SR and SAs shall be trained on fire fighting techniques who shall co-ordinate

and control fire protection and prevention programmes. 4.1.7 Where required under the CONTRACT, the CONTRACTOR shall maintain

alarm systems powered by mains and by battery for back-up. Where required under the CONTRACT, emergency lighting shall be provided to aid evacuation in poor lighting conditions following the alarm. The alarm system shall be made known to all employees. When the PURCHASER extends these facilities for use by the CONTRACTOR, he shall provide appropriate training to his personnel in the use of such emergency facilities and duties

4.1.8 A clear written procedure for action in the event of fire should be produced. Fire

teams and hose teams shall be identified and their responsibilities during emergencies shall be detailed in writing. Personnel shall be trained on their fire duties and use of fire-fighting equipment. Regular drills shall be conducted to test procedures and to validate them. Fire instructions and emergency procedures shall be displayed throughout the premises. Emergency response procedures are detailed under para 5.0 below.

4.1.9 A means of escape shall be provided in all work areas and storages and

maintained and kept free from obstruction. All exits shall be clearly marked and kept unlocked whilst the premises are in use. Escape routes shall be protected from fire.

4.1.10 When a hot work permit is issued, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure (a) Identification of combustibles such as paper, cardboard and wood and

moving away from area where hot work is undertaken using open flame or electric arc.

(b) Determination that flammable vapours and liquids are not present (c) Protection of floor and wall openings to keep out sparks (d) Determination that sprinkler and hydrant and other installed fire

systems are functional (e) Establishing a fire-watch with fully loaded extinguishers or charged

water-hoses throughout the operation and 30 minutes after completion of operation

(f) Adequate ventilation for welders, by means of natural air movement




ISSUE R1


local exhaust ventilators or air-line respirators as required (g) Workmen performing the task are adequately briefed on job safety

analysis, hazards and risks and the safeguards against risks. 4.2 SECURITY 4.2.1 Where required under the contract, security personnel shall do all that is

reasonably practicable to ensure the safety of employees and property of the company in the face of accidents by fighting fires and containing losses due to pilferage, theft, vandalism and industrial espionage both by employees and external elements. Security personnel shall be appropriately competent and receive adequate safety training. Security personnel shall routinely report on a standardised basis on aspects such as violation of fire-protection rules, use of alcohol and narcotic drugs, condition of security fencing, floodlighting and storages etc.

4.2.2 Where the project is located where a number of other companies are in

operation, the CONTRACTOR shall plan for mutual assistance programmes in cases of emergencies, as are practiced in the area in conjunction with the PURCHASER.

4.2.3 Where common boundaries exist between companies, the CONTRACTOR in

conjunction with the PURCHASER shall co-ordinate security control over factors common: such as floodlights, fencing, pipelines containing gas, fuel and electricity

4.2.4 Security personnel shall be represented in the SC through the SA nominated

from the area. 5.0 EMERGENCY PLANNING (EP)/EMERGENCY RESPONSE (ER) 5.1 The CONTRACTOR shall plan to deal with emergencies. An EP/ER specific to

the job site shall be written and communicated to all employees. The EP/ER shall identify for the potential for and responses to incidents and emergency situations and for preventing and mitigating the likely illness and injury that may be associated with them.

5.2 The CONTRACTOR shall review his emergency preparedness and response

plans and procedures in particular after occurrence of incidents or emergency operations

5.3 The CONTRACTOR shall designate his emergency team with their duties

during emergencies defined, Including those of the hose teams, medical personnel, first-aiders and security. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a procedure as to how his emergency organisation shall liaise with the PURCHASER's representatives in the EP/ER.

5.4 The CONTRACTOR shall also periodically test such emergency procedures by

conducting mock-drills and use the experience for updating the EP/ER and for training the employees on the perceived competence needs.




ISSUE R1


5.5 The EP/ER of the CONTRACTOR shall be under the control of the SR who shall

be able to co-ordinating with the PURCHASER/CONSULTANT for liaising with government agencies, neighbouring industries and community

5.6 The EP/ER shall be designed to allow people to work under disaster conditions

when normal services such as telephone water, light power, transport and sanitation are not available and first aid and fire fighting facilities are not able to cope with sudden demand on services.

5.7 The telephone numbers of ambulance, police, managers and the

PURCHASER’s key executives shall be prominently displayed in the identified Emergency Response Centre.

6.0 PREMISES AND HOUSE-KEEPING 6.1 ORDERLY WORK-PLACE The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a well-managed safe working place in sound

clean condition. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that there is a place for everything and everything in its place so that optimum use is made of valuable floor space with commensurate cleanliness and reduced handling time. He shall ensure that his entire infrastructure including temporary and semi-temporary buildings are kept clean and good repair.

6.2 GOOD LIGHTING-NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL The CONTRACTOR shall provide lighting natural or artificial to enable work

Processes are carried out safely. Artificial lighting shall be adequate especially in the nights and emergencies. The lumen levels shall meet the statutory requirements.

6.3 VENTILATION-NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that workplaces are ventilated with at least

prescribed amount of clean or cleaned fresh air of a suitable temperature, especially where toxic or irritating substances are present such as welding, vehicle exhaust fumes, irritating dusts, organic solvents or any other inimical atmosphere creating health hazards or safety.

6.4 WELFARE AND HYGIENE FACILITIES The CONTRACTOR shall provide welfare facilities to ensure a high standard of

cleanliness for all activities and rest. The CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for his employees such as ablutions, toilets change rooms, kitchens and cafeterias adequate and in a clean and hygienic state.

6.5 POLLUTION TO GROUND, AIR AND WATER The CONTRACTOR shall strive to exceed established minimum performance

norms in waste and pollution control. All drains shall be identified as clean water




ISSUE R1


and foul water to aid non-armful disposal. 6.6 TRAFFIC ROUTES AND AISLES The CONTRACTOR shall arrange to separate pedestrian and vehicular

including material handling equipment traffic wherever possible and maintain the routes clear of obstruction. To ensure safety of users clear painted demarcation is encouraged as a discipline to be enforced.

6.7 STACKING AND STORAGE PRACTICE 6.7.1 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure stacked material is bonded on a stable and

level footing capable of carrying the mass of the stack. Adequate clearances shall be provided between the sides of the stack and top to facilitate unimpeded access to service equipment like overhead wiring, cranes, forklifts and fire fighting equipment, and hoses. Circular items shall be sufficiently choked with wedges not with odd bits of materials. Free-standing stacks of gunny bags and sacks such as cement bags shall be stacked to prescribed safe-stack heights with layers formed for stable bonding, preventing slippage causing accidents. Stacking against walls shall not be permissible.

6.7.2 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the premises and surrounding areas in clean

and clear manner with safe access and egress. There shall be sufficient and adequate storage racks, shelving, bins and pallets and material handling equipment to stack his construction materials such as pipes structurals and construction enabling materials. Unwanted materials shall be promptly moved away for efficient material movement.

6.8 STORAGE OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 6.8.1 Hazardous materials shall be stored on solid bases. Solid bases shall include

compacted earth, pallets, concrete or asphalt platforms or paving. Hazardous materials shall be stored, stacked and secured to prevent toppling, spillage or other unintended dislodgement. Aisles and clearances shall be as detailed under 6.6 above. Hazardous materials shall be stacked in such a manner that an observer standing in the aisle can read their labels and legend.

6.8.2 Each hazardous material contained hall be identified by a legible or legend as

per governing statute, code or regulation. The label shall identify the item, quantity and appropriate warnings.

6.8.3 Hazardous materials which if brought in contact with each other could react or

pose equal or greater hazard than either material stored alone shall be stored at a distance not lesser than twenty feet apart.

6.8.4 Warnings shall be posted and maintained in a legible condition at all access

points clearly defining the specific hazardous nature of the stored materials such as ‘Corrosive’, ‘Flammable’, ‘Explosive’, ‘Oxidising’, ‘Compressed Gas’ or other hazardous nature.

6.8.5 Where hazardous materials are unloaded in the CONTRACTOR's storage




ISSUE R1


maintained at site in a semi-permanent installation, such installations shall be approved by relevant statutory bodies. Copies of licences for storage shall be lodged with the PURCHASER. The containers and storage shall display quantities stored with name of the hazardous material and the UN hazard classification label in prescribed colour code prominently painted in a conspicuous manner

6.8.6 The CONTRACTOR shall inspect the hazardous storages and installations on a

daily basis and hall undertake any requisite preventive action necessary to avoid safety risks

6.9 STORAGE OF FLAMMABLE AND EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS 6.9.1 The CONTRACTOR shall secure flammable and or explosive materials against

accidental ignition. 6.9.2 Storage facilities for flammable liquids such as petrol, diesel kerosene and

lubricants as well as the quantities stored shall meet the legal and statutory requirements. These shall be stored in approved fire-resistant rooms with a sump of sufficient volume to contain any spillage.

6.9.3 The electrical fittings to be flame -proof and on a strict maintenance schedule.

Containers shall be appropriately bonded in receptacles into which low flash point fuel is decanted.

6.10 COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS Compressed gas cylinders shall be stored and secured in the upright position at

safe distances from shielded from welding and cutting operations. Compressed gas cylinders in storage shall be shut off and torches, hose and manifolds removed and capped. Cylinders shall be periodically checked for leakages. Storage shall meet requirements of Gas Cylinder Rules 1981.Compressed gas storages shall be provided with safety relief valves, Safety valves and rupture disc to protect them overpressures. appropriately designed to ensure their continued availability in the face of process changes

6.11 SCRAP AND REFUSE BINS-REMOVAL SYSTEM The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that he has sufficient waste bins that are

identified for different wastes and maintained in clearly demarcated areas. Wastes with oily or other ignitable materials such as oily cotton wastes and hand gloves shall be stored separately with covers to prevent fires and shall be made of metal. Different wastes shall be segregated and stored separately and disposed off. These shall be emptied at routine intervals to prevent that they do not overflow with wastes.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: F


SHEET 1 OF 1

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

SECTION F



SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SHEET 1 OF 1

ISSUE R7


The BIDDER shall indicate below all deviations from the Technical Specifications.

SL. NO.

SECTION SPECIFICATION

NO. PARA NO.

DEVIATION

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

The BIDDER hereby certifies that the above mentioned are the only deviations from the PURCHASER’s/CONSULTANT’s Technical Specifications for this Enquiry Document. The BIDDER further confirms that in the event any other data and information presented in the BIDDER’s proposal and accompanying documents including drawings and catalogues etc. are at variance with the specific requirements laid out in the PURCHASER’s/CONSULTANT’s Technical Specifications, the latter shall govern and shall be binding on the BIDDER without any price implication.

COMPANY SEAL SIGNATURE

NAME

DESIGNATION

COMPANY

DATE



SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM GENERAL CONDITIONS

SHEET 1 OF 1

ISSUE R1


The BIDDER shall indicate below all deviations from the General Conditions.

SL. NO.

SECTION SPECIFICATION

NO. PARA NO.

DEVIATION

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

The BIDDER hereby certifies that the above mentioned are the only deviations from the PURCHASER’s/CONSULTANT’s General Conditions for this Enquiry Document. The BIDDER further confirms that in the event any other data and information presented in the BIDDER’s proposal and accompanying documents including drawings and catalogues etc. are at variance with the specific requirements laid out in the PURCHASER’s/CONSULTANT’s General Conditions, the latter shall govern and shall be binding on the BIDDER without any price implication.


NAME

DESIGNATION

COMPANY

DATE



SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT AND ERECTION MACHINERY SHEET 1 OF 1

ISSUE R4


The BIDDER shall indicate below the equipment and erection machinery he has in his possession and proposes to bring to the site, in case the work is awarded to him.

SL. NO.

TYPE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT AND ERECTION MACHINERY

NUMBER IN POSSESSION

NUMBER PROPOSED

TO BRING TO THE SITE

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

The BIDDER hereby confirms that the quantity and type of equipment and erection machinery he will employ for the site work will not be less than those listed above. The BIDDER also agrees to bring more equipment and erection machinery, if so warranted, in the opinion of the PURCHASER/ CONSULTANT to meet the construction norms and construction schedule.


NAME

DESIGNATION

COMPANY

DATE



SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR LABOUR SHEET 1 OF 1

ISSUE R4


The BIDDER shall indicate below the all-inclusive prices of labour assumed for the purpose of this CONTRACT.

SL. NO.

SUPPLY OF LABOUR NORMAL TIME

RATE FOR 8 HRS Rs. PER DAY

OVER TIME RATE Rs. PER HOUR

1. Unskilled Labour - Male

2. Unskilled Labour - Female

3. Skilled Labour - Male

4. Mason

5. Carpenter

6. Painter

7. Fitter - Reinforcement

8. Fitter - Structural steel

9. Welder

10. Rigger

11. Welders with Welding Equipment

12. Gas Cutter with all Equipment

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

The PURCHASER shall have the right to ask the CONTRACTOR to supply labour for any work at the rates quoted above.


NAME

DESIGNATION

COMPANY

DATE



SCHEDULE OF BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE SHEET 1 OF 1

ISSUE R5


The BIDDER shall indicate below a list of similar jobs executed by him, to whom a reference may be made by the PURCHASER.

SL

. N

O.

NA

ME

, A

DD

RE

SS

,

TE

L.

NO

., F

AX

NO

. A

ND

E-M

AIL

ID

OF

CL

IEN

T A

ND

PR

OJE

CT

NA

ME

PU

RC

HA

SE

R

OR

DE

R/

CO

NT

RA

CT

NO

.

AN

D D

AT

E

BR

IEF

DE

TA

ILS

OF

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

/ S

YS

TE

M S

UP

PL

IED

SC

OP

E O

F

SE

RV

ICE

S (

SE

E

LE

GE

ND

)

CO

NT

RA

CT

PR

ICE

IN

Rs.

SC

HE

DU

LE

D D

AT

E

OF

CO

MP

LE

TIO

N

AC

TU

AL

DA

TE

OF

CO

MP

LE

TIO

N

RE

AS

ON

FO

R

DE

LA

Y I

N

CO

MP

LE

TIO

N, IF

AP

PL

ICA

BL

E

RE

MA

RK

S

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

LEGEND: E - ERECTION, S - SUPPLY, SUP - SUPERVISION OF ERECTION, TC - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING


NAME

DESIGNATION

COMPANY

DATE

DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-10


SCHEDULE OF PRE-FILLED AGREED TERMS AND CONDTIONS

SHEET 1 of 6

FILE NAME:F-329-Rev-R6.docx

ISSUE R0

Bidder Name, Sign & Company Seal:

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Bidder Name: M/s. ____________________________________________________________ ENQUIRY No._________________________________________________________________ Bidder’s Offer Ref. No.: ________________________________________________________ Tel No. ______________________________ Fax No._____________________________ Email: __________________________________________________________________ Contact Person: _______________________________ Mobile No. ______________________

1. Duly signed & stamped copies of this “PATC”, with all the clauses duly confirmed/

precisely replied to by the Contractor, shall be enclosed with each and every set of Contractor's un-priced quotation.

2. All the commercial terms and conditions shall be indicated by Contractor in this format only and nowhere else in his quotation. However, in case the space for Contractor's reply is not sufficient against a particular question, the Contractor shall furnish same by way of separate annexure attached to this “PATC”, indicating cross-reference of respective clauses.

3. Failure on the part of Contractor in not returning this duly filled-up "PATC” with all the

sets of un-priced quotation and/or submitting incomplete replies may lead to rejection of Contractor's quotation”.

Sl.

No. Description of the Terms & conditions Contractor’s offer

1. Contract

Terms

Contract shall be awarded to sole bidder

on Overall Lowest basis for entire scope of

ENQUIRY

Confirmed

2. Security

Deposit

Contractor shall submit Security deposit of

amount and duration as per SCC / GCC Confirmed

3.

Liquidated

Damages

Liquidated Damages shall be applicable as

per SCC / GCC. Please confirm your

acceptance.

Confirmed

4.

NOTE:

In case of Rate Contracts, the Liquidated damages, accepted above, will

be levied on the total value of our respective indents.

In case any deviation is taken by you, from our standard LD Clause,

while evaluating your offer, your offer will be loaded to the extent of your

non-acceptance to our LD Clause.

5. Goods &

Service Tax

Please specify whether Goods & Service

Tax is Nil or is included in your quoted rate

or is Extra.

(Nil)

(Included)

(Extra)

DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-10



SHEET 2 of 6


ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Sl.


6.

In case Goods & Service Tax is extra,

please specify the rate, in terms of

percentage of Basic Price.

This will be loaded while evaluating

your offer.

7. Rebate Benefit on Goods & Service Tax

that CLIENT can avail

8.

In case of Goods & Service Tax applicable

Indicate Goods & Service Tax Registration

No.

9.

Variation in

Goods &

Service

Tax/ other

taxes &

duties

Only statutory variations, if any, in the present rate of Goods & Service Tax, up to the contractual delivery period shall be to Owner's account subject to documentary evidence to be furnished by the bidder. Confirm compliance.

Confirmed

10.

Any variation in Goods & Service Tax at the time of work execution for any reasons, other than statutory, including variations due to turnover, shall be borne by bidder. Confirm compliance.

Confirmed

11.

Works will be eligible for Input Tax Credit and Bidder shall furnish all documents as required to avail the same. Confirm compliance.

Confirmed

12.

If Goods & Service Tax indicated by bidder as nil [or] not applicable at present due to any reason, the same shall be borne by Supplier if it becomes applicable later on. Confirm compliance.

Confirmed

13.

Any new or additional taxes/ duties and any increase in the existing taxes/duties imposed after contractual delivery period shall be to BIDDER’S account whereas any corresponding decrease shall be passed on to the Owner. Confirm Compliance

Confirmed

14. Payment

Terms

As per SCC / GCC (whichever applicable).

Confirm compliance. Confirmed

DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-10



SHEET 3 of 6


ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Sl.


15.

In case of any deviations, from our

standard payment terms (such as

Documents through bank, by Demand

Draft, etc), all bank charges will be to your

account. Please confirm your acceptance

Confirmed

16.

In case of delayed delivery, invoices shall

be submitted after deducting price

reduction towards delayed delivery as

mentioned in SCC / GCC. Confirm

Compliance.

Confirmed

17.

Completion

Period

Please confirm completion period as per

Section A – Scope of Enquiry Document Confirmed

18.

NOTE:

(1) The completion period will be reckoned from the date of our LOI /

Purchase Order / date of Contract as mentioned in Section A / C

(2) In case of Rate Contracts, the delivery period will be reckoned from

the date of each Indent.

19. Guarantee Shall be as per SCC / GCC. Please

confirm your acceptance. Confirmed

20. Validity of

your offer

Please confirm that your offer is valid, for

acceptance, for a period as mentioned in

ITB.

Confirmed

21. In case the validity of your offer is shorter, your offer is liable for

rejection.

22. Firmness of prices

Quoted prices shall remain firm and fixed

till complete execution of the order.

Confirm Compliance.

Confirmed

23. Arbitration

Clause

Please confirm your acceptance to our

Arbitration Clause as per SCC / GCC.

Confirmed

24. Termination

Clause

Please confirm your acceptance to our

Cancellation clause as per SCC / GCC. Confirmed

25. NSIC

Unit

Please confirm your registration with

NSIC, for any / all items of this Price

Enquiry.

(Registered)

(Not

registered)

DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-10



SHEET 4 of 6


ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Sl.


26.

In case you are registered with NSIC,

please confirm that you have not

succeeded in securing orders for the same

item, in competition (i.e. without price

preference) with the large scale units,

during the preceding 12 months.

Confirmed

27.

If registered, please enclose a copy of the valid NSIC registration

certificate, applicable for the items offered by you.

Price preference shall be considered for units registered with NSIC,

as per the prevailing government guidelines, rules & regulations, as

applicable.

28. PBG

Please confirm that PBG will be submitted

by you as per SCC / GCC in OWNER’s

prescribed format.

Confirmed

29.

Inspection

Shall be as per SCC / GCC Confirmed

30. Acceptance

to Other

Terms and

Conditions

Acceptance to General Conditions of Contract (GCC). Confirm Compliance.

Confirmed

31. Acceptance to Special Conditions of Contract (SCC). Confirm Compliance.

Confirmed

32. Confirm acceptance to Technical Specifications / Notes, etc., as per ENQUIRY without any deviation.

Confirmed

33.

Deviation if any to ENQUIRY terms and conditions shall be brought out strictly as per Doc. No. TCE.M4-991 & TCE.M4-992 of Enquiry document.

Confirmed

34.

If any discrepancies noted between the bidders’s own quoted Price Schedule and the ENQUIRY Attachment Sheets / Schedule of Price then, the contents of ENQUIRY Attachment Sheets / Schedule of Price shall only prevail for all contractual purposes. Confirm compliance.

Confirmed

35.

Whether any of the Directors of BIDDER is a relative of any Director of Owner/TCE or the BIDDER is a firm in which any Director of Owner/TCE or his relative is a Partner or the BIDDER is a private company in which any director of Owner/TCE is a member or Director.

Confirmed

DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-10



SHEET 5 of 6


ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Sl.


36.

Please confirm you have not been banned or delisted by any Government or Quasi Government agencies or PSUs or other private firms. If you have been banned, then this fact must be clearly stated. This does not necessarily because for disqualification. However, if this declaration is not furnished the bid shall be rejected as non-responsive.

Confirmed

37.

Deviations to Terms & Conditions shall lead to loading of prices as per special conditions of contract (SCC) / ITB or rejection of offer. Please confirm.

Confirmed

38.

Any claim arising out of order shall be sent to Owner in writing with a copy to TCE within 3 months from the date of last despatch. In case the claim is received after 3 months, the same shall not be entertained by TCE/ Owner. Confirm Compliance.

Confirmed

39.

Terms and conditions, if any, appearing in quotation, shall not be applicable in the event of order. In case of contradiction between the confirmations given herein and terms & conditions mentioned elsewhere in the offer, the confirmation given herein shall prevail. Confirm compliance.

Confirmed

DOC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005-10



SHEET 6 of 6


ISSUE R0


TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

Sl.


40.

Contractor to quote as per the requirements and terms and conditions of the ENQUIRY Document including all the enclosures and not to stipulate deviations/ exceptions. Once quoted, the Contractor shall not make any subsequent price changes, whether resulting or arising out of any technical/ commercial clarifications and details sought on any deviations, exceptions or stipulations mentioned in the Contractor offer unless any amendment to ENQUIRY Document is issued by OWNER/ TCE. Similarly, no revision in quoted price shall be allowed should the deviations stipulated by Contractor are not accepted by OWNER/TCE and are required to be withdrawn by Contractor in favour of meeting the requirements and complying to the terms and conditions of the ENQUIRY Document. Any unsolicited proposed price change by the Contractor is likely to render the Contractor offer liable for rejection. Confirm compliance.

Confirmed

DOC. NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: F

TCE.6842C-CV-3000-

3005-11 SCHEDULE OF PRESENT /

CONCURRENT COMMITMENTS SHEET 1 OF 1 OF 4

FILE NAME: F-329-Rev-R6.doc

ISSUE

R0

TCE FORM NO. 120 R3

Sr.

No

.

Client Description

of the work

Value of

the

contract

Date of

commenc

ement of

Work

Completion

period (in

Months)

% age

progress

as on date

(site)

Expected

Completion

date

Remarks

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005



SHEET i OF i




TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0


FOR






VOLUME II

SPEC. NO. TCE. 6842A -CV-3000-3005

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: D

TENDER FOR ROAD AND STORM WATER DRAIN WORKS SHEET 1 OF 1

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0

SECTION D

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: WRITE-UP

EARTHWORK IN GRADING, EXCAVATION

AND BACKFILLING SHEET 1 OF 14



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5

FILE NAME: M4-418-01-Rev-R5.docx

1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers the general requirements of earthwork in excavation in

different materials, site grading, filling in areas as shown in drawing, filling back

around foundations and in plinths, conveyance and disposal of surplus soils or

stacking them properly as shown on the drawings and as directed by the

ENGINEER and all operations covered within the intent and purpose of this

specification.

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES

The following Indian Standard Codes, unless otherwise specified herein, shall be

applicable. In all cases, the latest revision of the codes shall be referred to.

1. IS 456: 2000

(Reaffirmed 2005)

- Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

2. IS 783: 1985

(Reaffirmed 2010)

- Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes.

3. IS 1200: 1992 - Method of measurement of Building and Civil Engineering works.

Part 1 (Reaffirmed 2002)

Part 1 Earthwork.

Part 27 Part 27 Earthwork done by mechanical appliances.

4. IS 1498: 1970 (Reaffirmed 2007)

: Classification and Identification of Soils for General Engineering purposes.

5. IS 3764: 1992 (Reaffirmed 2002)

- Excavation work-code of safety.

6. IS 2720 - Methods of test for soils:

Part 1: 1983 (Reaffirmed 2006)

- Preparation of dry soil samples for various tests.


- Determination of water content.


- Grain size analysis.


- Determination of liquid and plastic limit.


- Determination of water content - dry density relation using light compaction.

Part 9: 1992 - Determination of dry density - moisture content relation by constant weight of soil method.


- Determination of density index (relative density) of cohesionless soils.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


Part 28: 1974 - Determination of dry density of soils in place, by the sand replacement method.


- Determination of the density in place by the ring and water replacement method.


- Determination of density of soil in place by rubber balloon method.


- Compaction control test (HILF Method).

7. IS 4081: 1986 - Safety Code for Blasting and related Drilling Operations.

3.0 DRAWINGS

The ENGINEER will furnish drawings wherever, in his opinion, such drawings are required to show areas to be excavated/ filled grade level, sequence of priorities, etc. The CONTRACTOR shall follow strictly such drawings.

4.0 GENERAL

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, plants, instruments, qualified supervisory personnel, labour, materials any temporary works, consumables, any and everything necessary, whether or not such items are specifically stated herein for completion of the job in accordance with the specification requirements.

The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the survey of the site before excavation and set properly all lines and establish levels for various works such as earthwork in excavation for grading, basement, foundations, plinth filling, roads, drains, cable trenches, pipelines, etc. Such survey shall be carried out by taking accurate cross sections of the area perpendicular to established reference/ grid lines at 8 m intervals or nearer as determined by the ENGINEER based on ground profile. These shall be checked by the ENGINEER and thereafter properly recorded.

The excavation shall be done to correct lines and levels. This shall also include, where required, proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing, erecting and maintaining of substantial barricades around excavated areas and warning lamps at night for ensuring safety.

The rates quoted shall also include for dumping of excavated materials in regular heaps, bunds, riprap with regular slopes as directed by the ENGINEER, within the lead specified and levelling the same so as to provide natural drainage. Rock/ soil excavated shall be stacked properly as directed by the ENGINEER. As a rule, all softer material shall be laid along the centre of heaps, the harder and more weather resisting materials forming the casing on the sides and the top. Rock shall be stacked separately.

5.0 CLEARING

The area to be excavated/ filled shall be cleared of fences, trees, plants, logs, stumps, bush, vegetation, rubbish, slush, etc. and other objectionable matter. If any roots or stumps of trees are met during excavation, they shall also be removed. The material so removed shall be burnt or disposed of as directed by the ENGINEER. Where earth fill is intended, the area shall be stripped of all loose/ soft patches, top soil containing objectionable matter/ materials before fill commences.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


6.0 PRECIOUS OBJECTS, RELICS, OBJECTS OF ANTIQUITY, ETC.

All gold, silver, oil, minerals, archaeological and other findings of importance, trees cut or other materials of any description and all precious stones, coins, treasures, relics, antiquities and other similar things which may be found in or upon the site shall be the property of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall duly preserve the same to the satisfaction of the OWNER and from time to time deliver the same to such person or persons as the OWNER may from time to time authorise or appoint to receive the same.

7.0 CLASSIFICATION

All materials to be excavated shall be classified by the ENGINEER, into one of the following classes and shall be paid for at the rate tendered for that particular class of material. No distinction shall be made whether the material is dry, moist or wet. The decision of the ENGINEER regarding the classification of the material shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR and not be a subject matter of any appeal or arbitration.

Any earthwork will be classified under any of the following categories:

(a) Ordinary and Hard Soils

These shall include all kinds of soils containing kankar, sand, silt, murrum

and/ or shingle, gravel, clay, loam, peat, ash, shale, etc., which can

generally be excavated by spade, pick axes and shovel, and which is not

classified under "Soft and Decomposed Rock" and "Hard Rock" defined

below. This shall also include embedded rock boulders not longer than 1

metre in any one direction and not more than 200 mm in any one of the

other two directions.

(b) Soft and Decomposed Rock

This shall include highly fracturedrock, boulders, slag, chalk, slate, hard

mica schist, laterite and all other materials, which in the opinion of

ENGINEER is rock, but does not need blasting and could be removed with

picks, hammer, crow bars, wedges, and pneumatic breaking equipment.

The mere fact that the CONTRACTOR resorts to blasting for reasons of his

own, shall not qualify for classification under 'Hard Rock'.

This shall also include excavation in macadam and tarred roads and

pavements. This shall also include rock boulders not longer than 1 metre in

any direction and not more than 500 mm in any one of the other two

directions. Masonry to be dismantled will also be measured under this item.

(c) Hard Rock

This shall include all rock occurring in large continuous masses, which

cannot be removed except by blasting for loosening it. Harder varieties of

rock with or without veins and secondary minerals, which in the opinion of

the ENGINEER require blasting shall be considered as hard rock. Where

hard rock is met with and blasting operations are not permitted, the

CONTRACTOR shall use other methods such as use of chemicals or any

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


other method approved by the ENGINEER for loosening the rock mass,

developing cracks, etc. The loosened material shall be thereafter removed

either by mechanical means or manually. Boulders of rock occurring in such

sizes and not classified under (a) and (b) above shall also be classified as

hard rock. Concrete work both reinforced and unreinforced to be dismantled

will be measured under this item, unless a separate provision is made in the

Schedule of Quantities.

8.0 EXCAVATION

All excavation work shall be carried out by mechanical equipment unless, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the work involved and time schedule permit manual work.

Excavation for permanent work shall be taken out to such widths, lengths, depths and profiles as are shown on the drawings or such other lines and grades as may be specified by the ENGINEER. Rough excavation shall be carried out to a depth 150 mm above the final level. The balance shall be excavated with special care. Soft pockets shall be removed even below the final level and extra excavation filled up as directed by the ENGINEER. The final excavation if so instructed by the ENGINEER, should be carried out just prior to laying the mud-mat.

The CONTRACTOR may, for facility of work or similar other reasons excavate, and also backfill later, if so approved by the ENGINEER, at his own cost outside the lines shown on the drawings or directed by the ENGINEER. Should any excavation be taken below the specified elevations, the CONTRACTOR shall fill it up, with concrete of the same class as in the foundation resting thereon, upto the required elevation. No extra shall be claimed by the CONTRACTOR on this account.

All excavation shall be done to the minimum dimensions as required for safety and working facility. Prior approval of the ENGINEER shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR in each individual case, for the method he proposes to adopt for the excavation, including dimensions, side slopes, dewatering, disposal, etc. This approval, however, shall not in any way relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for any consequent loss or damage. The excavation must be carried out in the most expeditious and efficient manner. Side slopes shall be as steep as will stand safely for the actual soil conditions encountered. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent slips. Should slips occur, the slipped material shall be removed and the slope dressed to a modified stable slope. Removal of the slipped earth will not be paid for if the slips are due to the negligence of the CONTRACTOR.

Excavation shall be carried out with such tools, tackles and equipment as described herein before. Blasting or other methods may be resorted to in the case of hard rock only with the specific permission of the ENGINEER.

9.0 STRIPPING LOOSE ROCK

All loose boulders, semi-detached rocks (along with earthy stuff, which might move therewith) not directly in the excavation but so close to the area to be excavated as to be liable, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, to fall or otherwise endanger the workmen, equipment, or the work, etc., shall be stripped off and removed away from the area of the excavation. The method used shall be such as not to shatter or render unstable or unsafe the portion, which was originally sound and safe.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


Any material not requiring removal as contemplated in the work, but which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, is likely to become loose or unstable later, shall also be promptly and satisfactorily removed as directed by the ENGINEER. The cost of such stripping will be paid for at the unit rates accepted for the class of materials in question.

10.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION FOR MAJOR EXCAVATION (BASEMENTS/

RETAINING WALLS)

Excavation shall be undertaken to the width of the Basement/ Retaining Wall Raft/ Footing including necessary margins for construction operation as per drawing or as directed by the ENGINEER. Where the nature of soil or the depth of the trench and season of the year do not permit vertical sides, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, put up the necessary shoring, strutting and planking or cut slopes with or without steps, to a safer angle or both with due regard to the safety of personnel and works and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. The scheme proposed by the CONTRACTOR shall take into consideration the presence of existing buildings/ structures in the vicinity, if any.

All the major excavation shall be carried out by mechanical excavator. No extra payment shall be made for that.

The CONTRACTOR shall make, at his own cost, all necessary arrangements for maintaining water level, in the area where works are under execution low enough so as not to cause any harm to the work. These shall be considered as inclusive of pumping out or bailing out water, if required, for which no extra payment shall be made. This will include water coming from any source such as rains, accumulated rain water, floods, leakages from sewer and water mains, water ingress from nearby nallah, subsoil water table being high or due to any other cause whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR shall make necessary provision of pumping, dredging, bailing out water coming from all above sources and excavation and other works shall be kept free of water by providing a suitable system approved by the ENGINEER.

In order to avoid possibility of basement raft of building getting uplifted/ damaged due to water pressure, the CONTRACTOR shall lower the ground water table below the proposed foundation level by boring tube wells all around the proposed building using well point sinking method or any suitable method as approved by the ENGINEER. Sub soil water table shall be maintained at least 50 cm below the layer of blinding concrete (Plain Cement Concrete (PCC)) level during laying of PCC, water proofing treatment, laying of basement raft and beams including filling of earth/ sand under the basement floor. The water table shall not be allowed to rise above base of raft level until completion of outer retaining walls including water proofing of vertical surface of walls and back filling along the walls upto ground level and until the structure attains such height to counter balance the uplift pressure. The CONTRACTOR should inspect the site and make his own assessment about sub-soil water level likely to be encountered at the time of execution and quote his rates accordingly. Rate of all items are inclusive of pumping out or bailing out water, if required. Nothing extra on this account whatsoever shall be paid to him. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the ENGINEER’s approval on the sequence of construction.

The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary measures for the safety of traffic during construction and provide, erect and maintain such barricades including

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


signs, markings, flags, lights and flagman, as necessary at either end of the excavation/ embankment and at such intermediate points as directed by the ENGINEER for the proper identification of construction area. He shall be responsible for all damages and accidents caused due to negligence on his part.

11.0 EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK

11.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Unless otherwise stated herein, IS specification “IS: 4081 - Safety Code for Blasting and related Drilling Operations” shall be followed. After removal of overburden, if any, excavation shall be continued in rock to such widths, lengths, depths, and profiles as are shown on the drawings or such other lines and grades as may be specified by ENGINEER. As far as possible, all blasting shall be completed prior to commencement of construction. At all stages of excavation, precautions shall be taken to preserve the rock below and beyond the lines specified for the excavation, in the soundest possible condition. The quantity and strength of explosives used shall be such that it will neither damage nor crack the rock outside the limits of excavation. All precautions, as directed by ENGINEER, shall be taken during the blasting operations and care shall be taken that no damage is caused to adjoining buildings or structures as a result of blasting operations. In case of damage to permanent or temporary structures, CONTRACTOR shall repair the same to the satisfaction of ENGINEER at his cost. As excavation approaches its final lines and levels, the depth of the charge holes and amount of explosives used shall be progressively and suitably reduced.

Specific permission of ENGINEER will have to be taken by CONTRACTOR for blasting rock and he shall also obtain a valid Blasting License from the authorities concerned. If permission for blasting is refused by ENGINEER, the rock shall be removed by wedging, pick, barring, heating and quenching or other approved means. All loose or loosened rock in the sides shall be removed by barring, wedging, etc. The unit rates for excavation in hard rock shall include the cost of all these operations.

CONTRACTOR shall obtain necessary license for storage of explosives, fuses and detonators issued to him from OWNER’s stores or from supplier arranged by him, from the authorities dealing with explosives. The fees, if any, required for obtaining such license, shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall have to make necessary storage facilities for the explosives, etc. as per rules of local, State and Central Government authorities and statutory bodies/ regulations. Explosives shall be kept dry and shall not be exposed to direct rays of sun or be stored in the vicinity of fire, stoves, steam pipes or heated metal, etc. No explosives shall be brought near the work in excess of quantity required for a particular amount of firing to be done; and surplus leftafter filling the holes shall be removed to the magazine. The magazine shall be built, as far as possible, from the area to be blasted. ENGINEER’s prior approval shall be taken for the location proposed for the magazine.

In no case shall blasting be allowed closer than 30 metres from any structure or at locations where concrete has just been placed. In the latter case, the concrete must be at least 7 days old.

11.2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

For blasting operations, the following points shall be observed.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


CONTRACTOR shall employ a competent and experienced supervisor and licensed blaster in-charge of each set of operation. These persons shall be held personally responsible to ensure that all safety regulations are carried out.

Before any blasting is carried out, CONTRACTOR shall intimate ENGINEER and obtain his approval in writing for resorting to such operations. He shall intimate the hours of firing charges, the nature of explosive to be used and the precautions taken for ensuring safety.

CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all workmen and the personnel at site are excluded from an area within 200 m radius from the firing point, at least 5 minutes before firing time by sounding warning whistle. The area shall also be given a warning by sounding a distinguishing whistle.

The blasting of rock near any existing buildings, equipment or any other property shall be done under cover and CONTRACTOR has to make all such necessary muffling arrangements. Covering may preferably be done with small charges only and where directed by ENGINEER, a trench shall have to be cut by chiselling prior to the blasting operation, separating the area under blasting from the existing structures.

The firing shall be supervised by a Supervisor and not more than 6 (six) holes at a time shall be set off successively. If the blasts do not tally with the number fired, the misfired holes shall be carefully located after half an hour and when located, shall be exploded by drilling a fresh hole along the misfired hole (but not nearer than 600 mm from it) and by exploding a new charge.

A wooden tamping rod with a flat end shall be used to push cartridges home and metal rod or hammer shall not be permitted. The charges shall be placed firmly into place and not rammed or pounded. After a hole is filled to the required depth, the balance of the hole shall be filled with stemming which may consist of sand or stone dust or similar inert material.

CONTRACTOR shall preferably detonate the explosives electrically.

The explosives shall be exploded by means of a primer, which shall be fired by detonating a Fuse Instantaneous Detonator (FID) or other approved cables. The detonators with FID shall be connected by special nippers.

In dry weather and normal dry excavation, ordinary low explosive gunpowder may be used. In damp rock, high explosive like gelatine with detonator and fuse wire may be used. Underwater or for excavation in rock with substantial accumulated seepage electric detonation shall be used.

Holes for charging explosives shall be drilled with pneumatic drills, the drilling pattern being so planned that rock pieces after blasting will be suitable for handling without secondary blasting.

When excavation has almost reached the desired level, hand trimming shall have to be done for dressing the surface to the desired level. Any rock excavation beyond an over-break limit of 75 mm shall be filled up as instructed by ENGINEER, with concrete of strength not less than M100. The cost of filling such excess depth shall be borne by CONTRACTOR and the excavation carried out beyond the limit specified above will not be paid for. Stopping in rock excavation shall be done by hand trimming.

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any accident to workmen, public or OWNER’s property due to blasting operations. CONTRACTOR shall also be

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


responsible for strict observance of rules, laid by Inspector of explosives, or any other Authority duly constituted under the State and/ or Union Government.

12.0 FILL, BACK FILLING AND SITE GRADING

12.1 GENERAL

All fill material will be subject to the ENGINEER's approval. If any material is rejected by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the same forthwith from the site at no extra cost to the OWNER. Surplus fill material shall be deposited/ disposed of as directed by the ENGINEER after the fill work is completed.

No earthfill shall commence until surface water discharges and streams have been properly intercepted or otherwise dealt with as directed by the ENGINEER.

12.2 MATERIAL

To the extent available, selected surplus soils from excavated materials shall be used as backfill. Fill material shall be free from clods, salts, sulphates, organic or other foreign material. All clods of earth shall be broken or removed. Where excavated material is mostly rock, the boulders shall be broken into pieces not larger than 150 mm size, mixed with properly graded fine material consisting of murrum or earth to fill up the voids and the mixture used for filling.

If any selected fill material is required to be borrowed, the CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements for bringing such material from outside borrow pits. The material and source shall be subject to prior approval of the ENGINEER. The approved borrow pit area shall be cleared of all bushes, roots of trees, plants, rubbish, etc. Top soil containing salts/ sulphates and other foreign material shall be removed. The materials so removed shall be burnt or disposed off as directed by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall make necessary access road to the borrow areas and maintain the same, if such access road does not exist, at his cost.

Filling with excavated earth shall be done in regular horizontal layers each not exceeding 30 cm in depth. All lumps and clods exceeding 8 cm in any direction shall be broken. Each layer shall be watered and consolidated with steel rammer or half (½) tonne roller. Where specified, every third and top most layer shall also be consolidated with power roller of minimum 8 tonnes. Wherever depth of filling exceeds 1.5 metres, vibratory power roller shall be used to consolidate the filing unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall make good all subsidence and shrinkage in earth fillings, embankments, traverses, etc. during execution and till the completion of work unless otherwise specified. Field density measurements shall be carried out one in each layer.

12.3 FILLING IN PITS AND TRENCHES AROUND FOUNDATIONS OF

STRUCTURES, WALLS, ETC.

As soon as the work in foundations has been accepted and measured, the spaces around the foundations, structures, pits, trenches, etc. shall be cleared of all debris, and filled with earth in layers not exceeding 15 cm., each layer being watered, rammed and properly consolidated, before the succeeding one is laid. Each layer shall be consolidated to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. Earth shall be rammed with approved mechanical compaction machines. Usually no manual compaction shall be allowed unless the ENGINEER is satisfied that in some cases manual compaction by tampers cannot be avoided. The final backfill surface shall be

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


trimmed and levelled to proper profile as directed by the ENGINEER or indicated on the drawings.

12.4 PLINTH FILLING

Plinth filling shall be carried out with approved material as described herein before in layers not exceeding 15 cm, watered and compacted with mechanical compaction machines. The ENGINEER may however permit manual compaction by hand tampers in case he is satisfied that mechanical compaction is not possible. When filling reaches the finished level, the surface shall be flooded with water, unless otherwise directed, for at least 24 hours, allowed to dry and then the surface again compacted as specified above to avoid settlements at a later stage. The finished level of the filling shall be trimmed to the level/ slope specified.

Where specified in the schedule of works, compaction of the plinth fill shall be carried out by means of 12 tonne rollers smooth wheeled, sheep-foot or wobbly wheeled rollers. In case of compaction of granular material such as sands and gravel, vibratory rollers shall be used. A smaller weight roller may be used only if permitted by the ENGINEER. As rolling proceeds water sprinkling shall be done to assist consolidation. Water shall not be sprinkled in case of sandy fill.

The thickness of each unconsolidated fill layer can in this case be upto a maximum of 200 mm. The ENGINEER will determine the thickness of the layers in which fill has to be consolidated depending on the fill material and equipment used.

Rolling shall commence from the outer edge and progress towards the centre and continue until compaction is to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, but in no case less than 10 passes of the roller will be accepted for each layer.

The compacted surface shall be properly shaped, trimmed and consolidated to an even and uniform gradient. All soft spots shall be excavated and filled and consolidated.

At some locations/ areas it may not be possible to use rollers because of space restrictions, etc. The CONTRACTOR shall then be permitted to use pneumatic tampers, rammers, etc. and he shall ensure proper compaction.

12.5 SAND FILLING IN PLINTH AND OTHER PLACES

At places backfilling shall be carried out with local sand if directed by the ENGINEER. The sand used shall be clean, medium grained and free from impurities. The filled-in-sand shall be kept flooded with water for 24 hours to ensure maximum consolidation. Any temporary work required to contain sand under flooded condition shall be to the CONTRACTOR's account. The surface of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to required level or slope. Construction of floors or other structures on sand fill shall not be started until the ENGINEER has inspected and approved the fill.

12.6 FILLING IN TRENCHES

Filling in trenches for pipes and drains shall be commenced as soon as the joints of pipes and drains have been tested and passed. The backfilling material shall be properly consolidated by watering and ramming, taking due care that no damage is caused to the pipes.

Where the trenches are excavated in soil, the filling from the bottom of the trench to the level of the centre line of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction with selected approved earth in layers not exceeding 8 cm; backfilling above the level of

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


the centre line of the pipe shall be done with selected earth by hand compaction or other approved means in layers not exceeding 15 cm.

In case of excavation of trenches in rock, the filling upto a level 30 cm above the top of the pipe shall be done with fine materials, such as earth, murrum, etc. The filling upto the level of the centre line of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction in layers not exceeding 8 cm whereas the filling above the centre line of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction or approved means in layers not exceeding 15 cm. The filling from a level 30 cm above the top of the pipe to the top of the trench shall be done by hand or other approved mechanical methods with broken rock filling of size not exceeding 15 cm mixed with fine material as available to fill up the voids.

Filling of the trenches shall be carried simultaneously on both sides of the pipe to avoid unequal pressure on the pipe.

13.0 GENERAL SITE GRADING

Site grading shall be carried out as indicated in the drawings and as directed by the ENGINEER. Excavation shall be carried out as specified in the specification. Filling and compaction shall be carried out as specified under clause 12.0 and elsewhere unless otherwise indicated below.

If no compaction is called for, the fill may be deposited to the full height in one operation and levelled. If the fill has to be compacted, it shall be placed in layers not exceeding 225 mm and levelled uniformly and compacted as indicated in clause 12.0 before the next layer is deposited.

To ensure that the fill has been compacted as specified, field and laboratory tests shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at his cost.

Field compaction test shall be carried out at each of the different stages of filling and at frequency of one test in each layer per 2000 sqm areaand also after the fill to the entire height has been completed. This shall hold good for embankments as well.

The CONTRACTOR shall protect the earthfill from being washed away by rain or damaged in any other way. Should any slip occur, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the affected material and make good the slip at his cost.

The fill shall be carried out to such dimensions and levels as indicated on the drawings after the stipulated compaction. The fill will be considered as incomplete if the desired compaction has not been achieved.

If specifically permitted by the ENGINEER, compaction can be achieved by allowing loaded trucks conveying fill or other material to ply over the fill area. Even if such a method is permitted, it will be for the CONTRACTOR to demonstrate that the desired/ specified compaction has been achieved. In order that the fill may be reasonably uniform throughout, the material should be dumped in place in approximately uniform layers. Traffic over the fill shall then be so routed to compact the area uniformly throughout.

If so specified, the rock as obtained from excavation may be used for filling and levelling to indicated grades without further breaking. In such an event, filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 50 cm approximately. After rock filling to the approximate level, indicated above has been carried out, the void in the rocks shall be filled with finer materials such as earth, broken stone, etc. and the area flooded so that the finer materials fill up the voids. Care shall be taken to ensure that the

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


finer fill material does not get washed out. Over the layer so filled, a 100 mm thick mixed layer of broken material and earth shall be laid and consolidation carried out by a 12 tonne roller. No less than twelve passes of the roller shall be accepted before subsequent similar operations are taken up.

14.0 SITE FILLING

14.1 FILL MATERIAL

14.1.1 General

All fill material whether such material is brought from outside borrow areas or from excavation from within the site, will be subject to the ENGINEER’s written approval. Notwithstanding any approval given to the fill material of borrow areas from which fill material is proposed to be brought, the ENGINEER/ OWNER reserves the right to reject such material, which in his opinion either does not meet the specification requirements or is unsuitable for the purpose for which it is intended.

14.1.2 Borrow Areas

It shall be CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to locate suitable borrow areas for borrowing fill material. Such area will be inspected by the ENGINEER and approved before the CONTRACTOR makes arrangements to borrow the fill material. The top soil which may contain vegetation, rubbish, slush, etc. shall not be used. If demanded by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange to have trial pits of specified dimensions and numbers dug at locations specified, for the ENGINEER to examine the nature and type of material likely to be obtained from the borrow area.

14.1.3 Lead, Lift and Transportation

Unless separately provided for, all lead, lift and transportation required for bringing in the fill material from borrow areas or from excavation from within the site shall be included in the CONTRACTOR’s quoted unit rates.

14.1.4 Quality

The borrowed soil shall be generally granular, and non-cohesive. It shall consist of sand, silty sand, murrum, ordinary soil, gravel and shingle. Dredged material shall also be free from sulphates, salts, organic, foreign and other harmful or objectionable materials. Any material rejected by the ENGINEER shall be removed from the site immediately.

14.2 ACCESS ROADS

Roads, whether of temporary or other nature, required to be constructed for access and for movement of men, materials, equipment, transport vehicles, vehicles carrying fill material, etc. to or over borrow areas and/ or to or over areas on which fill has to be deposited shall be constructed by the CONTRACTOR at his cost. Such costs shall be deemed to have been included in the unit rates quoted by the CONTRACTOR. Such access roads shall be maintained in good condition during all seasons to ensure completion of work according to time schedule.

14.3 CLEARING

Site clearing before filling shall be carried out as per clause 5.0 of this specification.

14.4 FILLING

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


14.5.1 Sand Fill

a) Sandy fill shall be deposited to bring the grade level to desired elevation after compaction of fill. Sandy fill shall be carried out as per the method indicated in the drawings.

b) Compaction of sandy fill by flooding the area shall be carried out where so specified. In this case, CONTRACTOR should ensure that the fill material is not washed away. This work should be carried out as directed by ENGINEER.

c) Sandy fill shall be compacted, where so specified, by 12 tonne vibratory rollers. The fill material shall be compacted to the specified density.

d) If the density of fill or use of rollers for compaction is not specified, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure necessary compaction by the passage of trucks, carrying the fill material over the deposited fill in such a way that the entire fill area is covered. This will reasonably compact the sand fill and will be accepted by the ENGINEER. However, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that every layer is thus compacted before the succeeding layers are deposited. Each layer shall not exceed 200 mm in thickness.

14.5.2 Soil Fill

a) Approved soil fill consisting of ordinary soil, murrum, soil containing gravel, shingle, etc. shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 200 mm. CONTRACTOR should ensure that all clods of earth are broken down to a size not larger than 100 mm.

b) Where density of fill or use of rollers is not specified, the fill shall be carried out as specified in this specification.

c) Where the fill material has to be compacted by use of rollers procedure as specified in clause 12.4of this specification shall be followed.

d) Where specified, the required density of fill shall be obtained by proper compaction.

15.0 FILL DENSITY

The compaction, only where so called for, in the Schedule of Quantities/ Items shall comply with the specified (Standard Proctor/ Modified Proctor) density at moisture content differing not more than 4 percent from the optimum moisture content. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate adequately at his cost, by field and laboratory tests that the specified density has been obtained.

16.0 PROPERTIES OF FILLING MATERIAL

The soil selected for filling purpose shall comply with the following requirements:

a) Soil shall be free from swelling properties. Preferably, soil having free swelling index less than 50 shall be used. However, soil having free swelling index up to 100 may be used after carrying out necessary soil improvement and approval by ENGINEER. Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index shall be as per Table 8 of IS: 1498 for low degree of expansion.

b) It shall be possible to compact the soilupto 97% of Proctor Density or Modified Proctor Density as per the project requirement. Broad guidelines for selection of various types of soil groups and their requirements for compaction are indicated in Table 8 of IS: 1498.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


c) Soil shall be free from chemical contamination. It shall have pH value, sulphate and chloride content within the permissible values specified in IS: 456.

17.0 LEAD

Lead for deposition/ disposal of excavated material, shall be as specified in the respective item of work. For the purpose of measurement of lead, the area to be excavated or filled or area on which excavated material is to be deposited/ disposed of shall be divided into suitable blocks and for each of the blocks, the distance between centre lines shall be taken as the lead, which shall be measured by the shortest straight line route on the plan and not the actual route taken by the CONTRACTOR. No extra compensation shall be admissible on the grounds that the lead including that for borrowed material had to be transported over marshy or 'kutcha' land/ route.

18.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

All excavation shall be measured net. Dimensions for purpose of payment shall be reckoned on the horizontal area of the excavation at the base for foundations of the walls, columns, footings, tanks, rafts or other foundations/ structures to be built, multiplied by the mean depth from the surface of the ground in accordance with the foundation drawings. Excavation in side slopes will not be paid for. The CONTRACTOR may make such allowance in his rates to provide for excavation in side slopes keeping in mind the nature of the soil and safety or excavation. However, if the concreting is proposed against the excavated sides, no such over excavation will be permitted. In such cases, over excavation shall be made good by the CONTRACTOR with concrete of the same class as in the foundations at his cost.

Unless otherwise specified, the unit rates quoted for excavation in different types of material shall also account for a basic lead of 100 metres for disposal as specified or directed. Only leads beyond the basic lead of 100 metres will be considered as extra lead and paid for at the rates quoted in the schedules.

Backfilling, as per specification, the sides of foundations of columns, footings, structures, walls, tanks, rafts, trenches, etc. with excavated material will not be paid for separately. It shall be clearly understood that the rate quoted for excavation including backfilling shall include stacking of excavated material as directed, excavation/ packing of selected stacked material, conveying it to the place of final backfill, compaction, etc. as specified. As a rule material to be backfilled shall be stacked temporarily within the basic lead of 100 metres unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER. If the ENGINEER directs/ permits a lead of over 100 metres for such material, the conveyance of the material for the extra distance over the basic lead of 100 metres for backfilling will be paid for.

Payment for fill inside trenches, plinth or similar filling with selected excavated material will be made for only compacted soil volume as specified/ directed. Cost of all other operations shall be deemed to have been covered in the rate quoted for filling. Payment for this work will be made based on measurement of plinth/ trench dimensions filled. The plinth ground levels shall be surveyed before for this purpose. If no compaction is specified/ desired, such filling will not be separately paid for. In such an event the fill shall be levelled/ finished to the profile as directed at no extra cost.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-01






TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R5


Backfilling, plinth filling, etc. with borrowed earth will be paid for at rates quoted. The quoted rate shall include all operations such as clearing, excavation, lead and transport, fill, compaction, etc. as specified. Actual quantity of consolidated filling shall be measured and paid for in cubic metres. The lead, lift, etc. shall be as indicated in the Schedule of Quantities.

Actual quantity of consolidated sand filling shall be measured and paid in cubic metres.

Volume of rock excavated shall be calculated on the basis of length, breadth and depth of excavation dimension as per the foundation drawings.

No payment will be made for excavations/ over-break beyond payment line specified. Where such measurement is not possible as in the case of strata intermixed with soil, excavated rock shall be properly stacked as directed by ENGINEER and the volume of rock calculated on the basis of stack measurements after making appropriate allowance for voids. The allowance to be made for voids shall be decided by ENGINEER and this will not be a subject matter of dispute or appeal.

Measurement for Site Filling will be made on the basis of this specification.

END

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-418-03


DEWATERING SHEET 1 OF 1



TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

ISSUE

R2


1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers the general requirements of dewatering excavations

in general.

2.0 DEWATERING

All excavations shall be kept free of water. Grading and surface water drainage scheme in the vicinity of excavation shall be properly closed to prevent surface water from draining into excavated areas. CONTRACTOR shall remove by pumping or other means approved by ENGINEER any water inclusive of rain water and subsoil water accumulated in excavation and keep all excavations dewatered until the foundation work is completed and backfilled. Sumps made for dewatering must be kept clear of the excavations/ trenches required for further work. Method of pumping shall be approved by ENGINEER; but in any case, the pumping arrangement shall be such that there shall be no movement of subsoil or blowing in due to differential head of water during pumping. Pumping arrangements shall be adequate to ensure no delays in construction.

The CONTRACTOR shall take adequate measures for bailing and/ or pumping out water from excavations and construct diversion channels, bunds, sumps, coffer dams, etc. as may be required. Pumping shall be done directly from the foundation trenches or from a sump outside the excavation in such a manner as to preclude the possibility of movement of water through any fresh concrete or masonry and washing away parts of concrete or mortar. During laying of concrete or masonry and for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter, pumping shall be done to ensure that the surface below the concrete remains dry.

Capacity and number of pumps, location at which the pumps are to be installed, pumping hours, etc. shall be reviewed by the CONTRACTOR from time to time. The ENGINEER may direct the CONTRACTOR to make changes in his scheme if the adopted scheme fails to achieve the desired results.

Pumping shall be done in such a way as not to cause damage to the work or adjoining property by subsidence, etc. Disposal of water shall not cause inconvenience or nuisance in the area or cause damage to the property and structures nearby.

When there is a continuous inflow of water and quantum of water to be handled is considered in the opinion of ENGINEER as large, well point system - Single stage or multi stage, shall be adopted. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER his scheme of well point system including the stages, the spacing, number and diameter of well points, headers, etc. and the numbers, capacity and location of pumps of approvals. Unless separately provided for in the Schedule of Prices, the cost of dewatering shall be included in the item rate for excavation.

3.0 MEASUREMENT

Unless separately provided for in the Schedule of Quantities, dewatering is deemed to have been included in the unit rates quoted for excavation.

END

SPEC. NO. TCE.M4-403-01


SPECIFICATION FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE AND ALLIED WORKS

SHEET 1 OF 49

TCE FORM NO. 329R6 FILE NAME: F-329-Rev-R6.docx

ISSUE R9

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 This Specification covers the general requirements for ready mixed concrete

and for concrete using on-site production facilities including requirements with

regard to the quality, handling, storage of ingredients, proportioning, batching,

mixing, transporting, placing, curing, protecting, repairing, finishing and

testing of concrete; formwork; requirements with regard to the quality,

storage, bending and fixing of reinforcement; grouting as well as mode of

measurement and payment for completed works.

1.2 It shall be very clearly understood that the specifications given herein are brief

and do not cover minute details. However, all works shall have to be carried

out in accordance with the relevant standards and codes of practices or in

their absence in accordance with the best accepted current Engineering

practices or as directed by ENGINEER from time to time. The decision of

ENGINEER as regards the specification to be adopted and their interpretation

and the mode of execution of work shall be final and binding on

CONTRACTOR and no claim whatsoever will be entertained on this account.

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 The following specifications, standards and codes, including all official

amendments/ revisions and other specifications and codes referred to therein,

should be considered a part of this specification. In all cases the latest issue/

edition/ revision shall apply. In case of discrepancy between this specification

and those referred to herein below or other specifications forming a part of

this bid document, this specification shall govern.

2.2 MATERIALS

(a) IS 455:2015 Specification for Portland Slag Cement.

(b) IS 1489:1991 Reaffirmed 2005

Specification for Portland Pozzolana Cement (Parts 1 & 2).

(c) IS 8112:2013 Specification for 43 grade Ordinary Portland Cement.

(d) IS 12330:1988 Reaffirmed 2015

Specification for Sulphate resisting Portland Cement.

(e) IS 383:20160 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates for concrete.

(f) IS 432:1982 Reaffirmed 2015

Specification for mild steel and medium tensile (Parts steel bars and hard drawn steel wires for 1 & 2) concrete reinforcement.

(g) IS 1786:2008 Reaffirmed 2013

Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement.

(h) IS 1566:1982 Reaffirmed 2015

Specification for hard drawn steel wire fabric for (Parts II) concrete reinforcement.




SHEET 2 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(i) IS 9103:1999 Reaffirmed 2013

Specification for admixtures for concrete.

(j) IS 2645:2003 Reaffirmed 2017

Specification for integral cement waterproofing compounds.

(k) IS 4990:2011 Reaffirmed 2017

Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work.

(l) IS 4926:2003 Reaffirmed 2017

Ready Mixed Concrete.

(m) IS 12269:2013 Specification for 53 grade Ordinary Portland Cement.

(n) IS 8041:1990 Reaffirmed 2014

Specification for rapid hardening cement.

(o) IS 12600:1989 Reaffirmed 2014

Specification for low heat cement.

(p) IS 6909:1990 Reaffirmed 2016

Specification for Supersulphated Cement.

(q) IS 12089:1987 Reaffirmed 2008

Specification for Granulated Ground Blast Furnace Slag.

2.3 MATERIAL TESTING

(a)

IS 4031 (Part 1):1996 Reaffirmed 2016

Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement :Part 1Determination of fineness by dry sieving (second revision)

(b)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement: Part 2Determination of fineness by specific surface by Blaine air permeability method (second revision)

(c)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 3 Determination of soundness (first revision)

(d)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 4 Determination of consistency of standard cement paste (first revision)

(e)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 5 Determination of initial and final setting times (first revision)




SHEET 3 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(f)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 6 Determination of compressive strength of hydraulic cement (other than masonry cement) (first revision)

(g)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement: Part 7 Determination of compressive strength of masonry cement (first revision)

(h)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 8 Determination of transverse and compressive strength of plastic mortar using prism (first revision)

(i)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 9 Determination of heat of hydration (first revision)

(j)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 10 Determination of drying shrinkage (first revision)

(k)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement: :Part 11 Determination of density (first revision)

(l)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 12 Determination of air content of hydraulic cement mortar (first revision)

(m)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cementPart 13 Measurement of water retentivity of masonry cement (first revision)

(n)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 14 Determination of false set

(o)


Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement:Part 15 Determination of fineness by wet sieving

(p) IS 4032:1985 Reaffirmed 2014

Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.

(q) IS 650:1991 Reaffirmed 2013

Specification for standard sand for testing of cement.

(r) IS 2430:1986 Reaffirmed 2014

Methods for sampling of aggregates for concrete.




SHEET 4 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(s) DIN EN 12620:2015-07-DRAFT

Aggregates for concrete(Refer to Note).

(t) IS 2386:1963 Reaffirmed 2016

Methods of test for aggregates for concrete (Parts 1 to 8)

(u)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater Part 1 - Sampling

(v)


Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Waste Water - Part 2 : Determination of 33 Elements by Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectroscopy

(w)


Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Wastewater, Part 3: Precision and Accuracy

(x)


Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Wastewater, Part 3: Colour

(y)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 5 Odour

(z)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 6 Odour threshold

(aa)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 7Taste threshold

(bb)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 8 Taste rating

(cc)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 9 Temperature

(dd)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 10 Turbidity




SHEET 5 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(ee)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 11 pH value

(ff) IS 3025 (Part 14):2013/ ISO 7888:1985

Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Waste Water Part 14 Specific Conductance (Wheatstone Bridge, Conductance Cell)

(gg)

IS 3025 (Part 15):1984/ ISO 7888 Reaffirmed 2014

Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 15 Total residue (total solids-dissolved and suspended)

(hh)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 16 Filterable residue (total dissolved solids)

(ii)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 17 Non-filterable residue (total suspended solids

(jj)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 18 Volatile and fixed residue (total filterable and non-filterable)

(kk)


Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Waste Water - Part 19 : Settleable Matter

(ll)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 20 Dispersion characteristics (flow patterns)

(mm)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 21 Total hardness

(nn)


Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Waste Water - Part 22 : Acidity

(oo)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 23 Alkalinity

(pp)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 24 Sulphates




SHEET 6 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(qq)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 25 Chlorine, demand

(rr)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 26 Chlorine, residual

(ss)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 27 Cyanide

(tt)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 28 Sulphite

(uu)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 29 Sulphide

(vv)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 30 Bromide

(ww)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 31 Phosphorus

(xx)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 32 Chloride

(yy)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 33 Iodide

(zz)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 34 Nitrogen

(aaa)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 35 Silica

(bbb)


Methods of Sampling and Test (physical and chemical) for Water and Wastewater - Part 36 : Ozone, Residual




SHEET 7 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(ccc)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 37 Arsenic

(ddd)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 38 Dissolved oxygen

(eee)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and waste water : Part 39 Oil and grease

(fff)

IS 3025 (Part 40:1991 Reaffirmed 2014

Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and waste water :Part 40 Calcium

(ggg)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 41 Cadmium

(hhh)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 42 Copper

(iii)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and waste water : Part 43 Phenols

(jjj)


Methods of Sampling and Test (physical and chemical) for Water and Wastewater - Part 44 : Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)

(kkk)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 45 Sodium and potassium

(lll)


Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Wastewater - Part 46 : Magnesium

(mmm)


Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Wastewater - Part 47 : Lead

(nnn)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater : Part 48 Mercury




SHEET 8 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(ooo)


Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater - Part 49 Zinc

(ppp)


Methods of Sampling and Tests (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Waste Water - Part 50 : Jar Test (Coagulation Test)

(qqq)


Methods of Sampling and Tests (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Waste Water - Part 51 : Carbonate and Bicarbonate

(rrr) IS:6925:1973 Reaffirmed 2013

Methods of test for determination of water soluble chlorides in concrete admixtures.

NOTE: These tests are optional and shall be carried out if directed by

ENGINEER.

2.4 MATERIAL STORAGE

(a) IS 4082:1996 Reaffirmed 2013

Recommendations on stacking and storing of construction materials at site.

2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

(a) IS 10262:2009 Reaffirmed 2014

Recommended guidelines for Concrete Mix Design.

2.6 CONCRETE TESTING


Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.


Method of test for strength of concrete.

(c) IS 9013:1978 Reaffirmed 2013

Method of making, curing and determining compressive strength of accelerated cured concrete test specimens.

(d) IS 8142:1976 Reaffirmed 2016

Method of test for determining setting time of concrete by penetration resistance.

(e) IS 9284:1979 Reaffirmed 2017

Method of test for abrasion resistance of concrete.

(f) IS 2770 (Part 1):1967 Reaffirmed 2017

Methods of testing bond in reinforced concrete:Part 1 Pull-out test




SHEET 9 OF 49


ISSUE R9

2.7 EQUIPMENT


Methods for testing performance of batch-type concrete mixers(first revision)


Specification for roller pan mixer.


Specification for concrete batching and mixing plant.


Specification for concrete transit mixer and agitator.

(e) IS 7242:1974 Reaffirmed 2017

Specification for concrete spreaders.

(f) IS 2505:1992 Reaffirmed 2014

General Requirements for concrete vibrators: Immersion type.


General Requirements for screed board concrete vibrators.


Specification for concrete vibrating tables.

(i) ISO 18652:2005 Doc. MED 18(0957)C

Building Construction Machinery and Equipment –External Vibrators for Concrete

(j) IS 11993:1987 Reaffirmed 2013

Code of practice for use of screed board concrete vibrators.


Specification for concrete finishers.


Specification for portable swing weigh batchers for concrete (single and double bucket type).

(m) IS 2750:1964 Reaffirmed 2016

Specifications for steel scaffoldings.

2.8 CODES OF PRACTICE

(a) IS:456:2000 Reaffirmed 2016

Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.




SHEET 10 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(b) IS:457:1957 Reaffirmed 2014

Code of practice for general construction of plain and reinforced concrete for dams and other massive structures.

(c)


Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids:Part 1 General requirements (first revision)

(d)


Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids: Reinforced concrete structures (first revision)

(e)


Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids:Part 3 Prestressed concrete structures

(f)


Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids: Part 4 Design tables


Code of practice for composite construction.


Code of practice for construction of reinforced concrete shell roof.

(i) IS 2210:1988 Reaffirmed 2017

Criteria for the design of reinforced concrete shell structures and folded plates.

(j) IS 2502:1963 Reaffirmed 2013

Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement.


Recommendation for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced concrete works.


Code of practice for welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars used for reinforced concrete construction.

(m) IS 9417:1989 Reaffirmed 2013

Specification for welding cold worked bars for reinforced concrete construction.

(n) IS 3558:1983 Reaffirmed 2013

Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for consolidating concrete.

(o) IS 3414:1968 Reaffirmed 2015

Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings.

(p) IS 4326:2013 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings.




SHEET 11 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(q)


Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding Part 1 Definitionsand materials

(r) IS 4014 (Part 2):2013

Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding: Part 2 Safetyregulations for scaffolding (first revision)

(s) IS 2571:1970 Reaffirmed 2017

Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring

(t)


Code of practice for extreme weather concreting: Part 1Recommended practice for hot weather concreting

(u)


Code of practice for extreme weather concreting: Part 2Recommended practice for cold weather concreting

(v) IS 3812 (Part 1): 2013

Pulverized fuel ash – Part 1 – For use as pozzolana in cement, cement mortar and concrete

(w) IS 15388: 2003 Specification for Silica Fume

2.9 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY

(a) IS 3696 (Part 1):1987 Reaffirmed 2017

Safety code of scaffolds and ladders: Part 1 Scaffolds(first revision)

(b) IS 3696 (Part 2):1991 Reaffirmed 2017

Safety code of scaffolds and ladders: Part 2 Ladders(first revision)


Safety code for handling and storage of building materials.


Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures.

2.10 MEASUREMENT

(a)

IS 1200 (Part 2):1974Reaffirmed 2012

Method of measurement of building and Engineering works (Part 2 and 5)Methods of measurement of building and civil engineeringworks: Part 2 Concrete works (third revision)

(b) IS 1200 (Part 5):2013

Methods of measurement of building and civil engineering works: part 5 Form work (fourth revision)




SHEET 12 OF 49


ISSUE R9

3.0 GENERAL

3.1 ENGINEER shall have the right at all times to inspect all operations including

the sources of materials, procurement, layout and storage of materials, the

concrete batching and mixing equipment, and the quality control system.

Such an inspection shall be arranged and ENGINEER’s approval obtained,

prior to starting of concrete work. This shall, however, not relieve

CONTRACTOR of any of his responsibilities. All materials, which do not

conform to this specification, shall be rejected.

3.2 Materials should be selected so that they can satisfy the design requirements

of strength, serviceability, safety, durability and finish with due regards to the

functional requirements and the environmental conditions to which the

structure will be subjected. Materials complying with codes/ standards shall

only be used. Other materials may be used after approval of the ENGINEER

and after establishing their performance suitability based on previous data,

experience or tests.

4.0 MATERIALS

4.1 CEMENT

4.1.1 Unless otherwise specified or called for by ENGINEER/ OWNER, cement

shall be Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 269, IS: 8112 or IS:

12269.

4.1.2 The Portland Pozzolana Cement shall conform to IS: 1489/ Portland Slag

Cement conforming to IS: 455 and it shall be used as directed by ENGINEER.

4.1.3 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement conforming to IS: 12330 may be used for

mass concrete construction and generally complying with IS: 12330, but with

Tricalcium Aluminate (C3A) content not more than 5% by mass (as

manufactured by an approved manufacturer) may be used for reinforced

concrete construction.

4.1.4 Only one type of cement shall be used in any one mix unless specifically

approved by ENGINEER. The source of supply, type or brand of cement

within the same structure or portion thereof shall not be changed without prior

approval from ENGINEER.

4.1.5 Cement, which is not used within 90 days from its date of manufacture, shall

be tested at a laboratory approved by ENGINEER and until the results of

such tests are found satisfactory, it shall not be used in any work.

4.1.6 Fly Ash Blended Cements conforming to IS: 1489 (Part I) may be used in

RCC structures as per the guidelines given below:

4.1.7.1 General

(a) IS: 456 - Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete shall be

followed with regard to Concrete Mix Proportion and its production as

under:

i. The concrete mix design shall be done as “Design Mix

Concrete” as prescribed in clause 9 of IS: 456.

ii. Concrete shall be manufactured in accordance with clause 10

of IS 456 covering Quality Assurance measures.




SHEET 13 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(b) Minimum M25 grade of concrete shall be used in all structural

elements made with RCC both in load bearing and framed structure.

(c) The mechanical properties such as modulus of elasticity, tensile

strength, creep and shrinkage of fly ash mixed concrete or concrete

using fly ash blended cements (PPCs) are not likely to be significantly

different and their values are to be taken same as those used for

concrete made with OPC.

If necessitated due to low water/ binder ratio, required workability shall

be achieved by use of chloride free chemical admixtures conforming

to IS: 9103. The compatibility of chemical admixtures and super

plasticisers with each set OPC, fly ash and/ or PPC received from

different sources shall be ensured by trials.

(d) In cases, where structural concrete is exposed to excessive

magnesium sulphate, flyash substitution/ content shall be limited to

18% by weight. Special type of cement with low C3A content may also

be alternatively used. Durability criteria like minimum binder content

and maximum water/ binder ratio also need to be given due

consideration in such environment.

(e) Wet curing period shall be enhanced to a minimum of 10 days or its

equivalent. In hot and arid regions, the minimum curing period shall be

14 days or its equivalent.

4.1.7 Use of Fly Ash Admixed Cement Concrete (FACC) in RCC Structures

There shall be no bar on use of FACC in RCC structures subject to following

additional conditions.

(a) Fly ash shall have its chemical characteristics and physical

requirements, etc. conforming to IS: 3812 (Parts I) and shall be duly

certified.

(b) To ensure uniform blending of fly ash with cement in conformity with

IS: 456, a specific facility needs to be created at site with complete

computerised automated process control to achieve design quality or

with similar facility from Ready Mix Concrete (RMC) plants.

(c) As per IS: 1489 (Part-I) maximum 35% of OPC by mass is permitted

to be substituted with fly ash conforming to IS: 3812 (Part-I).

(d) Separate storage for dry fly ash shall be provided. Storage bins or

silos shall be weather proof and permit a free flow and efficient

discharge of fly ash. The filter or dust control system provided in the

bins or silos shall be of sufficient size to allow delivery of fly ash

maintained at specified pressure to prevent undue emission of fly ash

dust, which may interfere with weighing accuracy.

4.1.8 Use of Silica Fume Admixed Cement Concrete in RCC Structures

Silica fume conforming to IS 15388 may be used to the extent of 5 – 10% of

the cement content as stipulated in IS 456 as a part replacement of cement.

4.1.9 Use of Fly Ash Blended Cements in Cement Concrete (PPCC) in RCC

Structures




SHEET 14 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(a) Subject to General Guidelines detailed out as above, PPC

manufactured conforming to IS: 1489 (Part-I) shall be treated at par

with OPC for manufacture of Design Mix concrete for structural use in

RCC.

(b) Till the time, Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) makes it mandatory to

print the percentage of fly ash on each bag of cement, the certificate

from the PPC manufacture indicating the same shall be insisted upon

before allowing use of such cements in works.

(c) While using PPC for structural concrete work, no further admixing of

fly ash shall be permitted.

4.2 AGGREGATES

4.2.1 Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring stones and gravel (crushed or

uncrushed) and sand. They shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, clean,

durable against weathering, of limited porosity, free from dust/ silt/ organic

impurities/ deleterious materials and conform to IS: 383. Aggregates such as

slag, crushed over burnt bricks, bloated clay ash, sintered fly ash and tiles

shall not be used.

4.2.2 Aggregates shall be washed and screened before use where necessary or if

directed by the ENGINEER.

4.2.3 Aggregates containing reactive materials shall be used only after tests

conclusively prove that there will be no adverse affect on strength, durability

and finish, including long term effects, on the concrete.

4.2.4 The fineness modulus of sand shall neither be less than 2.2 nor more than

3.2. If use of sand having fineness modulus more than 3.2 is unavoidable

then it shall be suitable blended with crusher stone dust.

4.2.5 The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as stated on the drawings,

but in no case greater than 1/4 of the minimum thickness of the member,

provided that the concrete can be placed without difficulty so as to surround

all reinforcement thoroughly and fill the corners of the form.

4.2.6 For concrete elements less than 100 mm thick, consideration should be given

to the use of 10 mm nominal maximum size aggregates. Where 10 mm

maximum size aggregate is required, 10 mm single-size grading shall be

used.

4.2.7 Plums 160 mm and above of a reasonable size may be used where directed.

Plums shall not constitute more than 20% by volume of concrete unless

specified by ENGINEER.

4.3 WATER

4.3.1 Water used for both mixing and curing shall conform to IS: 456. Potable water

is generally satisfactory. Water containing any excess of acid, alkali, sugar or

salt shall not be used.

4.3.2 The pH value of water shall not be less than 6.

4.3.3 Seawater shall not be used for concrete mixing and curing.




SHEET 15 OF 49


ISSUE R9

4.4 REINFORCEMENT

4.4.1 Reinforcement bars shall conform to IS: 432 and/ or IS: 1786 and welded wire

fabric to IS: 1566 as shown on the drawing.

4.4.2 All reinforcement shall be clean, free from pitting, oil, grease, paint, loose mill

scales, rust, dirt, dust or any other substance that will destroy or reduce bond.

4.4.3 Special precaution like coating of reinforcement may be provided with the

prior approval of ENGINEER.

4.5 ADMIXTURES AND ADDITIVES

4.5.1 Approval of Admixtures

Admixture from approved manufacturer shall be used in concrete mix along

withaggregates, cement and water without the written instruction or approval

of the ENGINEER in each case. If more than one admixture is proposed for

use in the same concrete mix, their interaction shall be checked by trial mixes

to ensure their compatibility.

The CONTRACTOR shallnote that the description of any proposed admixture

by trade or brand name will not be sufficient for the approval of the

ENGINEER.

The CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturer's test certificates and

technical literature of the admixture proposed to be used. If directed by the

ENGINEER, the admixture shall be got tested at an approved laboratory at no

extra cost.

The ENGINEER will, wherever appropriate, call for trial batches of concrete to

be prepared to demonstrate the effect of the proposed admixtures both on the

fresh concrete and on the hardened concrete before giving his approval. He

may also lay down additional requirements for the control of the use of such

admixtures.

Notwithstanding any previously given approval, the ENGINEER may withdraw

such approval at any time with respect to any mix containing admixtures if, in

his opinion, the performance of the particular admixture under actual Site

conditions is not completely satisfactory.

4.5.2 Supply and Storage of Admixtures

Accelerating, retarding, water-reducing, super plasticising and air entraining

admixtures shall conform to IS: 9103, integral cement water proofing

admixture to IS: 2645, any other admixture to BS: 5075, if it is applicable,

unless otherwise specified or agreed.Admixtures shall be stored strictly in

accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and precautions shall be

taken during delivery and storage to prevent damage to or adulteration of

admixtures.

4.5.3 Use of Admixtures

Any admixture used in any concrete mix shall only be used at the rate of

dosage or in the proportions previously approved by the ENGINEER, method

of mixing, etc. all in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and

within the manufacturer’s recommended ambient temperature range.




SHEET 16 OF 49


ISSUE R9

Any batch of concrete, which has received an incorrect dose of an admixture

or which shall show deterioration after placing as a result of incorrect use of

admixtures, shall be broken out or otherwise replaced at no additional cost to

the OWNER.

The relative density of liquid admixtures shall be checked for each drum

containing the admixture and compared with the stated/ specified value

before acceptance. Liquid admixtures or powder admixtures that are to be

used as solutions shall be dispensed by an appliance fixed to the mixer,

which measures weight, volume or dosing time and is provided with a

recorder. This appliance shall be accurately calibrated and the calibration and

dosage shall be checked at regular intervals or as directed by the

ENGINEER. All such admixtures shall be dispensed with the mixing water.

All admixture dispensers shall be thoroughly cleaned before commencing

each day’s work and at every interruption to the work.

Where admixtures are to be used in bulk form, these shall be weigh-batched

as is provided in this Specification for the batching of cement.

Powder admixtures to be used in dose form shall only be allowed if premixed

and used as solutions and then only if the premixing procedure has been

previously approved by the ENGINEER.

4.5.4 Corrosion Inhibitor

The use of proprietary corrosion inhibitors, whether specified or not, shall be

subject to the written agreement of the ENGINEER. Their prime function shall

be to form a protective film on the reinforcing steel.

Proprietary corrosion inhibitors shall be added to the concrete in accordance

with the recommendations of the manufacturer. The dosage and rate of

application shall be established by the CONTRACTOR following consultation

with the admixture manufacturer and shall be confirmed to the ENGINEER in

writing.

4.5.5 Chlorides

Under no circumstances shall calcium chloride or chloride based admixtures

be used in any concrete mix, grout or mortar. The chloride content of

admixtures shall be independently tested in an approved laboratory for each

batch of admixture before acceptance. Calcium chloride shall not be used for

accelerating set of the cement for any concrete containing reinforcement or

embedded steel parts. When calcium chloride is permitted such as in mass

concrete works, it shall be dissolved in water and added to the mixing water

by an amount not exceeding 1.5% of the weight of the cement in each batch

of concrete. The designed concrete mix shall be corrected accordingly.

4.6 WASTAGE

4.6.1 Wastage allowance for cement and reinforcing steel (supplied by OWNER)

shall be as specified in Instructions to Bidders.

4.7 SAMPLES AND TESTS

4.7.1 All materials used for the works shall be tested before use. The frequency of

such confirmatory tests shall be decided by ENGINEER.




SHEET 17 OF 49


ISSUE R9

4.7.2 Manufacturer’s test certificate shall be furnished for each batch of cement/

reinforcing steel and when directed by ENGINEER samples shall also be got

tested by the CONTRACTOR in a laboratory approved by ENGINEER at no

extra cost to OWNER. However, where material is supplied by OWNER, all

testing charges shall be borne by OWNER, but transportation and preparation

of material samples for the laboratory shall be done by CONTRACTOR at no

extra cost.

4.7.3 Sampling and testing of aggregates shall be as per IS: 2386 under the

supervision of ENGINEER. The cost of all tests, sampling, etc. shall be borne

by CONTRACTOR.

4.7.4 Water to be used shall be tested to comply with clause 5.4 of IS: 456.

4.7.5 CONTRACTOR shall furnish manufacturer’s test certificates and technical

literature for the admixture proposed to be used. If directed, the admixture

shall be got tested at an approved laboratory at no extra cost.

4.8 STORING OF MATERIALS

4.8.1 All material shall be stored in a manner so as to prevent its deterioration and

contamination, which would preclude its use in the works. Requirements of

IS: 4082 shall be complied with.

4.8.2 CONTRACTOR shall make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate

quantity of cement even if cement is supplied by OWNER. If such cement is

not stored properly and has deteriorated, the material shall be rejected. Cost

of such rejected cement, where cement is supplied by OWNER, shall be

recovered at issue rate or open market rate whichever is higher. Cement

bags shall be stored in dry weatherproof shed with a raised floor, well away

from the outer walls and insulated from the floor to avoid moisture from

ground. Not more than 15 bags shall be stacked in any tier. Storage

arrangement shall be approved by ENGINEER. Storage under tarpaulins

shall not be permitted. Each consignment of cement shall be stored

separately and consumed in its order of receipt. CONTRACTOR shall

maintain record of receipt and consumption of cement.

4.8.3 Each size of coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately and shall

be protected from dropping leaves and contamination with foreign material.

The stacks shall be on hard, clean, free draining bases, draining away from

the concrete mixing area.

4.8.4 CONTRACTOR shall make his own arrangements for storing water at site in

tanks of approved capacity. The tanks shall be cleaned at least once a week

to prevent contamination.

4.8.5 The reinforcement shall be stacked on top of timber sleepers to avoid contact

with ground/ water. Each type and size shall be stacked separately.

5.0 CONCRETE

5.1 GENERAL

5.1.1 Concrete grade shall be as designated on drawings. Concrete in the works

shall be “DESIGN MIX CONCRETE” or “NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE”. All

concrete works of upto grade M15 shall be NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE




SHEET 18 OF 49


ISSUE R9

whereas all other grades, M20 and above, shall be DESIGN MIX

CONCRETE.

5.2 DESIGN MIX CONCRETE

5.2.1 For the purpose of this specification, Design Mix Concrete is classified as

"Normal Concrete". It shall be identified by a prefix and two numbers. Prefix

"M" would denote Normal Concrete. The two numbers e.g. 25 - 40 would

denote the crushing strength of cube at 28 days in N/mm2 and maximum size

of the coarse aggregates in millimetres respectively. Normal concrete shall

have a net dry unit weight of not less than 25 kN/m3, for the finished structure

after curing.

5.2.2 Mix Design and Testing

For Design Mix Concrete, the mix shall be designed as per IS 10262to

provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and

characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in IS: 456. The

design mix shall in addition be such that it is cohesive and does not segregate

during placement and should result in a dense and durable concrete capable

of giving the specified finish. For liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also

result in watertight concrete. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care

while designing the concrete mix and executing the works to achieve the

desired result.

5.2.3 The minimum grade of concrete shall be as per Table 5 of IS: 456 for various

exposure conditions of concrete. For various environmental conditions, refer

to Table 3 of IS: 456.

5.2.4 The minimum cement content for Design Mix Concrete shall be as given in IS

456.

The minimum cement content stipulated IN IS 456applies to 20 mm nominal

maximum size aggregate. For other sizes of aggregate, the minimum cement

content shall be changed as per Table 6 of IS: 456. The CONTRACTOR’s

quoted rates for concrete shall provide for the above eventuality and nothing

extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR on this account. Even in

the case where the quantity of cement required is higher than that specified

above to achieve desired strength based on an approved mix design, nothing

extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR.

Cement content not including fly-ash and GGBS in excess of 450 kg/m3

should not be used unless special consideration has been given in design to

the increased risk of cracking due to shrinkage in thin sections, or to early

thermal cracking and to the increased risk of damage due to alkali silica

reactions.

5.2.5 The quantity of maximum mixing water per unit volume of concrete may be

determined from Table 2 of IS 10262.The water content in Table 2 is for

angular coarse aggregate and for 25 to 50 mm slump range.The water

estimate in Table 2 can be reduced by approximately 10 kg for sub- angular

aggregates,20 kg for gravel with some crushed particles and 25 kg for

rounded gravel to produce same workability.For the desired workability (other

than 25 to 50 mm slump range),the required water content may be




SHEET 19 OF 49


ISSUE R9

established by trial or an increase by about 3 percent for every additional 25

mm slump or alternatively by use of chemical admixtures conforming to IS

9103.Water reducing admixtures or superplasticizing admixtures usually

decrease water content by 5 to 10 percent and 20 percent and above

respectively at appropriate dosages.

5.2.6 It shall be CONTRACTOR’s sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs at

his own cost. He shall furnish to ENGINEER for approval at least 30 days

before concreting operations, a statement of proportions proposed to be used

for the various concrete mixes and the strength results obtained. The strength

requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on 150 mm cubes as per IS:

516 shall comply with the requirements of Table – 2 of IS: 456.

5.2.7 A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each concrete

batch shall have a reasonable chance of being tested i.e., the sampling

should be spread over the entire period of concreting and cover all mixing

units. The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be

in accordance with the cCl. 15.2 of IS 456.:

3 test specimens (cubes) shall be made for each sample for testing at 28

days. The test results of the sample shall be the average of the strength of 3

specimens.

5.2.8 In the ‘very low’ category of workability where strict control is necessary, for

example pavement quality concrete, measurement of workability by

determination of compacting factor will be more appropriate than slump (refer

to IS: 1199) and a value of compacting factor of 0.75 to 0.80 is suggested.

5.2.9 In the ‘very high’ category of workability, measurement of workability by

determination of flow will be appropriate (refer to IS: 9103).

5.2.10 Where single size graded coarse aggregate are not available, aggregates of

different sizes shall be properly combined. The CONTRACTOR’s mix

designshall show that combined grading of coarse aggregate meets the

requirements of Table 2 of IS: 383 for graded aggregates.

5.3 BATCHING AND MIXING OF CONCRETE

5.3.1 Proportions of aggregates and cement, as per approved concrete mix design,

shall be by weight. These proportions shall be maintained during subsequent

concrete batching by means of weigh batchers capable of controlling the

weights within ±2% for cement and ±3% for aggregate. The batching

equipment shall be calibrated at the frequency decided by ENGINEER.

5.3.2 Amount of water added shall be such as to produce dense concrete of

required consistency, specified strength and satisfactory workability and shall

be so adjusted to account for moisture content in the aggregates. Water-

cement ratio specified for use by ENGINEER shall be maintained. Each time

the work stops, the mixer shall be cleaned out, and while recommencing, the

first batch shall have 10% additional sand and cement to allow for sticking in

the drum.

5.3.3 Arrangement should be made by CONTRACTOR to have the cubes tested at

his own expense in an approved laboratory or in field with prior consent of




SHEET 20 OF 49


ISSUE R9

ENGINEER. Sampling and testing of strength and workability of concrete

shall be as per IS: 1199, IS: 516 and IS: 456. It is preferable to cast additional

cubes (minimum 3 specimens) for testing at 7 days and 14 days.

6.0 NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE

6.1 MIX DESIGN AND TESTING

Mix Design and preliminary tests are not necessary for Nominal Mix

Concrete. However, works tests shall be carried out as per IS: 456.

Proportions for Nominal Mix Concrete and water-cement ratio may be

adopted as per Table 9 of IS: 456. However, it will be CONTRACTOR’s sole

responsibility to adopt appropriate nominal mix proportions to achieve the

specified characteristic strength.

6.2 BATCHING AND MIXING OF CONCRETE

Based on the adopted nominal mixes, aggregates shall be measured by

volume. However cement shall be by weight only. Appropriate correction shall

be made for bulking of sand after testing.

7.0 READY MIXED CONCRETE

7.1 All specification as per IS: 4926 – “Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete”

shall be applicable.

7.2 The CONTRACTOR shall identify at least two sources of Ready Mixed

Concrete supplier and get it approved by ENGINEER prior to start of the

Works. Any change in the source of the RMC, shall be got approved by the

ENGINEER.

7.3 The design mix prepared by the RMC supplier shall be the responsibility of

the CONTRACTOR. The testing of concrete as per Codal provisions and the

specifications shall be done by the CONTRACTOR same as the normal

concreting works.

8.0 PRECAST CONCRETE

8.1 GENERAL

8.1.1 Precast concrete shall comply with the preceding Sections relating to

Concrete as far as they are applicable.

8.1.2 Precast concrete manufacture, striking of shutters, curing, lifting, handling,

storage, transportation and installation shall comply with the requirements as

specified herein after.

8.2 PRECASTING BED

8.2.1 All precast units shall be cast on, or their shutters supported from a suitably

prepared level unyielding area.

8.3 MARKING

8.4 FORMWORK

8.4.1 The formwork shall be either steel or lined with steel, waterproof/ laminated

board or such other material as directed and approved by the ENGINEER.

Forms shall be strongly constructed, closely jointed and smooth and shall be

such as to ensure true sharp arises and a perfect surface. Forms shall be so

designed that they can be taken apart and reassembled readily.




SHEET 21 OF 49


ISSUE R9

8.4.2 Surface Finish

Surface Finish of precast units shall comply with requirements of clause 21.0

of this specification. The class of Finish shall generally be of F2 type unless

detailed differently on the drawings or as directed by the ENGINEER. No

construction joints will be permitted within any precast work.

8.5 CASTING TOLERANCE

8.5.1 The casting tolerance, unless otherwise ordered or directed, shall be within

+3 mm of true dimensions.

8.6 STRIKING FORMS

8.6.1 The method and time of striking the side shutters after casting the units will

normally be left to the discretion of the CONTRACTOR, but the ENGINEER

may specify minimum time in which case the CONTRACTOR must comply

with the ENGINEER's directions. In the event of any damage resulting from

premature removal of shutters, or from any other cause, the unit willbe liable

to rejection and replacement by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost, whether

the ENGINEER has specified a minimum striking time or not.

8.7 LIFTING, STACKING AND REMOVAL

8.7.1 Precast units shall not be lifted, transported or used in the Works until they

are sufficiently mature. The crushing tests on the test cubes, which are to be

kept along with the relevant precast units, will be used to assess the maturity

of the units.

8.7.2 Lifting, stacking and removal of precast units shall be undertaken without

causing shock, vibration or undue stress to or in the units. The

CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the ENGINEER that the methods he proposes

for lifting, transporting and setting precast units will not overstress or damage

the units in any way. In the event of overstress or damage due to whatever

cause, the unit or units concerned will be liable to rejection. Rejected units

shall be immediately broken up and removed from the site. The

CONTRACTOR shall replace such rejected units at his own cost.

8.8 CURING

8.8.1 The top and sides of all precast units shall be kept covered constantly and in

a damp condition with clean, potable fresh water for at least seven days after

casting or for such further period as the ENGINEER may direct. It is

preferable to have a curing pond for this purpose.

8.9 PRECASTING RECORDS

The CONTRACTOR shall maintain records for each unit, which shall include

the following:

(a) Type and reference number.

(b) Date of manufacture/ casting.

(c) Bed/ mould number.

(d) Curing method and duration.

(e) Date of removal from bed/ mould.

(f) Test Cube reference number and results.




SHEET 22 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(g) Date of placing in the Works.

(h) Location in the Works.

These records shall be in a format agreed by the ENGINEER and shall be

available for inspection at all times. Copies of these records shall be supplied

to the ENGINEER on completion.

9.0 FORMWORK

9.1 Formwork shall be all inclusive and shall consist of but not limited to shores,

bracings, sides of footings, walls, beams and columns, bottom of slabs, etc.

including ties, anchors, hangers, inserts, falsework, wedges, etc.

9.2 The Design and Engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall

be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. However, if so directed by

ENGINEER, the drawings and calculations for the design of the formwork

shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval.

9.3 Formwork shall be designed to fulfil the following requirements:

9.3.1 Sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar from the concrete

at all stages and appropriate to the methods of placing and compacting.

9.3.2 Capable of providing concrete of the correct shape and surface finish within

the specified tolerance limitsas given in clause 11.1 of IS 456.

9.4 The formwork may be of lined timber, waterproof/ plastic coated plywood,

steel, plastic depending upon the type of finish specified. Sliding forms and

slip form may be used with the approval of ENGINEER. Timber for formwork

shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes, loose knots, worm holes,

warps and other surface defects. Joints between formwork and formwork and

between formwork and structure shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of

slurry from concrete using foam and rubber seals.

9.5 The faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and

two coats of approved mould oil applied before fixing reinforcement. All

rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings, sawdust, wire pieces, dust, etc. shall

be removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed.

Where directed, cleaning of forms shall be done by blasting with a jet of

compressed air at no extra cost.

9.6 Forms intended for reuse shall be approved by the ENGINEER.

CONTRACTOR shall equip himself with enough quantity of shuttering to allow

for wastage so as to complete the job in time.

9.7 Permanent formwork shall be checked for its durability and compatibility with

adjoining concrete before it is used in the structure. It shall be properly

anchored to the concrete.

9.8 For liquid retaining structures sleeves shall not be provided for through bolts

nor shall through bolts be removed if provided. The bolts, in the latter case,

shall be cut at 25 mm depth from the surface and the hole made good by

cement mortar of the same proportion as the concrete just after striking the

formwork.

9.9 Forms for substructure may be omitted when, in the opinion of ENGINEER,

the open excavation is firm enough (in hard non-porous soils) to act as a




SHEET 23 OF 49


ISSUE R9

form. Such excavation shall be slightly larger, as directed by ENGINEER,

than that required as per drawing to compensate for irregularities in

excavation.

9.10 Formwork showing excessive distortion, during any stage of construction,

shall be removed. Placed concrete affected by faulty formwork, shall be

entirely removed and formwork corrected prior to placement of new concrete

at CONTRACTOR’s cost.

9.11 The striking time for formwork shall be determined based on the following

requirements:

(a) Development of adequate concrete strength;

(b) Permissible deflection at time of striking formwork;

(c) Curing procedure employed - its efficiency and effectiveness;

(d) Subsequent surface treatment to be done;

(e) Prevention of thermal cracking at re-entrant angles;

(f) Ambient temperatures and aggressiveness of the environment (unless

immediate adequate steps are taken to prevent damage to the

concrete).

Before removing formwork of soffit of slabs/ beams compressive strength at

7/ 14/ 21 days shall be checked.

9.12 Under normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 200

Celsius) forms may be struck after expiry of the period given in IS: 456 unless

directed otherwise by ENGINEER. For Portland Pozzolona/ Slag Cement the

stripping time shall be suitably modified as directed by the ENGINEER. It is

the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to ensure that forms are not struck until

the concrete has developed sufficient strength to support itself, does not

undergo excessive deformation and resists surface damage and any stresses

arising during the construction period.

10.0 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION AND PLACEMENT

10.1 Reinforcing bars shall be bent and fixed in accordance with the procedure

specified in IS 2502.

10.2 All bars shall be bent byBar bending machines.

10.3 Re-bending or straightening incorrectly bent bars shall not be done without

approval of ENGINEER.

10.4 Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed and maintained firmly in the correct

position by the use of blocks, spacers, chairs, binding wire, etc. to prevent

displacement during placing and compaction of concretein accordance with

clause 12.3 to 12.6 of IS 456. The tied in-place reinforcement shall be

approved by ENGINEER prior to concrete placement. PVC or concrete

spacers of appropriate size shall be used with the approval of ENGINEER.

10.5 Binding wire shall be 16 gauge soft annealed wire. Ends of the binding wire

shall be bent away from the concrete surface and in no case encroach into

the concrete cover.




SHEET 24 OF 49


ISSUE R9

10.6 Substitution of reinforcement, laps/ splices not shown on drawing shall be

proposed by CONTRACTOR and approved by ENGINEER.

10.7 If permitted by ENGINEER, welding of reinforcement shall be done in

accordance with IS: 2751, IS: 9417 and SP: 34 as applicable.

10.8 Tolerance on placement of reinforcement shall be as per Cl. 12.3 of IS: 456.

11.0 TOLERANCES

11.1 Tolerance for formed and concrete dimensions shall be as per IS: 456 unless

specified otherwise.

11.2 Tolerance is a specified permissible variation from lines, grade or dimensions

given in drawings. No tolerance specified for horizontal or vertical building

lines or footings shall be construed to permit encroachment beyond the legal

boundaries. Unless otherwise specified, the following tolerances will be

permitted.

11.2.1 Tolerances for RC Buildings

(a) Variation from the Plumb

i. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arises

5 mm per 2.5 m or 25 mm, whichever is less.

ii. For exposed corner columns and other conspicuous lines.

In any bay or 5 m maximum - 5 mm

In 10 m or more - 10 mm

(b) Variation from the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings

i. In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits and in arises

In 2.5 m - 5 mm



ii. For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and

other conspicuous lines



(c) Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan

and related position of columns, wall and partitions



(d) Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, openings in walls and

floors - 5 mm except in the case of and for anchor bolts.

(e) Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in

the thickness of slabs and walls




SHEET 25 OF 49


ISSUE R9

Minus - 5 mm

Plus - 10 mm

(f) Footings

i. Variation in dimension in plan

Minus - 5 mm

Plus - 50 mm

ii. Misplacement or eccentricity

2% of footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than

50 mm

iii. Reduction in thickness

Minus - 5% of specified thickness subject to

a maximum of 50 mm

(g) Variation in steps

i. In a flight of stairs

Rise - 3 mm

Tread - 5 mm

ii. In consecutive steps

Rise - 1.5 mm

Tread - 3 mm

11.2.2 Tolerances in Other Structures

(a) All structures

i. Variation of the construction linear outline from established position in

plan.

In 5 m - 10 mm


ii. Variation of dimensions to individual structure features from established

positions.


In buried construction - 50 mm

iii. Variations from plumb, from specified batter or from curved surfaces of

all structures.

In 2.5 m - 10 mm

In 5 m - 15 mm





SHEET 26 OF 49


ISSUE R9

In buried construction - Twice the above values

iv. Variations from level or grade indicated on drawings in slabs, beams,

soffits, horizontal grooves and visible arrises.

In 2.5 m - 5 mm

In 7.5 m or more - 10 mm

In buried construction - Twice the above values

v. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns, beams, buttresses,

piers and similar members.

Minus - 5 mm

Plus - 10 mm

vi. Variation in the thickness of slabs, walls, arch sections and similar

members.

Minus - 5 mm

Plus - 50 mm

11.2.3 Footing for Columns, Piers, Walls, Buttresses and Similar Members

i. Variation of dimension in Plan

Minus - 10 mm

Plus - 50 mm

ii. Misplacement or eccentricity

2% footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than 50

mm

iii. Reduction in thickness

5% of specified thickness subject to a maximum of 50 mm

11.2.4 Tolerance in fixing Anchor Bolts shall be as follows:

i. Anchor bolts without sleeves : 1.5 mm in plan

ii. Anchor bolts with sleeves : 5.0 mm in elevation

- for bolts upto and including 28

mm dia. : 5 mm in all directions

- for bolts upto 32 mm dia. : 3 mm in all directions

iii. Embedded parts : 5 mm in all directions




SHEET 27 OF 49


ISSUE R9

11.2.5 Tolerances in Formwork

The formwork shall be designed and constructed to the shapes, lines and

dimensions shown on the drawings within the tolerances given below:

1. Deviation from specified dimensions of

cross section of columns and beams -6 mm

2.

Deviations from dimensions of footings

(tolerances apply to concrete dimensions

only, not to positioning of vertical

reinforcing steel or dowels)

+12 mm

(a) Dimension in Plan -12 mm +50 mm

(b) Eccentricity

0.02 times the width of the footing

in the direction of deviation, but not

more than 50 mm

(c) Thickness ± 0.05 times the specified thickness

11.3 Tolerance for top of concrete of equipments and structural steel foundations

shall be as under unless more stringent requirements are specified by

equipment manufacturer:

(a) Where grout thickness is less than or equal to 25 mm: ±5 mm.

(b) Where grout thickness is more than 25 mm: ±5 mm.

11.4 EXECUTION AND REMOVAL OF FORMS

(a) Before placing concrete the surface of all forms shall be coated with

suitable non-staining form releasing agents such as raw linseed oil so

as to prevent adhesion of concrete and to facilitate removal of forms.

(b) The form releasing agent shall cover the forms fully and evenly without

excess over drip. Care shall be taken to prevent form releasing agents

from getting on the surface of the construction joints and on

reinforcement bars. Special care shall be taken to thoroughly cover

form strips for narrow grooves, so as to prevent swelling of the forms

and the consequent damage to concrete prior to or during removal of

forms.

(c) Immediately before concrete is placed care shall be taken to see that

all forms are in proper alignment and the supports and fixtures are

properly secured and tightened.

(d) Where forms for continuous surfaces are placed in successive units,

the forms shall lap and fit tightly over the completed surface so as to

prevent leakage of cement slurry from the fresh concrete and to

maintain accurate alignment of the surface.

(e) Forms shall be left in place until their removal is authorised and shall

then be removed with care so as to avoid injury to concrete.




SHEET 28 OF 49


ISSUE R9

(f) Removal of forms shall be started whenthe concrete has achieved

strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be

subjected at the time of removal of formwork.

(g) In normal circumstances and where ordinary Portland cement is used

forms can be allowed to be struck asper the guideline given in clause

11.3 of IS 456.

Note: Time shall be measured from last batch concreted in respect to the

structural member under consideration. For other cement stripping time as

recommended above may be suitably decided by ENGINEER.

Re-propping shall be done to the below floor to carry the construction load

transferred through props/ equipment, etc. during construction of upper floor

and props left under till the period of removal of props supported to or any

other load due to construction load on the upper floor. Re-propping shall be

part of shuttering/ formwork for concrete without any claim for extra cost.

11.5 SETTLEMENT OF FORMWORK AND CAMBER

Due to various reasons such as closure of form joints, shrinkage of timber,

dead load deflections, elastic shortening of form members or formwork,

deflections, settlement may occur. The CONTRACTOR shall take

precautions, including using adequately rigid formwork, in order to prevent

excessive settlement/ deflection; the usual acceptable limit being 1/500 of the

spans of the formwork.

In the absence of any specified camber on the drawings, soffit of all beams

more than 5 m in span and other than pre-stressed concrete beams shall be

laid to a camber, the amount of which at mid span shall not be less than

1/500 of the span of the structure. The profile of soffit shall be parabolic.

12.0 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT

12.1 The faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and

two coats of approved mould oil applied before fixing reinforcement. All

rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings, sawdust, wire pieces, dust, etc. shall

be removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed.

Where directed, cleaning of forms shall be done by blasting with a jet of

compressed air at no extra cost.

12.2 All arrangements - formwork, equipment and proposed procedure, shall be

approved by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall maintain separate Pour Card

for each pour as per the format enclosed.

13.0 TRANSPORTING, PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE

13.1 Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the formwork with

minimum time lapse by methods that shall maintain the required workability

and will prevent segregation, loss of any ingredients or ingress of foreign

matter or water.

13.2 In all cases concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its

final position. For locations where direct placement is not possible and in

narrow forms, CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable drops and “Elephant

Trunks”. Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of more than 1.5 m.




SHEET 29 OF 49


ISSUE R9

13.3 Concrete shall not be placed in flowing water. Under water concrete shall be

placed in position by tremie or by pipeline from the mixer and shall never be

allowed to fall freely through the water.

13.4 While placing concrete the CONTRACTOR shall proceed as specified below

and also ensure the following:

(a) Continuously between construction joints and predetermined

abutments.

(b) Without disturbance to forms or reinforcement.

(c) Without disturbance to embedments.

(d) Without dropping in a manner that could cause segregation or shock.

(e) In deep pours only when the concrete and formwork is designed for

this purpose and by using suitable chutes or pipes.

(f) Do not place if the workability is such that full compaction cannot be

achieved.

(g) Without disturbing the unsupported sides of excavations; prevent

contamination of concrete with earth. Provide sheeting, if necessary.

In supported excavations, withdraw the linings progressively as

concrete is placed.

(h) If placed directly onto hardcore or any other porous material, dampen

the surface to reduce loss of water from the concrete.

(i) Ensure that there is no damage or displacement to sheet membranes.

(j) Record the time and location of placing structural concrete.

(k) When concrete is brought from batching plant to site in millers, the

time of mixing and the time of pour shall be checked to ensure that

setting has not started.

13.5 Concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty minutes

(Initial setting time) of leaving the mixer. Concrete shall be compacted during

placing with approved vibrating equipment without causing segregation until it

forms a solid mass free from voids, thoroughly worked around reinforcement

and embedded fixtures and into all corners of the formwork. When placing

concrete in layers advancing horizontally, care shall be taken to ensure

adequate vibration, blending and melding of the concrete between successive

layers. Vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with reinforcement,

formwork and finished surfaces after start of initial set. Over-vibration leads to

segregation and shall be avoided.

13.6 Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated equipment

after getting the complete procedure approved by ENGINEER. The slump

shall be held to the minimum necessary for conveying concrete by this

method. When concrete is to be pumped, the concrete mix shall be specially

designed to suit pumping. Care shall be taken to avoid stoppages in work

once pumping has started.




SHEET 30 OF 49


ISSUE R9

13.7 CONTRACTOR shall submit a method statement to ENGINEER for approval,

furnishing details of pour sequence, thickness of each layer, mixing and

conveying equipment proposed, etc. preferably with a sketch.

13.8 Except when placing with slip forms, each placement of concrete in multiple

lift work, shall be allowed to set for at least 24 hours after the final set of

concrete before the start of subsequent placement. Placing shall stop when

concrete reaches the top of the opening in walls or bottom surface of slab, in

slab and beam construction, and it shall be resumed before concrete takes

initial set but not until it has had time to settle as determined by ENGINEER.

Concrete shall be protected against damage until final acceptance.

14.0 PLACING OF CONCRETE BY PUMPING METHODS

14.1 GENERAL

14.1.1 Placing of concrete by pumping will be as specified or authorised by

ENGINEER to achieve the required speediness of construction and maintain

targeted schedules.

14.1.2 Pumping of concrete shall be done only after conducting pumpability trials to

ascertain the performance of fresh concrete on pumping in presence of the

ENGINEER as per approved procedure. During pumping, concrete shall be

conveyed either through rigid pipe or through flexible hose and discharged

directly into the desired area. A steady supply of pumpable concrete is

necessary for satisfactory pumping. Pumpable concrete requires properly

graded aggregates, material uniformity, consistent batching and thorough

mixing. They shall be used for concreting densely reinforced structures,

internal structural elements of buildings and for large pours of

concrete.Concrete pumps used shall be able to deliver concrete over a

horizontal and vertical distance as per the directives of the ENGINEER.

14.1.3 Placement of normal concrete by pumping will be permitted as specified or

authorised by the ENGINEER. The decision, whether or not to pump any

particular mix shall rest entirely with the ENGINEER and no extra claims for

payment on this account will be entertained. The pumping equipment, pipe

lines and accessories as well as proportioning of pumpable concrete shall

generally conform to the recommendations of ACI-304.2R (latest revision) –

Placing of concrete by pumping method - Proportioning of pumpable mixes

gives certain guide lines on concrete mix. However, final selection of mix shall

be as instructed by the ENGINEER.

14.2 PUMPING EQUIPMENT

14.2.1 Requisite number of modern dependable concrete pumps capable of

pumping concrete of specified quality at a rate required to meet the

construction schedules, together with a balanced complement of pipelines,

accessories, spare parts, power controlled placing booms, and experienced

pump operators and maintenance staff shall be provided at locations and in a

manner approved by the ENGINEER.

14.2.2 The pumping plant shall be completely installed on each occasion, with

preliminary mock operation for a sufficient length of time prior to scheduled

placement of a particular concrete pour, to enable the ENGINEER to conduct




SHEET 31 OF 49


ISSUE R9

pumpability tests and necessary adjustments for the concrete mix, prior to

use of the pumping for placement of concrete.

14.3 PROPORTIONING PUMPABLE CONCRETE

14.7.1 Basic Consideration

(a) Although the ingredients of concrete to be placed both by pumping

and by other means are the same, more emphasis shall be laid on the

quality control and proportioning of a dependable pumpable mix.

Dependability is effected by the equipment and the operator, with the

control of all of the ingredients in the mixture, the batching and mixing

operations, and the knowledge and experience of all the personnel

from beginning to end.

(b) Concrete mixes for pumping shall be “plastic” at all times. Stiff mixes

shall not be used for pumping as they do not pump well. Particular

attention shall be given to the mortar (cement, sand and water) and

the amounts and sizes of coarse aggregates.

14.4 NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATES

14.8.1 Coarse Normal Weight Aggregates

The maximum size of angular coarse aggregate shall be limited to one-third

of the smallest inside diameter of the hose or pipe based on simple geometry

of cubical shape aggregates. For well-rounded aggregates, the maximum size

shall be limited to 40% of the pipe or hose diameter. Adequate provisions

shall be made to eliminate over size particles in the concrete by screening or

by careful selection of aggregate. Gradation of sizes of coarse aggregates

shall correspond to Grades A and B of Table-1 and shall meet IS: 2386

requirements. If required, certain fractional sizes shall be combined and

blended to produce the required gradation. Greater emphasis shall be laid on

uniformity of gradation throughout the entire job.

The maximum size of the coarse aggregate has a significant effect on the

volume or amount of coarse aggregate that may be effectively used in a mix.

As will be seen from Table-2 the quantity of coarse aggregate must be

substantially reduced as the maximum size becomes smaller. Mixes

consisting of too large a portion of coarse aggregate with less cement shall be

avoided.

Table-1

Grading Requirement of Coarse Aggregates for Pumped Concrete

Grade – A (Maximum Size 40 mm) Grade – B (Maximum Size 20 mm)

Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight

Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight

50 mm 100 25 mm 100

40 mm 95 to 100 20 mm 90 to 100

20 mm 35 to 70 12.50 mm 20 to 55

10 mm 10 to 30 10 mm 0 to 15

4.75 mm 0 to 5 4.75 mm 0 to 5




SHEET 32 OF 49


ISSUE R9

Table-2

Volume of Coarse Aggregate per unit of Volume of Concrete

Grade – A (Maximum Size 40 mm) Grade – B (Maximum Size 20 mm)

Maximum Size Volume of Dry-rodded Coarse Aggregate per Unit Volume of Aggregates of Concrete for different Fineness Modulii of sand

FMS = 2.40 FMS = 2.60 FMS = 2.80 FMS = 3.00

10 0.50 0.48 0.46 0.44

12.50 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.53

20 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60

25 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.65

40 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70

50 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.72

Notes:

1. Volumes are based on aggregates in dry-rodded condition.

2. These volumes are selected from empirical relationships to produce

concrete with a degree of workability suitable for usual reinforced

construction. When placement is to by pump, they shall be reduced by

about 10 percent.

3. FMS = Fineness Modulus of Sand.

14.8.2 Fine Normal Weight Aggregate

Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand or a

combination thereof and shall be graded within the following limits:

Sieve Size Percent passing by Weight

9.50 mm 100

4.75 mm 95 to 100

2.36 mm 80 to 100

1.18 mm 50 to 85

600 microns 25 to 60

300 microns 10 to 30

150 microns 2 to 10

Fine aggregates shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2386. Particular

attention shall be given to those passing through finer screen sizes. For small

line system (less than 150 mm) 15 to 30% shall pass 300 micron sieve and 5

to 10% shall pass 150 micron sieve. Sands, which are deficient in either of

these two sizes shall be blended with selected finer sands or inert material

such as quarry dust to produce these desired percentages.

The fineness modulus of sand meeting the above grading limits will fall

between 2.13 and 3.37 with the median being 2.75. Pumpability of mixes will




SHEET 33 OF 49


ISSUE R9

generally improve with a decrease in the fineness modulus value or in other

words with the use of finer sands. Sands having a fineness modulus between

2.40 and 3.00 are generally satisfactory provided that the percentages

passing 300 micron and 150 micron sieves meet the previously stated

requirements. It shall also be emphasised that for uniformity, the fineness

modulus of the sand shall not vary more than 0.20 from the average value

used in proportioning.

Table-2 is suggested as a guide to determine the amounts of coarse

aggregate to be combined with sand of different fineness modulus. The foot

notes of Table-2 require a reduction in the volume of coarse aggregate by

10% for pumping. This margin shall be considered as a safety margin for

variations in sand gradation to reduce pumping pressure. Under conditions of

good materials control and uncomplicated line systems, this reduction may

not be required.

Although in practice it may not be possible to duplicate this recommended

sand gradation exactly, sands having a gradation closer to the upper limit

(fine sand) are more desirable for pumping than those near the lower limit

(coarse sand). The fineness modulus of sand according to the recommended

curve is 2.68 and the gradation meets all the requirements stated earlier.

14.5 WATER AND SLUMP

14.9.1 Water requirements and slump control for pumpable normal weight concrete

are interrelated and extremely important considerations. The mixing water

requirements for a particular mix shall be determined by the ENGINEER and

modified to suit the fineness of sands, quality of admixtures, additives,

cement replacements or other special materials being used in the concrete.

14.9.2 The CONTRACTOR shall establish the optimum slump jointly with the

ENGINEER for a pumpable mix at the discharge hose end and shall maintain

control of that particular slump throughout the course of a job. Excess water

shall not be added in the receiving hopper to make the concrete mix

pumpable, instead attempt shall be made to obtain ‘truly plastic mix’ by proper

proportioning.

14.9.3 Slump of concrete may undergo change between initial mixing and final

placement. If the slump at the discharge hose end are to be maintained within

specified limits, it will be necessary for the concrete to enter the pump at a

higher slump to give the required mobility during transport. Slump

adjustments by re-proportioning of the constituents as may be required shall

be carried out by the CONTRACTOR jointly in consultation with the

ENGINEER for every type of mix and for every new placement and set up of

pump and pipelines.

14.6 CEMENT CONTENT

(a) The determination of the cement content for a normal weight pump

mix shall follow the same basic principles used for conventionally

placed concrete. The water cement ratio shall be established by the

ENGINEER on the basis of exposure conditions, strength

requirements or minimum cement consumption, whichever governs.




SHEET 34 OF 49


ISSUE R9

However, because of slightly higher ranges of slump and ratios of fine

to coarse aggregates, the pump mix may require an increase in the

amount of cement above those pumpable concrete mass. The total

quantity of fines passing through the 300 micron sieve including

cement, fine sand, stone dust, etc. shall be in the range of 380 to 450

kg/cum of concrete.

(b) Cement content in case of M50 shall be maximum of 425 kg/cum, and

shall be a mix with high range of workability i.e. 175 mm +/- 25 mm. All

the contents shall be mixed based on the mix design and trial studies.

(c) While establishing the cement content for normal weight trial mixes, it

will be necessary to take into account the capabilities of the particular

pump and its operator for over strength proportioning in the laboratory

to provide for field variations.

(d) In case of pumping difficulties, it is desirable and economical to correct

any deficiencies in the aggregates, especially in the sand instead of

using extra quantities of sand. With well graded coarse and fine

aggregates properly combined, the cement requirement for pumpable

mixes shall closely resemble to those used in conventionally placed

concrete.

14.7 ADMIXTURES

The use of poor aggregate grading or aggregate with continuous change in

overall grading of the ‘combinations’ during concreting operation will make

special admixtures quite useful in overcoming the main difficulty like blockage

in pumping. These admixtures shall be incorporated in pumpable concrete to

achieve the following.

(a) Increase in the range of mix designs, which may be successfully

pumped using water reducing admixtures/ super plasticisers with the

approval of the ENGINEER.

(b) Reducing the risk of pipeline blockages by preventing segregation of

concrete mix.

(c) To have satisfactory/ specified performance both in fresh and

hardened state.

Any admixture that increases workability in normal weight concrete may

usually improve pumpability. The choice of type of admixture and the

advantage gained from its use in concrete to be pumped will depend on the

characteristics of the pump mix and will be finally decided by the ENGINEER

in consultation with the admixture manufacturer.

For improvement of pumpability the following admixtures are generally

recommended. Such admixtures used shall conform to ASTM C-494/ IS:

9103:

(a) Water Reducing Admixtures/ Super Plasticisers

These cause reduction in water requirements at constant slump or an

increase in slump at constant water-cement ratio. They can be

designed to have no apparent effect on setting time, or alternately to




SHEET 35 OF 49


ISSUE R9

achieve varying degrees of acceleration or retardation in rate of

hardening of the mixture. Most water reducing admixtures increase

the palpability of the concrete mix through plasticising action.

(b) Air Entraining Admixtures

Air entrained concrete is considerably plastic and more workable than

non air entrained concrete. It can be pumped with less coarse

aggregate segregation and has less tendency for concrete to bleed.

Start-up after shut down is also generally easier due to reduced

bleeding. For pumped concrete these limits shall be obtained at the

point of placement in the structure. To compensate for air content loss

in the air entrained concrete higher entrainment of air may be required

at the batching plant. The required adjustment of admixture dose shall

be carried out by the ENGINEER after carrying out necessary air loss

tests. An air content in the range of 3 to 5% shall be preferred as

higher ranges reduces the delivery capacity of pump systems due to

increased compressibility of the concrete and also reduces strength of

concrete.

If air-entraining plasticiser is used, typically 13% minimum water

reduction is possible. Therefore, strength loss due to air entrainment

will be compensated by using such air-entraining plasticiser.

(c) Finely Divided Mineral Admixtures

CONTRACTOR, if specifically approved by the ENGINEER, can use

mineral admixture. In concrete mixtures, deficient in fines, the addition

of a finely divided inert mineral admixture generally improves

workability, pumpability, reduces the amount of bleeding and

increases the strength. The effect on strength depends on the type of

mineral admixture used, conditions under which the concrete is cured,

and the amount of admixture used. Water soluble polymers obtained

from cellulose derivations may also be used as an admixture with a

small dose of 60 to 150 gms/cum to increase viscosity of the mixing

water and reduce the frictional resistance to flow and bleeding in the

pipe system.

14.8 TRIAL MIXES

The trial mixes for pumping shall be prepared and tested in the Site laboratory

by CONTRACTOR in accordance with clause 14.9 of this specification. The

ingredients, particularly the coarse and fine aggregates shall also be checked

for the conformance to the desired properties described, by the

CONTRACTOR. Table-2 may be used to select the volume of coarse

aggregate per cum of concrete. In using this Table it is recommended that the

highest probable fineness modulus of sand be used rather than the average

fineness modulus to ensure consistent performance during pumping. For

additional plasticity, 10% reduction in coarse aggregate quantities shall be

considered. Experience with the use of local aggregate and their uniformity

shall also be considered in the proportioning concepts.




SHEET 36 OF 49


ISSUE R9

14.9 MIX DESIGN FOR PUMPABLE CONCRETE

Taking the above factors into account, the concrete shall first be designed for

normal placement conditions and then modified as necessary to suit pumping.

The following procedure shall be adopted:

(a) Design the mix for specified characteristic strength and workability.

(b) Check and ensure combined grading of aggregates i.e. as uniform

grading as possible. This requirement is vital as gaps or partial gaps

are the basic reasons for poor water retention property and

segregation under pressure.

(c) Determine the optimum sand content for the required workability and

increase sand content by reducing volume of coarse aggregate per

unit volume of concrete by about 10% as a degree of protection

against under sanding due to batch variations.

(d) Recheck the minimum cement content for durability.

(e) Examine the total fines content i.e. cement and fine aggregates

passing through 300 micron sieve and readjust the mix, if necessary.

A very rich mix with fine sand will be as problematic as a coarse sand

with lean mix.

(f) Re-appraise the grading if the particle shape of any particular fraction

is such as may cause excessive voids. Re-adjust as required, if

necessary examining the void ratio of various combinations, using

void meter to achieve minimum voids at the expense of ‘sufficient

fines’ content.

(g) If dissatisfied with (a) to (f) as above, consider what remedial action

may be taken to overcome the troublesome factor. For example, the

following two situations may occur:

If the sand has more coarser fraction it is worth considering the

addition of a proportion of finer sand, or alternately if the sand has

more finer fraction, the addition of coarse fraction may be considered.

Addition or reduction of cement may help, but the correct solution is to

overcome the gap in overall grading as stated above.

(h) In a 20 mm aggregate maximum size, if there is an excess of 10 to

4.75 mm fraction, and this fraction is flaky with unduly large surface

area, either increase the sand content to reduce the possibility of

segregation and to reduce the inter-practical stresses, or (better) re-

grade using single sized aggregates.

(i) At the trial mix stage small variations can be made preferably in the

light of the pressures registered and observed performances through

the pump. In certain cases admixtures may be economically and

beneficially used to improve or eliminate circumstances that cannot

readily be overcome by other means.

14.10 TESTING FOR PUMPABILITY

No mix shall be accepted for use on a pumping job until an actual test under

field condition has been completed. Testing a mix for pumpability involves




SHEET 37 OF 49


ISSUE R9

duplication of the anticipated job condition from beginning to end. The

batching and conveying by truck mixers shall be the same as will be used, the

same pump and operator shall be present. The pipe and hose layouts shall

simulate the actual condition as far as practicable. Prior use of a mix on

another job may furnish evidence of pumpability, but only if conditions are

duplicated. Before commencing a new concreting job, the CONTRACTOR

shall carry out pumpability tests in consultation with the ENGINEER. Concrete

used in such tests shall not be used in the actual construction, unless

specifically permitted by the ENGINEER.

Following parameters shall be established by pumpability trials:

(a) Insitu compressive and split tensile strength of concrete.

(b) Curing the sample at Site by sprinkling water.

(c) Curing the sample at Laboratory in curing tanks.

(d) Wet sieve analysis of concrete to ensure that proportions of

ingredients before and after pumping are same.

14.11 FIELD PRACTICES

(a) Proper planning of concrete supply, pump location, line layout, placing

sequence and the entire pumping operation shall be done by the

CONTRACTOR and got approved by the ENGINEER on every

occasion before commencement of concreting job. The pump shall be

as near the placing area as practicable, and the entire surrounding

area must have adequate bearing strength to support the concrete

delivery trucks, thus assuring a continuous supply of concrete. For

important concrete placements and large jobs, adequate standby

power and pumping equipment shall be provided as replacement,

should break down occur.

(b) Direct communication shall be maintained between the pump operator,

concrete placing crew and batching plant. The placing rate shall be

estimated so that concrete can be operated at an appropriate delivery

rate. As a final check, the pump shall be started and operated without

concrete to ascertain that, all moving parts are operating properly. As

stated previously, the grout mortar shall be pumped into the line to

provide initial lubrication for the concrete. As soon as concrete is

received, the pump shall be run slowly until the lines are completely

full and the concrete is slowly moving. Once the pumping is started,

the operator shall ensure that the hopper of the pump is not emptied

beyond a certain level, as air may enter the pipeline and cause

choking. Continuous pumping should be ensured. If a delay occurs

because of concrete delivery, form repairs, or other factors, the pump

shall be slowed down to maintain some movement of the concrete till

normal supply is resumed. For longer delays, the concrete in the

receiving hopper shall be made to last as long as possible by moving

the concrete in the lines occasionally with one stroke of the pump. In

confined areas, attempt shall be made by the CONTRACTOR to run a




SHEET 38 OF 49


ISSUE R9

return line back to the pump, so that concrete can be re-circulated

during delays.

(c) The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that obstructions are not found in the

pipe due to interruption in the feed of the concrete by more than 30 to

45 minutes.

(d) Minor blockages shall be cleared by operating a few strokes of the

pump in reverse momentarily and then by returning to normal forward

pumping. If this fails, a succession of reverse and forward strokes

shall be carried out to remove the blockage. Should this fail also, the

blockage may be due to air-lock and the entrapped air has to be

removed.

(e) Attempt to push through the obstructions by repeatedly starting the

pump will result in compaction of the concrete and complicate the

removal of the concrete in the pipe. Blockages in the pipe are usually

discovered by the sound when the pipe is struck. To remove the

obstruction, the concrete pipe shall be taken apart at the assured

position and cleaned. Then the pumping process shall be started all

over again.

(f) This method of checking the blockage and setting it right shall be done

with great speed as excessive delay will cause setting of concrete in

the pipeline downstream of the choke and will lead to further blockage.

When the blockage is being found out and remedied, the pump shall

periodically be given one or two strokes forward to keep the concrete

in motion. If blockage occurs in the placer boom, a pipe joint near the

base of the placer boom shall be opened and the boom made vertical

to drain the pipeline by gravity.

(g) Cleaning blockages are time consuming and as such major blockages

shall best be avoided by ensuring a pumpable mix. Concrete that is

either under or over sanded, short of fines, gap graded, has an excess

of a particular size, or excessively wet or dry will be rejected by the

pump either by blockage or by hard pumping involving excessive

pressures.

(h) The termination of pumping operations shall be carefully planned to

utilise the concrete dormant in the pipeline and the hopper when the

pump is stopped and to avoid wastage.

(i) When the form is nearly full, and there is enough concrete in the line to

complete the placement, the pump shall be stopped and a go-devil be

inserted and forced through the line to clear it out. Water under

pressure shall be used to push the go-devil. The go-devil shall be

stopped about one metre from the end of the line, so that the water in

the line will not spill over into the placement area. After flushing, water

in the pipe shall be removed by drain cock which shall be located for

this purpose in the lowest part of the line. After all concrete has been

removed from the lines, all lines and equipment shall be immediately

cleaned thoroughly.




SHEET 39 OF 49


ISSUE R9

14.12 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that workmanship and plant shall be

maintained at peak efficiency. Degree of control on all the concrete

operation from selection of the ingredients to the final testing of

specimen shall be in line with the assumptions made in mix design

with respect to the standard deviation and co-efficient of variation.

(b) The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that any compromise in quality is not

done for the pumped concrete. To be pumpable, a high level of quality

control for the assurance of uniformity must be maintained. Sampling

at both the truck discharges and point of final placement shall be done

by the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER jointly, as frequently as

the ENGINEER desires to determine, if any change in the slump air

content, and other significant mix characteristics occur take necessary

corrective actions.

(c) The CONTRACTOR shall engage experienced supervision at all

levels. The placing crew shall be experienced and qualified and each

operation shall be well planned and properly scheduled.

(d) All the crew engaged in each of the concrete activities shall

demonstrate in the presence of the ENGINEER, their skills and

capabilities to produce the final product as specified.

15.0 MASS CONCRETE WORKS

15.1 Sequence of pouring for mass concrete works shall be as approved by

ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care to prevent shrinkage

cracks and shall monitor the temperature of the placed concrete if directed.

16.0 PLACING TEMPERATURE OF CONCRETE

16.1 Placing temperature of concrete should be maintained as specified in

Schedule of Quantities or as directed by ENGINEER, to avoid shrinkage

cracking.

16.2 Mixing water shall be kept cool by storing it under cover. Chilled water or

crushed ice as part of the mixing water to achieve the specified placing

temperature shall be used. For chilled water, it is recommended that the

CONTRACTOR install and maintain refrigeration facility of required capacity.

The CONTRACTOR shall also build and maintain well insulated adequate

capacity storage tank for cold water with insulated connected piping. To

supplement this refrigeration facility, the CONTRACTOR will have to have ice

plant or use commercial ice subject to approval of the ENGINEER. The full

quantity of crushed ice shall be stored in cold storage 24 hours in advance of

the start of concreting. The temperature in cold storage shall not be more

than -20 C. The CONTRACTOR should study the placing temperature

condition and work out plant capacity commensurate with the construction

schedule requirements and submit his scheme along with the tender.

16.3 Ice when used as replacement for a portion or all the mixing water shall be

produced from water, which meets the requirements of clause 4.3. Ice when




SHEET 40 OF 49


ISSUE R9

used shall be in flakes of size 3 mm or below or crushed condition and the

crushed ice shall be such as to pass completely, 10 mm sieve.

17.0 CURING

17.1 Curing and protection shall start immediately after the compaction of the

concrete to protect it from:

(a) Premature drying out, particularly by solar radiation and wind;

(b) Leaching out by rain and flowing water;

(c) Rapid cooling during the first few days after placing;

(d) High internal thermal gradients;

(e) Low temperature or frost;

(f) Vibration and impact, which may disrupt the concrete and interfere

with its bond to the reinforcement.

17.2 All concrete, unless directed otherwise by ENGINEER, shall be cured as

specified in clause 13.5 of IS 456. The quality of curing water shall be the

same as that used for mixing.

17.3 Where a curing membrane is directed to be used by the ENGINEER, the

same shall be of a non-wax base and shall not impair the concrete finish in

any manner. The curing compound to be used shall be got approved from the

ENGINEER before use and shall be applied with spraying equipment capable

of a smooth, even textured coat.

17.4 Curing may also be done by covering the surface with an impermeable

material such as polyethylene, which shall be well sealed and fastened.

17.5 Extra precautions shall be exercised in curing concrete during cold and hot

weather as per clause no. 8.3 of IS: 7861 (Part II) and clause no. 8.2 of IS:

7861 (Part I) respectively.

17.6 Curing arrangement shall be subjected to ENGINEER’s approval.

18.0 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND KEYS

18.1 Construction joints (location and type) shall be as shown on the drawing or as

approved by ENGINEER. Concrete shall be placed without interruption until

completion of work between construction joints. If stopping of concreting

becomes unavoidable anywhere, a properly formed construction joint shall be

made with the approval of ENGINEER.

18.2 Dowels for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be

coated with cement slurry and encased in lean concrete as indicated on the

drawings or as directed by ENGINEER.

18.3 Before resuming concreting on a surface, which has hardened all laitance and

loose aggregates shall be thoroughly removed by wire brushing and/ or

hacking, the surface washed with high pressure water jet and treated with thin

layer of cement slurry for vertical joints and a 15 mm thick layer of cement

sand mortar for horizontal joints, the ratio of cement and sand being the same

as in the concrete mix.

18.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINT TREATMENT (Alternate to clause 18.3)




SHEET 41 OF 49


ISSUE R9

Methodology stated herein under must be followed by CONTRACTOR

wherever instructed by the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER.

The entire construction joint shall be treated by green cutting using air/ water

jet at suitable pressure to remove the laitance from the green concrete

surface to receive subsequent pour over it. Suitable, approved brand of

surface retarder shall be used to retard the setting time of green concrete to a

depth of 5 to 8 mm. Green cutting shall be done only after the final setting of

concrete, so that the additional water available from the air water jet used for

green cutting on the surface does not harm the quality of the concrete.

18.4.1 Application of Surface Retarder and Green Cutting at Construction Joint of

Concrete

18.4.1.1 Scope

Work under this procedure covers application of surface retarder over the

green concrete and green cutting the exposed surface of concrete after final

setting time to expose the aggregate, for proper bonding with fresh concrete

of successive pours.

18.4.1.2 Material Qualification

The surface retarder shall be qualified for use based on number of site trials/

mock-ups for achieving the desired surface after green cutting during different

ambient conditions.

18.4.1.3 Application

Surface retarder shall be applied uniformly with the help of agricultural spray

machine at the rate of 5 to 6 sqm/litre

1. Form panel at construction joint: Wherever the side of a particular pour

is to receive concrete at a later date, a bulk head of such sides will be

coated with surface retarder at least one hour before the receipt of

concrete.

2. For horizontal construction joints: Wherever the concrete is to be

placed above a particular pour, surface retarder shall be applied on

the finished top surface of the said pour within half an hour of

finishing.

18.4.1.4 Green Cutting

Green cutting shall be started after final setting time of concrete to expose the

aggregate, for proper bonding with fresh concrete of successive pours. The

surface of concrete shall be green cut using air-water jet.. Bunds shall be

made using cement mortar at convenient locations and cut out shall be

madein the side shutter to drain off excess water. All the laitance and green

cut material shall be removed from the green cut surface simultaneously.

The time of green cutting shall be displayed on Tags, which will be placed at

appropriate locations so that said activity can be controlled in the proper way.

18.5 When concreting is to be resumed on a surface, which has not fully hardened,

all laitance shall be removed by wire brushing, the surface wetted, free water

removed and a coat of cement slurry applied. On this a layer of concrete not




SHEET 42 OF 49


ISSUE R9

exceeding 150 mm thickness shall be placed and well rammed against the

old work. Thereafter work shall proceed in the normal way.

18.6 Approved epoxy Bonding agent, for bond between old (say 28 days or more)

and new concrete may also be used as per manufacturer’s specifications.

19.0 FOUNDATION BEDDING

19.1 All earth surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be placed, shall

be well compacted and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft or

spongy area shall be cleaned out and back filled with either soil-cement

mixture, lean concrete or clean sand compacted as directed by ENGINEER.

The surfaces of absorptive soils shall be moistened.

19.2 Concrete shall not be deposited on large sloping rock surfaces. The rock shall

be cut to form rough steps or benches by picking, barring or wedging. The

rock surface shall be kept wet for 2 to 4 hours before concreting.

20.0 BASE CONCRETE

20.1 The thickness and grade of concrete and reinforcement shall be as specified

in the item of work.

20.2 Before placing the blinding concrete of 1:4:8 mix, 50/75/100 mm thick as per

the item of work, the sub-base of rubble packing shall be properly wetted and

rammed. Concrete for the base shall then be deposited between the forms,

thoroughly tamped and the surface finished level with the top edges of the

forms. Two or three hours after the concrete has been laid in position, the

surface shall be roughened using steel wire brush to remove any scum or

laitance and swept clean so that the coarse aggregates are exposed. The

surface of the base concrete shall be left rough to provide adequate bond for

the floor finish to be provided later.

20.3 MEASUREMENT

Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal. This work

could be either separate or combined along with the floor finish as indicated in

the respective items of work.

21.0 FINISHES

21.1 GENERAL

The formwork for concrete works shall be such as to give the finish as

specified. The CONTRACTOR shall make good as directed any unavoidable

defects consistent with the type of concrete and finish specified; defects due

to bad workmanship (e.g. damaged or misaligned forms, defective or poorly

compacted concrete) will not be accepted. CONTRACTOR shall construct the

formwork using the correct materials and to meet the requirements of the

design and to produce finished concrete to required dimensions, plumbs,

planes and finishes. Formed concrete surface finishes shall be as follows:

21.2 SURFACE FINISH TYPE F1

The main requirement is that of dense, well compacted concrete. No

treatment is required except repair of defective areas, filling all form tie holes




SHEET 43 OF 49


ISSUE R9

and cleaning up of loose or adhering debris. For surfaces below grade which

will receive waterproofing treatment the concrete shall be free of surface

irregularities which would interfere with proper and effective application of

waterproofing material specified for use.

This finish is formed for surfaces at construction joints. The surface produced

shall be free from voids, honeycombing or other large blemishes, steps, sharp

protrusions or local hollows. The shutters shall be removed as soon as

possible without disturbing the concrete or reinforcement and the surface

shall be well wire brushed and hosed down to remove all excess laitance and

fine aggregate. Coarse aggregate is to be left exposed but undisturbed.


The appearance shall be that of a smooth dense, well compacted concrete

showing the slight marks of well fitted shuttering joints. The Contractor shall

make good any blemishes.

This finish is for surfaces that are permanently exposed to view. The surface

produced by the formwork shall have smooth finish, free from board marks,

voids, honeycombing or other large blemishes. Any small blemishes shall be

carefully filled immediately after the removal of the formwork and other

marked imperfections such as fins or steps or joint marks shall be smoothed

off and made good.


This finish shall give an appearance of smooth, dense, well-compacted

concrete with no shutter marks, stain free and with no discolouration,

blemishes, arises, air holes, etc. Only lined or coated plywood with very tight

joints shall be used to achieve this finish. The panel size shall be uniform and

as large as practicable. Any minor blemishes that might occur shall be made

good by the Contractor.


Surfaces of precast elements, which are later to be in contact with in-situ

concrete, shall be roughened by air-water jetting, between the period of initial

and final set, to remove all laitance, cement slurry and fine aggregate. Coarse

aggregate is to be left exposed but undisturbed.

21.6 INTEGRAL CEMENT FINISH ON CONCRETE FLOOR

In all cases where integral cement finish on a concrete floor has been

specified, the top layer of concrete shall be screeded off to proper level and

tamped with tamper having conical projections so that the aggregate shall be

forced below the surface. The surface shall be finished with a wooden float

and a trowel with pressure. The finish shall be continued till the concrete

reaches its initial set. No cement or cement mortar finish shall be provided on

the surface. Where specified, a floor hardener of appropriate thickness as

approved by the ENGINEER shall be supplied and used as recommended by

the manufacturer.




SHEET 44 OF 49


ISSUE R9

22.0 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF UNSATISFACTORY CONCRETE

22.1 Immediately after the shuttering is removed, all the defective areas such as

honeycombed surfaces, rough patches, etc. shall be brought to the notice of

ENGINEER who may permit patching of the defective areas or reject the

concrete work. ENGINEER’s decision on rejection of concrete work shall be

final.

22.2 All through holes for shuttering shall be filled with cement mortar for full depth

and neatly plugged flush with surface.

22.3 Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by CONTRACTOR at no

additional cost to OWNER.

22.4 For patching of defective areas all loose materials shall be removed and the

surface shall be prepared by cleaning by compressed air or water jetting.

22.5 Bonding between hardened and fresh concrete shall be done either by

placing cement mortar or by applying epoxy. The decision of the ENGINEER

as to be the method of repairs to be adopted shall be final and binding on the

CONTRACTOR and no extra claim shall be entertained on this account. The

surface shall be saturated with water for 24 hours before patching is done

with 1:5 cement sand mortar. The use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete

shall be carried out as directed by ENGINEER.

22.6 CONTRACTOR shall submit a method statement for such repairs to

ENGINEER for approval.

23.0 VACUUM DEWATERING OF SLABS

23.1 Where specified floor slabs, either on grade or suspended, shall be finished

by vacuum dewatering including all operations such as poker vibration,

surface vibration, vacuum processing, floating and trowelling as per

equipment manufacturer’s recommendation. The equipment to be used shall

be subject to ENGINEER’S approval.

24.0 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENT

24.1 Concreting during hot weather shall be carried out as per IS: 7861 (Part I).

24.2 Adequate provisions shall be made to lower concrete temperatures, which

shall not exceed 400 C at the time of placement of fresh concrete.

24.3 Where directed by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall spray non-wax based

curing compound on unformed concrete surface at no extra costs.

25.0 COLD WEATHER REQUIRMENTS

25.1 Concreting during cold weather shall be carried out as per IS: 7861 (Part 2).

25.2 The ambient temperature during placement and upto final set shall not fall

below 50 C. Approved anti-freeze/ accelerating additive shall be used where

directed.

25.3 For major and large scale concreting works the temperature of concrete at

times of mixing and placing, the thermal conductivity of the formwork and its

insulation and stripping period shall be closely monitored.




SHEET 45 OF 49


ISSUE R9

26.0 LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES

26.1 The CONTRACTOR shall take special care for concrete of liquid retaining

structures, underground structures and those other specifically called for to

guarantee the finish and water tightness.

26.2 The minimum level of surface finish for liquid retaining structures shall be of

smooth type. All such structures shall be hydro-tested.

26.3 The CONTRACTOR shall include in his price hydro-testing of structure, all

arrangements for testing such as temporary bulk heads, pressure gauges,

pumps, pipe lines, etc.

26.4 Any temporary arrangements that may have to be made to ensure stability of

the structures shall also be considered to have been taken into account while

quoting the rates.

26.5 Any leakage/ sweating that may occur during the hydro-test or subsequently

during the defects liability period or the period for which the structure is

guaranteed shall be effectively stopped either by cement/ epoxy pressure

grouting, guniting or such other method as may be approved by the

ENGINEER. All such rectification shall be done by the CONTRACTOR to the

entire satisfaction of the OWNER/ ENGINEER at no extra cost to the

OWNER.

27.0 HYDRO TESTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES

27.1 Hydrostatic test for water tightness shall be done at full storage level or soffit

of cover slab, as may be directed by ENGINEER, as described below:

27.1.1 In case of structures whose external faces are exposed, such as elevated

tanks, the requirements of the test shall be deemed to be satisfied if the

external faces show no sign of leakage or sweating and remain completely

dry during the period of observation of seven days after allowing a seven day

period for absorption after filling with water.

27.1.2 In the case of structures whose external faces are submerged and are not

accessible for inspection, such as underground tanks, the structures shall be

filled with water and after the expiry of seven days after the filling, the level of

the surface of the water shall be recorded. The level of water shall be

recorded again at subsequent intervals of 24 hours over period of seven

days. Backfilling shall be withheld till the tanks are tested. The total drop in

surface level over a period for seven days shall be taken as an indication of

the water tightness of the structure. The ENGINEER shall decide on the

actual permissible nature of this drop in the surface level, taking into account

whether the structures are open or closed and the corresponding effect it has

on evaporation losses. Unless specified otherwise, a structure whose top is

covered shall be deemed to be water tight if the total drop in the surface level

over a period of seven days does not exceed 40 mm.

27.1.3 Each compartment/ segment of the structure shall be tested individually and

then all together.

27.2 For structures such as pipes, tunnels, etc. the hydrostatic test shall be carried

out by filling with water, after curing as specified, and subjecting to the




SHEET 46 OF 49


ISSUE R9

specified test pressure for specified period. If during this period the loss of

water does not exceed the equivalent of the specified rate, the structure shall

be considered to have successfully passed the test.

28.0 OPTIONAL TESTS

28.1 If ENGINEER feels that the materials i.e. cement, sand, coarse aggregates,

reinforcement and water are not in accordance with the specifications or if

specified concrete strengths are not obtained, he may order tests to be

carried out on these materials in laboratory, to be approved by the

ENGINEER, as per relevant IS Codes. OWNER shall pay only for the testing

of material supplied by the OWNER, otherwise CONTRACTOR shall have to

pay for the tests. Transporting of all material to the laboratory shall however

be done by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to OWNER.

28.2 In the event of any work being suspected of faulty material or workmanship

requiring its removal or if the works cubes do not give the stipulated strength,

ENGINEER reserves the right to order the CONTRACTOR to take out cores

and conduct tests on them or do ultrasonic testing or load testing of structure,

as per relevant IS specifications. All these tests shall be carried out by

CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to the OWNER. Alternately ENGINEER also

reserves the right to ask the CONTRACTOR to dismantle and re-do such

unacceptable work at the cost of CONTRACTOR.

28.3 If the structure is certified by ENGINEER as having failed, the cost of the test

and subsequent dismantling/ reconstruction shall be borne by

CONTRACTOR.

28.4 The quoted unit rates/ prices of concrete shall deemed to provide for all tests

mentioned above.

29.0 Not Used


30.1 CONTRACTOR shall adopt the Quality Control format provided by the

ENGINEER. A copy of formats shall be furnished to CONTRACTOR by

ENGINEER/ OWNER after the contract is awarded.

30.2 Alternatively, if CONTRACTOR has his own QC formats he may adopt them

subjected to such modifications considered necessary by ENGINEER.

30.3 In either case CONTRACTOR shall submit his detailed Quality Assurance

Plan along with the bid. This would be reviewed, appropriately modified and

approved by CONSULTANT/ ENGINEER after the award of contract.

31.0 INSPECTION

31.1 All materials, workmanship and finished construction shall be subject to

continuous inspection and approval of ENGINEER. Materials rejected by

ENGINEER shall be expressly removed from site within 3 working days and

shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR immediately at no extra cost to

OWNER.




SHEET 47 OF 49


ISSUE R9

32.0 CLEAN-UP

32.1 Upon the completion of concrete work, all forms, equipment, construction

tools, protective coverings and any debris, scraps of wood, etc. resulting from

the work shall be removed and the premises left clean.

33.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA DURING CONSTRCUTION STAGE AND

HARDENED STATE

33.1 Any concrete work shall satisfy the requirements given below individually and

collectively for it to be acceptable.

(a) properties of constituent materials;

(b) characteristic compressive strength;

(c) specified mix proportions;

(d) minimum cement content;

(e) maximum free-water/cement ratio;

(f) workability;

(g) temperature of fresh concrete, if specified.;

(h) density of fully compacted concrete, if specified;

(i) cover to embedded steel;

(j) curing;

(k) tolerances in dimensions;

(l) tolerances in levels;

(m) surface finishes;

33.2 ENGINEER’s decision as to the acceptability or otherwise of any concrete

work shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR.

33.3 For work not accepted, ENGINEER may review and decide whether remedial

measures are feasible so as to render the work acceptable. ENGINEER shall

in that case direct the CONTRACTOR to undertake the remedial measures.

These shall be expeditiously and effectively implemented by CONTRACTOR.

Nothing extra shall become payable to CONTRACTOR by OWNER for

executing remedial measures.

34.0 MODE OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

34.1 The unit rate for concrete work under various categories shall be all inclusive

and no claims for extra payment on account of such items and leaving holes,

embedding inserts, etc. shall be entertained unless separately provided for in

the Schedule of Quantities. No extra claim shall also be entertained due to

change in the number, position and/ or dimensions of holes, slots or

openings, sleeves, inserts or on account of any increased lift, lead of

scaffolding, etc. All these factors shall be taken into consideration while

quoting the unit rates. Unless provided for in the Schedule of Quantities the

rates shall also include fixing inserts in all concrete work, whenever required.

34.2 Payments for concrete will be made on the basis of unit rates quoted for the

respective items in the Schedule of Quantities. No deduction in the concrete

quantity will be made for reinforcements, inserts, etc. and opening less than

0.100 sqm, in areas where concrete is measured in sqm and 0.010 cum

where concrete is measured in cubic metres. Where no such deduction for




SHEET 48 OF 49


ISSUE R9

concrete is made, payment for shuttering work provided for such holes,

pockets, etc. will not be made. Similarly, the unit rates for concrete work shall

be inclusive or exclusive of shuttering as provided for in the Schedule of

Quantities.

34.3 Payment for beams will be made for the quantity based on the depth being

reckoned from the underside of the slabs and length measured as the clear

distance between supports. Payment for columns shall be made for the

quantity based on height reckoned upto the underside of slabs.

34.4 The unit rate for precast concrete members shall include formwork,

mouldings, finishing, hoisting and setting in position including setting mortar,

provision of lifting arrangement, etc. complete. Reinforcement and inserts

shall be measured and paid for separately under respective item rates.

34.5 Only the actual quantity of steel embedded in concrete including laps as

shown on drawings or as approved by ENGINEER shall be measured and

paid for, irrespective of the level or height at which the work is done. The unit

rate for reinforcement shall include all wastage, binding wires, chairs, spacer

bars, etc. for which no separate payment shall be made.

34.6 Where the formwork is paid for separately, it shall be very clearly understood

that payment for formwork is inclusive of formwork, shuttering, shoring,

propping, scaffolding, deshuttering, etc. complete. Only the net area of

concrete formed (shuttered) shall be measured for payment.

34.7 Where reinforcement is supplied by OWNER, the quantity of chairs and

spacer bars shall be measured for accounting wastage only.

34.8 Cost of Admixtures shall be deemed to be included in the rates and no

separate payment shall be made.

END




SHEET 49 OF 49


ISSUE R9

CONCRETE POUR CARD

(a) CLIENT: DATE: POUR NO.

(b) PROJECT:

STRUCTURE:

(c) CONTRACTOR:

(d) MAX AGGREGATE SIZE mm SLUMP: mm

(e) DRG. NO.

(f) START/ COMPLETION TIME:

(g) CONCRETE GRADE QUANTITY: M / M3 MIXING TIME:

SR. NO.

ITEM CONTRACTOR’s

REP. SIGNATURE

ENGINEER’s SIGNATURE

REMARKS

1.

BE

FO

RE

CO

NC

RE

TIN

G

CENTERLINES CHECKED

2. FORMWORK AND STAGING CHECKED

3. REINFORCEMENT CHECKED

4. COVER TO REINFORCEMENT CHECKED

5. VERIFIED TEST CERTIFICATE FOR CEMENT/ STEEL

YES/ NO YES/ NO

6. ADEQUENCY OF MATERIALS/ EQUIPMENT FOR POUR

YES/ NO YES/ NO

7.

EMBEDED PARTS CHECKED

(LOCATION AND PLUMB)

CIVIL

MECHANICAL

ELECTRICAL

POUR AUTHORISED SITE ENGINEER

8.

SOFFIT(S) AND POUR TOP(T) LEVELS CHECKED BEFORE (B) AND AFTER (A) FORM REMOVAL (ONLY OF BEAMS OF OVER 10 M SPAN AND IMPORTANT STRUCTURES LIKE TG, ETC.)

S(B) T(B)

S(A) T(A)

9. CONSTRUCTION JOINT LOCATION AND TIME (IF NOT AS PER DRAWING)

10. CEMENT CONSUMPTION IN KG

11. NUMBER OF CUBES AND IDENTIFICATION MARK

12. TEST CUBE RESULTS (7 DAYS/ 28 DAYS) / / /

13. CONCRETE CONDITION ON FORM REMOVAL VERY GOOD/ GOOD/ FAIR/

POOR

SITE-IN-CHARGE

NOTES:

1. EACH ITEM TO BE CHECKED AND SIGNED BY THE RESPECTIVE ENGINEERS.

2. ITEMS 8 TO 13 (BOTH INCLUSIVE) TO BE FILLED BY ONLY TCE ENGINEER.

3. EACH POUR TO HAVE SEPARATE CARDS, IN TRIPILCATE ONE EACH FOR CLIENT, TCE

AND SITE OFFICE.

UNDER REMARKS INDICATE DEVIATIONS FROM DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS,

CONGESTION IN REINFORCEMENT, IF ANY, UNUSUAL OCCURENCES, SUCH AS FAILURE OF

EQUIPMENT, SINKING OF SUPPORTS/ PROPS, HEAVY RAINS AFFECTING CONCRETEING,

POOR COMPACTION, IMPROPER CURING, OTHER DEFICIENCIES, OBSERVATIONS, ETC.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION:

WRITE UP

GENERAL BUILDING WORKS SHEET 1 of 173

ISSUE

R3

FILE NAME: F-329-Rev-R6.docx TCE FORM NO. 329 R6

1 SCOPE

1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for civil and

architectural works comprising of masonry, flooring, skirting, dado,

plastering for wall and ceilings, painting, doors, windows, ventilators,

Builders hardware, ironmongery, Glass and glazing, Partition works,

False ceiling works, toilet cubicles, sanitary fixtures and fittings, water

proofing, Metal sheet cladding, grills and railing works.

1.2 The works under this specification shall consist of furnishing of all

tools, plants, labour, materials, and everything necessary for

execution.

2 MASONRY WORK

2.1 GENERAL

2.1.1 The works covered under this specification shall include:

2.1.2 Rubble masonry. brick masonry and concrete block masonry.

2.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

IS:2117 - Guide for manufacture of hand-made common burnt-

clay building bricks

IS:1200 - Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works.

IS:1077 - Specification for common burnt clay building bricks.

IS:1124 - Method of test for determination of water absorption,

apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural

building stones.

Proprietary rights of the information contained herein belong to Tata Consulting Engineers Limited (TCE).

This information is intended to be used for the mentioned purpose/project only. In case of misuse of information


SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


IS:1397 - Specification for Kraft paper.

IS:1597 - Code of practice for construction of stone masonry :

Part 1 Rubble stone masonry.

IS:2116 - Specification for sand for masonry mortars.

IS:2185 - Specification for concrete masonry units (Parts 1,2 & 3).

IS:2212 - Code of practice for brickwork.

IS:2250 - Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry

mortars.

IS:2572 - Code of practice for construction of hollow concrete

block masonry.

IS:2691 - Specification for burnt clay facing bricks.

IS:2750 - Specification for steel scaffoldings.

IS:3495 - Method of test for burnt clay building bricks Part 1 to 4.

IS:3812 - PART 1 , pulverized fuel ash — specification part 1 for

use as pozzolana in cement, cement mortar and

concrete

IS:3812 - Part 2 , pulverized fuel ash —part 2 for use as

admixture in cement mortar and concrete

IS:6041/

IS:6042

- Code of practice for construction of autoclaved cellular

concrete block masonry.

IS:13757 Burnt clay fly ash building bricks Specification

2.3 UNCOURSED RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY, IN FOUNDATION.

PLINTH AND SUPERSTRUCTURE

2.3.1 MATERIALS

2.3.1.1 Stones for the works shall be of the type specified such as granite,

trap, sandstone, quartzite, etc. and shall be obtained from quarries,

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


approved by Engineer. Stone shall be hard, sound, durable, fine

grained and uniform in colour (for superstructure work) and free from

weathering decay and defects like cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes,

injurious veins, patches of loose or soft materials and other similar

defects that may adversely affect its strength and appearance. As far

as possible stones shall be of uniform colour, quality and texture.

Generally stone shall not contain crypst, crystalline silica or chart,

mica and other deleterious materials like iron-oxide, organic

impurities etc. Stones with round surface shall not be used and work

shall conforming to IS1597

2.3.1.2 The compressive strength of common types of stones shall be a

minimum of 300kg/cm2 and the percentage of water absorption shall

generally not exceed 5% as per test conducted in accordance with

IS:1124.

2.3.1.3 Cement-sand mortar for stone masonry works shall be in the

proportion of 1:6 unless otherwise specified in the respective items of

work. Sand for masonry mortar shall conform to IS:2116. The sand

shall be free from clay, shale, loam, alkali and organic matter and

shall be of sound, hard, clean and durable particles. Sand shall be

approved by ENGINEER. If so directed by the ENGINEER, sand

shall be screened and washed till it satisfies the limits of deleterious

materials.

2.3.1.4 For preparing cement mortar, the ingredients shall first be mixed

thoroughly in dry condition. Water shall then be added and mixing

continued to give a uniform mix of required consistency. Mixing shall

be done thoroughly in a mechanical mixer, unless hand mixing is

specifically permitted by the ENGINEER. The mortar thus mixed

shall be used as soon as possible, preferably within 30 minutes from

the time water is added to cement. In case, the mortar has stiffened

due to evaporation of water, this may be re-tempered by adding

water as required to restore consistency, but this will be permitted

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


only upto 30 minutes from the time of initial mixing of water to

cement. Any mortar which is partially set shall be rejected and shall

be removed forthwith from the site. Droppings of mortar shall not be

re-used under any circumstances

2.3.1.5 The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for test on mortar samples if so


2.3.2 WORKMANSHIP

2.3.2.1 For all works below ground level the masonry shall be random rubble

un-coursed with ordinary quarry dressed stones for the hearting and

selected quarry dressed stones for the facing. Stones having sharp

corners or round surface shall not be used.

2.3.2.2 For all works above ground level and in superstructure the masonry

shall be random rubble un-coursed, well bonded, faced with hammer

dressed stones with squared quoins at corners. The bushings on the

face shall not be more than 40 mm on an exposed face and on the

face to be plastered it shall not project by more than 12 mm nor shall

it have depressions more than 10 mm from the average wall surface.

2.3.2.3 Face stones shall extend back sufficiently and bond well with the

masonry. The depth of stone from the face of the wall inwards shall

not be less than 2/3 the thickness of wall. The length of the stone

shall not exceed three times the height and the breadth on base shall

not be greater than three-fourths the thickness of wall nor less than

150 mm. The height of stone may be upto a maximum of 300 mm.

Hearting stones shall not be less than 150 mm in any direction and

shall be bedded in mortar. Stones shall be laid with its grains

horizontal.

2.3.2.4 Chips and spalls shall be used wherever necessary to avoid thick

mortar joints and to ensure that no hollow spaces are left in the

masonry. The use of chips and spalls in the hearting shall not

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


exceed 20 percent of the quantity of stone masonry. Spalls & chips

shall not be used on the face of the wall and below hearting stones to

bring them to the level of face stones.

2.3.2.5 The maximum thickness of joints shall not exceed 20 mm. All joints

shall be completely filled with mortar. When plastering or pointing is

not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished

as the work proceeds. Otherwise, the joints shall be raked to a

minimum depth of 20 mm by a raking tool during the progress of the

work while the mortar is still green.

2.3.2.6 Through or bond stones shall be provided in walls up to 600 mm

thick and in case of walls above 600 mm thickness, a set of two or

more bond stones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall

be provided in a line from face to back. In case of highly absorbent

types of stones (porous lime stone and sand stone, etc.) the bond

stone shall extend about two-thirds into the wall and a set of two or

more bond stones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall

he provided. Each bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be

provided for every 0.5 sq.m of wall surface and shall be provided at

1500mm clear spacing in each course.

2.3.2.7 All stones shall be sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent

absorption of water from the mortar. Stones shall be laid on their

natural bed and shall be solidly bedded full in mortar with close joints.

Chips of stone spalls be wedged into the work wherever necessary.

No dry work or hollow spaces shall be allowed and every stone

whether large or small shall be carefully selected to fit snugly the

interstices between the large stones. Masonry shall be built breaking

joints in all the three directions. Bond stone and headers shall be

properly laid into the work and shall be marked by the Contractor with

white lead paint. The bond stones shall be provided as specified in

para 3.1.2.6. The masonry work in wall shall be carried up true to

plumb or to specified batter. Random rubble masonry shall be

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


brought to the level courses at plinth, window sills, lintel and roof

levels. Levelling shall be done with concrete comprising of one part

of mortar as used for masonry and two parts of graded stone

aggregate of 20mm nominal size. The masonry in structure shall be

carried uniformly. Where the masonry of one part is to be delayed,

the work shall be racked back at an angle not steeper than 450.

Height of wall raised in any one day shall not exceed one metre.

2.3.2.8 Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering.

Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for a

minimum period of seven days for proper curing of the joints.

2.3.2.9 Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be

provided to facilitate execution of the masonry works. The

scaffolding shall be designed adequately considering all the dead,

live and possible impact loads to ensure safety of the workmen, in

accordance with the requirements stipulated in IS:2750 and IS:3696

(Part 1). Scaffolding shall be properly maintained during the entire

period of construction. Single scaffolding shall not be used on

important works and will be permitted only in certain cases as

decided by the ENGINEER. Where single scaffolding is adopted,

only minimum number of holes, by omitting a header shall be left in

the masonry for supporting horizontal scaffolding poles. All holes in

the masonry shall be carefully made good before plastering/painting.

2.3.2.10 CONTRACTOR shall note that the unit rates quoted for the masonry

work shall be deemed to include for the installation of miscellaneous

inserts such as pipe sleeves, bolts, steel sections with anchors etc.

and providing pockets, leaving openings, cutting chases etc. in

accordance with the construction drawings. Miscellaneous inserts

shall be either supplied FREE by the OWNER or to be furnished by

the CONTRACTOR. Any of the miscellaneous inserts which are

required to be fabricated and supplied by the CONTRACTOR and

cement concrete to be provided for fixing embedments, hold fasts of

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


door/window frames etc. shall however, be measured and paid

separately under the respective items of work. .

2.3.3 MEASUREMENT

2.3.3.1 Measurement shall be in cu.m correct to two places of decimal. The

quantities measured and paid for, shall be those as actually executed

after making deductions for openings, lintels etc.

2.3.3.2 No deductions shall be made for openings less than 0.1sq.m area or

for embedments upto 0.1 sq.m in section.

2.3.3.3 Stone masonry curved in plan to a mean radius upto 6m shall be

measured and paid as curved wall as a separate item of works.

Stone masonry works curved in plan to a mean radius more than 6m

shall be measured and paid like a straight wall.

2.4 COURSED RUBBLE MASONRY (FIRST SORT) FOR

SUPERSTRUCTURE

2.4.1 MATERIALS

2.4.1.1 The material specification for the work shall be as per clause 2.3.1

2.4.2 WORKMANSHIP

2.4.2.1 Face stones shall be hammer dressed on all beds, and joints so as to

give them approximately rectangular block shape. These shall be

squared on all joints and beds. The bed joint shall be rough chisel

dressed for at least 80 mm back from the face, and side joints for at

least 40 mm such that no portion of the dressed surface is more than

6 mm from a straight edge placed on it. The remaining unexposed

portion of the stone shall not project beyond the surface of bed and

side joint. The bushing on the face shall not project more than 40 mm

as an exposed face and 10 mm on a face to be plastered. The

hammer dressed stone shall also have a rough tooling for minimum

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


width of 25 mm along the four edges of the face of the stone, when

stone work is exposed.

2.4.2.2 All stones shall be wetted before use. The walls shall be carried up

truly plumb or to specified batter. All courses shall not be less laid

truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical. The height

of each course shall not be less than 150mm or more than 300mm

2.4.2.3 Face stones shall be laid alternate headers and stretchers. No

pinning shall be allowed on the face. No face stone shall be less in

breadth than its height and at least one third of the stones shall tail

into the work for length not less than twice their height.

2.4.2.4 The hearting or the interior filling of the wall shall consist of stones

carefully laid on their proper beds in mortar; chips and spalls of stone

being used where necessary to avoid thick beds of joints of mortar

and at the same time ensuring that no hollow spaces are left

anywhere in the masonry. The chips shall not be used bellow the

hearting stone to bring these up to the level of face stones. The use

of chips shall be restricted to the filling of interstices between the

adjacent stones in hearting and these shall not exceed 10% of the

quantity of stone masonry.

2.4.2.5 The masonry in a structure shall be carried up uniformly but where

breaks are unavoidable, the joints shall be raked back at angle not

steeper than 45°. Toothing shall not be allowed.

2.4.2.6 Bond Stones shall be as specified in 3.1.2.6 except that a bond stone

or a set of bond stones shall be inserted 1.5 to 1.8 meters apart, in

every course.

2.4.2.7 The quoins shall be of the same height as the course in which these

occur. These shall be at least 450 mm long and shall be laid

stretchers and headers alternatively. These shall be laid square on

the beds, which shall be rough-chisel dressed to depth of at least 100

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


mm. In case of exposed work, these stones shall have a minimum of

25 mm wide chisel drafts at four edges, all the edges being in the

same plane.

2.4.2.8 All bed joints shall be horizontal and all side joints vertical. All joints

shall be fully packed with mortar, ace joints shall not be more than

one cm thick. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done,

the joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying.

Otherwise, joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by

raking tool during the progress of work, when the mortar is still green.

2.4.2.9 Type of scaffolding to be used shall be as per Clause 2.3.2.9

2.4.2.10 Requirements of execution of the work and curing shall be as

stipulated in clause 2.3.2.7and clause 2.3.2.8.

2.4.2.11 Installation of miscellaneous inserts in the masonry shall be as

specified in clause 2.3.2.10

2.4.3 MEASUREMENT

2.4.3.1 Measurement shall be in cu.m correct to two places of decimal. The

quantities measured and paid for, shall be those as actually executed

after making necessary deductions for openings, lintels etc.

2.5 BRICK MASONRY WORK

2.5.1 Bricks used in the works shall conform to the requirements laid down

in IS:1077 /IS:13757. The class of the bricks shall be as specifically

indicated in the respective items of work.

2.5.2 Standard modular size of common bricks shall be 190mm x 90mm x

90mm as per IS:1077/ IS13757. The nominal thickness of one brick

and half brick walls using modular bricks shall be considered as 200

mm and 100 mm respectively. In the event of use of non-modular

bricks, standard size shall be 230mm x ll0mm x 70mm. The nominal

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


thickness of one brick and half brick walls using non-modular bricks

shall be considered as 230 mm and 115 mm respectively. The

dimensional tolerances of modular and non-modular sized bricks

over the standard sizes shall be as per IS 1077. / IS13757.

2.5.3 Normal Clay Bricks shall be sound, hard, and homogenous in

texture, well burnt in kiln without being vitrified, hand/machine

moulded, deep red, cherry or copper coloured, of regular shape and

size & shall have sharp and square edges with smooth rectangular

faces. The bricks shall be free from pores, cracks, flaws and nodules

of free lime. Hand moulded bricks shall be moulded with a frog and

those made by extrusion process may not be provided with a frog.

Bricks shall give a clear ringing sound when struck and shall have a

minimum crushing strength of 5N/sq.mm unless otherwise specified

in the item.

2.5.4 Clay Fly ash bricks shall be hand/machine moulded and shall be

made from the admixture of suitable soils and fly ash in optimum

proportioned as per IS2117. Fly ash used for manufacture of bricks

shall conforming to grade 1 or grade 2 as per IS3812. The bricks

shall be free from pores, cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime.

Hand moulded bricks shall be moulded with a frog and those made

by extrusion process may not be provided with a frog. Bricks shall

give a clear ringing sound when struck and shall have a minimum

crushing strength of 5N/sq.mm unless otherwise specified in the

item.

2.5.5 The average water absorption shall not be more than 20 percentages

by weight up to class 12.5 and 15 percentages by weight for higher

classes. Bricks which do not conform to this requirement shall be

rejected. Over or under burnt bricks are not acceptable for use in the

works.

2.5.6 Sample bricks shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval and

bricks supplied shall conform to approved samples. If demanded by

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


ENGINEER, brick samples shall be got tested as per IS: 3495 by

CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to OWNER. Bricks rejected by

ENGINEER shall be removed from the site of works within 24 hours.

2.5.7 Mortar for brick masonry shall consist of cement and sand and shall

be prepared as per IS:2250. Mix shall be in the proportion of 1:5 for

all brickworks, unless otherwise specified in the respective items of

work. Sand for masonry mortar shall conform to IS:2116. The sand



approved by ENGINEER. If so directed by the ENGINEER, sand

shall be screened and washed till it satisfies the limits of deleterious

materials.

2.5.8 For preparing cement mortar, the ingredients shall first be mixed

thoroughly in dry condition. Water shall then be added and mixing

continued to give a uniform mix of required consistency. Mixing shall

be done thoroughly in a mechanical mixer, unless hand mixing is

specifically permitted by the ENGINEER. The mortar thus mixed

shall be used as soon as possible, preferably within 30 minutes from

the time water is added to cement. In case, the mortar has stiffened

due to evaporation of water, this may be re-tempered by adding

water as required to restore consistency, but this will be permitted

only upto 30 minutes from the time of initial mixing of water to

cement. Any mortar which is partially set shall be rejected and shall

be removed forthwith from the site. Droppings of mortar shall not be

re-used under any circumstances.

2.5.9 The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for test on mortar samples if so


2.5.10 WORKMANSHIP

2.5.10.1 Workmanship of brick work shall conform to IS: 2212. All bricks shall

be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


immediately before being laid. The cement mortar for brick masonry

work shall be as specified in the respective item of work. Brick work

200mm/230mm thick and over shall be laid in English Bond unless

otherwise specified. 100mm/115mm thick brickwork shall be laid with

stretchers. For laying bricks, a layer of mortar shall be spread over

the full width of suitable length of the lower course. Each brick shall

be slightly pressed into the mortar and shoved into final position so

as to embed the brick fully in mortar. Only full size bricks shall be

used for the works and cut bricks utilised only to make up required

wall length or for bonding. Bricks shall be laid with frogs uppermost.

2.5.10.2 All brickwork shall be plumb, square and true to dimensions shown.

Vertical joints in alternate courses shall come directly one over the

other and be in line. Horizontal courses shall be levelled. The

thickness of brick courses shall be kept uniform. In case of one brick

thick or half brick thick wall, at least one face should be kept smooth

and plane, even if the other is slightly rough due to variation in size of

bricks. For walls of thickness greater than one brick both faces shall

be kept smooth and plane. All interconnected brickwork shall be

carried out at nearly one level so that there is uniform distribution of

pressure on the supporting structure and no portion of the work shall

be left more than one course lower than the adjacent work. Where

this is not possible, the work shall be raked back according to bond

(and not saw toothed) at an angle not exceeding 450. But in no case

the level difference between adjoining walls shall exceed one metre.

Brick-work shall not be raised more than one metre per day.

2.5.10.3 Bricks shall be so laid that all joints are well filled with mortar. The

thickness of joints shall not be less than 6 mm and not more than 10

mm. The face joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of

10mm/15mm by raking tools during the progress of work when the

mortar is still green, so as to provide a proper key for the

plastering/pointing respectively to be done later. When plastering or

pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be uniform in

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


thickness and be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. The

face of brickwork shall be cleaned daily and all mortar droppings

removed. The surface of each course shall be thoroughly cleaned of

all dirt before another course is laid on top.

2.5.10.4 During inclement weather conditions, newly built brick masonry

works shall be protected by tarpaulin or other suitable covering to

prevent mortar being washed away by rain.

2.5.10.5 Brickwork shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for at least

seven days. The arrangement for curing shall be got approved from

the ENGINEER.

2.5.10.6 Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be

provided to facilitate execution of the masonry works. The

scaffolding shall be designed adequately considering all the dead,

live and possible impact loads to ensure safety of the workmen, in

accordance with the requirements stipulated in IS:2750 and IS:3696

(Part 1). Scaffolding shall be properly maintained during the entire

period of construction. Single scaffolding shall not be used on

important works and will be permitted only in certain cases as

decided by the ENGINEER. Where single scaffolding is adopted,

only minimum number of holes, by omitting a header shall be left in

the masonry for supporting horizontal scaffolding poles. All holes in

the masonry shall be carefully made good before plastering/painting.

2.5.10.7 In the event of usage of traditional bricks of size 230

mmx115mmx75mm for load bearing walls, the courses at the top of

the plinth and sills as well as at the top of the wall just below the

roof/floor or slabs and at the top of the parapet shall be laid with

bricks on edge.

2.5.10.8 All brickwork shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other

structural members.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


2.5.10.9 To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the brick

masonry following measures shall be adopted.

a) For resting RCC slabs, the bearing surface of masonry wall shall

be finished on top with 12 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 and

provided with 2 layers of Kraft paper Grade 1 as per IS:1397 or 2

layers of 50 micron thick polyethylene sheets.

b) RCC/steel beams resting on masonry wall shall be provided with

plain or reinforced concrete bed blocks of dimensions as indicated

in the drawings duly finished on top with 2 layers of Kraft paper

Grade 1 as per IS:1397 or 2 layers of 50 micron thick polyethylene

sheets.

c) Steel wire fabric shall be provided at the junction of brick masonry

and concrete as specified elsewhere before taking up plastering

work.

2.5.10.10 The above items shall be measured and paid for separately under


2.5.10.11 Bricks for partition walls shall be stacked adjacent to the structural

member to pre-deflect the structural member before the wall is taken

up for execution. Further, the top most course of half or full brick

walls abutting against either a de-shuttered slab or beam shall be

built only after any proposed masonry wall above the structural

member is executed to cater for the deflection of the structural

element.

2.5.10.12 Reinforced cement concrete transoms and mullions of dimensions as

indicated in the construction drawings are generally required to be

provided in half brick partition walls. Reinforced concrete for

transoms and mullions shall be measured and paid for separately

under the respective items of work.

2.5.10.13 Where drawings indicate that structural steel sections are to be

encased in brickwork, the brick masonry shall be built closely against

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


the steel section, ensuring a minimum of 20mm thick cement-sand

1:4 over all the steel surfaces. Steel sections partly embedded in

brickwork shall be provided with bituminous protective coating to the

surfaces at the point of entry into the brick masonry.

2.5.10.14 CONTRACTOR shall note that the unit rates quoted for the masonry

work shall be deemed to include for the installation of miscellaneous

inserts such as pipe sleeves, bolts, steel sections with anchors etc.

and providing pockets, leaving openings, cutting chases etc. in

accordance with the construction drawings. Miscellaneous inserts

shall be either supplied FREE by the OWNER or to be furnished by

the CONTRACTOR. Any of the miscellaneous inserts which are

required to be fabricated and supplied by the CONTRACTOR and

cement concrete to be provided for fixing embedments, hold fasts of

door/window frames etc. shall however, be measured and paid

separately under the respective items of work. .

2.5.10.15 Facing bricks of the type specified conforming to IS:2691 shall be laid

in the positions indicated on the drawings and all facing brickwork

shall be well bonded to the backing bricks/RCC surfaces. The level of

execution of the facing brickwork shall at any time be lower by at

least 600 mm below the level of the backing brickwork.

2.5.10.16 Facing bricks shall be laid over 10 mm thick backing of cement

mortar. The mortar mix, thickness of joint and the type of painting to

be carried out shall be as specified in the item of work. The pattern of

laying the bricks shall be as specifically indicated in the drawings.

2.5.10.17 For facing brickwork, double scaffolding shall be used.

2.5.10.18 Faced works shall be kept clean and free from damage, discoloration

etc., at all times.

2.5.10.19 Cutting of chases in 230 thick wall and above for routing GI pipes, CI

pipes or for any other services shall preferably be in the vertical

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


direction. Horizontal chases shall be avoided, as far as possible. The

depth of vertical chases and horizontal chases, if any, shall not

exceed one third and one sixth of the thickness of masonry

respectively. Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2m in any

stretch. Not more than 2 horizontal chases shall be permitted in a

stretch of wall and these should be located in upper or lower one-

third of height of wall.

2.5.10.20 No lintel need be provided for circular openings upto 400mm

diameter in 230mm thick wall and above. Similarly, no lintel need be

provided for rectangular holes of 300mm wide and below.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


2.5.11 MEASUREMENT

2.5.11.1 Measurement shall be in cu.m correct to two places of decimal for

brickwork of thickness one brick i.e. 200mm/230mm and above.

Measurement shall be in sq.m correct to two places decimal for

facing brickwork and brickwork of thickness half brick i.e.

l00mm/115mm and below. Measurement shall be for the quantities

as actually executed duly deducting for openings, lintels,

transoms/mullions etc. subject to clauses 2.5.11.2 ,2.5.11.3/2.5.11.4

below.

2.5.11.2 No deductions shall be made for openings less than 0.1sq.m area or

for embedment upto 0.1 sq.m in section.

2.5.11.3 Brick works curved in plan to a mean radius upto 6m shall be

measured and paid as curved wall as a separate item of works. Brick

works curved in plan to a mean radius more than 6m shall be

measured and paid like a straight wall.

2.5.11.4 All concrete works shall he measured and paid for separately under


2.6 CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

2.6.1 MATERIALS

2.6.1.1 Masonry units of hollow and solid concrete blocks shall conform to

the requirements of IS : 2185 (Part 1).

2.6.1.2 Masonry units of hollow and solid light-weight concrete blocks shall

conform to the requirements of IS:2185 (Part 2).

2.6.1.3 Masonry units of autoclaved cellular concrete blocks shall conform to

the requirements of IS: 2185 (Part 3).

The nominal dimensions of concrete block shall be as under.

Length 400,500 or 600 mm.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


Height 100 or 200 mm.

2.6.1.4 Width 100 to 300 mm in 50 mm increments

2.6.1.5 Half blocks shall be in lengths of 200, 250 or 300 mm to correspond

to the full length blocks. Actual dimensions shall be 10 mm short of

the nominal dimensions.

2.6.1.6 The maximum variation in the length of the units shall not be more

than + 5mm and maximum variation in height or width of the units

shall not be more than + 3mm.

2.6.1.7 Concrete blocks shall be either hollow blocks with open or closed

cavities or solid blocks.

2.6.1.8 Concrete blocks shall be sound, free of cracks, chipping or other

defects which impair the strength or performance of the construction.

Surface texture shall be as specified. The faces of the units shall be

flat and rectangular, opposite faces shall be parallel and all arises

shal1 be square. The bedding surfaces shall be at right angles to the

faces of the block.

2.6.1.9 The concrete mix for the hollow and solid concrete blocks/light weight

concrete blocks shall not be richer than one part of cement to six

parts of combined aggregates by volume i.e. (1:6).

2.6.1.10 Concrete blocks shall be of approved manufacture, which satisfy the

limitations in the values of water absorption, drying shrinkage and

moisture movement, as specified for the type of block as per relevant

IS code. CONTRACTOR shall furnish the test certificates and also

supply the samples, for the approval of ENGINEER.

2.6.2 WORKMANSHIP

2.6.2.1 The type of the concrete block, thickness and grade based on the

compressive strength for use in load bearing and/or non-load bearing

walls shall be as specified in the respective items of work. The

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


minimum nominal thickness of non-load bearing internal walls shall

be 100 mm. The minimum nominal thickness of external panel walls

in framed construction shall be 200 mm.

2.6.2.2 The workmanship, shall generally conform to the requirements of IS:

2572 for concrete block masonry, IS:6042 for light weight concrete

block masonry and IS:6041 for autoclaved cellular concrete block

masonry works.

2.6.2.3 From considerations of durability, generally concrete block masonry

shall be used only in superstructure works above the damp-proof

course level.

2.6.2.4 Concrete blocks shall be embedded with a mortar which is relatively

weaker than the mix of the blocks in order to avoid the formation of

cracks. Cement mortar of proportion 1:6 shall be used for the works

unless otherwise specified in the respective items of work.

Preparation of mortar shall be as specified in clause 2.5.7 to 2.5.8.

2.6.2.5 The thickness of both horizontal and vertical joints shall be 10 mm.

The first course shall he laid with greater care, ensuring that it is

properly aligned, levelled and plumb since this will facilitate in laying

succeeding courses to obtain a straight and truly vertical wall. For

the horizontal (bedding) joint, mortar shall be spread over the entire

top surface of the block including front and rear as well as the edges

to a uniform layer of 10 mm. For vertical joints, the mortar shall be

applied on the vertical edges of the front and rear sides of the blocks.

The mortar may be applied either to the unit already placed on the

wall or on the edges of the succeeding unit when it is standing

vertically and then placing it horizontally, well pressed against the

previously laid unit to produce a compacted vertical joint. To assure

satisfactory bond, mortar shall not be spread too far ahead of actual

laying of the block as the mortar will stiffen and lose its plasticity.

Mortar while hardening shrinks slightly and thus pulls away from the

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


edges of the block. The mortar shall be pressed against the units

with a jointing tool after it has stiffened to effect intimate contact

between the mortar and the unit to obtain a weather tight joint. The

mortar shall be raked to a depth of 10 mm as each course is laid to

ensure good bond for the plaster.

2.6.2.6 Only well dried blocks should be used for the construction. Blocks

with moisture content more than 25% of maximum water absorption

permissible shall not he used. The blocks should not be wetted

before or during laying in the walls. Blocks should be laid dry except

slightly moistening their surface on which mortar is to be applied to

obviate absorption of water from the mortar.

2.6.2.7 For jambs of doors, windows and openings, solid concrete blocks

shall he provided. If hollow units are used, the hollows shall be filled

with concrete of mix 1:3:6. Hold fasts of doors/windows should be

arranged so that they occur at block course level.

2.6.2.8 At intersection of walls, the courses shall laid up at the same time

with a true masonry bond between at least 50% of the concrete

blocks. The sequence for construction of partition walls and

treatment at the top of load bearing walls for the RCC slab shall be

as detailed under clause 3 for the brick work.

2.6.2.9 Curing of the mortar joints shall be carried out for atleast 7 days. The

walls should only be lightly moistened and shall not be allowed to

become excessively wet.

2.6.2.10 Double scaffolding as per clause 3.3.9.6 shall be adopted for

execution of block masonry work.

2.6.2.11 Cutting of the units shall be restricted to a minimum. All horizontal

and vertical dimensions shall be in multiples of half-length and full

height of units respectively, adapting modular co-ordination for walls,

opening locations for doors, windows etc.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


2.6.2.12 Concrete blocks shall be stored at site suitably to avoid any contact

with moisture from the ground and covered to protect against wetting.

2.6.3 MEASUREMENT

2.6.3.1 Measurement shall be in cum. correct up to two places of decimal for

walls of thickness 200 mm and above. Measurement shall be in sqm

correct up to two places of decimal for walls of 100mm/150mm in

thickness. Measurement shall be for the quantities as actually

executed duly deducting for openings, and concrete works. Concrete

and reinforcement will be measured and paid separately. The rate

quoted shall be for the type of masonry blocks specified in the

respective items of work which shall include for the specific

sequential operations as stipulated in the construction drawings.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3 FLOORING SKIRTING & DADO WORKS

3.1 GENERAL

3.1.1 The works covered under this specification shall include:

3.1.2 Flooring, Dado and Skirting

3.1.3 Tread and risers for steps


3.2.1 Work shall be carried out as per latest edition of Indian Standards

and Code of Practices. List given here shall not be considered as

conclusive and is for reference and guidance only. Any

discrepancies/ conflict noticed shall be brought to the notice of

Architect/Engineer in charge for direction / approval. However, as a

general rule more stringent specification shall take precedence.

IS: 383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for

concrete

IS:456 Plain And Reinforced Concrete - Code Of Practice

IS:702 Specification for industrial bitumen.

IS: 777 Specifications for glazed earthenware tiles

IS: 1121 Method for determination of compressive, transverse

and shear strengths of natural building stones

IS: 1122 Methods for determination of specific gravity and

porosity of natural building stones

IS: 1124 Method of test for determination of water absorption

of natural building stones

IS: 1126 Method of test for durability of natural building stones

IS: 1129 Dressing of natural building stones

IS: 1130 Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles)

IS: 1200 Method of measurements of paving, floor finishes, dado

PART II and skirting

IS: 1237 Cement Concrete Flooring Tiles

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


IS: 1443 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement

concrete flooring tiles

IS: 1580 Bituminous compound for waterproofing and caulking

purposes

IS:1834 - Specification for hot applied sealing compound for joint in

concrete.

IS:1838 - Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint in

concrete pavements and structures (non extruding and

resilient type) : Part 1 Bitumen impregnated fibre.

IS: 2046 Synthetic Resin Bonded Sheets.

IS: 2114 Code of practice for laying in situ terrazzo floor finish

IS: 2116 Sand for masonry mortars

IS: 2571 Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete

flooring

IS: 3384 Bitumen primer for use in waterproofing and damp

proofing

IS: 3462 Specification for unbacked flexible PVC flooring.

Is: 4443 Code of practice for use of resin type chemical

resistant mortars

IS: 4457 Specification for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid

resisting tiles.

IS: 4631 Code of practice for laying of epoxy resin floor

topping

IS: 4832 Specification for chemical resistant mortars (Part II)

IS: 5318 Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet &

tile flooring.

IS: 5491 Code of practice for laying in situ granolithic concrete

floor topping

IS: 9162 Methods of test for epoxy resin, hardeners and epoxy

resin composites for floor topping.

IS: 9197 Specification for epoxy resin, hardeners and epoxy

resin composites for floor topping.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


Is: 12830 Rubber based adhesives for fixing PVC tiles to

cement

IS: 269 Specification of 33 grade ordinary Portland Cement.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.3 RUBBLE SUB-BASE

3.3.1 MATERIALS

3.3.1.1 Stone used under grade slab for rubble soling on grade, foundations

etc., shall be clean, hard, durable rock free from viens, flaws,

luminations, weathering and other defects. Stones shall generally

conform to the requirements stipulated in IS:1597 (Part-I).

3.3.1.2 Stones shall be as regular as can be obtained from quarries. Stones

shall be of height equal to the thickness of the packing proposed with

a tolerance of + 10mm. Stones shall not have a base area less than

250 sq.cm nor more than 500 sq.cm, and the smallest dimension of

any stone shall not be less than half the largest dimension. The

quality and size of stones shall be subject to the approval of the

ENGINEER.

3.3.2 WORKMANSHIP

3.3.2.1 Stones shall be hand packed carefully and laid with their largest base

downwards resting flat on the prepared sub-grade and with their

height equal to the thickness of the packing. Stones shall be laid

breaking joints and in close contact with each other-. All interstices

between the stones shall be wedged-in by small stones of suitable

size, well driven in by crow bars and hammers to ensure tight

packing and complete filling-in of the interstices. The wedging shall

be tarried out simultaneously with the placing in position of rubble

packing and shall not lag behind. After this, any interstices between

the smaller wedged stones shall be in-filled with clean hard sand by

brooming so as to fill the joints completely.

3.3.2.2 The laid rubble packing shall be sprinkled with water and compacted

by using suitable rammers/rollers.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.3.3 MEASUREMENT

3.3.3.1 Measurement shall be in sq.m correct to two places of decimal for

the specified compacted thickness of rubble sub-base.

3.4 BASE CONCRETE

3.4.1 WORKMANSHIP

3.4.1.1 The thickness and grade of concrete shall be as specified in the item

of work.

3.4.1.2 Before placing the blinding concrete, 50/75mm thick as per the item

of work, the sub-base of rubble packing shall be properly wetted and

rammed. Concrete for the base shall then be deposited between the

forms, thoroughly tamped and the surface finished level with the top

edges of the forms. Two or three hours after the concrete has been

laid in position, the surface shall be roughened using steel wire brush

to remove any scum or laitance and swept clean so that the coarse

aggregates are exposed. The surface of the base concrete shall be

left rough to provide adequate bond for the floor finish to be provided

later.

3.4.2 MEASUREMENT

3.4.2.1 Measurement shall be in sq.m correct to two places of decimal. This

work could be either separate or combined along with the floor finish

as indicated in the respective items of work.

3.5 TERRAZZO AND PLAIN CEMENT TILING WORKS

3.5.1 Terrazzo tiles and cement tiles shall generally conform in all respects

to standards stipulated in IS:1237. Tiles shall be of the best quality

manufactured adopting hydraulic pressure of not less than 14N/mm2.

3.5.2 The type, quality, size, thickness colour etc, of the tiles for

flooring/dado/ skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of

work.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.5.3 The aggregates for terrazzo topping shall consist of marble chips

which are hard, sound and dense. Cement to be used shall be either

ordinary Portland cement or white cement with or without colouring

pigment. The binder mix shall be with 3 parts of cement to 1 part of

marble powder by weight. The proportion of cement shall be inclusive

of any pigments. For every one part of cement-marble powder binder

mix, the proportion of aggregates shall be 1.75 parts by volume, if the

chips are between l mm to 6mm and 1.50 parts by volume if the

chips are between 6mm to 25mm.

3.5.4 The minimum thickness of wearing layer of plain cement and plain

coloured tiles for general purpose and terrazzo tiles with chips upto

6mm to 12mm general purpose is 5mm thick tiles. Terrazo tiles with

chips of size up to 20mm for heavy duty and general purpose and

plain cement and plain coloured tiles for heavy duty shall be 6mm

thick tiles. Pigment used in the wearing layer shall not exceed 10

percent of the weight of cement used in the mix.

3.5.5 WORKMANSHIP

3.5.5.1 Laying and finishing of tiles shall conform to the requirements of

workmanship stipulated in IS:1443.

3.5.5.2 Tiling work shall be commenced only after the door and window

frames are fixed and plastering of the walls/ ceiling is completed.

Wall plastering shall not be carried out up to about 50mm above the

level of proposed skirting/dado.

3.5.5.3 The base concrete shall be finished to a reasonably plane surface

about 40 to 45mm below the level of finished floor. Before the tiling

work is taken up, the base concrete or structural slab shall be

cleaned of all loose materials, mortar droppings, dirt, laitance etc.

using steel wire brush and well wetted without allowing any water

pools on the surface.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.5.5.4 A layer of 25mm average thickness of cement mortar consisting of

one part of cement to four parts of sand shall be provided as bedding

for the tiles over the base concrete. The thickness of bedding mortar

shall not be less than l0mm at any place. The quantity of water to be

added for the mortar shall be just adequate to obtain the workability

for laying. Sand for the mortar shall conform to IS:2116 and shall

have minimum fineness modulus of 1.5. The surface shall be left

rough to provide a good bond for the tiles. The bedding shall be

allowed to harden for a day before laying of the tiles.

3.5.5.5 Neat cement slurry using 4.4 kg of cement per one sq.m of floor area

shall be spread over the hardened mortar bedding over such an area

at a time as would accommodate about 20 tiles. Tiles shall be fixed in

this slurry one after the other, each tile being gently tapped with a

wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining

tiles. The joints shall be in straight lines and shall normally be 1.5mm

wide. On completion of laying of the tiles in a room, all the Joints

shall be cleaned and washed fairly deep with a stiff broom/wire brush

to a minimum depth of 5mm. The day after the tiles have been laid,

the joints shall be filled with cement grout of the same shade on the

colour of the matrix of the tile. For this purpose white cement or grey

cement with or without pigments shall be used. The flooring should

be kept moist and left undisturbed for 7 days for the bedding/joints to

set properly. Heavy traffic shall not be allowed on the floor for at least

14 days after fixing of the tiles.

3.5.5.6 About a week after laying the tiles, each and every tile shall be lightly

tapped with a small wooden mallet to find out if it gives a hollow

sound; if it does, such tiles along with any other cracked or broken

tiles shall be removed and replaced with new tiles to proper line and

level. The same procedure shall be followed again after grinding the

tiles and all damaged tiles replaced, properly jointed and finished to

match. For the purpose of ensuring that such replaced tiles match

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


with those laid earlier, it is necessary that the CONTRACTOR shall

procure sufficient quantity of extra tiles to meet this contingency.

3.5.5.7 Wherever a full tile cannot be provided, tiles shall be cut to size and

fixed. Floor tiles adjoining the wall shall go about 10mm under the

plaster, skirting or dado.

3.5.5.8 Tile skirting and dado work shall be executed only after laying tiles on

the floor. For dado and skirting work, the vertical wall surface shall be

thoroughly cleaned and wetted. Thereafter it shall be evenly and

uniformly covered with 12mm thick backing of 1:4 cement sand

mortar. For this work the tiles as obtained from the factory shall be of

the size required and practically full polished. The back of each tile to

be fixed shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and

the tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall with a wooden

mallet. Fixing shall be done from the bottom of the wall upwards. The

joints shall be in straight lines and shall normally be 1.5mm wide. Any

difference in the thickness of the tiles shall be evened out in the

backing mortar or cement paste so that the tile faces are in

conformity & truly plumb. Tiles for use at the corners shall be suitably

cut with bevelled edges to obtain a neat and true joint. After the work

has set, hand polishing with carborundum stones shall be done so

that the surface matches with the floor finish.

3.5.5.9 Wall plastering of the strip left out above the level of skirting/dado

shall be taken up after the tiles are fixed.

3.5.5.10 CONTRACTOR shall note that the unit rate quoted for skirting shall

also include for any chipping of the brick work required to be carried

out for this item.

3.5.5.11 Chequered terrazzo tiles for flooring and for stair treads shall be

delivered to site after the first machine grinding.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.5.5.12 Machine grinding and polishing shall be commenced only after a gap

of 14 days of laying. The sequence and three numbers of machine

grinding operations, usage of the type of carborundum stones, filling

up of pin holes, watering etc. shall be carried out all as specified in

IS:1443.

3.5.5.13 Tiles shall be laid to the levels specified. To ensure this, finished floor

levels should be marked at all door locations and also on the floor at

frequent intervals. Where large areas are to be tiled the level of the

central portion shall be kept l0mm higher than that at the walls

to overcome optical illusion of a depression in the central portion.

Localized deviation of 3mm in any 3m length is acceptable in a

nominally flat floor.

3.5.5.14 All corners shall be in perfect right angle matching up with the

corners of walls. If due to any misalignment during construction, the

corners of wall are not at right angle, adjustment shall be made in the

title portion lying below skirting.

3.5.5.15 Flooring in toilets, kitchen shall be taken up only after fixing water

closet, squatting pans & floor traps.

3.6 IN-SITU TERRAZZO WORK

3.6.1 The aggregates for terrazzo topping shall consist of marble chips

which are hard, sound and dense.

3.6.2 Cement to be used shall be either ordinary Portland cement or white

cement with or without colouring pigment.

3.6.3 The binder mix shall be with 3 parts of cement to 1 part of marble

powder by weight. The proportion of cement shall be inclusive of any

pigments. For every one part of cement-marble powder binder mix,

the proportion of aggregates shall be 1.75 parts by volume, if the

chips are between l mm to 6mm and 1.50 parts by volume if the

chips are between 6mm to 25mm.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.6.4 WORKMANSHIP

3.6.4.1 Cement shall first be mixed with the marble powder in dry state. The

mix thus obtained shall be mixed with the aggregates in the specified

proportions.

3.6.4.2 Care shall be taken not to get the materials into a heap which results

in the coarsest chips falling to the edges and cement working to the

centre at the bottom.

3.6.4.3 Materials shall be kept, as far as possible, in an even layer during

mixing. After the materials have been thoroughly mixed in the dry

state, water shall be added, just adequate to obtain plastic

consistency for the desired workability for laying.

3.6.4.4 The mix shall be used in the works within 30 minutes of the addition

of water to the cement.

3.6.4.5 The thickness, type, quality, size and colour of chips etc. for the in-

situ terrazzo finish for flooring/dado skirting shall be as specified in

the respective items of work. Laying and finishing of in-situ work shall

conform to the requirements of workmanship stipulated in IS: 2114.

3.6.4.6 In-situ terrazzo finish shall be laid over hardened concrete base. The

finish layer consists of an under layer and terrazzo topping. The

under layer shall be of cement concrete of mix 1:2:4 using l0mm

downgraded coarse aggregates. The combined thickness of under

layer and topping shall not be less than 30 mm for flooring and 20mm

for dado/skirting work.

3.6.4.7 The minimum thickness of topping shall be 6mm if chips used are

between 1mm to 4mm, 9mm if chips are between 4mm to 7mm and

12mm if chips are between 7mm to l0mm. If chips larger than l0mm

size are used, the minimum thickness shall be one and one third the

maximum size of chips.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.6.4.8 Both the under layer and later the topping shall be divided into panels

not exceeding 2 Sq.m. for laying so as to reduce the possibility of

development of cracks. The longer dimension of any panel shall not

exceed 2m. Dividing strips shall be used to separate the panels.

When the dividing strips are not provided, the bays shall be laid

alternately, allowing an interval of at least 24 hours between laying

adjacent bays.

3.6.4.9 Dividing strips shall be either of aluminum, brass, glass or other

material as indicated in the item of work. Aluminum strips should

have a protective coating of bitumen. The thickness of the strips shall

be not less than 1.5mm and width not less than 25mm for flooring

work.

3.6.4.10 Concrete base shall be finished to a reasonably plane surface to a

level below the finished floor elevation equal to the specified

thickness of terrazzo finish. Before spreading the under-layer, the

base concrete surface shall be cleaned of all loose materials, mortar

droppings, dirt, laitance etc. and well wetted without allowing any

water pools on the surface. Dividing strips or screed strips, if dividing

strips are not provided, shall be fixed on the base and leveled to the

correct height to suit the thickness of the finish. Just before spreading

the under-layer the surface shall be smeared with cement slurry at

2.75 Kg/sq.m. Over this slurry, the under-layer shall be spread and

leveled with a screed board. The top surface shall be left rough to

provide a good bond for the terrazzo topping.

3.6.4.11 Terrazzo topping shall be laid while the under-layer is still plastic and

normally between 18 to 24 hours after the under-layer is laid. Cement

slurry of the same colour as the topping shall be brushed on the

surface immediately before laying is commenced. The terrazzo mix

shall be laid to a uniform thickness and compacted thoroughly by

tamping and with a minimum of trowelling. Straight edge and steel

floats shall be used to bring the surface true to the required level in

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


such a manner that the maximum amount of marble chips come up

and spread uniformly all over the surface.

3.6.4.12 The surface shall be left dry for air-curing for a period of 12 to 18

hours. Thereafter it shall be cured by allowing water to stand in pools

for a period of not less than 4 days.

3.6.4.13 Machine grinding and polishing shall be commenced only after a gap

of 7 days from the time of completion of laying. The sequence and

four numbers of machine grinding operations, usage of the type of

carborundum stones, filling up of pinholes, wet curing, watering etc

shall be carried out all as specified in IS: 2114. Where machine

polishing is not possible, polishing shall be carried out by hand in the

same sequence and procedure as for machine polishing.

3.6.4.14 Where the dampness from ground may find its way to the top of floor,

concrete floor on the ground or basement shall be provided with an

effective damp proof.

3.6.4.15 Flooring in toilet and kitchen shall be taken up after fixing water

closet, squatting pans and floor trap.

3.7 IN-SITU CEMENT CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING

3.7.1 The mix proportion for the in-situ concrete floor topping shall be

1:2.5:3.5(one part cement: two and half parts sand : three and half

parts coarse aggregates) by volume unless otherwise specified in the

item of work.

3.7.2 The aggregates shall conform for the requirements of IS:383.

3.7.3 Coarse aggregates shall have high hardness surface texture and

shall consist of crushed rock of granite, basalt, trap or quartzite. The

aggregate crushing value shall not exceed 30 percent. The grading

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


of the coarse aggregates shall be of size 12.5mm and below and

shall be as per IS:2571.

3.7.4 Grading of the sand shall be within the limits indicated in IS:2571.

3.7.5 WORKMANSHIP

3.7.5.1 The thickness of the floor topping shall be as specified in the item of

work. The minimum thickness of the floor topping shall be 25mm, if it

is laid separately. 15mm thick wearing course of cement concrete 1:2

(1 cement:2 stone) aggregate of size 4.75mm & below) by volume

shall be applied monolithically over floor topping, if called for in the

schedule of item. Wearing course shall be 20mm thick, if it is cast

monolithically over ground floor slab. Laying and finishing of in-situ

topping shall conform to the requirements of IS 2571.

3.7.5.2 The surface shall be rough to provide adequate bond for the topping.

It shall be finished to a level below the finished floor equal to the

thickness of topping and / or wearing courses, if specified.

3.7.5.3 Mixing of concrete shall be done thoroughly in a mechanical mixer

unless hand mixing is specifically permitted by the ENGINEER. The

concrete shall be as stiff as possible and the amount of water added

shall be the minimum necessary to give just sufficient plasticity for

laying and compacting. The mix shall be used in the work within 30

minutes of the addition of water for its preparation.

3.7.5.4 Floor finish shall be laid in suitable panels to reduce the risk of

cracking. No dimension of a panel shall exceed 2 meters and the

length of a panel shall not exceed one and a half times its breadth.

Topping shall be laid in alternate panels, the intermediate panels

being cast after a gap of at least one day. Construction joints shall be

plain vertical butt joints.

3.7.5.5 Screed strips shall be fixed dividing the area into suitable panels.

Immediately before depositing the concrete topping, neat cement

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


slurry at 2.75 kg/sq.m of area shall be thoroughly brushed into the

prepared surface. Topping shall then be laid, very thoroughly

tamped, struck off level and floated with wooden float. The surface

shall then be tested with a straight edge and mason's spirit level to

detect any inequalities from that specified in the drawings and these

shall be made good immediately.

3.7.5.6 Finishing of the surface by trowelling shall be spread over a period of

one to six hours depending upon the temperature and atmospheric

conditions. The surface shall be trowelled 3 times at intervals so as

to produce a smooth uniform and hard surface. Immediately after

laying, the first trowelling just sufficient to give a level surface shall be

carried out avoiding excessive trowelling at this stage. The surface

shall be re-trowelled after sometime to close any pores and to scrap

off excess water or laitance, which shall not be trowelled back into

the topping. Final trowelling shall be done well before the concrete

has become too hard but at a time when considerable pressure is

required to make any impression on the surface. Sprinkling of dry

cement or cement-sand mixture for absorbing moisture shall not be

permitted.

3.7.5.7 Immediately after the surface is finished, it shall be protected suitably

from rapid drying due to wind/ sunlight. After the surface has

hardened sufficiently to prevent any damage to it, the topping shall

be kept continuously moist for a minimum period of 10 days.

3.7.5.8 It is preferable to lay the topping on hardened base concrete, as

against being laid monolithically with a lesser thickness, since proper

levels and slopes with close surface tolerance, is achievable in

practice, owing to its greater thickness. Further, as this would be laid

after all other building operations are over, there will be no risk of any

damages or discoloration to the floor finishes which are difficult to

repair satisfactorily.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.7.5.9 In severe condition, where dampness from ground may find its way

on the top of the floor, the floor slab shall be cast in two equal halves.

The top surface of bottom half shall be made plane and smooth after

it is cast. A coat of bitumen primer conforming to IS 3384 shall be

applied on the hard surface over which two coats of bitumen

conforming to IS 1580 shall be applied @ 1.5 kg/m2 for each layer.

After the bitumen surface is dry, the top half of floor slab shall be

cast.

3.8 IN-SITU GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING

3.8.1 The requirements of materials and workmanship shall be same as in

situ terrazzo work floor topping except that the mix proportion of the

concrete shall be 1:1:2 (cement:sand:coarse-aggregates) by volume.

3.8.2 The thickness of the floor topping shall be as specified in the item of

work. The minimum thickness of granolithic floor topping on

hardened concrete base shall be 40mm, if laid separately. It shall be

20mm, if the topping is laid monolithically over the floor concrete.

3.9 FLOOR HARDENER TOPPING

3.9.1 Floor hardener topping shall be provided either as integrally finished

over the structural slab/grade slab or laid monolithically with the

concrete/granolithic floor finish on top of hardened concrete base.

3.9.2 Floor hardener of the metallic or non-metallic type suitable for the

performance of normal/medium/heavy duty function of the floor, the

quantum of ingredients and the thickness of topping shall be as

specified in the respective items of work.

3.9.3 For monolithic application with the floor finish/slab, the thickness of

the layer shall be 15mm. It shall be 20mm if it is laid separately over

floor slab. The topping shall be laid within 2 to 3 hours after concrete

is laid and it is still plastic but stiffened enough for the workmen to

tread over it by placing planks. The surface of the concrete layer

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


shall be kept rough for providing adequate band for the topping.

Laitance shall be removed before placing the topping. The topping

shall be screeded and thoroughly compacted to the finished level.

After the surface has hardened sufficiently, it shall be kept

continuously moist for at least 10 days.

3.9.4 The procedure for mixing the floor hardener topping shall be as per

manufacturer's instructions.

3.9.5 Floor hardener topping shall be prevented from any damages due to

subsequent building operations by covering with 75 mm thick layer of

sand, if it is laid monolithically with the slab.

3.10 EPOXY LINING WORK

3.10.1 The epoxy resin and hardener formulation for laying of Pointless

lining work in floors and walls of concrete tanks/trenches, floor

toppings etc shall be as per the requirements of IS:9197. Method of

laying shall be as per the requirements of IS 4631.

3.10.2 The epoxy composition shall have the chemical resistance to

withstand the conditions of exposure like Hydrochloric acid up to 30%

concentration, Sodium hydroxide up to 50% concentration, Liquid

temperature up to 60"C, Ultraviolet radiation, Alternate wetting and

drying.

3.10.3 Epoxy resin shall be of liquid type of suitable grade and class as

recommended by the manufacturer.

3.10.4 The hardener shall be of the liquid type such as Aliphatic Amine or

an Aliphatic/Aromatic Amine Adduct or a polyamide or amido

polyamine of suitable characteristics. The hardener shall react with

epoxy resin at normal ambient temperature above 5oC.

3.10.5 Sand shall conform to grading zone III or IV of IS 383.

3.10.6 Accelerator, plasticizer and coal tar may be added for the preparation

of epoxy composition, to the proportion as recommended in IS 9197.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.10.7 CONTRACTOR shall furnish test certificates for satisfying the

requirements of the epoxy formulation if so directed by the

ENGINEER.

3.10.8 WORKMANSHIP

3.10.8.1 The minimum thickness of epoxy lining shall be as recommended in

IS 4631 based on type of application & usage. The thickness and

areas of application shall be as specified in the respective items of

work. It is essential that the base concrete is properly cured, dried

and made rough at the time of application.

3.10.8.2 The epoxy lining shall be of the trowel type to facilitate execution of

the required thickness for satisfactory performance.

3.10.8.3 The concrete surfaces over which epoxy lining is to be provided shall

be thoroughly cleaned of oil or grease by suitable solvents, wire

brushed to remove any dirt/dust and laitance. The surfaces shall then

be washed with dilute hydrochloric acid (10% to 15%) and rinsed

thoroughly with plenty of water or dilute ammonia solution. The

surfaces shall then be allowed to dry. It is essential to ensure that the

surfaces are perfectly dry and even, before the commencement of

epoxy application.

3.10.8.4 Just adequate quantity of epoxy resin which can be applied within the

pot life as specified by the manufacturer shall be prepared at one

time for laying and jointing.

3.10.8.5 Rigid PVC/stainless steel/chromium plated tools shall be used for

laying. Trowelling shall be carried out to obtain uniformly the

specified thickness of lining.

3.10.8.6 Lining shall be allowed to set without disturbance for a minimum

period of 24 hours. The facility shall be put to use only after a

minimum period of 7 days of laying of the lining.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.10.8.7 For epoxy lining over the inside concrete surfaces of underground

tank or trenches, it should be ensured that they are leak proof

against water by conducting leakage test.

3.11 SHAHABAD / TANDUR / KOTA STONE / GRANITE / MARBLE

SLAB WORK

3.11.1 The slabs shall be of approved selected quality, hard, sound, dense

and homogenous in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and

flaws. The percentage of water absorption shall not exceed 5 percent

as per test conducted in accordance with IS:1124.

3.11.2 The slabs shall be hand or machine cut to the required thickness.

Tolerance in thickness for dimensions of tile more than 100 mm shall

be ±5mm. This shall be + 2mm on dimensions less than l00mm.

3.11.3 Slabs shall be supplied to the specified size with machine cut edges

or fine chisel dressed to the full depth. All angles and edges of the

slabs shall be true and square, free from any chipping giving a plane

surface. Slabs shall have the top surface machine polished (first

grinding) before being brought to site. The slabs shall be washed

clean before laying.

3.11.4 WORKMANSHIP

3.11.4.1 The type, size, thickness and colour/shade etc. of the slabs for

flooring/dado/ skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of

the work.

3.11.4.2 Concrete base shall be prepared and finished below the finished floor

level equal to the thickness of stone slab and cement mortar below.

3.11.4.3 The thickness of the slabs for dado/skirting work shall not be more

than 25mm. Slabs shall be so placed that the back surface is at a

distance of 12mm from the wall. If necessary, slabs shall be held in

position temporarily by suitable method. After checking for verticality,

the gap shall be filled and packed with cement sand mortar of

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


proportion 1:3. After the mortar has acquired sufficient strength, the

temporary arrangement holding the slab shall be removed. The

recommended mortar mix for joints and beddings for stone blocks

shall be two parts of white cement and seven parts of stone dust.

The thickness of joints shall be 5 mm. For fixing of stones to the

walls, fixing clamps of non-ferrous metal should be used.

3.11.4.4 Grinding and polishing shall be as per clause 3.6.4.13 except that

first grinding with coarse grade carborundum shall not be done and

cement slurry with or without pigment shall not be applied before

polishing.

3.12 CARBORUNDUM TILE FINISH

3.12.1 Carborundum tiles shall generally conform in all respects to the

standards stipulated in IS: 1237 for heavy duty tiles. Tiles shall be of

the best quality manufactured adopting hydraulic pressure of not less

than 14 N/mm2.

3.12.2 Each tile shall bear on its back, permanent and legible trade mark of

the manufacturer. All angles of the tiles shall be right angle, all edges

sharp and true, colour and texture of the wearing face uniform

throughout. Maximum tolerance/allowance for length and breadth

shall be +1 mm and thickness +3mm along the wearing surface of

the tile and the wearing surface shall be planed free from pin-holes

and other blemishes.

3.12.3 The backing shall be composed of 1 part ordinary grey cement, 2

parts sand and 4 parts of stone chips by volume and mixed with

water.

3.12.4 The topping shall be uniform and of thickness not less than 6mm.

The quantity of carborundum grit shall be not less than 1.35 kg/sq.m

used with cement with or without pigment. The carborundum grit

shall pass through 1.18mm mesh and shall be retained on

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


0.60mm mesh. The total thickness of tiles including the topping shall

be not less than 20 mm.

3.12.5 The tile shall be cured at the shop for at least 14 days before delivery

to site. Tiles shall be packed properly to prevent damage during

transit and storage. The tiles must be stored carefully to prevent

staining by damp, rust, oil and grease or other chemicals. Tiles made

in each batch shall be kept and used separately so that the colour of

each area of floor may remain uniform.

3.12.6 The manufacturer shall supply along with the tiles the grout mix

containing cement and pigment in exact proportions as used in

topping of tiles. The containers of the grout mix shall be suitably

marked to relate it to the particular type and batch of tiles

3.12.7 The size, thickness, colour and plain or chequered etc. of the tiles for

flooring/skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of work.

The under bed for floors shall be 1 part cement: 2 parts coarse sand:

4 parts stone aggregate by volume mix with sufficient water to form a

stiff workable mass. For skirting and dado, it shall be 1 part cement:

3 parts coarse sand by volume.

3.12.8 The total average thickness shall be minimum 50 mm for floors and

30 mm for walls.

3.12.9 WORKMANSHIP

3.12.9.1 Requirements as detailed for terrazzo/cement tile finish shall be

applicable to carborundum tile flooring.

3.13 VITRIFIED TILES / CERAMIC TILES / GLAZED TILE FINISH

3.13.1 Tiles shall be of the best quality from an approved manufacturer. The

tiles shall be flat, true to shape and free from flaws such as crazing,

blisters, pinholes, specks or welts. Edges and underside of the tiles

shall be free from glaze and shall have ribs or indentations for a

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


better anchorage with the bedding mortar. Dimensional tolerances

shall be as specified in IS: 13756.

3.13.2 WORKMANSHIP

3.13.2.1 The size, thickness, colour, with or without designs etc of the tiles for

flooring/dado/skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of

work.

3.13.2.2 The total thickness of glazed tile finish including the bedding mortar

shall be maximum 20 mm in flooring/dado/skirting. The minimum

thickness of bedding mortar shall be 12mm for flooring and l0mm for

dado/skirting work.

3.13.2.3 The bedding mortar shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of

sand mixed with just sufficient water to obtain proper consistency for

laying. Sand for the mortar shall conform to IS: 2116 and shall have

minimum fineness modules of 1.5

3.13.2.4 Tiles shall be soaked in water for about 10 minutes just before laying.

Where full size tiles cannot be fixed, tiles shall be cut to the required

size using special cutting device and the edges rubbed smooth to

ensure straight and true joints.

3.13.2.5 Coloured tiles with or without designs shall be uniform and shall be

preferably procured from the same batch of manufacture to avoid any

differences in the shade.

3.13.2.6 Tiles for the flooring shall be laid over hardened concrete base. The

surface of the concrete base shall be cleaned of all loose materials,

mortar droppings etc well wetted without allowing any water pools on

the surface. The bedding mortar shall then be laid evenly over the

surface, tamped to the desired level and allowed to harden for a day.

The top surface shall be left rough to provide a good band for the

tiles. For skirting and dado work, the brick walls shall be raked to a

depth of 15mm. In case of concrete walls, the surfaces shall be

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


hacked. The raked / hacked masonry surfaces shall be cleared, wet

and then the bedding mortar to specified thickness shall be applied.

The mortar surfaces shall be roughened using wire brush and

allowed to harden.

3.13.2.7 Neat cement slurry using 3.3 kg cement per one sq.m of floor area

shall be spread over the hardened mortar bed over such an area as

would accommodate about 20 tiles. Tiles shall be fixed in this slurry

one after the other, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden

mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. For

skirting and dado work, the back of the tiles shall be smeared with

cement slurry for setting on the backing mortar.

3.13.2.8 Fixing of tiles shall be done from the bottom of the wall upwards. The

joints shall be in perfect straight lines and as thin as possible but

shall not be more than l mm wide. Tiles used for corners shall be

suitably beveled to obtain a true and neat joint. The surface shall be

checked frequently to ensure correct level/required slope. Floor tiles

near the walls shall enter skirting/dado to a minimum depth of 10mm.

Tiles shall not sound hollow when tapped.

3.13.2.9 All the joints shall be cleaned of grey cement with wire brush to a

depth of at least 3mm and all dust, loose mortar etc. shall be

removed. White cement with or without pigment shall then be used

for flush pointing the joints. Curing shall then be carried out for a

minimum period of 7 days for the bedding and joints to set properly.

The surface shall then be cleaned using a suitable detergent, fully

washed and wiped dry.

3.13.2.10 Specials consisting of coves, internal and external angles, cornices,

beads and their corner pieces shall be of thickness not less than the

tiles with which they are used.

3.14 PVC / VINYL SHEET/TILE FLOORING

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.14.1 PVC/VINYL floor covering shall be of either unbacked homogeneous

flexible type in the form of sheets/tiles conforming to IS:3462 or

homogeneous PVC asbestos tiles conforming to IS:3461.

3.14.2 The surface of the sheets/tiles shall be free from any physical defects

such as pores, blisters, cracks etc. which affects the appearance and

serviceability. Tiles/sheets shall meet with the tolerance limits in

dimensions specified in the IS codes. CONTRACTOR shall submit

the test certificates, if so desired by the ENGINEER.

3.14.3 Each tile/sheet shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the name of

the manufacturer or his trade mark, IS certificate mark and batch

number.

3.14.4 The adhesive to be used for laying the PVC/VINYL flooring shall be

rubber based conforming to IS 12830 and of the make as

recommended and approved by the manufacturer of PVC/VINYL

sheets/tiles.

3.14.5 The type, size, thickness, colour, plain or mottled and the pattern

shall be as specified in the respective items of work.

3.14.6 WORKMANSHIP

3.14.6.1 Laying of PVC / VINYL sheets / tiles shall conform IS 5318. PVC /

VINYL floor covering shall be provided over an under bed of cement

concrete floor finish over the base concrete or structural slab. It is

essential that the sub-floor and the under bed are perfectly dry before

laying the PVC / VINYL flooring. This shall be ensured by methods of

testing as stipulated in Appendix-A of IS:5318. Concrete floor on the

ground / basement shall be treated with an effective damp proof

course.

3.14.6.2 The surface of the under bed shall have trowelled finish without any

irregularities which creates poor adhesion. Surface shall be free of oil

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


or grease and thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt and wiped with a

dry cloth.

3.14.6.3 PVC / VINYL sheets/tiles shall be brought to the temperature of the

area in which they are to be laid by stacking in a suitable manner

within or near the laying area for a period of about 24 hours. Where

air-conditioning is installed, the flooring shall not be laid on the under

bed until the A/C units have been in operation for at least 7 days.

During this period, the temperature range shall be between 200C and

300C and this shall be maintained during the laying operations and

also for 48 hours thereafter.

3.14.6.4 Layout of the PVC / VINYL flooring shall be marked with guidelines

on the under bed and PVC / VINYL tiles/sheets shall be first laid for

trial, without using the adhesive, according to the layout.

3.14.6.5 The adhesive shall be applied by using a notched trowel to the

surface of the under bed and to the backside of PVC / VINYL

sheets/tiles. When the adhesive has set sufficiently for laying, it will

be tacky to the touch, which generally takes about 30 minutes. The

time period need be carefully monitored since a longer interval will

affect the adhesive properties. Adhesive shall be uniformly spread

over only as much surface area at one time which can be covered

with PVC / VINYL flooring within the stipulated time.

3.14.6.6 PVC / VINYL sheet shall be carefully taken and placed in position

from one end onwards slowly so that the air will be completely

squeezed out between the sheet and the background surface and no

air pockets are formed. It shall then be pressed with a suitable roller

to develop proper contact. The next sheet shall be laid edge to edge

with the sheet already laid, so that there is minimum gap between

joints. The alignment shall be checked after each row of sheet is

completed and trimmed if considered necessary.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.14.6.7 Tiles shall be laid in the same manner as sheets and preferably,

commencing from the centre of the area. Tiles should be lowered in

position and pressed firmly on to the adhesive with minimum gap

between the joints. Tiles shall not be slided on the surface. Tiles shall

be rolled with a light wooden roller of about 5kg to ensure full contact

with the underlay. Work should be constantly checked to ensure that

all four edges of adjacent tiles meet accurately.

3.14.6.8 Any excess adhesive which may squeeze up between sheets/tiles

shall be wiped off immediately with a wet cloth. Suitable solvents

shall be used to remove hardened adhesive.

3.14.6.9 A minimum period of 24 hours shall be given after laying for the

development of proper bond of the adhesive. When the flooring in

thus completed, it shall be cleaned with a wet cloth soaked in warm

soap solution.

3.14.6.10 Metallic edge strips shall be used to protect the edges of PVC /

VINYL sheets/tiles which are exposed as in doorways/ stair treads.

3.14.6.11 Hot sealing of joints between adjacent PVC / VINYL sheet flooring to

prevent creeping of water through the Joints shall be carried out, if

specified in the item of work, using special equipment as per

manufacturer's instructions.

3.14.6.12 It is desirable that the PVC / VINYL flooring are taken up after

completing all other works in the area so as to avoid any accidental

damage to the flooring.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.15 ACID RESISTANT TILES

3.15.1 The ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles shall conform to

the requirements of IS: 4457.

3.15.2 The finished tile when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture,

dense and homogeneous. Tile shall be sound, true to shape, flat,

free from flaws and any manufacturing defects affecting their utility.

Tolerance in the dimensions shall be within the limits specified in the

respective IS code.

3.15.3 The tiles shall be bedded and jointed using chemical resistant mortar

prepared from resin type conforming to IS: 4832 (Part II) filter,

accelerator and catalyst mixed in proportion as recommended by

manufacturers. Method of usage shall generally be as per the

requirements of IS: 4443.

3.15.4 WORKMANSHIP

3.15.4.1 The size and thickness of tiles for use in the flooring/skirting/dado

shall be as specified in the respective items of work.

3.15.4.2 The base concrete surface shall be free from dirt and thoroughly

dried. The surface shall be applied with a coat of bitumen primer

conforming to IS: 3384. The primed surface shall then be applied

with a uniform coat of bitumen conforming to IS: 1580. Tiles shall be

laid directly without the application of bitumen, if epoxy or polyester

resin is used for the mortar.

3.15.4.3 Just adequate quantity of mortar which can be applied within the pot

life as specified by the manufacturer shall be prepared at one time for

bedding and jointing. Rigid PVC/Stainless steel/chromium plated

tools shall be used for mixing and laying.

3.15.4.4 For laying the floor 6 to 8 mm thick mortar shall be spread on the

back of the tile. Two adjacent sides of the tile shall be smeared with 4

to 6 mm thick mortar. Tile shall be pressed into the bed and pushed

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


against the floor and with the adjacent tile, until the joint in each case

is 2 to 3 mm thick. Excess mortar shall then be trimmed off and

allowed to harden fully. Similar procedure shall be adopted for the

work on walls by pressing the tile/brick against the prepared wall

surfaces and only one course shall be laid at a time until the initial

setting period.

3.15.4.5 The mortar joints shall be cured for a minimum period of 72 hours

with 20 to 25% hydrochloric acid or 30 to 40% sulphuric acid. After

acid curing, the joints shall be washed with water and allowed to

thoroughly dry. The joints shall then be filled with mortar to make

them smooth and plane. Acid curing is not required to be carried out

if epoxy or polyester resin is used for the mortar.

3.15.4.6 Resin mortars are normally self curing. The area tiled shall not be put

to use before 48 hours in case epoxy, polyester and furane type of

resin is used for the mortar. If phenol or cashew nut shell liquid resin

is used for the mortar, the area tiled shall not be put to use for 7 to 28

days respectively, without heat treatment. This period shall be 2 to 6

days respectively if heat treatment is given with infrared lamp.

3.15.4.7 Temperature during preparation of mortar, its application, curing etc.

shall be controlled and maintained as recommended by

manufacturer.

3.15.4.8 It is necessary that the concrete slab / wall shall be made leak proof

against water, if necessary by pressure grouting etc. before taking up

any titling works. Cost of such works shall be deemed to have

included in the cost of tiling works, whether same is specifically

mentioned or not.

3.16 STAMPED CONCRETE PAVING WORKS

3.16.1 Concrete Mix Design - The concrete shall have a minimum

compressive strength of 3,000 psi in non-freeze areas, 3,500 psi in

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


moderate freeze-thaw areas and 4,000 psi in severe freeze-thaw

areas. Portland cement & Aggregates shall conform to IS. Mixing

water shall be fresh, clean and potable. No admixtures containing

calcium chloride shall be permitted.

3.16.2 Dry-Shake Coloured Hardener - Cementitious material containing

special hard aggregates, formulated as a high opacity colour

hardening material for the top surface of freshly place concrete

substrates. Highly UV-resistant. Factory proportioned, mixed and

packaged, ready-to-use. Comply with IS 9197.

3.16.3 Low VOC Liquid Release Agent - Colourless, odourless liquid

formulated to break the bond between imprinting tools and surface of

colour-hardened concrete. Evaporates completely, leaving no

residue. VOC content less than 450 g/L (3.75lb/gal).

3.16.4 Curing and sealing compound

3.16.5 WORKMANSHIP / FABRICATION AND ERECTION

3.16.5.1 Sub grade Preparation

3.16.5.2 The area to receive imprinted concrete shall have the sub-grade

prepared as required as for any concrete slab on grade.Sub grade to

receive stamped concrete paving work must be well drained and

have adequate, uniform load bearing characteristics.

3.16.5.3 Concrete Placement

3.16.5.4 Place and spread concrete to completely fill all space inside forms.

Move concrete into place with square-tipped shovels or concrete

rakes. Consolidate concrete by tamping or vibrating to provide a

suitable surface for finishing. Prior to appearance of excess moisture

or bleed water, screed concrete with wood or magnesium straight

edge or mechanical vibrating screed. Continue concrete surface

leveling and consolidation with highway magnesium straight edge

and (or) magnesium bull float. Mechanically float concrete surfaces

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


to required flatness and levelness as soon as concrete surface has

taken its initial set and will support weight of a power float machine

equipped with float shoes or combination blades and operator.

Completed concrete placement to result in an open surface suitable

to receive colored hardener.

3.16.5.5 Stamped Concrete Paving Installation

3.16.5.6 Apply 2/3 of dry-shake colored hardener at specified application rate

to freshly floated concrete surface. Bleed water must not be present

during or following application of first and second dry-shake

applications. Do not throw dry-shake colored hardener material;

distribute evenly by hand or mechanical spreader designed to apply

floor hardeners. Mechanical spreader manufacturer as acceptable to

stamped concrete paving manufacturer. As soon as dry-shake

material has absorbed moisture, indicated by uniform darkening of

surface, mechanically float concrete surface a second time, just

enough to bring moisture from base slab through dry-shake color

hardener. Immediately following second floating, apply remaining 1/3

of dry-shake colored hardener at specified application rate. If applied

by hand, broadcast in opposite direction of first application for a more

uniform coverage. If a mechanical spreader is used, apply in same

manner as previously described. As soon as dry-shake material has

absorbed moisture, mechanically float concrete surface a third time.

Do not add water to the surface. Begin imprinting operations

immediately after applying dry-shake colored hardener, according to

manufacturer’s written instructions, including application of powder

antiquing release agent.

3.16.5.7 Sealing

3.16.5.8 Prior to sealing, the following conditions must be present:

3.16.5.9 Release agent has been removed.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.16.5.10 Moisture content of concrete is low enough that alkali and other salts

do not become trapped beneath sealer. This will require a minimum

of 28 days subsequent to concrete placement, or longer if required.

3.16.5.11 No evidence of free water on concrete surfaces to receive curing and

sealing compound.

3.16.5.12 Seal imprinted concrete with liquid membrane curing and sealing

compounds as recommended by manufacturer. Apply two coats of

specified curing and sealing compound according to manufacturer’s

written instructions.

3.16.5.13 Protection of Finished Work

3.16.5.14 Prohibit foot or vehicular traffic on the newly imprinted concrete

surface. Protect floor surface from damage throughout remainder of

construction period until Final Acceptance of the work. If a covering

material is necessary, surfaces must remain uncovered for a

minimum of four days after which they may be covered with a new,

smooth, non staining reinforced Kraft curing paper. Plastic sheeting

is unacceptable as a covering material.

3.16.6 STORAGE, HANDLING & DELIVERY

3.16.6.1 Deliver products in original factory unopened, undamaged packaging

bearing identification of product, manufacturer, batch number, and

expiration date as applicable.

3.16.6.2 Store products in a location protected from damage, construction

activity, and adverse environmental conditions according to

manufacturer’s current recommendations.

3.16.6.3 Imprinting tools must be stored flat, textured face up, with no objects

resting on top. Handle products according to manufacturer’s printed

instructions.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.16.6.4 Care must be taken to ensure that the products are not damaged

while loading / unloading and transporting. Cartons must always be

stored with designated side upwards.

3.16.7 MEASUREMENT

3.16.7.1 Measurement for stamped concrete shall be done in Square meters

correct to two decimal places for area to be imprinted. The superficial

area of paving work shall be considered for measurement without

any deduction for cut-outs measuring up to 0.5 sq. m. in area.

3.16.7.2 This will include the materials, labour, tools, equipment, and

execution.

3.17 PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS AND JOINT SEALING COMPOUND

3.17.1 Preformed joint filler for expansion/isolation joints shall be non-

extruding and resilient type of bitumen impregnated fibres conforming

to IS:1838 (Part I).

3.17.2 Bitumen coat to concrete/masonry surfaces for fixing the preformed

bitumen filler strip shall conform to IS:702. Bitumen primer shall

conform to IS:3384.

3.17.3 Sealing compound for filling the joints above the preformed bitumen

filler shall conform to Grade 'B' as per IS:1834.

3.17.4 WORKMANSHIP

3.17.4.1 The thickness of the preformed bitumen filler shall be as specified in

the respective items of work. CONTRACTOR shall procure the strips

of the desired thickness and width in lengths as manufactured.

Assembly of small pieces/thicknesses of strips to make up the

specified size shall not be permitted.

3.17.4.2 The concrete/masonry surface shall be cleaned free from dust and

any loose particles. When the surface is dry, one coat of bitumen

primer conforming to IS 3384 to be applied over which one coat of

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


industrial blown type bitumen of grade 85/25 conforming to IS:702

shall be applied hot by brushing at the rate of 1.20 kg/sq.m. When

the bitumen is still hot, the preformed bitumen filler shall be pressed

and held in position till it completely adheres. The surface of the filler

against which further concreting/masonry work is to be done shall

similarly be applied with one coat of hot bitumen at the rate of 1.20

kg/sq.m.

3.17.4.3 Sealing compound shall be heated to a pouring consistency for

enabling it to run molten in a uniform manner into the joint. Before

pouring the sealing compound, the vertical faces of the concrete joint

shall be applied with a coat of hot bitumen primer conforming to

IS:3384 in order to improve the adhesive quality of the sealing

compound.

3.17.4.4 Expansion joints between beams/slabs shall be provided with l00mm

wide x 4mm thick mild steel plate at the soffit of RCC beams/slabs to

support and prevent the preformed joint filler from dislodging. This

plate shall be welded to an edge angle of ISA 50 x 50 x 6mm

provided at the bottom corner, adjacent to the expansion joint of one

of the beams/slabs, by intermittent fillet welding. Steel surfaces shall

be provided with 2 coats of zinc phosphate primer and 2 coats of

synthetic enamel paint finish.

3.17.5 MEASUREMENT

3.17.5.1 Measurement for the preformed joint filler shal1 be in sq.m correct to

two places of decimal for the specified thickness as per the items of

work. Measurement for applying the bitumen coat to

concrete/masonry surfaces shall be in sq.m correct to two places of

decimal. Measurement for the joint sealing compound shall be in

running metres correct to two places of decimal for the specified

width and thickness as per the items of work. Measurement for the

mild steel corner angle and plate shall be by weight as per the item of

work.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.18 INDIAN PATENT STONE (IPS) FLOORING

3.18.1 MATERIAL

3.18.1.1 Material shall be 10 mm down clean, well graded, hard, approved

granite/basalt /good sound stone chips and clean, sharp, coarse

sand. Elongated or thin flake like fragments of stone shall be

avoided. Coarse and fine aggregates used shall conforming to

IS383. Cement shall conform to IS456.

3.18.2 WORKMANSHIP

3.18.2.1 For flooring, the base Reinforced cement concrete slab or the grade

slab shall be cleaned of all dirt with water and hard brush. If required

the base surface shall be backed or otherwise roughened to obtain a

good bond. The surface shall be clean, free from grease, oil, dust,

loose particles, etc. and thoroughly soaked with water to prevent

absorption of mixing water from the base course. Before placing the

under bed, any excess standing water shall be mopped out. Before

laying the flooring approval of the Engineer-in-charge shall be

obtained as to the acceptability of the base. No extra payment is

admissible for the preparation of base and the unit rate of flooring

shall be inclusive of preparation of the base. Wherever the level is

down, the contractor may have to fill it up with the base concrete to

achieve the specified top level of the flooring surface. Wherever the

level is higher, the contractor may have to chip/break the concrete to

achieve the specified thickness of the floor topping. The rate quoted

for the floor topping shall be firm for the variation in level of the

existing surface upto ±12mm. No extra rate will be paid for chipping

the specified floor topping thickness. Similarly no extra payment will

be made for the extra concrete to be laid for achieving the top

specified level in flooring.

3.18.2.2 The Indian patent stone floor unless otherwise stated, shall have a

total thickness of 50 mm laid in two layers. The under-bed shall

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


consist of 25mm thick cement concrete with 10 mm to 6mm size

stones.The proportion of the mix shall be 1 part cement, 2 parts sand

and 4 parts stone chips by volume. Second layer 15mm shall be with

6mm down aggregates of above proportion

3.18.2.3 Water content shall be minimum, sufficient to give a workable

consistency, which will allow finishing with out excessive trowelling.

Generally water cement ratio of 0.4 should suffice. Prior to

commencement of laying the under bed, thick cement slurry (cement

& water) shall be given on clean surface and then the under bed

layer shall be laid.

3.18.2.4 The floor shall be cast in panels not exceeding 5 sq.m. in area and

no side more than 2.5 m long. The casting sequence shall be in a

chequered board fashion, no two adjacent panels being cast before

the contraction of the previous one has taken place. The edge of

each panel into which the floor is divided shall be supported by flat

bars of steel or glass strips duly oiled to prevent sticking. The bars

shall be removed before filling in adjoining panels. At least 48 hours

shall elapse before the concreting in the adjacent bay is commenced.

After laying, the underbed shall be leveled, compacted and brought

to proper grade with a screed or float. PVC/Glass floor separator of

approved make shall be used between the panels with the approval

of Engineer. Unit rate quoted shall be inclusive of preparation of

base, cement slurry application, underbed and the topping coat and

the finishing including cost of all labour, tools and materials and the

PVC/GLASS separators between adjacent panels.

3.18.2.5 Final layer of minimum 6 mm thickness shall be laid over the green

underbed and trowelled smooth with a mixture of cement and sand

(1:1 by volume). The underbed and topping shall be completed in

one operation.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


3.18.2.6 The topping shall be trowelled smooth to the satisfaction of the

Engineer-in-charge. Any marks of trowel shall be mopped with a soft

cloth to give a clean, even and smooth surface.

3.18.2.7 Unit rate quoted shall be inclusive of preparation of base, cement

slurry application, underbed and the topping coat and the finishing

including cost of all labour, tools and materials and the PVC/GLASS

separators between adjacent panels

3.18.3 MEASUREMENT

3.18.3.1 Measurement shall be for the plan area of flooring and for the

finished work.

3.19 VACUUM DEWATERED FLOOR

3.19.1 The contractor shall submit full details of the system with catalogues

etc. he proposes to adopt for this work. The contractor shall ensure

strict adherence to all the steps given therein to ensure good quality

work. However, it shall be the contractor's entire responsibility to

complete the works to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The

contractor shall mobilize to the site adequate manpower and all the

equipment necessary for this work. Standby arrangement of

equipment and power shall also be made to ensure uninterrupted

work.

3.19.2 WORKMANSHIP

3.19.2.1 After placing the concrete in floor, it shall be properly compacted

using needle vibrators combined with surface vibrator to eliminate

voids and entrapped air. The surface vibrator shall be run at least

twice over the concrete surface. Suction mat shall then be laid over

this surface and the mat is connected to the vacuum pump

connected with a suction hose. Vacuum process should then be

started and continued for at least 20 to 25 minutes, ensuring removal

of excess water from concrete and leaving only that much quantity of

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


water that is required for the hydration of cement at the end of this

stage.

3.19.2.2 The mat and pump shall then be removed and mechanically

operated power floats shall be rotated on the wet concrete surface.

The process shall be repeated and the surface shall be finally

finished with minimum two passes of power trowel.

3.19.2.3 The finished surface shall then be covered with a polythene sheet the

following day after sprinkling water on the surface. Ponding of water

shall be carried out after 2-3 days and the surface shall be kept wet

continuously for at least 21 days.

3.19.3 MEASUREMENT

3.19.3.1 Cost of Concrete item and reinforcement item are included in

respective items of work. Rate covered here shall include cost of

labour, equipment used for vacuum dewatering process only. Rest of

the cost shall be covered in respective items of work. Measurement

shall be for the plan area of flooring and for the finished work.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


4 PLASTERING FOR WALL AND CEILINGS

4.1 GENERAL

4.1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for finishing the

plastered brick / concrete surfaces with Plaster of Paris and other

related works forming a part of this job, which may be required to be

carried out though not specifically mentioned above. The work under

this specification shall consist of furnishing of all tools, plants, labour,

materials and everything necessary for carrying out the work.








IS: 63 Whiting for paint and putty.

IS: 1200 Method of measurement of building and civil

engineering works.

IS:1635 Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and

preparation of putty.

IS: 2333 Plaster of Paris for ceramic industry

IS: 6932 Methods of test for building limes

IS 1661 Code of practice for application of cement and cement

lime plaster finishes.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


4.3 POP PUNNING WORKS

4.3.1 MATERIALS

4.3.1.1 The plaster of Paris powder shall conform to the requirements of IS:

2333.

4.3.2 WORKMANSHIP

4.3.2.1 The plaster on masonry surface shall be allowed to dry before the

POP punning is applied.

4.3.2.2 Powder of plaster of Paris shall be mixed with water as specified by

manufacturer to form a thick paste and shall be applied on the

plastered surface.

4.3.2.3 The POP shall be laid and rubbed and finally trowelled to a fine

uniform smooth finish. All unevenness shall be rubbed down from top

to bottom in one operation to eliminate joint marks.

4.4 PUTTY WORKS

4.4.1 MATERIALS

4.4.1.1 Water resistant white cement based putty ideal for use on concrete /

mortar walls (internal and external) and ceiling.

4.4.2 WORKMANSHIP

4.4.2.1 Surface Preparation:All loosely adhered material shall be removed

from the wall surface with the help of emery stone, putty blade or

white brush and clean water. The substrate shall be clean, free from

dust, grease and loose material. Dry and absorbent surfaces shall be

moistened with sufficient quantity of clean water.

4.4.2.2 Mixing of putty:Putty shall be mixed with 30-35% clean water slowly

to make a paste. Mixing shall be continued for 10-15 minutes till a

uniform paste is formed.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


4.4.2.3 Application on prepared surface:The first coat shall be applied on

already moistened wall surface from bottom to upward direction

uniformly with the help of putty blade. This would ensure less

wastage and proper finish. After drying of first coat of putty, the

surface shall be rubbed gently with wet sponge or very gently with a

putty blade in order to remove loose particles. The surface shall be

allowed to dry for at least for 3 hours and then second coat of putty

shall be applied. The surface shall be allowed to dry completely.

4.4.2.4 Marks if any shall be removed with the help of moist sponge or the

surface shall be rubbed very gently with putty blade. The surface

shall be allowed to dry completely.

4.4.2.5 Only the required quantity of putty shall be prepared at a time and

shall be used within 2-3 hours of mixing of water. The total thickness

of the coats should be limited to maximum 1.5 mm. If required, to

remove unevenness of surface before applying any kind of paint/

distemper, walls / ceiling surface shall be leveled gently with very fine

water proof emery paper of not less than 5900 number to get a

glossy white surface.

4.4.2.6 Precautions during application:Utmost care shall be taken for proper

and thorough mixing of putty with hand or mechanical stirrer in order

to get best results. Putty shall be applied over fully cured surface. It is

recommended not to rub putty strongly and harshly with rough emery

paper. This breaks the film formed by putty, thus decreasing its water

repellant properties. The total thickness of the coats shall be limited

to maximum 1.5 mm. In case of fresh concrete/ mortar surface, it is

recommended that two coats of white cement wash be done before

application of putty.


4.4.3.1 Material received at site shall be with original packing and labels. It

shall be intact till issued for use of site.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


4.4.3.2 Material shall be stored at properly covered dry location and shall be

safe from damage.

4.4.3.3 Storage life should not exceed 6 months.

4.4.4 MEASUREMENT

4.4.4.1 Measurement for white cement based putty work shall be in sq. m

correct to two places of decimal. Unless a separate item is provided

for grooves, mouldings etc., these works are deemed to be included

in the unit rates quoted for putty work.

4.4.4.2 The quantity of work to be paid for under these items shall be

calculated by taking the projected surface of the areas plastered after

making necessary deductions for openings for doors, windows,

exhaust fan openings etc. The actual plaster work carried out on

jambs/sills of windows, openings, etc. shall be measured for

payment.

4.5 CEMENT PLASTERING WORK

4.5.1 The proportions of the cement mortar for plastering shall be 1:4 (one

part of cement to four parts of sand) unless otherwise specified under

the respective item of work. Cement and sand shall be mixed

thoroughly in dry condition and then water added to obtain a

workable consistency. The quality of water and cement shall be as

per relevant IS. The quality and grading of sand for plastering shall

conform to IS:1542. The mixing shall be done thoroughly in a

mechanical mixer unless hand mixing is specifically permitted by the

ENGINEER. If so desired by the ENGINEER sand shall be screened

and washed to meet the specification requirements. The mortar thus

mixed shall be used as soon as possible preferably within 30 minutes

from the time water is added to cement. In case the mortar has

stiffened due to evaporation of water this may be re-tempered by

adding water as required to restore consistency but this will be

permitted only upto 30 minutes from the time of initial mixing of water

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


to cement. Any mortar which is partially set shall be rejected and

removed forthwith from the site. Droppings of plaster shall not be re-

used under any circumstances.

4.5.2 WORKMANSHIP

4.5.2.1 Preparation of surfaces and application of plaster finishes shall

generally confirm to the requirements specified in IS:1661 and

IS:2402.

4.5.2.2 Plastering operations shall not be commenced until installation of all

fittings and fixtures such as door/window panels, pipes, conduits etc.

are completed.

4.5.2.3 All joints in masonry shall be raked as the work proceeds to a depth

of l0mm/20mm for brick/stone masonry respectively with a tool made

for the purpose when the mortar is still green. The masonry surface

to be rendered shall be washed with clean-water to remove all dirt,

loose materials, etc., Concrete surfaces to be rendered shall be

roughened suitably by hacking or bush hammering for proper

adhesion of plaster and the surface shall be evenly wetted to provide

the correct suction. The masonry surfaces should not be too wet but

only damp at the time of plastering. The dampness shall be uniform

to get uniform bond between the plaster and the masonry surface.

4.5.3 Interior plain faced plaster - This plaster shall be laid in a single coat

of 13mm thickness. The mortar shall be dashed against the

prepared surface with a trowel. The dashing of the coat shall be

done using a strong whipping motion at right angles to the face of the

wall or it may be applied with a plaster machine. The coat shall be

trowelled hard and tight forcing it to surface depressions to obtain a

permanent bond and finished to smooth surface. Interior plaster

shall be carried out on jambs, lintel and sill faces, etc. as shown in

the drawing and as directed by the ENGINEER. Rate quoted for

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


plaster work shall be deemed to include for plastering of all these

surfaces.

4.5.4 Plain Faced Ceiling plaster - This plaster shall be applied in a single

coat of 6mm thickness. The proportion of cement mortar shall be 1:3.

4.5.5 Exterior plain faced plaster - This plaster shall be applied in 2 coats.

The first coat or the rendering coat shall be approximately 14mm

thick. The rendering coat shall be applied as stipulated as

mentioned, except finishing it to a true and even surface and then

lightly roughened by cross scratch lines to provide bond for the

finishing coat. The rendering coat shall be cured for atleast two days

and then allowed to dry. The second coat or finishing coat shall be 6

mm thick with approved water proofing admixture, if so specified in

the item description. Before application of the second coat, the

rendering coat shall be evenly damped. The second coat shall be

applied from top to bottom in one operation without joints and shall

be finished leaving an even and uniform surface. The mortar

proportions for the coats shall be as specified in the respective item

of work. The finished plastering work shall be cured for atleast 7

days.

4.5.6 Interior plain faced plaster 20mm thick if specified for uneven faces of

brick walls or for random/coursed rubble masonry walls shall be

executed in 2 coats.

4.5.7 Exterior Sand Faced Plaster - This plaster shall be applied in 2 coats.

The first coat shall be 14mm thick and the second coat shall be 6mm

thick. However, only approved quality white sand shall be used for

the second coat and for the finishing work. Sand for the finishing

work shall be coarse and of even size and shall be dashed against

the surface and sponged.

4.5.7.1 The mortar proportions for the first and second coats shall be as

specified in the respective items of work.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


4.5.7.2 Wherever more than 20mm thick plaster has been specified, which

is intended for purposes of providing beading, bands, etc. this work

shall be carried out in two or three coats as directed by the

ENGINEER duly satisfying the requirements of curing each coat

(rendering/floating) for a minimum period of 2 days and curing the

finished work for atleast 7 days.

4.5.7.3 In the case of pebble faced finish plaster, pebbles of approved size

and quality shall be dashed against the final coat while it is still green

to obtain as far as possible a uniform pattern all as directed by the

ENGINEER.

4.5.7.4 Where specified in the drawings, rectangular grooves of the

dimensions indicated shall be provided in external plaster by means

of timber battens when the plaster is still in green condition. Battens

shall be carefully removed after the initial set of plaster and the

broken edges and corners made good. All grooves shall be uniform

in width and depth and shall be true to the lines and levels as per the

drawings.

4.5.7.5 Curing of plaster shall be started as soon as the applied plaster has

hardened sufficiently so as not to be damaged when watered.

Curing shall be done by continuously applying water in a fine spray

and shall be carried out for atleast 7 days.

4.5.7.6 When the specification items of work calls for waterproofing plaster

the CONTRACTOR shall provide the waterproofing compound as

specified while preparing the cement mortar. Payment for water-

proofing compound will be made separately if it is not included as a

combined item of work.

4.5.7.7 Where lath plastering is specified, it shall be paid for at the same rate

as for plaster work except that separate payment for metal lath will

be made.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


4.5.7.8 For external plaster, the plastering operations shall be commenced

from the top floor and carried downwards. For internal plaster, the

plastering operations for the walls shall commence at the top and

carried downwards. Plastering shall be carried out to the full length

of the wall or to natural breaking points like doors/windows etc.

4.5.7.9 The finished plaster surface shall not show any deviation more than

4mm when checked with a straight edge of 2m length placed against

the surface.To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in

the plastering work following measures shall be adapted.

4.5.7.10 Plastering work shall be deferred as much as possible so that fairly

complete drying shrinkage in concrete and masonry works takes

place.Steel wire fabric shall be provided at the junction of brick

masonry and concrete to overcome reasonably the differential drying

shrinkage/thermal movement. This steel item shall be measured and

paid for separately. Ceiling plaster shall be done, with a trowel cut at

its junction with wall plaster. Similarly trowel cut shall be adopted

between adjacent surfaces where discontinuity of the background

exists.

4.5.8 MEASUREMENT

4.5.8.1 Measurement for plastering work shall be in sq.m correct to two

places of decimal. Unless a separate item is provided for grooves,

mouldings, etc., these works are deemed to be included in the unit

rates quoted for plastering work. The quantity of work to be paid for

under these items shall be calculated by taking the projected surface

of the areas plastered after making necessary deductions for

openings for doors, windows, fan openings etc. The actual plaster

work carried out on jambs/sills of windows, openings, etc. shall be

measured for payment.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


4.6 CEMENT POINTING

4.6.1 The cement mortar for pointing shall be in the proportion of 1:3 (one

part of cement to three parts of fine sand) unless otherwise specified

in the respective items of work. Sand shall conform to IS:1542 and



approved by ENGINEER and if so directed it shall be

washed/screened to meet specification requirements.

4.6.2 WORKMANSHIP

4.6.2.1 Where pointing of joints in masonry work is specified on

drawings/respective items of work, the joints shall be raked at least

15mm/20mm deep in brick/stone masonry respectively as the work

proceeds when the mortar is still green.

4.7 Any dust/dirt in the raked joints shall be brushed out clean and the

joints shall be washed with water. The joints shall be damp at the

time of pointing. Mortar shall be filled into joints and well pressed

with special steel trowels. The joints shall not be disturbed after it

has once begun to set. The joints of the pointed work shall be neat.

The lines shall be regular and uniform in breadth and the joints shall

be raised, flat, sunk or 'V' as may be specified in the respective items

of work. No false joints shall be allowed.

4.7.1.1 The work shall be kept moist for atleast 7 days after the pointing is

completed. Whenever coloured pointing is to be done, the colouring

pigment of the colour required shall be added to cement in such

proportions as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved

by the ENGINEER.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


4.7.2 MEASUREMENT

4.7.2.1 The quantity of work to be paid for under this Item shall be measured

in sq.m correct to two places of decimal by taking the projected

surface of the area pointed after making necessary deductions for

openings, etc.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


5 PAINTING WORKS

5.1 GENERAL

5.1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for painting of

interior and exterior plastered brick / concrete surfaces and partition

walls with suitable paints and other related works forming a part of

this job, which may be required to be carried out though not

specifically mentioned above. The work under this specification shall

consist of furnishing of all tools, labour, materials and everything

necessary for carrying out the work.








IS: 77 Linseed oil, boiled, for paints

IS: 103 Ready mixed paint, brushing, white lead for

priming and general purposes

IS: 133 Enamel, interior (a) under coating (b) finishing

IS: 137 Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black

lead free acid alkali water and heat resisting.

IS: 168 Ready mixed paint, air drying for general

purposes.

IS: 337 Varnish, finishing interior

IS: 348 French polish

IS: 427 Distemper, dry, colour as required

IS: 428 Distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required

IS: 524 Varnish, finishing exterior, synthetic

IS: 525 Varnish, finishing exterior and general purposes

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


IS: 712 Specification for building limes

IS: 1200 Part x Ceilings and Linings

IS: 1200 Part xiii White washing, Colour washing, distempering

and other finishes

IS: 2074 Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide- zinc

chrome, priming

IS: 2338 Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood

based materials

IS: 2395 Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry

and plaster surfaces

IS: 2932 Specification for enamel, synthetic, exterior type

(a) undercoating, (b) finishing

IS: 2933 Enamel exterior type (a) undercoating, (b)

finishing

IS: 3536 Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing,

wood primer, pink

IS: 5410 Cement paint, colour as required

IS: 5411 Specification for plastic emulsion paint (Parts 1 &

2) for interior

IS: 6278 Code of practice for white washing & colour

washing

IS: 9862 Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing,

bituminous, black, lead-free, acid, alkali, water and

chlorine resisting

IS: 384 Brushes for painting

IS: 1477 Code of practice for painting

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


5.3 PAINTING OF CONCRETE MASONRY, PLASTERED SURFACES

& PARTITION WALLS

5.3.1 MATERIALS

5.3.1.1 All paint products shall have no added lead, mercury, chromium,

arsenic and antimony content.

5.3.1.2 Oil bound distemper shall conform to IS: 428. The primer shall be

alkali resistant primer of the same manufacture as that of the

distemper.

5.3.1.3 Cement paint shall conform to IS: 5410. The primer shall be a

thinned coat of cement paint.

5.3.1.4 Acrylic emulsion paint shall be of an approved manufacture.

5.3.1.5 Plastic emulsion paint shall conform to IS: 5411.

5.3.1.6 Lead free acid, alkali and chlorine resisting paint shall conform to IS:

9862.

5.3.1.7 All paints shall have low VOC with VOC for non flat (gloss finish)

paints shall be 150g/l and VOC for flat (mat finish) paint shall be 50

g/l.

5.3.1.8 White wash shall be made from good quality fat lime conforming to

IS: 712. It shall be slaked at site and mixed with water in the

proportion of 5 litres of water to 1 kg of un-slaked lime stirred well to

make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a minimum

period of one day and strained through a clean coarse cloth. Four kg

of gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cu.m of cream.

1.30 kg of sodium chloride dissolved in hot water shall then be added

per 10 kg of lime used for the white wash to be ready for application.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


5.3.1.9 Colour wash shall be made by addition of a suitable quantity of

mineral pigment, not affected by lime, to the prepared white wash to

obtain the shade/tint as approved by the ENGINEER.

5.3.1.10 All the materials shall be of the best quality from an approved

manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior approval of the

ENGINEER for the brand of manufacture and the colour/shade. All

materials shall be brought to the site of works in sealed containers.

5.3.2 WORKMANSHIP

5.3.2.1 CONTRACTOR shall obtain the approval of the ENGINEER

regarding the readiness of the surfaces to receive the specified

finish, before commencing the work on painting.

5.3.2.2 Painting of new surfaces shall be deferred as much as possible to

allow for thorough drying of the sub-strata.

5.3.2.3 The surfaces to be treated shall be prepared by thoroughly brushing

them free from dirt, mortar droppings and any loose foreign

materials. Surfaces shall be free from oil, grease and efflorescence.

Efflorescence shall be removed only by dry brushing of the growth.

Cracks shall be filled with Gypsum. Workmanship of painting shall

generally conform to IS: 2395.

5.3.2.4 Surfaces of doors, windows etc. shall be protected suitably to prevent

paint finishes from splashing on them.

5.3.3 WHITE WASH - The prepared surfaces shall be wetted and the finish

applied by brushing. The operation for each coat shall consist of a

stroke of the brush first given horizontally from the right and the other

from the left and similarly, the subsequent stroke from bottom

upwards and the other from top downwards, before the first coat

dries. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next coat is

applied. Minimum of 2 coats shall be applied unless otherwise

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


specified in the item of work. The dry surface shall present a uniform

finish without any brush marks.

5.3.4 COLOUR WASH - Colour wash shall be applied in the same way as

for white wash. A minimum of 2 coats shall be applied unless

otherwise specified in the item of work. The surface shall present a

smooth and uniform finish without any streaks. The finished dry

surface shall not show any signs of peeling/powdery and come off

readily on the hand when rubbed.

5.3.5 CEMENT PAINT - The prepared surfaces shall be wetted to control

surface suction and to provide moisture to aid in proper curing of the

paint. Cement paint shall be applied with a brush with stiff bristles.

The primer coat shall be a thinned coat of cement paint. The quantity

of thinner shall be as per manufacturer's instructions. The coats shall

be vigorously scrubbed to work the paint into any voids for providing

a continuous paint film free from pinholes for effective waterproofing

in addition to decoration. Cement paint shall be brushed in uniform

thickness and the covering capacity for two coats on plastered

surfaces shall be 3 to 4 kg/sq.m. A minimum of 2 coats of the same

colour shall be applied unless otherwise specified in the item of work.

At least 24 hours shall be left after the first coat to become

sufficiently hard before the second coat is applied. The painted

surfaces shall be thoroughly cured by sprinkling with water using a

fog spray at least 2 to 3 times a day. Curing shall commence after

about 12 hours when the paint hardens. Curing shall be continued for

at least 2 days after the application of final coat. Paint may also be

applied using rollers.

5.3.6 OIL BOUND DISTEMPER - The prepared surfaces shall be dry and

provided with one coat of alkali resistant primer by brushing. The

surface shall be finished uniformly without leaving any brush marks

and allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. A minimum of two coats of

oil bound distemper shall be applied unless otherwise specified in the

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


item of work. The first coat shall be of a lighter tint. At least 24 hours

shall be left after the first coat to become completely dry before the

application of the second coat. Broad, stiff, double bristled distemper

brushes shall be used for the work. Paint may also be applied using

rollers.

5.3.7 PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT - The prepared surface shall be dry and

provided with one coat of primer which shall be a thinned coat of

emulsion paint. The quantity of thinner shall be as per manufacturer's

instructions. The paint shall be laid an evenly and smoothly by

means of crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off

consists of covering the area with paint, brushing the surface hard for

the first time over and then brushing alternately in opposite directions

two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at

right angles. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the

laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off

constitutes one coat. The next coat shall be applied only after the first

coat has dried and sufficiently become hard which normally takes

about 2 to 3 hours. A minimum of 2 finishing coats of the same colour

shall be applied unless otherwise specified in the item of work. Paint

may also be applied using rollers. The surface on finishing shall

present a flat velvety smooth finish and uniform in shade without any

patches. Paint may also be applied using rollers.

5.3.8 ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINT - Acrylic emulsion paint shall be

applied in the same way as for plastic emulsion paint. A minimum of

2 finishing coats over one coat of primer shall be provided unless

otherwise specified in the item of work. Paint may also be applied

using rollers.

5.3.9 ACID, ALKALI RESISTING PAINT - A minimum of 2 coats of

acid/alkali resisting paint shall be applied over the prepared dry

surfaces by brushing. Primer coat shall be as per manufacturer's

instructions.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


5.3.10 SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT - The prepared surface shall be dry

and provided with one coat of primer which shall be a thinned coat of

enamel paint. The quantity of thinner shall be as per manufacturer's

instructions. The paint shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by

means of crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off

consists of covering the area with paint, brushing the surface hard for

the first time over and then brushing alternately in opposite directions

two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at

right angles. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the

laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off

constitutes one coat. The next coat shall be applied only after the first

coat has dried and sufficiently become hard which normally takes

about 2 to 3 hours. A minimum of 2 finishing coats of the same colour

shall be applied unless otherwise specified. Paint may also be

applied using rollers. The surface on finishing shall present a flat

velvety smooth finish and uniform in shade without any patches.

5.3.11 ACRYLIC DISTEMPER - The prepared surfaces shall be dry and

provided with one coat of alkali resistant primer by brushing. The

surface shall be finished uniformly without leaving any brush marks

and allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. A minimum of two coats of

acrylic distemper shall be applied, unless otherwise specified. The

first coat shall be of a lighter tint. At least 24 hours shall be left after

the first coat to become completely dry before the application of the

second coat. Broad, stiff, double bristled distemper brushes shall be

used for the work. The operations for brushing each coat shall be as

detailed above.

5.4 PAINTING & POLISHING OF WOOD WORK

5.4.1 MATERIALS

5.4.2 Wood primer shall conform to IS: 3536E.

5.4.3 Varnish shall conform to IS: 337.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


5.4.4 French polish shall conform to IS: 348.

5.4.5 Synthetic enamel paint shall conform to IS: 2932.

5.4.6 All the materials shall be of the best quality from an approved

manufacturer. CONTRACTCOR shall obtain prior approval of the

ENGINEER for the brand of manufacture and the colour/shade. All

materials shall be brought to the site of works in sealed containers.

5.4.7 WORKMANSHIP

5.4.7.1 The type of finish to be provided for woodwork, either for painting or

polishing, the number of coats, etc. shall be as specified in the

respective items of work.

5.4.7.2 Primer and finish paint shall be compatible with each other to avoid,

cracking and wrinkling. Primer and finish paint shall be from the

same manufacturer.

5.4.7.3 Painting shall be either by brushing or spraying. CONTRACTOR

shall procure the appropriate quality of paint for this purpose as

recommended by the manufacturer. The workmanship shall generally

conform to the requirements of IS: 2338 (Part I).

5.4.7.4 All the wood surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly dry and free

from any foreign matter. Surfaces shall be smoothened with abrasive

paper using it across the grains and dusted off. Wood primer coat

shall then be applied uniformly by brushing. The number of primer

coats shall be as specified in the item of work. Stopping as per IS

426 shall be used to fill up large holes & cracks on the surface. For

small holes or minor cracks, fillers as per IS 110 should be used. Any

slight irregularities of the surface shall then be made up by applying

an optimum coat of filler conforming to IS: 110 and rubbed down with

an abrasive paper for obtaining a smooth surface for the undercoat of

synthetic enamel paint conforming to IS: 2932.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


5.4.7.5 Paint shall be applied by brushing evenly and smoothly by means of

crossing and laying off in the direction of the grain of wood. After

drying, the coat shall be carefully rubbed down using very fine grade

of sand paper and wiped clean before the next coat of finishing is

applied. At least 24 hours shall elapse between the applications of

successive coats. Each coat shall vary slightly in shade and this shall

be got approved by the ENGINEER. The number of coats of paint to

be applied shall be as specified in the item of work.

5.4.7.6 All the wood surfaces to be provided with clear finishes shall be

thoroughly dry and free from any foreign matter. Surfaces shall be

smoothened with abrasive paper using it in the direction of the grains

and dusted off.

5.4.7.7 Any slight irregularities of the surface shall be made up by applying

an optimum coat of transparent liquid filler conforming to IS 345. The

Surface when hard shall be rubbed down with fine abrasive paper. All

dust and dirt shall be cleaned and on this surface water or spirit

stains shall be applied to enhance the natural grain or figuring effect

of wood.

5.4.7.8 After the surface is dry, a suitable sealer shall be applied to prevent

bleeding of stain and filler into the finish coat. The surface shall be

rubbed down lightly, wiped off and allowed to dry.

5.4.7.9 Over this prepared surface, varnish conforming to IS: 337 shall be

applied by brushing. Varnish should not be retouched once it has

begun to set. Staining if required shall be provided as directed by the

ENGINEER. When two coats of varnish is specified, the first coat

should be a hard-drying undercoat or flatting varnish which shall be

allowed to dry hard before applying the finishing coat. The number of

coats to be applied shall be as per the item of work.

5.4.7.10 For works where clear finish of French polish is specified the

prepared surfaces of wood shall be applied with the polish using a

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


pad of woollen cloth covered by a fine cloth. The pad shall be

moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the surface in a series of

overlapping circles to give an even finish over the entire area. The

surface shall be allowed to dry before applying the next coat.

5.4.7.11 Finishing shall be carried out using a fresh clean cloth over the pad,

slight dampening with methylated spirit and rubbing lightly and

quickly in circular motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform

texture and high gloss. The number of coats to be applied shall be as

per the item of work.

5.4.8 MOCK-UP

5.4.8.1 The contractor shall prepare and install mock-up samples as per

approved shop drawings.

5.4.8.2 Mock-up samples shall be of full size and shall be true representation

of actual works to be carried out at site. Mock-ups may be part of

completed work if undisturbed.





safe from damage.

5.4.9.3 Paints shall be kept covered at all times and mixing shall be done in

suitable containers.

5.4.9.4 All necessary precautions shall be taken against fire hazards.

5.4.10 MEASUREMENT

5.4.10.1 Measurement for painting works shall be in sq.m correct to two

places of decimal. Actual superficial surface area of wood work

(specification is for wood works shall be measured for payment as

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


per the respective items of work after making deductions for

openings etc.

5.4.10.2 No deduction shall be made for openings up to 0.5 sq.m. of area nor

any extra to be paid for jambs, sills etc..

5.4.10.3 For openings exceeding 0.5 sq.m. but not exceeding 3.0 sq.m.,

deductions shall be made for half the area of openings and no

additions shall be made for jambs, sills etc.

5.4.10.4 For openings exceeding 3.0 sq.m., deductions shall be made for the

whole area and additions shall be made for jambs, sills, soffits etc.

5.4.10.5 No extra payment shall be made for painting etc. done around

openings, wall features like grooves, projections, cornices etc.

5.4.10.6 Rate quoted shall take into account the provision of necessary

enabling works such as scaffolding, painter's cradle etc.

5.4.10.7 Measurement for painting / polishing of woodwork shall be for the

projected area between out to out of frames and no multiplying factor

is allowed on any account. Rate shall be inclusive of all enabling

works.

5.5 PAINTING OF STEEL WORK

5.5.1 For painting of structural steel refer separate M4 specification.

.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6 DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

6.1 GENERAL

6.1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for doors,

windows and ventilators and other related works forming a part of

this job, which may be required to be carried out though not

specifically mentioned above. The work under this specification shall

consist of furnishing of all tools and tackles, plants, labour, materials

and everything necessary for carrying out the work.








IS: 287 Recommendation for maximum permissible moisture

contents of timber used for different purposes

IS: 303 Plywood for general purpose

IS: 419 putty for use on window frames

IS: 710 Marine plywood

IS: 733 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys, bars, rods

and sections for general engineering purposes.

IS: 1003 Timbered paneled and glazed shutters for doors and

windows.

IS: 1038 Steel doors, windows and ventilators

IS: 1081 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel

and aluminum) doors, windows and ventilators


engineering works.

IS: 1361 Specification for steel windows for industrial buildings

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


IS: 1477 Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in

buildings

IS: 1911 Schedule of unit weights of building materials

IS: 1659 Block boards

IS: 1868 Anodic coating on aluminum and its alloys

IS: 1948 Specification for aluminum doors, windows and

ventilators

IS: 1949 Specification for aluminum windows for industrial

buildings

IS: 2074 Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide zinc chrome,

priming

IS: 2191 Wooden flush doors (cellular and hollow core type),

plywood faced panels, particle board faced panels.

IS: 2202 Wooden flush doors (solid core type), plywood

faced panels, particle board faced panels.

IS: 2835 Flat transparent sheet glass

IS: 3614 Metallic and non-metallic fire check doors -

resistance test and performance criteria.

IS: 4020 Methods of test for wooden flush doors

IS: 4021 Timber door, window and ventilator frames

IS: 4351 Steel door frames

IS: 5437 Figured rolled and wired glass

IS: 5523 Methods of testing anodic coatings on aluminum

IS: 6248 Metal Rolling shutters and rolling grills

IS: 7452 Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and

ventilators.

IS: 13871 Powder Coatings

IS: 15380 Moulded raised high density fibre (HDF) doors.

IS: 15931 Solid panel foam UPVC door shutters

BS: 476 Fire tests for building materials and structures.

NFPA 80 Standards for fire doors and other opening

protective's.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6.3 WOOD WORK IN DOORS, WINDOWS, & VENTILATORS

6.3.1 MATERIALS

6.3.1.1 Timber to be used shall be first class Teak wood as per IS: 4021.

Timber shall be of the best quality and well seasoned by a suitable

process before being planed to the required sizes. The maximum

permissible moisture content shall be from 10 to 16 percent for

timber 50mm and above in thickness and 9 to 14 percent of timber

less than 50mm in thickness for different regions of the country as

stipulated In IS: 287. Timber shall be close grained, of uniform colour

and free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or

streaks on the exposed edges, borer holes, splits and cracks.

6.3.1.2 Flush door shutters of the solid core type with plywood face panels

shall conform to IS: 2202 (Part 1) and with particle board/hard board

face panels shall conform to IS: 2202 (Part 2).

6.3.1.3 Transparent sheet glass shall conform to the requirements of IS:

2835. Wired and figured glass shall be as per IS: 5437.

6.3.1.4 Builder's hardware of fittings and fixtures shall be of the best quality

from approved manufacturers.

6.3.2 WORKMANSHIP

6.3.2.1 The workmanship and finish of wood work in doors, windows,

ventilators and partitions shall be of a very high order.

CONTRACTOR shall ensure that work is executed in a professional

manner by skilled carpenters for good appearance, efficient and

smooth operation of the shutters.

6.3.2.2 All works shall be executed as per the detailed drawings and/or as


6.3.2.3 All members of the door, window, and ventilator shall be straight

without any warp or bow and shall have smooth well planed faces.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


The right angle shall be checked from the inside surfaces of the

respective members of the frame.

6.3.2.4 Frames shall have mortise and tenon joints which shall be treated

with an approved adhesive and provided with metal or wood pins.

The vertical members of the door frame shall project 50 mm below

the finished floor level with a spacer bar. The finished dimension of

frames shall be rebated on the solid for keying with the plaster and

for receiving the shutters. The depth of rebate for housing the shutter

shall be 15 mm. The size of the frames shall be as specified in the

respective items of work. The workmanship shall generally conform

to the requirements specified in IS: 4021.

6.3.2.5 The face of the frames abutting the masonry or concrete shall be

provided with a coat of coal tar.

6.3.2.6 Three/sufficient numbers of hold fasts using 25 mm x 6 mm mild

steel flats 225 long with split ends shall be fixed an each side of door

and window frames, one at the centre and the other two at 300 mm

from the top and bottom of the frame. For window and ventilator

frames less than 1 m in height, two hold fasts on each side shall be

fixed at quarter points.

6.3.2.7 Timber panelled shutters for doors, windows and ventilators shall be

constructed in the form of framework of stiles and rails with panel

insertion. The panels shall be fixed by either providing grooves in the

stiles and rails or by beading. Glazing bars shall be as detailed in the

drawings. The stiles and rails shall be joined by mortise and tenon

joints at right angles. All members of the shutter shall be straight

without any warp or bow and shall have smooth, well planed faces at

right angles to each other. The right angle for the shutter shall be

checked by measuring the diagonals and the difference shall not be

more than + 3 mm. Timber panels made from more than one piece

shall be jointed with a continuous tongued and grooved joint, glued

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


together and reinforced with metal dowels. The workmanship shall,

generally conform to the requirements specified in IS: 1003 (Parts 1

& 2).The thickness of the shutter, width/thickness of the

stiles/rails/panel type shall be as indicated in the bid drawings/item of

work. Marine plywood panels conforming to IS: 710 shall be used for

doors where specified.

6.3.2.8 Details of the wooden flush door shutters, solid core type with

specific requirement of the thickness, core, face panels, viewing

glazed panel, Venetian louver opening, teak wood lipping etc. shall

be as indicated in the respective items of work. Panels of shutter

shall be of marine plywood conforming to IS: 710, if so specified in

the item of work. Flush door shutters shall be from reputed

manufacturers and CONTRACTOR shall submit test results as per

IS: 4020, if so desired by the ENGINEER.

6.3.2.9 The material of the fittings and fixtures either of chromium plated

steel, cast brass, copper oxidized or anodized aluminum shall be as

specified in the item of work. The number, size and type of the fittings

and fixtures shall be as indicated in the drawings/item of work.

6.3.2.10 Wood work shall not be provided with the finishes of painting,

galvanizing etc. unless it has been approved by the ENGINEER. The

type of finish and the number of coats shall be as stipulated in the

respective items of work. Preparation of the wood surface and

application of the finishes shall be as per Painting and Polishing of

wood works.

6.3.2.11 Any carpentry work which shows defects due to inadequate

seasoning of the timber or bad workmanship shall be removed and

replaced by CONTRACTOR with work as per specification

requirements, at no extra cost to the OWNER.

6.4 STEEL DOORS. WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6.4.1 MATERIALS

6.4.1.1 Hot rolled steel sections for the fabrication of steel doors, windows

and ventilators shall conform to IS: 7452, which are suitable for

single glazing.

6.4.1.2 Pressed steel door frames for steel flush doors shall be out of 1.25

mm thick mild steel sheets of profiles as per IS:4351.





6.4.2 WORKMANSHIP

6.4.2.1 All steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be of the type as

specified in the respective items of work and of sizes as indicated in

the drawings. Steel doors, windows and ventilators shall conform to

the requirements as stipulated in IS: 1038. Steel windows shall

conform to IS: 1361, if so specified.

6.4.2.2 Doors, windows and ventilators shall be of an approved manufacture.

Fabrication of the units shall be with rolled sections, cut to correct

lengths and mitered. Corners shall be welded to form a solid fused

welded joint conforming to the requirements of IS: 1038. Tolerance in

overall dimensions shall be within 1.5mm. The frames and shutters

shall be free from warp or buckle and shall be square and truly plane.

All welds shall be dressed flush on exposed and contact surfaces.

Punching of holes, slots and other provisions to install fittings and

fixtures later shall be made at the correct locations as per the

requirements. Samples of the units shall be got approved by the

ENGINEER before further manufacture/purchase by the

CONTRACTOR.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6.4.2.3 Type and details of shutters, hinges, glazing bar requirement,

couplings, locking arrangement, fittings and fixtures shall be as

described in the respective items of work and/or as shown in the

drawings for single or composite units.

6.4.2.4 For windows with fly proof mesh as per the item of work, rotor

operator arrangement, for the operation of the glazed shutters from

the inside shall be provided.

6.4.2.5 Pressed steel door frames shall be provided with fixing lugs at each

jamb, hinges, lock-strike plate, mortar guards, angle threshold,

shock-absorbers of rubber or similar material as per the requirements

of IS:4351. Pressed steel door frames shall be fixed as 'built-in', as

the masonry work proceeds. After placing it plumb at the specified

location, masonry walls shall be built up solid on either side or each

course grouted with mortar to ensure solid contact with the door

frame, without leaving any voids. Temporary struts across the width

shall be fixed, during erection to prevent bow/sag of the frame.

6.4.2.6 Door shutters of flush welded construction shall be 45mm thick,

fabricated with two outer skins of 1.25mm thick steel sheets, l.00mm

thick steel sheet sufferers and steel channels an all four edges.

Double shutters shall have meeting stile edge bevelled or rebated.

Provision of glazed viewing panel, louvers shall be made as per the

item of work and/or drawings. Shutters shall be suitably reinforced for

lock and other surface hardware and to prevent sagging/twisting.

Single sheet steel door shutters shall be fabricated out of 1.25mm

thick steel sheets, mild steel angles and stiffeners as per the

drawings.

6.4.2.7 Doors, windows and ventilators shall be fixed into the prepared

openings. They shall not be 'built-in' as the masonry work proceeds,

to avoid distortion and damage of the units. The dimensions of the

masonry opening shall have l0mm clearance all-round the overall

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


dimensions of the frame for this purpose. Any support of scaffolding

members on the frames/glazing bars is prohibited.

6.4.2.8 Glazing of the units shall be either with flat transparent glass or

wired/figured glass of the thickness as specified in the item of work.

All glass panels shall have properly squared corner and straight

edges. Glazing shall be provided on the outside of the frames.

6.4.2.9 Fixing of the glazing shall be either with spring glazing clips and putty

conforming to IS: 419 or with metal beads. Pre-formed PVC / VINYL

or rubber gasket shall be provided for fixing the beads with

concealed screws. The type of fixing the glazing shall be as indicated

in the item of work and/or in drawings.

6.4.2.10 Steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be provided with finish of

either painting as specified or shall be hot dip galvanized with

thickness of zinc coating as stipulated all as described in the


6.4.2.11 The material of the Builders hardware of fittings and fixtures of

chromium plated steel, cast brass, brass copper oxidized or anodized

aluminum shall be as specified in the item of work. The number, size

and type of fittings and fixtures shall be as in the bid drawings/item of

work.

6.4.2.12 Installation of the units with fixing lugs, screws, mastic caulking

compound at the specified locations shall generally conform to the

requirements of IS:1081. Necessary holes etc required for fixing shall

be made by the CONTRACTOR and made good after installation.

Workmanship expected is of a high order for efficient and smooth

operation of the units.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6.5 ALUMINUM DOORS, WINDOWS, & VENTILATORS

6.5.1 MATERIALS

6.5.1.1 Aluminum alloy used in the manufacture of extruded sections for the

fabrication of doors, windows, ventilators shall conform to

designation 63400 WP of IS:733.



6.5.1.3 Builder's hardware of fittings & fixtures shall be of the best quality


6.5.2 WORKMANSHIP

6.5.2.1 All aluminum doors, windows, and ventilators shall be of the type as

specified in the respective items of work and of sizes as indicated in

the drawings. The doors, windows, ventilators shall conform to the

requirements of IS: 1948. Aluminum windows, shall conform to IS:

1949, if so specified.

6.5.2.2 All aluminum units shall be supplied with anodized/powder coated

finish. The minimum anodic film thickness shall be 0.015 mm.

6.5.2.3 Doors, windows and ventilators shall be of an approved manufacture.

Fabrication of the units shall be with the extruded sections, cut to

correct lengths, mitered and welded at the corners to a true right

angle conforming to the requirements of IS: 1948. Tolerance in

overall dimensions shall be within + 1.5mm. The frames and shutters

shall be free from warp or buckle and shall be square and truly plane.

Punching of holes, slots and other provisions to install fittings or

fixtures later shall be made at the correct locations, as per the

requirements.

6.5.2.4 Aluminum swing type doors, aluminum sliding windows, partitions

shall be as described in the item of work and/or bid drawings which

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


indicates generally the arrangement along with the overall size of the

various components and weight per running meter of the extruded

sections to be adopted.

6.5.2.5 IS:1948 and IS:1949 referred to incorporates the sizes, shapes,

thicknesses and weight per running meter of extruded sections for

the various components of the units. However, new sizes, shapes,

thicknesses with modifications to suit snap-fit glazing clips etc. are

continuously being added by various leading manufacturers of

extruded sections, which are available in the market. As such, the

sections of the various components of the unit proposed by the

CONTRACTOR, will be reviewed by the ENGINEER and will be

accepted only if they are equal to or marginally more than that

specified in the codes/ item of works.

6.5.2.6 The framework of the partitions with mullions and transoms shall be

with anodized/powder coated aluminum box sections of dimensions

as per the item of work. Anodized/powder coated Aluminum box

sections shall be in-filled with timber of class 3 (silver oak or any

other equivalent) as per IS:4021. Panels of double/single

glazing/plywood shall be fixed as per details indicated in the drawing.

Partitions shall be fixed rigidly between the floor and the structural

columns/beams including provision of necessary shims for wedging

etc. Finished work shall be of rigid construction, erected truly plumb

to the lines and levels, at locations as per the construction drawings.

6.5.2.7 Specific provisions as stipulated for steel doors, windows, ventilators

shall also be applicable for this item work. Glazing beads shall be of

the snap-fit type suitable for the thickness of glazing proposed as

indicated in the item of work.

6.5.2.8 A layer of clear transparent lacquer shall be applied on aluminum

sections to protect them from damage during installation. This

lacquer coating shall be removed after the installation is completed.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6.6 METAL ROLLING SHUTTERS AND ROLLING GRILLS

6.6.1 MATERIALS

6.6.1.1 Metal Rolling shutters and rolling grills shall be of an approved

manufacture, conforming to the requirements specified in IS: 6248.

6.6.1.2 The type viz. self coiling type (manual) for clear areas up to 12 sq.m,

gear operated type (mechanical) for clear areas up to 35 sq.m and

electrically operated type for areas up to 50 sq.m shall be as

specified in the IS Code 6248. Mechanical type shall be suitable for

operation from both inside and outside with the crank handle or chain

gear operating mechanism duly considering the size of wall/column.

Electrical type shall also be provided with a facility for emergency

mechanical operation.

6.6.2 WORKMANSHIP

6.6.2.1 Rolling shutters / grill shall be supplied duly considering the type,

specified clear width/height of the opening and the location of fixing

as indicated in the drawings.

6.6.2.2 Rolling Shutter curtain shall be built-up of interlocking laths 75mm

width between rolling centers formed from cold rolled steel strips.

The thickness of the steel strip shall not be less than 0.90 mm for

shutters up to 3.50m width and not less than 1.20 mm for shutters

above 3.50 m width. Each lath section shall be continuous single

piece without any welded joint.

6.6.2.3 Fabrication and assembly of rolling grill curtain shall have the type of

links and other additional requirements as specified in the item of

works.

6.6.2.4 The guide channels out of mild steel sheets of thickness not less

than 3.15 mm shall be of either rolled, pressed or built up

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


construction. The channel shall be of size as stipulated in IS: 6248

for various clear width of the shutters / grill.

6.6.2.5 Hood covers shall be of mild steel sheets not less than 0.90mm thick

and of approved shape.

6.6.2.6 Rolling shutters / grill shall be provided with a central hasp and staple

safety device in addition to one pair of lever locks and sliding locks at

the ends.

6.6.2.7 Where a rolling shutter is combined with rolling grill, height of rolling

grill shall be 500mm maximum.

6.6.2.8 All steel components (excepting springs and insides of guide

channels) shall be provided with one coat of zinc chrome primer

conforming to IS: 2074 at the time of work.

6.6.2.9 Where galvanizing is called for, the curtain sections, guides, lock

plate, bracket plates, suspension shaft and the hood cover shall be

hot dip galvanized with a zinc coating containing not less than 97.5

percent pure zinc. The weight of the zinc coating per sq.m shall be as

specified in the item of work.

6.6.2.10 Guide channels shall be installed truly plumb at the specified

location. Bracket plate shall be rigidly fixed with necessary bolts and

holdfasts. Workmanship of erection shall ensure strength and rigidity

of rolling shutter for trouble free and smooth operation.

6.6.2.11 Rolling shutter/grills manufactured by reputed manufacturer as part

of their standard product can also be used, provided the quality and

size of members satisfy the stipulations above.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6.7 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR

6.7.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

6.7.1.1 These doors shall be from reputed approved manufacturers

specialized in this area of works. However, it shall have following

minimum features.

6.7.1.2 Size of module shall be as specified in the drawing.

6.7.1.3 Size of the frame and material for frames will be decided as per

project requirement.

6.7.1.4 It should consist of microprocessor control unit, monitoring device for

opening and closing, automatic reverse system on contact with

obstruction. In general, it should be operable without the use of any

additional instrumentation or gadgets by the user.

6.7.1.5 The module should be provided with short circuit proof power supply

unit for power rating of 220/240 V, 50/60 Hz. A power point will be

made available at a suitable location by electrical contractor.

6.7.1.6 The door shall have facilities for activation by infrared movement

detector on both sides.

6.7.1.7 Opening and closing speed – 10 to 60 cm/sec/leaf.

6.7.1.8 Creep speed – 3 to 9 cm/sec/leaf

6.7.1.9 Opening time – 0 to 180 sec.

6.7.1.10 Both the fixed and sliding panels shall be made of 12 mm thick

toughened glass with or without etching. It should be provided with all

required fittings and fixtures, digital entry – exit function on the top

and electro- mechanical locking system.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6.8 UPVC DOORS AND WINDOWS

6.8.1 MATERIALS

6.8.1.1 The UPVC windows shall be made of high quality UPVC profile

section and GI/Aluminum reinforcement.

6.8.1.2 Generally, the UPVC windows shall comprise of main profiles for

outer frames and shutters, beads, coupling mullions, bays and

reinforcement.

6.8.1.3 The windows shall be non combustible, non corrosive, shall have

good sound and heat insulation properties, shall withstand harsh

weather conditions and desert conditions and shall not form stains,

blisters or corrosion in salty conditions.

6.8.2 WORKMANSHIP

6.8.2.1 Fabrication and erection of windows shall be done as per the

approved fabrication drawings.

6.8.2.2 Windows shall consist of steel and/or aluminum reinforcement

secured to UPVC profiles at max 100mm from the ends of the

reinforcement and at a spacing of max 400mm c/c between two

ends.

6.8.2.3 Reinforcement shall be secured to profiles with self tapping screws.

6.8.2.4 Drainage slots shall be provided in the outer chamber of the profile.

All horizontal members, except heads of the outer frame, shall have

drainage slots of min 5mm wide and 30mm long.

6.8.2.5 EPDM weather seals shall be fitted in the continuous lengths,

inserted in the weather seal grooves. Joints in the vent weather seals

shall be placed at the bottom and at top in the outer frame.

6.8.2.6 Friction stays shall be of high quality stainless steel and nylon

component for improved durability.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


6.8.2.7 Windows shall be provided with necessary hardware as per

manufacturer's details and specification.

6.8.2.8 The workmanship shall be absolutely top class and of international

standards and final finish shall conform to approve sample.

6.8.2.9 Upon delivery, window profiles shall have protective wrapping. On

completion of installation work, the cover shall be removed and

windows shall be cleaned for inspection and approval.

6.8.2.10 Manufacturer's guidelines shall be followed for cleaning the surface.

6.8.2.11 Contractor shall provide warranty for installed hand railing system for

the period described herein, starting from date of completion of

installation work. When notified in writing from Owner,

contractor/installer shall promptly correct the said deficiencies,

without inconvenience and extra cost to owner.

6.8.3 MOCK-UP

6.8.3.1 The contractor shall prepare and install mock-up samples as per


6.8.3.2 Mock-up samples shall be of full size and shall be true representation



SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3



6.8.4.1 No doors/windows shall be delivered to the building until

weatherproof storage space is available. Material received at site

shall be with original packing and labeled. It shall be kept intact under

lock and key till issued for use of site.

6.8.4.2 Store finished shop work in weather tight well-ventilated structures or

in space in existing buildings designated.

6.8.4.3 Finished shop work shall not be installed in any room or space where

concrete, masonry, or plaster work is not completed and dry.

6.8.4.4 Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect doors, windows

and associated fittings from damage prior to, during, and after

installation. All damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the

contractor at no cost to the owner.

6.8.5 MEASUREMENT

6.8.5.1 Measurement for doors, windows, and ventilators shall be in sq.m

correct to two places of decimal.

6.8.5.2 Measurement shall be from out to out of the frames.

6.8.5.3 Rate quoted shall be for all the works including glazing, painting,

builder's hardware of fittings and fixtures as specifically described in


SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


7 BUILDER'S HARDWARE / IRONMONGERY

7.1 GENERAL

7.1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for hardware such

as hinges, locks, stays, stoppers, handles etc. for doors, windows,

and ventilators and other related works forming a part of this job,

which may be required to be carried out though not specifically

mentioned above. The work under this specification shall consist of

furnishing of all tools, labour, materials and everything necessary for

carrying out the work.








IS: 204 Tower bolts (ferrous and non-ferrous metals)

IS: 205 Non-ferrous metal butt hinges

IS: 208 Door handles

IS: 281 Mild steel sliding door bolts for use with padlocks.

Is: 362 Parliament hinges

IS: 1200 Part VII Hardware

IS: 1341 Steel butt hinges

IS: 1823 Floor door stoppers

IS: 2209 Mortise locks (vertical type)

IS: 2681 Non ferrous metal sliding door bolts for use with pad

locks

IS: 3564 Door closers (hydraulically regulated)

IS: 4992 Door handles for mortise lock (vertical type)

IS: 6607 Rebated mortise locks (vertical type)

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


IS: 7196 Hold fasts

IS: 7197 Double action floor springs (without oil check for

heavy doors)

IS: 7534 Mild steel bolts with holders for pad locks

IS: 7881 Glossary of items relating to building hardware

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


7.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

7.3.1 All ironmongery shall be of first quality and shall be obtained from an

approved manufacturer. Butt hinges shall be aluminum alloy,

stainless steel or brass as specified with double stainless steel

washers.

7.3.2 The size, materials, finishes, type and quality of ironmongery shall be

as described in the schedule of ironmongery.

7.3.3 Unless otherwise shown and/or scheduled in the drawings, the

contractor shall supply and fix all ironmongery as listed in the

Schedule of Ironmongery attached in the project document, complete

with fixing screws of the same material and finish.

7.3.4 Proper sockets shall be provided for all bolts to fix flush in floors, cills

and door/window/ventilator frames. Each lock shall be provided with

minimum two keys and no two locks shall have identical keys, unless

specifically required.

7.3.5 The use of nails for fixing ironmongery will not be permitted. The

Contractor shall hand over all work in a finished state and to the

satisfaction of owner.

7.3.6 On completion of all locks, catches and similar items of ironmongery

they are to be properly cleaned, tested and oiled, and all keys are to

be clearly labeled. All locks provided shall be anti theft.

7.3.7 Master-keying, suiting and grouping of locks shall be according to a

master key schedule.

7.4 MOCK-UP

7.4.1 Contractor shall prepare full size mock-up after sample approval for

typical Doors and Windows and install at location approved by owner

for final approval at no extra cost as specified in the Special

Conditions of the Contract.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


7.5 STORAGE, HANDLING & DELIVERY

7.5.1 The material shall be supplied in the manufacturer’s original

packages and containers with labels intact and legible, including

installation instructions, templates and maintenance manuals, if any.

7.5.2 Packaging of hardware shall be in complete individual sets for each

door/window/ventilator clearly labeled to show intended locations

complete with all required fixings.

7.5.3 Any items or parts which are damaged or defaced or found to be

defective shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense before

handing over.

7.6 IRONMONGERY

7.6.1 Ironmongery shall be first quality to be obtained from an approved

manufacturer as specified.

7.6.2 The contractor shall submit a schedule of ironmongery for the

approval of the Engineer before placing any supply order. The

Engineer’s approval of such schedule shall not relieve the contractor

from furnishing all items of hardware required under the contract.

MEASUREMENT

7.6.3 The hardware/ironmongery items shall be measured in numbers.

7.7 MASTER – KEYING

7.7.1 The contractor shall set up the locks for a system of master- keying.

Two change keys shall be furnished for each lockset.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


ISSUE

R3


8 GLASS AND GLAZING

8.1 GENERAL

8.1.1 This part of the specification covers the requirement of providing

fitting and fixing in position of glazing of different thickness

comprising of clear float glass, wired glass, tinted glass, including

curtain glass and hermetically sealed composite double glazing

complete with all clips, putty, mastic, etc.








IS: 1200 Part XIV Glazing

IS: 419 Putty for use on window frames

IS: 1081 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal doors,

windows and ventilators

IS: 2553 Safety glass for general purpose

(Part 1)

IS: 3548 Code of practice for glazing's in buildings


IS: 5623 Determination of co-efficient of linear thermal expansion

IS: 14900 Transparent float glass

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP

GENERAL BUILDING WORKS SHEET 100 of

173

ISSUE

R3


8.3 MATERIALS

8.3.1 All glass and glazing shall have uniform reflective index and free form

flaws, specs and bubbles.

8.3.2 The glass shall be brought to site in the original packing from the

manufacturer and cut to size at site. The cut edges shall be straight

and free from hips, spells or any other damages.

8.3.3 Clear glass shall be float glass and shall be of thickness as specified

in the schedule of items. Properties of float glass shall generally meet

the requirements of IS: 14900.

8.3.4 Wired glass shall be thick rolled glass with centrally embedded wire

mesh of Georgian type conforming to IS: 5437

8.3.5 Composite double glazing shall be made of two 6mm thick clear float

glass on either sides and separated by 12mm air gap. The trapped

air shall be kept dry by means of suitable desiccant. The glass shall

be hermetically sealed. The composite double glazing shall be

procured as finished product.

8.3.6 The curtain glazing shall consist of minimum 8mm thick heat

strengthened glass fixed with framework made of aluminum sections

designed as per structural requirements.

8.3.7 The silicone sealant shall be of best quality and shall be brought to

site in manufacturer's original packing.

8.4 WORKMANSHIP

8.4.1 All glazing clips, putty, mastic etc. shall be provided as required.

8.4.2 All glasses shall be thoroughly cleaned before setting in position.

Wherever required, glass pane shall be held in place by special

glazing clips of approved type. Minimum four glazing clips shall be

provided per glass pane except for large panes where six or more

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


clips shall be used. All holes that may be necessary on

doors/windows/ventilators etc. for holding the clips, glazing beads

and all other attachments shall be drilled in position. Glass panes

shall be set without springing, and shall be bedded in putty and back

puttied, except where moulding or gasket are provided.. Putty, mastic

etc. shall be smoothly finished to a true even line.

8.4.3 After completing the glazing work, contractor shall remove all dirt,

stains, excess sealants and clean the glass panes and leave the

work in perfectly acceptable condition. All broken, cracked or

damaged glass shall be replaced by new ones without any extra cost

to the owner.

8.4.4 The glass must be protected during installation period so that they

will not be damaged by splashing of cement, welding, grinding etc.

8.4.5 Labels, tapes, adhesives, writing with chalk or any other tool shall

never be done on the coating of glazing.

8.4.6 After completion of installation, the glazing shall be immediately

washed with clean water.

8.4.7 When assembling and installing the glazing, the coating shall be

positioned as indicated in the drawing.

8.4.8 Glazing shall be carefully done to avoid the contact with metal

frames.

8.5 MOCK-UP

8.5.1 The contractor shall prepare and install mock-up samples as per


8.5.2 Mock-up samples shall be of full size and shall be true representation



SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3






safe from damage.

8.5.3.3 All items shall be protected from dampness both during and after

delivery to site.

8.5.3.4 Partition shall not be installed in any room or space where concrete,

masonry, or plaster work is not completed and dry.

8.5.3.5 Care must be taken to ensure that the frames and panels of partition

works are not damaged while transporting/erection.

8.5.4 MEASUREMENT

8.5.4.1 Glazing shall be measured in sq.m correct to two places of decimal.

Measurement shall be from out to out of the frames. Rate quoted

shall be for all the works including glazing, painting, builder's

hardware of fittings and fixtures as specifically described in the


SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


9 PARTITION WORKS

9.1 GENERAL

9.1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for fabrication and

erection of wooden / aluminum / gypsum board partitions and other

related works forming a part of this job, which may be required to be

carried out though not specifically mentioned above. The work under

this specification shall consist of furnishing of all tools, labour,

materials and everything necessary for carrying out the work.








IS: 287 Permissible moisture content for timber used for different

purposes.

IS: 303 Plywood for general purpose

IS: 710 Marine plywood

IS: 733 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys, bars, rods

and sections for general engineering purposes.

IS: 848 Synthetic resin adhesive for plywood


engineering works.

IS: 1328 Veneered decorative plywood

IS: 1868 Anodic coating on aluminum and its alloys.

IS: 1948 Aluminum doors, windows and ventilators

IS: 1949 Aluminum windows for industrial buildings

IS: 2095 Gypsum plaster boards

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


IS: 2191 Plywood face panels

IS: 2542 Method of test for gypsum plaster

IS: 2835 Flat transparent sheet glass

IS: 3144 Methods of test for mineral wool thermal insulation

materials

IS: 3513 Resin treated compressed wood laminates

IS: 3677 Unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation

IS: 4021 Timber door, window and ventilator frames

IS: 5509 Fire retardant plywood

IS: 5523 Methods of testing anodic coatings on aluminum


IS: 8183 Bonded mineral wool


BS: 2972 Methods of test for inorganic thermal insulating

materials

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


9.3 WOOD WORK IN PARTITIONS

9.3.1 MATERIALS

9.3.1.1 Timber to be used shall be first class Teak wood as per IS: 4021.

Timber shall be of the best quality and well seasoned by a suitable

process before being planed to the required sizes. The maximum

permissible moisture content shall be from 10 to 16 percent for

timber 50mm and above in thickness and 9 to 14 percent for timber

less than 50mm in thickness for different regions of the country as

stipulated In IS: 287.

9.3.1.2 Timber shall be close grained, of uniform colour and free from decay,

fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or streaks on the exposed

edges, borer holes, splits and cracks.





9.3.2 WORKMANSHIP

9.3.2.1 The workmanship and finish of wood work in partitions shall be of a

very high order. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that work is executed in

a professional manner by skilled carpenters for good appearance,

efficient and smooth operation of the shutters.

9.3.2.2 All works shall be executed as per the detailed drawings and/or as



with the sections of dimensions as per the item at work. Panels of

double/single glazing/ plywood shall be fixed as per details indicated

in the drawings.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


9.3.2.4 Partitions shall be fixed rigidly between the floor and structural

columns/beams including provision of necessary shims for wedging

etc. Finished work shall be of rigid construction, erected truly plumb

to the lines and levels, at locations as per the construction drawings.

9.3.2.5 The face of the frames abutting the masonry or concrete shall be

provided with a coat of coal tar.

9.3.2.6 Glazing of partitions shall be with either flat transparent sheet glass

or figured glass. Transparent sheet glass shall be of 'B' quality as per

IS: 2835. The thickness and type of glazing to be provided shall be

as specified in the item of work.

9.3.2.7 The material of the fittings and fixtures either of chromium plated

steel, cast brass, copper oxidized or anodized aluminum shall be as

specified in the item of work. The number, size and type of the fittings

and fixtures shall be as indicated in the drawings/item of work.

9.3.2.8 Wood work shall not be provided with the finishes of painting,

galvanizing etc. unless it has been approved by the ENGINEER. The

type of finish and the number of coats shall be as stipulated in the


9.3.2.9 Any carpentry work which shows defects due to inadequate

seasoning of the timber or bad workmanship shall be removed and

replaced by CONTRACTOR with work as per specification

requirements, at no extra cost to the OWNER.

9.4 ALUMINUM PARTITIONS

9.4.1 MATERIALS

9.4.1.1 Aluminum alloy used in the manufacture of extruded sections for the

fabrication of doors, windows, ventilators shall conform to

designation 63400 WP of IS:733.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3




9.4.1.3 Builder's hardware of fittings & fixtures shall be of the best quality


9.4.2 WORKMANSHIP

9.4.2.1 All aluminum partitions shall be of the type as specified in the

respective items of work and of sizes as indicated in the drawings.

9.4.2.2 All aluminum units shall be supplied with anodized/powder coated

finish. The minimum anodic film thickness shall be 0.015 mm.

9.4.2.3 Aluminum partitions shall be as described in the item of work and/or

bid drawings which indicates generally the arrangement along with

the overall size of the various components and weight per running

meter of the extruded sections to be adopted.

9.4.2.4 IS:1948 and IS:1949 are referred to incorporate the sizes, shapes,

thicknesses and weight per running meter of extruded sections for

the various components of the units. However, new sizes, shapes,

thicknesses with modifications to suit snap-fit glazing clips etc. are

continuously being added by various leading manufacturers of

extruded sections, which are available in the market. As such, the

sections of the various components of the unit proposed by the

CONTRACTOR, will be reviewed by the ENGINEER and will be

accepted only if they are equal to or marginally more than that

specified in the codes/ item of works.


with anodized/powder coated aluminum extruded sections of

dimensions as per the item of work. Anodized/powder coated

Aluminum extruded sections shall be in-filled with timber of class 3

(silver oak or any other equivalent) as per IS:4021. Panels of

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


double/single glazing/plywood shall be fixed as per details indicated

in the drawing. Partitions shall be fixed rigidly between the floor and

the structural columns/beams including provision of necessary shims

for wedging etc. Finished work shall be of rigid construction, erected

truly plumb to the lines and levels, at locations as per the

construction drawings.

9.4.2.6 Specific provisions as stipulated for steel doors, windows, ventilators

shall also be applicable for this item work. Glazing beads shall be of

the snap-fit type suitable for the thickness of glazing proposed as

indicated in the item of work. A layer of clear transparent lacquer

shall be applied on aluminum sections to protect them from damage

during installation. This lacquer coating shall be removed after the

installation is completed.

9.5 GYPSUM BOARD PARTITION

9.5.1 MATERIALS

9.5.1.1 The gypsum board used in partition works shall be of minimum

thickness as specified in IS: 2095 & IS: 2542.

9.5.1.2 GI frame shall include 48mm studs (0.55mm thick having one flange

of 34mm and another flange of 36mm made of GI steel) placed at

610mm c/c vertically, in 50mm thick floor and ceiling channel

(0.55m,m thick having equal flanges of 32mm made of GI steel).

9.5.1.3 Glass wool of density 24Kg/cum shall comply with BS: 476 Part 4,

1970.

9.5.2 WORKMANSHIP

9.5.2.1 Single Skin Partition shall consist of 13mm thick plaster board

screw fixed with 25mm dry wall screw at 300mm c/c to either side of

stud framework. Necessary cut-outs shall be provided in the partition

to receive cable raceways, electrical/HVAC fittings and fixtures,

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


which shall be neatly finished after fixing the fixtures thereby leaving

no gaps. Square and tapered edges of the boards shall be jointed

and finished to have a flushed look including filling and finishing with

jointing compound, joint paper tape and two coats of drywall top coat

suitable for gypsum board. Glass wool shall be rot proof and

odourless. The moisture content shall be less than 2% in accordance

with BS: 2972. The water absorption shall be less than 2% in

accordance with BS: 2972. The gypsum board shall be continued up

to true ceiling or shall be stopped 100mm above false ceiling. The

partition shall be finished to take on wall paper / paint directly by

applying suitable base coats, prime coats etc. complete.

9.5.2.2 Double Skin Partition shall include first skin consist of 13mm thick

tapered edge plaster board screw fixed with 25mm dry wall screw at

300mm c/c to either side of stud framework. Necessary cut-outs shall

be provided in the partition to receive cable raceways,

electrical/HVAC fittings and fixtures, which shall be neatly finished

after fixing the fixtures thereby leaving no gaps. The layer shall be

finished to take on second skin in gypsum board/Plywood/ MDF

directly. The first skin of the partition shall be continued up to true

ceiling. Second skin shall consist of 13mm thick tapered edge plaster

board screw fixed with 35mm dry wall screw at 300mm c/c to existing

first skin of partition. Care shall be taken that the joints are staggered

to avoid leakage. Finally square and tapered edges of the boards

shall be joined and finished to have a flush look including filling and

finishing with jointing compound, joint paper tape and two coats of

drywall top coat suitable for gypsum board. The second skin of

partition shall be stopped 100mm above false ceiling. Necessary cut-

outs shall be provided in the partition to receive cable raceways,

electrical/HVAC fittings and fixtures, which shall be neatly finished

after fixing the fixtures thereby leaving no gaps. The partition shall be

finished to take on wall paper / paint directly by applying suitable

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


base coats, prime coats etc. complete.Skirting shall be provided with

100mm high and 12mm thick commercial plywood backing fixed to

gypsum backing and finished with 1.5mm laminate. The skirting shall

be flushed to the surface of partition in line and level and 6mm wide

groove to be made in the partition at the junction and inclusive of

SS/Aluminum inserted between the groove formed. The strip shall be

glued to the surface with instant glue of approved make. The

stone/tile shall be fixed to the ply by means of approved

adhesive.50mm thick glass wool insulation of density 24 Kg/cum

shall be wrapped in RP tissues as per manufacturer's specifications.

Glass wool shall be non- combustible and shall be chemically inert.

Application shall not cause or accelerate corrosion.





safe from damage.

9.5.3.3 All items shall be protected from dampness both during and after

delivery to site.

9.5.3.4 Partition shall not be installed in any room or space where concrete,

masonry, or plaster work is not completed and dry.

9.5.3.5 Care must be taken to ensure that the frames and panels of partition

works are not damaged while transporting/erection.

9.5.4 MASUREMENT

9.5.4.1 Measurement of partitions shall be in sq.m correct to two places of

decimal.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


9.5.4.2 Measurement shall be from out to out of the frames. Rate quoted

shall be for all the works including glazing, painting, builder's

hardware of fittings and fixtures as specifically described in the


SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


10 FALSE CEILING WORKS

10.1 GENERAL

10.1.1 This specification covers the general requirements for fabrication and

erection of aluminum / gypsum board false ceilings and other related

works forming a part of this job, which may be required to be carried

out though not specifically mentioned above. The work under this

specification shall consist of furnishing of all tools, labour, materials

and everything necessary for carrying out the work.









engineering works.

IS: 1658 Fibre hard boards


10.3 MINERAL FIBRE BOARD FALSE CEILING

10.3.1 MATERIALS

10.3.1.1 The hard fiber board to be used in false ceiling shall be of an

approved manufacture as per IS: 1658 or as approved by the Owner.

10.3.1.2 The fiber boards shall be made from substances compound of

vegetable fibers such as wood pulp, wood chips or shavings bonded

by a synthetic resin. Veneered particle boards shall have a core of

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


particle board sandwiched or glued in between two or more veneers

on outer surfaces.

10.3.1.3 The fiber boards shall be fire resistant, termite and insect resistant,

weather resistant, acoustically satisfactory, dimensionally stable,

warp-free, easily workable, treated with anti-fungus chemicals, heat

insulated and of adequate structural strength and should have good

surface finish as approved by the Owner.

10.3.1.4 The size of fiber board ceiling tile shall generally be 600 x 600 x 12

mm thick. All types of boards and ceiling tiles shall be stored flat

under cover at a clean dry place on firm ground. The Contractor

should ensure that boards are not stacked on termite infected, wet or

loose ground. The boards should be always carried on edges.

10.3.1.5 The metal frame work shall be interlocking type and made of sections

of light metal, such as extruded anodized aluminum. The shape and

cross section shall be such as to facilitate proper suspension and

proper fixing of the ceiling boards covering them and shall be

structurally sound and rigid.

10.3.2 WORKMANSHIP

10.3.2.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the frame to support the ceiling is

designed for its structural strength to withstand the weight of ceiling

boards to be fixed, live load of 75 kg/m2, and other loads such as

that of air- conditioning ducts, grills, electrical wiring and lighting

fixtures, thermal insulation, etc. as shown on the drawings. The

Contractor shall also submit a detailed drawing to show the grid

work, sizes of grid members, method of suspension, position of

openings for air-conditioning and lighting, access doors, etc.

10.3.2.2 The metal frame work of extruded anodized aluminum false ceiling

grid system shall consist of aluminum main members of special T-

profile of 32 mm x 32 mm interlocking with each other and run both

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


ways at 600 mm centre to centre. The aluminum false work shall be

suspended from the roof structures by means of aluminum painted

steel hangers at suitable intervals and supported at the walls by

means of extruded aluminum wall angles.

10.3.2.3 In the case of aluminum grid system, boards are just placed into the

frames formed by the main `T' members and the cross members

fitted with the clips for locking the boards. Contractor should take

utmost care so as not to force the boards in position, and a very little

gap is preferable to a tight joint. Fixing fiber boards by adhesives

shall not be permitted unless approved by the Owner. The fiber

boards should be cut with a fine toothed saw, if required.

10.3.2.4 The hard boards shall be conditioned by wetting the screen surface

with clean water by a sponge or brush. The damp boards should be

stacked back to back on flat surface at site for 48 hours and then

fixed immediately. Conditioning if required shall be done as per the

manufacturer's specifications.

10.3.2.5 As the work of false ceiling may be interconnected with the work of

air-conditioning ducts and lighting, the Contractor shall fully

cooperate with other agencies entrusted with the above works and

who may be working simultaneously. The Contractor shall provide

necessary openings, in the false ceiling work for air- conditioning,

lighting and other fixtures. Additional framing, if required, for the

above openings shall also be provided at no extra cost to the Owner.

Removable or hinged type inspection or access trap doors shall be

provided at locations specified by the Owner.

10.4 THERMAL INSULATION OF CEILINGS


10.4.1.1 Thermal Insulation material consisting of boards slabs and rolls of

approved manufacturer, shall be of approved thermal conductivity for

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


creating the required design conditions and shall be provided as

indicated in item of works and as shown in the drawings. The

insulation shall be provided after the sample is approved by the

Owner.

10.4.1.2 The quoted rate shall include supply, delivery, cutting and fixing of all

materials for covering the roof with thermal insulation material,

including wood pegs, slotted angle, G.I rawl plugs, wood/coach

screws, lacing wire, G.I washers, wire mesh, any covering as

stipulated in schedule of prices and quantities, finishing at all levels

and elevation etc., complete.





safe from damage.

10.4.2.3 Care must be taken to ensure that the floor tiles are not damaged

while loading / unloading and transporting. Tile packages shall not be

stacked higher than 2m.

10.4.2.4 Cartons must always be stored with designated side upwards.

10.4.3 MEASUREMENT

10.4.3.1 The superficial area of false ceiling shall be measured and paid for at

the unit rate less deductions, if any. Openings in false ceiling which

are less than 0.4 sq. m in area shall not be deducted for the purpose

of payment.

10.4.3.2 The quoted rates shall include supply, delivery and erection of all

materials for covering the ceiling, frame work suspenders or hangers,

anti-termite treatment making openings in false ceiling, extra frame

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


work required for the openings, supporting the main members on

masonry walls, levelling and finishing complete.

10.4.3.3 Where moulding or beading is specified, it shall be as per details

shown in drawings and shall be measured in running meters and

paid for separately.

10.4.3.4 Where fire barriers are specified, they shall be as per details shown

in drawings and as directed and shall be measured in square meters

and paid for separately.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


11 TOILET CUBICLES

11.1 GENERAL

11.1.1 Specification applies to steel toilet partitions / cubicles with doors and

hardware for fixing and mounting of the panels as per architect's

design, plans and schedules. The scope of work includes design,

supply, installation and handling except civil works.








IS 277 Galvanized steel sheets (plain and corrugated)

IS 1200 Methods of measurement of building and civil

engineering works

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


11.3 MATERIALS

11.3.1 All clamps, fittings, accessories should be made out of first grade

quality galvanized steel conforming to IS 316. All products should be

made out of 0.6mm (24g) galvanized sheet.

11.3.2 All galvanized steel fittings and accessories should be cleaned,

phosphatized and finished with one coat of epoxy etching primer of

30 microns of polyurethane paint. All panels / doors should be oven

baked for durability and finish.

11.3.3 Pilaster shoes wherever applicable should be of stainless steel of

grade 316

11.3.4 The panels and doors should be constructed out of 12mm thick

merino laminate or any other optional material as specified by the

architect.

11.3.5 All panels should have a built in feature to be totally sight proof on all

four corners for better privacy. Standard gap of 150mm on sides and

on moving element has to be provided unless otherwise specified or

scheduled in the drawing or layout.

11.3.6 Cubicles should have a provision for mounting of the toilet hardware

like handrails, hinges, locks with indicator, coat hooks, tissue holders

and taps as per scheduled and specified. All panels should be fully

protected with the self adhesive film and to be removed at the

handing over of the cubicles

11.3.7 Compartment Depth and Width: As per the drawings

11.3.8 Door Width: As per the drawings.

11.3.9 Height above Floor:As per Vendor Specifications

11.3.10 Door Height: As per Vendor Specifications

11.3.11 Pilaster Height: As per Vendor Specifications

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


11.4 MEASUREMENT

11.4.1 Measurement for toilet cubicles shall be done in numbers.

11.4.2 The Urinal partition screens shall also be measured in numbers of

the standard sizes as approved.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12 SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS

12.1 GENERAL

12.1.1 The scope of this section consists of but is not necessarily limited to

installation, testing and commissioning of Sanitary appliances and

fixtures for toilets, Steel, Chromium plated, brass fittings, Stainless

steel sinks, Accessories e.g. towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap

dish, towel rails, coat hooks, hand dryers, mirrors, liquid soap

dispensers etc.

12.1.2 Whether specifically mentioned or not the Contractor shall provide for

all appliances and fixtures, all fixing devices, nuts, bolts, screws,

hangers as required.

12.1.3 All exposed pipes within toilets and near appliances/fixtures shall be

of chromium plated brass or copper unless otherwise specified.








IS : 771

(Part 1 to 3)

Specification for glazed fire clay sanitary

appliances.

IS : 774 Specification for flushing cistern for water

closets and urinals (other than plastic cistern)

IS : 775 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports

for wash basins and sinks

IS : 781 Specification for cast copper alloy screw down

bib taps and stops valves for water services.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


IS : 1700 Specification for drinking fountains.

IS : 2548

(Part 2)

Specification for plastic seats and covers for

water closets: Part 1 Thermoset seats and

covers.

IS : 2556

(Part 1)

Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances

(Vitreous china) :

Part 1 General requirement.

IS : 2556 (Part

2)


(vitreous china): Part 2 Specific requirements of

wash-down water closets.

IS : 2556 (Part

3)



squatting pans.

IS : 2556 (Part

4)


(vitreous china): part 4 specific requirements of

wash basins.

IS : 2556 (Part

6 Sec 2)


(vitreous china): part 6 Specific requirements of

urinals, section 2 half stall urinals.

IS : 2556 (Part

6 Sec 4)


(vitreous china): Part 6 specific requirements of

urinals, section 4 partition slabs.

IS : 2556 (Part

6 Sec 5)



urinals, section 5 waste fittings.

IS : 2556 (Part

6 Sec 6)



urinals, section 6 water spreaders for half stall

urinals.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


IS : 2556 (Part

7)



half round channels.

IS : 2556 (Part

8)



siphoning wash down water closets.

IS : 2556 (Part

11)


(vitreous china): Part 11 Specific requirements for

shower rose.

IS : 2556 (Part

12)



floor traps.

IS : 2556 (Part

15)



universal water closets.

IS : 2692 Specification for ferrule for water services

IS : 2717 Glossary of terms relating to vitreous enamelware

and ceramic metal systems

IS : 5961 Specification for cast iron gratings for drainage

purposes.

IS : 8931 Specification for copper alloy fancy single taps,

combination tap assembly and stop valves for

water services.

IS : 9758 Specification for flush valves and fitting for water

closets and urinals.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12.3 MATERIALS

12.3.1 Water Closet

12.3.1.1 Water Closet shall be wash down or symphonic wash down type floor

or wall mounted set, as shown in the drawings, designed for low

volume flushing from 2-6 liters of water to be flushed by means of a

porcelain flushing cistern or an exposed or concealed type (as

detailed in the drawings or as directed by the Owner’s Site

Representative) 32 mm size CP, brass flush valve with regulator

valve.

12.3.1.2 Flush pipe / bend shall be connected to the WC by means of a

suitable rubber adaptor. Wall hung WC shall be supported by CI floor

mounted chair which shall be fixed in a manner as approved by the

Owners/Site Representative.

12.3.1.3 Each WC set shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary in

vertical position without falling down on the WC.

12.3.1.4 Each WC set shall be provided with approved quality of seat, rubber

buffers and chromium plated hinges. Seat shall be so fixed that it

remains absolutely stationary in vertical position without falling down

on the WC.

12.3.1.5 Each WC shall be provided with 110 mm dia (OD) PVC Pan

Connector connecting the ceramic outlet of WC to CI pipe.

12.3.2 Cisterns / Flush Valve

12.3.2.1 Low level flushing cistern (exposed or concealed) shall be provided

for WC with dual flushing facility in specified toilets. Contractor shall

install cistern in accordance to the manufacturer’s specification to the

satisfaction of the Owner/Site Representative.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12.3.3 Wash Basin

12.3.3.1 Wash basins shall be white /coloured glazed vitreous china of size,

shape and type specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

12.3.3.2 Each basin shall be provided with painted MS angle or CI brackets

and clips and the basin securely fixed to wall/counter slab. Placing of

basins over the brackets without secure fixing shall not be accepted.

The MS angle shall be provided with two coats of red oxide primer

and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of make, brand and colour

as approved by the Owner’s Site Representative. The cost of fixing

the basin shall be inclusive of supply and installation of brackets as

described above.

12.3.3.3 Each basin shall be provided with 32mm dia CP waste with overflow,

pop-up waste or rubber plug and CP brass chain as specified in the


12.3.3.4 Each basin shall be provided with hot and cold water mixing fitting or

as specified in the Schedule of Quantities. Wash Faucets shall be

sensor controlled and shall have an added aerator to reduce flow to

2.0 LPM.

12.3.3.5 Flow Rate = 2 Liters per minute @ 58 PSI, all others except private

applications. (as per LEED requirement)

12.3.4 Sinks

12.3.4.1 Sinks shall be stainless steel or any other material as specified in the


12.3.4.2 Each sink shall be provided with painted MS or CI brackets and clips

and securely fixed. Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable

painted angle iron brackets or clips as recommended by the

manufacturer. Each sink shall be provided with 40mm dia CP waste

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


and rubber plug with CP brass chain as given in the Schedule of

Quantities. The MS angle shall be provided with two coats of red

oxide primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of make, brand

and colour as approved by the Owner’s site representative.

12.3.4.3 Sanitary fittings for sinks shall be deck mounted or wall mounted CP

swivel faucets with or without hot and cold water mixing fittings as

specified in the Schedule of Quantities. Installation of fittings shall be

measured and paid for separately.

12.3.4.4 Flow Rate = 2 Liters per minute @ 58 PSI, all others except private

applications. (as per LEED requirement)

12.3.5 Janitor's Sink

12.3.5.1 Janitor's sink shall be stainless steel, single bowl type of size as

called for in the Schedule of Quantities, provided with painted R.S. or

CI brackets and clips and securely fixed. Each sink shall be provided

with 40mm dia CP waste. Fixing shall be as directed by the Owner’s

Site Representative. The supply fittings for Janitor's sink shall be wall

mounted type of size as mentioned in Schedule of Quantities.

12.3.6 Drinking Water Fountain

12.3.6.1 Drinking water fountain shall be wall mounting type made of vitreous

china, stainless steel or any other material as given in the Schedule

of Quantities. The drinking water fountain shall be with anti-squirt

bubble less, self closing valve type with automatic volume regulator.

The drinking water fountain shall be provided with an anti-splash

back and integral strainer with 32mm or 40mm cast brass trap.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12.3.7 Liquid Soap Dispenser

12.3.7.1 Liquid Soap Dispenser shall be wall/counter mounted suitable for

dispensing liquid soaps, lotions, detergents. The cover shall lock to

body with concealed locking arrangement, opened only be key

provided. Liquid soap dispenser body and shank shall be of high

impact resistance material. The piston and spout shall be stainless

steel with 1 litre capacity polyethylene container. The valve shall

operate with less than 2.27 Kg (5 lbs) of force.

12.3.8 Hand Drier

12.3.8.1 The hand drier shall be no touch operating type with solid state time

delay to allow user to keep hand in any position. The hand drier shall

be fully hygienic, rated for continuous repeat use (CRU). The rating

of hand drier shall be such that time required to dry a pair of hands

up to wrists is approximately 30 seconds. The hand drier shall be of

wall mounting type suitable for 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz, AC power

supply.

12.3.9 Shower Set

12.3.9.1 Shower set shall comprise of two CP brass concealed stop cocks,

four/five way auto-diverter, adjustable type over-head shower with

CP shower arm, all with CP wall flanges of approved quality all as

specified in the Schedule of Quantities. Bath spout, hand showers

and pop up wastes shall also be provided wherever, specified. Wall

flanges shall be kept clear off the finished wall. Wall flanges

embedded in the finishing shall not be accepted.

12.3.9.2 Flow Rate = < 6.1 Liters per minute @ 58 PSI (as per LEED

requirement)

12.3.9.3 Flow Control Device

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12.3.9.4 Approved / rated flow control fitment in brass body, chrome outer

cover, rated for flow / discharge of the fixture.

12.3.10 Toilet Paper Holder

12.3.10.1 Toilet paper holder shall be white glazed vitreous china or chrome

plated of size, shape and type specified in the Schedule of

Quantities.

12.3.10.2 Porcelain toilet paper holder shall be fixed in walls and set in cement

mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling

work.

12.3.10.3 The latter (chrome) shall be fixed by means of screws/capping

having finish similar to the toilet paper holder in wall/temper partitions

with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves. When fixed on timber partition, it

shall be fixed on a solid wooden base member provided by the

Owner’s Site Representative.

12.3.11 Towel Rail

12.3.11.1 Towel rail shall be chromium plated brass or of stainless steel or

powder coated brass of size, shape and type specified in the


12.3.11.2 Towel rail shall be fixed with screws/capping having finish similar to

the towel rail in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall

include cutting and making good as required or directed by the


12.3.12 Urinals

12.3.12.1 Urinals shall be lipped type half stall with glazed vitreous China of

size as called for in the Bill of Quantities.

12.3.12.2 Half stall urinals shall be provided with 15mm dia CP spreader,

32mm dia CP domical waste and CP cast brass bottle trap with pipe

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


and wall flange and shall be fixed to wall by CI brackets, CI wall clips

and CP brass screws as recommended by manufacturer complete as

directed by the Owner’s Site Representative.

12.3.12.3 Flushing for urinals shall be by means of no hand operation, infrared

electric flush valve with complete kit of plumbing, electrical and

electronic items, infrared photo cells, solenoid valve transformer and

electrical connection. The automatic flush sensor plate shall be flush

and press fitted and shall be of high quality mirror polish finish. Each

urinal shall be provided with one flush valve unit.

12.3.12.4 Flush pipes shall be GI pipes concealed in wall chase but with

chromium plated bends at inlet and outlet.

12.3.12.5 Flow Rate = 4.0 Litres per Flush. 8.5 Liters per minute @ 4 Bar 58

PSI, private applications only (as per LEED requirement)

12.3.13 TOILETS FOR THE DISABLED

12.3.13.1 Where specified, in washroom facilities designed to accommodate

physically disabled, accessories shall be provided as directed by the

Owner’s Site Representative. Stainless steel garb brass of required

size suitable for concealed or exposed mounting and opened non-

slip gripping surface shall be provided in all washroom. The flushing

cistern/valve shall be provided with chromium plated long handles

12.3.13.2 The contractor shall provide all the necessary supporting and fixing

devices to install the sanitary fixtures and fittings securely in position.

The fixing devices shall be rigidly anchored into the building

structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed

that they do not present an unsightly appearance in the final

assembly. Where the location demands, the Architect may instruct

the contractor to provide chromium plated or other similarly finished

fixing devices. In such circumstances the contractor shall arrange to

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


supply the fixing devices and shall be installed complete with

appropriate vibration isolating pads, washers and gaskets.

12.4 WORKMANSHIP / FABRICATION & ERECTION

12.4.1 All appliances, fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such

accessories as are required to complete the item in working condition

whether specifically mentioned or not in the Schedule of Quantities,

specifications, and drawings. Accessories shall include proper fixing

arrangements, brackets, nuts, bolts, washers, screws and required

connection pieces.

12.4.2 The sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct

assigned position as shown on the drawings and as directed by the

Architect / Owner’s Site Representative and shall fully meet with the

aesthetic and symmetrical requirements as demanded by the

Architect / Interior Designer

12.4.3 All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set

pattern matching the tiles or interior finish as per Architect

requirements. Wherever necessary, the fittings shall be centered to

dimensions and pattern as called for.

12.4.4 Fixing screws shall be half round head chromium plated (CP) brass

screws, with CP brass washers unless otherwise specified.

12.4.5 Fixtures shall be installed by skilled workman with appropriate tools

according to the best trade practice.

12.4.6 All appliances, fittings and fixtures shall be fixed in a neat

workmanlike manner true to level and to heights shown on the

drawings and in accordance with the manufacturers’

recommendations. Care shall be taken to fix all inlet and outlet pipes

at correct positions. Faulty locations shall be made good and any

damage to the finished floor, tiling, plaster, paint, insulation or terrace

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost. Fixtures shall

be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment.

12.4.7 All materials shall be rust proofed; materials in direct or indirect

contact shall be compatible to prevent electrolytic or chemical

(bimetallic) corrosion.

12.4.8 Wall flanges shall be provided on all walls, floors, columns etc.

wherever supply and disposal pipes pierce through them. These wall

caps shall be or chromium plated brass fittings and the receiving

pipes and shall be large enough to cover the punctures properly.

12.4.9 Sanitary appliances, subject to the type of appliance and specific

requirements, shall be fixed in accordance with the relevant

standards and the following:

12.4.10 Contractor shall, during the entire period of installation and

afterwards protect the appliances by providing suitable cover or any

other protection so as to absolutely prevent any damage to the

appliances until handing over (The original protective wrapping shall

be left in position for as long as possible)

12.4.11 The appliances shall be placed in correct position or marked out in

order that pipe work can be fixed or partially fixed first.

12.4.12 The appliance shall be fixed in a manner such that it will facilitate

subsequent removal if necessary.

12.4.13 The appliance shall be securely fixed. Manufacturer's brackets and

fixing methods shall be used wherever possible. Compatible rust-

proofed fixings shall be used. Fixing shall be done in manners that

minimize noise transmission.

12.4.14 Appliances shall not be bedded (e.g. WC pans, pedestal units) in

thick strong mortar that could crack the unit (e.g. ceramic unit)

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12.4.15 Pipe connections shall be made with demountable unions. Pipe work

shall not be fixed in a manner that it supports or partially supports

and appliance.

12.4.16 Appliances shall be fixed true to level firmly fixed to anchor or

supports provided by the manufacturer and additional anchors or

supports where necessary.

12.4.17 Sizes of sanitary fixtures given in the Specifications or in the

Schedule of Quantities are for identification with reference to the

catalogues of make considered. Dimensions of similar models of

other makes may very within + 10% and the same shall be provided

and no claim for extra payment shall be entertained NOR shall any

payment be deducted on this account.

12.4.18 The contractor shall fix all plumbing fittings such as water faucets,

shower fittings, mixing valves etc. in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions and connect to piping system. The contractor shall

supply all fixing materials such as screws, rawl plugs, unions, collars,

compression fittings etc., as required.

12.4.19 Joints / gaps between all sanitary appliances / fixtures and the floor /

walls shall be caulked with an approved mildew resistant sealant,

having antifungal properties, of colour and shade to match that of the

appliances / fixture and the floor / wall to the extent possible.

12.4.20 The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their final

position in accordance with approved trial assemblies and as shown

on drawings. The installation shall be complete with all supply and

waste connections. The connection between building and piping

system and the sanitary fixtures shall be through proper unions and

flanges to facilitate removal/replacement of sanitary fixtures without

disturbing the built in piping system. All unions and flanges shall

match in appearance with other exposed fittings.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12.4.21 Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets

of water closet pans and similar appliances shall be examined to

ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes before

making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are

clear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall

be paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by other

causes. Overflows shall be made to ensure that necessary anchoring

devices have been provided for supporting water closets, wash

basins, sinks and other appliances.

12.5 SUPPORTING AND FIXING DEVICES

12.5.1 The contractor shall provide all the necessary supporting and fixing

devices to install the sanitary fixtures and fittings securely in position.

The fixing devices shall be rigidly anchored into the building

structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed

that they do not present an unsightly appearance in the final

assembly. Where the location demands, the Architect may instruct

the contractor to provide chromium plated or other similarly finished

fixing devices. In such circumstances the contractor shall arrange to

supply the fixing devices and shall be installed complete with

appropriate vibration isolating pads, washers and gaskets.

FINAL INSTALLATION

12.5.2 The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their final

position in accordance with approved trial assemblies and as shown

on drawings. The installation shall be complete with all supply and

waste connections. The connection between building and piping

system and the sanitary fixtures shall be through proper unions and

flanges to facilitate removal/replacement of sanitary fixtures without

disturbing the built in piping system. All unions and flanges shall

match in appearance with other exposed fittings.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12.5.3 Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets

of water closet pans and similar appliances shall be examined to

ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes before

making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are

clear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall

be paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by other

causes. Overflows shall be made to ensure that necessary anchoring

devices have been provided for supporting water closets, wash

basins, sinks and other appliance.

12.6 STORING, HANDLING & DELIVERY

12.6.1 Material received at site shall be with original packing and labels. It

shall be intact till issued for use of site. Material shall be stored at

properly covered dry location and shall be safe from damage.

12.6.2 Care must be taken to ensure that the sanitary fixtures are not

damaged while loading / unloading and transporting. Cartons must

always be stored with designated side upwards.

12.6.3 The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all sanitary

fixtures against damage, misuse, cracking, staining, breakage and

pilferage by providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement till

the completion of the installation.

12.6.4 At the time of handing over, the contractor shall clean, disinfect and

polish all the fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found

damaged, cracked chipped stained or scratched shall be removed

and new fixtures and fittings free from defects shall be installed at his

own cost to complete the work.

12.7 MEASUREMENTS

12.7.1 Rate for fixing only of sanitary fixtures accessories, CP fittings shall

etc. include all items, and operations stated in the respective

specifications and bill of quantities and nothing extra is payable.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


12.7.2 Rates for all items shall be inclusive of cutting holes and chases and

making good the same, CP screws, nuts, bolts and any fixing

arrangements required and recommended by manufacturers, testing

and commissioning and making good to the satisfaction of the


SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


13 WATER PROOFING WORKS

13.1 GENERAL

13.1.1 Specification applies to water proofing of terrace, basement and toilet

slabs with elastomeric membrane , waterstops, swellable sealant

water bars and water proofing admixtures.


BS 8102 British Standard- Code of practice for protection of below

ground structures against water from the ground

ASTM–

C836-89

Historical Revision Information Standard Specification

for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric

Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate

Wearing Course

IS:1200 - Method of measurement of building and civil

engineering works.

IS:1237 - Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles.

IS:2645 - Specification of integral cement water-proofing

compounds.

IS:8543 - Methods of Testing Plastics (Part 4 / Section 1 )

IS:9766 - Flexible PVC compounds – specification

IS:12200 - Code of practice for provision of water-stops at

transverse contraction joints in masonry and concrete

dams.

IS:13182 Waterproofing and damp-proofing of wet areas in

Buildings

IS:13360 Method of testing plastics(Part5-sec-11)

IS:15058 Water stops at transverse contraction joints –

specification.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


13.3 DAMP - PROOF COURSE


13.3.1.1 Where specified, all the walls in a building shall be provided with

damp-proof course to prevent water from rising up the wall. The

damp-proof course shall run without a break throughout the length of

the wall, even under the door or other openings. Damp-proof course

shall consist of 50 mm thick cement concrete of 1:2:4 nominal mix

with approved water-proofing compound admixture conforming to IS:

2645 in proportion as directed by the manufacturer. Concrete shall

be with 10 mm downgraded coarse aggregates.

13.3.1.2 The surface of brick/stone masonry work shall be levelled and

prepared before laying the cement concrete. Side shuttering shall be

properly fixed to ensure that slurry does not leak through and is also

not disturbed during compaction. The upper and side surface shall

be made rough to afford key to the masonry above and to the plaster.

13.3.1.3 Damp-proof course shall be cured properly for at least seven days

after which it shall be allowed to dry for taking up further work.

13.3.2 MEASUREMENT

13.3.2.1 Measurement of damp-proof course shall be in Sq.m. correct to two

places of decimal as actually executed. No separate payment will be

made for formwork.

13.3.2.2 SELECTION OF TYPE OF WATER PROOFING SHALL BE AS PER

BS8102 AND SHALL BE DISCUSSED WITH CLIENT BEFORE

INCLUDING IN THE SPECIFICATION. BELOW MENTIONED

CLAUSES 13.4, 13.5 & 13.6 ARE APPLICABLE FOR

ELASTOMERIC MAMBRANE TYPE WATERPROOFING.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


13.4 TERRACE OR ROOF WATER-PROOFING WITH ELASTOMERIC

MEMBRANE

13.4.1 MATERIALS

13.4.1.1 Material shall be High solids content Polyurethene based cold liquid

applied coatings as per ASTM C836-89 and shall comprise of

urethane pre-polymers extended with flexible material which cure by

reaction with atmospheric moisture and that can be applied with a

brush on concrete surfaces to form a permanent, flexible, seamless

membrane coating after it is cured.

13.4.1.2 The material shall not be diluted. The coating shall have physical

features like high viscosity, minimum 80% solids, high resistance to

impact, abrasion and cracking, superior tensile strength, 500%

elongation and forming a perfectly smooth permanently flexible

seamless membrane which should have good adhesion to roof

surface. It should also be resistant to acid (mild concentrated), alkalis

and have a very low water absorption rate (0.5% max) at ambient

temperature after 7 days. The material shall not be older than 9

months.

13.4.2 WORKMANSHIP

13.4.2.1 The roof shall be sloped with mortar or concrete (M20 grade with

12mm down size agregates) screed to achieve the specified slope as

per drawing and shall be properly cured before taking up water-

proofing treatment.

13.4.2.2 The roof surface shall be cleaned of all foreign matters by wire

brushing, dusting etc. and shall be made thoroughly dry. All cracks

and voids on the surface shall be filled with mastic sealant, if

required. A V-groove shall be made along the crack line and shall be

filled with mastic sealant.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


13.4.2.3 Over the cleaned surface, a suitable coat of polyurethane primer @ 5

– 6 sq.m/ litre shall be applied.

13.4.2.4 First coat of elastomeric membrane shall be applied on the primed

surface @ 0.50 kg/sq.m with a minimum average thickness of 0.50

mm.

13.4.2.5 After the first coat is touched dry, second coat @ 0.50 kg/sq.mm and

minimum average thickness of 0.50mm shall be applied. After the

second coat is dry, third coat shall be applied to result in an overall

thickness of 1.5mm.

13.4.2.6 Due to unavoidable circumstances, if application of second coat is

delayed, special primer shall be applied over the entire surface of

first coat and is allowed to dry for 4 to 8 hours before second coat is

applied.

13.4.2.7 It shall be ensured that a concave fillet 75mm in radius is provided in

cement mortar 1:4 at the junction of roof and vertical faces of

masonry or RCC parapet wall or column projections.

13.4.2.8 Water proofing treatment shall be taken on the brick masonry wall /

parapet / column projection by a minimum of 150 mm along its

height. Groove 75mm wide and 65mm deep in masonry shall be left

for tucking the water proofing treatment. The groove shall be filled

with 1:4 cement mortar for securing the water proofing treatment

firmly.

13.4.3 All completed works shall be cleaned to remove any spillage from

chemicals.

13.4.4 For finishing on top, machine made burnt clay flat terracing tiles

conforming to IS 2690 (Part-1) or cement concrete flooring tiles

conforming to IS 1237 shall be used and shall be of the size and

thickness as specified in the item of work. Tiles shall be soaked in

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


water for at least one hour before laying. Bedding for the tiles shall

be 12mm thick in cement mortar 1:3. Tiles shall be laid, open jointed

with 4 to 6 mm wide joints, flat on the mortar and lightly pressed and

set to plane surface true to slope, using a trowel and wooden straight

edge. They shall be laid with their longitudinal lines of joints truly

parallel and generally at right angles to the direction of run-off

gradient. Transverse joints in alternate rows shall come directly in

line with each other. Transverse joints in adjacent courses shall

break joints by atleast 50 mm. The joints shall be completely filled

and flush pointed with cement mortar l:2 mixed with water proofing

compound as per manufacturer's instructions. Curing shall be

carried out for a minimum period of seven days.

13.4.4.1 After completing all the water proofing works over the roof surface

and curing, the works shall be tested against any leakage / soaking

of water below the roof. For this, arrangement shall be made by

Contractor to store minimum 50mm height of water over the roof

surface and shall be maintained for a period of 7 days. If any wet

patch is observed on the ceiling, rectification of water proofing works

should be attended immediately by the contractor. The test should be

repeated till the leakage / soaking through the ceiling completely

stops.

13.4.4.2 The contractor shall give guarantee for a minimum period of 10 years

against any leakage / soaking through the ceiling, for the quality of

materials supplied and for the good workmanship carried out. The

guarantee should be in writing on a format prepared by owner. In

case of any defect found in the above during guarantee period, it

should be attended to and rectified immediately by the contractor at

his own cost

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


13.4.5 MEASUREMENT

13.4.5.1 Measurement shall be for the plan area of treatment and for the

finished work. No separate payment shall be made for the fillets and

work as specified on the vertical faces. Cement concrete tiling works

or machine pressed clay tile works shall be paid separately, unless

they are specifically included in the item of works.

13.5 BASEMENT TYPE OF STRUCTURE WATER PROOFING WITH

ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE

13.5.1 MATERIAL

13.5.1.1 As specified in clause 14.2.1.

13.5.2 WORKMANSHIP

13.5.2.1 Base slab or raft shall be provided over the lean concrete/PCC. The

membrane shall be applied in the similar manner as mentioned in

clause 14.2.2. The top surface of elastomeric memberane shall be

protected by providing 20mm thick mortar ratio 1:4. Protective

coating shall be cured for 3days.

13.5.2.2 The elastomeric membrane for the vertical wall shall be provided on

the outer face exposed to water pressure/earth pressure. The

membrane shall be applied as explained in clause 14.2.2. There

shall be proper continuation of membrane provided below the base

slab /raft and over the outer face of wall. The exposed membrane

shall be protected by providing extruded high density dimpled

polyurethane board.

13.5.3 MEASUREMENT

13.5.3.1 Measurement shall be for the plan area of treatment and for the

finished work. No separate payment shall be made for providing and

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


laying the lapping of memberane/ protective mortar/board/any other

type.

13.6 TREATMENT TO TOILET –WET AREA SLAB

13.6.1 MATERIAL

13.6.1.1 As specified in clause 14.2.1.

13.6.2 WORKMANSHIP

13.6.2.1 After casting the concrete slab, the surface shall be cured for

required period.

13.6.2.2 The inner surface shall be prepared and memberane coating shall be

applied as described above clause 14.2.2. Provisions of IS13182

shall be adopted for making the wet areas watertight.

13.6.2.3 The prepared surface shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:3 – 15

mm thick admixed with – Normal Setting Integral Waterproofing

Compound conforming to IS: 2645, or approved equivalent at 2% by

weight of cement. Surface shall be cured for minimum 7 days.

13.7 WATERSTOPS

13.7.1 MATERIAL

13.7.1.1 The material for the PVC waterstops shall be a plastic compound

with the basic resin of polyvinyl chloride and additional resins,

plasticizers, inhibitors, which satisfies the performance

characteristics specified below as per IS:15058. Testing shall be in

accordance with IS:8543 (Part 4/sec1), IS 13360 (Part 5/sec11) and

IS 9766..

Tensile strength : 13.8 MPa minimum

Ultimate elongation : 285% minimum

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


Hardness (Shore A) : 65, minimum

Water absorption : 0.6 maximum

Cold bend temp

at which samples do not crack : -25oC minimum

Accelerated extraction

i) Tensile strength : 10.3 MPa minimum

ii) Ultimate elongation : 280% minimum

Effect of Alkali : 7 days

i) Weight increase : 0.25% maximum

ii) Weight decrease : 0.10% maximum

iii) Hardness change : +/- 5 points

Effect of Alkali : 28 days

i) Weight increase : 0.40% maximum

ii) Weight decrease : 0.30% maximum

iii) Dimension change : +/- 1%

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


13.7.1.2 PVC water stops shall be either of the bar type, serrated with centre

bulb and end grips for use within the concrete elements or of the

surface (kicker) type for external use. The width, type, minimum

thickness and safe hydraulic head requirements shall be as specified

in the individual items of work.

13.7.1.3 PVC water stops shall be of approved manufacture. Samples and the

test certificate shall be got approved by the ENGINEER before

procurement for incorporation in the works.

13.7.2 WORKMANSHIP

13.7.2.1 Waterstops shall be laid as per IS 12,200. It should be cleaned

before placing them in position. Oil or grease shall be removed

thoroughly using water and suitable detergents.

13.7.2.2 Waterstops shall be procured in long lengths as manufactured to

avoid joints as far as possible. Standard L or T type of intersection

pieces shall be procured for use depending on their requirement.

Any non-standard junctions shall be made by cutting the pieces to

profile for jointing. Lapping of waterstops shall not be permitted. All

jointing shall be of fusion-welded type as per manufacturer’s

instructions.

13.7.2.3 Waterstops shall be placed at the correct location/level and suitably

supported at intervals with the reinforcement to ensure that it does

not deviate from its intended position during concreting and vibrating.

Care shall also be taken to ensure that no honey-combing occurs

because of the serrations/end grips, by placing concrete with smaller

size aggregates in this region. Projecting portions of the waterstops

from concrete already poured shall be thoroughly cleaned of all

mortar/ concrete coating before resuming further concreting

operations. The projecting waterstop shall also be suitably supported

at intervals with the reinforcement to maintain its intended position

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


during concreting so as to ensure that it does not bend leading to

formation of pockets. In addition, smaller size aggregate shall be

used for concreting in this region also.

13.7.3 MEASUREMENT

13.7.3.1 Measurement shall be in running metres correct to two places of

decimal. No separate payment shall be made for joints or

intersection pieces.

13.8 SWELLABLE SEALANT WATER-BARS

13.8.1 MATERIAL

13.8.1.1 Material shall be swellable polyurethane /synthetic elastomeric strips

13.8.2 WORKMANSHIP

13.8.2.1 Construction joint surface shall be cleaned and swellable water bar

shall be placed in the grove or fixed with adhesive and cured as per

the manufacturer instruction/specification. before placement of next

layer of concrete.

13.8.3 MEASUREMENT

13.8.3.1 Measurement shall be in running meters correct to two decimal

places. No separate payment shall be made for joints or intersection

pieces.

13.9 WATER-PROOFING ADMIXTURE

13.9.1 Water-proofing admixture shall conform to the requirements of

IS:2645 and shall be of approved manufacture. The admixture shall

not contain calcium chloride. The quantity of the admixture to be

used for the works and method of mixing etc. shall be as per

manufacturer's instructions and as directed by the Engineer.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


Payment shall be made for the actual quantity of such admixture

used unless it is already covered in the rate for the relevant item of

work.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


14 METAL SHEETING WORKS

14.1 GENERAL

14.1.1 This part of the specification covers the technical requirements of

COLOUR COATED SHEET AND ALLIED WORKS FOR ROOFING,

DECKING AND CLADDING, WITH OR WITHOUT INSULATION.

Supply and installation of the sheeting shall be done by same

agency. During handling/ stacking, if any damage is done to sheet

like distortion of edges, scratches on sheet etc., then such damaged

sheet shall stand rejected and shall be immediately replaced by the

contractor.


IS:277 - Galvanised steel sheets

IS:513 - Cold rolled carbon steel sheets

IS:901 - Code Of Practice For Use Of Cold-Formed Light Gauge Steel

Structural Members In General Building Construction

IS:1200 - Specification for Kraft paper.

IS:1397 - Steel for general structural purposes

IS:2062 Australian Code – Steel sheet and strip Hot dipped

zinc coated or aluminium-zinc coated

NZS/AS 3566:1988- Screws - Self-drilling - For the

building and construction industries

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


14.3 MATERIAL

14.3.1 Troughed permanently colour coated metal decking sheet for

floor/roof decking shall be made by steel feed material of minimum

0.8mm bare metal thickness. Galvanised to grade 275 as per IS277,

of minimum yeild strength of 250Mpa of drawing grade. Sheet shall

be colour coated with total thickness of 35 microns comprising of

silicon modified ployester SMP (with silicon content 30 -50%) paint or

super polyester paint of minimum 20microns dry film thickness (DFT)

on one side (exposed face) over 5micron primer coat and 5micron

SMP or super polyester paint over 5micron primer on other face and

of approved profile, sectional properties, colour and shade. SMP and

super polyester paint systems shall be of category 3 as per AS2728.

14.3.2 Troughed permanently colour coated metal sheet for roofing, side

cladding, ridges, hips, flashings, trimmings, closure for vertical &

horizontal joints,capping etc., shall be

14.3.3 With sheet having minimum 0.6mm (bare metal thickness) thickness

galvanised to grade 275 as per IS277, of minimum yeild strength of

250Mpa of drawing grade as per IS513.

14.3.4 With sheet having minimum 0.5mm (bare metal thickness) thickness

coated with zinc aluminium alloy at 150gm/m2 of minimum yield

strength of 350 as per AS1397.

14.3.5 Steel sheet shall be colour coated as per clause 15.2.1 and shall be

of approved profile, sectional properties, colour and shade.

14.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

14.4.1 For metal decking the sectional properties shall be calculated as per

IS801 for satisfying deflection and strength requirements. Deflection

shall be limited to span/250 under critical load combinations.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


14.4.2 No increase in allowable stress is permissible under wind loading

conditions.

14.4.3 Spacing of fastener shall be calculated based on wind load,

selfweight and other associated loads andm Maximum spacing of

fasteners shall be 400mm, minimum diameter of fastener shall be

5.5mm.

14.4.4 Sealant used for cladding shall be butyl based, two parts poly

sulphide or equivanlent approved, non stainless material and be

flexible enough not to interface with fit of the sheets.

14.4.5 Filler blocks as a trough filler shall be used to seal cavities formed

between the profiled sheet and the support or flashing . Filler block

shall be manufacturered from black synthetic rubber or any other

material approved by ENGINEER.

14.4.6 Thermal insulation of sheeting panels shall be with mineral wool

conforming to IS8183. The density shall be 32kg/m3 for glass wool

nad 48kg/m3 for rock wool. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be

50mm.

14.4.7 Special coated fasteners shall be used conforming to class 3 as per

AS3566 and shall be tested to 1000hours salt spray test.

14.4.8 Percentatge elongation of the mild steel sheet having minimum yield

strength of 250Mpa shall be 23% as per IS :2062.

14.4.9 Tolerance on bare metal thickness of all sheeting material shall be -

0.00mm and +0.06mm.

14.5 WORKMANSHIP

14.5.1 The sheeting shall be fixed as per the working drawings. Sheets shall

be supplied in required sizes (based on the secondary beams

spacing/ purlins) according to the cutting schedule. Generally cutting

of sheets to lengths shall shall be used for cutting. Cutting and

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


trimming of small openings which were not finalised at the time of

working drawings can be allowed at site. Wherever possible, site cut

edges shall be concealed at laps or with flashings. Suitable steel

members for stiffening shall be provided at the cut edges. No gas

cutting shall be done on the sheet. If any sheet is found with gas cut

mark, same shall stand rejected and shall be immediately replaced.

14.5.2 Distorted, blemished or water stained sheets shall not be used.

Before installing decking sheet, it shall be ensured that the purlins

are in true planes, correctly placed and secured firmly.

14.5.3 Side and end laps of the sheets shall be made weather proof by

securing them with the fasterners not less than 4mm dis with 2mm

thick neoprene washer. Maximum spacing of the fasterners not to

exceed 500mm.

14.5.4 Length of the sheet shall be such as to cover minimum 3 span purlin

spacings. The roof decking sheets shall be fixed to the purlins with

the help of self drilling and tapping type fasteners and neoprene

washers.

14.5.5 Sheets shall be laid over the supporting purlins with a minimum

bearing of 50mm and end projection of 75mm at lap joints. End and

side laps between the sheets shall be sufficiently large to ensure the

weather tightness. In no case, the end laps shall be less than 150mm

and side laps less than one trough length with proper weather tight

arrangement.

14.5.6 Cladding erection for each elevation shall commence at the bottom

and proceed towards the top, in order to ensure tight fittings laps.

14.5.7 In case double skin cladding, inner sheet and outer sheet can be

directly fixed to the opposite faces of the sheeting runner totally

concealing the supporting steel structure.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


14.5.8 Flashings, cappings, trimming, closure for vertical/horizontal joints,

ridge and hips etc,. shall be provided with a minimum lap of 150mm.

The lapping of sheets shall provide the dust free, airtight enclosure. If

required this can be achieved by using 2 parts polysulphide sealing

compound or butyl tape. The black synthetic rubber external trough

fillers are to be secured by the mechanical fixings to the flashings or

parapet capping,

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15 GRILLS & RAILING WORKS

15.1 GENERAL

15.1.1 This specification covers the general requirements regarding

materials and details of fabrication and erection of Stainless Steel

(SS) Handrails. The contractor shall design, engineer, document,

test, manufacture, deliver, install, protect and commission SS Railing

complete with all necessary accessories, fixings, finishes, flashings,

sealants and the like in accordance with the Contract Documents.

The scope of this Section is performance based, and shall be

developed, tested and warranted to comply with:

15.1.2 The design intentions indicated on the Drawings,

15.1.3 Specified performance criteria and requirements,

15.1.4 Relevant statutory and project requirements.








INDIAN STANDARDS:

NBC 2005 Bureau of Indian Standards, the National Building

Code of India,

IS: 806 Code of Practice for Use of Steel Tubes in

General Building Construction.

IS: 2835 Specification for flat transparent sheet glass(third

revision)

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


IS: 4912 Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings,

Railings and Toe Boards

AMERICAN STANDARDS

ASTM A554–13: Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel

Mechanical Tubing

ASTM E985: Standard Specification for Permanent Metal

Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings

ASTM E488: Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in

Concrete and Masonry Elements

ASTM E894–88: Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent

Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings

ASTM E935–00: Standard Test Methods for Performance of

Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for

buildings

ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -

Safety Performance Specifications and Methods

ASTM C1172-09: Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural

Flat Glass

ASTM C1036: Standard specification for flat glass.

ASTM C1376: Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum

Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass

BRITISH STANDARDS

CP 3012: Code of Practice for Cleaning and

Preparation of Metal Surfaces

IBC 2407: Glass in Handrails and Guards

BS EN 14179-2: Glass in building. Heat-soaked thermally-

toughened soda lime silicate safety glass

Evaluation of conformity/product standard

BS EN 1096-1: Glass in building. Coated glass Definitions

and classification

javascript:Next('icod_ibc_2012_24_sec007.htm');

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.3 STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAILING

15.3.1 MATERIALS

15.3.1.1 Guardrails and Handrail System

15.3.1.2 All rails and other horizontal / inclined tubular components shall be

constructed using the following:

15.3.1.3 Surface to be 320 grain/grit finish/ polish / matte/ bead blasted Tubes

1-1/2” (38mm) outside diameter by 5/64” (2 mm) wall thickness.All

posts and other vertical components shall be constructed using the

following:

15.3.1.4 Stainless steel grade AISI type 316,

15.3.1.5 Stainless steel grade AISI, type 304,316/316L

15.3.1.6 Posts to be 2” (50 mm) by 1/2” flat bar,

15.3.1.7 Stainless steel grade AISI type 316, surface to be 320 grain/grit

finish/ polish / matte/ bead blasted for component fittings including

handrail attachment support and post attachment components

Stainless Perforated, Woven Or Welded Metal Infill Panels: As per

Custom pattern as specified herein.

15.3.1.8 Fasteners:

15.3.1.9 Anchors & Fastening bolts to be stainless steel or other high strength

material as determined by engineering requirements with capability

to sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as

determined by testing per ASTM E488.

15.3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

15.3.2.1 Railing Structural Requirements:

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.3.2.2 Handrail assemblies and guards shall be designed to resist to

withstand loading of 0.74 KN/mtr UDL applied in any direction at the

top and to transfer this load through the supports to the structure.

15.3.2.3 Infill area of guardrail system shall be capable of withstanding a

horizontal concentrated load 90 Kgs to one square foot at any point

in the system. Load not to act concurrently with loads on top rail of

system in determining stress on guardrail.

15.3.2.4 Bolts, Rivets and Screws

15.3.2.5 When two stainless steel items are joined it is absolutely necessary

to use elements of stainless steel or of other materials with an

equivalent resistance to corrosion.

15.3.2.6 When stainless steel items are joined to carbon steel structural

elements the carbon steel element must be well protected by suitable

painting.

15.3.2.7 Stainless steel rivets, screws and bolts must be used and the carbon

steel element must be suitably insulated from the stainless steel

element using EPDM/ neoprene/Teflon

15.3.2.8 Welding Prior Approval To Be Obtained If Necessary:

15.3.2.9 TIG welding to be adopted for SS works. The welded areas to be

passivated after welding are completed. When welding dissimilar

ferrous metals the respective IS code to be followed.

15.3.3 WORKMANSHIP

15.3.3.1 Installation work shall not be carried out until substrates have been

properly prepared.

15.3.3.2 If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer; notify

Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.3.3.3 All works shown or inferred from the Specifications and Drawings are

intended to be the design criteria for the subcontract work. The

detailed design development shall be submitted by the Contractor for

Acceptance and Endorsement.

15.3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for taking exact measurements

at site prior to fabrication and installation. He shall verify all

measurements in consultation with the Consultant.

15.3.3.5 The Contractor shall allow for any additional supports on framework

where required so as to ensure the stability and capability of the

installation to withstand all specified loads under normal usage

encountered during the service life of the works.

15.3.3.6 Field measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit

to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction

by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded

measurements on final shop drawings.

15.3.3.7 Coordinate fabrication and delivery schedule of handrails with

construction progress and sequence to avoid delay of railing

installation.

15.3.3.8 Coordinate post setting drawings, templates, instructions, and

directions for installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete

inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral

anchors that are to be embedded in concrete and masonry

construction.

15.3.3.9 Co-ordinate delivery of anchorages to project site.

15.3.3.10 Co-ordinate that blocking is in place for all mounting fasteners.

15.3.3.11 Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.3.3.12 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the

manufacturer for achieving proper result for the substrate under the

project conditions.

15.3.3.13 Fabricate railing system for compliance with structural requirements

of applicable code.

15.3.3.14 Pre-assemble railings prior to shipping to greatest extent possible to

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as

necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units

for re-assembly and for coordination with shop drawings.

15.3.3.15 Stainless steel tubing cuts shall be square, without burrs and where

exposed, rounded to produce smooth rigid and hairline joints

15.3.3.16 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions by done a

qualified, authorized representative of the manufacturer.

15.3.3.17 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight joints,

except as necessary for expansion.

15.3.3.18 Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. Set

accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level and true,

measured from established lines and levels.

15.3.3.19 For in-place construction, provide anchorage devices and fittings to

secure to in-place construction; including threaded fittings for

concrete inserts, toggle bolts and through bolts. Separate dissimilar

materials with bushings, grommets or washers to prevent electrolytic

corrosion.

15.3.3.20 Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be completely restored in

the field.Provide anchors, plates, angles, etc., necessary for

connecting railings to structure.

15.3.3.21 Any and all field welding shall be by a certified welder.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.3.3.22 There shall be accuracy in dimensions, precision in fitting of

matching sections to line and levels, and perfection in alignment.

15.3.3.23 All components to be installed in plumb and in-line, accurately fitted,

free from distortion or defects and securely anchored to structure.


standards, and the final finish and polish shall conform true to

approved sample.

15.3.3.25 Maximum variation from plumb shall be 1/4".

15.3.3.26 Maximum offset from true alignment for every 50-foot of railing shall

be 1/4", non-accumulative.


15.3.4.1 Materials to be delivered to the job site in good condition and

adequately protected against damage as handrails are a finished

product.

15.3.4.2 Store on site in a location and manner to avoid damage. Stacking

should be done in a manner that will prevent bending. Store material

in a clean, dry location away from uncured concrete and masonry.

Any protection on the railings during transportation should remain

until installed.

15.3.4.3 Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise caution to avoid

damage to finishes of material.

15.3.4.4 General contractor to provide protective covering on handrails and

guardrails until handover.

15.3.4.5 Adequate protection and periodic inspection to be carried out if

construction is not yet finished in the area where the railings are

installed.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.3.4.6 Upon delivery railing will have protective wrapping over cap only.

Immediately upon completion of installation of railing, remove cap

cover and clean all work for inspection and approval.

15.3.4.7 When cleaning surfaces use plain water containing a mild soap or

detergent. No abrasive agents or harsh chemicals shall be used.

15.3.4.8 Touch up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial

Completion.

15.3.4.9 All deficiencies in work and/or items not meeting specified

requirements shall be corrected in order to meet specification

requirements at no additional cost to owner.

15.3.5 WARRANTY

15.3.5.1 Finish Warranty: Manufacturer shall warranty installed system for the

periods described herein, starting from Date of Substantial

Completion. When notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer /

installer shall, promptly and without inconvenience and cost to

Owner, correct said deficiencies.

15.3.6 MEASUREMENT

15.3.6.1 Horizontal plan length of top rail only will be measured as handrail

length in Running Unit. Verticals will not be measured. Rate shall

include all labour and materials including balustrades (vertical pipes)

all necessary infill details (as shown in drawing), welding (if

necessary), tools, plants & buffing charges fixing arrangements etc

complete as directed.

15.3.6.2 Important Note:

15.3.6.3 All the specifications mentioned above are the general standardised

ones. Architectural layout plans & the detail drawings should be

followed / referred for all the specified design & details & the

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


architectural drawings submitted should be termed as final, in case of

any discrepancies or variations, what-so-ever.

15.4 GLASS HANDRAILING

15.4.1 MATERIALS

15.4.1.1 Guardrails And Handrail System - All rails and other horizontal /

inclined tubular components shall be constructed using the following:

15.4.1.2 Stainless steel grade AISI, type 304,316/316L.Surface to be 320

grain/grit finish/ polish / matte/ bead blasted.Tubes 1-1/2” (38mm)

outside diameter by 5/64” (2 mm) wall thickness.

15.4.1.3 All posts and other vertical components shall be constructed using

the following:

15.4.1.4 Stainless steel grade AISI type 316,

15.4.1.5 Surface to be 320 grain/grit finish/ polish / matte/ bead blasted

15.4.1.6 Posts to be 2” (50 mm) by 1/2” flat bar,

15.4.1.7 Provide 1.0mm radius at all corners with ‘v-cut’ where necessary.

15.4.1.8 All stainless steel is to be a minimum thickness of 2.0mm.

15.4.1.9 Stainless steel grade AISI type 316, surface to be 320 grain/grit

finish/ polish / matte/ bead blasted for component fittings including

handrail attachment support and post attachment components

15.4.1.10 Colour: Where indicated on the Drawings to be colour finished,

stainless steel be colour treated by an Accepted permanent process

to match Accepted colour samples. Submit details.

15.4.1.11 Provide laminated Heat Soaked Toughened Safety Glass with

polished edges and dubbed (blunt) corners complying with ASTM

C1048. Kind FT (fully tempered), condition A (un-coated). Types 1

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


(transparent glass, flat), quality Q3 (glazing select), class, thickness

and manufacturing process as indicated below.

15.4.1.12 Clear glass: Class 1 clear

15.4.1.13 Tinted glass: Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing).

Manufacturer’s standard tint color or custom color as indicated

below:

15.4.1.14 Custom pattern, art glass, etch, edges or surface, laminate or

embeds, as specified herein.

15.4.1.15 Allowable thickness 17.5mm thick (8 clear toughened +8 clear

toughened +1.5mm PVB interlayer) glass.

15.4.1.16 Glass shall be Fully Tempered and 100% Heat Soak Tested to EN

14179 part 1.

15.4.1.17 Provide approved opacifying films of polythene or polyester to restrict

vision where required / as specified. Film to match project architect’s

approved sample. Film shall be fully bonded to glass with solvent

based adhesive. Provide safety backing restraint for fallout

resistance. Edge deletion of pacifying films shall be provided at all

insulating glass and structural glazing unless manufacturer submits

test data acceptable to the project architect indicating that edge

deletion is not required.

15.4.1.18 Opacifier coatings and films are required to be suitable for the

proposed temperature and exposure conditions and are required to

function without bubbling, blistering or colour shift for the design life

of the Building.

15.4.1.19 Opacifier coatings are to be applied to surface 2 of monolithic or

surface 4 of insulating glass units and prevent “read-through” of the

glass.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.4.1.20 Anchors & Fastening bolts to be stainless steel or other high strength

material as determined by engineering requirements with capability

to sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as

determined by testing per ASTM E488.

15.4.1.21 Glass Panels:

15.4.1.22 Glass for laminating is to be cut into individual panels prior to the

laminating process.

15.4.1.23 Glass thickness of successive panes being laminated together is not

to exceed a difference of 2mm.

15.4.1.24 Heat treated glass is to be orientated so that warp, bow and roller

wave between successive panels are matched. Two stage

convection empering ovens are to be used to ensure glass

distortions are minimized. Edge clamping of glass is forbidden.

15.4.1.25 Handrail assemblies and guards shall be designed to resist to

withstand loading of 0.74 KN/mtr UDL applied in any direction at the

top and to transfer this load through the supports to the structure.

15.4.1.26 Infill area of guardrail system shall be capable of withstanding a

horizontal concentrated load 90 Kgs to one square foot at any point

in the system. Load not to act concurrently with loads on top rail of

system in determining stress on guardrail.

15.4.1.27 When two stainless steel items are joined it is absolutely necessary

to use elements of stainless steel or of other materials with an

equivalent resistance to corrosion.

15.4.1.28 When stainless steel items are joined to carbon steel structural

elements the carbon steel element must be well protected by suitable

painting. Stainless steel rivets, screws and bolts must be used and

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


the carbon steel element must be suitably insulated from the

stainless steel element using EPDM/ neoprene/Teflon

15.4.1.29 TIG welding to be adopted for SS works. The welded areas to be

passivated after welding are completed. When welding dissimilar

ferrous metals the respective IS code to be followed. Any and all field

welding shall be by a certified welder.

15.4.1.30 All laminated glass shall have clean cut edges, or polished edges if

required to eliminate thermal stress breakage risk. Laminated glass

units shall be fabricated with autoclaved edges on all four sides.

15.4.1.31 Edges of laminated glass are to be protected to prevent

delamination, contamination or other defects, caused by moisture,

sealant contact or other external/internal source.

15.4.1.32 All exposed laminated glass edges shall be protected from blushing

by hot rolling the interlayer back into the glass edge, or by use of an

approved edge seal material.

15.4.1.33 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions by done a

qualified, authorized representative of the manufacturer.

15.4.1.34 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight joints,

except as necessary for expansion.

15.4.1.35 Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. Set

accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level and true,

measured from established lines and levels.

15.4.1.36 For in-place construction, provide anchorage devices and fittings to

secure to in-place construction; including threaded fittings for

concrete inserts, toggle bolts and through bolts. Separate dissimilar

materials with bushings, grommets or washers to prevent electrolytic

corrosion.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.4.1.37 Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be completely restored in

the field.

15.4.1.38 Provide anchors, plates, angles, etc., necessary for connecting

railings to structure.

15.4.1.39 There shall be accuracy in dimensions, precision in fitting of

matching sections to line and levels, and perfection in alignment.

15.4.1.40 All components to be installed in plumb and in-line, accurately fitted,

free from distortion or defects and securely anchored to structure.

Maximum variation from plumb shall be 1/4".


standards, and the final finish and polish shall conform true to

approved sample.

15.4.1.42 Maximum offset from true alignment for every 50-foot of railing shall

be 1/4", non-accumulative.

15.4.1.43 Dimensional tolerances of glass generally shall comply with ASTM

C1036 Table 2.

15.4.1.44 Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after toughening. Use

installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact

with metals or other non-resilient materials.

15.4.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

15.4.2.1 Quality Plan - Prepare, submit and implement a detailed project

specific Quality Plan prior to execution. Products shall be reputable

proprietary products, factory manufactured under ISO 9001. Submit

quality assurance documentation for all bought-in products, including

ISO 9001 certification, and evidence of satisfactory long term

performance (at least 5 years) in similar commercial conditions.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.4.2.2 Quality Control Representative - Appoint a Quality Assurance

representative responsible for all quality aspects of the work of this

Section. Submit name and details.

15.4.2.3 Quality Control Procedures - Submit certifications that the materials

comply with specification required and are suitable for intended

application.

15.4.3 WORKMANSHIP

15.4.3.1 Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly

prepared.

15.4.3.2 If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer; notify

Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

15.4.3.3 All works shown or inferred from the Specifications and Drawings are

intended to be the design criteria for the subcontract work. The

detailed design development shall be submitted by the Contractor for

Acceptance and Endorsement.

15.4.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for taking exact measurements

at site prior to fabrication and installation. He shall verify all

measurements in consultation with the Consultant.

15.4.3.5 The Contractor shall allow for any additional supports on framework

where required so as to ensure the stability and capability of the

installation to withstand all specified loads under normal usage

encountered during the service life of the works.

15.4.3.6 Field measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit

to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction

by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded

measurements on final shop drawings.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.4.3.7 Coordinate fabrication and delivery schedule of handrails with

construction progress and sequence to avoid delay of railing

installation.

15.4.3.8 Coordinate post setting drawings, templates, instructions, and

directions for installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete

inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral

anchors that are to be embedded in concrete and masonry

construction.

15.4.3.9 Co-ordinate delivery of anchorages with project site.

15.4.3.10 Co-ordinate that blocking is in place for all mounting fasteners.

15.4.3.11 Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

15.4.3.12 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the

manufacturer for achieving proper result for the substrate under the

project conditions.

15.4.3.13 Fabricate railing system for compliance with structural requirements

of applicable code.

15.4.3.14 Pre-assemble railings prior to shipping to greatest extent possible to

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as

necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units

for re-assembly and for coordination with shop drawings.

15.4.3.15 Stainless steel tubing cuts shall be square, without burrs and where

exposed, rounded to produce smooth rigid and hairline joints

15.4.4 Shop Drawing & Method Statement Submissions

15.4.4.1 Submit (within the One month of the award of contract) the

Comprehensive, detailed and dimensioned shop drawings to indicate

all set-out and construction/ installation details to include and not

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


limited to plans, elevations, sections, details of components, anchor

details and attachment to adjoining units of work.

15.4.4.2 Time required for examination of shop drawings will be 5 working

days for each submission, including re-submissions. The Contractor

shall incorporate required changes due to inaccurate data or

incomplete definition so that delivery and installation schedules are

not affected. The Contractor’s revision response time is not

justification for delivery or installation delay of the subcontract works.

Any re-submission shall include requested corrections and shall be

responded to previous comments in point-by-point format.

15.4.4.3 Manufacture should not commence until Acceptance and

Endorsement has been obtained to use the relevant shop drawings.

15.4.5 Installation Procedures Manual

15.4.5.1 Submit a comprehensive manual containing all installation

procedures, equipment and personnel required for acceptance prior

to the commencement of installation works for review and

Acceptance.

15.4.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

15.4.6.1 The O&M Manual shall include, without limitation, recommendations

for operating, and routine cleaning and maintenance, and all

information required to ensure the full service capability of the work,

including source of replacement components, and methods of

replacement of damaged components. The method of cleaning and

timetable shall be specified together with cleaning agents which can

and cannot be used.

15.4.6.2 The Operation and Maintenance Manual is to include the following

documents:

15.4.6.3 Comprehensive list of all materials suppliers and agents.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.4.6.4 Finishes information – coating system type colour, supplier.

15.4.6.5 Defective works log to be kept up to date for the duration of the

warranty period outlining each defect type location and corrective

action to rectify each defect.

15.4.6.6 Clearances and tolerances.

15.4.6.7 Methods of in-service glass replacement

15.4.6.8 All Warranties from suppliers and Contracting Parties.

15.4.6.9 As-built drawings (AutoCAD Files and A3 hard copy)

15.4.7 Test Reports:

15.4.7.1 Submit test reports from qualified independent testing agency.

15.4.8 Glass

15.4.8.1 Roller Wave Distortion: in the installed work shall be horizontal

unless otherwise approved in writing. The maximum roller wave shall

not exceed 0.15 mm in any 300mm length of glass.

15.4.8.2 Bow Distortion: ‘bow’ and ‘warp’ shall have the same meaning.

Overall bow across the shorter glass dimension (‘the gauge length’)

shall not exceed 0.00342 times gauge length for gauge length less

than 900mm, and 0.00258 times gauge length for gauge length

greater than 900mm.

15.4.8.3 100% heat soak testing will be required for all glass with edge stress

exceeding 50mpA (7500 psi). Submit Heat Soak method,

temperature, and duration for review and Acceptance, prior to

commencement.

15.4.9 MOCK-UP

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.4.9.1 Contractor shall install a full scale mock up for a length of 7.5m of

typical detailing treatment at locations to be confirmed by the

Architect.

15.4.9.2 The visual mock-up for the assembly will be required to be Accepted

and Endorsed by the Architect with respect to appearance of colour.


15.4.10.1 Materials to be delivered to the job site in good condition and

adequately protected against damage as handrails are a finished

product.

15.4.10.2 Store on site in a location and manner to avoid damage. Stacking

should be done in a manner that will prevent bending. Store material

in a clean, dry location away from uncured concrete and masonry.

Any protection on the railings during transportation should remain

until installed.

15.4.10.3 Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise caution to avoid

damage to finishes of material.

15.4.10.4 Adequate protection and periodic inspection to be carried out if

construction is not yet finished in the area where the railings are

installed.

15.4.10.5 Upon delivery railing will have protective wrapping over cap only.

Immediately upon completion of installation of railing, remove cap

cover and clean all work for inspection and approval.

15.4.10.6 General contractor to provide protective covering on handrails and

guardrails until handover.

15.4.10.7 When cleaning surfaces use plain water containing a mild soap or

detergent. No abrasive agents or harsh chemicals shall be used.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.4.10.8 Touch up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial

Completion.

15.4.10.9 All deficiencies in work and/or items not meeting specified

requirements shall be corrected in order to meet specification

requirements at no additional cost to owner.

15.4.11 WARRANTY

15.4.11.1 Manufacturer shall warranty installed system for the periods

described herein, starting from Date of Substantial Completion.

When notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer / installer shall,

promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner, correct said

deficiencies.

15.4.12 MEASUREMENT

15.4.12.1 The mode of measurement will be length of railing and not length of

individual pipes/bars i.e. Horizontal plan length of top rail only will be

measured as handrail length in Running Unit. Verticals will not be

measured.

15.4.12.2 Rate shall include all labour and materials including balustrades

(vertical pipes) all necessary infill details / Glass Panels (as shown in

drg), welding (if necessary), tools, plants & buffing charges fixing

arrangements etc complete as directed.

15.4.12.3 Important Note:

15.4.12.4 All the specifications mentioned above are the general standardised

ones. Architectural layout plans & the detail drawings should be

followed / referred for all the specified design & details & the

architectural drawings submitted should be termed as final, in case of

any discrepancies or variations, what-so-ever.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


15.5 M.S. GRILLS & HANDRAILING

15.5.1 MATERIALS

15.5.1.1 Mild steel tubular sections should be used for hand railing; design

should be as per drawing.

15.5.2 WORKMANSHIP

15.5.2.1 The hand railings will be fitted in staircase and other areas without

tampering the finishing material of the stair/area. The fixing will be

done as per details shown in drawing.

15.5.3 MOCK-UP

15.5.3.1 Contractor shall install a full scale mock up for a length of 7.5m of

typical detailing treatment at locations to be confirmed by the

Architect.

15.5.3.2 The visual mock-up for the assembly will be required to be accepted

and endorsed by the Architect with respect to appearance of colour.

15.5.4 MEASUREMENT

15.5.4.1 Measurement shall be in running meter correct upto two places of

decimal.

15.5.4.2 Rate shall include all labour and materials including balustrades

(vertical pipes) welding, tools, scaffoldings, buffing charges, fixing

arrangements etc complete as directed.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


16 MISCELLANEOUS

16.1 GENERAL

16.1.1 This part of the specification covers miscellaneous items such as

Inserts, bolts, cutouts, metal lath and wire fabric.


IS:412 - Expanded metal steel sheets for general purposes.

IS:4948 - Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use.

16.3 INSERTS, BOLTS, CUTOUTS ETC.

16.3.1 WORKMANSHIP

16.3.1.1 All the miscellaneous inserts such as bolts, pipes, plate embedments

etc. either supplied FREE by the OWNER or to be furnished by the

CONTRACTOR shall be accurately installed in the building works at

the correct locations and levels, all as detailed in the construction

drawings. CONTRACTOR shall prepare and use templates for this

purpose, if so directed by the ENGINEER. In the event, any of the

inserts are improperly installed, CONTRACTOR shall make

necessary arrangements to remove and re-install at the correct

locations/levels, all as directed by the ENGINEER without any extra

cost to the OWNER.

16.3.1.2 The rate quoted by the Bidder for concrete works shall hold good for

accurately fixing the inserts at the correct levels/alignment and shall

include the cost of any temporary supports/anchors such as bars

including cutting, bending, welding, etc. as required.

16.3.1.3 Steel templates shall be used by the CONTRACTOR to locate and

very accurately position bolts, groups of bolts, inserts, embedded

parts, etc. at his cost. Such templates shall be got previously

approved by the Engineer. Templates shall invariably be supported

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


such that the same is not disturbed due to vibration, movement of

labourers, materials, shuttering work, reinforcement, etc. while

concreting. The CONTRACTOR will have to suitably bend, cut or

otherwise adjust the reinforcement in concrete at the location of

inserts, as directed by the Engineer. If the Engineer so directs, the

inserts will have to be welded to reinforcement to keep these in

place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of

dimensions, levels, alignments and centre lines of the inserts in

accordance with the drawings and for maintenance of the same until

the erection of equipment/structure or final acceptance by the Owner.

16.3.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure proper protection of all bolts, inserts, etc.

from weather by greasing or other approved means such as applying

white lead putty and wrapping them with gunny bags or canvas or by

other means as directed by the Engineer to avoid damage due to

movement of his labourers, materials, equipment, etc. No extra claim

from the Contractor on this account shall be entertained. The

Contractor shall be solely responsible for all damage caused to bolts,

inserts, etc. due to his negligence and in case damage does occur,

they shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the

Contractor's cost.

16.3.1.5 Cut outs, chamfers, pockets, etc. shall be left as indicated in the

drawings and no extra cost shall be payable for providing these at

their correct locations. The Contractor shall take all necessary

precautions to protect the cut outs from accidentally getting filled up

or the edges getting broken.

16.3.2 MEASUREMENT

16.3.2.1 Miscellaneous inserts, bolts supplied by the CONTRACTOR shall be

measured and paid for as per the respective items of work. Installing

the inserts in correct location is covered in cost of brickwork/stone

masonry/concrete items.

SPEC. NO.

TCE.M4-419-01


WRITE UP


173

ISSUE

R3


16.4 METAL LATH & WIRE FABRIC

16.4.1 MATERIALS

16.4.1.1 Welded steel wire fabric shall conform to IS:4948

16.4.1.2 Expanded metal shall conform to IS:412

16.4.1.3 Galvanised wire mesh shall be of approved quality.

16.4.2 WORKMANSHIP

16.4.2.1 The type and details of the steel material to be used for metal lath

plastering work and at the junctions of brick masonry/concrete before

wall plastering shall be as specified in the respective items of work.

16.4.2.2 For metal lath plastering work, the weight of steel material shall be

not less than 1.6 kg/sq m.

16.4.2.3 Steel material for use at the Junction of brick masonry/ concrete shall

have the mesh dimensions not greater than 50 mm.

16.4.2.4 Steel material shall be obtained in maximum lengths as

manufactured to restrict joints to the minimum. Overlap at the joints

shall be minimum 25 mm which shall be securely tied with wires of

diameter not less than 1.25 mm at spacing not more than 100 mm for

lath plastering work. Nailing to wall shall be at spacing not exceeding

200 mm. The material shall be straightened, cut and bent to shape if

required for fixing as per the details indicated in the drawings.

16.4.3 MEASUREMENT

16.4.3.1 Measurement shall be in sq.m correct to two places of decimal for

the type as specified in the respective items of work.

TCE.M4-422-02 TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION:WRITEUP

SPECIFICATION FOR CONCRETE ROADS SHEET 1 OF 35

The contents of this document are proprietary and confidential to Tata Consulting Engineers Limited (TCE) and the disclosure of the contents to anyone outside TCE is strictly prohibited except with the prior written consent from TCE.

ISSUE R1

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6 FILE NAME: M4-422-02-R1

1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers the general requirements for the materials and construction of concrete plant roads using pavement quality concrete.

The work shall consist of preparing sub grade , construction of dry lean concrete as sub base and concrete pavement in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and cross sections shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The work shall include furnishing of all plants and equipments, materials and labour and performing all operations, in connection with the work, as approved by the Engineer.

The design parameters of dry lean concrete as sub base and concrete as road surface like width, thickness, grade of concrete, details of joints, etc shall be as stipulated in the drawing.


The following specifications, standards and codes, including all official amendments/revisions and other specifications & codes referred to therein, should be considered a part of this specification. In all cases the latest issue/edition/revision shall apply. Where Standards are not yet published by BIS or IRC, adoptable British Standards or other International Standards shall apply. In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to herein below or other specifications forming a part of this bid document, this specification shall govern.

2.1 MATERIALS

1) IS 269: 2015 Specification for 33 grade ordinary Portland cement.

2) IS 455: 2015 Specification for Portland slag cement.

3) IS 1489: 2015 (Part 1 & Part 2)

Specification for Portland-Pozzolana cement.



6) IS 12330: 1988 (Reaffirmed 2014)

Specification for sulphate resisting Portland cement

11) IS 383: 2016 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete.

12) IS 432 - Part 1 & Part 2: 1982 (Reaffirmed 2015)

Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wires for concrete reinforcement.

13) IS 1786: 2008 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement.




ISSUE R1


15) IS 9103: 1999 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Specification for admixtures for concrete.

16) IS 2645: 2003 (Reaffirmed 2017)

Specification for integral cement waterproofing compounds

17) IS 4990: 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017)

Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work.

18) IS 3812 Part 1: 2013

Pulverized Fuel Ash – Part 1 : for use as Pozzolana in Cement, Cement Mortar and Concrete

19) IS 3812 Part 2: 2013 (Reaffirmed 2017)

Pulverized Fuel Ash - Part 2 : for use as Admixture in Cement Mortar And Concrete

2.2 MATERIAL TESTING

1) IS 4031 – Part 1 to Part 15: 1988 (Reaffirmed 2014)

Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement.

2) IS 4032: 1985 (Reaffirmed 2014)

Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.

3) IS 650: 1991 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Specification for standard sand for testing of concrete.

4) IS 2430: 1986 (Reaffirmed 2014)

Methods for sampling of aggregates for concrete.

5) IS 2386 – Part 1 to Part 8: 1963 (Reaffirmed 2016)

Methods of test for aggregates for concrete.

6) IS 3025: 1987 (Reaffirmed 2014)

Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) of water and waste water.

7) IS 6925: 1973 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Methods of test for determination of water soluble chlorides in concrete admixtures.

2.3 MATERIAL STORAGE

1) IS 4082: 1996 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Recommendations on stacking and storing of construction materials at site

2.4 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

1) IS 10262: 2009 (Reaffirmed 2014)

Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.

2) SP 23: 1982 Handbook on Concrete Mixes




ISSUE R1


2.5 CONCRETE TESTING

1) IS 1199: 1959 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.

2) IS 516: 1959 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Method of test for strength of concrete.

3) IS 9013: 1978 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Method of making, curing and determining compressive strength of accelerated cured concrete test specimens.

4) IS 8142: 1976 (Reaffirmed 2016)

Method of test for determining setting time of concrete by penetration resistance.

5) IS 9284: 1979 (Reaffirmed 2016)

Method of test for abrasion resistance of concrete.

6) IS 2770: 1967 (Reaffirmed 2017)

Methods of testing bond in reinforced concrete.

2.6 EQUIPMENT

1) IS 1791: 1985 (Reaffirmed 2015)

Specification for batch type concrete mixers.

2) IS 2438: 1963 (Reaffirmed 2015)

Specification for roller pan mixer.

3) IS 4925: 2004 (Reaffirmed 2015)

Specification for concrete batching and mixing plant.

4) IS 5892: 2004 (Reaffirmed 2015)

Specification for concrete transit mixer and agitator.

5) IS 7242: 1974 (Reaffirmed 2017)

Specification for concrete spreaders.

6) IS 2505: 1992 (Reaffirmed 2014)

General Requirements for concrete vibrators: Immersion type.

7) IS 2506: 1985 (Reaffirmed 2016)

General Requirements for screed board concrete vibrators.

10) IS 18652: 2005 (Reaffirmed 2014)

Specification for Building Construction Machinery and Equipment – External Vibrators for Concrete

11) IS 11993: 1987 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Code of practice for use of screed board concrete vibrators.

13) IS 2722: 1964 (Reaffirmed 2016)

Specification for Portable Swing Weigh Batchers for concrete (single and double bucket type).




ISSUE R1


2.7 DESIGN

1) IS 456: 2000 (Reaffirmed 2016)

Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

2) IRC: 15 – 2017 Code of practice for construction of concrete road

3) IRC: 44 – 2017 Guidelines for Cement Concrete Mix Design for Pavements

4) IRC: 57 - 2006 Recommended practice for Sealing of Joints in Concrete Pavements

5) IRC: 58 – 2015 Code of practice for construction of rigid pavement

6) IRC: 74 – 1979 Tentative Guidelines for Lean-Cement Concrete and Lean-Cement Fly Ash Concreteas a Pavement Base or Sub-Base

7) IRC: 85 – 2015 Code of practice for accelerated strength testing & evaluation of concrete for road construction

8) IRC: 101 – 1988 Guide line for continuously reinforced concrete with elastic joint

9) IRC: SP 49 - 2014 Guidelines for the use of Dry Lean Concrete as Sub-base for Rigid Pavement

10) IRC: SP 69 - 2011 Guidelines and Specification for Expansion Joints

11) IS 2502: 1963 (Reaffirmed 2013)

Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement.

12) MORTH Specifications for Road and Bridge Works 2013 (5th Rev)

2.8 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY

1) IS 7969: 1975 (Reaffirmed 2017)

Safety code for handling and storage of building materials.

2.9 MEASUREMENT

1) IS 1200 – Part 1 to Part 12: 2013

Method of measurement of building and engineering works.

3.0 EARTHWORK

3.1 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION

In general the excavation shall be in accordance with TCE specification No.TCE.M4-418-01.

Profiles of road excavation shall be laid at 50 m intervals to conform to the required alignment, sections, grades and side slopes and the lines of cuts shall be clearly marked.




ISSUE R1


CONTRACTOR shall on no account excavate beyond the slopes or below the specified grade unless so directed by the ENGINEER in writing. If excavation is done below the specified level or outside the section it shall not be paid for and the CONTRACTOR shall be required to fill up at his own cost such extra excavation with approved materials, in layers of 150 to 200 mm, watered and compacted as specified for the subgrade.

The excavation shall be finished neatly, smoothly and evenly to the correct lines, grades, sections and side slopes as shown in the drawings or directed by ENGINEER.

3.2 EARTHWORK IN EMBANKMENT

The embankment shall be formed of earth obtained from approved source.

The ground over which embankment is to be formed shall be cleared of all brushwood, loose stones, vegetation, bushes, stumps, and all other objectionable mater and materials so removed shall be burnt off or disposed off as directed by ENGINEER. The cost of this clearing, burning and disposal shall be included in the unit rates quoted for embankment construction.

Profiles of embankment shall be set up with stout poles to mark the centre and edges of the formation with the top levels of formation clearly marked by paint or cut and the slopes with strings and pegs at every 10 metres on straight portions. Toe line may be marked with pick marks.

Before placing any embankment material the top 150 mm of soil strata receiving it shall be scarified and watered and compacted with 8-10 tonnes roller so as to achieve minimum dry density of 97% as per IS:2720 (Part 8).

Embankment material shall be placed in successive horizontal layers so as to achieve compacted thickness of 200 mm extending to the full width of the embankment including the slopes at the level of the particular layer and 300 mm more on both sides to allow compaction of the full specified section. Before placing the next layer the surface of the under layer shall be moistened and scarified with pick axes or spades to provide a satisfactory bond with the next layer. The extra loose stuff at the edges shall be trimmed later after completion of the bank work at no extra cost leaving the correct section fully compacted.

When boulders, broken stones and similar hard materials are mixed up with the embankment materials, care shall be taken to see that they are distributed uniformly into the bank and that no hollows are left near them. No stone or hard material shall project above the top of any layer. Each layer of embankment shall be watered, levelled, and compacted as specified before the succeeding layer is placed. The surface of the embankment shall at all times during construction be maintained at such a cross fall as will shed water and prevent ponding.

If the bank materials contains less than the optimum moisture, water shall be added to the loose layers of the embankment to bring the moisture uniformly up to requirement. If the material contains more than the required moisture it shall be allowed to dry until the moisture is reduced to the required extent.

The moistened/dried loose layers shall be compacted with a vibratory roller of 80 to 100 kN static weight with plain or pad foot drum or heavy pneumatic tired roller. The roller shall pass at least twice over the same area, once in the forward move




ISSUE R1


and the second time in backward move. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted to achieve minimum dry density of 95% as per IS:2720 (Part 8).

To allow for subsequent settlement the finished level of the embankment shall be kept higher than the specified level by one centimetre for every metre of the height of the bank.

Embankment shall be finished and dressed smooth and even to conform to the alignment, levels, cross sections, and dimensions shown on drawings with due allowance for shrinkage. Any damage caused by rain, or any other reason shall be made good in the finishing operation.

Table 1

Density requirement of Embankment and Subgrade materials

Sl. No.

Type of Work Max. Dry Unit Weight tested as per IS 2720 (Part 8)

1. Embankment up to 3m height not subjected to excessive flooding

Not less than 15.2 kN/cum

2. Embankment exceeding 3m height or any height subjected to long periods of inundation


3. Subgrade and earthen shoulders/ verges/ backfill


Table 2

Compaction requirement of Embankment and Subgrade

Sl. No.

Type of Work/ Material Relative compaction as % of max laboratory dry density as per IS 2720 (Part 8)

1. Subgrade and earthen shoulders Not less than 97%

2. Embankment Not less than 95%

3. Expansive clays

a) Subgrade and 500mm portion below Not allowed

b) Remaining portion of embankment 90% to 95%

3.2.1 MEASUREMENT

Earth embankment/ subgrade construction shall be measured separately by taking cross sections at intervals before and after work and computing volume of earthwork in cum by method of average and areas. The measurement of fill materials from borrow areas shall be the difference between the net quantities of compacted fill and the net quantities brought from road/ drain excavation. It shall be assumed that one cum of material brought from excavation is equivalent to one cum of compacted fill and bulking/ shrinkage shall be ignored. In case the embankment/ subgrade construction is carried out using earth from stacks excavated earlier, the volume of stacked material shall be reduced by 30% to account for voids in the loose fill.




ISSUE R1


4.0 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE

In general earthwork in subgrade shall conform to TCE.M4-418-01.

Immediately prior to the laying of the soling the subgrade shall be cleaned of all foreign substances, vegetation etc. Any ruts or soft yielding patches that appear shall be corrected and the subgrade dressed off parallel to the finished profile. The camber of subgrade shall conform in shape to that of the finished road surface. Camber boards shall be used to get the required section.

The prepared subgrade shall be lightly sprinkled with water, if necessary, and rolled with power roller of' not less than 10 tonnes, till the soil is evenly consolidated to 95% of Proctor density with 2% variation in optimum moisture content. Roller shall pass minimum 5 runs on the subgrade. Rolling shall commence at the edges and progress towards the centre longitudinally. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. Any undulations in the surface that develop due to rolling shall be made good with approved earth and subgrade rerolled.

The sub grade shall confirm to the grades and cross sections shown on the drawings and shall be uniformly compacted to the design strength in accordance with these specifications and specification stipulated in contract. The lean concrete sub base shall not be laid on a sub grade softened by rain after its final preparation; surface trenches and soft spots any, must be properly back filled and compacted to avoid any weak or soft spot. As far as possible, the construction traffic shall be avoided on the prepared sub grade. A day before placing of the sub base, the sub grade surface shall be given a fine spray of water and rolled with one or two passes of a smooth wheeled roller after a lapse of 2-3 hours in order to stabilize loose surface. If Engineer feels it necessary, another fine spray of water may be applied just before placing sub-base.

5.0 SOLING

Soling shall not be provided on a wet subgrade.

Unless otherwise specified, the width of the soling shall be 230 mm more on either side than that of the waterbound macadam course and the finished thickness of the soling course shall be 230 mm.

The soling stones shall be laid with the largest face downwards and in contact with each other. The stones shall break joints as far as possible. The height of the soling stone shall be equal to specified thickness of soling.

As the laying of rubble advances the soling shall be hand packed by wedging and packing with 80 mm and downgraded metal in the joints of the soling and driving them by hammers in place so as to fill the voids as completely as possible. This operation of hand packing shall closely follow the rubble laying. The soling shall be laid and hand packed true to grade and section and these shall be often checked by boning rods, template boards and fish line etc. The grades, sections etc. of the soling shall correspond to those of the surfacing coming on it. The soling thus laid shall be finished by knocking out projecting stones and filling depressions by chips to come up to the grade and camber.

The quality of the 80 mm and downgraded metal shall be same as specified for the soling and the longest dimension shall not be more than 100 mm and the shortest dimension not less than 50 mm.




ISSUE R1


The soling after it is properly laid and hand packed including filling of voids with 80 mm metal shall be rolled dry with 10 - 12T power roller to refusal i.e. till the stones in the soling course cease to move under the roller and no more compaction can be achieved. Rolling shall start at the edges and work towards the centre. The roller shall run over the same surface of rolling for at least 8 times till the soling course is well consolidated. The surface shall be checked by templates and in case of unevenness high spots shall be knocked out and depressions filled by spalls and re-compacted fully. Bunds shall be laid along the edges and compacted before starting rolling on soling to prevent spreading of stones.

Gravel shall be spread in thin layers over the above prepared soling surface, swept into the interstices with brooms, watered lightly to assist the filling of voids. Spreading of gravel, sweeping and watering shall continue till the interstices are completely filled. At all times only enough water shall be sprinkled to force the gravel into the voids and never so much as to soften the subgrade. The process of gravel filling shall be accompanied by dry rolling of soling with a power roller weighing not less than 10 tonnes starting at edge and working towards the centre. The roller shall run over the same surface for at least eight times. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. The surface shall be checked with templates of approved design (to be provided by Contractor) and high and low spots corrected by removing soling and repacking.

Where slag from iron making plants is available, it can be used to form the base course. Crushed slag shall be made from air cooled blast furnace slag. It shall be of angular shape, reasonably uniform in quality and density and generally free from thin, elongated and soft pieces, dirt or other deleterious materials. The weight of crushed slag shall not be less than 11.2kN/m3 and the percentage of glossy material shall not be more than 20. It should also comply with requirements below:

Table 3

Requirement of slag (Sub Base / Base Course)

Sl.No. Test Requirements Test Method

1. Chemical stability Comply BS1047 BS 1047

2. Sulphur content 2% (max.)

3. Water absorption 10% (max.)

5.1 MEASUREMENT

Measurements shall be made for the finished work in square metres of the actual plan area covered with the soling stone. The rate shall cover carrying out works as specified above and include the cost of all materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in the works.

6.0 DRY LEAN CONCRETE

6.1 MATERIALS

6.1.1 CEMENT

Any of the following types of cement may be used with prior approval of the engineer:




ISSUE R1


Ordinary Portland cement 43 grade IS: 8112

Portland Slag Cement IS: 455

Portland Pozzolana Cement IS: 1489 – Part 1

If the sub grade is found to consist of soluble sulphates in a concentration more than 0.5 per cent, cement used shall be sulphate resistant and shall confirm to IS: 6909.

Flyash conforming to IS 3812 (Part 1) may be used to replace OPC by up to 20% of total cementitious material (cement + flyash) for OPC 53 Grade cement and up to 30% for OPC 43 Grade cement.

6.1.2 AGGREGATES

Aggregates for lean concrete shall be natural material conforming to IS: 383 but with Los Angeles Abrasion Test result not more than 35%. The aggregates shall not be alkali reactive. The limits of deleterious materials shall not exceed the requirements set out in Table 5. The aggregates shall be free from chert, flint, chalcedony or other silica in a form that can react with alkalis in the cement. In addition, the total chlorides content expressed as chloride ion content shall not exceed 0.06% by weight and the total sulphate content expressed as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) shall not exceed 0.25% by weight. In case the Engineer considers that the aggregates are not free from dirt, the same may be washed and drained for at least 72 hours before batching, as directed by the Engineer.

Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, strong, dense, non-porous and durable pieces of crushed stone or crushed gravel and shall be devoid of pieces of disintegrated stone, soft, flaky, elongated, very angular or splintery pieces. The maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 31.5 mm. No aggregate which has water absorption more than 2% shall be used in the concrete mix. The aggregate shall be tested for soundness in accordance with IS:2386 (Part 5). After 5 cycles of testing the loss shall not be more than 12% if sodium sulphate solution is used or 18% if magnesium sulphate solution is used. Combined flakiness and elongation index of aggregate shall not be more than 35%.

Fine aggregate: The fine aggregate shall consist of clean, natural sand or crushed stone sand or a combination of the two and shall confirm to IS: 383. Fine aggregates shall be free from soft particles, clay, shale, loam, cemented particles, mica, organic and other foreign matter. The fine aggregate shall have a sand equivalent value of not less than 50 when tested in accordance with IS 2720 Part 37.

Table 4

Aggregate Gradation or Dry Lean Concrete

Sieve Designation Percentage passing the sieve by weight

26.50 mm 100

19.00 mm 75 – 95

9.50 mm 50 – 70




ISSUE R1


4.75 mm 30 – 55

2.36 mm 17 - 42

600 micron 8 – 22

300 micron 7 – 17

150 micron 2 – 12

75 micron 0 – 10

Table 5

Aggregate Gradation or Dry Lean Concrete

Sl. No.

Deleterious Substance

Method of Test

Fine Aggregate %ge by weight (max)

Coarse Aggregate %ge by weight (max)

Uncrushed Crushed Uncrushed Crushed

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

i) Coal and lignite IS 2386 Part 2: 1963

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

ii) Clay lumps IS 2386 Part 2: 1963

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

iii) Materials finer

than 15 sieve

IS 2386 Part 1: 1963

3.0 8.0 3.0 3.0

iv) Soft fragments IS 2386 Part 2: 1963

- - 3.0 -

v) Shale IS 2386 Part 2: 1963

1.0 - - -

vi) Total %ge of all deleterious materials (except mica) including Sl. No. (i) to (v) for Col. 4, 6, 7 and Sl No. (i) and (ii) for Col. 5 only

5.0 2.0 5.0 5.0

Crushed aggregate at least one face fractured Note: The presence of mica in the fine aggregate is found to considerably reduce the

durability and compressive strength of concrete considerably. It is advisable therefore to determine the mica content of fine aggregate and make suitable allowances for the possible reduction in the strength of concrete and mortar, in case the stretch of road passes through micacious belt.

6.1.3 WATER

Water used for mixing and curing of concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, salt, acid, vegetable matter or other substances harmful to the finished concrete. It shall meet the requirements stipulated in IS: 456.




ISSUE R1


6.2 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

All materials shall be stored in accordance with the provisions of IS: 4082 and other relevant IS Specifications. All efforts must be made to store the materials in proper places so as to prevent their deterioration or contamination by foreign matter and to ensure their satisfactory quality and fitness for use in the work. The storage place must also permit easy inspection, removal and storage of materials. All such materials even though stored in approved go downs must be subjected to acceptance test immediately prior to their use.

6.3 DESIGN MIX CONCRETE

The mix shall be proportioned with a maximum aggregate cement ratio of 15:1. The water content shall be adjusted to the optimum so as to ensure full compaction under rolling and shall be assessed at the time of rolling the trial length. Optimum moisture content and degree of compaction shall be approved from the Engineer in-charge. The strength and density requirements of concrete shall be determined by making trial mixes.

6.3.1 TRIAL MIXES

Trial mixes with varying moisture content using cement and aggregate in the specified ratio shall be prepared and compacted in moulds in three layers with electric or pneumatic type vibratory hammer with square or rectangular foot. Optimum moisture and density will be established by preparing cubes in accordance with IS: 516 with varying moisture contents.

After establishing the optimum moisture, a set of six cubes shall be cast at that moisture for determination of compressive strength on the 3rd and 7th days. Trial mixes shall be repeated if the strength is not satisfactory either by increasing cement content or using higher grade cement.

6.3.2 TRIAL LENGTH

Prior to start of main job, a trial length as set out in contract document shall be executed 14 days in advance of main job to establish the materials, mix proportions, moisture content, mixing, laying, compaction plant and construction procedure. In-situ density of freshly laid material in trial length shall be determined in a set of three density holes by sand replacement method with 20cm dia density cone. Hardened concrete shall be cut over 3m width and reversed may be cut as per instructions of Engineer to check for segregation or other deficiency.

6.3.3 MOISTURE CONTENT

While laying in the main work, the lean concrete shall have moisture content between the optimum and optimum +2%, keeping in view the effectiveness of compaction achieved to compensate for evaporation losses.

6.3.4 CEMENT CONTENT

The minimum cement content in the lean concrete shall not be less than 150kg/cum of concrete. In case of addition of 20% flyash, OPC content shall not be less than 120 kg/cum. If this minimum cement content is not sufficient to produce concrete of the specified strength, it shall be increased as necessary without additional cost compensation to the contractor.




ISSUE R1


6.3.5 CONCRETE STRENGTH

The average compressive strength of each consecutive group of 5 cubes shall not be less than 10MPa at 7 days. In addition, the minimum compressive strength of any individual cube shall not be less than 7.5MPa at 7 days. The design mix complying with the above Clauses shall be got approved from the Engineer and demonstrated in the trial length construction.

6.4 CONSTRUCTION

The Dry Lean Concrete (DLC) shall be laid on prepared granular drainage layer and overlain by concrete pavement after 7 days.

6.4.1 BATCHING AND MIXING

The batching plant shall be capable of proportioning the materials by weight and be of such design to allow quick shifting.

6.4.2 TRANSPORTING

The mix shall be transported from mixer to job site in tipping trucks covered with tarpaulin. The lead should be such as to allow finishing of concrete laying in any transverse section within 90 minutes from mixing when temperature is between 25Oc to 30OC and 120 minutes when temperature is less than 25OC. Each tipping truck shall be washed with water jet before next loading to prevent old concrete sticking to it. Segregation of mix shall be controlled by moving dumper back and forth while placing concrete.

6.4.3 PLACING

Lean concrete shall be placed on drainage layer by a paver with electronic sensor in one layer for the specified thickness and full width of two lane carriageway. The paving machine shall have tamping bars for initial compaction of the sub-base. The sub-base drainage layer shall be given a fine spray of water and rolled with smooth wheeled roller one day before placing dry lean concrete. The DLC shall be laid 750mm wider than proposed width on each side to enable the crawler to move; the cost of extra width shall be included by contractor in his quoted rates. Work shall not proceed if concrete temperature exceeds 30OC or ambient temperature exceeds 35OC. Chilled water or ice may be added in mixing to bring down the temperature.

6.4.4 COMPACTION

Compaction shall start immediately after laying of material and rolling continued till no further movement under roller is visible. Double drum smooth wheeled vibratory rollers of 80 – 100 kN static weight are suitable for compaction of DLC, the number of passes are determined during trial section construction by measurement of in-situ density. Rolling shall proceed from edges to centre except in super elevated section where rolling shall be from inner to outer edge. The final lean concrete surface shall be well closed, free from movement under roller passes, and free from ridges, low spots, cracks, loose material, pot holes, ruts and other defects. Minimum dry density shall be 98% of that obtained during trial length and 96% at 0.5m from edges. Surface shall be inspected immediately after compaction and checked for regularity with 3m straight edge. For repairing, concrete with 10mm down aggregates shall be spread and compacted. Strength




ISSUE R1


tests shall be carried out and if deficiency is found, at least 3 – 100mm diameter cores per km shall be cut for strength tests. Holes shall be filled with concrete and compacted.

6.4.5 JOINTS

Construction and longitudinal joints in the lean concrete shall be provided as shown in drawings. Transverse butt type joints shall be provided at the end of a day’s work. Where forms are not used, the edge shall be cut back to a vertical plane of correct thickness. Transverse joints shall be staggered from butt type construction joint in concrete pavement by 800 – 1000mm; longitudinal joints shall be staggered from longitudinal joint in concrete pavement by 300 - 400mm.

6.4.6 CURING

Curing shall commence immediately after compaction by one of the following three methods:

Covering the surface with gunny bags/ hessian kept continuously wet for 7 days by sprinkling water.

Spraying with approved resin based alumnized reflective curing compound conforming to ASTC-C 309-81 and covering with wet hessian cloth for 3 days.

Applying wax-based white pigmented curing compound conforming to BS 7542 with water retention index > 90% in two stages and covering with wet hessian cloth for 3 days and second application 24 to 48 hours prior to placing of concrete pavement.

6.4.7 MEASUREMENT

Dry lean concrete pavement work shall be measured in cubic metre of concrete placed based on net plan area for accepted thickness. The rate payable shall be for all materials, equipment, labour, mixing, transport, placing, compacting, finishing, curing and rectification of defects and incidentals such as trial length.

7.0 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

7.1 GENERAL

Concrete grade shall be as designated on drawings. In concrete grade M25, M30, M35 etc. The number represents the specified characteristic compressive strength of 150 mm cube at 28 days, expressed in N/sq.mm as per IS:456 . Concrete in the works shall be “Design Mix Concrete” OR “Nominal Mix Concrete”. All concrete for road shall be Design Mix Concrete.

7.2 MATERIALS

7.2.1 CEMENT

Any of the following types of cement may be used with prior approval of the engineer



Portland Slag Cement IS: 455




ISSUE R1


Portland Pozzolana Cement IS: 1489 – Part 1 (with flyash content < 20%)

If the sub grade is found to consist of soluble sulphates in a concentration more than 0.5 per cent, cement used shall be sulphate resistant and shall confirm to IS: 12330.

Flyash conforming to IS 3812 (Part 1) up to 20% of total cementitious material (cement + flyash) may be permitted as replacement of OPC 43/ 53 Grade cement.

7.2.2 ADMIXTURES

Admixtures conforming to IS:6925 and IS:9103 shall be permitted to improve workability of the concrete or extension offsetting time, on satisfactory evidence that they wil not have any adverse effect on the properties of concrete with respect to its strength, volume change, durability and have no deleterious effect on steel bars. The particular of the admixtures and the quantity to be used, must be furnished to the Engineer in advance to obtain his approval before use. Satisfactory performance of the admixtures is to be proved both on the laboratory concrete trial mixes and in trial paving works. If air entraining admixture is used, the total quantity of air in air entrained concrete as a percentage of the volume of the mix shall be 5 +/- 1.5 per cent for 31.5 mm nominal size aggregate.

Silica fume complying with IS 15338, IS 456 and IRC 44 may be used as admixture in proportion 3% to 10% of cement content. Steel fibre conforming to IRC: SP 46 or polymeric synthetic fibres may be used with approval of Engineer to reduce cracking.

Effective diameter 10 – 100 micron

Length 6 – 48 mm

Specific gravity More than 1.0

Suggested dosage 0.6-2.0 kg/cum (0.2-0.6% by weight of cement in mix)

Water absorption Less than 0.45%

Melting point of this fibre shall not be less than 160OC

The aspect ratio generally varies from 200 to 2000

These synthetic fibres will have good alkali and UV light resistance

7.2.3 AGGREGATES

Aggregates for lean concrete shall be natural material conforming to IS: 383 but with Los Angeles Abrasion Test result not more than 35%. The aggregates shall not be alkali reactive. The limits of deleterious materials shall not exceed the requirements set out in Table 5. The aggregates shall be free from chert, flint, chalcedony or other silica in a form that can react with alkalis in the cement. In addition, the total chlorides content expressed as chloride ion content shall not exceed 0.06% by weight and the total sulphate content expressed as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) shall not exceed 0.25% by weight. In case the Engineer considers that the aggregates are not free from dirt, the same may be washed and drained for at least 72 hours before batching, as directed by the Engineer.

Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, strong, dense, non-porous and durable pieces of crushed stone or crushed gravel and shall be




ISSUE R1


devoid of pieces of disintegrated stone, soft, flaky, elongated, very angular or splintery pieces. The maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 31.5 mm. No aggregate which has water absorption more than 2% shall be used in the concrete mix. The aggregate shall be tested for soundness in accordance with IS:2386 (Part 5). After 5 cycles of testing the loss shall not be more than 12% if sodium sulphate solution is used or 18% if magnesium sulphate solution is used. Combined flakiness and elongation index of aggregate shall not be more than 35%.

Fine aggregate: The fine aggregate shall consist of clean, natural sand or crushed stone sand or a combination of the two and shall confirm to IS: 383. Fine aggregates shall be free from soft particles, clay, shale, loam, cemented particles, mica, organic and other foreign matter. The fine aggregate shall have a sand equivalent value of not less than 50 when tested in accordance with IS 2720 Part 37.

Table 6

Aggregate Gradation for Pavement Quality Concrete

Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight passing the Sieve

31.5 mm 100

26.5 mm 85 – 95

19.0 mm 68 – 88

9.5 mm 45 – 65

4.75 mm 30 – 55

600 micron 8 – 30

150 micron 5 – 15

75 micron 0 – 5

7.2.4 WATER

Water used for mixing and curing of concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, salt, acid, vegetable matter or other substances harmful to the finished concrete. It shall meet the requirements stipulated in IS: 456.

7.2.5 DOWELS AND TIE BARS

Dowel bars shall in general be mild steel bars conforming to IS: 432 Grade-I and tie bars shall be deformed bars conforming to IS: 1786 Grade Fe500. Steel shall be epoxy coated to inhibit corrosion.

7.2.6 PREMOULDED JOINT FILLER

Joint filler board for expansion joints shall be of 20-25mm (±1.5mm) thickness of a firm compressible material complying with requirements of IS 1838 with compressibility more than 25%. The board shall be 25mm (±3.0mm) less in depth than the thickness of the slab and provided to full width between the side forms. Holes to accommodate dowel bars shall be accurately bored or punched out to give a sliding fit on dowel bars.




ISSUE R1


7.2.7 JOINT SEALING COMPOUND

Joint sealing compound shall be of hot poured elastomeric type conforming to AASHTO M282, IS 1834 or ASTM 3406-95, cold polysulfide type in accordance with BS 5212 (Part 2) or IS 11433 (Part 1), polyurethane sealant as per BS 5212 or silicone sealant as per ASTM 5894-2004 having flexibility, resistance to age hardening and durability as per IRC 57. Preformed joint sealing material shall be vulcanized elastomeric compound using polychloroprene (Neoprene) as base polymer conforming to ASTM D2628.

7.3 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

All materials shall be stored in accordance with the provisions of IS: 4082 and other relevant IS Specifications. All efforts must be made to store the materials in proper places so as to prevent their deterioration or contamination by foreign matter and to ensure their satisfactory quality and fitness for use in the work. The storage place must also permit easy inspection, removal and storage of materials. All such materials even though stored in approved go downs must be subjected to acceptance test immediately prior to their use.

7.4 MIX DESIGN & TESTING:

For Design Mix Concrete, the mix shall be designed according to IS 10262 and SP 23 and IRC 44 to provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in IS: 456. The design mix shall in addition be such that it is cohesive and does not segregate and should result in a dense and durable concrete and also capable of giving the finish as specified. For liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also result in water tight concrete. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care while designing the concrete mix and executing the works to achieve the desired result.

7.4.1 CEMENT CONTENT

The cement content shall not be less than 360 kg/ cum of concrete. If this minimum cement content is not sufficient to produce in the field, concrete of the strength specified in the drawings/ design shall be increased as necessary without additional compensation under the contract. In case 20% flyash or ground granulated blast furnace (GGBS) is added minimum OPC content shall be 310 kg/ cum.

7.4.2 CONCRETE STRENGTH

It shall be CONTRACTOR’s sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs at his own cost. He shall furnish to ENGINEER at least 30 days before concreting operations, a statement of proportions proposed to be used for the various concrete mixes and the strength results obtained. The strength requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on 150 mm cubes as per IS: 516 shall comply with the requirements of IS: 456. The correlation between flexural and compressive strengths of concrete shall be established on the basis of at least thirty tests on samples. Characteristic flexural strength of concrete shall not be less than 4.5 MPa and target mean flexural strength of 4.5+1.6*standard deviation. Quality control in field shall be exercised.




ISSUE R1


In order to ensure that minimum strength at 28 days is achieved in 99% of all test beams, the mix shall be proportioned to give an average strength exceeding characteristic strength by 2.33 times the standard deviation.

Table 7

Concrete Grades

Grade of Concrete

Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 days (N/Sq.mm)

Characteristic compressive strength at 28 days (N/sq.mm)

M25 17.0 25.0

M30 20.0 30.0

M35 23.5 35.0

M40 27.0 40.0

The ratio between 7 and 28 day strengths shall be established for the mix. During construction if the average value of any four consecutive 7 day test results falls below the required 7 day strength, the cement content will be increased by 5% by weight or as approved by Engineer without additional payment.

The workability of the concrete at the point of placing shall be adequate for the concrete to be fully compacted and finished without undue flow. The water content shall be minimum required to provide the agreed workability for full compaction of concrete to required density and the maximum free water cement ratio shall befor blended cement 0.45 for OPC and 0.50. A slump value in the range of 25±15mm is reasonable for pavement construction but may be modified at site with approval of the Engineer.

7.5 BATCHING & MIXING OF CONCRETE

A systems approach may be adopted for construction of the pavement, and the method statement for carrying out the work, detailing all the activities including indication of time cycle, equipment, personal etc., shall be got approved from the engineer before the commencement of the work. The capacity of paving equipment, batching plant as well as all the ancillary equipment shall be adequate for a paving rate of at least 300m in one day.

Proportions of aggregates and cements, as decided by the concrete mix design, shall be by weight. These proportions shall be maintained during subsequent concrete batching by means of weigh batchers capable of controlling the weights within (+/-) one percent for cement and water and (+/-) two percent for aggregates of the desired value. The type and capacity shall be got approved by the Engineer before commencement of the trial length.

The design feature of the batching plant should be such that the shifting operations of the plant will not take very long time when they are to be shifted from place to place with the progress of the work.

Batching and mixing of the concrete shall be done at a central batching and mixing plant with automatic controls, located at a suitable place which takes into account sufficient space for stockpiling of cement, aggregates and stationary water tanks.




ISSUE R1


Amount of water added shall be such as to produce dense concrete of required consistency, specified strength and satisfactory workability and shall be so adjusted to account for moisture content in the aggregates. Water- cement ratio specified for use by ENGINEER shall be maintained. Each time the work stops, the mixer shall be cleaned out, and while recommencing, the first batch shall have 10% additional cement to allow for sticking in the drum.

Equipment for proportioning of materials and paving: Proportioning of materials shall be done in the batching plant by weight, each type of material being weighed separately. The cement from the bulk stock may be weighed separately from the aggregates and water shall be measured by volume.

Arrangement should be made by CONTRACTOR to have the cubes tested in an approved laboratory or in field at his own expense, with prior consent of ENGINEER. Sampling and testing of strength and workability of concrete shall be as per IS: 1199, IS: 516 and IS: 456.

7.6 TRIAL LENGTH

Prior to start of main job, a trial length as set out in contract document shall be executed 30 days in advance of main job to establish the materials, mix proportions, moisture content, mixing, laying, compaction plant and construction procedure. In-situ density of freshly laid material in trial length shall be determined in a set of three density holes by sand replacement method with 20cm dia density cone. Hardened concrete shall be cut over 3m width and reversed may be cut as per instructions of Engineer to check for segregation or other deficiency. The trial length shall be 100m for mechanized construction and 50m for hand guided construction.

7.7 HAULING, PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE

7.7.1 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE

Freshly mixed concrete from the central batching and mixing plant shall be transported to the paver site by means of tipper trucks or transit mixers of sufficient capacity. Covers shall be used for protection of concrete against the weather. The feeding to the paver is to be regulated in such a way that the paving is done in an uninterrupted manner with a uniform speed throughout the day’s work.

Concrete mixed in central mixing plant shall be transported to the site without delay and the concrete which, in the opinion of the Engineer, has been mixed too long before laying will be rejected and shall be removed from the site. The total time taken from the addition of the water to the mix, until the completion of the surface finishing and texturing shall not exceed 120 minutes when concrete temperature is less than 25°C and 90 minutes when the concrete temperature is between 25°C to 30°C. Trucks/ tippers delivering concrete shall not run on plastic sheathing nor shall they run on completed slabs until after 28 days of placing the concrete.

7.7.2 SEPARATION MEMBRANE

A separation membrane shall be used between the concrete slab and the dry lean concrete sub-base. Separation membrane shall be impermeable plastic or HDPE sheeting 125 microns thick laid flat without creases. Before placing the




ISSUE R1


membrane, the sub-base shall be swept clean of all extraneous material using air compressor Overlap of plastic sheet shall be 300mm minimum and any damaged sheeting shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. The separation membrane may be nailed to the lower layer with concrete nails.

7.7.3 PLACING CONCRETE BY PAVING EQUIPMENT

Placing should be from side placer to avoid damage to dry lean concrete by trucks. The concrete shall be placed with an approved fixed form or slip form with independent units designed to (i) Spread, (ii) consolidate, screed and float-finish, (iii) texture and cure the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a minimum of hand finishing will be necessary and so as to provide a dense and homogenous pavement in conformity with the plans and specifications. The slip form shall be equipped with electronic controls to control/ sensor line and grade from either of both sides of the machine. Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of 8300 to 9600 impulses per minute under load at a maximum spacing of 60 cm. The variable vibration setting shall be provided in the machine with energy output of 2.5kW per metre width per 300mm thickness of slab.

The addition of water to the surface of the concrete to facilitate the finishing operations will not be permitted except with the approval of the engineer when it shall be applied as a mist by means of approved equipment.

While placing concrete the CONTRACTOR shall proceed as specified below and also ensure the following:

i. Continuously between construction joints and predetermined abutments.

ii. Forms or reinforcement are not dislodged.

iii. Pipes, ducts, fixings and the like to be cast in; ensure that such items are secured in place. Ensure that concrete cannot enter open ends of pipes and conduits, etc.

iv. Segregation of aggregates is avoided.

v. Ensure desired workability to achieve proper compaction.

vi. Ensure that there is no damage or displacement to sheet membranes.

vii. Record the time and location of placing structural concrete.

Concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty minutes of leaving the mixer. Concrete shall be compacted during placing with approved vibrating equipment without causing segregation until it forms a solid mass free from voids thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into all corners of the formwork. Immersion vibrators shall be inserted vertically at points not more than 450 mm apart and withdrawn slowly till air bubbles cease to come to the surface, leaving no voids. When placing concrete in layers advancing horizontally, care shall be taken to ensure adequate vibration, blending and melding of the concrete between successive layers. Vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with reinforcement, formwork and finished surfaces after start of initial set. Over-vibration shall be avoided.

Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated equipment after getting the complete procedure approved by ENGINEER. The slump shall be




ISSUE R1


held to the minimum necessary for conveying concrete by this method. When concrete is to be pumped, the concrete mix shall be specially designed to suit pumping. Care shall be taken to avoid stoppages in work once pumping has started. While concrete is still plastic, its surface shall be textured by brush or tines. Surface and edges of slab shall be cured by liquid curing membrane.

Before resuming concreting on a surface which has hardened all laitance and loose stone shall be thoroughly removed by wire brushing/hacking and surface washed with high pressure water jet and treated with thin layer of cement slurry for vertical joints and a 15 mm thick layer of cement sand mortar for horizontal layers, the ratio of cement and sand being the same as in the concrete mix.

When concreting is to be resumed on a surface which has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by wire brushing, the surface wetted, free water removed and a coat of cement slurry applied. On this a layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm thickness shall be placed and well rammed against the old work. Thereafter work shall proceed in the normal way.

8.0 REINFORCEMENT

Reinforcing bars supplied bent or in coils shall be straightened cold without damage without any extra cost. No bending shall be done when ambient temperature is below 5°C. Local warming may be permitted if steel is kept below 10°C.

All bars shall be accurately bent gradually and according to the sizes and shapes shown on the drawings/ schedules or as directed by ENGINEER.

Re-bending or straightening incorrectly bent bars shall not be done without approval of ENGINEER.

Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed and maintained firmly in the correct position by the use of blocks, spacers, chairs, binding wire, etc. to prevent displacement during placing and compaction of concrete. The tied in place reinforcement shall be approved by ENGINEER prior to concrete placement. Spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spalling of the concrete cover.

Binding wire shall be 16 gauge soft annealed wires. Ends of the binding wire shall be bent away from the concrete surface and in no case encroach into the concrete cover.

Substitution of reinforcement, laps/splices not shown on drawing shall be subject to ENGINEER’s approval.

9.0 CURING

Immediately after the surface texturing, the surface and sides of the slab shall be cured by the application of approved resin-based aluminized reflective curing compound which hardens into an impervious film or membrane with the help of a mechanical sprayer.

Curing compounds shall contain sufficient flake aluminum in finely divided dispersion to produce a complete coverage of the sprayed surface with a metallic finish. The compound shall become stable and impervious to evaporation of water




ISSUE R1


from the surface of the concrete within 60 minutes of application and shall be of approved type.

The curing compound shall not react chemically with the concrete and the film or membrane shall not crack, peel or disintegrate within three weeks after application. Immediately prior to use, the curing compound shall be thoroughly agitated in its containers. The rate of spread shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions checked during the construction of the trail length and subsequently whenever required by the engineer. The mechanical sprayer shall incorporate an effective mechanical device for continuous agitation and mixing of the compound during spraying.

In addition to the spraying of curing compound, the fresh concrete surface shall be protected for at least 3 hours by covering the finished concrete pavement with tents. After three hours, the pavement shall be covered by moist hessian and the same shall then be kept damp for a minimum period of 14 days after which time hessian may be removed. The hessian shall be kept continuously moist.

Curing and protection shall start immediately after the compaction of the concrete to protect it from:

i. Premature drying out, particularly by solar radiation and wind.

ii. Leaching out by rain and flowing water.

iii. Rapid cooling during the first few days after placing.

iv. High internal thermal gradients.

v. Low temperature or frost.

vi. Vibration and impact which may disrupt the concrete and interfere with its bond to the reinforcement.

All concrete, unless directed otherwise by ENGINEER, shall be cured by use of continuous sprays or ponded water or continuously saturated coverings of sacking, canvas, hessian or other absorbent material for the period of complete hydration with a minimum of 7 days. The quality of curing water shall be the same as that used for mixing.

Where a curing membrane is directed to be used by the ENGINEER, the same shall be of a non-wax base and shall not impair the concrete finish in any manner. The curing compound to be used shall be got approved from the ENGINEER before use and shall be applied with spraying equipment capable of a smooth, even textured coat.

Curing may also be done by covering the surface with an impermeable material such as polyethylene, which shall be well sealed and fastened.

10.0 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND KEYS

The location and type of joints shall be shown in the drawing. Joints shall be constructed depending upon their functional requirement. Transverse and longitudinal joints in pavement and lean concrete sub-base shall be separated in vertical planes by 800 – 1000mm 300 – 400mm respectively. Sawing of joints with diamond studded blades shall be started as soon as concrete has hardened (compressive strength of 2 MPa) approximately 4 -8 hours after laying but not




ISSUE R1


later than 8 – 12 hours and completed before compressive strength reaches 7 MPa.

10.1 TRANSVERSE JOINTS

Contraction and expansion joints constructed at the spacing described in the drawings. Transverse joints shall be straight within the following tolerances along the intended line of joints which is the straight line transverse to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway at the position proposed by the contractor and agreed to by the Engineer, except at road junctions or roundabouts where the position shall be as described in the drawings.

i. Deviations of the filler board in the case of expansion joints from the intended line of the joint shall not be greater than ± 10 mm.

ii. The best fit straight line through the joint grooves as constructed shall be not more than 25 mm from the intended line of the joint.

iii. Deviations of the joint groove from the best fit straight line of the joint shall not be greater than 10 mm.

iv. Transverse joint on each side of the longitudinal joint shall be in line with each other and of the same type and width. Transverse joints shall have a sealing groove which shall be sealed.

10.2 CONTRACTION JOINTS

Contraction joints shall consist of a mechanical saw cut groove, 3 to 5mm wide and 1/4th to 1/3rd depth of the slab ± 5mm or as stipulated in the drawings with dowel bars. The contraction joints shall be cut as soon as the concrete has undergone initial hardening (within 48 hours of pouring concrete) and is hard enough to take the load of joint sawing machine without causing damage to the slab.

10.3 EXPANSION JOINT

Expansion joints shall consist of a joint filler board and dowel bars as detailed in the drawings. The filler board shall be placed vertically with prefabricated joint assemblies along the joint line. The space around the dowel bars, between sub-base and the filler board shall be packed with suitable compressible material to block the flow of cement slurry.

10.4 TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION JOINT

Transverse construction joints shall be placed wherever concreting is completed after a day’s work or is suspended for more than 30 minutes and normally coincide with regular contraction joints. The joints shall be made butt type with steel bulk heads to retain the concrete during surface finishing. When steel bulkheads are not used, additional 1 – 2m length of concrete is cast and later removed after groove cutting At curves, transverse joints shall be radial in the direction of radius.

10.5 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS

The longitudinal joints shall be saw cut as per details of the joints as shown in the drawing and for pavements of width more than 4.5m. The groove may be cut after the final set of the concrete. Joints should be sawn to at least 1/3rd the depth of the slab ± 5 mm or as indicated in the drawing.




ISSUE R1


Tie bars shall be provided at the longitudinal joints as per dimensions and spacing shown in the drawing.

10.6 DOWEL BARS

Dowel bars shall be mild steel rounds in accordance with details/dimensions as indicated in the drawing and free from oil, dirt, loose rust or scale. They shall be straight, free of irregularities and burring restricting slippage in the concrete. The sliding ends shall be sawn or cropped cleanly with no protrusions outside the normal diameter of the bar. The dowel bar shall be supported on cradles/ dowel chairs in pre-fabricated joint assemblies positioned prior to the construction of the slabs or mechanically inserted with vibration into the plastic concrete by a method which ensures correct placement of the bars besides full re-compaction of the concrete around the dowel bars.

Dowel bars shall be positioned at mid-depth of the slab ±20mm and centred equally about intended lines of joint ±25mm aligned parallel to the carriageway. The position should be within these tolerances under 110N force applied in vertical and horizontal direction within following tolerances.

Bars supported on cradles before laying of the slab:

All bars in a joint shall be within ±2mm per 300mm length of bar

2/3rd the number of bars shall be within ±3mm per 500mm length of bar

No bar shall differ in alignment from adjoining bar by more than 3mm per 300mm length of bar in either horizontal or vertical planr

Cradles shall not extend across the line of joint

For bars inserted after laying of slab except when inserted by dowel bar inserter, the above tolerances may be twice those indicated above.

Dowel bars shall be covered with 0.5mm thick plastic sheath for 2/3rd length in contraction/ construction joints and 50% of length + 50mm got expansion joints.

The rigidity of fixing of dowel bars in expansion joints shall be as follows:

The deflection of the top edge of the filler board shall not be greater than 13mm under load of 1.3kN applied perpendicular to face of joint filler board and distributed over a length of 600mm, at mid depth and midway between individual fixings or 300mm from either end of continuous filler board. Residual deflection after removal of load shall not be more than ±3mm.

The fixings for joint assembly shall not fail under 1.3kN load. Fixings shall be deemed to fail when there is displacement of assemblies by more than 3mm when the load reaches 2.6kN.

For expansion joints, a closely fitting PVC or GI cap 100mm long shall be placed over the sheathed end of each dowel bar. Expansion space equal to the thickness of joint filler board (usually 25mm) shall be formed between end of cap and dowel bar by using compressible sponge. The mouth of sheathing and dowel bar shall be taped.




ISSUE R1


10.7 TIE BARS

Tie bars in longitudinal joints shall be deformed steel bars of strength 500/415 MPa complying with IS: 1786 and in accordance with the requirements given below. The bars shall be free from oil, dirt, loose rust and scale.

Tie bars projecting across the longitudinal joint shall be protected from corrosion for 75mm on each side of the joint by a protective coating of bituminous paint with the approval of the engineer. The coating shall be dry when the tie bars are used.

Tie bars in longitudinal joints shall be made up into rigid assemblies with adequate supports and fixings to remain firmly in position during the construction of the slab. Alternatively, tie bars at longitudinal joints may be mechanically or manually inserted into the plastic concrete from above by vibration using a method which ensures correct placement of the bars and re compaction of the concrete around the tie bars. Tie bars shall be positioned at mid depth or upper mid third of slab with minimum cover 30mm below groove and centre of each bar on intended line of joints ±50mm. Spacing on curves of radius <360m shall be not less than 350mm.

Tie bars for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be coated with cement slurry and encased in lean concrete as indicated on the drawings or as directed by ENGINEER.

11.0 PREPARATION AND SEALING OF JOINT GROOVES

11.1 GENERAL

All transverse joints in surface slabs shall be sealed using joint sealing compound. Joints shall not be sealed before 14 days after construction.

11.2 JOINT SEALING COMPOUND

The Joint sealing compound shall be of hot poured elastomeric type or cold polysulphide type having flexibility, resistance to age hardening and durability. If the sealant is of hot poured type it shall conform to AASHTO M282 and cold applied sealant shall be in accordance with BS 5212 part 2.

11.3 PREPARATION OF JOINTS GROOVES FOR SEALING:

Joints grooves usually are not constructed to provide the minimum width specified in the drawings when saw cut joints are adopted. They shall be widened subsequently by sawing before sealing. Depth/width gauges shall be used to control the dimension of the groove.

If rough arrises develop when grooves are made, they shall be ground to provide a chamfer approximately 5 mm wide. If the groove is at an angle up to 10 degree from the perpendicular to the surface, the overhanging edge of the sealing groove shall be sawn of ground perpendicular. If spalling occurs or the angle of the former is greater than 10 degrees, the joint sealing groove shall be sawn wider and perpendicular to the surface to encompass the defects up to a maximum width, including any chamfer, of 20 mm for transverse joints and 10 mm for longitudinal joints. If the spilling cannot be so eliminated then the areas shall be repaired by an approved thin bonded arras repair using cementitious materials.

All grooves shall be cleaned of any dirt or loose material by air blasting with filtered, oil free compressed air. If need arises the Engineer may instruct cleaning




ISSUE R1


by pressurized water jets. Depending upon the requirement of the sealant manufacturer, the sides of the grooves may have to be sand blasted to increase the bondage between sealant and concrete.

The groove shall be cleaned and dried at the time of priming and sealing.

Before sealing the temporary seal provided for blocking the ingress of dirt, soil etc., shall be removed. A highly compressible heat resistant paper backed de bonding strip as per drawing shall be inserted in the groove to serve the purpose of breaking the bond between sealant and the bottom of the groove and to plug the joint groove sop that the sealant may not leak through the cracks. The width of de bonding strip shall be more than the joint groove width so that it is held tightly in the groove. In the case of longitudinal joints, heat resistant tapes may be inserted to block the leakage through bottom of the joint.

11.4 SEALING WITH SEALANTS

When sealants are applied, an appropriate primer shall also be used if recommended by the manufacturer and it shall be applied in accordance with their recommendation. The sealant shall be applied within the minimum and maximum drying times of the primer recommended by the manufacturer. Priming and sealing with applied sealants shall not be carried out when the naturally occurring temperature in the joint groove to be sealed is below 7° C.

If hot applied sealant is used it shall be heated and applied from a thermostatically controlled, indirectly heated preferably with oil jacketed melter and pourer having recirculating pump and extruder. For large road projects, sealant shall be applied with extruder having flexible hose and nozzle. The sealant shall not be heated to a temperature higher than the safe heating temperature and not for a period longer than the safe heating period, as specified by the manufacturer. The dispenser shall be cleaned out at the end of each day in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and reheated material shall not be used.

Cold applied sealants with chemical formulation like polysulphide may be used. These shall be mixed and applied within the time limited specified by the manufacturer. If primers are recommended they shall be applied neatly with an appropriate brush. The Movement Accommodation Factor (MAF) shall be more than 10 per cent.

The sealants applied at contraction phase of the slabs would result in bulging of the sealant over and above the slab. Therefore, the contractor in consultation with the Engineer, shall establish the right temperature and time for applying the sealant. Thermometer shall be hung on a pole in the site for facilitating control during the sealing operation.

Sealant shall be applied, slightly to a lower level than the slab with a tolerance of 3 ± 1 mm.

During sealing operation, it shall be seen that no air bubbles are introduced in the sealant either by vapours or by the sealing process.

11.5 TESTING OF APPLIED SEALANTS

Manufacturer’s certificate shall be produced by the contractor for establishing that the sealant is not more than six months old and stating that the sealant complies with the relevant standards. The samples shall meet the requirement of AASHTO M282 for hot applied sealant or BS 5212 (Part II) for cold applied sealant.




ISSUE R1


12.0 SURFACE TEXTURE

After the final regulation of the slab and before the application of the curing membrane, the surface of concrete slab shall be tined or brush textured in a direction at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway. Texturing shall be done at such time that grooves will not close or get roughened. Textured surface should appear uniform and swerving of grooves is not permitted.

12.1 TINING

A beam mounted with steel tines and operated with automatic sensing and control devices from main paver shall be used for texturing. The tining unit shall have facility for adjustment of pressure on the tines and the rakes shall be cleaned often to remove snots of slurry. Grooves formed by tines shall be 3mm wide and 3-4mm deep.

12.1.1 TRANSVERSE TINING

For transverse tining 3m length of beam mounted with tines is moved in transverse direction. Grooves shall be at random spacing pattern of 10/ 14/ 16/ 11/ 10/ 13/ 15/ 16/ 11/ 10/ 21/ 13/ 10 mm but uniform in depth and width.

12.1.2 LONGITUDINAL TINING

For longitudinal tining the texturing bridge should cover the entire width of carriageway but within 75mm from pavement edge. The centre to centre spacing of tines shall be 21mm.

12.2 BRUSH TEXTURING

The brushed surface texture shall be applied evenly across the slab in one direction by the use of a wire brush not less than 450 mm wide. The brush shall be made of 32 gauge tape wires grouped together in tufts spaced at a 10 mm centres. The tufts shall contain an average of 14 wires and initially be 100 mm long. The brush shall have two rows of tufts. The row shall be 20 mm apart and the tufts in one row shall be opposite the centre of the gap between tufts in the other row. The brush shall be replaced when the shortest tuft wears down to 90 mm long. After application of the brushed texture the surface shall have a uniform appearance.

Five individual measurements of the texture depth shall be taken at least 2m apart anywhere along a diagonal line across a lane width between points 50m apart along the pavement. No measurement shall be taken within 300 mm of the longitudinal edges of a concrete slab constructed in one pass. Texture depths shall not be less than the minimum as given below nor greater than a maximum average of 1.25mm.

Table 8

Texture Depth

Time of Test Number of Measurements

Required Texture Depth (mm)

Specified val. Tolerance

Between 24 hrs and 7 days after the construction of slab or before first use by vehicles

Average of 5 measurements

1.00 ± 0.25




ISSUE R1


Not later than 6 weeks before road is opened to traffic

Average of 5 measurements

1.00 + 0.25/ - 0.35


12.3 GENERAL

All materials incorporated and all works performed shall be strictly in conformity with the specification requirements. The Contractor shall carry out quality control tests on the materials and work to the frequency specified.

If the Engineer feels that the materials i.e. cement, sand, coarse aggregates, reinforcement and water are not in accordance with the specifications or if specified concrete strengths are not obtained, he may order tests to be carried out on these materials in laboratory, to be approved by the Engineer, as per relevant IS Codes. Owner shall pay only for the testing of material supplied by the Owner otherwise Contractor shall have to pay for the tests. Transporting of all material to the laboratory shall however be done by the Contractor at no extra cost to Owner.

In the event of any work being suspected of faulty material or workmanship requiring its removal or if the works cubes do not give the stipulated strengths, Engineer reserves the right to order the Contractor to take out cores and conduct tests on them or do ultrasonic testing or load testing of structure, etc. All these tests shall be carried out by Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner. Alternately Engineer also reserves the right to ask the Contractor to dismantle and re-do such unacceptable work at the cost of Contractor.

If the structure is certified by Engineer as having failed, the cost of the test and subsequent dismantling/reconstruction shall be borne by Contractor.

The quoted unit rates/prices of concrete shall deemed to provide for all tests mentioned above.

12.4 PERMITTED TOLERANCES

12.4.1 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENTS

Horizontal alignments shall be reckoned with respect to the centre line of the carraigeway as shown on the drawings. The edges of the carraigeway as constructed shall be correct within a tolerance of ±10 mm therefrom. The corresponding tolerance for edges of the roadway and lower layers of pavement shall be ± 25 mm.

12.4.2 SURFACE LEVELS

The levels of the subgrade and different pavement courses as constructed, shall not vary from those calculated with reference to the longitudinal and cross-profile of the road shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer beyond the tolerances mentioned below:

Subgrade + 20 mm/ (-) 20 mm

Dry Lean Concrete Sub-base + 6 mm/ (-) 6 mm

Cement concrete pavement + 5 mm/ (-) 5 mm (*)

(*) This may not exceed (-) 8mm at 0 – 30cm from edges.




ISSUE R1


Provided, however, that the negative tolerance for wearing course shall not be permitted in conjunction with the positive tolerance for base course if the thickness of the former is thereby reduced by more than 5 mm for concrete pavement.

For subgrade and sub-base, the measurements of the surface levels shall be taken on a grid of points placed at 6.25m longitudinally and 3.5m transversely. For any 10 consecutive measurements taken longitudinally or transversely, not more than one measurement shall be permitted to exceed the tolerance above; this one measurement being not in excess of 5mm beyond the permitted tolerance.

For concrete pavements, the measurements of the surface levels shall be taken on a grid of points placed at 6.25m along the length and at 0.5m from the edges and centre of the pavement. For the final road surface the above compliance shall be satisfied for all points on any length of pavement.

12.4.3 SURFACE REGULARITY

The surface regularity of completed subgrade, sub-base course, base course and wearing course in the longitudinal and transverse directions shall be within the tolerances indicated in Table 7.

The longitudinal profile shall be checked with a 3 metre long straight edge, at the middle of each traffic lane along a line parallel to the centre line of the road. The transverse profile shall be checked with a set of three camber boards at intervals of 10 metres.

Table 9

Maximum Permitted number of Surface Irregularities

Surfaces of carriageways and paved shoulders

Surfaces of lay-bys, service areas and all bituminous base courses

Irregularity 4 mm 7 mm 4 mm 7 mm

Length (m) 300 75 300 75 300 75 300 75

National Highways/ Expressways (*)

15 9 2 1 40 18 4 2

Roads of lower category (*)

40 18 4 2 60 27 6 3

(*) Category of road shall described in the project contract

The maximum allowable difference between the road surface and underside of a 3m straight edge when placed parallel with or at right angles to centre line of the road at points decided by the Engineer shall be:

For concrete pavement surface 3mm

For dry lean concrete sub-base course 10mm

12.4.4 RECTIFICATION

Where the surface irregularity of subgrade and the various courses fall outside the specified tolerances, the Contractor shall be liable to rectify these in the manner described below and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

i. Subgrade

Where the surface is high, it shall be trimmed and suitably compacted. Where the same is low, the deficiency shall be corrected by adding fresh




ISSUE R1


material. The degree of compaction and the type of material to be used shall conform to the sections 4.0 and 5.0.

ii. Dry Lean Concrete sub-base

The defective length of the course shall be removed to full depth and replaced with material as per original specification. The area treated shall be at least 3m long, not less than 1 lane wide and extend to full depth. Before laying the course, the disturbed subgrade shall be corrected by levelling, watering and compacting.

iii. Cement concrete pavement

The defective areas having surface irregularity exceeding 3mm but not greater that 6mm may be rectified by scrabbling or grinding using approved equipment. Where required by the Engineer, areas which have been reduced in level by the above operation(s) shall be re-textured in an approved manner either by cutting 5mm deep grooves or roughening the surface by hacking. Where the irregularity exceeds these limits, the slab shall be demolished and reconstructed at the Contractor’s experience. The area to be removed shall be at least full width of the affected lane and full length of the slab.

12.5 TESTS

12.5.1 GENERAL

For ensuring the requisite quality of construction, the materials and works shall be subjected to quality control tests, as described hereinafter. The testing frequencies set forth are the desirable minimum and the Engineer shall have the full authority to increase the frequencies of tests as he may deem necessary to satisfy himself that the materials and works comply with the appropriate specifications.

Various quality control tests shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures indicated in the respective sections of MORTH Specifications. Where no specific testing procedure is mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent accepted engineering practice to the directions of the Engineer.

12.5.2 TESTS ON EARTHWORK FOR EMBANKMENT AND SUBGRADE CONSTRUCTION

a) Borrow material

(i) Sand Content {IS 2720 (Part 4)}: 2 tests per 3000 cu.metres of soil

(ii) Plasticity Test {IS 2720 (Part 5)}: Each type to be tested, 2 tests per 3000 cu. metres of soil.

(iii) Density Test {IS 2720 (Part 8)}: Each soil type to be tested, 2 tests per 3000 cubic metres of soil.

(iv) Deleterious Content Test {IS 2720 (Part 27)}: As and when required by the Engineer.

(v) Moisture Content Test {IS 2720(Part 2)}: Two test for every 250 cubic metres of soil.

(vi) CBR Test on materials to be incorporated in the subgrade on soaked/unsoaked samples {IS 2720 (Part 16)}: One test (avearge of three values) for every 3000 m3 at least or closer as and when required by the Engineer.




ISSUE R1


b) Compaction control

Control shall be exercised by taking at least one set of ten measurement of density for each 3000 square metres of compacted area, or closer as required to yield the minimum number of test results for evaluation of a day’s work on statistical basis. The determination of density shall be in accordance with IS 2720 (Part 28). Tests locations shall be chosen only through random sampling techniques. Control shall not be based on the result of any one test but on the mean value of a set of 5-10 density determinations. The number of tests in one set of measurements shall be doubled for non-destructive tests as long as it is felt that sufficient control over borrow material and the method of compaction is being exercised. If considerable variations are observed between individual density results, the minimum number of tests in one set of measurement shall be increased. The acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that the mean dry density equals or exceeds the specified density plus

[1.65 – 1.65/(No of samples)0.5]*standard deviation.

However, for earthwork in shoulders (earthen) and in the subgrade, at least one set of ten density measurement shall be taken for every 2000 square metres of the compacted area. In other respects, the control shall be similar to that described earlier.

12.5.3 DRY LEAN CONCRETE SUB-BASE

Testing of cubes

Samples for making cubes shall be taken at the rate of 3 samples for each 100 sqm or part laid each day. Test cubes shall be prepared in accordance with IS:516 except that cubes shall be compacted in moulds by electric or pneumatic vibratory hammer having area between 7500 to 14000 N/sq.mm Compression force of 300N to 400N shall be uniformly applied for 60±5 seconds on each of three layers of the material.

In-situ Density

This shall be measured in three density holes spaced equally on a diagonal that bisects each 2000 sqm or part laid each day and at random at the edges. Minimum dry density obtained shall be 97% of that achieved during trial and 95% at 0.5m from edge.

Thickness

Average thickness of sub-base layer shall be computed by level data of the sub-grade and sub-base. Thickness at any location shall not be less than 8mm less than specified thickness.

Frequency of control tests

The frequency of testing is defined in Tables 8 and 9.

12.5.4 PAVEMENT CONCRETE

Testing of beams and cubes

At least two beams and two cubes, one each for 7 day and 28 day strength testing shall be cast for every 150 cum (or part) of concrete pavement. On each day’s work, not less than three pairs of beams and cubes shall be made for each type of




ISSUE R1


mix. Where quality requirements are not satisfied by the sample testing, actual strength shall be ascertained by tests on 150mm diameter cores cut at the rate of 2 cores every 150 cum of concrete. The average results of crushing strength on the 2-3 cores shall not be 0.8x0.85 times the characteristic compressive strength for core height to diameter ratio of two. Correction factor for core height to diameter ratio n = 1 to 2 is given by

f = 0.11*n + 0.78

An individual strength below specified strength may be disregarded if the average 28 day strength of the failed beam plus the preceding 5 and succeeding 4 beams exceeds the specified strength by 1.65 time standard deviation.

The equivalent flexural strength shall be estimated from in-situ strength multiplied by 100 and divided by age-strength relation from Table 10.

Table 10

Age Strength relation of Concrete (related to 100% at 28 days)

Days 0 2 4 6 8

0 - 41.0 60.0 71.0 77.5

10 81.5 85.0 87.5 90.0 92.0

20 94.0 96.0 97.5 98.5 100.0

30 101.0 102.0 103.5 104.5 105.5

40 106.5 107.0 108.0 109.5 110.0

50 110.5 111.0 112.0 112.5 113.0

60 114.0 114.5 115.0 115.5 116.0

70 116.5 117.0 117.5 118.0 118.5

80 119.0 119.5 119.5 120.0 120.5

90 121.0 121.5 122.0 122.0 122.5

100 123.5 123.5 123.5 124.0 124.5

110 125.0 125.0 125.5 125.5 126.0

120 126.0 126.0 127.0 127.0 127.5

130 127.5 128.0 128.5 128.5 129.0

140 129.0 129.5 129.5 130.0 130.0

150 130.5 130.5 131.0 131.0 131.5

160 131.5 131.5 132.0 132.0 132.5

170 132.5 132.5 133.0 133.0 133.5

180 133.5 134.0 134.0 134.5 134.5

190 135.0 135.0 135.0 135.5 135.5

200 135.5 135.5 136.0 136.0 136.5

210 136.5 136.5 137.0 137.0 137.0

220 137.0 137.5 137.5 137.5 138.0

230 138.0 138.5 138.5 138.5 138.5

240 139.0 139.0 139.0 139.5 139.5

250 139.5 140.0 140.0 140.0 140.0

260 140.5 140.5 140.5 140.5 141.0

270 141.0 141.0 141.5 141.5 141.5

280 142.0 142.0 142.0 142.0 142.0

290 142.5 142.5 142.5 142.2 142.5




ISSUE R1


300 143.0 143.0 143.0 143.0 143.5

310 143.5 143.5 144.0 144.0 144.0

320 144.0 144.5 144.5 144.5 144.5

330 144.5 145.0 145.0 145.0 145.0

340 145.0 145.5 145.5 145.5 145.5

350 146.0 146.0 146.0 146.0 146.0

360 146.0 146.0 146.5 146.5 146.5

In-situ Density

This shall be measured in set of 3 cores of 150mm diameter taken from trial lengths and in first 2 km length of pavement. The density of the compacted concrete shall be such that total air voids derived from the difference between theoretical maximum dry density and measured value does not exceed 3%.

Thickness

Thickness shall be controlled by taking levels after compaction and shall be within tolerance of (-) 5mm/ +10mm from the values shown in drawing.

Frequency of control tests

The frequency of testing is defined in Tables 11 and 12.

Table 11

Control Tests and Their Frequencies Paving Quality Concrete

Levels, Alignment and texture

Test Frequency

i. Level tolerance Refer section 13.2.2

ii. Width of pavement and position of edges

Refer section 13.2.1

iii. Pavement thickness Refer section 13.2.2 and 13.3.4

iv. Alignment of joints, widths, depths of dowel grooves

To be checked at one joint per 400m length or a day’s work

v. Surface regularity – transverse and longitudinal

Once a day or one day’s work

vi. Alignment of dowel/ tie bars In trial length as per section 6.3.2 and once every 2 km

vii. Texture depth Refer section 12.0

Table 12

Control Tests and Their Frequencies Paving Quality Concrete

Quality of Material and Concrete

Sl. No.

Types of Construction

Test Frequency




ISSUE R1


Sl. No.


Test Frequency

1. Cement i. Physical and chemical tests as per IS: 269, IS:455, IS: 1489, IS:8112, IS: 12269

One for each source of supply and when called for in case of improper/ long storage

2. Coarse and fine aggregates

i. Gradation as per IS: 2386 (Part 1)

One test for each day’s work of each fraction of coarse and fine aggregates; may be relaxed later at discretion of Engineer

ii. Deleterious constiuents as per IS: 2386 (Part 2)

One test for each day’s work of each fraction of coarse and fine aggregates; may be relaxed later at discretion of Engineer

iii. Water absorption as per IS: 2386 (Part 3)

Regularly for minimum one test per day for coarse aggregates and two tests per day for fine aggregate

3. Coarse aggregates

i. Los Angeles Abrasion Value/ Aggregate Impact Test as per IS: 2386 (Part 4)

Once for each source of supply and subsequently on monthly basis

ii. Soundness as per IS: 2386 (Part 5)

Before approving the aggregate and every month subsequently

iii. Alkali aggregate reactivity as per IS: 2386 (Part 7)

Before approving the aggregate and every month subsequently

4. Water i. Chemical test as per IS: 456

Once for approval of source of supply and subsequently only in case of doubt

5. Concrete i. Strength of concrete as per IS: 516

2 cubes and 2 beams per 150 cum or part for 7 day and 28 days or min. 6 beams and 6 cubes per day’s work

ii. Core strength on hardened concrete as per IS: 516

As per requirement of Engineer




ISSUE R1


Sl. No.


Test Frequency

iii. Slump test and Workability as per IS: 1199

1 test per dumper at batching plant and site initially, subsequently on alternate dumpers

iv. Thickness From level data of pavement and sub-base at grid points 5/6.25m x 3.5m

v. Thickness measurement for trial length

3 cores per trial length

vi. Level of string line in slip form paving and steel forms for fixed form paving

Interval of 5.0/6.25m; allowable level tolerance ± 2mm.

Upon the completion of concrete work, all forms, equipment, construction tools, protective coverings and any debris, scraps of wood, etc. resulting from the work shall be removed and the premises left clean.

12.6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:

Any concrete work shall satisfy the requirements given below individually and collectively for it to be acceptable.

i. Properties of constituent materials;

ii. Characteristic compressive strength;

iii. Specified mix proportions;

iv. Minimum cement content;

v. Maximum free-water/cement ratio;

vi. Workability;

vii. Temperature of fresh concrete;

viii. Density of fully compacted concrete;

ix. Cover to embedded steel;

x. Curing;

xi. Tolerances in dimensions;

xii. Tolerances in levels;

xiii. Durability;

xiv. Surface finishes;

xv. Special requirements such as :

xvi. Water tightness

xvii. Resistance to aggressive chemicals




ISSUE R1


xviii. Resistance to freezing and thawing

xix. Very high strength

xx. Improved fire resistance

xxi. Wear resistance

xxii. Resistance to early thermal cracking

The Engineer’s decision as to the acceptability or otherwise of any concrete work shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

For work not accepted, the Engineer may review and decide whether remedial measures are feasible and so as to render the work acceptable. The Engineer shall in that case direct the Contractor to undertake and execute the remedial measures. These shall be expeditiously and effectively implemented by the Contractor. Nothing extra shall become payable to the Contractor by the Owner for executing remedial measures.

The concrete shall be deemed to comply with the strength requirements when both the following conditions are made.

The mean strength determined from group of four consecutive test results with the appropriate limit as per code.

An individual test result complies with the appropriate limit as per code.

14.0 MODE OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Cement concrete pavement shall be measured as a finished work in square mt with specified thickness. The volume to be paid for will be calculated on the basis of thickness and plans shown on the project drawings and adjusted for the deficiency in thickness. No additional payment shall be made for extra thickness of the slab. The full payment will be made on this item after 28 days strength of the concrete is found to be satisfactory.

The unit of measurement for concrete pavement shall be the cubic mt of concrete placed, based on the net plan area for the specified thickness shown on the drawings or directed by Engineer. The rate shall include the provision of this specifications and shall include the provision of all material including polythene film, concrete, stock piling, mixing , transport, placing, compacting, finishing, curing together with all formwork and including testing and submission of test certificates and records . No deduction shall be made in measurement for openings provided that the area is less than 0.5 sq mt. The unit rate as entered in the Bill of Quantities shall also include the full cost of contraction, expansion, construction and longitudinal joints. It shall also include joint filler, keys, de-bonding strips, sealant primer, joint sealant, dowel bar and tie rod.

END


SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT ROADS SHEET 1 OF 45


ISSUE R4

TCE FORM NO. 329 R6 FILE NAME: TCE.M4-422-01-R4

1.0 SCOPE

This specification covers the general requirements for the materials and construction of soling, water bound macadam course and bituminous surface treatment of plant roads.


The following specifications, standards and codes are made a part of this specification. All standards, tentative specifications, specifications, codes of practices referred to herein shall be the latest edition including all applicable official amendments and revisions. In case where the requirements of this specification conflict with the requirements of those referred to herein, this specification shall govern.

IS 73: 2013 : Specification for Paving Bitumen

IS 215: 1995 : Specification for Road Tar

IS 217: 1988 (Reaffirmed 2014)

: Specification for Cutback Bitumen

IS 454: 1994 : Specification for Digboi type Cutback Bitumen

IS 460: 1985 (Parts 1, 2 Reaffirmed 2013 Part 3 Reaffirmed 2016)

: Specification for Test Sieves

IS 1077: 1992 (Reaffirmed 2016)

: Specification for common burnt clay building bricks

IS 1124: 1974 (Reaffirmed 2017)

: Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones.

IS 1195: 2002 (Reaffirmed 2017)

: Specification for Bitumen Mastic Flooring.

IS 1834: 1984 (Reaffirmed 2015)

: Specification for Hot Applied Sealing Compounds for Joints in Concrete.

IS 2386: 1963 - Parts 1 to 8 (Reaffirmed 2016)

: Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete.

IS 2720 Part 5: 1985 (Reaffirmed 2015)

: Methods of Test for Soils : Part 5

Determination of Liquid and Plastic Limit

IS 6241: 1971 (Reaffirmed 2017)

: Method of test for determination of stripping value of road aggregates

IRC: 16 - 2008 : Specification for priming of base course with bituminous primers

IRC: 19 – 2005 : Standard specification and code of practice for water bound macadam




ISSUE R4


Ministry of Shipping, Road Transport & Highways

: Specifications for Road and Bridge works, 2013 (Fifth Revision)

IRC: 37 – 2012 : Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements

IRC: 86 – 1983 : Geometric Design Standard for Urban Roads in Plants

IRC: 109 - 2015 : Guidelines for Wet Mix Macadam

IRC: 110 – 2005 : Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for construction of Surface Dressing

IRC: 111 – 2009 : Specifications for Dense Graded Bituminous Mixes

IRC: 126 - 2017 : Guidelines on Wet Mix Plant

All earthworks shall be according to component specifications "Earthwork in grading, excavation & backfilling" – TCE.M4-418-01.

3.0 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

It is the intent of this specification that the water bound macadam road be constructed first. This shall then be opened to traffic, as directed by Owner/ Engineer. After such period of time as decided by Owner/Engineer, preferably when the major construction and/or erection activities within plant limits are over, Contractor shall rectify all defects, wear and tear, etc. and surface the road with bituminous wearing course treatment as specified hereunder.

4.0 MATERIALS

4.1 GENERAL

All materials shall be obtained from local sources and shall be subject to Engineer's approval prior to use.

4.2 SOLING STONE

It shall be clean, sound, dense, hard tough, durable stone of uniform quality free from unsound material, cracks, decay and weathering. Water absorption shall not be more than 5 percent. The stone shall be in the smallest dimension equal to thickness of the soling course specified with a tolerance of 25 mm. Soling stone shall be sufficiently flat bedded. The height of the soling stone shall be equal to the specified thickness of soling. The length and breadth shall not exceed twice the specified thickness.

4.3 STONE AGGREGATE/METAL

Coarse aggregate and screenings shall consist of natural or crushed stone, clean, hard, tough, durable and free from excess of flat, elongated, soft and disintegrated particles, dirt, salt, alkali, vegetable matter, adherent coatings, organic and other objectionable matter, and shall conform to the physical requirements given in Tables 1 or 2 hereunder, as applicable. Aggregate for bituminous wearing courses shall in addition have good hydrophobic properties i.e. capacity of retaining the film of bituminous material applied to the stone in all weather conditions and especially in wet conditions. Basalt and dolerite are good in this respect; granite and quartzite are comparatively poor.




ISSUE R4


4.4 CRUSHED SLAG

Crushed slag shall be made from air cooled blast furnace slag. It shall be of angular shape, reasonably uniform in quality and density and generally free from thin, elongated and soft pieces, dirt or other deleterious materials. The weight of crushed slag shall not be less than 11.2kN/m3 and the percentage of glossy material shall not be more than 20. It should also comply with requirements in Table 3.

4.5 GRANULAR SUB BASE

The material to be used for the work shall be natural sand, moorum (cohesionless material which is a product of decomposed and weathered pavement rock, similar to gravel with higher fines content), gravel, crushed stone, or combination depending on the grading required. Materials like crushed slag, crushed concrete, brick metal and kankar may be allowed only with the specific approval of the engineer. The material shall be free from organic or other deleterious constituents and conform to one of the grading given in Table 1 (for close-graded granular sub-base materials) or Table 2 (for coarse-graded granular sub-base materials).

4.6 SCREENINGS FOR WATER BOUND MACADAM

Screenings to fill voids in the coarse aggregate shall consist of the same materials as the coarse aggregate. However, where permitted, predominantly non-plastic material such as moorum or gravel (other than river borne rounded material) may be used for this purpose provided liquid limit and plasticity index of such material is below 20 and 6 respectively and fraction passing 75 micron sieve does not exceed 10 percent.

Screenings shall conform to the grading set forth in Table 10. Screenings of Type A in Table 10 shall be used with coarse aggregate of grading 1 in Table 9. Screenings of Type A or B, as directed, shall be used with coarse aggregates of grading 2. Type B screenings shall be used with coarse aggregates of grading 3.

4.7 BINDING MATERIAL

Binding material shall comprise of a suitable material approved by Engineer, having plasticity index value of less than 6 as determined in accordance with IS:2720 (Part-5).

Application of binding material may not be necessary, when the screenings used are of crushable type such as Moorum or gravel.

4.8 MOORUM/KANKAR/GRAVEL/SAND

Moorum shall contain low plasticity binder material mixed with hard granular particles such as sand and or gravel. Moorum shall be sound and hard of a quality not affected by weather, to be screened at the quarry and free from all impurities. Large lumps shall all be broken at the quarry and Moorum delivered at site must pass in every direction through a 63 mm ring. Moorum shall not contain more than 5% to 8% of fines passing a 75 micron sieve.

Gravel shall be composed of large, coarse, siliceous grains, sharp and gritty to the touch, thoroughly free from dirt, organic and deleterious matter. It shall be hard, tough and dense, shall not contain particles bigger than 12 mm and shall not have more than 10 percent silt.




ISSUE R4


Sand used for blinding the bituminous road surface, shall be coarse, sharp, gritty, clean, granular material. Only material passing through 4.75 mm sieve and retained on 75 micron sieve shall be used.

4.9 AGGREGATES FOR WET MIX MACADAM

Coarse aggregates shall be crushed stone. If crushed gravel/ shingle is used, not less than 90% by weight of the gravel shingle pieces retained on 4.75mm sieve shall have at least two fractured faces. Aggregates shall conform to physical requirements in Table 1 and grading requirements given in Table 11.

4.10 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

Bituminous materials shall conform to IS 73, IS 215, IS 217 or IS 454 as applicable and be of the grade specified in this specification.

Table 1

Physical Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Water Bound Macadam & Wet Mix Macadam (Sub Base / Base Course)


1. Los Angles Abrasion Value*

OR

40% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-4)

Aggregate Impact Value* 30% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-4)

OR

IS 5640 ***

2. Combined Flakiness and Elongation Indices**

35% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-1)

(*) Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of two tests.

(**) Requirements of flakiness index shall be enforced only in case of crushed/ broken stone.

(***) Aggregates like brick metal, kankar, laterite etc. which get softened in presence of water shall be tested for Impact Value under wet conditions in accordance with IS:5640.

Table 2

Physical Requirements of Aggregate for Granular Sub-Base

Property Test Requirements Test Method

Aggregate Impact Value (AIV)

40 maximum IS 2386 (Part 4) of IS 5640

Liquid Limit Maximum 25 IS 2720 (Part 5)

Plasticity Index

Maximum 6 IS 2720 (Part 5)

CBR at 98% dry density

Minimum 30 IS 2720 (Part 31)

(*) Sample tested in soaked condition.

(**) Test to be carried out only if water absorption exceeds 2%.




ISSUE R4


Table 3

Requirement of slag (Sub Base / Base Course)


1. Chemical stability Comply BS 1047 BS 1047

2. Sulphur content 2% (max.)

3. Water absorption 10% (max.)

Table 4

Physical Requirements Of Aggregates for Bituminous Macadam


Cleanliness Grain size analysis 5% passing 0.075mm sieve (max.)

IS 2386 (Part-1)

Particle shape Flakiness and Elongation Index

35% (max.) (combined)

IS 2386 (Part-1)

Strength (*) Los Angles Abrasion Value OR

40% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-4)

Aggregate Impact Value

30% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-4)

Durability Soundness (Sodium or Magnesium, 5 cycles)

Sodium sulphate 12% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-5)

Magnesium sulphate 18% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-5)

Water absorption

Water absorption 2% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-3)

Stripping Coating and stripping of Bitumen Aggregate mixtures

Minimum retained coating 95%

IS 6241

Water sensitivity (**)

Retained Tensile Strength

80% (min.) AASHTO T283


(**) This test is to be carried out only if the minimum retained coating in stripping test is less than 95%. Use anti stripping agent if retained tensile strength falls below 80%.




ISSUE R4


Table 5

Physical Requirements Of Aggregates for

Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam


Cleanliness (dust)

Grain size analysis 5% passing 0.075mm sieve (max.)

IS 2386 (Part-1)



IS 2386 (Part-1)


35% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-4)


27% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-4)

Durability Soundness



Water absorption




IS 6241









ISSUE R4


Table 6

Physical Requirements Of Aggregates for Bituminous Concrete


Cleanliness (dust)

Grain size analysis 5% passing 0.075mm sieve (max.)

IS 2386 (Part-1)



IS 2386 (Part-1)


30% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-4)


24% (max.) IS 2386 (Part-4)

Polishing Polished stone value 55 (min.) BS 812 (Part 114)

Durability Soundness



Water absorption




IS 6241









ISSUE R4


Table 7

Grading for Close Graded Granular Sub-base materials

IS sieve designation Percent by weight passing IS sieve

Grading I Grading II Grading V Grading VI

75.0 mm 100 - 100 -

53.0 mm 80-100 100 80-100 100

26.5 mm 55-90 70-100 55-90 75-100

9.50 mm 35-65 50-80 35-65 55-75

4.75 mm 25-55 40-65 25-50 30-55

2.36 mm 20-40 30-50 10-20 10-25

0.85 mm - - 2-10 -

0.425mm 10-15 10-15 0-5 0-8

0.075mm <5 <5 - 0-3

CBR value (min.) 30 30 30 30

Table 8

Grading for Coarse Graded Granular Sub-base materials

IS sieve designation Percent by weight passing IS sieve

Grading III Grading IV

75.0 mm - -

53.0 mm 100 100

26.5 mm 55-75 50-80

9.50 mm - -

4.75 mm 10-30 15-35

2.36 mm - -

0.85 mm - -

0.425mm - -

0.075mm <5 <5

CBR value (min.) 30 30




ISSUE R4


Table 9

Grading Requirements of Coarse Aggregates for Water Bound Macadam

Grading No. Size Range IS Sieve Designation

Percent by Weight Passing

the Sieve

1. 63 mm to 45 mm 75 mm 100

63 mm 90-100

53 mm 25-75

45 mm 0-15

22.4 mm 0-5

2. 53 mm to 22.4 mm 63 mm 100

53 mm 95-100

45 mm 65-90

22.4 mm 0-10

11.2 mm 0-5

Compacted thcikness for a layer shall be 75mm.

Table 10

Gradings for Screenings

Grading Classification

Size of Screenings

IS Sieve Designation

Percent by Weight Passing the Sieve

A 13.2 mm 13.2 mm 100

11.2 mm 95-100

5.6 mm 15-35

180 micron 0-10

B 11.2 mm 11.2 mm 100

9.5 mm 80-100

5.6 mm 50-70

180 micron 5-25

The use of screening shall be omitted in the case of soft aggregates such as brick metal, kankar, laterites etc. as they are likely to get crushed to a certain extent under rollers.

Table 11

Grading Requirements of Coarse Aggregates for Wet Mix Macadam

IS Sieve Designation Percent by Weight Passing the Sieve

53 mm 100

45 mm 95 – 100




ISSUE R4


IS Sieve Designation Percent by Weight Passing the Sieve

26.50 mm -

22.4 mm 60 – 80

11.2 mm 40 – 60

4.75 mm 25 – 40

2.36 mm 15 – 30

600 micron 8 – 22

75 micron 0 – 5

Materials finer than 425 micron shall have Plasticity Index (PI) not exceeding 6.

5.0 EARTHWORK

5.1 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION

In general the excavation shall be in accordance with TCE specification No.TCE.M4-418-01.

Profiles of road excavation shall be laid at 50 m intervals to conform to the required alignment, sections, grades and side slopes and the lines of cuts shall be clearly marked.

CONTRACTOR shall not excavate beyond the slopes or below the specified grade unless so directed by the ENGINEER in writing. If excavation is done below the specified level or outside the section it shall not be paid for and the CONTRACTOR shall be required to fill up at his own cost such extra excavation with approved materials, in layers of 150 to 200 mm, watered and compacted as specified for the subgrade.

The excavation shall be finished neatly, smoothly and evenly to the correct lines, grades, sections and side slopes as shown in the drawings or directed by ENGINEER.

5.2 EARTHWORK IN EMBANKMENT

The embankment shall be formed of earth obtained from approved source/ borrow areas.

The ground over which embankment is to be formed shall be cleared of all brushwood, loose stones, vegetation, bushes, stumps, and all other objectionable matter and materials. Such removed material shall be burnt off or disposed off as directed by ENGINEER. The cost of this clearing, burning and disposal shall be included in the unit rates quoted for embankment construction.

Profiles of embankment shall be set up with stout poles to mark the centre and edges of the formation with the top levels of formation clearly marked by paint or cut and the slopes with strings and pegs at every 10 metres on straight portions. Toe line may be marked with pick marks.

Before placing any embankment material the top 150 mm of soil strata receiving it shall be scarified and watered and compacted with 8-10 tonnes roller so as to achieve minimum dry density of 95% as per IS 2720 (Part 8).




ISSUE R4


Embankment material shall be placed in successive horizontal layers so as to achieve compacted thickness of 200 mm extending to the full width of the embankment including the slopes at the level of the particular layer and 300 mm more on both sides to allow compaction of the full specified section. Before placing the next layer the surface of the underlayer shall be moistened and scarified with pick axes or spades to provide a satisfactory bond with the next layer. The extra loose stuff at the edges shall be trimmed later after completion of the bank work at no extra cost leaving the correct section fully compacted.

When boulders, broken stones and similar hard materials are mixed up with the embankment materials, care shall be taken to see that they are distributed uniformly into the bank and that no hollows are left near them. No stone or hard material shall project above the top of any layer. Each layer of embankment shall be watered, levelled, and compacted as specified before the succeeding layer is placed. The surface of the embankment shall at all times during construction be maintained at such a cross fall as will shed water and prevent ponding.

If the bank materials contains less than the optimum moisture, water shall be added to the loose layers of the embankment to bring the moisture uniformly upto requirement. If the material contains more than the required moisture it shall be allowed to dry until the moisture is reduced to the required extent.

The moistened/dried loose layers shall be compacted with a vibratory roller of 80 to 100 kN static weight with plain or pad foot drum or heavy pneumatic tired roller. The roller shall pass at least twice over the same area, once in the forward move and the second time in backward move. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted to achieve minimum dry density of 95% as per IS 2720 (Part 8).

To allow for subsequent settlement the finished level of the embankment shall be kept higher than the specified level by one centimetre for every metre of the height of the bank.

Embankment shall be finished and dressed smooth and even to conform to the alignment, levels, cross sections, and dimensions shown on drawings with due allowance for shrinkage. Any damage caused by rain, or any other reason shall be made good in the finishing operation.

Table 12

Density requirement of Embankment and Subgrade materials

Sl. No.

Type of Work Max. Dry Unit Weight tested as per IS 2720 (Part 8)

1. Embankment up to 3m height not subjected to excessive flooding


2. Embankment exceeding 3m height or any height subjected to long periods of inundation


3. Subgrade and earthen shoulders/ verges/ backfill





ISSUE R4


Table 13

Compaction requirement of Embankment and Subgrade

Sl. No.

Type of Work/ Material Relative compaction as %ge of max laboratory dry density as per IS 2720 (Part 8)

1. Subgrade and earthen shoulders Not less than 97%

2. Embankment Not less than 95%

3. Expansive clays

a) Subgrade and 500mm portion below Not allowed

b) Remaining portion of embankment 90% to 95%

5.2.1 MEASUREMENT

Earth embankment/ subgrade construction shall be measured separately by taking cross sections at intervals before and after work and computing volume of earthwork in cum by method of average and areas. The measurement of fill materials from borrow areas shall be the difference between the net quantities of compacted fill and the net quantities brought from road/ drain excavation. It shall be assumed that one cum of material brought from excavation is equivalent to one cum of compacted fill and bulking/ shrinkage shall be ignored. In case the embankment/ subgrade construction is carried out using earth from stacks excavated earlier, the volume of stacked material shall be reduced by 30% to account for voids in the loose fill.

6.0 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE

In general earthwork in subgrade shall conform to TCE.M4-418-01.

Immediately prior to the laying of the soling the subgrade shall be cleaned of all foreign substances, vegetation etc. Any ruts or soft yielding patches that appear shall be corrected and the subgrade dressed off parallel to the finished profile. The camber of subgrade shall conform in shape to that of the finished road surface. Camber boards shall be used to get the required section.

The prepared subgrade shall be lightly sprinkled with water, if necessary, and rolled with power roller of' not less than 10 tonnes, till the soil is evenly consolidated to 95% of Proctor density with 2% variation in optimum moisture content. Roller shall pass minimum 5 runs on the subgrade. Rolling shall commence at the edges and progress towards the centre longitudinally. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. Any undulations in the surface that develop due to rolling shall be made good with approved earth and subgrade rerolled.

7.0 SOLING

Soling shall not be constructed on a wet subgrade.

Unless otherwise specified, the width of the soling shall be 230 mm more on either side than that of the waterbound macadam course and the finished thickness of the soling course shall be 230 mm.




ISSUE R4


The soling stones shall be laid with the largest face downwards and in contact with each other. The stones shall be placed to break joints as far as possible. The height of the soling stone shall be equal to specified thickness of soling.

As the laying of rubble advances the soling shall be hand packed by wedging and packing with 80 mm metal in the joints of the soling and driving them by hammers in place so as to fill the voids as completely as possible. This operation of hand packing shall closely follow the rubble laying. The soling shall be laid and hand packed true to grade and section and these shall be often checked by boning rods, template boards and fish line etc. The grades, sections etc. of the soling shall correspond to those of the surfacing coming on it. The soling thus laid shall be finished by knocking out projecting stones and filling depressions by chips to come up to the grade and camber.

The quality of the 80 mm metal shall be same as specified for the soling and the longest dimension shall not be more than 100 mm and the shortest dimension not less than 50 mm.

The soling after it is properly laid and hand packed including filling of voids with 80 mm metal shall be rolled dry with 10 - 12T power roller to refusal i.e. till the stones in the soling course cease to move under the roller and no more compaction can be achieved. Rolling shall start at the edges and work towards the centre. The roller shall run over the same surface of rolling for at least 8 times till the soling course is well consolidated. The surface shall be checked by templates and in case of unevenness high spots shall be knocked out and depressions filled by spalls and re-compacted fully. Bunds shall be laid along the edges and compacted before starting rolling on soling to prevent spreading of stones.

Gravel shall be spread in thin layers over the above prepared soling surface, swept into the interstices with brooms, watered lightly to assist the filling of voids. Spreading of gravel, sweeping and watering shall continue till the interstices are completely filled. Only enough water shall be sprinkled to force the gravel into the voids at all times and never so much as to soften the subgrade. The process of gravel filling shall be accompanied by dry rolling of soling with a power roller weighing not less than 10 tonnes starting at edge and working towards the centre. The roller shall run over the same surface for at least eight times. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. The surface shall be checked with templates of approved design (to be provided by Contractor) and high and low spots corrected by removing soling and repacking.

7.1 MEASUREMENT

Measurements shall be made for the finished work in square metres of the actual plan area covered with the soling stone. The rate shall cover carrying out works as specified in Clauses 6.0 and 7.1 to 7.7 above and include the cost of all materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in the works.

8.0 GRANULAR SUB-BASE

The subgrade shall be finished as described above prior to laying of sub-base by removing all vegetaion and other extraneous matter, lightly sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled with two passes of 80-100 kN smooth wheeled roller.

The sub-base material of specified grading shall be spread with the help of motor grader having blades with hydraulic controls for maintaining slope and grade.




ISSUE R4


Mixing of aggregates shall be done mechanically by mix-in-place method. Moisture content of loose material shall be checked in accordance to IS 2720 (Part 2) and adjusted by sprinkling of water to maintain it at 1% above or 2% below optimum moisture content as per IS:2720 (Part 8). The material shall be made uniformly wet by use of mechanical mixing equipment.

The spread material shall be rolled immediately after placing using smooth wheeled roller of 80 to 100 kN weight for compacted layer thickness less than 100mm, vibratory roller of 80 to 100 kN static weight with plain drum or pad foot drum or heavy pneumatic tyred roller of 200 to 300 kN weight having tyre pressure of 0.7 MN/m2. Rolling shall commence at lower edge and proceed towards upper edge longitudinally for portions having unidirectional cross fall and superelevation shall commence at the edges and progress towards the centre for portions having cross falls on both sides.

Successive passes of rolling operation shall overlap at least one-third of the track made in preceding pass. Grade and cross fall shall be checked during rolling and high spots or depressions corrected. Speed of roller movement shall not exceed 5km/hour. Rolling shall be continued till density achieved is at least 98% of maximum dry density of the material determined as per IS 2720 (Part 8). The surface shall look well closed, free from movement under compaction equipment and free from compacion planes, ridges, cracks or loose material. All defective areas shall be made good to the full thickness of layer and re-compacted.

9.0 WATER BOUND MACADAM COURSE

The surface over which water bound macadam is to be laid shall be prepared to the specified grade and camber. It shall be made free of dust and other extraneous material. Bituminous wearing course if present shall be completely picked out. Any ruts or soft yielding places shall be corrected in an approved manner and rolled until the layer becomes firm. To prevent the spreading of the coarse aggregate during rolling, if necessary, two parallel mud walls 200 mm wide and of height equal to un-compacted macadam course shall be made along the outer edges of the macadam course having a clear distance between them equal to the width to be metalled.

Sub-base course of specified thickness shall be provided in lieu of a soling course where specified in the Schedule of Quantities. The coarse aggregate for this shall conform to physical requirements as per Table 3 and its grading shall conform to Grading 1 of Table 9 and screenings to Type A of Table 10. The total consolidated thickness of the sub-base course shall be as specified in the Schedule of Quantities/drawings.

Base course of specified thickness shall be provided over a soling course or sub-base course as per the Schedule of Quantities. The coarse aggregate for this shall normally conform to physical requirements as per Table 3 and its grading shall conform to Grading 3 of Table 9 and screenings to Type B of Table 10. The total consolidated thickness of the base course shall be as specified in the Schedule of Quantities/drawings.

Total thickness of sub-base and base shall be as per IRC: 37 (Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements).

The width of the sub-base course shall be 150 mm more on either side than that of the base course.




ISSUE R4


9.1 SPREADING COARSE AGGREGATE

The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the prepared surface by using templates placed across the road about 6m apart in such quantities that the compacted thickness of each layer for sub-base course does not exceed 100 mm for Grading 1 and 75 mm for Grading 2 and 3. Mechanical spreaders shall be used to spread the material uniformly except for inaccessible areas where other approved means may be adopted to achieve specified results.

The spreading shall be done from stockpiles of material dumped previously at site by raking the stacks with rakes so as to leave behind mud and dust or directly from vehicles. In no case shall the aggregate be dumped in heaps directly on the surface prepared to receive the aggregate nor shall hauling over un-compacted or partially compacted sub-grade / soling / sub-base be permitted. No segregation of large or fine aggregates shall be allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no pockets of fine material.

The surface of the aggregates spread shall be carefully checked with templates and all high or low spots remedied by removing or adding aggregate as may be required. The surface shall be checked frequently with a straight edge while spreading and rolling so as to ensure a finished surface as per approved drawings. The coarse aggregate shall not normally be spread in lengths exceeding 3 days average work ahead of the rolling and bonding of the proceeding section.

9.2 ROLLING

After the spreading of the coarse aggregate, rolling shall be started with three wheeled power rollers of 80 to 100 kN capacity or tandem or vibratory roller of approved type of 80 to 100 kN static weight. Except on super-elevated portions where the rolling shall proceed from inner edge to the outer, rolling shall begin from the edges and gradually progress towards the centre. First the edge/edges shall be firmly compacted with roller running forward and backward. The roller shall then move inwards parallel to the centre line of the road, in successive passes uniformly lapping preceding tracks by at least one half width. In case of sub-base course, rolling shall be continued until the coarse aggregate has been thoroughly keyed and forward movement of stones ahead of the roller is no longer visible. In case of base course, rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregates are partially compacted with sufficient void space in them to permit application of screenings. During rolling slight sprinkling of water may be done, if necessary. Rolling shall not be done when the subgrade is soft or yielding or when it causes a wave-like motion in the subgrade or sub-base.

The rolled surface shall be checked transversely and longitudinally with templates and all undulations shall be corrected by loosening the surface, adding or removing necessary amounts of aggregate and re-rolling until the entire surface conforms to desired camber and grade. In no case shall the use of screenings be permitted to make up depressions. Material which gets crushed excessively during compaction or becomes segregated shall be removed and replaced with suitable aggregates. It shall be ensured that shoulders are also built-up simultaneously along with water bound macadam course.




ISSUE R4


9.3 APPLICATION OF SCREENINGS

After the coarse aggregate of the sub-base course/ base course has been rolled in accordance with Clause 9.2, screenings to completely fill the interstices shall be applied gradually over the surface. These shall not be damp or wet at the time of application. Dry rolling shall be done while the screenings are being spread so that vibrations of the roller cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse aggregate. The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but be spread uniformly in successive thin layers either by spreading motion of hand shovels or by mechanical spreaders or directly from tipper with suitable grit spreading arrangement. Tipper shall be so driven as not to disturb the coarse aggregate.

Screenings shall be applied at a slow and uniform rate (in three or more applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. This shall be accompanied by dry rolling and brooming with mechanical brooms, hand brooms or both. In no case shall screenings be applied so fast and thick as to form cakes and ridges on the surface in such a manner as would prevent filling of voids or prevent the direct bearing of the roller on the coarse aggregate. These operations shall continue until no more screenings can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregate.

Spreading, rolling and brooming of screenings shall be carried out in only such lengths of the road which could be completed within one day's operation.

9.4 SPRINKLING AND GROUTING

After the screenings have been applied, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, swept and rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screenings into voids and to distribute them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operations shall be continued, with additional screenings applied as necessary, until the coarse aggregate has been thoroughly keyed, well bonded and firmly set in its full depth and a grout has been formed of screenings. Care shall be taken to see that the sub-grade or sub-base or base does not get damaged due to the addition of excessive quantities of water during construction. In case the subgrade or sub-base gets damaged, the Contractor shall, without additional compensation rectify the damaged portion.

9.5 APPLICATION OF BINDING MATERIAL

After the application of screenings over the surface of sub-base course / base course, in accordance with Clauses 9.3 and 9.4, the binding material where it is required to be used (See Clause 4.7) shall be applied successively in two or more thin layers at a slow and uniform rate, in the same way, as the screenings are applied. After each application, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, the resulting slurry swept in with hand brooms or mechanical brooms to fill the voids properly and rolled, during which water shall be applied to the wheels of the rollers, if necessary, to wash down the binding material sticking to them. These operations shall continue until the resulting slurry after filling of voids, forms a wave ahead of the wheels of the moving roller.

9.6 SETTING AND DRYING

After the final compaction of sub-base course / base course, the same shall be allowed to dry overnight. Next morning hungry spots shall be filled with screenings or binding material as directed, lightly sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall be allowed on the road until the base course has set.




ISSUE R4


The compacted water bound macadam course should be allowed to completely dry and set before the next pavement course is laid over it.

9.7 MULTIPLE LAYERED COURSE

When the total compacted thickness of the water bound macadam course is a multiple of 100 mm/ 75 mm, it shall be constructed in layers. Each layer shall be constructed as per all the operations described in the above Clauses 9.1 to 9.6. The same degree of quality control and refinement shall be used for constructing each layer.

9.8 MEASUREMENTS AND RATES

The measurements shall be made for the finished work in position in cubic metres. Length and width shall be measured correct to a cm. for the water bound macadam surface.

The rates shall cover carrying out works as specified above and include the cost of all materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in the works.

10.0 WET MIX MACADAM COURSE

The work shall consist of laying and compacting clean, crushed, graded aggregate and granular material, premixed with water, to a dense mass on a prepared subgrade/ sub-base/ base or existing pavement as the case may be in accordance with specifications. The material shall be laid in one or more layers as necessary to lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the approved drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

The thickness of a single compacted Wet Mix Macadam (WMM) layer shall not be less than 75mm. When vibrating or other approved types of compacting equipment are used, the compacted depth of a single layer of sub-base course may be increased to 200mm upon approval of the engineer.

The preparation of the base course shall be similar to that for Water Bound Macadam course.

10.1 PREPARATION OF MIX

Wet Mix macadam shall be prepared in an approved mixing plant of suitable capacity having provision for controlled addition and forced mixing arrangement like pugmill or pan type mixer of concrete batching plant. For small quantity of wet mix work, Engineer may permit the mixing to be done in concrete mixers.

Optimum moisture content shall be determined in accordance with IS 2720 (Part-8) after replacing the aggregate fraction retained on 22.4mm sieve with material of 4.75mm to 22.4mm size. The mixed material should be uniformly wet and no segregation is permitted.

10.2 SPREADING OF MIX

Immediately after mixing, the aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the prepared subgrade/ sub-base/ base in requisite quantities. In no case should these be dumped in heaps directly over the area where these are to be laid nor hauled over a partly completed stretch.

The mix may be spread either by a paver finisher or motor grader or manually for portions where mechanical spreading cannot be used. The blades of motor spreader shall have hydraulic controls for adjustment to achieve specified slope




ISSUE R4


and grade. The paver finisher shall be self-propelled having loading hoppers with distribution mechanism, tamping and vibrating arrangement for initial compaction to the layer as it is spread without rutting or marring the profile and control mechanism to ensure that the finished surface is free from blemishes.

The surface of aggregates shall be carefully checked with templates and all high or low spots remedied by removing or adding aggregate. The layer may be tested by depth blocks during construction. No segregation of larger and fine particles should be allowed. The aggregates as spread should be of uniform gradation with no pockets of fine materials.

10.3 COMPACTION

After the mix has been laid to the required thickness, grade and camber, this shall be uniformly compacted to full depth with suitable roller. If the thickness of single compacted layer does not exceed 100mm, a smooth wheeled roller of 80 to 100 kN weight may be used. For compacted single layer up to 200mm, the compaction shall be done with vibratory roller of 80 to 100 kN static weight. The speed of roller shall not exceed 5 km per hour.

In portions having unidirectional camber/ super-elevation, rolling shall commence from the lower edge and progress gradually towards the upper edge. Thereafter, roller should progress parallel to the centreline of the road, uniformly over-lapping each preceding track by at least one-third width until the entire surface has been rolled. Alternate trips of the roller shall be terminated in stops at least 1m away from any preceding stop.

In portion having camber, rolling should begin at the edge with the roller running forward and backward until the edges have been firmly compacted. The roller shall then progress gradually towards the centre parallel to the centre line of the road uniformly overlapping each of the preceding tracks by at least one-third width until the entire surface has been rolled.

Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing of the direction of a roller or from any other cause shall be corrected at once and made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Along forms, kerbs, walls or other places not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or a plate compactor. Skin patching of an area without scarifying the surface to permit proper bonding of the added material shall not be permitted.

Rolling should not be done when the subgrade is soft or yielding or when it causes a wave like motion in the sub-base/ base course or subgrade. If irregularities develop during rolling which exceed 12mm when tested with a 3 metre straight edge, the surface should be loosened and premixed material added to achieve a uniform surface conforming to the desired grade and camber. In no case should the use of unmixed material be permitted to make up the depressions.

Rolling shall be continued till the density achieved is at least 98% of the maximum dry density for the material as determined according to IS 2720 (Part-8).

After completion, the surface of any finished layer shall be well-closed, free from movement under compaction equipment or any compaction planes, ridges, cracks




ISSUE R4


and loose material. All loose, segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be made good to the full thickness of the layer and re-compacted.

10.4 SETTING AND DRYING

After the final compaction of the wet mix macadam course, the same shall be allowed to dry for 24 hours.

10.5 RECTIFICATION OF SURFACE IRREGULARITY

Where the surface irregularity exceeds acceptable tolerance limits or the course is defective due to subgrade soil getting mixed with the aggregates, the full thickness of the layer shall be scarified over the affected area, reshaped with added premixed material or removed and replaced with fresh premixed material and re-compacted. The area treated shall not be less than 5 metre long and 2 metre wide. In no case shall depressions be filled up with unmixed or ungraded material or fines.

10.6 MEASUREMENTS AND RATES

The measurements shall be made for the finished work in position in cubic metres.

The rates shall cover carrying out works as specified above and include the cost of all materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in the works.

11.0 BITUMINOUS MACADAM

This work shall consist of constructing in a single course of 50 to 100 mm thickness or in multiple courses of compacted crushed aggregates premixed with a bituminous binder on a previously prepared base.

11. MATERIALS

11.1.1 BITUMEN

This shall be paving bitumen of suitable viscosity grade within the range as per IS 73. Requirement of paving bitumen shall be as per Table 1 of IS 73.

Grade Suitable for 7 day average maximum air temperature

VG 10 < 30

VG 20 30 – 38

VG 30 38 – 45

VG 40 > 45

The actual grade of bitumen to be used shall be as indicated in Table 14.

11.1.2 COARSE AGGREGATE

It shall be crushed material retained on 2.36 mm (No. 8 ASTM) sieve and shall be crushed stone or gravel (shingle) and satisfy the physical requirements set forth in Table 4. They shall be clean, hard and durable, of cubical shape, free from dust and soft or friable matter, organic or other deleterious matter. Aggregates shall be tested for stripping and if found to have poor affinity for bitumen shall be treated with approved anti-stripping agents without additional payment. Where crushed gravel is proposed as aggregate, not less than 90% by weight of the crushed material retained on 4.75mm sieve shall have at least two fractured surfaces.




ISSUE R4


11.1.3 FINE AGGREGATES

The fine aggregates shall be the fraction passing 2.36 mm sieve and retained on 75 micron sieve consisting of crusher run screenings, natural sand or mixture of both. These shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated, dry and free form any injurious, soft or flaky pieces and organic or deleterious substances.

11.1.4 AGGREGATE GRADING AND BINDER CONTENT

The combined aggregate grading shall fall within limits shown in Table 14. The type and quantity of bitumen, and appropriate thickness, are also indicated for each mixture type.

11.1.5 PROPORTIONING OF MATERIAL

The aggregates shall be proportioned and blended to produce a uniform mixture complying with requirement of Table 14. The binder content shall be within a tolerance of ±0.3% by weight of total mixture when individual specimens are taken for quality control tests in accordance.

Table 14

Composition of Bituminous Macadam

Mix designation Grading – 1 Grading – 2

Nominal aggregate size 40mm 19mm

Layer thickness 80 – 100mm 50 – 75mm

IS Sieve (mm) Cumulative % weight of total aggregate passing

45 100

37.5 90 – 100

26.5 75 – 100 100

19 - 90 – 100

13.2 35 – 61 56 – 88

4.75 13 – 22 16 – 36

2.36 4 – 19 4 – 19

0.3 2 – 10 2 – 10

0.075 0 - 8 0 - 8

Bitumen content, % by weight of total mixture

3.3 (*) 3.4 (*)

(*) Corresponding to aggregate specific gravity of gravity of 2.7; reduce proportionately for specific gravity less than 2.7 reduce bitumen content. Bitumen content to be lowered by 0.5% in regions with minimum daily temperature <30OC or lowest daily temperature <-10OC

11.2 PREPARATION OF BASE

The base on which bituminous macadam is to be laid shall be prepared, shaped and compacted to the required profile. Where the existing surface is granular, all loose materials shall be removed, and the surface lightly watered for receiving the profile corrective course as a separate granular course. The material used shall




ISSUE R4


be coarse aggregate salvaged from the scarification of the existing granular base course supplemented by fresh aggregate and screenings. Profile corrective course for correcting existing pavement profile shall be laid in accordance with drawings as required. The type of material for profile correcting course shall be of same specification as that of the overlay/ strengthening course. Where the profile corrective course of bituminous material is to be laid over existing granular surface, the latter shall be primed with bitumen emulsion complying with IS 8887.

The surface finish of all granular layers on which bituminous works are to be placed be free from dust, capable of being swept by mechanical broom after removal of non-integral loose material and without shedding significant quantities of material and dust removed by air jet or washing.

Where existing bituminous layer is to be removed to specified width, it shall be without undue disturbance to the underlying layer after removal of loose material, the underlying layer shall be suitably reworked and compacted to line and level. After supplementing the base material with suitable fresh stone, the compacted finished surface shall be primed with bitumen emulsion complying with IS 8887.

11.3 TACK COAT

This comprises of application of a single coat of low viscosity liquid bituminous material. The binder shall be bitumen emulsion complying with IS 8887. Bituminous material shall not be applied to wet surface or during a dust storm or when the weather is foggy, rainy or windy or when shade temperature is less than 10OC. The tack coat distributor shall be a self-propelled or towed bitumen pressure sprayer, equipped for spraying the material uniformly. Hand held pressure sprayer shall be used for inaccessible areas or in narrow strips. Rate of application of tack coat shall be as follows:

Table 15

Rate of Application of Tack Coat

Sl. No.

Type of Surface Quantity of liquid bitumen in kg/sqm

i) Bituminous surfaces 0.20 to 0.30

ii) Granular surfaces treated with primer 0.25 to 0.30

iii) Cement concrete pavement 0.30 to 0.35

11.4 PREPARATION AND TRANSPORTATION OF MIX AND LAYING

Hot mix plant of adequate capacity and capable of producing a proper and uniform quality mix with thoroughly coated aggregates shall be used for preparing the mix. Appropriate mixing temperatures are indicated in Table-16. At no time shall the difference in temperature between the aggregate and binder exceed 14o C. In order to ensure uniform quality of the mix and better coating of aggregates, the hot mix plant shall be calibrated from time to time. In a continuous mixing plant, laboratory analysis shall be used to establish that the cold feed combined grading is within limits. The bitumen and filler content shall be derived using this combined grading.




ISSUE R4


Table 16

Manufacturing and Rolling Temperatures

Bitumen Viscosity

Grade

Bitumen Mixing (oC)

Aggergate Mixing (oC)

Mixed Material (oC)

Laying (oC)

Rolling* (oC)

VG-40 160-170 160-175 160-170 150 min. 100 min.

VG-30 150-165 150-170 150-165 140 min. 90 min.

VG-20 145-165 145-170 145-165 135 min. 85 min.

VG-10 140-160 140-165 140-160 130 min. 80 min.

(*) Rolling must be completed before the mat cools down to these minimum temperatures

Bituminous materials shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the point of use in suitable clean insulated and covered tippler vehicles. Thin coating of diesel or lubricating oil may be applied to the interior of the vehicle to prevent sticking and facilitate discharge of material with approval of Engineer.

The surface shall be cleaned of all loose and extraneous matter by means of a mechanical broom or other approved equipment/ method. The dust and loose matter shall be removed by use of high pressure air jet.

The hot mix shall be spread by means of a self-propelled mechanical paver with suitable screeds capable of spreading, tamping and finishing the mix to specified lines and levels to a thickness sufficient to achieve, after rolling, the specified thickness. The travel rate of the paver and its method of operations shall be adjusted to ensure an even and uniform flow of material across the screed, free from dragging, tearing and segregation of material. Temperature of the mix at the time of laying shall be in the range given in Table 16. In restricted locations and in narrow widths where available equipment cannot be operated in the opinion of the Engineer, he may permit manual laying of the mix using hand tools by experienced staff.

Longitudinal joints and edges shall be constructed true to the delineating lines parallel to the centre line of the road. Longitudinal joints shall be offset by at least 150 mm from those in the tack coat. All joints shall be cut vertical to the full thickness of the previously laid mix and the surface painted with hot bitumen before placing fresh material. When laying binder course or wearing course approaching and expansion joint of a structure, machine laying shall stop 300mm short of the joint and the remaining portion shall be laid manually.

Laying shall be suspended while free-standing water is present on the surface to be covered, or during rain, fog and dust storms. After rain the surface shall be blown off with high pressure air jet to remove excess moisture or left to dry before laying. Laying of bituminous mixtures shall not be carried out when surface temperature is less than 10oC or when wind speed exceeds 40km/ hour at 2m height.

11.5 COMPACTION

Immediately after the spreading of mix it shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a set of rollers moving at a speed not more than 5 km per hour. The initial or




ISSUE R4


break down rolling shall be with 8-10 tonnes dead weight smooth-wheeled rollers. Intermediate rolling shall be done with 8 – 10 tonnes dead weight vibratory roller or with a pneumatic tired roller of 12 – 15 tonnes weight having nine wheels and tire pressure of at least 5.6kg/ sqcm. The finish rolling shall be done with 6 - 8 tonnes smooth wheeled tandem rollers.

Rolling shall be done in longitudinal direction with driven rolls nearest the paver. The roller shall first compact material adjacent to joints and then work from the lower to the upper side of the layer, overlapping on successive passes by a least one-third of the width of the rear roll or, in case of pneumatic tired roller a minimum nominal width of 300mm. Rolling of the longitudinal joints shall be done immediately behind the paving operation. After this, rolling shall commence at the edges and progress towards the centre longitudinally. On super-elevated and unidirectional cambered portions rolling shall progress from the lower to the upper edge parallel to the centre line of the pavement. Rolling shall continue till mix is thoroughly compacted and all the roller marks have been removed from the surface and there is no movement under the roller.

The joints and edges shall be rolled with 8 to 12 ton three wheeled roller. Any high spots or depressions which become apparent shall be corrected by addition or removal of mix material. The wheels of the roller shall be moistened with water from spray to prevent the mix sticking to the wheels while rolling; moisture should only be sufficient to prevent the mixture adhering to the wheels and water should not stand on the partially compacted pavement.

11.6 PROTECTION OF THE LAYER

The bituminous macadam shall be covered with the next pavement course or wearing course within maximum of forty eight hours. In case of delay by contractor, it shall be covered with seal coat at no additional expense.

11.7 MEASUREMENT

Bituminous macadam shall be measured as finished work in cum or by weight in metric tonnes where used as regulating course or in sqm at specified thickness as indicated in the contract or specified in drawings.

12.0 DENSE GRADED BITUMINOUS MACADAM

This work shall consist of constructing in a single course of 50 to 100 mm thickness or in multiple courses Dense graded Bituminous Macadam (DBM) on a previously prepared base or sub-base. DBM is primarily used in base/ binder and profile corrective courses.

12.1 MATERIALS

12.1.1 BITUMEN

This shall be paving bitumen of suitable penetration grade complying with IS 73. The actual grade of bitumen to be used shall be as indicated in Table 17.


It shall be crushed material retained on 2.36 mm (No. 8 ASTM) sieve and shall be crushed stone or gravel (shingle) and satisfy the physical requirements set forth in Table 5. They shall be clean, hard and durable, of cubical shape, free from dust and soft or friable matter, organic or other deleterious matter. Aggregates shall be




ISSUE R4


tested for stripping and if found to have poor affinity for bitumen shall be treated with approved anti-stripping agents without additional payment. Where crushed gravel is proposed as aggregate, not less than 90% by weight of the crushed material retained on 4.75mm sieve shall have at least two fractured surfaces.


The fine aggregates shall be the fraction passing 2.36 mm sieve and retained on 75 micron sieve consisting of crusher run screenings, natural sand or mixture of both. These shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated, dry and free form any injurious, soft or flaky pieces and organic or deleterious substances. The fine aggregate shall have a sand equivalent value of not less than 50 when tested in accordance with the requirement of IS 2720 (Part 37).

12.1.4 FILLER

Filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust (having a Plasticity Index not greater than 4), hydrated lime or cement approved by the Engineer and free from organic impurities. Grading limits of filler shall be as per Table 18. When the coarse aggregate is gravel, 2% by weight of total aggregate shall be OPC or hydrated lime and the percentage of fine aggregate reduced accordingly. For limestone aggregate, cement/ lime is not required. Where the aggregates fail to meet the requirement of water sensitivity test of Table 5, hydrated lime at 2% by weight of total aggregate shall be added by the contractor without additional cost.


The combined aggregate grading shall fall within limits shown in Table 17. The type and quantity of bitumen, and appropriate thickness, are also indicated for each mixture type.

12.1.6 MIX DESIGN

The aggregates shall be proportioned and blended to produce a uniform mixture complying with requirement of Table 17. The mix shall in addition meet the requirements of Table 19. Binder content shall be optimized as described the Asphalt Institute Manual AS-2 to achieve the requirements of mixture in table 15. The contractor shall ensure that the job mix formula is based on true representative sample of the materials actually to be used in the work. Permissible variations in the actual mix from approved job mix formula are specified in Table 19.

Table 17

Composition of Dense graded Bituminous Macadam pavement layers


Nominal aggregate size 37.5mm 26.5mm



45 100

37.5 95 – 100 100

26.5 63 – 93 90 – 100




ISSUE R4



Nominal aggregate size 37.5mm 26.5mm



19 - 71 – 95

13.2 55 – 75 56 – 80

9.5 - -

4.75 38 – 54 38 – 54

2.36 28 – 42 28 – 42

1.18 - -

0.6 - -

0.3 7 – 21 7 – 21

0.15 - -

0.075 2 - 8 2 - 8


Min 4.0 (*) Min. 4.5 (*)


Table 18

Grading requirements for Mineral Filler

IS Sieve (mm) Cumulative % passing by weight of total aggregate

0.6 100

0.3 95 – 100

0.075 85 – 100




ISSUE R4


Table 19

Requirements for Dense graded Bituminous Macadam

Properties Viscosity Grade Paving Bitumen

Modified bitumen Test Method

Hot climate Cold climate

Compaction level

75 blows on each face of the specimen

Minimum stability (kN at 60OC)

9.0 12.0 10.0 AASHTO T245

Marshall flow (mm)

2 – 4 2.5 – 4 3.5 – 5 AASHTO T245

Marshall Quotient (Stability/Flow)

2 – 5 2.5 – 5 MS-2 & ASTM D2041

% air voids 3 – 5

% Voids Filled with Bitumen (VFB)

65 – 75

Coating of aggregate particle

95% minimum IS 6241

Tensile strength ratio

80% minimum AASHTO T283

% Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA)

Minimum % Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA) are set out in Table 20

Table 20

Minimum %voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA)

Nominal Max. Particle Size (mm) (1)

Min. VMA (%) related to Design Air Voids (%) (2)

3.0 4.0 5.0

26.5 11.0 12.0 13.0

37.5 10.0 11.0 12.0

(1) Nominal maximum particle size is one size larger than the first sieve to retain more than 10%

(2) Interpolate VMA for intermediate values of VFB




ISSUE R4


Table 21

Permissible variations from the Job Mix formula

Description Permissible variation

Aggregate passing 19mm or larger ± 8%

Aggregate passing 13.2mm, 9.5mm ± 7%

Aggregate passing 4.75mm ± 6%

Aggregate passing 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 0.6mm ± 5%



Binder content ± 0.3%

Mixing temperature ± 10oC


The methodology for preparation of base is similar to the process described in section 11.2 for laying of Bituminous Macadam.

12.3 PRIME COAT

Prime coat shall be applied if DBM is to be laid on non-bituminous surface. The work shall consist of application of single coat of low viscosity liquid bituminous material to a porous granular surface.

The primer shall be bitumen emulsion SS1 grade complying with the requirements of IS 8887 or medium curing cutback bitumen conforming to IS 217. Guidance on rate of spray are given in Table 22.

Table 22

Quantity for various types of granular surfaces

Type of Surface Rate of spray (kg/sqm)

Bitumen Emulsion Cutback Bitumen

WMM/ WBM 0.7 – 1.0 0.6 – 0.9

Stabilized soil bases/ Crushed run Macadam

0.9 – 1.2 0.9 – 1.2

The primer shall be applied by a self propelled or towed bitumen pressure sprayer to spray uniformly at specified rates and temperatures. Hand spraying shall be permitted by the Engineer for small areas inaccessible to the sprayer or in narrow strips. The road surface shall be carefully swept clean of dust and loose particles and surface shall be kept slightly moist till application of primer. The primed surface shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours or till such time to allow all volatiles to evaporate before any subsequent surface treatment is laid. Any unabsorbed primer shall be blotted with an application of sand.

12.4 TACK COAT

The application of tack coat shall be carried out in similar manner as described in section 11.3.




ISSUE R4



The preparation and transportation of mix and laying operation shall be carried out in similar manner as described in section 11.4.

12.6 COMPACTION

The procedure for compaction and rolling of the mix placed shall be carried out in similar manner as described in section 11.5. If required, laying trials shall be carried out to further adjust the final laying process with approval of the Engineer.

12.7 MEASUREMENT

Dense graded Bituminous macadam shall be measured as finished work in cum or by weight in metric tonnes or in sqm at specified thickness as indicated in the contract or specified in drawings.

13.0 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE

This work shall consist of constructing in a single course or in multiple courses bituminous concrete on a previously prepared bituminous bound surface. Bituminous concrete is primarily used in wearing and profile corrective courses.

13.1 MATERIALS

13.1.1 BITUMEN

This shall be paving bitumen of suitable penetration grade complying with IS:73. The actual grade of bitumen to be used shall be as indicated in Table 23.


Coarse aggregates shall in general meet the specifications of section 12.1.2 except that the aggregates shall satisfy the physical requirements set forth in Table 6.


Fine aggregates shall in general meet the specifications of section 12.1.3.

13.1.4 FILLER

Filler shall in general meet the specifications of section 12.1.3. Where the aggregates fail to meet the requirement of water sensitivity test of Table 6, hydrated lime at 2% by weight of total aggregate shall be added by the contractor without additional cost.


The combined aggregate grading shall fall within limits shown in Table 23.

13.1.6 MIX DESIGN

The aggregates shall be proportioned and blended to produce a uniform mixture complying with requirement of Table 23. The mix shall in addition meet the requirements of Table 19. Binder content shall be optimized as described the Asphalt Institute Manual AS-2 to achieve the requirements of mixture in Table 21. The contractor shall ensure that the job mix formula is based on true representative sample of the materials actually to be used in the work. Permissible variations in the actual mix from approved job mix formula are specified in Table 19.




ISSUE R4


Table 23

Composition of Bituminous Concrete pavement layers


Nominal aggregate size 19mm 13.2mm



45

37.5

26.5 100

19 90 – 100 100

13.2 59 – 79 90 – 100

9.5 52 – 72 70 – 88

4.75 35 – 55 53 – 71

2.36 28 – 44 42 – 58

1.18 20 – 34 34 – 48

0.6 15 – 27 26 – 38

0.3 10 – 20 18 – 28

0.15 5 – 13 12 – 20

0.075 2 - 8 4 – 10


Min 5.2 (*) Min 5.4 (*)



The methodology for preparation of base is similar to the process described in section 11.2 for laying of Bituminous Macadam.

13.3 TACK COAT



The preparation and transportation of mix and laying operation shall be carried out in similar manner as described in section 11.4.




ISSUE R4


Table 24

Permissible Variations in Plant Mix from the Job Mix formulas

Description Permissible variation

Aggregate passing 19mm or larger ± 7%



Aggregate passing 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 0.6mm ± 4%


Aggregate passing 0.075mm ± 1.5%

Binder content ± 0.3%

Mixing temperature ± 10oC

13.5 COMPACTION

The procedure for compaction and rolling of the mix placed shall be carried out in similar manner as described in section 11.5. If required, laying trials shall be carried out to further adjust the final laying process with approval of the Engineer.

13.6 MEASUREMENT

Bituminous concrete shall be measured as finished work in cum or by weight in metric tonnes or in sqm at specified thickness as indicated in the contract or specified in drawings.

14.0 PREMIXED ASPHALTIC CARPET

This work shall consist of constructing in a single course of 20 mm thick (compacted) graded premixed asphaltic carpet composed of small sized aggregate premixed with a bituminous binder to the following specifications on a previously prepared base, to serve as a wearing coat.

14.1 MATERIALS

14.1.1 BINDER

This shall be paving bitumen of suitable viscosity grade VG-10, VG-20, VG-30, VG-40 as per IS 73.

14.1.2 AGGREGATE

It shall be crushed material retained on 2.36 mm (No. 8 ASTM) sieve and shall be crushed stone or gravel (shingle) and shall be as per Clause 11.1.2 and satisfy the physical requirements set forth in Table 4 except that the water absorption shall be limited to a maximum of 1%. The Polished Stone value measured in accordance with BS 812 (Part 114) shall not be less than 55.

In case of close-graded premix surfacing, the aggregate gradation shall be as per Table 25:




ISSUE R4


Table 25

Aggregate Gradation for close-graded Premix carpet


Type A Type B

13.2 - 100

11.2 100 88 – 100

5.6 52 – 88 31 – 52

2.8 14 – 38 5 – 25

0.090 0 – 5 0 – 5

14.2 PROPORTIONING OF MATERIALS

The materials shall be proportioned in accordance with Table 26:

Table 26

Quantities of materials required for 10 sqm of road surface for 20mm thick Open graded Premix Surfacing using Penetration Bitumen or Cutback

Aggregates

a) Nominal stone size 13.2mm (passing 22.4mm sieve and retained on 11.2mm sieve)

0.18 cum

b) Nominal stone size 11.2mm (passing 13.2mm sieve and retained on 5.6mm sieve)

0.09 cum

Total 0.27 cum

Binder (quantities in terms of straight runs of bitumen)

a) For 0.18 cum of 13.2mm nominal size stone at 52 kg bitumen per cum

9.5 kg

b) For 0.09 cum of 11.2mm nominal size stone at 56 kg bitumen per cum

5.1 kg

Total 14.6 kg

For Type A or Type B close-graded premix carpeting, the total quantity of aggregates shall be 0.27 cum per 10 sqm of area. The quantity of binder used for premixing in terms of straight run bitumen shall be 22.0kg and 19.0kg per 10 sq area for Type A and Type B surfacing respectively.




ISSUE R4


Table 27

Requirements of Asphaltic Concrete Mix

Sr.No. Description Requirements

1. Number of compaction blows, each end of Marshall specimen

50

2. Marshall stability (ASTM Designation-D-1559) determined on Marshal specimen

340 kg (min.)

3. Marshall flow (mm) 2-4

4. Percent voids in mix 3-5

5. Percent voids in mineral aggregate filled with bitumen

75-85

6. Binder content percent by weight of mix 5-7.5

The contractor shall intimate to the Engineer in writing, well in advance of the start of work, the job-mix-formula proposed to be used by him for the work and shall give following details to the Engineer for his approval:-.

i. Source and location of all materials

ii. Proportions of all materials expressed as follows where each is applicable:

Binder as percentage by weight of total mix

Coarse aggregate as percentage by weight of total aggregate including mineral filler

Fine aggregate

Mineral filler

iii. A single definite percentage passing each sieve for the mixed aggregate

iv. The results of the test enumerated in Table 6 as obtained by the Contractor.

v. Test results of physical requirements of aggregates to be used.

Should a change in the source of material be proposed, new job-mix-formula shall be established and got approved by the Engineer before actually using the materials.

14.3 WEATHER AND SEASONAL LIMITATIONS

Laying shall be suspended while free-standing water is present on the surface to be covered, or during rain, fog and dust storms. After rain the surface shall be blown off with high pressure air jet to remove excess moisture or left to dry before laying. Laying of premix carpet shall not be carried out when surface temperature is less than 10oC or when wind speed exceeds 40km/ hour at 2m height.

14.4 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

The underlying surface on which premix carpet is to be laid shall be prepared, shaped and conditioned to the specified lines, grade and cross section in accordance with Clause 12.0, 13.0 or 14.0 as applicable and by repairing all potholes or patches and ruts about a week before the carpet is laid. The potholes shall be drained of water and cut to regular shape with vertical sides. All loose and




ISSUE R4


disintegrated material shall be removed. The potholes shall then be filled either with material of the equivalent specification to the original construction. The area for bituminous construction shall be tacked or primed with cutback or emulsion depending on whether the lower area is bituminous or granular. The sides are to be painted with hot tack coat material. The bituminous mixture shall be placed in layers of loose thickness not more than 100mm. The filling shall be compacted in layers with roller/ plate compactor/ hand roller, heavy hand rammers or approved mechanical tampers. While placing the final layer, the mix shall be spread slightly proud of the surface so that after rolling, the surface shall be flush with the adjoining surface. The surface shall be thoroughly swept and scraped clean and free of dust and other foreign matter.

14.5 TACK COAT


14.6 PREPARATION OF MIX AND LAYING

Hot mix plant of adequate capacity and capable of producing a proper and uniform quality mix shall be used for preparing the mix. The hot mix plant shall have separate dryer arrangement for heating aggregate. The temperature of the binder at the time of mixing shall be in the range of 150oC to 163oC and that of the aggregate in the range of 155oC to 163oC. At no time shall the difference in temperature between the aggregate and binder exceed 14oC. Mixing shall be thorough to ensure that a homogeneous mixture is obtained in which all particles of the aggregate are coated uniformly and the discharge temperature of mix shall be between 130oC to 160oC.

The hot mix shall be immediately transported from the mixer to the point of use in suitable vehicles or hand barrows. The vehicles employed for transport shall be clean and the mix being transported covered in transit if so directed by the Engineer.

The premixed material shall be spread by suitable means to the desired thickness, grades and camber making any due allowance for any extra quantity required to fill up depressions, if any. The camber should be checked by means of camber boards and irregularities levelled out. Excessive use of blades or rakes should be avoided.

14.7 ROLLING

As soon as sufficient length of bituminous material has been laid, rolling shall commence with 8 – 10 tonne rollers, smooth wheel tandem type or other approved equipment. Rolling shall begin at the edge and progress toward the centre longitudinally, except that on super elevated and uni-directional cambered portions, it shall progress from the lower to the upper edge parallel to the centre line of the pavement.

When the roller has passed over the whole area once, any high spots or depressions, which become apparent, shall be corrected by removing or adding premixed materials. Rolling shall then be continued until the entire surface has been rolled and all the roller marks eliminated. In each pass of the roller the preceding track shall be overlapped uniformly by at least 1/3rd width The roller wheels shall be kept damp to prevent the premix from adhering to the wheels. In




ISSUE R4


no case shall fuel/ lubricating oil be used for this purpose. Use of excess water for this purpose shall also be avoided.

Rollers shall not stand on newly laid material. Rolling operations shall be completed in every respect before the temperature of the mix falls below 100oC. Joints along and transverse to the surfacing laid and compacted earlier shall be cut vertically to their full depth so as to expose fresh surface which shall be painted with a thin coat of appropriate binder before the new mix is placed against it.

14.8 SEAL COAT

A seal coat conforming to section 15.0 shall be applied to the surface immediately after laying the surfacing.

14.9 OPENING TO TRAFFIC

No traffic shall be allowed on the road until the seal coat has been laid. After the seal coat is laid, the road may be opened to traffic according to section 15.4.3.

14.10 MEASUREMENTS AND RATE

The measurements shall be taken for the finished work in sq.m for the area covered in plan. The rate shall cover carrying out works as specified above and include the cost of all materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in the works. .

15.0 SEAL COAT

Seal coats are used to provide dust free and smooth riding surface for the road travel. The work shall consist of application of a seal coat sealing the voids in a bituminous surface laid to the specified levels, grade and camber. Seal coat shall be of either of the two types below:

Type A : Liquid seal coat comprising of an application of a layer of bituminous binder followed by a cover of stone chippings to be provided when traffic movement can be restricted till the next day.

Type B : Premixed seal coat comprising of a thin application of fine aggregate premixed with bituminous binder required when road is to be opened for traffic immediately after rolling.

15.1 MATERIALS

15.1.1 BINDER

This shall be VG-10, VG-20, VG-30, VG-40 grade straight run bitumen conforming to IS 73. The actual grade of bitumen to be used shall be decided by the Engineer, appropriate to the region, traffic, rainfall and other environmental conditions, in accordance with MORTH Specifications. The quantity of binder to be utilized, shall be 9.8 kg and 6.8 kg per 10 sq.m. of area for Type A and Type B seal coat respectively.

15.1.2 STONE CHIPS FOR TYPE A SEAL COAT

These shall consist of angular fragments of clean, hard, tough and durable rock of uniform quality throughout. They should be free of elongated or flaky pieces, soft or disintegrated stone, vegetable or other deleterious matter. Stone chippings shall be of 6.7 mm size defined as 100 percent passing through 11.2 mm sieve




ISSUE R4


and retained on 2.36 mm sieve. The quantity used for spreading shall be 0.09 cum per 10 sq.m. The chips shall satisfy the quality requirements in Table 4 except that the upper limit for water absorption value shall be 1%.

15.1.3 FINE AGGREGATE FOR TYPE B SEAL COAT

This fine aggregate shall be sand or fine grit and shall consist of clean, hard, durable, uncoated dry particles and shall be free from dust, soft or flaky material, organic matter or other deleterious substances. The aggregate shall pass 2.36 mm sieve and be retained on 180 micron sieve. The quantity used for premixing shall be 0.06 cu.m. per 10 square metre area.

15.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

The seal coat shall be applied immediately after laying of bituminous course which is required to be sealed. Before application of the seal coat, the surface shall be cleaned free of any dust or other extraneous matter.

15.3 CONSTRUCTION OF TYPE A SEAL COAT

15.3.1 APPLICATION OF BINDER

Binder shall be heated in boilers to 150 C - 163 C, maintained at the temperature and sprayed on the dry surface in a uniform manner with the help of mechanical sprayers. Excessive deposits of binder caused by stopping or starting of the sprayer through leakage or any other reason shall be suitably corrected before the stone chippings are spread.

15.3.2 APPLICATION OF STONE CHIPPINGS

Immediately after the application of the binder, stone chippings in a dry and clean state shall be spread uniformly on the complete surface. If necessary, the surface shall be broomed to ensure uniform spread of chippings. The surface shall be checked by means of a camber board laid across the road and a 3 metre straight edge laid parallel to the centre line of the road and undulations if any, shall be corrected by addition or removal of chippings.

15.3.3 ROLLING

Immediately after the application of the seal coat, the entire surface shall be rolled with a 8 to 10 tonne smooth wheeled steel roller, 8 to 10 tonne static weight vibratory roller, or other approved equipment. Rolling shall commence at the edges and progress towards the centre except in super elevated and unidirectional cambered portions where it shall proceed from lower to the higher edge. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one-third of the track made in the preceding pass. While rolling is in progress, additional material shall be spread by hand in whatever quantities required to make up for irregularities. Rolling shall continue until all material is firmly bedded in the binder and presents a uniform closed surface. Generally five to six passes shall be made for thorough compaction of the surface or as directed by Owner/Engineer. Along kerbs, manholes and at all places not accessible to roller, thorough compaction shall be secured by means of steel rammers or hand rollers. Traffic shall be allowed after 24 hours. After a period of seven days, surplus grit shall be swept and collected and shall be used for binding the spots where bleeding occurs.




ISSUE R4


15.4 CONSTRUCTION OF TYPE B SEAL COAT

15.4.1 PREPARATION OF MIX AND LAYING

The aggregate shall be surface dry and contain not more than 2 percent moisture

before use, and shall be heated to 150 C - 165 C and then loaded into the drum mixer according to the capacity of the mixing drum in the proportion specified. The binder shall be heated in boilers to temperature appropriate to the grade of bitumen and maintained at that temperature. At no time shall the difference in

temperature between the aggregate and binder exceed 14 C. The heated binder shall be drawn from the boiler into a suitable container or in a bucket gauged to show the weight of bitumen in it. The mix shall be immediately transported from the mixing plant to the point of use and spread uniformly on the bituminous surface to be sealed.

15.4.2 ROLLING

As soon as sufficient length has been covered with the premixed material, the surface shall be rolled with 8 to 10 tonne smooth wheeled power rollers. Rolling shall be continued till the premixed material completely seals the voids in bituminous course and a smooth uniform surface is obtained.

15.4.3 OPENING TO TRAFFIC

In case of Type B seal coat, traffic may be allowed soon after final rolling, when the premixed material has cooled down to the surrounding temperature. In case of Type A seal coat, traffic shall not be permitted to run on any newly sealed area until the following day.

15.5 MEASUREMENTS AND RATE

The measurements shall be taken for the finished work in sq.m. for the area covered in plan. The rate shall cover carrying out works as specified above and include the cost of all materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in the works.


16.1 GENERAL

All materials incorporated and all works performed shall be strictly in conformity with the specification requirements. All works shall conform to the lines, grades, cross sections and dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer subject to the permitted tolerances described hereinafter. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of the work in the entire construction within the Contract. He shall, therefore, have his own independent and adequate set-up for ensuring the same.

The Contractor shall carry out quality control tests on the materials and work to the frequency specified. In the absence of clear indications about method and/or frequency of tests for any item, the direction of the Engineer shall be followed. The Contractor shall provide necessary cooperation and assistance in obtaining the samples for test and carrying out the field test as required by the Engineer from time to time. This may include provision of labour, attendance, assistance in packing and despatching and any other assistance considered necessary in connection with the test.




ISSUE R4


For the work of embankment, subgrade and construction of subsequent layer of same or other material over the finished layer shall be done after obtaining permission from the Engineer. Similar permission from the Engineer shall be obtained in respect of all other items of works prior to proceeding with the next stage of construction.

The Contractor shall carry out modification in the procedure of work, if found necessary, as directed by the Engineer during inspection. Works falling short of quality shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own cost as directed by the Engineer.

The Contract rate quoted for various items of works in the Bill of Quantities or the lumpsum amount tendered shall be deemed to be inclusive of all costs of the quality control tests and operations necessary for ensuring quality of the material and work so as to be in conformity with the specification requirement.

16.2 PERMITTED TOLERANCES

16.2.1 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENTS

Horizontal alignments shall be reckoned with respect to the centre line of the carraigeway as shown on the drawings. The edges of the carraigeway as constructed shall be correct within a tolerance of ± 10 mm therefrom. The corresponding tolerance for edges of the roadway and lower layers of pavement shall be ± 25 mm.

16.2.2 SURFACE LEVELS

The levels of the subgrade and different pavement courses as constructed, shall not vary from those calculated with reference to the longitudinal and cross-profile of the road shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer beyond the tolerances mentioned below:

Subgrade + 20 mm/ (-) 20 mm

Sub-base + 10 mm/ (-) 10 mm

Base course

(a) Bituminous concrete + 6 mm/ (-) 6 mm

(b) Granular

(i) Machine laid 10 mm

(ii) Manually laid 15 mm

Wearing course

(a) Machine laid 6 mm

(b) Manually laid 10 mm

Provided, however, that the negative tolerance for wearing course shall not be permitted in conjunction with the positive tolerance for base course if the thickness of the former is thereby reduced by more than 4 mm for bituminous wearing course of thickness ≥ 40mm and 3mm for bituminous wearing course of thickness < 40mm.

For subgrade, sub-base and base courses, the measurements of the surface levels shall be taken on a grid of points placed at 6.25m longitudinally and 3.5m transversely. For any 10 consecutive measurements taken longitudinally or transversely, not more than one measurement shall be permitted to exceed the




ISSUE R4


tolerance above; this one measurement being not in excess of 5mm beyond the permitted tolerance.

For wearing courses, the measurements of the surface levels shall be taken on a grid of points placed at 6.25m along the length and at 0.5m from the edges and centre of the pavement. For the final road surface the above compliance shall be satisfied for all points on any length of pavement.

16.2.3 SURFACE REGULARITY

The surface regularity of completed subgrade, sub-base course, base course and wearing course in the longitudinal and transverse directions shall be within the tolerances indicated in Table 28.

The longitudinal profile shall be checked with a 3 metre long straight edge, at the middle of each traffic lane along a line parallel to the centre line of the road. The transverse profile shall be checked with a set of three camber boards at intervals of 10 metres.

Table 28

Maximum Permitted number of Surface Irregularities

Surfaces of carriageways and paved shoulders

Surfaces of lay-bys, service areas and all bituminous base courses

Irregularity 4 mm 7 mm 4 mm 7 mm

Length (m) 300 75 300 75 300 75 300 75

National Highways/ Expressways (*)

15 9 2 1 40 18 4 2

Roads of lower category (*)

40 18 4 2 60 27 6 3

(*) Category of road shall described in the project contract

The maximum allowable difference between the road surface and underside of a 3m straight edge when placed parallel with or at right angles to centre line of the road at points decided by the Engineer shall be:

For pavement surface 3mm

For bituminous base courses 6 mm

For granular sub-base/ base courses 8mm

For subgrade 15mm

16.2.4 RECTIFICATION

Where the surface irregularity of subgrade and the various courses fall outside the specified tolerances, the Contractor shall be liable to rectify these in the manner described below and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

i. Subgrade

Where the surface is high, it shall be trimmed and suitably compacted. Where the same is low, the deficiency shall be corrected by adding fresh material. The degree of compaction and the type of material to be used shall conform to the sections 5.0 and 6.0.

ii. Granular sub-base




ISSUE R4


The treatment method shall be similar to item (i) above, except that the degree of compaction and the type of material shall conform to the requirements in section 8.0.

iii. Water Bound Macadam/ We Mix Macadam

Where the surface is high or low, the top 75 mm shall be scarified, reshaped with added material as necessary and recompacted as per section 9.0 or section 10.0. The area treated at a place shall not be less than 5 metres long and 2 metres wide.

iv. Bituminous Construction

For bituminous construction other than wearing course, where the surface is low, the deficiency shall be corrected by adding fresh material and recompacting to specifications. Where the surface is high, the full depth of the layer shall be removed and replaced with fresh material and compacted to specifications.

For wearing course, where the surface is high or low, the full depth of the layer shall be removed and replaced with fresh material and compacted to specifications. In all cases where the removal and replacement of a bituminous layer is involved, the area treated shall not be less than 5 metres long and not less than 3.5 m wide.

16.3 TESTS

16.3.1 GENERAL

For ensuring the requisite quality of construction, the materials and works shall be subjected to quality control tests, as described hereinafter. The testing frequencies set forth are the desirable minimum and the Engineer shall have the full authority to increase the frequencies of tests as he may deem necessary to satisfy himself that the materials and works comply with the appropriate specifications.

Various quality control tests shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures indicated in the respective sections of MORTH Specifications. Where no specific testing procedure is mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent accepted engineering practice to the directions of the Engineer.

16.3.2 TESTS ON EARTHWORK FOR EMBANKMENT AND SUBGRADE CONSTRUCTION

a) Borrow material

(i) Sand Content {IS 2720 (Part 4)}: 2 tests per 3000 cu.metres of soil

(ii) Plasticity Test {IS 2720 (Part 5)}: Each type to be tested, 2 tests per 3000 cu. metres of soil.

(iii) Density Test {IS 2720 (Part 8)}: Each soil type to be tested, 2 tests per 3000 cubic metres of soil.

(iv) Deleterious Content Test {IS 2720 (Part 27)}: As and when required by the Engineer.

(v) Moisture Content Test {IS 2720(Part 2)}: Two test for every 250 cubic metres of soil.

(vi) CBR Test on materials to be incorporated in the subgrade on soaked/unsoaked samples {IS 2720 (Part 16)}: One result (average




ISSUE R4


of three tests) for every 3000 m3 at least or closer as and when required by the Engineer.

b) Compaction control

Control shall be exercised by taking at least one set of ten measurements of density for each 3000 square metres of compacted area, or closer as required to yield the minimum number of test results for evaluation of a day’s work on statistical basis. The determination of density shall be in accordance with IS 2720 (Part 28). Tests locations shall be chosen only through random sampling techniques. Control shall not be based on the result of any one test but on the mean value of a set of 10 density determinations. The number of tests in one set of measurements shall be doubled for non-destructive tests as long as it is felt that sufficient control over borrow material and the method of compaction is being exercised. If considerable variations are observed between individual density results, the minimum number of tests in one set of measurement shall be increased. The acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that the mean dry density equals or exceeds the specified density plus

[1.65 – 1.65/(No of samples)0.5]*standard deviation.

However, for earthwork in shoulders (earthen) and in the subgrade, at least one set of ten density measurement shall be taken for every 2000 square metres of the compacted area. In other respects, the control shall be similar to that described earlier.

16.3.3 TESTS ON SUB-BASES AND BASES (EXCLUDING BITUMEN BOUND BASES)

The tests and their frequencies for the different types of bases and sub-bases shall be as given in Table 27. The evaluation of density results for compaction control shall be on lines similar to those set out in Clause 11.3.2(b).

Table 29

Control Tests and Their Frequencies for Sub-Bases

and Bases (Excluding Bitumen Bound Bases)

SI. No.


Test Frequency

1. Granular i. Gradation One test per 400 m3

ii. Atterbergs limit One test per 400 m3

iii. Moisture content prior to compaction

One test per 400 m2

iv. Density of compacted layer

One test per 1000 m2

v. Deleterious constituents As required

vi. C.B.R. As required

2. Water Bound Macadam

i. Aggregate Impact Value One test per 1000 m3 of aggregate

ii. Grading One test per 250 m3 of aggregate




ISSUE R4


SI. No.


Test Frequency

iii. Flakiness Index and Elongation Index

One test per 500 m3 of aggregate

iv. Atterbergs limits of binding material

One test per 50 m3 of binding material

v. Atterbergs limits of portion of aggregate passing 425 micron sieve


3. Wet Mix Macadam

i. Aggregate Impact Value One test per 1000 m3 of aggregate

ii. Grading One test per 200 m3 of aggregate



iv. Atterbergs limits of portion of aggregate passing 425 micron sieve


v. Density of compacted layer

One test per 1000 m2

16.3.4 TESTS ON BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTIONS

The tests and their frequencies for the different types of bituminous works shall be as given in Table 30 hereunder.

Table 30

Control Tests and Their Frequencies For Bituminous Works

Sl. No.


Test Frequency

1. Prime Coat/Tack Coat

i. Quality of binder As per IS:73, IS:217 and IS:8887 as applicable

ii. Binder temperature for a application

At regular close intervals

iii. Rate of spread of binder Three tests per day

2. Seal Coat/Surface

Dressing

i. Quality of binder Same as in Sl. No. 1

ii. Aggregate Impact / Los Angeles Abrasion Value

One test per 200 m3 of aggregate or change in quality


One test per 100 m3of aggregate or change in quality




ISSUE R4


Sl. No.


Test Frequency

iv. Stripping Value of aggregates

Initially, one set of 3 representative specimens for each source of supply.

v. Water absorption of aggregates

Subsequently when warranted by change in the quality of aggregate

vi. Water sensitivity of mix Same as iv and v

vii. Grading of aggregates Two tests per day

viii. Soundness (Magnesium and Sodium Sulphate)

Initially, one for each source of supply; then as warranted by change in the quality of aggregate.

ix. Polished stone value Same as viii

x. Temperature of binder of application

At regular close intervals

xi. Rate of spread of materials

Three tests per day

xii. Percentage of fractured faces of gravels


3. Bituminous Macadam



Same as in Sl. No. 2


One test per 350 m3of aggregate for each source

iv. Stripping value of aggregates


v. Water sensitivity of mix Same as in Sl. No. 2

vi. Grading of aggregates Same as in Sl. No. 2

vii. Water absorption of aggregates




ix. Percentage of fractured faces of gravels


x. Binder content and aggregate grading

Periodic, minimum two tests per day per plant




ISSUE R4


Sl. No.


Test Frequency

xi. Control of temperature of binder and aggregate for mixing and of mix at the time of laying and rolling

At regular close interval

xii. Rate of spread of mixed material

Regular control through checks on the weight of mixed material and layer thickness

xiii. Density of compacted layer

One test per 700 m2 area

4. Dense Bituminous Macadam

i. Quality of binder No. of samples per lot and tests as per IS 73, IRC: SP: 53 or IS 15462


One lot per 350 m3of aggregate for each source or change in quality



iv. Soundness (Magnesium and Sodium Sulphate)

One test for each source or change in quality of aggregates


One test for each source or change in quality of aggregates

vi. Sand equivalent test One test for each source or change in quality of aggregates

vii. Plasticity Index One test for each source or change in quality of aggregates

viii. Polished stone value One test for each source or change in quality of aggregates






ISSUE R4


Sl. No.


Test Frequency

x. Mix grading 1 on individual constituents and mixed aggregate for each 400 tonnes of mix, minimum two tests per day per plant

xi. Stability of Mix tested for stability, flow value, density and void content

3 Marshall tests for each 400 tonnes of mix, minimum two tests per day per plant

xii. Water sensitivity of mix One for each mix type and for every change in quality o mix

xiii. Swell test on the Mix As required

xiv. Control of temperature of binder and aggregate for mixing and of mix at the time of laying and rolling


xv. Control of binder content and mix grading

1 test for each 400 tonnes of mix, minimum two tests per day per plant

xvi. Rate of spread of mixed material

After every 5th truck load

xvii. Density of compacted layer

One test per 700 m2 area

5. Bituminous Concrete








v. Water sensitivity of mix Same as in Sl. No. 4

vi. Grading of aggregates Same as in Sl. No. 4

vii. Water absorption of aggregates







ISSUE R4


Sl. No.


Test Frequency



x. Binder content and aggregate grading


xi. Control of temperature of binder and aggregate for mixing and of mix at the time of laying and rolling




xiii. Hardness number Same as in Sl. No. 4

6. Premix surfacing i. Quality of binder Same as in Sl. No. 1









vi. Water sensitivity of mix Same as in Sl. No. 2

vii. Grading of aggregates Same as in Sl. No. 2



ix. Polished stone value Same as in Sl. No. 2

x. Temperature of binder at application


xi. Binder content Two tests per day per plant


Regular control through checks on layer thickness

xiii. Percentage of fractured faces of gravels


END

TCE.M4-435-09 TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED

SECTION:

WRITE-UP

REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PIPES SHEET 1 OF 11

ISSUE R0


1.0 SCOPE

This Specification covers the requirements for manufacturing, testing,

supplying, lowering, laying, jointing, testing at work sites and

commissioning of Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) pipes, of non

pressure used as branch sewers/drains, lateral sewers/drains and gravity

mains for conveyance of sewage/storm water. Data Sheet- A covers the

specific requirements for the project. Two parts are complementary and

are to be read together for a correct interpretation of the provisions of this

specification. Where the requirements of the two sections conflict, those

of Data Sheet-A shall govern.

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS

The manufacturing, testing, supplying, jointing and testing at work sites of

RCC pipes shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations,

standards and codes. In particular, the following standards, unless

otherwise specified herein, shall be referred. In all cases, the latest

revision of the Codes shall be referred to. If requirements of this

Specification conflict with the requirements of the Codes and standards,

this Specification shall govern.

2.1 MATERIALS

IS: 458 Specification for Concrete Pipes (with and without

Reinforcement).

IS: 3597 Method of Tests for Concrete Pipes.

IS : 269 Ordinary Portland Cement

IS : 12330 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement

IS: 432

Part I & II

Specification for mild steel and medium (tensile steel bars

and hard drawn steel) wires for concrete reinforcement.

IS: 516 Method for test for strength of concrete.

Proprietary rights of the information contained herein belong to Tata Consulting Engineers Limited (TCE). This information is intended to be used for the mentioned purpose/project only. In case of misuse of information and any claim arising thereof, cost and consequence will be on the party misusing the information.


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


IS: 5382 Specification for Rubber Sealing Rings for Gas Mains,

Water mains and Sewers

2.2 CODE OF PRACTICE

IS: 456 Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete.

IS: 783 Code of Practice for Laying of Concrete Pipes.

3.0 GENERAL

Design of RCC pipes, details of reinforcement and the ends of the pipe

shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses of IS: 458. The Class of

the pipe shall be of RCC NP3 conforming to IS 458 unless otherwise

specified in Data Sheet – A.

4.0 MANUFACTURING

4.1 GENERAL

a) The method of manufacture shall be such that the form and the

dimensions of the finished pipes are accurate within the limits specified in

relevant IS: 458. The surfaces and edges of the pipes shall be well defined

and true, and their ends shall be square with the longitudinal axis. The

ends of the pipes shall be further reinforced by an extra ring of

reinforcement to avoid breakage during transportation.

b) The RCC pipes and collars / rubber rings shall be systematically checked

for any manufacturing defects by experienced supervisors so as to

maintain a high standard of quality.

c) Engineer shall at all reasonable times have free access to the places where

the pipes and collars/ rubber rings are manufactured for the purpose of

examining and testing the pipes and rubber rings and of witnessing the test

and manufacturing.

d) All tests specified in Clause 4.6 for Testing of pipes shall be performed

by Supplier / Contractor at his own cost and in presence of Engineer if


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


desired. For this, sufficient notice before testing of the pipes shall be given

to Engineer.

e) If the test is found unsatisfactory, Engineer may reject any or all pipes of

that lot. The decision of Engineer in this matter shall be final and binding

on Contractor and not subject to any arbitration or appeal.

4.2 MATERIALS

For all materials, Factory’s test result and written guarantee document

with necessary analysis data shall be submitted to obtain the approval of

the Engineer before carrying to sites.

4.2.1 Cement

Ordinary Portland cement/Sulphate Resisting Cement as specified in Data

Sheet –A shall be used for the manufacture of RCC pipes and fittings and

shall conform to relevant IS codes. The use of pozzolana as an admixture

to Portland cement shall not be permitted.

4.2.2 Aggregates

Aggregates used for the manufacture of RCC pipes shall conform to IS:

383. The maximum size of aggregate should be 10mm for pipes of

internal diameter 150 to 250mm but should not exceed one third thickness

of the pipe or 20mm, whichever is smaller, for pipes of internal diameter

above 250mm.

4.2.3 Mixing and Curing Water

Water used for mixing of concrete and curing of pipes shall conform to

IS: 456. Water shall be clean, colorless and free from objectionable

quantities of organic matter, alkali, acid, salts, or other impurities that

might reduce the strength, durability or other desirable qualities of

concrete and mortar. Contractor shall submit water quality report before

using it.

4.2.4 Reinforcement

Reinforcement used for the manufacture of the spigot and socket RCC

pipes shall be mild steel Grade I or medium tensile steel bars conforming

to IS: 432 (Part-1) or hard-drawn steel wire conforming to IS: 432 (part-

2). A reinforcement cage for pipes shall be as per relevant requirement of

IS: 458.


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


4.2.5 Concrete

Concrete used for the manufacture of spigot and socket RCC pipes shall

conform to IS: 456. The minimum cement content and minimum

compressive strength of concrete shall be as per relevant requirements of

IS: 458. Compressive strength tests shall be conducted on 15cm cubes in

accordance with the relevant requirements of IS: 456 and IS: 516.

4.3 CURING

Pipes manufactured in compliance with IS: 458 shall be either water cured

or steam cured in accordance with the relevant requirements of IS: 458.

4.4 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

The internal diameter, wall thickness and length of barrel, reinforcement

(longitudinal and spiral), type of ends and minimum clear cover to

reinforcement and strength test requirements shall be as per the relevant

clauses / tables of IS: 458 for different class of pipes.

The tolerances regarding overall length, internal diameter of pipes or

socket and barrel wall thickness shall be as per relevant clauses of IS: 458.

4.5 RCC pipes shall be centrifugally cast / vertically vibrated cast as per Data

Sheet – A .

4.6 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH

a) Pipes shall be straight and free from cracks except that craze cracks may

be permitted. The ends of the pipes shall be square with their longitudinal

axis so that when placed in a straight line in the trench no opening

between ends in contact shall exceed 3mm in pipes upto 600mm diameter

(inclusive), and 6mm in pipes larger than 600mm diameter.

b) The outside and inside surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, dense and

hard, and shall not be coated with cement wash or other preparation unless

otherwise agreed to between Engineer and the manufacturer or supplier.

c) The pipes shall be free from defects resulting from imperfect grading of

the aggregate, mixing or moulding.

d) The pipes shall be free from local dents or bulges greater than 3.00 mm in

depth and extending over a length in any direction greater than twice the

thickness of barrel.


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


e) The deviation from straight in any pipes throughout its effective length,

tested by means of a rigid straight edge parallel to the longitudinal axis of

the pipe shall not exceed, for all diameters, 3 mm for every meter run.

4.7 TESTING

a) All pipes for testing purposes shall be selected at random from the stock

of the manufacturer and shall be such as would not otherwise be rejected

under the criteria of tolerances as mentioned in IS: 458.

b) During manufacture, tests on concrete shall be carried out as per IS: 456.

The manufacturer shall supply, when required to do so by Engineer the

results of compressive tests of concrete cylinders or cubes made from the

concrete used for the pipes.

c) The specimen of pipes for the following tests shall be selected in

accordance with Clause 11 of IS: 458 and tested in accordance with the

methods described in IS: 3597.

i. Hydrostatic test

ii. Three edge bearing test or sand bearing test

iii. Absorption test

iv. Visual Examination

Note: Three edge bearing strength to produce 0.25 mm crack shall be as

per IS:458 for diameter and class of pipes as specified in Data Sheet – A .

4.8 SAMPLING AND INSPECTION

a) In any consignment, all the pipes of same class and size and manufactured

under similar conditions of production shall be grouped together to

constitute a lot. The conformity of a lot to the requirements of this

Specification shall be ascertained on the basis of tests on pipes selected

from it.

b) The number of pipes to be selected from the lot shall be in accordance

with column 1 and 2 of Table 22 of IS: 458.

c) Pipes shall be selected at random. In order to ensure randomness, all the

pipes in the lot may be arranged in a serial order and starting from any

pipe, every “rth

” pipe be selected till the requisite number is obtained, “r”

being the integral part of N/n where “N” is the lot size and “n” is the

sample size.


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


d) The number of pipes selected for testing shall be in accordance with Table

22 of IS: 458 and tested in accordance with methods described in IS:

3597. These pipes shall be selected from pipes that have satisfied the

requirements mentioned in the above clause. All the pipes shall be

inspected for dimensional requirements, finish and deviation from

straight. A pipe failing to satisfy one or more of these requirements shall

be considered as defective.

e) A lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of IS: 458 if

the following conditions are satisfied.

i. The number of defective pipes (those not satisfying one or more of the

requirements for dimensions, finish and deviation from straight) shall not be

more than the permissible number given in Column 3 of Table 22 of IS:

458.

ii. All the pipes tested for various tests as per IS: 3597 shall satisfy

corresponding requirements of the tests.

iii. In case the number of pipes not satisfying requirements of any one or more

tests, one or two further sample of same size shall be selected and tested for

the test or tests in which failure has occurred. All these pipes shall satisfy

the corresponding requirements of the test.

All result of tested data must be prepared by contractor at site so that the

Engineer shall make decision of “fail or pass” at once. All cost for the test

shall be borne by the Contractor.

4.9 TRANSPORT AND HANDLING

4.9.1 Transport

Pipes should be loaded at the works for transportation , either by rail or

by road , in such a way that they are secure and that no movement can

take place on the vehicle during transit . The same care is needed if

pipes are to be transferred from one vehicle to another , however, short

the journey be.

4.9.2 Handling

Unloading should be carried out by means of chain block with shear legs

or crane of adequate capacity , using properly designed slings and

spreader beams or specially designed lifting beams . Slings should be

placed around the circumference of pipe and should not be threaded


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


through the pipe bore as the latter method may damage the jointing

surfaces. For the same reasons, hooks located in the end of the pipes

should not be used .

4.9.3 Stacking

Pipes may be placed directly on the ground provided it is reasonably

level and free from rocks and other projections . Stacking in tiers

permissible provided timber bearer are placed between succeeding tiers

.If pipes to be stacked more than two tiers high , reference should be

made to manufacturer for advice before exceeding the two tiers stacking

4.10 STORAGE

Each stack of pipes shall contain only pipes of same class and size, with

consignment or batch number marked on it with particulars of suppliers

wherever possible. Storage shall be done on firm level and clean ground

and wedges shall be provided at the bottom layer to keep the stack stable.

The stack shall be in pyramid shape or the pipes lay lengthways and

crosswise in alternate layers. The pyramid stack shall be made for smaller

diameter pipes for conserving space in storing them. The height of the

stock shall not exceed 1.5 m.

Rubber rings shall be stored in a clean, cool store away from windows,

boiler, electrical equipment and petrol, oils or other chemicals.

4.11 MARKING

The following information shall be clearly marked on each of pipe:

a) Name of manufacturer or his registered trademark or both

b) Class and size of pipe, and

c) Date of manufacture.

The above information shall be clearly marked on outside only for pipes

up to and including 350 mm internal diameter, and both outside and inside

for pipes above 350 mm internal diameter.


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


5.0 LAYING AND JOINTING

5.1 LAYING

All precautions shall be taken during excavation and laying operations to

guard against possible damage to any existing structure/pipeline of water,

gas, sewage etc. After excavation of trenches, pipes shall not be lowered

unless the dimensions of trenches and bedding work for pipes at the

bottom of the trenches are approved and measured by Engineer. Pipes

shall be carefully lowered in the trenches. Special arrangements such as

cranes, tripods with chain pulley block for lowering the pipes shall be

made by Contractor. In no case pipes shall be dropped. Slings of canvas or

equally non-abrasive material of suitable width or special attachment to fit

the ends of pipes shall be used to lift and lower the pipes. The pipes shall

be inspected for defects and be rung with a light hammer preferably while

suspended to detect cracks. If doubt persists, further confirmation shall be

done by pouring a little kerosene/dye on the inside, of the pipe at the

suspected spot. No sign of kerosene/dye should appear on the outside

surface. Pipes damaged during lowering or aligning shall be rejected by

Engineer.

All the pipes are to be laid perfectly true both in alignment and to gradient

specified and the socket end of the pipe shall face upstream. The laying of

pipes shall always proceed upgrade of a slope. After placing a pipe in the

trench, the spigot end shall be cantered in the socket and the pipe forced

home and aligned to required gradient. The pipes shall be secured in place

with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the socket. Pipes

which do not allow a sufficient and uniform space for joints shall be

removed and replaced with pipes of proper dimensions to ensure such

uniform space. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the

jointing space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends

of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by

Engineer. During the period that the plug is on, the Contractor shall take

proper precautions against floating of the pipe owing to entry of water into

the trench. In case of pipes, with joint to be made with loose collars, the

collars shall be slipped on before the next pipe is laid. The pipes shall be

laid such that the marking on pipes appears at the top of the pipes.


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


5.2 JOINTING

5.2.1 Collar Joint

Jointing of RCC pipes shall be done as per the requirements of following

Specifications and as per the relevant IS. The type of joints shall be

spigot and socket type. After jointing extraneous material if any, shall be

removed from the inside of the pipe and newly made joints shall be

thoroughly cured. In case, rubber sealing rings are used for jointing, these

shall conform to IS: 5382. The pipe joint work must be done neatly and

keep even slope and level for pipe laying works.

5.2.2 Spigot and Socket Joint (Flexible)

The RCC pipe with the rubber ring accurately positioned on the spigot

shall be pushed well home into the socket of the previously laid pipes.

The manufacturer’s instructions shall be used, and the manufacturer’s

instructions shall be deemed to form a part of these Specifications. The

rubber rings shall be lubricated before making the joint and the lubricant

shall be soft soap water or an approved lubricant supplied by the

manufacturer. The socket of RCC pipes shall face up the gradient.

5.2.3 Cleaning of pipes

As soon as a stretch of RCC pipes has been laid complete from manhole

to manhole or for a stretch as directed by Engineer, Contractor shall run

through the pipes both backwards and forwards a double disc or solid or

closed cylinder 75mm less in diameter than the internal diameter of pipes.

The open end of an incomplete stretch of pipe line shall be securely closed

as may be directed by Engineer to prevent entry of mud or slit etc.

If as a result of the removal of any obstruction, Engineer considers that

damages may have been caused to the pipe lines, he shall be entitled to

order the stretch to be tested immediately. Should such test prove

unsatisfactory Contractor shall amend the work and carry out such further

tests as are required by Engineer.

It shall also be ascertained by Contractor that each stretch from manhole

to manhole or the stretch as directed by Engineer is absolutely clear and

without any obstruction by means of visual examination of the interior of

the pipeline suitably enlightened by projected sunlight or otherwise.

5.2.4 Testing at works site

After laying and jointing of RCC pipes is completed the pipe line shall be

tested at work site as per the following Specifications and as directed by

Engineer. All equipment for testing at work site shall be supplied and


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


erected by the Contractor and shall be rectified by him to the full

satisfaction of Engineer. Water used for test shall be removed from pipes

and not released to the excavated trenches.

After the joints have been thoroughly jointed and have been checked by

Engineer and before backfilling the trenches, the entire section of the

sewer shall be proved by Contractor to be water tight by filling in pipes

with water at a constant head of 2.5m above the top of ground level for the

highest pipe in the stretch and heading the water up for the period of one

hour. The testing apparatus used for the purpose shall normally be fixed

on the upstream end and should be got approved by Engineer. Contractor

if required by Engineer shall dewater the excavated pit and keep it dry

during the period of testing. The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes

should be measured by adding water from a measuring vessel at regular

intervals (not more than 1 minute) and noting the quantity of water

required to maintain the original water level. For the approval of this test

the average quantity added should not exceed 1 litre / hour / 100 linear

meters / 10 mm nominal internal diameter. Any leakage including

excessive sweating which causes a drop in the test water level will be

visible and the defective part of the work should be removed and made

good.

All of results of test and inspection data must be prepared by contractor at

site so that the Engineer shall make decision of “fail or pass” at once. All

cost for the inspection shall be borne by the Contractor.

Notes

a) If any damage is caused to the pipeline during the execution of work or

while cleaning / testing the pipeline as specified, Contractor shall be held

responsible for the same and shall replace the damaged pipeline and retest

the same at his own cost to the full satisfaction of Engineer.

b) Water for testing of pipeline shall be arranged by Contractor at his

own cost.

6.0 MEASUREMENT

All RCC pipes shall be measured according to the work actually done and

no allowance will be made for any waste in cutting to the exact length

required. The measurement for pipes shall be in running meter nearest to a

centimeter of length along the centreline of pipes as actually laid at work

site as per drawings and approved by Engineer.


SECTION:

WRITE-UP


ISSUE R0


7.0 PAYMENT

Payment for RCC pipes shall be on running meter basis. The rate quoted

for providing, laying and jointing of RCC pipes shall be deemed to

include the cost of collars/rubber rings, jointing materials, testing and

including cleaning of pipes without excavation.(Excavation will be paid

separately under relevant item).

END

SPEC. NO. TCE.6842A-CV-3000-3005



SHEET i OF i




TCE FORM NO. 329 R6


ISSUE R0


FOR






VOLUME III

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: TITLE

Documents

Transcript of TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION: TITLE